ENom API Reference

eNom API Reference
Using the eNom API
This document contains the reference for all of the

commands supported by eNom's API.
Copyright 2014 eNom, Inc.
No portion of this document may be copied, modified, reproduced, or distributed without
the express written permission of eNom Inc..
eNom API Reference - version 1.0

Last modified: October, 2014
- ii -
Contents
Overview 1
Domains and TLDs 2
Selling and Managing Domains 2
Contents 3
Why sell domain names? 3
Audience for this guide 3
If you use the AddToCart command 3
Help with implementation 3
Domain registration and management 3
Task 1Decide which TLDs to offer 4
Sample query strings: 4
Task 2Set pricing 5
Task 3Choose universal settings 5
Task 4Check domain names 6
Task 5Bill and register domain names 7
Task 6List domain names and their statuses 9
Task 7Retrieve status information 9
Task 8Manage Whois and other contacts 10
Task 9Set name servers 12
Task 10Set host records 13
Task 11Protect domain names from hijacking 15
- iii -
Task 12Renew domain names 16
Task 13Offer DNS Hosting 18
Task 14Transfer domain names in 19
Task 15Transfer domain names away 22
New TLD - Watchlist 23
Usage 23
LIST 24
International Domain Name (IDN) 24
Step 1 - Add domain(s) to a new or existing LIST in a Watchlist 25
Step 2 - Get Watchlist LIST 25
Step 3 - Delete domain(s)/LIST from a Watchlist 25
Agreement Page 26
New TLD - Queue 26
Step 1 - Get Queue information 26
Step 2 - Get Extended Attributes 27
Step 3 - Purchase domain(s) in a Queue 27
Step 4 - Get Queue domains 27
Order history and detail 28
Agreement Page 28
.ASIA Eligibility Requirements 28
Whats changing 28
Timeline and test environment 29
Audience for this document 29
Where the changes apply 29
- iv -
.ASIA-approved countries 30
.AU, .ES and .PE 32
TLD Settings 33
Step 1 - Extended Attributes 33
Step 2 - Purchase 33
Real-time 33
Shopping cart 34
Agreement Pages 34
.CA Business Rules 35
Audience 35
Affected API commands 35
Overview of .ca eligibility requirements and contact types 35
When to use contact names and organization names 37
Source of this information 37
Valid formats and data values for .ca 37
Corporation (Canada or Canadian province or territory) 37
Registrant name format requirements 38
Canadian citizen 38
Permanent resident of Canada 39
Government or government entity in Canada 40
Canadian educational institution 40
Canadian unincorporated association 41
Canadian hospital 42
-v-
Partnership registered in Canada 43
Trade-mark registered in Canada by non-Canadian owner 43
Canadian trade union 44
Canadian political party 45
Canadian library, archive or museum 45
Trust established in Canada 46
Aboriginal Peoples (individuals) indigenous to Canada 46
Aboriginal Peoples (groups) indigenous to Canada 47
Indian Band recognized by the Indian Act of Canada 48
Legal representative of a Canadian citizen or permanent resident 48
Official marks registered in Canada 49
Her Majesty the Queen 50
About valid and invalid contact names 50
Required terms in contact information for non-Individuals 50
Disallowed terms in contact information for Individuals 52
Authorization Information 55
Permitted formats for input values 56
- vi -
Domain Names 56
Email Addresses 56
IP Addresses 56
Postal Codes 56
Telephone and Fax Numbers, and telephone extensions 57
Permitted values for country, province, and state codes 57
Country codes 57
Canadian province codes 66
US state, territory, or region codes 67
.AU, .ES and .PE 69
TLD Settings 70
Real-time 70
Shopping cart 71
Agreement Pages 71
.EU Transfer 72
Schedule 72
Changes 72
SINGLE CALL 72
MULTIPLE CALLS 72
.NU Registrant Requirements 73
What's changing 73
Timeline and test environment 74
Step 1 - Get Extended Attributes 74
Real-time 75
Shopping cart 75
Agreement Pages 76
- vii -
Related commands 76
.AU, .ES and .PE 76
TLD Settings 77
Real-time 77
Shopping cart 78
Agreement Pages 78
Nominet (.UK Registry) System Changes 79
Description 79
Multi-Year Registrations and Renewals 79
Real-Time Response 79
API Real-Time Purchase Sample 80
Get extended attributes 82
.xxx 83
Purchase 84
Preconfigure 85
Get extended attributes 88
Membership 89
.XXX Transfer 91
Description 91
Quick transfer 91
Pre-Configuration method 93
1. TP_CreateOrder 94
2. TP_UpdateOrderDetail 95
3. TP_SubmitOrder 97
API Command Categories 99
Domain Registration 99
Domain RegistrationPremium Domains 99
- viii -
Domain ManagementHost Records 99
Domain ManagementName Servers 100
Domain ManagementContacts 100
Domain ManagementGeneral 100
Domain ManagementMagic Folders 101
Domain Management.tel 101
Domain ManagementWatchlist 101
Domain Management.xxx 101
Domain Renewal 102
Domain Transfer 102
DNS Hosting 102
Domain Services 103
Service ManagementIdentity Protection 103
Service ManagementSSL Certificates 103
Service ManagementTRUSTe Privacy Policy 103
Service ManagementVeriSign Trust Seal 104
Service ManagementGeoTrust Anti-Malware 104
Service ManagementSiteLock 104
Service ManagementRichContent 104
Service ManagementBusiness Listing 104
Service ManagementEmail Services 105
Service ManagementWeb Site Creator 105
Service ManagementgoMobi 105
Account 106
Accounting 106
Shopping Cart 107
Real-Time Purchase 107
Reporting commands 107
Customer Support 108
- ix -
Web Hosting Packages 108
Web Site Creator packages 108
Web Hosting Accounts and Accounting 108
Web contentdirectories and files 109
Domain Headers 109
Host Headers 109
IIS Applications 109
POP3 Email in Web Hosting Packages 109
SQL Database 110
AddBulkDomains 110
Description 110
Constraints 110
Input parameters 110
Returned parameters and values 112
Notes 112
Example 112
Related commands 114
AddContact 114
Description 114
Constraints 115
Notes 116
Example 117
AddDomainFolder 118
Description 118
Constraints 119
-x-
Notes 121
Example 121
AddDomainHeader 122
Description 122
Constraints 123
Notes 124
Example 124
AddHostHeader 125
Description 125
Constraints 126
Notes 127
Example 127
AddToCart 129
Description 129
Constraints 129
Input parameters for domains 130
Input parameters for dot-name 132
Input parameters for ID Protect 133
Input parameters for SSL certificates 134
Input parameters for TRUSTe Privacy Policy 136
- xi -
Input parameters for VeriSign Trust Seal 137
Input parameters for GeoTrust Anti-Malware 138
Input parameters for SiteLock 139
Input parameters for RichContent 140
Input parameters for Business Listing 141
Input parameters for POP Email 142
Input parameters for Email Forwarding and URL Forwarding 144
Input parameters for Instant Reseller 145
Input parameters for Web hosting 146
Input parameters for Web Site Creator 147
Input parameters for goMobi 148
Notes 150
Example 150
AdvancedDomainSearch 151
Description 151
Constraints 152
Notes 158
Example 158
AM_AutoRenew 162
Description 162
Constraints 163
Notes 164
- xii -
Example 164
AM_Configure 165
Description 165
Constraints 165
Notes 167
Example 167
AM_GetAccountDetail 168
Description 168
Constraints 169
Notes 170
Example 170
AM_GetAccounts 172
Description 172
Constraints 172
Notes 174
Example 174
AssignToDomainFolder 176
Description 176
Constraints 177
- xiii -
Notes 179
Example 179
AuthorizeTLD 181
Description 181
Constraints 181
Notes 183
Example 183
AutoRenew 184
Description 184
Constraints 185
Notes 186
Example 186
CalculateAllHostPackagePricing 187
Description 187
Constraints 188
Notes 189
Example 190
- xiv -
CalculateHostPackagePricing 192
Description 192
Constraints 192
Notes 194
Example 195
CancelHostAccount 197
Description 197
Constraints 197
Notes 199
Example 199
CancelOrder 200
Description 200
Constraints 201
Notes 202
Example 202
CertChangeApproverEmail 203
Description 203
Constraints 204
- xv -
Notes 205
Example 205
CertConfigureCert 207
Description 207
Constraints 207
Notes 213
Example 213
CertGetApproverEmail 216
Description 216
Constraints 217
Notes 218
Example 218
CertGetCertDetail 220
Description 220
Constraints 221
Notes 223
Example 223
CertGetCerts 228
Description 228
- xvi -
Constraints 228
Notes 231
Example 231
CertModifyOrder 233
Description 233
Constraints 234
Notes 235
Example 235
CertParseCSR 236
Description 236
Constraints 237
Notes 238
Example 238
CertPurchaseCert 240
Description 240
Constraints 241
Notes 243
Example 243
- xvii -
CertReissueCert 244
Description 244
Constraints 245
Notes 246
Example 246
CertResendApproverEmail 248
Description 248
Constraints 249
Notes 250
Example 250
CertResendFulfillmentEmail 252
Description 252
Constraints 252
Notes 253
Example 253
Check 255
Description 255
Constraints 255
- xviii -
Notes 257
Example 257
CheckLogin 259
Description 259
Constraints 259
Notes 261
Example 262
CheckNSStatus 265
Description 265
Constraints 266
Notes 267
Example 267
CommissionAccount 269
Description 269
Constraints 269
Notes 270
Example 270
Contacts 272
- xix -
Description 272
Constraints 273
Notes 276
Example 276
CreateAccount 278
Description 278
Constraints 278
Notes 283
Example 283
CreateHostAccount 286
Description 286
Constraints 286
Notes 289
Example 289
CreateSubAccount 290
Description 290
Constraints 291
Notes 293
- xx -
Example 293
DeleteAllPOPPaks 295
Description 295
Constraints 295
Notes 296
Example 297
DeleteContact 298
Description 298
Constraints 298
Notes 299
Example 299
DeleteCustomerDefinedData 300
Description 300
Constraints 301
Notes 302
Example 302
DeleteDomainFolder 303
Description 303
Constraints 304
- xxi -
Notes 305
Example 305
DeleteDomainHeader 306
Description 306
Constraints 307
Notes 308
Example 309
DeleteFromCart 310
Description 310
Constraints 310
Notes 311
Example 311
DeleteHostedDomain 313
Description 313
Constraints 313
Notes 314
Example 314
- xxii -
DeleteHostHeader 316
Description 316
Constraints 316
Notes 317
Example 318
DeleteNameServer 319
Description 319
Constraints 319
Notes 320
Example 321
DeletePOP3 322
Description 322
Constraints 322
Notes 323
Example 324
DeletePOPPak 325
Description 325
Constraints 325
- xxiii -
Notes 326
Example 327
DeleteRegistration 328
Description 328
Constraints 328
Notes 329
Example 330
DeleteSubaccount 331
Description 331
Constraints 331
Notes 333
Example 333
DisableFolderApp 334
Description 334
Constraints 335
Notes 336
Example 336
DisableServices 337
Description 337
- xxiv -
Constraints 338
Notes 339
Example 339
EnableFolderApp 340
Description 340
Constraints 341
Notes 342
Example 342
EnableServices 343
Description 343
Constraints 344
Notes 345
Example 345
Extend 346
Description 346
Constraints 347
Notes 350
Example 351
- xxv -
Extend_RGP 352
Description 352
Constraints 353
Notes 354
Example 354
ExtendDomainDNS 356
Description 356
Constraints 356
Notes 360
Example 360
Forwarding 361
Description 361
Constraints 362
Notes 363
Example 363
GetAccountInfo 365
Description 365
Constraints 365
- xxvi -
Notes 366
Example 367
GetAccountPassword 368
Description 368
Constraints 369
Notes 370
Example 370
GetAccountValidation 371
Description 371
Constraints 372
Notes 373
Example 373
GetAddressBook 375
Description 375
Constraints 375
Notes 377
Example 377
GetAgreementPage 380
- xxvii -
Description 380
Constraints 380
Notes 383
Example 383
GetAllAccountInfo 385
Description 385
Constraints 386
Notes 388
Example 388
GetAllDomains 391
Description 391
Constraints 391
Notes 393
Example 393
GetAllHostAccounts 395
Description 395
Constraints 396
Notes 397
- xxviii -
Example 397
GetAllResellerHostPricing 399
Description 399
Constraints 400
Notes 401
Example 402
GetBalance 404
Description 404
Constraints 405
Notes 406
Example 406
GetCartContent 407
Description 407
Constraints 408
Notes 410
Example 410
GetCatchAll 413
Description 413
Constraints 414
- xxix -
Notes 415
Example 415
GetCerts 416
Description 416
Constraints 417
Notes 418
Example 418
GetConfirmationSettings 420
Description 420
Constraints 421
Notes 422
Example 422
GetContacts 424
Description 424
Constraints 424
Notes 427
Example 427
- xxx -
GetCusPreferences 432
Description 432
Constraints 433
Notes 435
Example 436
GetCustomerDefinedData 438
Description 438
Constraints 438
Notes 440
Example 440
GetCustomerPaymentInfo 441
Description 441
Constraints 441
Notes 443
Example 443
GetDNS 444
Description 444
Constraints 445
- xxxi -
Notes 446
Example 446
GetDNSStatus 448
Description 448
Constraints 448
Notes 449
Example 449
GetDomainCount 451
Description 451
Constraints 451
Notes 452
Example 453
GetDomainExp 454
Description 454
Constraints 455
Notes 456
Example 456
GetDomainFolderDetail 458
Description 458
- xxxii -
Constraints 458
Notes 462
Example 463
GetDomainFolderList 467
Description 467
Constraints 468
Notes 469
Example 469
GetDomainHeader 471
Description 471
Constraints 472
Notes 473
Example 473
GetDomainInfo 474
Description 474
Constraints 475
Notes 478
Example 478
- xxxiii -
GetDomainNameID 482
Description 482
Constraints 482
Notes 484
Example 484
GetDomains 485
Description 485
Constraints 485
Notes 488
Example 488
GetDomainServices 490
Description 490
Constraints 491
Notes 492
Example 493
GetDomainSLDTLD 494
Description 494
Constraints 495
- xxxiv -
Notes 496
Example 496
GetDomainSRVHosts 497
Description 497
Constraints 497
Notes 499
Example 499
GetDomainStatus 501
Description 501
Constraints 501
Notes 502
Example 503
GetDomainSubServices 504
Description 504
Constraints 505
Notes 506
Example 506
GetDotNameForwarding 507
- xxxv -
Description 507
Constraints 508
Notes 509
Example 509
GetExpiredDomains 510
Description 510
Constraints 511
Notes Notes 512
Example 512
GetExtAttributes 515
Description 515
Constraints 515
Notes 517
Example 517
GetExtendInfo 519
Description 519
Constraints 520
Notes 522
- xxxvi -
Example 523
GetFilePermissions 525
Description 525
Constraints 526
Notes 527
Example 527
GetForwarding 528
Description 528
Constraints 529
Notes 531
Example 531
GetGlobalChangeStatus 532
Description 532
Constraints 533
Notes 534
Example 534
GetGlobalChangeStatusDetail 537
Description 537
Constraints 538
- xxxvii -
Notes 539
Example 539
GetHomeDomainList 541
Description 541
Constraints 542
Notes 543
Example 543
GetHostAccount 545
Description 545
Constraints 545
Notes 547
Example 548
GetHostAccounts 549
Description 549
Constraints 549
Notes 551
Example 551
- xxxviii -
GetHostHeader 553
Description 553
Constraints 553
Notes 555
Example 555
GetHosts 556
Description 556
Constraints 557
Notes 558
Example 558
GetIDNCodes 560
Description 560
Constraints 561
Notes 562
Example 562
GetIPResolver 563
Description 563
Constraints 564
- xxxix -
Notes 565
Example 565
GetMailHosts 567
Description 567
Constraints 567
Notes 569
Example 569
GetMetaTag 571
Description 571
Constraints 571
Notes 573
Example 573
GetNameSuggestions 574
Description 574
Constraints 574
Notes 577
Example 577
GetNews 578
Description 578
- xl -
Constraints 579
Notes 580
Example 580
GetOrderDetail 581
Description 581
Constraints 582
Notes 584
Example 584
GetOrderList 586
Description 586
Constraints 587
Notes 588
Example 589
GetPasswordBit 591
Description 591
Constraints 591
Notes 592
Example 592
- xli -
GetPOP3 594
Description 594
Constraints 594
Notes 596
Example 596
GetPOPExpirations 600
Description 600
Constraints 601
Notes 602
Example 602
GetPOPForwarding 604
Description 604
Constraints 604
Notes 606
Example 606
GetProductNews 607
Description 607
Constraints 608
- xlii -
Notes 609
Example 609
GetProductSelectionList 610
Description 610
Constraints 610
Notes 611
Example 612
GetRegHosts 614
Description 614
Constraints 614
Notes 615
Example 616
GetRegistrationStatus 618
Description 618
Constraints 619
Notes 620
Example 620
GetRegLock 621
- xliii -
Description 621
Constraints 622
Notes 623
Example 623
GetRenew 625
Description 625
Constraints 625
Notes 627
Example 627
GetReport 628
Description 628
Constraints 629
Notes 631
Example 631
GetResellerHostPricing 632
Description 632
Constraints 633
Notes 635
- xliv -
Example 635
GetResellerInfo 637
Description 637
Constraints 637
Notes 639
Example 639
GetServiceContact 641
Description 641
Constraints 641
Notes 643
Example 643
GetSPFHosts 644
Description 644
Constraints 645
Notes 646
Example 646
GetStorageUsage 648
Description 648
Constraints 648
- xlv -
Notes 649
Example 650
GetSubAccountDetails 651
Description 651
Constraints 651
Notes 655
Example 655
GetSubAccountPassword 659
Description 659
Constraints 659
Notes 660
Example 660
GetSubAccounts 662
Description 662
Constraints 662
Notes 663
Example 664
- xlvi -
GetSubaccountsDetailList 666
Description 666
Constraints 666
Notes 668
Example 668
GetTLDDetails 670
Description 670
Constraints 671
Notes 674
Example 674
GetTLDList 677
Description 677
Constraints 677
Notes 678
Example 679
GetTransHistory 680
Description 680
Constraints 681
Notes 684
- xlvii -
Example 684
GetWebHostingAll 686
Description 686
Constraints 687
Notes 688
Example 688
GetWhoisContact 690
Description 690
Constraints 691
Notes 692
Example 693
GetWPPSInfo 696
Description 696
Constraints 696
Notes 698
Example 698
GM_CancelSubscription 700
Description 700
Constraints 701
- xlviii -
Notes 702
Example 703
GM_CheckDomain 704
Description 704
Constraints 705
Notes 706
Example 707
GM_GetCancelReasons 708
Description 708
Constraints 709
Notes 710
Example 710
GM_GetControlPanelLoginURL 712
Description 712
Constraints 713
Notes 714
Example 714
- xlix -
GM_GetRedirectScript 716
Description 716
Constraints 717
Notes 718
Example 718
GM_GetStatuses 720
Description 720
Constraints 720
Notes 721
Example 721
GM_GetSubscriptionDetails 723
Description 723
Constraints 724
Notes 725
Example 725
GM_GetSubscriptions 727
Description 727
Constraints 727
-l-
Notes 729
Example 729
GM_ReactivateSubscription 732
Description 732
Constraints 733
Notes 734
Example 734
GM_RenewSubscription 736
Description 736
Constraints 736
Notes 737
Example 738
GM_UpdateBillingCycle 740
Description 740
Constraints 740
Notes 741
Example 742
GM_UpdateSubscriptionDetails 743
Description 743
- li -
Constraints 744
Notes 745
Example 746
HostPackageDefine 747
Description 747
Constraints 748
Notes 750
Example 750
HostPackageDelete 752
Description 752
Constraints 752
Notes 753
Example 754
HostPackageModify 755
Description 755
Constraints 755
Notes 757
Example 758
- lii -
HostPackageView 759
Description 759
Constraints 760
Notes 762
Example 762
HostParkingPage 764
Description 764
Constraints 765
Notes 766
Example 766
InsertNewOrder 767
Description 767
Constraints 768
Notes 769
Example 770
IsFolderEnabled 771
Description 771
Constraints 771
- liii -
Notes 773
Example 773
ListDomainHeaders 774
Description 774
Constraints 774
Notes 776
Example 776
ListHostHeaders 778
Description 778
Constraints 778
Notes 780
Example 780
ListWebFiles 781
Description 781
Constraints 782
Notes 783
Example 783
MetaBaseGetValue 785
- liv -
Description 785
Constraints 786
Notes 787
Example 787
MetaBaseSetValue 789
Description 789
Constraints 789
Notes 791
Example 791
ModifyDomainHeader 792
Description 792
Constraints 793
Notes 794
Example 794
ModifyHostHeader 796
Description 796
Constraints 796
Notes 797
- lv -
Example 798
ModifyNS 799
Description 799
Constraints 800
Notes 801
Example 801
ModifyNSHosting 802
Description 802
Constraints 803
Notes 804
Example 804
ModifyPOP3 805
Description 805
Constraints 806
Notes 807
Example 808
MySQL_GetDBInfo 809
Description 809
Constraints 809
- lvi -
Notes 811
Example 811
NameSpinner 813
Description 813
Constraints 813
Notes 816
Example 816
NM_CancelOrder 818
Description 818
Constraints 818
Notes 819
Example 819
NM_ExtendOrder 821
Description 821
Constraints 822
Notes 823
Example 823
- lvii -
NM_GetPremiumDomainSettings 825
Description 825
Constraints 825
Notes 826
Example 827
NM_GetSearchCategories 828
Description 828
Constraints 829
Notes 830
Example 830
NM_ProcessOrder 832
Description 832
Constraints 833
Notes 834
Example 834
NM_Search 836
Description 836
Constraints 836
- lviii -
Notes 839
Example 839
NM_SetPremiumDomainSettings 842
Description 842
Constraints 843
Notes 844
Example 844
ParseDomain 845
Description 845
Constraints 846
Notes 847
Example 847
PE_GetCustomerPricing 848
Description 848
Constraints 849
Notes 852
Example 852
PE_GetDomainPricing 854
Description 854
- lix -
Constraints 854
Notes 855
Example 855
PE_GetEapPricing 857
Description 857
Constraints 858
Notes 859
Example 859
PE_GetPOPPrice 862
Description 862
Constraints 863
Notes 864
Example 864
PE_GetPremiumPricing 865
Description 865
Constraints 866
Notes 867
Example 867
- lx -
PE_GetProductPrice 869
Description 869
Constraints 869
Notes 873
Example 873
PE_GetResellerPrice 874
Description 874
Constraints 875
Notes 878
Example 878
PE_GetRetailPrice 879
Description 879
Constraints 880
Notes 883
Example 884
PE_GetRetailPricing 885
Description 885
Constraints 885
- lxi -
Notes 888
Example 888
PE_GetRocketPrice 890
Description 890
Constraints 891
Notes 892
Example 892
PE_GetTLDID 894
Description 894
Constraints 894
Notes 895
Example 895
PE_SetPricing 896
Description 896
Constraints 897
Notes 901
Example 902
Portal_GetAwardedDomains 903
- lxii -
Description 903
Constraints 903
Notes 905
Example 906
Portal_GetDomainInfo 907
Description 907
Constraints 908
Notes 909
Example 910
Portal_GetToken 914
Description 914
Constraints 915
Notes 916
Example 916
Portal_UpdateAwardedDomains 917
Description 917
Constraints 917
Notes 918
Example 918
- lxiii -
PP_CancelSubscription 920
Description 920
Constraints 920
Notes 922
Example 922
PP_CheckUpgrade 924
Description 924
Constraints 925
Notes 926
Example 926
PP_GetCancelReasons 928
Description 928
Constraints 929
Notes 930
Example 930
PP_GetControlPanelLoginURL 932
Description 932
Constraints 933
- lxiv -
Notes 934
Example 934
PP_GetStatuses 936
Description 936
Constraints 936
Notes 937
Example 937
PP_GetSubscriptionDetails 939
Description 939
Constraints 940
Notes 942
Example 942
PP_GetSubscriptions 944
Description 944
Constraints 945
Notes 947
Example 947
PP_ReactivateSubscription 949
Description 949
- lxv -
Constraints 950
Notes 951
Example 951
PP_UpdateSubscriptionDetails 953
Description 953
Constraints 953
Notes 955
Example 955
PP_ValidatePassword 957
Description 957
Constraints 958
Notes 959
Example 959
Preconfigure 961
Description 961
Constraints 962
Notes 967
Example 967
- lxvi -
Purchase 969
Description 969
Constraints 970
Notes 979
Example 980
PurchaseHosting 981
Description 981
Constraints 982
Notes 984
Example 985
PurchasePOPBundle 986
Description 986
Constraints 987
Notes 988
Example 988
PurchasePreview 990
Description 990
Constraints 990
- lxvii -
Notes 992
Example 992
PurchaseServices 993
Description 993
Constraints 994
Input parameters for ID Protect 995
Input parameters for SSL Certificates 997
Input parameters for TRUSTe Privacy Policy 998
Input parameters for VeriSign Trust Seal 1000
Input parameters for GeoTrust Anti-Malware 1001
Input parameters for SiteLock 1001
Input parameters for RichContent 1002
Input parameters for Business Listing 1003
Input parameters for POP Email 1005
Input parameters for Web Site Creator 1006
Input parameters for Web hosting 1007
Input parameters for DNS hosting 1008
Input parameters for goMobi 1011
Notes 1012
Example 1013
PushDomain 1014
Description 1014
Constraints 1015
- lxviii -
Notes 1016
Example 1016
Queue_DomainPurchase 1017
Description 1017
Constraints 1018
Notes 1021
Example 1021
Queue_GetDomains 1023
Description 1023
Constraints 1023
Notes 1025
Example 1026
Queue_GetExtAttributes 1028
Description 1028
Constraints 1028
Notes 1029
Example 1030
Queue_GetInfo 1031
- lxix -
Description 1031
Constraints 1032
Notes 1033
Example 1034
Queue_GetOrderDetail 1035
Description 1035
Constraints 1036
Notes 1037
Example 1038
Queue_GetOrders 1039
Description 1039
Constraints 1040
Notes 1041
Example 1041
RAA_GetInfo 1043
Description 1043
Constraints 1043
Notes 1045
- lxx -
Example 1045
RAA_ResendNotifications 1050
Description 1050
Constraints 1050
Notes 1051
Example 1052
RC_CancelSubscription 1053
Description 1053
Constraints 1054
Notes 1055
Example 1055
RC_FreeTrialCheck 1056
Description 1056
Constraints 1057
Notes 1058
Example 1058
RC_GetLoginToken 1060
Description 1060
Constraints 1060
- lxxi -
Notes 1061
Example 1062
RC_GetSubscriptionDetails 1063
Description 1063
Constraints 1063
Notes 1065
Example 1065
RC_GetSubscriptions 1067
Description 1067
Constraints 1067
Notes 1069
Example 1069
RC_RebillSubscription 1071
Description 1071
Constraints 1072
Notes 1073
Example 1073
- lxxii -
RC_ResetPassword 1075
Description 1075
Constraints 1075
Notes 1076
Example 1076
RC_SetBillingCycle 1078
Description 1078
Constraints 1078
Notes 1080
Example 1080
RC_SetPassword 1081
Description 1081
Constraints 1082
Notes 1083
Example 1083
RC_SetSubscriptionDomain 1085
Description 1085
Constraints 1085
- lxxiii -
Notes 1086
Example 1087
RC_SetSubscriptionName 1088
Description 1088
Constraints 1088
Notes 1090
Example 1090
RefillAccount 1091
Description 1091
Constraints 1092
Notes 1095
Example 1095
RegisterNameServer 1097
Description 1097
Constraints 1097
Notes 1098
Example 1099
RemoveTLD 1100
Description 1100
- lxxiv -
Constraints 1101
Notes 1102
Example 1102
RemoveUnsyncedDomains 1103
Description 1103
Constraints 1104
Notes 1105
Example 1105
RenewPOPBundle 1106
Description 1106
Constraints 1107
Notes 1109
Example 1110
RenewServices 1111
Description 1111
Constraints 1111
Notes 1114
Example 1114
- lxxv -
RPT_GetReport 1115
Description 1115
Constraints 1116
Notes 1119
Example 1120
SendAccountEmail 1123
Description 1123
Constraints 1123
Notes 1124
Example 1124
ServiceSelect 1125
Description 1125
Constraints 1126
Notes 1128
Example 1128
SetCatchAll 1130
Description 1130
Constraints 1130
- lxxvi -
Notes 1131
Example 1132
SetCustomerDefinedData 1133
Description 1133
Constraints 1133
Notes 1135
Example 1135
SetDNSHost 1136
Description 1136
Constraints 1136
Notes 1138
Example 1138
SetDomainSRVHosts 1139
Description 1139
Constraints 1140
Notes 1142
Example 1142
SetDomainSubServices 1143
- lxxvii -
Description 1143
Constraints 1143
Notes 1145
Example 1145
SetDotNameForwarding 1146
Description 1146
Constraints 1147
Notes 1148
Example 1148
SetFilePermissions 1149
Description 1149
Constraints 1150
Notes 1151
Example 1151
SetHosts 1153
Description 1153
Constraints 1153
Notes 1155
- lxxviii -
Example 1156
SetIPResolver 1157
Description 1157
Constraints 1157
Notes 1159
Example 1159
SetPakRenew 1160
Description 1160
Constraints 1161
Notes 1162
Example 1162
SetPassword 1164
Description 1164
Constraints 1164
Notes 1165
Example 1166
SetPOPForwarding 1167
Description 1167
Constraints 1167
- lxxix -
Notes 1169
Example 1169
SetRegLock 1170
Description 1170
Constraints 1171
Notes 1172
Example 1172
SetRenew 1174
Description 1174
Constraints 1174
Notes 1176
Example 1176
SetResellerServicesPricing 1178
Description 1178
Constraints 1178
Notes 1180
Example 1180
- lxxx -
SetResellerTLDPricing 1181
Description 1181
Constraints 1182
Notes 1184
Example 1184
SetSPFHosts 1186
Description 1186
Constraints 1186
Notes 1188
Example 1188
SetUpPOP3User 1189
Description 1189
Constraints 1189
Notes 1191
Example 1192
SL_AutoRenew 1193
Description 1193
Constraints 1193
- lxxxi -
Notes 1195
Example 1195
SL_Configure 1196
Description 1196
Constraints 1196
Notes 1198
Example 1198
SL_GetAccountDetail 1199
Description 1199
Constraints 1200
Notes 1201
Example 1201
SL_GetAccounts 1202
Description 1202
Constraints 1203
Notes 1205
Example 1205
StatusDomain 1207
Description 1207
- lxxxii -
Constraints 1208
Notes 1209
Example 1209
SubAccountDomains 1211
Description 1211
Constraints 1211
Notes 1213
Example 1213
SynchAuthInfo 1215
Description 1215
Constraints 1216
Notes 1217
Example 1217
TEL_AddCTHUser 1218
Description 1218
Constraints 1219
Notes 1220
Example 1220
- lxxxiii -
TEL_GetCTHUserInfo 1222
Description 1222
Constraints 1222
Notes 1223
Example 1224
TEL_GetCTHUserList 1225
Description 1225
Constraints 1225
Notes 1227
Example 1227
TEL_GetPrivacy 1228
Description 1228
Constraints 1229
Notes 1230
Example 1230
TEL_IsCTHUser 1231
Description 1231
Constraints 1232
- lxxxiv -
Notes 1233
Example 1233
EL_UpdateCTHUser 1235
Description 1235
Constraints 1235
Notes 1236
Example 1237
TEL_UpdatePrivacy 1238
Description 1238
Constraints 1238
Notes 1240
Example 1240
TLD_AddWatchlist 1241
Description 1241
Constraints 1243
Notes 1245
Example 1245
TLD_DeleteWatchlist 1249
- lxxxv -
Description 1249
Constraints 1251
Notes 1252
Example 1252
TLD_GetTLD 1254
Description 1254
Constraints 1255
Notes 1256
Example 1257
TLD_GetWatchlist 1258
Description 1258
Constraints 1259
Notes 1262
Example 1262
TLD_GetWatchlistTlds 1265
Description 1265
Constraints 1266
Notes 1268
- lxxxvi -
Example 1268
TLD_Overview 1271
Description 1271
Constraints 1271
Notes 1273
Example 1273
TM_Check 1276
Description 1276
Constraints 1276
Notes 1277
Example 1277
TM_GetNotice 1279
Description 1279
Constraints 1279
Notes 1281
Example 1281
TM_UpdateCart 1283
Description 1283
Constraints 1284
- lxxxvii -
Notes 1285
Example 1285
TP_CancelOrder 1286
Description 1286
Constraints 1287
Notes 1288
Example 1288
TP_CreateOrder 1290
Description 1290
Constraints 1291
Notes 1296
Example 1296
TP_GetDetailsByDomain 1298
Description 1298
Constraints 1299
Notes 1300
Example 1301
- lxxxviii -
TP_GetOrder 1309
Description 1309
Constraints 1309
Notes 1311
Example 1312
TP_GetOrderDetail 1314
Description 1314
Constraints 1314
Notes 1315
Example 1317
TP_GetOrderReview 1319
Description 1319
Constraints 1319
Notes 1321
Example 1321
TP_GetOrdersByDomain 1323
Description 1323
Constraints 1323
Notes 1325
- lxxxix -
Example 1325
TP_GetOrderStatuses 1326
Description 1326
Constraints 1327
Notes 1328
Example 1328
TP_GetTLDInfo 1330
Description 1330
Constraints 1330
Notes 1332
Example 1332
TP_ResendEmail 1350
Description 1350
Constraints 1351
Notes 1352
Example 1352
TP_ResubmitLocked 1353
Description 1353
Constraints 1354
- xc -
Notes 1355
Example 1355
TP_SubmitOrder 1356
Description 1356
Constraints 1357
Notes 1359
Example 1359
TP_UpdateOrderDetail 1361
Description 1361
Constraints 1361
Notes 1365
Example 1365
TS_AutoRenew 1368
Description 1368
Constraints 1369
Notes 1370
Example 1370
- xci -
TS_Configure 1371
Description 1371
Constraints 1372
Notes 1376
Example 1377
TS_GetAccountDetail 1378
Description 1378
Constraints 1379
Notes 1381
Example 1381
TS_GetAccounts 1383
Description 1383
Constraints 1384
Notes 1386
Example 1386
UpdateAccountInfo 1391
Description 1391
Constraints 1392
- xcii -
Notes 1395
Example 1396
UpdateAccountPricing 1398
Description 1398
Constraints 1399
Notes 1404
Example 1404
UpdateCart 1406
Description 1406
Constraints 1406
Notes 1408
Example 1408
UpdateCusPreferences 1409
Description 1409
Constraints 1409
Notes 1413
Example 1413
UpdateDomainFolder 1415
Description 1415
- xciii -
Constraints 1416
Notes 1425
Example 1425
UpdateExpiredDomains 1427
Description 1427
Constraints 1428
Notes 1429
Example 1429
UpdateHostPackagePricing 1430
Description 1430
Constraints 1431
Notes 1433
Example 1434
UpdateMetaTag 1436
Description 1436
Constraints 1437
Notes 1438
Example 1439
- xciv -
UpdateNameServer 1440
Description 1440
Constraints 1440
Notes 1442
Example 1442
UpdateNotificationAmount 1443
Description 1443
Constraints 1443
Notes 1444
Example 1445
UpdatePushList 1446
Description 1446
Constraints 1446
Notes 1447
Example 1447
UpdateRenewalSettings 1449
Description 1449
Constraints 1449
- xcv -
Notes 1451
Example 1451
ValidatePassword 1452
Description 1452
Constraints 1453
Notes 1454
Example 1454
WBLConfigure 1455
Description 1455
Constraints 1456
Notes 1460
Example 1460
WBLGetCategories 1461
Description 1461
Constraints 1462
Notes 1463
Example 1463
WBLGetFields 1467
- xcvi -
Description 1467
Constraints 1467
Notes 1468
Example 1469
WBLGetStatus 1470
Description 1470
Constraints 1471
Notes 1472
Example 1472
WebHostCreateDirectory 1474
Description 1474
Constraints 1475
Notes 1476
Example 1476
WebHostCreatePOPBox 1477
Description 1477
Constraints 1478
Notes 1479
- xcvii -
Example 1479
WebHostDeletePOPBox 1481
Description 1481
Constraints 1481
Notes 1482
Example 1483
WebHostGetCartItem 1484
Description 1484
Constraints 1484
Notes 1485
Example 1486
WebHostGetOverageOptions 1487
Description 1487
Constraints 1488
Notes 1489
Example 1489
WebHostGetOverages 1491
Description 1491
Constraints 1491
- xcviii -
Notes 1493
Example 1493
WebHostGetPackageComponentList 1495
Description 1495
Constraints 1495
Notes 1497
Example 1497
WebHostGetPackageMinimums 1499
Description 1499
Constraints 1500
Notes 1501
Example 1501
WebHostGetPackages 1503
Description 1503
Constraints 1503
Notes 1505
Example 1505
- xcix -
WebHostGetPOPBoxes 1507
Description 1507
Constraints 1508
Notes 1509
Example 1509
WebHostGetResellerPackages 1511
Description 1511
Constraints 1512
Notes 1513
Example 1513
WebHostGetStats 1516
Description 1516
Constraints 1516
Notes 1518
Example 1518
WebHostHelpInfo 1519
Description 1519
Constraints 1520
-c-
Notes 1522
Example 1522
WebHostSetCustomPackage 1524
Description 1524
Constraints 1524
Notes 1528
Example 1528
WebHostSetOverageOptions 1529
Description 1529
Constraints 1530
Notes 1531
Example 1531
WebHostUpdatePassword 1533
Description 1533
Constraints 1533
Notes 1535
Example 1535
WebHostUpdatePOPPassword 1536
Description 1536
- ci -
Constraints 1537
Notes 1538
Example 1538
WSC_GetAccountInfo 1540
Description 1540
Constraints 1540
Notes 1543
Example 1543
WSC_GetAllPackages 1546
Description 1546
Constraints 1547
Notes 1549
Example 1550
WSC_GetPricing 1552
Description 1552
Constraints 1553
Notes 1555
Example 1555
- cii -
WSC_Update_Ops 1556
Description 1556
Constraints 1557
Notes 1559
Example 1559
XXX_GetMemberId 1561
Description 1561
Constraints 1561
Notes 1562
Example 1562
XXX_RemoveMemberId 1564
Description 1564
Constraints 1565
Notes 1566
Example 1566
XXX_SetMemberId 1568
Description 1568
Constraints 1569
- ciii -
Notes 1570
Example 1570
- civ -
Overview
This reference covers the entire application programming interface (API) that lets you
user eNom services to buy and sell Internet domains.
In this volume:
l Quick Start Guides
The Quick Start Guides introduce a single topic and walk you through enough of the API com-
mands to get you started.
l Domains and TLDs
This section comprises documents that describe the requirements for buying and selling
domains within specific TLDs.
l API Command Categories
The Big List; here you get into the details of every command implemented in the eNom API.
The main page breaks down the catalog into list by function. Beneath the main page is the full
catalog of API commands.
-1-
Domains and TLDs
In this section:
Selling and Managing Domains 2

New TLD - Watchlist 23
New TLD - Queue 26
.ASIA Eligibility Requirements 28
.AU, .ES and .PE 32
.CA Business Rules 35
.AU, .ES and .PE 69
.EU Transfer 72
.NU Registrant Requirements 73
.AU, .ES and .PE 76
Nominet (.UK Registry) System Changes 79
.xxx 83
.XXX Transfer 91
Selling and Managing Domains

Domain names are the real estate of the World Wide Web--unique, exclusive pieces of
Internet turf. And if you want to get into the business of domain name sales, there's no
better source than us. Year after year, we win top honors for having the best domain
name reseller program around.
This guide helps you identify the API commands you need to sell, renew, and manage
domain names on your own domain sales Web site.
-2-
Domains and TLDs
Contents
Why sell domain names?

Our customers become domain name resellers for any of a variety of reasons:
Some trade on the intrinsic value of the domain names themselves, either for their resale
value or for the parking revenues they can generate.
Some are Web hosting companies that register domain names on behalf of their own
Web hosting customers.
Some offer our full range of services, which all have domains at their core.
Audience for this guide

This guide is written for our resellers who want to build their own Web sites and sell
domain names using our realtime API command, Purchase, for domain name pur-
chases.
It also lists the API commands you are most likely to use for managing and renewing
domain names.
If you use the AddToCart command

You can use the AddToCart command to sell domain names and services. Doing so
allows you to submit a customer's entire purchase as a single order, and allows you to
use our credit card processing services including our elite fraud protection service.
Help with implementation

Our technical support staff is here to help! Contact them with questions about adding
value-added services to your product line. Check our Web site for contact information.
Domain registration and management

Selling domain names using our API involves a variety of tasks. Most are required and a
couple are optional:
1. Choose which TLDs you want to sell (optional)
2. Set pricing for the various TLDs.
3. Choose the default settings you want to apply to all domain names you sell.
4. Check domain names.
5. Bill and register domain names
6. List domain names.
-3-
Domains and TLDs
7. Show details for one domain.

8. Manage contacts, including Whois.
9. Set name servers.
10. Set host records.
11. Protect domain names from hijacking (optional but recommended).
12. Renew domain names (optional but recommended).
13. Offer DNS Hosting (optional).
14. Inbound transfers of domain names (optional).
15. Outbound transfers of domain names.
This guide shows sample query strings for all the API commands listed in tasks 3
through 5. For complete documentation, refer to our API catalog.
Task 1Decide which TLDs to offer

You can select which top-level domains you want to offer, and you can change your list
of selections at any time. One common scenario is to offer the general TLDs, plus one or
more country code TLDs that correspond most closely with the location of your cus-
tomers.
This is an optional task. Its useful if you only want to view the TLDs you offer when you
set pricing, or if you want to use the GetTLDList command to populate TLD dropdown
menus in your site.
To choose TLDs, run direct API commands that allow you to work with only the TLDs
you offer. These commmands are:
API Command Usage

Specify which TLDs you want to offer, if you dont want to offer
all seventy-plus TLDs we support. Running this command also
AuthorizeTLD
restricts the TLDs displayed when you log into the eNom Web
site.
Reduce the list of TLDs you offer. Or, by removing all TLDs on
RemoveTLD
your list, return to all the TLDs we support.
Retrieve a list of the TLDs you have authorized. You can use
GetTLDList
this command to populate dropdown menus for TLDs.
Sample query strings:

AuthorizeTLD
https://resellertest.enom.com/interface.asp?
command=AuthorizeTLD&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
-4-
Domains and TLDs
&domainlist=com,net,org,biz,info&responsetype=xml
RemoveTLD
command=RemoveTLD&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&domainlist=com,net,org,biz,info&responsetype=xml
GetTLDList
command=GetTLDList&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&responsetype=xml
Task 2Set pricing

Setting your retail pricing for a new services is so easy you may have already done it.
Domain prices tend to be competitive and heavily marketed, so they are likely to be a
part of your business that you watch most carefully and change most often.
To set prices:
1. Log into your eNom account.
2. Click Settings.
3. Click TLD pricing.
4. Set prices and click save changes. You can set prices for all services now, and
build each service into your retail site on your own schedule.
Task 3Choose universal settings

Many resellers want all domain names to have uniform settings, most commonly the
same set of name servers and host records. The easiest way to achieve this is to set
them in advance, as account defaults.
To set your preferences:
1. Log into your eNom account.
2. Click Settings.
3. On the default tab, click default options.
-5-
Domains and TLDs
4. Set your customer preferences as you wish. We strongly recommend that you
select the Do not allow names to be transferred check box to reduce the likelihood
of hijacking. Many of our resellers also select the Renew the registration check box
so that their customers do not inadvertently lose their domain names by allowing
them to expire. Many of our resellers also have host record settingseither our
defaults or their own custom settingsthat they use for all domain names.
5. Click save changes.
6. On the default tab, click default dns.
7. Specify your desired default name servers and click save changes.
Task 4Check domain names
Checking domain names simply means sending a query to the Registry to see if a spe-
cified domain name is available. You must always do this before registering a domain
name.
Optionally, you can also display variations of the domain name, so that if the original
name is not available, your customer is instantly presented with alternatives that are sim-
ilar.
Checking involves the following API commands:
API Command Usage

Query the Registry to determine whether a specific domain
Check
name is available.
Retrieve a list of available domain names that are similar to the

specified domain name. This is an optional command that gen-
NameSpinner
erates alternatives in case a domain name is unavailable, and
generates alternatives for defensive registrations.

Check
command=check&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=example&tld=com&responsetype=xml
NameSpinner
-6-
Domains and TLDs
command=NameSpinner&UID=resellid&pw=resellpw
&SLD=example&TLD=com&UseHyphens=true&UseNumbers=true
&MaxResults=10&ResponseType=XML
Task 5Bill and register domain names

Registering a domain name is the most fundamental task youll perform. Registration
simply lays exclusive claim to the name, for the time period for which you register it.
Youll want to bill your customer for the domain name, and in general youll probably
want to ensure that youll receive payment before you commit to a non-refundable
domain name registration.
Usually, our resellers preauthorize the payment and then immediately register the
domain name, so that the actions appear simultaneous to your customer (and so that the
domain name isnt registered by someone else while you are processing the payment).
You can structure your billing in two ways:
l You can build your own billing system to bill your customers, and register the
domain names using the account balance you have with us.
l You can use our credit card processing, and supply credit card information in the
same query string you submit for the domain registration. We charge per trans-
action, and offer the most robust fraud screening in the industry as part of our ser-
vice.
This guide focuses on the purchase method that most of our resellers use: real-time pur-
chases. The process uses two to five API commands:
API command Usage

Retrieve the custom input parameters for a TLD. You will need
GetExtAttributes to use this command if you offer TLDs (usually country code
TLDs) that require custom parameters.
Purchase a domain name in real time. If you use our credit card
Purchase
processing, submit credit card information with this command.
Check the processing status of TLDs that do not register in real

GetDomainStatus
time, such as .eu and .uk.
-7-
Domains and TLDs

GetExtAttributes
command=GetExtAttributes&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&tld=ca&responsetype=xml
Purchase (simple)
command=Purchase&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs104&tld=com&ResponseType=XML
Purchase (with extended attributes and contact information)
Command=Purchase&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw
&SLD=resellerdocs103&TLD=ca&cira_legal_type=cco
&cira_whois_display=full&cira_language=en
&cira_agreement_value=Y&cira_agreement_version=2.0
&UseDNS=default&NumYears=1&RegistrantFirstName=John
&Re-
gis-
trantLastName=Doe&RegistrantOrganizationName=Hudson+Bay+Company
&RegistrantAddress1=1150+Douglas+St&RegistrantCity=Victoria
&RegistrantCountry=CA&RegistrantPostalCode=V8W+2C8
&RegistrantStateProvince=BC&RegistrantStateProvinceChoice=P
&RegistrantEmailAddress=john.doe@resellerdocs.com
&RegistrantPhone=%2B1.2503851311&ResponseType=XML
GetDomainStatus
command=GetDomainStatus&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs103&tld=ca&orderid=157930813
&ordertype=purchase&responsetype=xml
-8-
Domains and TLDs
Task 6List domain names and their statuses

Displaying a list of domains in a customers account has several uses:
l It displays an inventory of the names in their account.
l It allows you to display data such as expiration dates and settings so that your cus-
tomers can easily maintain their domain name portfolios.
l It gives you an overview of an individual customers portfolio so you can guide
them toward the products and services that best fit their needs.
Basic listing of an accounts domain names and their statuses involves the following
commands:
API command Usage

Retrieve a list of domain names, one page at a time. This com-
GetDomains mand includes filters that allow you to retrieve only names in a
specified status.
Retrieve a list of this accounts domain names that are in

GetExpiredDomains Expired, Redemption Grace Period (RGP), and Extended RGP
status.

GetDomains
command=GetDomains&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw
&ResponseType=XML
GetExpiredDomains
command=GetExpiredDomains&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&responsetype=xml
Task 7Retrieve status information

Youll want to be able to retrieve more detailed information on a single domain name, so
that you and your customer can see its current status and settings. Retrieve this inform-
ation using the following command:
-9-
Domains and TLDs
API command Usage

Retrieve a long list of status information on a single domain
GetDomainInfo
name.

GetDomainInfo
command=GetDomainInfo&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&ResponseType=XML
GetExpiredDomains
command=GetExpiredDomains&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&responsetype=xml
Task 8Manage Whois and other contacts

Registries require accurate, up-to-date contact information for the owners of domain
names. You will want accurate contact information as well, for management and renewal
and to protect against fraud and hijacking.
Contact management involves the following commands:
API command Usage

Optionally, you can submit any or all contact information at the
Purchase
time you register a domain name.
Contacts Set contact information for a domain name.
Retrieve all contact information for a domain name. This

GetContacts includes Billing, Registrant, Technical, Administrative, and
AuxBilling.
Retrieve Whois contact information for a domain name. This

GetWhoisContact
includes Registrant, Technical, and Administrative contacts.
- 10 -
Domains and TLDs

Purchase (with contact parameters)
command=Purchase&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs106&tld=com&usedns=default
&RegistrantFirstName=John&RegistrantLastName=Registrant
&RegistrantAddress1=111%20Registrant%20St.
&RegistrantCity=Registranttown&RegistrantStateProvince=wa
&RegistrantPostalCode=98003&RegistrantCountry=US
&RegistrantPhone=%2B1.5555555555&AdminFirstName=AdminyJohn
&AdminLastName=AdminyDoe&AdminAddress1=111%20Admin%20St.
&AdminCity=Admintown&AdminCountry=US
&AdminEmailAddress=john.Admin@resellerdocs.com
&Ad-
minPhone=%2B1.5555555555&AuxBillingFirstName=AuxBillingJohn
&AuxBillingLastName-
e=AuxBillingDoe&AuxBillingAddress1=111%20AuxBilling%20St.
&AuxBillingCity=AuxBillingtown&AuxBillingCountry=US
&AuxBillingEmailAddress=john.AuxBilling@resellerdocs.com
&AuxBillingPhone=%2B1.5555555555&ResponseType=XML
Contacts (for a domain name that does not require extended attributes)
command=Contacts&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&RegistrantFirstName=John
&RegistrantLastName=Smith&RegistrantPhone=%2B1.5555555555
&RegistrantAddress1=100%20Main%20St.
&RegistrantCity=Townsville&RegistrantCountry=US
&RegistrantEmailAddress=john@resellerdocs.com
&responsetype=xml
Contacts (for a domain name that requires extended attributes)
command=Contacts&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs78&tld=ca&RegistrantFirstName=John
&RegistrantLastName=Doe&RegistrantAddress1=1400+W+Pender+St
&RegistrantCity=Vancouver&RegistrantCountry=CA
&RegistrantPostalCode=V6C+1G8&RegistrantStateProvince=BC
&RegistrantStateProvinceChoice=P
- 11 -
Domains and TLDs
&RegistrantPhone=%2B1.6046382525&cira_legal_type=cct
&cira_whois_display=private&cira_language=en
&cira_agreement_value=Y&cira_agreement_version=2.0
&ResponseType=XML
GetContacts
command=GetContacts&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&responsetype=xml
GetWhoisContact
command=GetWhoisContact&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
Task 9Set name servers

Name servers are the network that connects a users computer to your domain name.
Setting name servers is similar to signing up for telephone or Internet service: name serv-
ers are the communication portal between your domain name and the rest of the World
Wide Web.
Domain name server (DNS) management involves the following commands:
API command Usage

UpdateCusPreferences is the API command that supports the
universal settings in Task 3 above. If you set name servers at
UpdateCusPreferences
the account level, those name servers are applied to every
domain name at the time of registration.
GetCusPreferences Retrieve the current universal settings for this account.
Set name servers for a domain name, both in our system and at
the Registry. If you dont specify universal settings through our
ModifyNS Web site or the UpdateCusPreferences command, ModifyNS
is a basic configuration command for each new domain you
register.
GetDNS Retrieve a list of the name servers associated with a domain
- 12 -
Domains and TLDs
API command Usage

name

command=UpDateCusPreferences&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&usedns=0&dns1=ns1.name-services.com&dns2=ns2.name-ser-
vices.com
&responsetype=xml
GetCusPreferences
command=GetCusPreferences&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&responsetype=xml
ModifyNS
command=ModifyNS&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&usedns=default&responsetype=xml
GetDNS
command=GetDNS&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw
Task 10Set host records

Host records fine-tune the associations between a domain name and its Web site con-
tent, email, and other functionality. If name servers are the electrical grid, host records
are like the wiring in an individual home.
Host records management involves the following commands:
- 13 -
Domains and TLDs
API command Usage

SetHosts Set host records.
Retrieve a list of the current host record settings for a domain

GetHosts
name.

command=UpdateCusPreferences&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&useparentdefault=0&RecordType=A,A,A
&address=85.92.87.178,85.92.87.179,85.92.87.180
&hostname=@,*,www&ResponseType=XML
GetCusPreferences
command=GetCusPreferences&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&responsetype=xml
SetHosts
command=SetHosts&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&HostName1=@&RecordType1=A
&Address1=66.150.5.189&HostName2=photos
&RecordType2=CNAME&Address2=photos.msn.com.
&HostName3=yahoo&RecordType3=URL&Address3=204.71.200.72
&HostName4-
4=msn&RecordType4=FRAME&Address4=http://www.msn.com
&responsetype=xml
GetHosts
- 14 -
Domains and TLDs
command=GetHosts&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
Task 11Protect domain names from hijacking

Registrar-Lock prevents a domain name from being transfered without the registrants
authorization. Registrar-Lock is the first and strongest defense against hijacking.
Allowing a customer to lock and unlock their domain name for the purposes of protecting
it from hijacking is optional, but you must allow them to unlock their domain (or unlock it
yourself) if they want to transfer it away.
Registrar-Lock involves the following commands:
API command Usage

UpdateCusPreferences is the API command that supports the universal set-
tings in Task 3 above. If you set name servers at the account level, those name
servers are applied to every domain name at the time of registration.
SetRegLock Toggle Registrar-Lock on or off for a domain name.
GetRegLock Retrieve the current Registrar-Lock setting for a domain name.

command=UpdateCusPreferences&-uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&RegLock=on&ResponseType=XML
GetCusPreferences
&responsetype=xml
SetRegLock
- 15 -
Domains and TLDs
https://resellertest.enom.com/Interface.asp?
command=SetRegLock&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&unlockregistrar=0
&responsetype=xml
GetRegLock
command=GetRegLock&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
Task 12Renew domain names

Renewal of domain names can take a variety of forms. The simplest is setting an auto-
renew flag at the account or domain level. More active management functionality
includes renewal before or after expiration; or renewal of a domain that is in Redemption
Grace Period status.
Renewing domain names is basic functionality that you will certainly want to build. We
recommend that you build the Auto Renew functionality immediately; if needed, renewal
of existing domains can wait until domains you have registered are approaching their
expiration date.
Renewal involves the following commands:
API command Usage

Toggle Auto Renew on or off for one domain name. Auto

SetRenew Renew automatically renews domain names before their expir-
ation date.
GetRenew Retrieve the current Auto Renew setting for a domain name.
Extend Renew a domain name in real time.
UpdateExpiredDomains Renew a domain in Expired status
Extend_RGP Renew a domain name that is in Redemption Grace Period
- 16 -
Domains and TLDs
API command Usage

status.
Specify whether you want us to send out white-labeled renewal

UpdateRenewalSettings reminder emails to your customers on your behalf, containing a
link to your Web site.

command=UpdateCusPreferences&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&AutoRenew=on&ResponseType=XML
GetCusPreferences
command=GetCusPreferences&uid=resellid
SetRenew
command=SetRenew&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&renewflag=0&responsetype=xml
GetRenew
command=GetRenew&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
Extend
command=Extend&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&NumYears=1
&ResponseType=XML
- 17 -
Domains and TLDs
UpdateExpiredDomains
command=UpdateExpiredDomains&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&DomainName=resellerdocs.com
&responsetype=xml
Extend_RGP
command=Extend_RGP&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&ResponseType=xml
UpdateRenewalSettings
command=UpdateRenewalSettings&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&RenewalSetting=1&RenewalBCC=1
&AcceptTerms=1&URL=www.resellerdocs.com&ResponseType=XML
Task 13Offer DNS Hosting

DNS Hosting is a service that allows customers who have a domain name registered
elsewhere to point it to our name servers, and use our servers. DNS Hosting is a useful
alternative to transferring domain names.
If you offer DNS Hostingits optional functionality, but an easy revenue stream if youre
building domain management tools anywayit involves the following commands:
API command Usage

PurchaseServices Purchase DNS Hosting in real time.
Retrieve a list of domain names in an account. The commands

GetDomains offers and optional filter that allows you to return only domains
that use DNS Hosting.
GetDomainInfo Retrieve extensive status information on one domain name.
ExtendDomainDNS Renew DNS Hosting in real time.
- 18 -
Domains and TLDs

PurchaseServices
command=PurchaseServices&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&Service=DNSHosting&sld=DomainNameToBeHosted
&tld=com&NumYears=1&responsetype=xml
GetDomains
command=GetDomains&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw
&Display=10&Start=321&ResponseType=XML
GetDomainInfo
command=GetDomainInfo&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw
ExtendDomainDNS
command=ExtenddomainDNS&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=DomainNameToBeHosted&tld=com&numyears=1
&responsetype=xml
Task 14Transfer domain names in

Allowing your customers to transfer domains that are currently registered elsewhere, into
the account they have with you, is optional functionality. Its a revenue stream for you
and a service that allows your customers to consolidate their domain name portfolios.
Transferring domain names to your business involves the following commands:
API command Usage

Create an order to transfer in domain names currently
TP_CreateOrder registered elsewhere. Using this command, you can either cre-
ate and submit an order immediately, or create it and save for
- 19 -
Domains and TLDs
API command Usage

later submission.
TP_GetOrderDetail Retrieve basic information about a single transfer order.
Update information in a transfer order that has not yet been sub-
TP_UpdateOrderDetail
mitted.
TP_SubmitOrder Submit a transfer order.
Retrieve more extensive information about a single transfer

TP_GetOrderReview
order.
TP_GetOrdersByDomain Retrieve transfer information about a domain name.
TP_GetOrder Retrieve a transfer order and its details.
Retrieve a list of all transfer orders submitted in the last six

TP_GetOrderStatuses
months, including closed orders.

TP_CreateOrder (create and submit immediately)
command=TP_CreateOrder&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&orderType=AutoVerification&sld1=resellerdocs16
&tld1=com&AuthInfo1=11111&sld2=resellerdocs16
&tld2=net&AuthInfo2=22222&domaincount=2&responsetype=xml
TP_CreateOrder (create, but save to finalize and submit later)
command=TP_CreateOrder&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&orderType=AutoVerification&sld1=resellerdocs17
&tld1=com&AuthInfo1=11111&sld2=resellerdocs17
&tld2=net&AuthInfo2=22222&domaincount=2&Preconfig=1
&responsetype=xml
TP_GetOrderDetail
command=TP_GetOrderDetail&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&TransferOrderDetailID=77289251&responsetype=xml
- 20 -
Domains and TLDs
command=TP_UpdateOrderDetail&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&TransferOrderDetailID=77289251&Lock=On&Renew=On
&RegistrantUseContact=none&TechUseContact=none
&AuxBillingUseContact=none&responsetype=xml
TP_SubmitOrder
command=TP_SUBMITORDER&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&TransferOrderID=175586738&responsetype=xml
TP_GetOrderReview
command=TP_GetOrderReview&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&TransferOrderID=175586738&OrderType=Transfer
&responsetype=xml
TP_GetOrdersByDomain
command=TP_GetOrdersByDomain&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&sld=resellerdocs16&tld=com
&responsetype=xml
TP_GetOrder
command=TP_GetOrder&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&TransferOrderID=175586738&responsetype=xml
TP_GetOrderStatuses
command=TP_GetOrder-
Statuses&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&responsetype=xml
- 21 -
Domains and TLDs
Task 15Transfer domain names away

You must allow customers to transfer their domains to another registrar if they so desire.
This involves giving your customers access to domain name authorization codes, allow-
ing them to disable Registrar-Lock, and allowing them to update their Registrant and
Administrative contacts so that verification emails are delivered to the correct email
addresses.
Transferring domain names away from your business involves the following commands:
API command Usage

GetContacts Retrieve contact information for a domain name.
Set contact information for a domain name. For transfers,

Registrant and Administrative contact information must be up-
Contacts
to-date, particularly the email addresses for these two con-
tacts.
Synchronize the authorization code (EPP key) for a domain

SynchAuthInfo name in our database and at the Registry, and email the author-
ization code to the Registrant.
GetRegLock Retrieve the Registrar-Lock setting for a domain name.
In the case of a losing transfer, disable Registrar-Lock for a

SetRegLock
domain name.

GetContacts
command=getcontacts&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
Contacts
command=contacts&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&RegistrantFirstName=John
- 22 -
Domains and TLDs
&Re-
gistrantLastName=Smith&Registrantaddress1=100%20Main%20St.
&RegistrantCity=Townsville&RegistrantCountry=US
&RegistrantEmailAddress=john@resellerdocs.com
&RegistrantPhone=%2B1.5555555555&responsetype=xml
SynchAuthInfo
Command=SynchAuthInfo&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw
&SLD=resellerdocs&TLD=com&EmailEPP=True
&RunSynchAutoInfo=True&ResponseType=XML
GetRegLock
command=getreglock&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
SetRegLock
https://resellertest.enom.com/Interface.asp?
command=setreglock&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&unlockregistrar=1
&responsetype=xml
New TLD - Watchlist

This document is designed to provide resellers with a step-by-step guide about the pro-
cesses for adding, deleting and maintaining a new TLD Watchlist.
Usage
Get the list of all available new TLDs in our system.
TLD_GetTLD
command=TLD_GetTLD&UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw
- 23 -
Domains and TLDs
&ResponseType=XML
Get the list of all categories. The new TLDs are arranged in one or more categories.
TLD_GetCategory
command=TLD_GetCategory&UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw
&ResponseType=XML
LIST
You can create LIST(s) for organizing or managing watchlist domain names. Each LIST
consists of a ListID, ListName and ListEmail.
Each account has a default LIST (ListID=0 ), containing domains to watch. Domains can
appear in multiple LISTS. The default LIST cannot be deleted and email address cannot
be changed.
Example:
ListID=0 ListID=1 ListID=2

*.ninja
.art
.education one.ceo two.ceo
one.ceo one.ninja two.ninja
one.ninja one.fun two.fun
two.ceo ..... .....
two.ninja
.....
International Domain Name (IDN)

IDN allows more web users to navigate the Internet in their preferred native language.
Most domain names are registered in ASCII characters. The non-Latin scripts such as
Chinese, Russian, Korean or other languages cannot be rendered in ASCII. IDN is fully
supported in PUNY Code and URL Encoded format.
To get more information and a conversion tool for PUNY Code, check the sites below:
l Verisign's IDN Tool: http://mct.verisign-grs.com
l RFC 3492: http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3492
- 24 -
Domains and TLDs
Step 1 - Add domain(s) to a new or existing LIST in a

Watchlist
Add domain(s) to a new or existing LIST in a Watchlist.
Format:
blogging.ninja
*.ninja
blogging.*
TLD_AddWatchlist
command=TLD_AddWatchlist&UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw
&ResponseType=XML
&domainlist=blogging.ninja,*.ninja,blogging.*
&ListID=16&ListName=&ListEmail=
Step 2 - Get Watchlist LIST

Retrieve a list of domains currently in a LIST.
TLD_GetWatchlist
command=tld_getwatchlist&uid=ResellID&pw=resellpw
&responsetype=xml&pagingpagesize=2
&tld=xn--nqv7f&ListID=0&Action=
Step 3 - Delete domain(s)/LIST from a Watchlist

Delete a list of domain(s) or a LIST from a Watchlist.
TLD_DeleteWatchlist
command=TLD_DeleteWatchlist&UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw
&ResponseType=XML&Action=DeleteListItem
- 25 -
Domains and TLDs
&WatchlistIDList=73995&ListID=23
Agreement Page
Retrieve the up-to-date Agreement.
GetAgreementPage
command=GetAgreementPage&UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw
&ResponseType=XML&Page=watchlist
New TLD - Queue

This document is designed to provide resellers with a step-by-step implementation for
purchasing domains from the registry prior to General Availability.
Sunrise Queue
Sunrise is the period when owners of trademarks have the opportunity to place orders for
domain names that contain their owned marks.
Landrush Queue
During Landrush, non-trademark holders may register domains that didn't qualify for Sun-
rise and consist of generic terms such as loan or car.
Pre-Register
Pre-Registration is your last chance to pre-order domains before General Availability.
Anybody may pre-register any domain name that's still available.
Step 1 - Get Queue information

Retrieve a list of all queues, which can be fitered as appropriate.
Queue_GetInfo
UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw&ResponseType=xml
- 26 -
Domains and TLDs
&Command=Queue_GetInfo&Category=Novelty
Step 2 - Get Extended Attributes

Retrieve a list of extended attributes and additional information for a specific queue. Run
Queue_GetInfo command to determine if the specific queue requires extended attributes.
Queue_GetExtAttributes
&Command=Queue_GetExtAttributes&QIDList=53
Step 3 - Purchase domain(s) in a Queue

Purchase domain(s) in a queue.
Queue_DomainPurchase
https://resellertest.enom.com?
UID=resellid&PW=resellpw&ResponseType=xml
&Command=Queue_DomainPurchase&Amount=50
&ItemList=qname%3dsunrise%7csld%3dmydomain
%7ctld%3dninja%7csigned_mark_data%3d
Step 4 - Get Queue domains

Retrieve a list of domains currently in the queue.
Queue_GetDomains
&Command=Queue_GetDomains&DisplayDomains=true
- 27 -
Domains and TLDs
Order history and detail

Retrieve a list of queue domain order history.
Queue_GetOrders
&Command=Queue_GetOrders
Retrieve a detailed queue domain order.

Queue_GetOrderDetail
&Command=Queue_GetOrderDetail&OrderID=157896057
Agreement Page
Retrieve the up-to-date Queue Agreement.
GetAgreementPage
command=GetAgreementPage&UID=ResellID
&PW=resellpw&ResponseType=XML&Page=queue
.ASIA Eligibility Requirements

Whats changing
The DotAsia Organisation, the Registry that administers the .ASIA TLD, has made
changes to its domain name registration system.
NOTE: The changes are backward compatible, so will not cause errors on your Web
site. However, they benefit your customers by providing greater flexibility in meeting
.ASIA eligibility requirements.
- 28 -
Domains and TLDs
Registrations of .ASIA domains must now satisfy at least one of the following eligibility
requirements:
l The Registrant contact information must include the same extended attributes as
currently, or
l The Administrative contact address must have a postal address within the DotAsia
Community.
The purpose of this document is to provide you an overview of the affected API com-
mands, and a list of countries and country codes that satisfy the DotAsia Community eli-
gibility criteria.
Timeline and test environment

We will release the .asia changes to our test environment on November 24, 2010. You
can test changes on resellertest.enom.com. Changes will release to our production sys-
tem approximately 12:00 noon PST on December 8, 2010.
Audience for this document

This document is a guide for API resellers who already offer .ASIA, and need to make
changes to functionality that already exists on their system.
Where the changes apply

CIRs changes affect the following API commands:
API command Nature of changes

For an existing domain name, either supply .ASIA extended
attributes or supply an Asian mailing address for the Admin-
Contacts istrative contact. You can use the GetExtAttributes command
to retrieve the extended attributes and to populate a country
dropdown menu for the Administrative contact address.
For registrations and contact updates, retrieve .ASIA extended

GetExtAttributes attributes, and retrieve country codes for the Administrative
contact mailing address.
For registrations in our shopping cart, specify eligibility for a

Preconfigure .ASIA domain name: either an Asian Registrant, or an Asian
mailing address for the Administrative contact.
For real-time registrations, specify eligibility for a .ASIA domain

Purchase name: either an Asian Registrant, or an Asian mailing address
for the Administrative contact.
- 29 -
Domains and TLDs
.ASIA-approved countries
The following table lists countries approved by the .ASIA registry.
If the domain name registration or contact update does not include preconfiguration with
extended attributes for the Registrant, the Administrative contact must have a mailing
address in one of the following countries:
Country Code Country

ae United Arab Emirates
af Afghanistan
am Armenia
aq Antarctica
au Australia
az Azerbaijan
bd Bangladesh
bh Bahrain
bn Brunei Darussalam
bt Bhutan
cc Cocos (Keeling)
ck Cook Islands
cn China
cx Christmas Island
cy Cyprus
fj Fiji
fm Micronesia, Federated
ge Georgia
hk Hong Kong
hm Heard
id Indonesia
il Israel
- 30 -
Domains and TLDs

in India
iq Iraq
jo Jordan
jp Japan
kg Kyrgyzstan
kh Cambodia
ki Kiribati
kr Korea, Republic of
kw Kuwait
kz Kazakhstan
la Lao People's Democratic
lb Lebanon
lk Sri Lanka
mh Marshall Islands
mm Myanmar
mn Mongolia
mo Macao
mv Maldives
my Malaysia
nf Norfolk Island
np Nepal
nr Nauru
nu Niue
nz New Zealand
om Oman
pg Papua New Guinea
ph Philippines
pk Pakistan
- 31 -
Domains and TLDs

ps Palestinian Territories
pw Palau
qa Qatar
sa Saudi Arabia
sb Solomon Islands
sg Singapore
th Thailand
tj Tajikistan
tk Tokelau
tl Timor-Leste
tm Turkmenistan
to Tonga
tr Turkey
tv Tuvalu
tw Taiwan
uz Uzbekistan
vn Viet Nam
vu Vanuatu
ws Samoa
ye Yemen
.AU, .ES and .PE

cesses for registering and maintaining .AU, .ES and .PE domain registrations.
- 32 -
Domains and TLDs
TLD Settings
.PE
.ES
.com.AU .com.PE
.com.ES
.net.AU .net.PE
.nom.ES
.org.AU .nom.PE
.org.ES
.org.PE
Min Registration 2 yrs 1 yr 1 yr
Max Registration 2 yrs 10 yrs 5 yrs
Extended Attributes Yes Yes No
AuthInfo (EPP) Yes No Yes
Step 1 - Extended Attributes

Some country code TLDs (ccTLDs) require extra parameters for registration and transfer.
Use GetExtAttributes command to get the required and optional parameters.
GetExtAttributes
command=GetExtAttributes&uid=ResellID
&pw=resellpw&responsetype=xml&tld=es
Step 2 - Purchase
Purchase domain(s) in our system.
Real-time
Purchase
Command=Purchase&UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw&SLD=domaintest
&TLD=es&es_registrantid=ES123456789&es_registrantidtype=0
&NumYears=1&EndUserIP=123.123.123.123&ResponseType=XML
- 33 -
Domains and TLDs
Shopping cart
AddToCart
Com-
mand-
d=AddToCart&UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw&ProductType=Register
&SLD=domaintest&TLD=es&Quantity=1
&EndUserIP=123.123.123.123&ResponseType=XML
PreConfigure
Command=PreConfigure&UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw
&load=2&autorenew=1&preconfigdns=default&usehostrecords=0
&listcount=1&cartitemid0=910168&updatelist=1
&optadministrative=UseBilling
&opttechnical=UseBilling&optcontactaux=UseBilling
&optcontactreg=1&es_registrantid=ES123456789
&es_registrantidtype=0&EndUserIP=123.123.123.123
&ResponseType=XML
InsertNewOrder
Command=InsertNewOrder&UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw
Agreement Pages
Retrieve the up-to-date Registration Agreement.
GetAgreementPage
&ResponseType=XML&Page=au
- 34 -
Domains and TLDs
.CA Business Rules

This document catalogs the business rules that CIRA, the .ca registry, applies to the con-
tact information associated with .ca domain names. The rules are enforced and can
affect the success of domain name registrations and transfers.
In this section:
Audience
This document is intended for our API users who offer .ca domain names.
Affected API commands

The information in this document applies to API commands that use extended attributes
or registrant contact information. The primary commands affected:
l Purchase
l Preconfigure
l Contacts
l TP_CreateOrder
l TP_SubmitOrder
l TP_UpdateOrderDetail
Overview of .ca eligibility requirements and contact

types
Similar to many country code TLDs, the Canadian registry requires that domain name
registrants have legal standing to register .ca domain names. These requirements,
known as Canadian Presence Requirements (CPR), are most satisfied in the form of
Canadian citizenship or incorporation of a business in Canada, and there are a number
of other categories listed in this document.
The Canadian registry separates the types of Canadian presence (the CIRA_Legal_
Type input parameter in our API) into two categories, Individual and Non-Individual.
Their requirements for what Registrant contact information to submit depend on what
legal type the Registrant declares.
The following legal types are classified as individuals:
CIRA_Legal_Type categorized as Indi-

Description
vidual
CCT Canadian citizen
- 35 -
Domains and TLDs
CIRA_Legal_Type categorized as Indi-

Description
vidual
RES Permanent resident of Canada
Aboriginal peoples (individuals or groups) indigenous to

ABO
Canada
Legal representative of a Canadian citizen or permanent

LGR
resident
The following legal types are classified as non-individuals:
CIRA_Legal_Type categorized as Non-Indi-

Description
vidual
Corporation (Canada or Canadian province or ter-
CCO
ritory)
GOV Government or government entity in Canada
EDU Canadian educational institution
ASS Canadian unincorporated association
HOP Canadian hospital
PRT Partnership registered in Canada
Trade-mark registered in Canada by non-Canadian

TDM
owner
TRD Canadian trade union
PLT Canadian political party
LAM Canadian library, archive, or museum
TRS Trust established in Canada
Indian Band recognized by the Indian Act of

INB
Canada
OMK Official marks registered in Canada
MAJ Her Majesty the Queen
For detailed information on each of these contact types, see Registrant legal types-defin-
itions and valid formats
- 36 -
Domains and TLDs
When to use contact names and organization names

Based on our testing, we recommend the following practices for registering as individual
and non-individual legal types:
If the CIRA_Legal_Type is Indi- If the CIRA_Legal_Type is

Input parameters
vidual: Non-Individual:
First name and last name are First name and last name are
Registrant first name and last
Required. Submit the name of a per- Required. Submit the name of a per-
name
son. son.
Organization name is Required.

Organization name is Optional.
Must include at least one of the
Avoid the terms listed in Dis-
Registrant organization name terms listed in Required terms in
allowed terms in contact inform-
contact information for non- Indi-
ation for Individuals section.
viduals section.
Source of this information

The rest of this document is a transcription of business rules, from the Registry's doc-
umentation, about valid contact types and data formats. It is presented verbatim with lim-
ited exceptions:
l A few headings have been added or revised, in some cases for clarity and in some
cases to provide an anchor for the hypertext links in the table above.
l Lists of required and disallowed terms have been alphabetized.
l Spelling errors are transcribed from CIRA's documentation without correction.
l Notes added by us are flagged with "Note to API users".
Valid formats and data values for .ca

A 'Legal type' is a category that the Registrant must fall into in order to meet the Cana-
dian Presence Requirements. The Canadian Presence Requirements are set out in the
General Registration Rules and the Registrant Agreement between CIRA and regis-
trants.
Corporation (Canada or Canadian province or territory)

A corporation under the laws of Canada or any province or territory of Canada, Charities,
Cooperative, Council.
- 37 -
Domains and TLDs
Registrant name format requirements
The information in this document applies to API commands that use extended attributes
or registrant contact information. The primary commands affected:
l The Registrant name must be the full legal name of the corporation and must be fol-
lowed by the jurisdiction of incorporation (i.e. Canada, Ontario, NWT.), unless it
is obvious from the corporation's name. Canadian Internet Registration Authority
(Canada)
l For Charities - the NFP should be included in the organization name - if it is a not-
for-profit organization - you are also required to submit the registration number (i.e.
123456789 RR0001)
Examples of valid and invalid Registrant names for the legal type 'Corporation'
Valid Registrant name Invalid Registrant name
The Foundation of Rosa (NFP) Smiths
La fondation de Edward (OSBL) Smiths Consulting
123745 Canada Inc. Smiths Kennel
Smith Corp. of Ontario Leatra SP
Smith Lte. Canada Smiths Corp.
Canadian citizen
A Canadian citizen of the age of majority under the laws of the province or territory in
Canada in which he or she resides or last resided.
l The Registrant's name must be the full legal name of the Canadian Citizen who
will hold the domain name registration as the name would appear on a passport,
driver's license or other identification document issued by a government.
l The full legal name may be followed by a space and o/a xxxx where o/a stands
for Operating As and xxxx can be any alpha-numeric string designated by the
applicant and subject to applicable rules and length restrictions (e.g. John Doe o/a
Doe Consulting Group). The name may also be followed by a space and a degree
granted to the Registrant by a recognized degree granting institution or a recog-
nized professional designation which the Registrant has the right to use (i.e., PhD,
MD, and DDS.)
l Full legal names of individuals may only consist of alphabetic characters and the
special characters: single quote mark('), hyphen(-), period(.).
- 38 -
Domains and TLDs
Examples of valid and invalid Registrant names for the legal type 'Permanent resident of
Canada'
John Smith John
Fred-Albert Doon PhD J. Doe
Bernard St-James o/a St-James Services None
Kathy Lynn Perse Personal
(blank)
Cool Gal
Domain Administrator
St-James Services
Acme Sales Inc.
Permanent resident of Canada

A permanent resident as defined in the Immigration and Refugee Protection Act
(Canada) S.C. 2001, c.27, as amended from time to time, who is ordinarily resident (as
defined below) in Canada and of the age of majority under the laws of the province or ter-
ritory in Canada in which he or she resides or last resided. Ordinarily resident in
Canada means an individual who resides in Canada for more than 183 days in the
twelve month period immediately preceding the date of the applicable request for regis-
tration of the .ca domain name or sub-domain name and in each twelve month period
thereafter for the duration of the domain name registration.
l The Registrant's name must be the full legal name of the Permanent Resident who
will hold the domain name registration as the name would appear on a driver's
license or other identification document issued by a government.
l The name may be followed by a space and o/a xxxx where o/a stands for Oper-
ating As and xxxx can be any alpha-numeric string designated by the applicant
and subject to applicable rules and length restrictions (e.g. John Doe o/a Doe Con-
sulting Group). The name may also be followed by a space and a degree granted
to the Registrant by a recognized degree granting institution or a recognized pro-
fessional designation which the Registrant has the right to use (i.e., PhD, MD, and
DDS.)
- 39 -
Domains and TLDs
Examples of valid and invalid Registrant names for the legal type 'Permanent resident of
Canada'
John Smith John
Fred-Albert Doon DDS J. Doe
Bernard St-James o/a St-James Services F.A.D
Kathy Lynn Perse Cool Gal
St-James Services
Acme Sales Inc.
Government or government entity in Canada

Her Majesty the Queen in right of Canada, a province or a territory; an agent of Her
Majesty the Queen in right of Canada, of a province or of a territory; a federal, provincial
or territorial Crown corporation, government agency or government entity; or a regional,
municipal or local area government.
l The Registrant's name must be the complete official name of the entity that will
hold the domain name registration, without any abbreviations. (A common abbre-
viation may follow the official name in parentheses).
l If the Registrant is not a government, the Registrant's name must be followed by
the name of the jurisdiction (i.e. Canada, province, territory, municipality, etc) to
which the Registrant is related.
Examples of valid and invalid Registrant names for the legal type 'Government or gov-
ernment entity in Canada'
Government of Alberta Toronto Sales Are Us Inc.
Export Development Corporation (EDC) (Canada) DCIOPEI
Deposit Insurance Corporation of Ontario (DCIO) John Doe
City of Toronto
Canadian educational institution

1. A university or college which is located in Canada and which is authorized or
recognized as a university or college under an Act of the legislature of a province
- 40 -
Domains and TLDs
or territory of Canada; or
2. A college, post-secondary school, vocational school, secondary school, pre-school
or other school or educational institution which is located in Canada and which is
recognized by the educational authorities of a province or territory of Canada or
licensed under or maintained by an Act of Parliament of Canada or of the legis-
lature of a province or territory of Canada
l The Registrant's name must be the complete official name of the institution that will
hold the domain name registration, without any abbreviations.
l A common abbreviation may follow the official name in parentheses.
l The Registrant name must be followed by the jurisdiction (e.g. name of province,
municipality) in which the institution is accredited if not obvious from the Regis-
trant's name.
Examples of valid and invalid Registrant name for the legal type 'Canadian educational
institution'
L' cole de la ville (Ottawa) Sandhill Secondary School
University of British Columbia (UBC) Sales Are Us Inc.
St-John's Middle School of Ottawa UBC Student Association
Advanced Languages Institute of Ontario (ALI) Professional Association of Teaching Professionals

(Ontario) of UdeM
Joe Smith
Canadian unincorporated association

This legal type is principally intended for religious congregations, social and sports
clubs and community groups, council (not registered) or society (not registered) which
are based and operating in Canada.
An unincorporated organization, association or club:
1. at least 80% of whose members: (A) are ordinarily resident in Canada (if such mem-
bers are individuals); or (B) meet the requirements of any one of the following
Registrant Types: Corporation (Canada or Canadian province or territory), Cana-
dian citizen, Permanent Resident of Canada, Partnership Registered in Canada,
Trust established in Canada, Legal Representative of a Canadian Citizen or Per-
manent Resident; and
- 41 -
Domains and TLDs
2. at least 80% of whose directors, officers, employees, managers, administrators or

other representatives are ordinarily resident in Canada
l The Registrant's name must be the complete name of the association that will hold
the domain name registration, without any abbreviations. (A common abbreviation
may follow the complete name in parentheses).
Examples of valid and invalid Registrant names for the legal type
'Canadian unincorporated association'
St-Alban's Reformed Church of Victoria ACDEN
Archdiocese of Montral St-Patrick's
Sun Youth Montral Dartmouth Soccer Club Limited
Citizens for the Protection of the Red River John Doe
Toronto Junior Soccer Association
Canadian hospital
A hospital which is located in Canada and which is licensed, authorized or approved to
operate as a hospital under an Act of the legislature of a province or territory of Canada.
l The Registrant's name must be the complete official name of the hospital that will
hold the domain name registration, without any abbreviations. (A common abbre-
viation may follow the complete name in parentheses.) The Registrant's name
must be followed by the jurisdiction (i.e. name of province) which accredited the
hospital if not obvious from the Registrant's name.
Examples of valid and invalid Registrant names for the legal type 'Canadian hospital'
Royal Victoria Hospital - Qubec The dog hospital
Sick Children's Hospital of Ontario The cat veterinary
Veteran's Hospital Canada, Pointe Claire Dr. John Doe
Children's Hospital of Eastern Ontario (CHEO) Jane Doe
- 42 -
Domains and TLDs

John Doe Inc.
SHUL
Nurses Union Local 1455 NHCWA
Manitoba Doctors Against Drugs (MDAD)
Partnership registered in Canada

A partnership, more than 66 2/3 % of whose partners meet the requirements of one of the
following Registrant Types: Corporation (Canada or Canadian province or territory),
Canadian citizen, Permanent Resident of Canada, Trust established in Canada or a
Legal Representative of a Canadian Citizen or Permanent Resident, which is registered
as a partnership under the laws of any province or territory of Canada.
l The Registrant's name must be the registered name of the partnership that will
hold the domain name registration.
l The Registrant name must be followed by the jurisdiction of registration (i.e.,
Alberta) and the registration number.
'Partnership registered in Canada'
John Doe, LLP (Ontario) Mybusiness Inc.
Xenon Partnership (Ontario) Fred Smith
Doucett, Entwistle and Theedom LLP (Ontario) John Doe Partnership
John Doe Partnership, British Columbia
Rosa, Edward, Kelly, Partnership-Ottawa
Trade-mark registered in Canada by non-Canadian owner

A Person which does not fall under any other legal type, but which is the owner of a
trade-mark which is the subject of a registration under the Trade-marks Act (Canada)
R.S.C. 1985, c.T-13 as amended from time to time, but in this case such permission is
limited to a request to register a .ca domain name consisting of or including the exact
word component of that registered trade-mark.
- 43 -
Domains and TLDs
NOTE: This legal type is only intended for Registrants which do not meet the require-
ments associated with any other legal type but which have a trade-mark registered in
Canada. (Trademarks subject of trade-mark applications and trade-marks registered in
other jurisdictions, such as the United States, do not qualify.) The domain name to be
registered must include the trademark. (i.e., If the trade-mark is AVEA this type of Regis-
trant can register avea.ca or aveaisus.ca but not xyz.ca)
l The Registrant's name must be the complete legal name of the trade-mark owner
(not the trademark agent) holding the domain name registration without any abbre-
viations. (A common abbreviation may follow the complete name in parentheses.)
l The applicant must also insert the Canadian registration number of the trade-mark
following the Registrant name.
'Trade-mark registered in Canada by non-Canadian owner'
Arcuros SPA - TMA1762466 Arcuros SPA
Canadian trade union

A trade union which is recognized by a labour board under the laws of Canada or any
province or territory of Canada and which has its head office in Canada.
l The Registrant's name must be the complete official name of the trade union that
will hold the domain name registration, without abbreviations. (A common abbre-
viation may follow the official name in parentheses.)
l The Registrant name must be followed by the jurisdiction in Canada which recog-
nizes it (if it is not obvious from the Registrant's name.)
Examples of valid and invalid Registrant names for the legal type 'Canadian trade union'
Confdration des syndicats nationaux (CSN) - Qubec ZZCEUL local 237
Canadian Union of Postal Workers (CUPW) Jean Smith
Sales Are Us Inc.
- 44 -
Domains and TLDs
Canadian political party

A political party registered under a relevant electoral law of Canada or any province or
territory of Canada.
l The Registrant's name must be the complete official name of the political party
holding the domain name registration, without abbreviations. (A common abbre-
viation may follow the official name in parentheses.)
l The Registrant name must also by followed by the jurisdiction in Canada in which
it is registered (if it is not obvious from the official name).
Examples of valid and invalid Registrant names for the legal type 'Canadian political
party'
Progressive Conservative Party of Canada (PC) John Doe
Union Nationale du Qubec Sales Are Us Inc.
Reform Party - Alberta Liberal Party
ACCULD Ontario
National Liberation Front of Mexico
Canadian library, archive or museum

An institution, whether or not incorporated, that:
1. is located in Canada; and
2. is not established or conducted for profit or does not form part of, or is not admin-
istered or directly or indirectly controlled by, a body that is established or con-
ducted for profit in which is held and maintained a collection of documents and
other materials that is open to the public or to researchers
l The Registrant's name must be the complete legal name of the institution which
will hold the domain name registration without abbreviations. (A common abbre-
viation may follow the complete name in parentheses.)
- 45 -
Domains and TLDs
'Canadian library, archive or museum'
Royal Ontario Museum John Doe
Mus des Beaux Arts de Montral Sales Are Us Inc.
My site
Biggs Bargain Books
Trust established in Canada

A trust established and subsisting under the laws of a province or territory of Canada,
more than 66-2/3 % of whose trustees meet the requirements of one of the following
Registrant Types: Corporation (Canada or Canadian province or territory), Canadian cit-
izen, Permanent Resident of Canada, or a Legal Representative of a Canadian Citizen
or Permanent Resident.
l The Registrant's name must be the complete official name of the trust, without any
abbreviations. (A common abbreviation may follow the official name in par-
entheses.)
l The Registrant name must also indicate the total percentage of the trustees that
meet one or more of the following requirements: Canadian citizen, permanent res-
ident, Canadian corporation, legal representative.
Examples of valid or invalid Registrant names for the legal type

'Trust established in Canada'
Marie Daigle Trust - (100%) John Doe
Arbeit Trust - (70%) Sales Are Us Inc.
Arbeit Trust (10%)
Aboriginal Peoples (individuals) indigenous to Canada

Any individual belonging to any Inuit, First Nation, Metis or other people indigenous to
Canada.
- 46 -
Domains and TLDs
l The Registrant's name must be the full legal name of the Aboriginal Person apply-
ing for the Registration as it would appear on a driver's license or other iden-
tification document issued by government.
l The Registrant may enter its full legal name followed by a space and o/a xxxx
where o/a stands for Operating As and xxxx can be any alpha-numeric string
designated by the applicant and subject to applicable rules and length restrictions
(e.g. John Doe o/a Doe Consulting Group).
l The name may also be followed by a space and a degree granted to the Registrant
by a recognized degree granting institution or a recognized professional des-
ignation which the Registrant has the right to use (i.e., PhD, MD, and DDS.)
'Aboriginal Peoples (individuals) indigenous to Canada'
John Smith John
Fred-Albert Doon DDS None
Bernard St-James o/a St-James Services Personal
(blank)
St-James Services Inc.
Aboriginal Peoples (groups) indigenous to Canada

Any Inuit, First Nation, Metis or other people indigenous to Canada, and any collectivity
of such Aboriginal peoples.
l The Registrant's name must be the complete official name of the indigenous
people a collectivity of Aboriginal Persons or, if there is no official name, the name
by which the collectivity is commonly known.
- 47 -
Domains and TLDs
'Aboriginal Peoples (individuals) indigenous to Canada'
Carrier Sekani Tribal Council Acme Sales Inc.
Helping Spirit Lodge Society
John Jones
Indian Band recognized by the Indian Act of Canada

Any Indian band as defined in the Indian Act, R.S.C. 1985, c. I-5, as amended from time
to time, and any group of Indian bands.
l The name of Registrant must be the Indian Band Name as registered with the
Department of Indian and Northern Affairs, Canada.
NOTE: To verify the status or existence of an Indian Band, visit: http://www.-

aboriginalcanada.gc.ca/ or contact them directly by telephone at 888-399-0111. The web-
site is not authoritative.
Examples of valid and invalid Registrant names for the legal type 'Indian Band recog-
nized by the Indian Act of Canada'
Lac la Ronge Indian Band Mohawk Motors
Sioux Sales Inc.
Sales Are Us Inc.
John Smith
Legal representative of a Canadian citizen or permanent resident

An executor, administrator or other legal representative of a Person listed as a Canadian
Citizen or Permanent Resident of Canada.
Note This legal type is only available to a person or entity that has been appointed by
legal process to represent an individual who is not competent to represent him or herself.
It is not available to anyone who represents a Canadian or foreign corporation in any
capacity
- 48 -
Domains and TLDs
l The Registrant's name must be the full legal name of the Canadian Citizen or Per-
manent Resident of Canada who is being represented as it would appear on a
passport, driver's license or other government identification document. This must
be followed by the full legal name and capacity of at least one of the official rep-
resentatives.

l Examples of valid and invalid Registrant names for the legal type 'Indian Band
recognized by the Indian Act of Canada'

Caution: The representative should be identified as the Administrative Contact for these
registrations
'Legal representative of a Canadian citizen or permanent resident'
John Smith (Jayne Smith, executor) Sales Are Us Inc.
Arlenza SP
Shingle LLP
Official marks registered in Canada

A Person which does not meet the requirements for any other legal type, but which is a
Person intended to be protected by Subsection 9(1) of the Trade-marks Act (Canada) at
whose request the Registrar of trade-marks has published notice of adoption of any
badge, crest, emblem, official mark or other mark pursuant to Subsection 9(1), but in this
case such permission is limited to a request to register a .ca domain name consisting of
or including the exact word component of such badge, crest, emblem, official mark or
other mark in respect of which such Person requested publications.
Note: This legal type is only intended for Registrants which do not meet the require-
ments associated with any other legal type but which have an Official Mark registered in
Canada. The domain name must include the official mark (i.e. if the official mark is
WIPO, the Registrant can register wipo.ca but not intellectual-property.ca)
l The Registrant's name must be the complete official name of the entity holding the
domain name registration without any abbreviations. (A common abbreviation may
follow the complete name in parentheses.) The registration number of the official
mark must follow the Registrant Name.
- 49 -
Domains and TLDs
'Official marks registered in Canada'
The United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cul-
John Doe Inc.
tural Organization (UNESCO) - 0970388
Arcuros SPA
Her Majesty the Queen

Her Majesty Queen Elizabeth the Second and her successors.
l The Registrant's name must be that of Her Majesty the Queen or, after a suc-
cession, the name of her successor.
About valid and invalid contact names

CIRA requires the Registrar to collect accurate information from the Registrant. Contacts
without a valid Canadian presence cannot be assigned to the Registrant role. CIRA's
registry checks for Canadian presence on a contact in the role of Registrant.
Organization (Note to API users: this is the RegistrantOrganizationName input para-
meter in our API) can only be used when a contact is an individual, because its intended
use is to indicate which organization an actual person works for, and does not indicate
the non-individual contact name.
Required terms in contact information for non-Individuals

The following is a list that includes, but is not limited to, valid non individual names.
When the category is nonindividual, the contact must contain at least one of the fol-
lowing whole words in the name:
l bank
l banque
l caisse d'economie
l caisse d'epargne
l coop
l caisse de credit
l caisse populaire
l compagnie
l company
l cooperation
- 50 -
Domains and TLDs
l cooperative
l cooprix
l corp
l corp.
l corporation
l credit union
l federation de societes mutuelles d'assurance
l federation of mutual insurance associations
l fideicommis
l fiducie
l inc
l inc.
l incorporated
l incorporee
l limited
l limited liability company
l limited liability partnership
l limitee
l llc
l llp
l ltd
l ltd.
l lte
l lte.
l ltee
l ltee.
l mutual benefit association
l s.a.
l s.a.r.f.
l s.c.c.
l s.r.l.
l sarl
l savings union
l socit responsabilit limite
l societe commerciale canadienne
l societe d'entraide economique
l societe d'epargne
l societe de fiducie
l societe de secours mutuels
l societe mutuelle d'assurance
l societe par actions
l societe par actions a responsabilite limitee
l trust
l ulc
l ulc.
- 51 -
Domains and TLDs
l unlimited liability company
Disallowed terms in contact information for Individuals

The following is a list, that includes but is not limited to, invalid individual names. The cat-
egory is individual and therefore, the contact name must not contain any of the following
whole words.
Note to API users: Our testing indicates that these terms can also be problematic in the
optional input parameter, organization name, for Individual legal types.
Invalid Individual Names

(tm) academic academie
academy access admin
administration administrations administrator
adult adventure alb
alberta alliance american
animal animals animaux
and arts assistance
associate associates association
authority autorite available
band bc breakfast
british business businesses
calgary canada canadian
canadien canadienne capital
capitale care carpet
carpets central city
classic club clubs
college comission commerce
communication communications compagnie
company computer conseiller
conseillers consultant consultants
consultation consulting coop
- 52 -
Domains and TLDs

co-op corporation cottages
council country cyber
cybercafe design designs
development developpement digital
disabilities disability disponible
distribution district dns
domain domaine domaines
domains drink droits
economic economique educational
eglise electronic electronics
electronique electroniques entreprise
ergonomic ergonomics ergonomique
essential essentials essentiel
essentiels evenement evenements
event events farm
farms ferme fermes
film films financial
financiere food foreign
free fund funds
gallerie gestion golf
graphic graphics graphique
graphiques group groupe
halifax hamlet health
hebdomadaire help hosting
hotel hotels immobilier
individu individual individuals
individus industrie industries
- 53 -
Domains and TLDs

industry information instruments
interest international internet
journal laboratoire laboratoires
laboratories laboratory leasing
liberal local location
locations management manitoba
mb mechanic mechanics
medecine media medical
montreal motel motels
motoneige motoneiges motor
motors nb network
networking new brunswick newfoundland
nf northerns nova scotia
ns of office
online ontario org.
organisation organization ottawa
outlet outlets pei
photographie photography picture
pictures product products
production productions program
programs properties property
public publishing punk
quarterly quebec realty
remote rental rentals
restaurant rights rues
rural sa sask.
saskatoon school services
- 54 -
Domains and TLDs

sex ski snowmobible
snowmobibles societe society
solution solutions sport
sports student studio
supplies supply system
systems teacher teachers
teaching technical technologie
technology the theatre
tm toronto treats
trimestriel town ultimate
universal universel universite
university vacation vacations
vancouver vente verte
village ville virtual
virtuel webmaster website
weekly winnipeg xxx
NOTE: Note: A Contact that is an individual cannot use invalid contact names for Admin-
istrative Contact and Technical Contact information
See also the Canadian Presence Requirements for Registrants at

http://www.cira.ca/assets/Documents/Legal/Registrants/CPR.pdf
Authorization Information
The registration of domain names and other operations around the registered domain
name are carried out only if the registrar is authorized for the change. An authorization
password is usually associated with the domain. Information is returned in a response
only when:
l The querying Registrar is the current sponsoring Registrar, or
l The Registrar has supplied valid authorization information with the request
For example, CIRA regards any changes to the contact name information a critical
change and requires authorization information. In this case, the request must include the
- 55 -
Domains and TLDs
authorization information for the domain. The Registrar must provide valid contact IDs for
Registrant and administrative contact, and, if applicable, technical contacts. These con-
tacts must be sponsored by the Registrar.
In the case of a domain name transfer, The Registrar must have the authorization inform-
ation, (a password) from the Registrant before the domain name can be transferred.
Permitted formats for input values

Domain Names
The following lists valid domain name formats and values.
l Maximum 4 segments separated by period characters
l Maximum segment length 63 characters
l Segment characters must be alphanumeric or "-"
l "-" must not appear at the start or end of a segment
l Last segment must be "ca"
Email Addresses
The following lists email valid format and values.
l Length is 6 - 320 characters
l Format: email@domain.tld
IP Addresses
The Registry supports both IPv4 and IPv6 address types. An IPv4 address is a 32-bit
identifier that consists of a set of four numbers, each in the range of 0 to 255, separated
by periods. For example, 64.230.164.58. An IPv6 address is a 128-bit identifier. IPv6
notation consists of eight groups of four hexadecimal digits, separated by colons. For
example, 2001:db8:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:5b0f. CIRA supports entering IPV6 IP
addresses in standard shorthand notations such as:
l Removing the leading zeros in a group
l Replacing one or more consecutive groups that consist entirely of zero values with
two colons (::). This can only be done once in an address
Postal Codes
When the country code is CA, the postal code format is XNX NXN. Where X is a letter
and N is a number, the space separating the first three characters from the second three
characters, is optional.
- 56 -
Domains and TLDs
When the country code is US, the zip code format is NNNNN or NNNNN-NNNN. Where
N is a numeric character, the hyphen character is used to separate the first five char-
acters from the following four characters, if the 'zip plus four' format is used.
Telephone and Fax Numbers, and telephone extensions

Note to API users: CIRA's instructions in this section have been replaced with the
formatting requirements we use for all TLDs. We reformat as needed to comply with
each Registry's formatting requirements.
For telephone and fax numbers, the format must be +CountryCode.PhoneNumber,
where CountryCode and PhoneNumber use only numeric characters and the + is URL-
encoded as a plus sign (%2B).
You may add an extension number if applicable.
Permitted values for country, province, and state

codes
Country codes
The Country Codes table lists the country names in alphabetical order and their cor-
responding country codes.
Country Code
Afghanistan AF
Aland Islands AX
Albania AL
Algeria DZ
American Samoa AS
Andorra AD
Angola AO
Anguilla AI
Antarctica AQ
Antigua & Barbuda AG
Argentina AR
Armenia AM
- 57 -
Domains and TLDs
Country Code
Aruba AW
Ascension Island AC
Australia AU
Austria AT
Azerbaijan AZ
Bahamas BS
Bahrain BH
Bangladesh BD
Barbados BB
Belarus BY
Belgium BE
Belize BZ
Benin BJ
Bermuda BM
Bhutan BT
Bolivia BO
Bosnia and Herzegovina BA
Botswana BW
Bouvet Island BV
Brazil BR
British Indian Ocean Territory IO
Brunei Darussalam BN
Bulgaria BG
Burkina Faso BF
Burundi BI
Cambodia KH
Cameroon CM
Canada CA
- 58 -
Domains and TLDs
Country Code
Cape Verde CV
Cayman Islands KY
Central African Republic CF
Chad TD
Chile CL
China CN
Christmas Island CX
Cocos (Keeling) Islands CC
Colombia CO
Comoros KM
Congo CG
Democratic Republic of the Congo CD
Cook Islands CK
Costa Rica CR
Cte D'ivoire (Ivory Coast) CI
Croatia HR
Cuba CU
Cyprus CY
Czech Republic CZ
Denmark DK
Djibouti DJ
Dominica DM
Dominican Republic DO
Ecuador EC
Egypt EG
El Salvador SV
Equatorial Guinea GQ
Eritrea ER
- 59 -
Domains and TLDs
Country Code
Estonia EE
Ethiopia ET
Falkland Islands (Malvinas) FK
Faroe Islands FO
Federated States of Micronesia FM
Fiji FJ
Finland FI
France FR
French Guiana GF
French Polynesia PF
French Southern Territories TF
Gabon GA
Gambia GM
Georgia GE
Germany DE
Ghana GH
Gibraltar GI
Greece GR
Greenland GL
Grenada GD
Guadeloupe GP
Guam GU
Guatemala GT
Guernsey GG
Guinea GN
Guinea-Bissau GW
Guyana GY
Haiti HT
- 60 -
Domains and TLDs
Country Code
Heard & McDonald Islands HM
Holy See (Vatican City State) VA
Honduras HN
Hong Kong HK
Hungary HU
Iceland IS
India IN
Indonesia ID
Iran IR
Iraq IQ
Ireland IE
Isle of Man IM
Israel IL
Italy IT
Jamaica JM
Japan JP
Jersey JE
Jordan JO
Kazakhstan KZ
Kenya KE
Kiribati KI
(North) Korea, Democratic

KP
People's Republic of
(South) Korea, Republic of KR
Kuwait KW
Kyrgyzstan KG
Lao People's Democratic Republic LA
Latvia LV
- 61 -
Domains and TLDs
Country Code
Lebanon LB
Lesotho LS
Liberia LR
Libya (Libyan Arab Jamahiriya) LY
Liechtenstein LI
Lithuania LT
Luxembourg LU
Macao MO
Macedonia, the Former Yugoslav

MK
Republic of
Madagascar MG
Malawi MW
Malaysia MY
Maldives MV
Mali ML
Malta MT
Marshall Islands MH
Martinique MQ
Mauritania MR
Mauritius MU
Mayotte YT
Mexico MX
Micronesia, Federated States of FM
Moldova MD
Monaco MC
Mongolia MN
Montenegro ME
Montserrat MS
- 62 -
Domains and TLDs
Country Code
Morocco MA
Mozambique MZ
Myanmar MM
Namibia NA
Nauru NR
Nepal NP
Netherlands NL
Netherlands Antilles AN
New Caledonia NC
New Zealand NZ
Nicaragua NI
Niger NE
Nigeria NG
Niue NU
Norfolk Island NF
Northern Mariana Islands MP
Norway NO
Oman OM
Pakistan PK
Palau PW
Palestine (Palestinian Territory,

PS
occupied)
Panama PA
Papua New Guinea PG
Paraguay PY
Peru PE
Philippines PH
Pitcairn Islands PN
- 63 -
Domains and TLDs
Country Code
Poland PL
Portugal PT
Puerto Rico PR
Qatar QA
Runion RE
Romania RO
Russia RU
Rwanda RW
Saint Barthelemy BL
Saint Helena SH
Saint Kitts and Nevis KN
Saint Lucia LC
Saint Martin MF
Saint Pierre and Miquelon PM
Saint Vincent and the Grenadines VC
Samoa WS
San Marino SM
So Tom and Principe ST
Saudi Arabia SA
Senegal SN
Serbia RS
Seychelles SC
Sierra Leone SL
Singapore SG
Slovakia SK
Slovenia SI
Solomon Islands SB
Somalia SO
- 64 -
Domains and TLDs
Country Code
South Africa ZA
South Georgia and the South Sand-

GS
wich Islands
Spain ES
Sri Lanka LK
Sudan SD
Suriname SR
Svalbard and Jan Mayen Islands SJ
Swaziland SZ
Switzerland CH
Sweden SE
Taiwan TW
Tajikistan TJ
Tanzania TZ
Thailand TH
Timor-Leste TL
Togo TG
Tokelau TK
Tonga TO
Trinidad and Tobago TT
Tunisia TN
Turkey TR
Turkmenistan TM
Turks and Caicos Islands TC
Tuvalu TV
Uganda UG
Ukraine UA
United Arab Emirates AE
- 65 -
Domains and TLDs
Country Code
United Kingdom (Great Britain) GB
United States US
US Minor Outlying Islands UM
Uruguay UY
Uzbekistan UZ
Vanuatu VU
Vatican City State (Holy See) VA
Venezuela VE
Vietnam VN
British Virgin Islands VG
United States Virgin Islands VI
Wallis and Futuna WF
Western Sahara EH
Yemen YE
Zambia ZM
Zimbabwe ZW
Canadian province codes

Canadian province Code
Alberta AB
British Columbia BC
Manitoba MB
New Brunswick NB
Newfoundland and Labrador NL
Northwest Territories NT
Nova Scotia NS
Nunavut NU
- 66 -
Domains and TLDs
Canadian province Code

Ontario ON
Prince Edward Island PE
Quebec QC
Saskatchewan SK
Yukon YK
US state, territory, or region codes

US state, territory, or region
Code
Code
Armed Forces Americas
AA
(except Canada)
Armed Forces Africa

Armed Forces Canada
AE
Armed Forces Europe
Armed Forces Middle East
Alaska AK
Alabama AL
Armed Forces Pacific AP
American Samoa AS
Arizona AZ
Arkansas AR
California CA
Colorado CO
Connecticut CT
Delaware DE
District of Columbia DC
Federated States of Micronesia FM
Florida FL
Georgia GA
Guam GU
- 67 -
Domains and TLDs

Code
Code
Hawaii HI
Idaho ID
Illinois IL
Indiana IN
Iowa IA
Kansas KS
Kentucky KY
Louisiana LA
Maine ME
Marshall Islands MH
Maryland MD
Massachusetts MA
Michigan MI
Minnesota MN
Mississippi MS
Missouri MO
Montana MT
Nebraska NE
Nevada NV
New Hampshire NH
New Jersey NJ
New Mexico NM
New York NY
North Carolina NC
North Dakota ND
Northern Mariana Islands MP
Ohio OH
- 68 -
Domains and TLDs

Code
Code
Oklahoma OK
Oregon OR
Palau PW
Pennsylvania PA
Puerto Rico PR
Rhode Island RI
South Carolina SC
South Dakota SD
Tennessee TN
Texas TX
Utah UT
Vermont VT
Virgin Islands VI
Virginia VA
Washington WA
West Virginia WV
Wisconsin WI
Wyoming WY
.AU, .ES and .PE

- 69 -
Domains and TLDs
TLD Settings
.PE
.ES
.com.AU .com.PE
.com.ES
.net.AU .net.PE
.nom.ES
.org.AU .nom.PE
.org.ES
.org.PE

GetExtAttributes
Step 2 - Purchase
Real-time
Purchase
- 70 -
Domains and TLDs
Shopping cart
AddToCart
Com-
mand-
PreConfigure
&ResponseType=XML
InsertNewOrder
Agreement Pages
GetAgreementPage
- 71 -
Domains and TLDs
.EU Transfer
The .EU Registry (EURid) will be updating their transfer and trade system to bring it
more inline with general TLDs. This document outlines the key elements affecting the
eNom transfer and trade system.
Schedule
Production : November 21st, 2012
ResellerTest : November 1st, 2012
Changes
l Trade is no longer required for contact update
l Authorization Code is now required for transfer
SINGLE CALL
Use this method (preconfig=0) when all required information is ready and there is no
need to modify anything. The fully configured TP_CreateOrder command will CREATE
and SUBMIT the transfer request immediately.
TP_CreateOrder
command=TP_CreateOrder-
&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&domaincount=1
&order-
type=Autoverification&responsetype=xml&sld1=TestDomain
&tld1=eu&authinfo1=123ABC&EU_WhoisPolicy=I Agree&-
preconfig=0
MULTIPLE CALLS
Use this method (preconfig=1) for websites with multiple sequential pages in the transfer
and/or trade process, such as those found in a step-by-step entry or wizard, or those with
a "save for later" feature.
TP_CreateOrder
- 72 -
Domains and TLDs
command=TP_CreateOrder-
&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&domaincount=1
&order-
type=Autoverification&responsetype=xml&sld1=TestDomain
&tld1=eu&authinfo1=123ABC&EU_WhoisPolicy=I Agree&-
preconfig=1
Command=TP_UpdateOrderDetail&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&responsetype=xml&transferorderid=175584569
&addroid=yes&contacttype=registrant
&firstname=FirstName&lastname=LastName
&organizationname=MyOrganization
&jobtitle=TitleOfMyJob&address1=Address1&city=CityOfAPI
&stateprovince=Whereever&stateprovincechoice=P&country=UK
&postalcode=123ABC&phone=+44.383838383
&emailaddress=myemail@domain.com&EU_WhoisPolicy=I Agree
TP_SubmitOrder
Command=TP_SubmitOrder&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
.NU Registrant Requirements

What's changing
The .NU Registry has made changes to its domain name registration requirements. The
resellers are advised to incorporate these by September 2nd to avoid any issues/failures
around .NU registrations. Once we go live with this change, any Resellers who have not
included this extended attributes may see failures in processing .NU registrations.
The change requirements registrants to provide additional information at the time of regis-
tering a domain. In addition to current contact information, the following information is
required depending upon the location of registrant:
- 73 -
Domains and TLDs
l Swedish Resident: Registrants who are resident of Sweden should provide a valid
l Personal Identification Number, if registrant is an individual.
l Organization Identification Number, if the registrant is a corporation
registered in Sweden.
l VAT/Tax ID Number: If the registrant is a corporation, in addition to Cor-
poration ID, it can also optionally provide additional Tax/VAT Number.

l Non-Swedish Resident: Registrants who don't have a Swedish address are not
required to pass additional information.

Please note that although these attributes are OPTIONAL for domain registrant, NOT
providing these attributes could lead to an unsuccessful/failed registration.
Country
Sweden Others
Personal Organization Personal Organization
Country
Extended Attributes Code Sweden Others
Personal Organization Personal Organization
Personal/Organization
iis_orgno required required n/a n/a
ID Number
VAT Number iis_vatno n/a required n/a n/a
Timeline and test environment

l ResellerTest: August 01, 2013
l Production: September 02, 2013
Step 1 - Get Extended Attributes

GetExtAttributes
&Command=GetExtAttributes&TLD=NU
- 74 -
Domains and TLDs
Step 2 - Purchase
Real-time
Purchase
Command=Purchase&EndUserIP=123.123.123.123
&ResponseType=XML&UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw
&SLD-
=domaintest&TL-
LD=nu&NumYears=2&RegistrantOrganizationName=Bank
&RegistrantJobTitle=Manager&RegistrantFirstName=John
&RegistrantLastName=Smith&RegistrantAddress1=1st Ave
&RegistrantCity=Stockholm&RegistrantPostalCode=104 65
&RegistrantStateProvince=Stockholm
&RegistrantStateProvinceChoice=P&RegistrantCountry=SE
&RegistrantPhone=+46.1234567890
&RegistrantEmailAddress=admin@mydomain.com
&iis_orgno=690720-2017&iis_vatno=SE999999999901
Shopping cart
AddToCart
Command=AddToCart&UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw
&ProductType=Register&SLD=domaintest&TLD=nu
&Quantity=2&EndUserIP=123.123.123.123&ResponseType=XML
PreConfigure
&optadministrative=UseBilling&opttechnical=UseBilling
&optcontactaux=UseBilling&optcontactreg=1&iis_orgno=690720-
- 75 -
Domains and TLDs
2017
&iis_vatno=SE999999999901&EndUserIP=123.123.123.123
&ResponseType=XML
InsertNewOrder
Agreement Pages
GetAgreementPage
&ResponseType=XML&Page=nu
Related commands
l Contacts
l PreConfigure
l Purchase
.AU, .ES and .PE

- 76 -
Domains and TLDs
TLD Settings
.PE
.ES
.com.AU .com.PE
.com.ES
.net.AU .net.PE
.nom.ES
.org.AU .nom.PE
.org.ES
.org.PE

GetExtAttributes
Step 2 - Purchase
Real-time
Purchase
- 77 -
Domains and TLDs
Shopping cart
AddToCart
Com-
mand-
PreConfigure
&ResponseType=XML
InsertNewOrder
Agreement Pages
GetAgreementPage
- 78 -
Domains and TLDs
Nominet (.UK Registry) System Changes

Description
Definition
This document is designed to provide resellers with technical details about the changes
to the .UK name space. Nominet, the .UK Registry, has updated their Registry system to
support the ability for Resellers to register and renew .UK domain names for single or
multi-year terms.
Usage
Use this sample command to purchase a real-time domain registration (single or multi-
year terms).
Multi-Year Registrations and Renewals
Current Behavior
eNom's API requires all new .UK registrations and .UK renewals to be executed at a
two-year minimum.
New Behavior
lRegistrations: multi-year (1-10)
lRenewals: multi-year (1-10)
l Renewals availability: any time (no longer restricted to 6 months prior to expiration
date)
Required or Optional
This change is optional. Resellers do not have to update their systems for this change.
Our API will remain backwards compatible.
Dates
l ResellerTest Server : April 4th, 2012
l Live Server : May 1st, 2012
Real-Time Response
- 79 -
Domains and TLDs
Current Behavior
eNom's API currently operates in a non-real time manner for .UK. Our system centers on
a 1300 Response Code (RRPCode) for .UK registrations. Resellers send in their .UK
registration commands and expect to receive a 1300 Response Code. This code sig-
nifies that the registration is not real-time and thus the Reseller must "poll" the domain
and/or Order to confirm it has been processed by the Registry.
New Behavior
eNom will be eliminating the use of the 1300 Response Code for .UK registrations. We
will be updating our API to work in real-time with the .UK registry. Once we make this
change, our API will return a 200 Response Code (RRPCode). The 200 Response
Code indicates that the order was processed immediately. To be clear, we will no longer
return a 1300 Response Code for .UK after this change.
Required or Optional
This change is required. Once we go live with this change, any Resellers who have not
made this update will see failures in processing UK registrations. To ensure this does
not happen, we are giving Resellers a 60 Day Notice to accommodate this change.
Dates
l ResellerTest Server : April 4th, 2012
l Live Server : June 1st, 2012
API Real-Time Purchase Sample

Definition
Purchase a .UK domain name in real time
Base parameters
l SLD: second level domain name
l TLD: top level domain name
l NumYears: number of years to register the name. Permitted values are 1 to 10
Extended Attributes are required for all .UK domain name. Please use GetExtAttributes
command to get detailed information for the required parameters below.
Registered_For: legal type of registrant contact
UK_Legal_Type: company or person domain is registered for (this must be accurate and
CANNOT BE CHANGED)
UK_Reg_Opt_Out: hide registrant data in Nominet WHOIS
Query
- 80 -
Domains and TLDs
http://resellertest.enom.com/interface.asp?
UID=resellid&PW=resellpw&ResponseType=XML&Command=PURCHASE
&EndUserIP=123.123.123.123&UseDNS=default&NumYears=1
&Registered_For=MyName&UK_Legal_Type=IND&UK_Reg_Opt_Out=no
&TLD=co.uk&SLD=mydomain
Output
Old version:
<?xml version="1.0" ?>

<interface-response>
<OrderID>147805511</OrderID>
<TotalCharged>50.99</TotalCharged>
<RegistrantPartyID>{39AAA8C0-D019-
4690-1199-FD632BC123AA}
</RegistrantPartyID>
<RRPCode>1300</RRPCode>
<RRPText>Command completed
successfully - 147805511
</RRPText>
<Command>PURCHASE</Command>
<Language>eng</Language>
<ErrCount>0</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>0</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod>1</MinPeriod>
<MaxPeriod>10</MaxPeriod>
<Server>RESELLERTEST</Server>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable>False</IsLockable>
<IsRealTimeTLD>False</IsRealTimeTLD>
<TimeDifference>+00.00
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>3.781</ExecTime>
<Done>true</Done>
<RequestDateTime>4/1/2012 1:30:32
PM</RequestDateTime>
</interface-response>
New version:
- 81 -
Domains and TLDs
<RegistrantPartyID>{39AAA8C0-D019-
4690-1199-FD632BC123AA}
<RRPText>Command completed
successfully - 157804547
</RRPText>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsRealTimeTLD>True</IsRealTimeTLD>
<TimeDifference>+00.00
</TimeDifference>
<Done>true</Done>
<RequestDateTime>3/26/2012 2:10:31
PM</RequestDateTime>
Get extended attributes

Definition
Retrieve extended attributes required for registration
Base parameters
tld: co.uk, org.uk, etc...
Query
Command=GetExtAttributes&UID=resellid&PW=resellerpw
- 82 -
Domains and TLDs
&ResponseType=XML&TLD=co.uk
Output
<Attributes>
<Attribute>
<ID>6</ID>
<Name>uk_legal_type</Name>
<Application>2</Application>
<UserDefined>False</UserDefined>
<Required>1</Required>
<Description>Legal type of registrant contact</Description>
<IsChild>0</IsChild>
+ <Options>
......... <cut> .........
</Attribute>
</Attributes>
<Command>GETEXTATTRIBUTES</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<TimeDifference>+00.00</TimeDifference>
<Done>true</Done>
<RequestDateTime>3/26/2012 2:35:43 PM</RequestDateTime>
.xxx
This document is designed to provide resellers with technical details about the pro-
cesses for registering .XXX domain names.
- 83 -
Domains and TLDs
Purchase
Definition
Purchase a domain name in real time.
Base parameters
* Required:
sld: second level domain name
tld: top level domain name
* Optional: xxx_memberid: membership authorization token provided by ICM Registry. If
you do not have it yet, leave this blank and the ICM Registry will send an email to the
registrant contact email address with enrollment instructions. The domain will not
resolve until a valid token is submitted, but the domain can be registered. The domain
can be updated after registration with the token and will then resolve.
NOTE: If the registrant email address is already recognized by the registry as enrolled
in the sponsored community, the registry will not send another email to the registrant con-
tact. The registrant must get their token from www.icmregistry.com if they do not know it.
MemberID must be valid. Otherwise registry will reject the domain registration with
Contact error as follow:
<RRPText>Object does not exist; Failed Finding: Contact
(IXXKCQ8Q2WEE;membership)</RRPText>
xxx_resolving: allowed values are 0 and 1(default). Setting this value to 0 will set the
domain to not resolving after successful registration. ICM Registry will not send a com-
munity membership enrollment email to registrant email address if it is set to 0.
Query
command=PURCHASE&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&responsetype=XML
&SLD=mydomain&TLD=xxx&NumYears=1&xxx_mem-
berid=IXSEFK023FFPZVA
&xxx_resolving=1
Output
- 84 -
Domains and TLDs
<TotalCharged>80</TotalCharged>
<RegistrantPartyID>{39AE68C0-D019-4690-9999-FD632BC1AFAA}
<RRPText>Command completed successfully -
157778008</RRPText>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable>True</IsLockable>
<Done>true</Done>
<RequestDateTime>11/11/2011 9:31:49 AM</RequestDateTime>
Preconfigure
Definition
Supply optional and required parameters at time of registration pertaining to the domain
name.
Base parameters (optional):
xxx_memberid: membership authorization token provided by ICM Registry. If you do not
have it yet, leave this blank and the ICM Registry will send an email to the registrant con-
tact email address with enrollment instructions. The domain will not resolve until a valid
token is submitted, but the domain can be registered. The domain can be updated after
registration with the token and will then resolve.
NOTE: If the registrant email address is already recognized by the registry as enrolled
in the sponsored community, the registry will not send another email to the registrant con-
tact. The registrant must get their token from www.icmregistry.com if they do not know it.
- 85 -
Domains and TLDs
xxx_resolving: allowed values are 0 and 1(default). Setting this value to 0 will set the
domain to not resolving after successful registration. ICM Registry will not send Com-
munity Membership email to registrant email address if it set to 0.
Query
Command=PRECONFIGURE&opttechnical= UseBilling&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&responsetype=xml&load=2&preconfigdns=default
&listcount=1&optadministrative=UseBilling
&optcontactaux=UseBilling&optcontactreg=1
&cartitemid0=885655&xxx_memberid=IXSEFK023FFPZVA
&xxx_resolving=1
Output
<PreConfigBillingInfo>
<BillingOrganizationName>A Team</BillingOrganizationName>
<BillingJobTitle>Tester</BillingJobTitle>
<BillingFirstName>First</BillingFirstName>
<BillingLastName>Last</BillingLastName>
<BillingAddress1>5808 Lake Washington Blvd.</BillingAd-
dress1>
<BillingAddress2 />
<BillingCity>Kirkland</BillingCity>
<BillingStateProvince>WA</BillingStateProvince>
<BillingStateProvinceChoice>S</BillingStateProvinceChoice>
<BillingPostalCode>98033</BillingPostalCode>
<BillingCountry>US</BillingCountry>
<BillingPhone>+1.42500000000</BillingPhone>
<BillingFax />
<BillingE-
mailAddress>someone@domain.com</BillingEmailAddress>
</PreConfigBillingInfo>
<NoService>False</NoService>
<PreConfigSuccess>1</PreConfigSuccess>
<UseOurDNS>True</UseOurDNS>
<NameServers></NameServers>
<defaulthostrecords></defaulthostrecords>
<defaulthostrecordown>False</defaulthostrecordown>
<PreConfigDNS>default</PreConfigDNS>
<AutoRenew>0</AutoRenew>
- 86 -
Domains and TLDs
<RegLock>1</RegLock>
<UseBilling>1</UseBilling>
<PreConfigDNS>default</PreConfigDNS>
<UseTech-Billing>1</UseTech-Billing>
<UseAdmin-Billing>1</UseAdmin-Billing>
<Registrant></Registrant>
<AdminBilling></AdminBilling>
<TechBilling></TechBilling>
<AuxBilling></AuxBilling>
<AccessPassword></AccessPassword>
<TLDS>
<TLD>
<TLD>xxx</TLD>
<TLDID>255</TLDID>
<Attributes>
<Attribute>
</Attributes>
</TLD>
<Count>1</Count>
</TLDS>
<Domains>
<Domain>
<SLD>mydomain</SLD>
<TLD>xxx</TLD>
<DomainID>152931321</DomainID>
<EncodingID />
<ItemID>886894</ItemID>
</Domain>
<Count>1</Count>
<IDNCount>0</IDNCount>
</Domains>
<PreviousContacts>
<Contact>
<TLD>xxx</TLD>
<ExtAttributes />
</Contact>
</PreviousContacts>
<Command>PRECONFIGURE</Command>
- 87 -
Domains and TLDs
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
Get extended attributes

Definition
Retrieve extended attributes required for domain pre-registration.
Base parameters
tld:xxx
Query
Command=GetExtAttributes& UID=resellid&PW=resellerpw
&ResponseType=XML&TLD=xxxOutput:
Output
<Attributes>
<Attribute>
<ID>191</ID>
<Name>xxx_memberid</Name>
<UserDefined>True</UserDefined>
<Description>Association MemberID used by xxx registry</De-
scription>
<Options />
</Attribute>
- 88 -
Domains and TLDs
<Attribute>
<ID>192</ID>
<Name>xxx_resolving</Name>
<Description>Do nameservers resolve at root?</Description>
<Options>
<Option>
<ID>1528</ID>
<Value>1</Value>
<Title>NameServers resolve at root</Title>
<Description>NameServers resolve</Description>
</Option>
<Option>
<ID>1529</ID>
<Value>nonResolver</Value>
<Title>Unresolving NameServers</Title>
<Description>NameServers do not resolve at root</De-
scription>
</Option>
</Options>
</Attribute>
</Attributes>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
Membership
Definition
- 89 -
Domains and TLDs
Add, remove and set member authorization token.

If you need to replace a domain memberID with a new one, you need to remove the exist-
ing one assigned to the domain, and then add (set) the new memberID.
Base parameters (required)
sld: second level domain name
tld: top level domain name
memberID: must be a valid ID. Registry will validate during execution.
Query
https:resellertest.enom.com/interface.asp?
Command=XXX_GETMEMBERID&UID=resellid&PW=resellerpw
&ResponseType=XML&sld=mydomain&tld=xxx
Command=XXX_REMOVEMEMBERID&UID=resellid
&PW=resellerpw&ResponseType=XML&memberid=IXAE1234BDUP22FAUG
&sld=mydomain&tld=xxx
Command=XXX_SETMEMBERID&UID=resellid&PW=resellerpw
&ResponseType=XML&memberid=IXAE1234BDUP22FAUG
&sld=mydomain&tld=xxx
Output

<DomainNameID><![CDATA[ 345105737]]></DomainNameID>
<MemberID><![CDATA[ 123]]> </MemberID>
<FullName />
<EmailAddress />
<Resolving><![CDATA[ True]]></Resolving>
<Success><![CDATA[ True]]></Success>
- 90 -
Domains and TLDs
<Command><![CDATA[ XXX_GETMEMBERID]]></Command>
<Language><![CDATA[ eng]]</Language>
<ErrCount><![CDATA[ 0]]></ErrCount>
<ResponseCount><![CDATA[ 0]]></ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod><![CDATA[ 1]]></MinPeriod>
<MaxPeriod><![CDATA[ 10]]></MaxPeriod>
<Server><![CDATA[ RESELLERTEST]]></Server>
<Site><![CDATA[ eNom]]></Site>
<IsLockable><![CDATA[ True ]]> </IsLockable>
<IsRealTimeTLD><![CDATA[ True]]> </IsRealTimeTLD>
<TimeDifference><![CDATA[ +3.00]]></TimeDifference>
<ExecTime><![CDATA[ 0.063]]> </ExecTime>
<Done><![CDATA[ true]]></Done>
.XXX Transfer
Description
Definition
This document is designed to provide resellers with a quick guide about the processes
for transferring .XXX domain names.
Usage
Use this command to create an order to transfer domains from another registrar to eNom
or one of its resellers. There are two methods of transfers. First method, create and sub-
mit a transfer order in one command (quick transfer). Second method consist of few
steps: create, configure and submit.
Quick transfer
Definition
Create and submit domain(s) transfer in one command.
Base parameters
* Required:
SLDx: second level domain name (X=1 to DomainCount)
TLDx: top level domain name (X=1 to DomainCount)
- 91 -
Domains and TLDs
AuthInfox: current ("losing") registrar's authorization key

DomainCount: the number of domain names to be submitted on the order. This number
must match the actual number of names submitted
OrderType: permitted values are Autoverification or Fax
* Optional:
XXX_MemberID: membership authorization token provided by ICM Registry. If left
blank, the domain will still be transferred with the current value. You can update it using
XXX_SetMemberID after the domain transferred successfully.
Query
UID=resellid&pw=resellpw&SLD1=mydomain&TLD1=xxx
&AuthInfo1=1234ABCD&XXX_Mem-
berID1=IXA12S3UPFA2&SLD2=yourdomain
&TLD2=xxx &AuthInfo2=ABCD1234&XXX_MemberID2=IX22WDDPHMY21TZ
&DomainCount=2&ResponseType=XML&UseContacts=1
&Command=TP_CreateOrder&OrderType=Autoverification
Output
<success>True</success>
<transferorder>
<transferorderid>175625387</transferorderid>
<orderdate>1/1/2012 11:11:11 AM</orderdate>
<ordertypeid>1</ordertypeid>
<ordertypedesc>Auto Verification</ordertypedesc>
<statusid>9</statusid>
<statusdesc>Processing</statusdesc>
<authamount>400</authamount>
<version>1</version>
<transferorderdetail>
<transferorderdetailid>77458527</transferorderdetailid>
<sld>mydomain</sld>
<tld>xxx</tld>
- 92 -
Domains and TLDs
<statusdesc>Awaiting auto verification of transfer

request</statusdesc>
<price>200</price>
<usecontacts>1</usecontacts>
</transferorderdetail>
<sld>yourdomain</sld>
<tld>xxx</tld>
<price>200</price>
<transferorderdetailcount>2</transferorderdetailcount>
</transferorder>
<Command>TP_CREATEORDER</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
Pre-Configuration method
Definition
Create, configure and submit domain(s) transfer. This method is used to support step-by-
step domain(s) transfer configuration.
- 93 -
Domains and TLDs
1. TP_CreateOrder
Base parameters
* Required:
SLDx: second level domain name (X=1 to DomainCount)
TLDx: top level domain name (X=1 to DomainCount)
AuthInfox: current (losing) registrar's authorization key
OrderType: permitted values are Autoverification or Fax
PreConfig: set PreConfig=1 allows you to use TP_UpdateOrderDetail to modify
DomainPassword, Lock, Renew, Contacts, and extended attributes before submitting
the order. When you are ready to submit the order, call TP_SubmitOrder.
Query
command=TP_CreateOrder&TLD1=xxx&SLD1=mydomain&DomainCount=1
&Order-
Type=Autoverification&AuthInfo1=123ABCD&responsetype=xml
&UID=resellid&PW=resellepw&preconfig=1
Output
<transferorder>
<orderdate>1/11/2012 1:1:11 PM</orderdate>
<statusdesc>Order not submitted</statusdesc>
<authamount>100</authamount>
<sld>mydomain</sld>
<tld>xxx</tld>
<statusdesc>Transfer request not yet submitted</statusdesc>
- 94 -
Domains and TLDs
<price>80</price>
</transferorder>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<RequestDateTime>1/11/2012 1:1:11 PM </RequestDateTime>
2. TP_UpdateOrderDetail
You can use this command to update multiple domain names. Each item must be in
comma delimited format and the total item of each category must be matched. If you
need to update other parameters such as Registrar Lock, Auto-Renew and so on, please
refer to TP_UpdateOrderDetail detailed information in the API Catalog.
Here are few combinations:
VALID:
lTransferOrderDetailID=175625417&xxx_memberid=
l TransferOrderDetailID=175625417&xxx_memberid=1111
l TransferOrderDetailID=175625417,175625418&xxx_memberid=1111,
l TransferOrderDetailID=175625417,175625418,175625419&xxx_mem-
berid=1111,,
berid=1111,,3333
berid=,,3333
NOT VALID:
- 95 -
Domains and TLDs
lTransferOrderDetailID=175625417,175625418&xxx_memberid=1111
berid=1111,2222
Base parameters
* Required:
Update: type of update for this command. In this case, Update=XXX_MemberID
TransferOrderDetailID: transfer order ID number. Use the TP_GetOrder command to
retrieve this value
* Optional:
xxx_memberid: membership authorization token provided by ICM Registry
Query
&Command=TP_UpdateOrderDetail&update=xxx_memberid
&TransferOrderDetailID=175625417,175625418&xxx_mem-
berid=,2222
Output
<TransferOrders>
<TransferOrder>
<OrderDetailID>175625417</OrderDetailID>
<XXX_MemberID />
<UpdateSuccess>True</UpdateSuccess>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
<XXX_MemberID>2222</XXX_MemberID>
<UpdateSuccess>True</UpdateSuccess>
</TransferOrder>
</TransferOrders>
<Command>TP_UPDATEORDERDETAIL</Command>
- 96 -
Domains and TLDs
<MinPeriod />
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
3. TP_SubmitOrder
Base parameters
* Required:
TransferOrderID: transfer order ID number. To retrieve this value, use the TP_GetOrder-
Statuses command
Query
Command=TP_SubmitOrder&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
Output
<Command>TP_SUBMITORDER</Command>
<MinPeriod />
- 97 -
Domains and TLDs
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
- 98 -
API Command Categories
These categories separate the API commands into groups based on functionality. Click
on any link to be redirected to the reference page for that command.
Domain Registration
l AddBulkDomains
l Check
l DeleteRegistration
l GetAgreementPage
l GetConfirmationSettings
l GetExtAttributes
l GetTLDList
l NameSpinner
l Preconfigure
l Purchase
Domain RegistrationPremium Domains

l NM_CancelOrder
l NM_ExtendOrder
l NM_GetPremiumDomainSettings
l NM_GetSearchCategories
l NM_ProcessOrder
l NM_Search
l NM_SetPremiumDomainSettings
Domain ManagementHost Records

l GetDomainSRVHosts
l GetHosts
l GetMetaTag
- 99 -
l GetRegHosts
l GetSPFHosts
l SetDomainSRVHosts
l SetHosts
l SetSPFHosts
l UpdateMetaTag
Domain ManagementName Servers

l CheckNSStatus
l DeleteNameServer
l GetDNS
l GetDNSStatus
l GetHomeDomainList
l ModifyNS
l ModifyNSHosting
l RegisterNameServer
l SetDNSHost
l UpdateNameServer
Domain ManagementContacts
l Contacts
l GetContacts
l GetExtAttributes
l GetWhoisContact
l GetWPPSInfo
Domain ManagementGeneral
l AdvancedDomainSearch
l GetAllDomains
l GetDomainCount
l GetDomainExp
l GetDomainInfo
l GetDomainNameID
l GetDomains
l GetDomainSLDTLD
l GetDomainStatus
l GetExpiredDomains
l GetExtendInfo
l GetHomeDomainList
l GetPasswordBit
l GetRegistrationStatus
l GetRegLock
- 100 -
l GetRenew
l GetSubAccountPassword
l ParseDomain
l RPT_GetReport
l SetPassword
l SetRegLock
l SetRenew
l StatusDomain
l ValidatePassword
Domain ManagementMagic Folders

l AddDomainFolder
l AssignToDomainFolder
l DeleteDomainFolder
l GetDomainFolderDetail
l GetDomainFolderList
l RemoveUnsyncedDomains
l UpdateDomainFolder
Domain Management.tel
l TEL_AddCTHUser
l TEL_GetCTHUserInfo
l TEL_GetCTHUserList
l TEL_GetPrivacy
l TEL_IsCTHUser
l TEL_UpdateCTHUser
l TEL_UpdatePrivacy
Domain ManagementWatchlist
l TLD_AddWatchlist
l TLD_DeleteWatchlist
l TLD_GetTLD
l TLD_GetWatchlist
Domain Management.xxx
l XXX_GetMemberID
l XXX_RemoveMemberID
l XXX_SetMemberID
- 101 -
Domain Renewal
l Extend
l Extend_RGP
l GetDomainExp
l GetExtendInfo
l GetRenew
l InsertNewOrder
l SetRenew
l UpdateExpiredDomains
l UpdateRenewalSettings
Domain Transfer
l PE_GetTLDID
l PE_SetPricing
l PushDomain
l RefillAccount
l SetResellerServicesPricing
l SetResellerTLDPricing
l SynchAuthInfo
l TP_CancelOrder
l TP_CreateOrder
l TP_GetDetailsByDomain
l TP_GetOrder
l TP_GetOrderDetail
l TP_GetOrderReview
l TP_GetOrdersByDomain
l TP_GetOrderStatuses
l TP_GetTLDInfo
l TP_ResendEmail
l TP_ResubmitLocked
l TP_SubmitOrder
l UpdateAccountPricing
l UpdatePushList
DNS Hosting
l DeleteHostedDomain
l ExtendDomainDNS
l PurchaseHosting
l SetDNSHost
- 102 -
Domain Services
l DisableServices
l EnableServices
l GetDomainServices
l GetHomeDomainList
l GetIPResolver
l PurchaseServices
l RenewServices
l ServiceSelect
l SetIPResolver
Service ManagementIdentity Protection

l DisableServices
l EnableServices
l GetWPPSInfo
l RenewServices
Service ManagementSSL Certificates

l CertConfigureCert
l CertGetApproverEmail
l CertGetCertDetail
l CertGetCerts
l CertModifyOrder
l CertParseCSR
l CertPurchaseCert
l GetCerts
Service ManagementTRUSTe Privacy Policy

l PP_CancelSubscription
l PP_CheckUpgrade
l PP_GetCancelReasons
l PP_GetControlPanelLoginURL
l PP_GetStatuses
l PP_GetSubscriptionDetails
l PP_GetSubscriptions
l PP_ReactivateSubscription
l PP_UpdateSubscriptionDetails
l PP_ValidatePassword
- 103 -
Service ManagementVeriSign Trust Seal

l TS_AutoRenew
l TS_Configure
l TS_GetAccountDetail
l TS_GetAccounts
Service ManagementGeoTrust Anti-Malware

l AM_AutoRenew
l AM_Configure
l AM_GetAccountDetail
l AM_GetAccounts
l AM_Renew
Service ManagementSiteLock
l GetProductSelectionList
l SL_AutoRenew
l SL_Configure
l SL_GetAccountDetail
l SL_GetAccounts
Service ManagementRichContent
l RC_CancelSubscription
l RC_FreeTrialCheck
l RC_GetLoginToken
l RC_GetSubscriptionDetails
l RC_GetSubscriptions
l RC_RebillSubscription
l RC_ResetPassword
l RC_SetBillingCycle
l RC_SetPassword
l RC_SetSubscriptionDomain
l RC_SetSubscriptionName
Service ManagementBusiness Listing

l WBLConfigure
l WBLGetCategories
l WBLGetFields
l WBLGetStatus
- 104 -
Service ManagementEmail Services

l DeleteAllPOPPaks
l DeletePOP3
l DeletePOPPak
l DisableServices
l EnableServices
l Forwarding
l GetCatchAll
l GetDotNameForwarding
l GetForwarding
l GetMailHosts
l GetPOP3
l GetPOPExpirations
l GetPOPForwarding
l ModifyPOP3
l PurchasePOPBundle
l RenewPOPBundle
l SetCatchAll
l SetDotNameForwarding
l SetPakRenew
l SetPOPForwarding
l SetUpPOP3User
Service ManagementWeb Site Creator

l WSC_GetAccountInfo
l WSC_GetAllPackages
l WSC_GetPricing
l WSC_Update_Ops
Service ManagementgoMobi
l GM_CancelSubscription
l GM_CheckDomain
l GM_GetCancelReasons
l GM_GetControlPanelLoginURL
l GM_GetRedirectScript
l GM_GetStatuses
l GM_GetSubscriptionDetails
l GM_GetSubscriptions
l GM_ReactivateSubscription
l GM_RenewSubscription
l GM_UpdateBillingCycle
l GM_UpdateSubscriptionDetails
- 105 -
Account
l AddContact
l AuthorizeTLD
l CheckLogin
l CreateAccount
l CreateSubAccount
l DeleteContact
l DeleteSubaccount
l GetAccountInfo
l GetAccountPassword
l GetAccountValidation
l GetAddressBook
l GetAllAccountInfo
l GetCusPreferences
l GetCustomerPaymentInfo
l GetGlobalChangeStatus
l GetGlobalChangeStatusDetail
l GetOrderDetail
l GetOrderList
l GetReport
l GetResellerInfo
l GetServiceContact
l GetSubAccountDetails
l GetSubAccounts
l GetSubaccountsDetailList
l GetTLDList
l GetTransHistory
l GetWebHostingAll
l RemoveTLD
l RPT_GetReport
l SendAccountEmail
l SubAccountDomains
l UpdateAccountInfo
l UpdateCusPreferences
Accounting
l CommissionAccount
l GetBalance
l PE_GetCustomerPricing
l PE_GetDomainPricing
l PE_GetPOPPrice
l PE_GetProductPrice
- 106 -
l PE_GetResellerPrice
l PE_GetRetailPrice
l PE_GetRetailPricing
l PE_GetRocketPrice
l RefillAccount
l UpdateNotificationAmount
Shopping Cart
l AddBulkDomains
l AddToCart
l DeleteFromCart
l GetCartContent
l InsertNewOrder
l PurchasePreview
l UpdateCart
Real-Time Purchase
l Extend
l Extend_RGP
l Purchase
l PurchaseHosting
l PurchasePOPBundle
l PurchaseServices
l RenewPOPBundle
l RenewServices
l TP_CreateOrder
l TP_ResubmitLocked
l TP_SubmitOrder
Reporting commands
l DeleteCustomerDefinedData
l GetCustomerDefinedData
l GetOrderDetail
l GetOrderList
l GetReport
l GetTLDList
l GetTransHistory
l RPT_GetReport
l SetCustomerDefinedData
- 107 -
Customer Support
l GetServiceContact
Web Hosting Packages

l CalculateAllHostPackagePricing
l CalculateHostPackagePricing
l GetAllResellerHostPricing
l GetResellerHostPricing
l HostPackageDefine
l HostPackageDelete
l HostPackageModify
l HostPackageView
l UpdateHostPackagePricing
l WebHostGetCartItem
l WebHostGetPackageComponentList
l WebHostGetPackageMinimums
l WebHostGetPackages
l WebHostGetResellerPackages
l WebHostSetCustomPackage
Web Site Creator packages

l WSC_GetPricing
l WSC_Update_Ops
Web Hosting Accounts and Accounting

l CancelHostAccount
l CreateHostAccount
l GetAllHostAccounts
l GetHostAccount
l GetHostAccounts
l GetStorageUsage
l WebHostGetOverageOptions
l WebHostGetOverages
l WebHostGetStats
- 108 -
l WebHostSetOverageOptions
l WebHostUpdatePassword
Web contentdirectories and files

l GetFilePermissions
l HostParkingPage
l ListWebFiles
l SetFilePermissions
l WebHostCreateDirectory
l WebHostHelpInfo
Domain Headers
Associating a domain name with a Web hosting account
l AddDomainHeader
l DeleteDomainHeader
l GetDomainHeader
l ListDomainHeaders
l ModifyDomainHeader
Host Headers
l AddHostHeader
l DeleteHostHeader
l GetHostHeader
l ListHostHeaders
l ModifyHostHeader
IIS Applications
l DisableFolderApp
l EnableFolderApp
l IsFolderEnabled
l MetaBaseGetValue
l MetaBaseSetValue
POP3 Email in Web Hosting Packages

l WebHostCreatePOPBox
l WebHostDeletePOPBox
l WebHostGetPOPBoxes
l WebHostHelpInfo
l WebHostUpdatePOPPassword
- 109 -
SQL Database
l MySQL_GetDBInfo
AddBulkDomains
Description
Definition
Add a list of items to the shopping cart.
Usage
Use this command when you want to add multiple items to the shopping cart.
Availability
All resellers have access to this command.
Implementation on eNom.com
Log on to resellertest.enom.com with Login ID resellid, password resellpw.
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/ListRegister.asp
On the Batch register page, the add to cart button calls the AddBulkDomains command.
Constraints
The domain names in your list must meet the following requirements:
The domain names must be valid (see the domain-name constraints under Check).
The domain names must use a supported top-level domain.
The number of SLDs must match the number of TLDs.
Input parameters
- 110 -
Build the query string using this syntax:

https://resellertest.enom.com/interface.asp?command=
addbulkdomains&uid=YourAccountID&pw=
YourAccountPassword&producttype=register&listcount=
NumberDomainsToAdd&sld1=FirstSLD&tld1=FirstTLD&sld2=
SecondSLD&tld2=SecondTLD&sld3=thirdSLD&tld3=
ThirdTLD&responsetype=xml
Parameter Status Description Max Size
UID Required Account login ID 20
PW Required Account password 20
Type of product to add. Options are

ProductType Required 16
register or renew.
ListCount Required Number of names to add 4
SLDX Second-level domain name, for example,

Required 63
(X=1 to listcount) resellerdocs in resellerdocs.com
TLDX Top-level domain name, for example,

Required 15
(X=1 to listcount) com in resellerdocs.com
numyearsX
Optional Number of years to renew 1
(X=1 to listcount)
Auto-renew setting for all domains in this

Optional; order. If AutoRenew=1, domains auto-
AutoRenew 1
default is 0 matically update 30 days before expir-
ation
Registrar lock setting for all domains in

Optional; this order. If RegLock=1, domain cannot
RegLock 1
default is 1 be transferred to another registrar without
account holders permission
Use the shopping cart for this order. Per-

mitted values are 0 and 1. If UseCart=1,
this bulk list will go into the shopping cart
and be processed through our queue; our
UseCart=1 is
system does not return an order ID until
Required if UID is
all names have been processed. If
UseCart a retail account, 1
UseCart=0, our system returns an order
otherwise
ID and locks up the entire funds for the
Optional.
order immediately; the funds remain
locked until all names in the list are pro-
cessed. UseCart=1 is required if UID is
a retail account.
ResponseType Optional Format of response. Permitted values 4
- 111 -

are Text (default), HTML, or XML.
Returned parameters and values

Parameter Description
Command Name of command executed
The number of errors if any occurred. If greater than 0 check

ErrCountX
the Err(1 to ErrCount) values.
Error messages explaining the failure. These can be presented

ErrX
as is back to the client.
True indicates this entire response has reached you suc-

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l The default response format is plain text. To receive the response in HTML or XML
format, send ResponseType=HTML or ResponseType=XML in your request.
l Check the return parameter ErrCount. If greater than 0 the transaction failed. The
parameter Err(ErrCount) can be presented to the client. Otherwise process the
returned parameters as defined above.
Example
The following query adds resellerdocs.com, resellerdocs2.net, and resellerdocs3.info to
the shopping cart of account resellid, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
https://re-
sellertest.enom.com/interface.asp?command=addbulkdomains&
uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&producttype=register&listcount=3&
sld1=resellerdocs&tld1=com&sld2=resellerdocs2&tld2=net&
sld3=resellerdocs3&tld3=info&responsetype=xml
The response is as follows:

Output
- 112 -
<AddBulkDomains>
<Item>
<WscAccountOverride>False</WscAccountOverride>
<ItemName>resellerdocs1314.com</ItemName>
<ItemId>889487</ItemId>
<Price>8.95</Price>
<ICANNFees>0.20</ICANNFees>
<CartItemID>889487</CartItemID>
<NewDomainNameID>152933101</NewDomainNameID>
<ItemAdded>True</ItemAdded>
<DomainName>resellerdocs1314.com</DomainName>
</Item>
<Item>
<ItemName>resellerdocs465442.net</ItemName>
<Price>8.95</Price>
<DomainName>resellerdocs465442.net</DomainName>
</Item>
<Item>
<ItemName>resellerdoc213131s3.info</ItemName>
<Price>8.95</Price>
<DomainName>resellerdoc213131s3.info</DomainName>
</Item>
<ListCount>3</ListCount>
<CartErrors>0</CartErrors>
<AllItemsSuccessful>True</AllItemsSuccessful>
<CartItems>6</CartItems>
</AddBulkDomains>
<Success>True</Success>
<UseCart>True</UseCart>
- 113 -
<Command>ADDBULKDOMAINS</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Server>sjl21wresellt01</Server>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>845c0d1a-608a-49b4-bc5e-6694d-
b329877</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l AddToCart
l Check
l DeleteFromCart
l GetCartContent
l InsertNewOrder
l Purchase
l PurchasePreview
l UpdateCart
AddContact
Description
Definition
Add a contact to the address book for an account.
Usage
Use this command to add a contact to the address book for an account.
To retrieve the contacts in an address book, use the GetAddressBook command.
- 114 -
Availability
This command is not implemented on enom.com.
Constraints
The query must meet the following requirements:
The login ID and password must be valid.
Input parameters
https://re-
sellertest.enom.com/interface.asp?command=nameofcommand&uid=
yourloginid&pw=yourpassword&paramname=
paramvalue&nextparamname=nextparamvalue

RegistrantOrganizationName Optional Registrant organization 60
RegistrantJobTitle Optional Registrant job title 60
RegistrantFirstName Required Registrant first name 60
RegistrantLastName Required Registrant last name 60
RegistrantAddress1 Required Registrant address 60
RegistrantAddress2 Optional Registrant additional address info 60
RegistrantCity Required Registrant city 60
RegistrantPostalCode Required Registrant postal code 16
RegistrantStateProvince Optional Registrant state or province 60
Registrant state or province

RegistrantStateProvinceChoice choice:
Optional 1
l S state
l P province
- 115 -

RegistrantCountry Optional Registrant country 60
Registrant phone number.

Required format is +Coun-
tryCode.PhoneNumber, where
RegistrantPhone Required CountryCode and PhoneNumber 20
use only numeric characters and
the + is URL-encoded as a plus
sign (%2B).
Registrant fax number. Required

format is +Coun-
RegistrantFax Optional CountryCode and PhoneNumber 20
sign (%2B).
RegistrantEmailAddress Required Email address for Whois 128
Format of response. Permitted val-

ResponseType Optional ues are Text (default), HTML, or 4
XML.

PartyID Party ID number for this contact, assigned by us

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 116 -
format, sendResponseType=HTML or ResponseType=XML in your request.
Example
The following query adds a party to the address book for account resellid and sends the
response in XML format:
Query
https://re-
sellertest.enom.com/interface.asp?command=addcontact&
uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&RegistrantFirstName=john
&Re-
gistrantLastName=doe&RegistrantAddress1=111%20Main%20Street
&RegistrantAddress2=Suite%20100&
RegistrantCity=Hometown&RegistrantStateProvince=WA
&Re-
gis-
trantStateProvinceChoice=state&RegistrantPostalCode=99999
&RegistrantCountry=us&RegistrantPhone=+800.5554444&
RegistrantFax=+800.5554445&RegistrantEmailAddress=
john.doe@resellerdocs.com&responsetype=xml
In the response, a Party ID and an ErrCount value of 0 confirm that the query was suc-
cessful:
Output
<Contact>
<RegistrantPartyID>{2B3CFB2C-7125-E111-A3F0-005056BC7747}
</Contact>
<Command>ADDCONTACT</Command>
- 117 -
<MinPeriod/>
<Server>SJL21WRESELLT01</Server>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l Contacts
l GetAddressBook
l GetContacts
l GetExtAttributes
l GetResellerInfo
l GetServiceContact
l GetWhoisContact
l Preconfigure
AddDomainFolder
Description
Definition
Create a folder for organizing or managing your domain names.
Usage
Use this command to create either a Standard folder that simply lets you organize your
domains, or a Magic folder that allows you to apply the same settings to all the domains
in the folder.
This command creates folders; another command, UpdateDomainFolder, configures
their settings. Settings that can be managed via a Magic folder include the following, in
any combination:
- 118 -
l Auto-renew
l Registrar lock
l Access password
l DNS servers
l Host records
l Contact information (any combination of Registrant, Administrative, Auxiliary
Billing, Technical)
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/Domain-Manager.aspx?tab=folder&start=1
In the Create a new folder section, the GO button calls the AddDomainFolder command.
Constraints
l The login ID and password must be valid.
Input parameters
https://re-
sellertest.enom.com/interface.asp?command=nameofcommand&
uid=yourloginid&pw=yourpassword&paramname=

Folder name. Permitted characters are

letters, numbers, hyphens, underscores,
FolderName Required 125
and spaces; name must begin with a let-
ter or number.
FolderDescription Optional Description of folder or contents 256
Type of folder to create. Permitted val-

Optional; default is ues:
FolderType 1
0
l 0 Standard folder (for organizing
- 119 -

and sorting)
l 1 Magic folder (a folder that allows
you to manage settings of
domains)
Copy a folder into this folder, as well as

leaving it in the folder list. Permitted val-
CopyFolderName Optional 125
ues are names of existing folders in this
account.
Copy one domain that is in another

folder, and put it also in this folder. A
CopyDomainName Optional domain can only be in one Magic folder at 70
a time. The domain must be in this
account. Permitted format is sld.tld
Format of response. Permitted values

ResponseType Optional 4

FolderID Identification number assigned by our database
FolderName Folder name, as assigned by you
Folder type. 0 indicates Standard folder, 1 indicates Magic

FolderType
folder.
FolderDescription Folder description, as typed by you
Result of running this query string. Values are:
Result l 0 Folder was not created

l 1 Folder was created successfully
l 2 A folder with this name already exists

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 120 -
Notes
parameterErr(ErrCount) can be presented to the client. Otherwise process the
Example
The following query creates a new folder and sends the response in XML format:
Query
https://re-
sellertest.enom.com/interface.asp?command=AddDomainFolder&
uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&FolderName=Favorites&
FolderDescription=FolderForMyFavoriteNames&FolderType=1&
CopyFolder-
Name=Subfavorites&CopyDomainName=resellerdocs.com&
responsetype=XML
In the response, the presence of your input values and an ErrCount value 0 indicate that
the query was successful:
Output
<ItemName>resellerdocs1.com</ItemName>
<ItemId/>
<Price>8.95</Price>
<Command>ADDTOCART</Command>
- 121 -
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
AddDomainHeader
Description
Definition
Associate a domain name with a Web hosting account.
Usage
You must create at least one domain header to publish a Web site for the domain name.
You may create additional domain headers if you want more than one domain name in
your Web hosting account.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/wsg/hostingdomains.asp?HostAccount=resellwebid
- 122 -
The add button calls the AddDomainHeader command.
Constraints
l The Web hosting account must belong to this account.
l The domain header must not already exist.
l The domain designated by the SLD and TLD parameters must be hosted by us.
l If we are the registrar for this domain, it must be in this account.
l This command does not create a directory, and allows you to point to a directory
that does not exist.
Input parameters
https://re-
uid=yourloginid&pw=yourpassword& par-
amname=paramvalue&nextparamname=nextparamvalue

Second-level domain name (for example,

SLD Required enom in enom.com) that you want to asso- 63
ciate with this domainheader
Top-level domain name (extension) that you

TLD Required 15
want to associate with this domain header
Third level of a domain name, such as www in

HostName Optional 14
www.resellerdocs.com
The name of the Web hosting account to

HostAccount Required 14
which you want to add a domain header
Name of the directory to point the @ host

record to. If you want the domain to point to a
subdirectory, use format
Directory=DirectoryName/SubdirectoryName
Directory Optional 213
Must be full path from root.May be forward
slash or backslashdelimited.May begin
with forward slash, backslash, or nothing.To
create a directory, use the
- 123 -

WebHostCreateDirectory command.
Format of response. Options are Text

ResponseType Optional r 4
(default), HTML, or XML.

DomainHeader Success status of this procedure

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query creates a new domain header for Web hosting account resellwebid,
designating that the @ host record for domain resellerdocs2.net points at directory ser-
vice. Finally, the query string instructs that the
response be in XML format:
Query
https://re-
sellertest.enom.com/interface.asp?command=AddDomainHeader&
uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&sld=resellerdocs2&tld=net&
hostaccount=resellwebid&directory=\service&responsetype=xml
- 124 -
In the response, the Successful value True indicates that the query was successful:
Output

<DomainHeader>
<Successful>True</Successful>
</DomainHeader>
<Command>ADDDOMAINHEADER</Command>
<Server>TEST1</Server>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddHostHeader
l CreateHostAccount
l GetDomainHeader
l ListDomainHeaders
AddHostHeader
Description
Definition
Create a host header (a pointer for a third-level domain name) in your Web hosting
account.
Usage
Use this command to add a host header to your Web hosting account.
- 125 -
Use this command to set the www host header for your account if you want www.y-
ourdomainname.com to resolve to a location other than the root directory of your Web
hosting account.
Another common use for this command is to branch a domain name, for example, so
that sales.example.com and service.example.com resolve to different pages.
Availability
Log on to webhostingteLog on to webhostingtest.ehost-services.com with Login ID resell-
webid, password resellwebpw.
http://webhostingtest.ehost-services.com/websites/hostheader.asp?d=resellerdocs.com
The SAVE HOST HEADER SETTINGS button calls the AddHostHeader command.
Constraints
l The Web hosting account must belong to this domain name account.
l The domain header must already exist.
Input parameters
https://re-
uid=yourloginid&pw=yourpassword& par-
amname=paramvalue&nextparamname=nextparamvalue
Parameter Status Description MaxSize

Web hosting account that the domain

header is associated with.

SLD Required 63
enom inenom.com)
TLD Required Top-level domain name (extension) 15
- 126 -

Host name; third-level domain name. For
HostName Required example, in sales.example.com, the host 53
name is sales.
Directory path where you want this host

header to point. Path must start at root
level; path can be forward slash or back-
FilePath Optional 254
slashdelimited. If you do not supply this
parameter,this host header will point to
root.


Successful Success status for creating a new host header.

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query adds a host header servicedept to domain header resellerdocs.com.
Note that the query string specifies, but does not create, a directory path for the host
header. You can create a directory structure using the WebHostCreateDirectory com-
mand.
- 127 -
Query
command=addhostheader&uid=resellid&pw=
resellpw&SLD=resellerdocs&TLD=com
&hostaccount=resellwebid&FilePath=
service/service2/service3&HostName=servicedept&
responsetype=xml
In the response, the success value of True confirms that the query was successful:
Output

<HostHeader>
</HostHeader>
<Command>ADDHOSTHEADER</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainHeader
l CreateHostAccount
l DeleteHostHeader
l GetDomainHeader
l GetHostAccount
l GetHostHeader
l ListDomainHeaders
l ListHostHeaders
l ModifyHostHeader
- 128 -
AddToCart
Description
Definition
Add an item to the shopping cart.
Usage
Add an item to the shopping cart.
To purchase items once they are in the shopping cart, use the InsertNewOrder com-
mand.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domainsearch/default.aspx
Type a domain name and click Search. On the Search Results page, the Proceed to
Cart button calls the AddToCart command. If the user selects multiple items, clicking the
Proceed to Cart button calls the AddToCart command once for each item.
Constraints
l If the item is a domain name, use the Check command to confirm that the name is
available.
l The domain names must be valid (see the domain-name constraints under Check).
l The domain names must use a top-level domain supported by this registrar.
l The number of SLDs must match the number of TLDs.
l There is a limit of 200 items (active plus inactive) in the cart.
Input parameters
Click the links below to go directly to specific products:
Input parameters for domains
Input parameters for dot-name
Input parameters for ID Protect
- 129 -
Input parameters for SSL certificates

Input parameters for TRUSTe Privacy Policy
Input parameters for VeriSign Trust Seal
Input parameters for GeoTrust Anti-Malware
Input parameters for SiteLock
Input parameters for RichContent
Input parameters for Business Listing
Input parameters for POP Email
Input parameters for Email Forwarding and URL Forwarding
Input parameters for Instant Reseller
Input parameters for Web hosting
Input parameters for Web Site Creator
Input parameters for goMobi
Input parameters for domains

Use the input parameters in the table below to add a domain name to the cart.
https://resellertest.enom.com/interface.asp
?command=AddToCart&UID=YourLoginID &PW-
W=YourPassword&SLD=SLDValue&TLD=TLDvalue
&ProductType=ProductToAdd&OptParam1=OptParamValue1
&OptParam2=OptParamValue2

End users IP address. This is

used in fraud checking, as part
EndUserIP Required of our order processing ser- 15
vice. Use format
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
ProductType Required Type of product to add. Per- 39
- 130 -

mitted values are:
l Register
l Renew (Use Renew for
all TLDs including
.name bundles)
l RGP (Redemption
Grace Period)
l Extended RGP
l Host (DNS hosting)
l Host Renew
l PremiumDomain
l Required for
l Register
l Renew
l RGP
l Extended Second-level domain name (for
SLD 63
l RGP example, enom in enom.com)
l Host
l Host
l Renew Premi-
umDomain
Required for:
l Register
l Renew
l RGP
Extended Top-level domain name (exten-
TLD l
15
l RGP sion)
l Host
l Host
l Renew Premi-
umDomain
Optional for
l Register Permitted values are 1 through
l Renew 10 for most domains; some
l Host TLDs vary. Registration can-
Quantity l Host Renew not extend beyond 10 years 2
l PremiumDomain; from today for any TLD. Per-
default is duration you mitted value for Premi-
set in UpdateCusPrefer- umDomain is 1
ences Number of
years.
Do you want the name to

attempt to renew automatically
AutoRenew Optional for Register 10
(renewal will succeed if avail-
able account balance is suf-
- 131 -

ficient)? Permitted values are 0
and 1
Do you want protection against

unauthorized transfer of this
RegLock Optional for Register 10
domain name? Permitted val-
ues are 0 and 1
For Extended RGP, required

UsePerm Required for Extended RGP 10
value is UsePerm=ok
Make all items currently in the

cart inactive (but keep them in
Optional; you must also add the cart), and add a new item.
ClearItems another item to the cart in the Permitted value is yes. To 3
same query reactivate items in the cart that
are inactive, use the
UpdateCart command.
Format of response. Permitted

ResponseType Optional values are Text (default), 4
HTML, or XML.
Input parameters for dot-name

Use the input parameters in the table below to add a domain name to the cart.
AddToCart&UID=YourLoginID&PW=YourPassword&SLD=SLDValue
&TLD=TLDvalue&ProductType=ProductToAdd&OptParam1
=OptParamValue1&OptParam2=OptParamValue2

End users IP address. This is used

in fraud checking, as part of our order
EndUserIP Required 15
processing service. Use format
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
Type of product to add. Permitted val-

ProductType Required ues are: 39
l DotNameBundle
- 132 -

l DotNameForwarding
(Use when the .name domain
was purchased using the
Purchase command and you
want to add the .name
Registrys email forwarding
service. If a .name domain is
purchased using the shopping
cart, the Registrys email for-
warding service is auto-
matically bundled with the
domain.)
Required for:
DotNameBundle Second-level domain name (for
SLD 63
example, enom in enom.com)
DotNameForwarding
Required for:
TLD DotNameBundle Top-level domain name (extension) 15
DotNameForwarding
Optional; default is dur-

Quantity ation you set in Number of years. 2
Make all items currently in the cart

inactive (but keep them in the cart),
Optional; you must also
and add a new item. Permitted value
ClearItems add another item to the 3
is yes. To reactivate items in the cart
cart in the same query
that are inactive, use the UpdateCart
command.

XML.

Use the input parameters in the table below to add ID Protect to the cart.
AddToCart&UID=YourLoginID&PW=YourPassword
&SLD=SLDValue&TLD=TLDvalue&ProductType=ProductToAdd&OptParam1=
OptParamValue1&OptParam2=OptParamValue2
- 133 -

End users IP address. This is used in

fraud checking, as part of our order pro-
cessing service. Use format
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
Type of product to add. Permitted values

are:
IDProtect (Whois Privacy Protection)
IDProtectRenewal
Required for
SLD IDProtect 63
enom in enom.com)
IDProtectRenewal
Required for
TLD IDProtect Top-level domain name (extension) 15
IDProtectRenewal
Optional;
Quantity Number of years. 2
default is 1
Make all items currently in the cart inact-

Optional; you must
ive (but keep them in the cart), and add a
also add another
ClearItems new item. Permitted value is yes. To 3
item to the cart in
reactivate items in the cart that are inact-
the same query
ive, use the UpdateCart command.

Input parameters for SSL certificates

Use the input parameters in the table below to add an SSL certificate to the cart.
command=AddToCart&UID=YourLoginID&PW=YourPassword&
SLD=SLDValue&TLD=TLDvalue&ProductType=ProductToAdd
&OptParam1=OptParamValue1&OptParam2=OptParamValue2
Parameters Status Description Max Size

- 134 -


NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.

are:
l Certificate-Comodo-Essential
l Certificate-Comodo-Instant
l Certificate-Comodo-Essential-
Wildcard
l Certificate-Comodo-Premium-
Wildcard
l Certificate-Comodo-EV
l Certificate-Comodo-EV-SGC
l Certificate-GeoTrust-QuickSSL
l Certificate-GeoTrust-QuickSSL-
Premium
l Certificate-GeoTrust-TrueBizID
l Certificate-GeoTrust-TrueBizID-
Wildcard
l Certificate-GeoTrust-TrueBizID-
EV
l Certificate-RapidSSL-RapidSSL
l Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site
l Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site-
Pro
l Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site-
EV
l Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-
l Site-Pro-EV
l Certificate-Comodo-UCC-DV
l Certificate-Comodo-UCC-OV
Number of years to purchase this SSL

certificate.
Permitted values are 1 to the to the fol-
lowing maximum values:
5 Comodo Essential
Required for all
Quantity 5 Comodo Instant 2
certs
3 Comodo Essential Wildcard
5 Comodo Premium Wildcard
2 Comodo EV
2 Comodo EV SGC
- 135 -

4 GeoTrust QuickSSL
4 GeoTrust QuickSSL Premium
4 GeoTrust True BusinessID
4 GeoTrust True BusinessID Wildcard
2 GeoTrust True BusinessID with EV
4 RapidSSL
4 VeriSign Secure Site
4 VeriSign Secure Site Pro
2 VeriSign Secure Site with EV
2 VeriSign Secure Site Pro with EV
3 Comodo UCC DV
3 Comodo UCC OV

Optional; you must
also add another
item to the cart in
the same query


Use the input parameters in the table below to add TRUSTe Privacy Policy, or TRUSTe
Privacy Policy with Seal, to the cart.
AddToCart&UID=YourLoginID&PW=YourPassword
&SLD=SLDValue&TLD=TLDvalue&ProductType=ProductToAdd&OptParam1=

EndUserIP Required End users IP address. This is used in 15
- 136 -

NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
Type of product to add.

Permitted values are:
TRUSTePrivacyPolicy
TRUSTePrivacyPolicyFreeTrial
TRUSTePrivacyPolicySeal
TRUSTePrivacyPolicySealFreeTrial
Number of years to purchase this

Quantity Required TRUSTe Privacy Policy subscription. 1
Permitted values are 1, 2, or 3 years.

Optional; you must
also add another
item to the cart in
the same query


Use the input parameters in the table below to add VeriSign Trust Seal to the cart.
command=AddToCart&UID=YourLoginID&PW=YourPassword
&SLD=SLDValue&TLD=TLDvalue&ProductType=ProductToAdd


NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
Type of product to add. For VeriSign

Trust Seal, the permitted value is:
- 137 -

Seal-VeriSign-Trust-Seal
Number of years to subscribe to VeriSign

Required for all
Quantity Trust Seal. Permitted values are 1, 2, 2
certs
and 3

Optional; you must
ClearItems ive (but keep them in the cart), and add a
also add another
new item. Permitted value is yes. To 3
item to the cart in
the same query


Use the input parameters in the table below to add GeoTrust Anti-Malware to the cart.


NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
Type of product to add. For GeoTrust

Anti-Malware, the permitted value is:
GeoTrust-Anti-Malware-Scan
GeoTrust-Anti-Malware-Scan-With-Seal
Number of years to subscribe to

Quantity Optional; default=1 GeoTrust Anti-Malware. Permitted value 2
is 1
ClearItems Optional; you must Make all items currently in the cart inact- 3
- 138 -

also add another
new item. Permitted value is yes. To
item to the cart in
the same query


Use the input parameters in the table below to add SiteLock to the cart.


NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
Type of product to add. For SiteLock, the

permitted value is:
SiteLock-Basic
SiteLock-Premium
SiteLock-Enterprise

SiteLock. 2
Permitted value is 1

Optional; you must
also add another
item to the cart in
the same query
- 139 -


Use the input parameters in the table below to add RichContent to the cart.
&SLD=SLDValue&TLD=TLDvalue&ProductType=
ProductToAdd&OptParam1=OptParamValue1&OptParam2=OptParamValue2


NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
Type of product to add. For RichCon-

tent, values are:
RichContent
RichContentFreeTrial
One RichContent subscription allows
you to place content on one host
record of one source domain, of the
ProductType Required form host.sld.tld 2
Quantity Optional for RichContent;
default is 1 Billing period, in months,
for RichContent. For RichContent, per-
mitted values are 1, 3, 6, or 12.
This parameter is not used for
RichContentFreeTrial, which auto-
matically converts to monthly billing
after the one-month free trial period
Either EmailAddress Email address of the RichContent cus-

EmailAddress or PublisherID is tomer. An email address can be used 150
Required for multiple RichContent subscriptions
- 140 -

in the same domain name account, but
can only be used for a free trial once.
Identification number for this email

Either EmailAddress address in our records of RichContent
PublisherID or PublisherID is subscriptions. To retrieve this number 10
Required use the RC_GetSubscriptions com-
mand. Permitted values are integers
Optional for Domain name, with host records, to

RichContent associate with this RichContent sub-
SourceDomain 272
RichContentFreeTrial scription. Permitted format is
host.sld.tld

Optional; you must inactive (but keep them in the cart),
also add another item and add a new item. Permitted value is
ClearItems 3
to the cart in the yes. To reactivate items in the cart that
same query are inactive, use the UpdateCart com-
mand.


Use the input parameters in the table below to add Business Listing to the cart.
command=AddToCart&UID=YourLoginID&PW=YourPassword&SLD=
SLDValue&TLD=TLDvalue&ProductType=ProductToAdd&OptParam1=


NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
Type of product to add. For Business

Listing, values are:
- 141 -

BusListing
BusListingRenewal
Required for
BusListing Second-level domain name (for example,
SLD 63
enom in enom.com)
and
BusListingRenewal
Required for
BusListing Renewal Top-level domain name (exten-
TLD 15
sion)
and BusListing
Optional;
Quantity Number of years. 2
default is 1

Optional; you must
also add another
item to the cart in
the same query


Use the input parameters in the table below to add POP Email to the cart.
&SLD=SLDValue&TLD=TLDvalue&ProductType=ProductToAdd&OptParam1


NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
- 142 -

are:
POP (10-mailbox pak with 1GB storage
ProductType Required per mailbox) 39
Renew-POP
EmailStorage (512MB extra storage per
mailbox)
Required for
POP
SLD 10
Renew-POP enom in enom.com)
EmailStorage
Required
forPOPRenew-
TLD Top-level domain name (extension) 10
POP EmailStorage
For ProductType=POP, the number of

10-mailbox paks to purchase for this
domain.
Optional for
For ProductType=Renew-POP, the num-
POP
Quantity ber of years to add to this POP pak sub- 2
Renew-POP scription.
EmailStorage
For ProductType=EmailStorage, the
number of 512MB units of storage to add
to this pak.
Required for
POP pak ID number. To retrieve this
ProductID Renew-POP 3
value, use the GetPOP3 command.
EmailStorage

Optional; you must
also add another
item to the cart in
the same query

- 143 -
Input parameters for Email Forwarding and URL For-

warding
Use the input parameters in the table below to add Email Forwarding or URL For-
warding to the cart.


in fraud checking, as part of our order
processing service. Use format
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
Type of product to add. Permitted val-

ues are:
EmailForwarding
ProductType Required EmailForwardingRenew 39
URLForwarding
URLForwardingRenew
Required for
EmailForwarding Second-level domain name (for
SLD EmailForwardingRenew 63
URLForwarding
URLForwardingRenew
Required forE-
mailForwarding
TLD EmailForwardingRenew Top-level domain name (extension) 15
URLForwarding
URLForwardingRenew
Optional for
EmailForwarding
Quantity EmailForwardingRenew Number of years 2
URLForwarding
URLForwardingRenew
- 144 -

default is 1

inactive (but keep them in the cart),
Optional; you must also
and add a new item. Permitted value
ClearItems add another item to the 3
is yes. To reactivate items in the cart
cart in the same query
that are inactive, use the UpdateCart
command.

XML.
Input parameters for Instant Reseller

Use the input parameters in the table below to add Instant Reseller to the cart.


NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.

are:
ResellerStore
ResellerStore-Renew

SLD Optional 63
enom in enom.com)
TLD Optional Top-level domain name (extension) 15
Number of years. Permitted values are

Quantity Optional 2
integers 1 to 10
- 145 -

Optional; you must
also add another
item to the cart in
the same query


Use the input parameters in the table below to add Web hosting to the cart.


NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.

are:
WebHosting
WebHostingSetupFee
Optional; default is
Quantity Number of months 2
1
Which WSC package, if any, to include

in this Web hosting package. Permitted
Optional; default is values are: WSCBasic
WSCOption 14
no WSC
WSCFull
WSCEcommerce
Required for Web hosting account name. Must be

HostID 14
WebHosting alphanumeric and 6 to 14 characters in
- 146 -

length.
Web hosting account password. Must be

Required for
HostPW alphanumeric and 6 to 14 characters in 14
WebHosting
length.
Web hosting package. Use the

Required for WebHostGetPackages command, in the
Package 14
WebHosting Web hosting API catalog, to retrieve a
list of permitted package names.
Overage handling option. Permitted val-

ues are:
Required for
OverageOption 1 Automatically upgrade bandwidth 1
WebHosting
2 Charge overage fee
3 Temporarily disable until next month
Optional for Name of domain to associate with this

DDomain 79
WebHosting Web hosting account. Use format sld.tld
Update www and @ host records to

Required for
SetHostRecords point to this Web hosting account. Per- 3
WebHosting
mitted values are Yes or No.

Optional; you must
also add another
item to the cart in
the same query


Use the input parameters in the table below to add Web Site Creator to the cart.
&SLD=SLDValue&TLD=TLDvalue&ProductType=ProductToAdd& OptPara-
m1=OptParamValue1&OptParam2=OptParamValue2

- 147 -


NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.

are:
ProductType Required LWSCBasic 39
LWSCFull
LWSCEcommerce
Account name for this Web Site Creator

account. To retrieve this value, use the
LWSCAccountName Optional
WSC_GetAllPackages API command.
Permitted format is LWSCNNNxNNNN
Web site ID number for this Web Site

Creator account. To retrieve this value,
LWSCWebSiteID Required
use the WSCSiteID return value from the
WSC_GetAllPackages API command.
Optional;
Quantity Number of years 2
default is 1
Optional; you must

also add another
ClearItems ive (but keep them in the cart), and add a 3
item to the cart in
new item. Permitted value is yes.
the same query


Use the input parameters in the table below to add goMobi to the cart.

- 148 -


NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
Type of product to add. For goMobi, per-

mitted values are:
goMobi
goMobiFreeTrial
Number of months for goMobi billing

Optional; default is cycle. Permitted values are:
Quantity 2
1 1 Monthly billing cycle
12 Yearly billing cycle

Optional; you must
also add another
item to the cart in
the same query


ItemName Domain name or service
ItemId Item number
Price Price for this product or service
ICANNFees Fees charged by ICANN for this product or service
CartItemID ID number, assigned by us, of this item in your shopping cart

ItemAdded
cessfully.

ErrCount
ErrX Error messages explaining the failure. These can be presented
- 149 -

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query adds resellerdocs.com to the shopping cart of account resellid and
sends the response in XML format:
Query
https://re-
sellertest.enom.-
com/interface.asp?command=addtocart&uid=resellid&pw=
resellpw&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com
&producttype=register&responsetype=xml

Output
<ItemName>resellerdocs.com</ItemName>
<ItemId/>
<Price>8.95</Price>
<Command>ADDTOCART</Command>
- 150 -
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l AddBulkDomains
l DeleteFromCart
l GetCartContent
l GetHomeDomainList
l InsertNewOrder
l PurchasePreview
l UpdateCart
AdvancedDomainSearch
Description
Definition
Search the domains in your account.
Usage
Use this command to search domains that are in your account.
Availability
- 151 -
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/Domain-Manager.aspx?tab=search
The search button calls the AdvancedDomainSearch command.
Constraints
Input parameters
command=nameofcommand&uid=yourloginid&pw=yourpassword
&paramname=paramvalue&nextparamname=nextparamvalue

Comma-delimited list of TLDs to include

Optional;
TLDList in search results. Also permitted is *, 120
default is *
which returns all TLDs that we offer.
What part of domains to match? For

example, SearchCriteria=Start&SLD=A
returns all domains that start with A. Per-
mitted values are:
SearchCriteria Optional 5
Start
End
In
Exact
String to match in domain name. Use

with SearchCriteria to constrain results.
For example, SearchCri-
SLD Optional teria=Start&SLD=A returns all domains 8000
that start with A.
Permitted values are letters, numbers,
and hyphens.
Return domains with numbers in the

domain name? Permitted values are:
0 Exclude domain names containing num-
ExcludeNumbers Optional 1
bers
1 Include domain names containing num-
bers
- 152 -

Return domains with hyphens in the
domain name? Permitted values are:
0 Exclude domain names containing
ExcludeDashes Optional 1
hyphens
1 Include domain names containing
hyphens
Return parked domains? Permitted val-

ues are:
ParkingStatus Optional 1
0 Return domains that are not parked
1 Return domains that are parked
What registration status to return? Per-

mitted values are:
RegistrationStatus Optional Registered 10
Hosted
Expired
What auto-renew status to return? Per-

mitted values are:
AutoRenew Optional 1
0 Auto-renew off
1 Auto-renew on
What registrar lock status to return? Per-

mitted values are:
Locked Optional 1
0 Registrar lock off
1 Registrar lock on
Date the domain was originally

CreationDate Optional registered. Permitted format is 10
MM/DD/YYYY
Return domains that are within this many

DaysTillExpires Optional days before expiration date. Permitted 7
values are integers 0 to 65535
Return domains that are within this many

DaysExpired Optional days after expiration date. Permitted val- 7
ues are integers 0 to 65535
Return only domains that use our name

servers? Permitted values are:
NSStatus Optional 5
Yes
No
Return domains that use this name

NameServer Optional 60
server.
Return domains with ID Protect? Per-

HasIDProtect Optional 1
mitted values are:
- 153 -

0 Domains with no subscription to ID Pro-
tect
1 Domains with ID Protect
Return domains that have ID Protect

thats due to expire within the number of
DaysUntilExpires Optional 7
days specified here. Permitted values are
integers 0 to 65535
Return domains with subscriptions to

POPmail? Permitted values are:
HasPOPMail Optional 1
0 No POP mail subscription
1 Subscribed to POP mail
Return domains associated with Web

hosting? Permitted values are:
HasWebHosting Optional 1
0 No Web hosting subscription
1 Subscribed to Web hosting
Include domains that fit the search cri-

teria that are in retail subaccounts? Per-
IncludeSubaccounts Optional mitted values are: 1
0 Exclude domain names in subaccounts
1 Include domain names in subaccounts
Login name of subaccounts to include 20

OrderBy Optional Permitted values are:
SLD
SubaccountLogin Optional TLD 8
NSStatus
ExpDate
Renew
What number in the list to begin with in

this response? For example, StartPos-
StartPosition Optional 8
ition=26&RecordsToReturn=25 returns
domains 26 through 50 in the list.
Number of domains to return in each

response. For example,
RecordsToReturn Optional StartPosition=26&RecordsToReturn=25 3
returns domains 26 through 50 in the list.
Maximum permitted value is 100.
Retrieve domains associated with what

types of folders? Permitted values are:
FolderOption Optional 1 Domains that are not in any folders 1
2 Domains that are in at least one folder
- 154 -

3 Domains that are in any Magic folder
4 Domains that are in any standard folder
5 Domains that are only in a Magic folder
6 Domains that are only in a standard
folder
7 Domains that are in folder FolderName
Required when Return domains in this folder. Permitted

FolderName 125
FolderOption=7 value is a folder name.
Synchronization status. Permitted values

are:
1Domains are in the process of syn-
FolderSyncStatus Optional 1
chronization
2 Domains are in sync
3 At least one domain is out of sync
MultiLang Optional Permitted values are On or Off. 3
Format of response. Permitted values are

Text (default), HTML, or XML.

SP-TLDList Domains included in this return match these TLDs
Domains included in this return include this character string in

SP-SLD
the SLD
Domains included in this return include the SP-SLD value in

SP-SearchCriteria
this part of the SLD
SP-ParkingStatus Returned domains match this parking status
SP-XML XML formatting options for this return
SP-RegistrationStatus Returned domains match this registration status
SP-AutoRenew Returned domains match this auto-renew setting
SP-Locked Returned domains match this registrar lock setting
SP-DaysTillExpires Returned domains are within this many days of expiration
SP-DaysExpired Returned domains have expired in the last X days
- 155 -
SP-NSStatus Returned domains match this name server status
SP-HostRecord Type Not used
SP-HostName Not used
SP-HostAddress Not used
SP-NameServer Returned domains use this name server
SP-Has Returned domains match this ID Protect status
SP-HasPOPMail Returned domains match this POP mail status
SP-EmailForwarding Not used
SP-HasWebHosting Returned domains match this Web hosting status
If SP-ExcludeNumbers=1, returned domains do not contain

SP-ExcludeNumbers
numbers in the SLD
If SP-ExcludeDashes=1, returned domains do not contain

SP-ExcludeDashes
hyphens in the SLD
If SP-IncludeSubAccounts=1, returned domains include

SP-IncludeSubAccounts
domains in retail subaccounts
SP-SubAccountLogin Returned domains are in this subaccount
SP-XMLResponse XMLResponse setting
SP-RecordsToReturn This response includes this number of domains in a sorted list
SP-StartPosition This response starts at this number in the sorted list
SP-OrderBy Sort criterion for this list
SP-CustomerGroupName Not used
SP-FolderOption Returned domains match this folder option
SP-FolderSyncStatus Returned domains match this folder sync status
SP-FolderName Returned domains match this folder name
SP-EmailResultsOnly Send response by email only
SP-CreationDate Returned domains were originally registered on this date
SP-DaysUntilExpires Returned domains are within X days before ID Protect
SP-ContactXML
- 156 -
SP-WBLStatusID Returned domains have this status ID
Returned domains have this enabled status for Business List-

SP-WBLEnabled
ing
Returned domains have this Auto Renew status for Business

SP-WBLAutoRenew
Listing
TotalResults Total number of domains that match these search criteria
The first domain in this response is in this position in the overall

StartPosition
sorted list of domains
The next response will start at this position in the overall sorted
NextPosition
list
MultiRRP Multiple RRPs in this response?
TLDOverride TLD override setting
DomainNameID ID number for this domain
SLD SLD of this domain
TLD TLD of this domain
AutoRenew Auto-renew setting of this domain
ExpDate Expiration date of this domain
DomainRegistrationStatus Registration status of this domain
DeleteType Delete status of this domain
NSStatus Is this domain using our name servers?
FolderStatus Is this domain in any folders?
RRProcessor Registrar credential of this domain name
RRCompanyName Registrar of record for this domain name
HasIDProtect Does this domain have ID Protect, and is it enabled?
DomainFolderStatus Sync status of this domain
AbleToReactivate If expired, can this name be reactivated?
IsPremiumName Is this a premium .tv name?
PremiumPrice Price for this premium .tv name
Is the price for this premium .tv name above the premium
PremiumAboveThresholdPrice
threshold price?
- 157 -
PremiumCategory Premium category for a .tv name
ReactivatePrice Price to reactivate this expired .tv name
WBLStatusID Status identifier for Business Listing for this domain name
WBLStatus Description of status for Business Listing
WBLExpDate Expiration date for Business Listing
WBLAutoRenew Auto-renew setting for Business Listing

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves domains that match the specified search criteria, and
Query
command=AdvancedDomainSearch&uid=resellid&pw=
resellpw&SearchCriteria=Start&SLD=r&ExcludeNumbers=1&
ExcludeDashes=1&OrderBy=ExpDate&responsetype=XML
In the response, a domain list and an ErrCount value 0 indicate that the query was suc-
cessful:
- 158 -
Output
<DomainSearch>
<SearchParams>
<SP-TLDList>*</SP-TLDList>
<SP-SLD>r</SP-SLD>
<SP-SearchCriteria>Start</SP-SearchCriteria>
<SP-ParkingStatus/>
<SP-XML>
<DomainNames>
<DomainName sld="r" location="Start"/>
</DomainNames>
</SP-XML>
<SP-RegistrationStatus>Registered</SP-RegistrationStatus>
<SP-AutoRenew/>
<SP-Locked/>
<SP-DaysTillExpires/>
<SP-DaysExpired/>
<SP-NsStatus/>
<SP-HostRecordType/>
<SP-HostName/>
<SP-HostAddress/>
<SP-NameServer/>
<SP-HasIDProtect/>
<SP-HasPOPMail/>
<SP-EmailForwarding/>
<SP-HasWebHosting/>
<SP-ExcludeNumbers>True</SP-ExcludeNumbers>
<SP-ExcludeDashes>True</SP-ExcludeDashes>
<SP-IncludeSubAccounts/>
<SP-SubAccountLogin/>
<SP-XMLResponse>1</SP-XMLResponse>
<SP-RecordsToReturn>100</SP-RecordsToReturn>
<SP-StartPosition>1</SP-StartPosition>
<SP-OrderBy>ExpDate</SP-OrderBy>
<SP-CustomerGroupName/>
<SP-FolderOption/>
<SP-FolderSyncStatus/>
<SP-FolderName/>
<SP-EmailResultsOnly/>
<SP-CreationDate/>
<SP-DaysUntilIDProtectExpires/>
- 159 -
<SP-ContactXML/>
<SP-WBLStatusID/>
<SP-WBLEnabled/>
<SP-WBLAutoRenew/>
</SearchParams>
<TotalResults>33</TotalResults>
<StartPosition>1</StartPosition>
<NextPosition>1</NextPosition>
<MultiRRP>False</MultiRRP>
<TLDOverride>0</TLDOverride>
<Domains>
<Domain>
<DomainNameID>318265464</DomainNameID>
<SLD>rtrtretqq</SLD>
<TLD>com</TLD>
<ExpDate>12/30/2005</ExpDate>
<DomainRe-
gistrationStatus>Registered</DomainRegistrationStatus>
<DeleteType/>
<LoginID>resellid</LoginID>
<AccountID>217-no-0647</AccountID>
<NSStatus>Yes</NSStatus>
<FolderStatus>0</FolderStatus>
<RRProcessor>E</RRProcessor>
<RRCompanyName>eNom, Inc.</RRCompanyName>
<HasIDProtect>disabled</HasIDProtect>
<IDProtectExpires/>
<DomainFolderStatus>0</DomainFolderStatus>
<WBLStatusID>0</WBLStatusID>
<WBLStatus>Available</WBLStatus>
<WBLExpDate/>
<WBLAutoRenew/>
<NameServers>dns1.name-services.com,dns2.name-services.com,
dns3.name-services.com,dns4.name-services.com,
dns5.name-services.com</NameServers>
<Vas/>
</Domain>
<Domain>
<SLD>roscoisgek</SLD>
<TLD>com</TLD>
- 160 -
<ExpDate>5/13/2006</ExpDate>
<DomainRe-
gistrationStatus>Registered</DomainRegistrationStatus>
<DeleteType/>
<AccountID>217-no-0647</AccountID>
<RRCompanyName>eNom, Inc.</RRCompanyName>
<HasIDProtect>enabled</HasIDProtect>
<IDProtectExpires>7/29/2007</IDProtectExpires>
<DomainFolderStatus>0</DomainFolderStatus>
<WBLStatusID>0</WBLStatusID>
<WBLStatus>Available</WBLStatus>
<WBLExpDate/>
<WBLAutoRenew/>
<NameServers>dns1.name-services.com,dns2.name-services.com,
dns3.name-services.com,dns4.name-services.com,
dns5.name-services.com</NameServers>
<Vas/>
</Domain>
.
.
.
</Domains>
</DomainSearch>
<Command>ADVANCEDDOMAINSEARCH</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
- 161 -
<TrackingKey>340cd124-a655-41bd-820c-d3e1b731a1b3</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l AddDomainFolder
AM_AutoRenew
Description
Definition
Set the Auto Renew flag for a GeoTrust Anti-Malware subscription.
Usage
Use this command to set the Auto Renew flag for a GeoTrust Anti-Malware subscription.
In the eNom web site, we only display the Auto Renew setting for subscriptions in status
Service Active, but our API allows you to set the Auto Renew flag at any time.
Availability
All resellers have access to this command
https://resellertest.enom.com/web-site-anti-malware/details.aspx?id=11
- 162 -
Constraints
l The GeoTrust Anti-Malware subscription must belong to this account.
Input parameters

UID Required Account login ID. 20
PW Required Account password. 20
Identification number of the GeoTrust

Anti-Malware for which you want to set
AMID Required the Auto Renew flag. To retrieve AMID 8
numbers, use the AM_GetAccounts com-
mand.
Setting to apply to the Auto Renew flag

for this GeoTrust Anti-Malware sub-
AutoRenew Required scription. Permitted values are: True 5
Automatically renew this subscription
False Allow this subscription to expire



ErrCount
the Err(1 to ErrCount)
- 163 -

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l Check the return parameter rameter ErrCount If greater than 0 the transaction
failed. The parameter Err(ErrCount) can be presented to the client. Otherwise pro-
cess the returned parameters as defined above.
Example
The following query sets the Auto Renew flag for a GeoTrust Anti-Malware subscription,
and requests the response in XML format:
Query
command=AM_AutoRenew&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw
&ResponseType=XML&AMID=11&AutoRenew=True
Output
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<AMID>2</AMID>
<AutoRenew>True</AutoRenew>
<Command>AM_AUTORENEW</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Server>ResellerTest</Server>
<Site>eNom</Site>
- 164 -
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
Related commands
l AM_Configure
l AM_GetAccounts
l AM_Renew
AM_Configure
Description
Definition
Configure a GeoTrust Anti-Malware account.
Usage
Use this command to configure a GeoTrust Anti-Malware subscription after initial pur-
chase.
Availability
Constraints
- 165 -

Input parameters
nameofcommand&uid=yourloginid&pw=yourpassword


Anti-Malware for which you want to con-
AMID Required 8
figure. To retrieve AMID numbers, use
the AM_GetAccounts command.
Domain name. Permitted input format

DomainName Required includes the range from sld.tld to a com- 256
plete URL.
Domain Administrator's email address.

GeoTrust sends email to this address for
AdminEmail Required 256
notificatons related to the domain activ-
ities.
Domain Technical contact's email

address. GeoTrust sends email to this
TechEmail Required 256
address for notificatons related to any
technical domain activities or requests.
TechFName Required Domain Technical contact First Name. 50
TechLName Required Domain Technical contact Last Name. 50

- 166 -


ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query configures a GeoTrust Anti-Malware subscription after initial pur-
chase, and requests the response in XML format:
Query
https://resellertest.enom.com/interface.asp?command=AM_Con-
figure&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw&ResponseType=XML&AMID=11
&DomainName=mydomain.com&AdminEmail=owner@mydomain.com
&TechE-
mail=webmaster@mydomain.com&TechFName=John&TechLName=Smith
Output
<AMID>10</AMID>
<DomainName>mydomain.com</DomainName>
- 167 -
<AdminEmail>owner@mydomain.com</AdminEmail>
<TechnicalEmail>webmaster@mydomain.com</TechnicalEmail>
<TechnicalFName>John</TechnicalFName>
<TechnicalLName>Smith</TechnicalLName>
<Command>AM_CONFIGURE</Command>
<MinPeriod/> <MaxPeriod>10</MaxPeriod>
<Site>eNom</Site> <IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
Related commands
l AM_AutoRenew
l AM_GetAccounts
l AM_Renew
AM_GetAccountDetail
Description
Definition
Retrieve detailed information for one GeoTrust Anti-Malware account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve detailed information for one GeoTrust Anti-Malware sub-
scription.
Availability
- 168 -
Constraints
Input parameters
nameofcommand&uid=yourloginid&pw=yourpassword


Anti-Malware. To retrieve AMID num-
AMID Required 8
bers, use the AM_GetAccounts com-
mand.



ErrCount
- 169 -
ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves detailed information for one GeoTrust Anti-Malware sub-
scription, and requests the response in XML format:
Query
https://resellertest.enom.com/interface.asp?command=AM_
GetAc-
coun-
tDetail&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw&ResponseType=XML&AMID=11
Output
<AMID>11</AMID>
<ProdType>177</ProdType>
<ProdDesc>GeoTrust Anti-Malware Scan</ProdDesc>
<StatusID>1</StatusID>
<Status>Active</Status>
<SubStatusID>4</SubStatusID>
<SubStatus>Active</SubStatus>
<OrderDate>11/11/2011 4:35:27 PM</OrderDate>
- 170 -
<ReferenceID/>
<ConfigurationDate>11/11/2011 11:11:11 PM</Con-
figurationDate>
<FulfillmentDate/>
<ExpirationDate>11/11/2012 3:47:18 PM</ExpirationDate>
<ValidityPeriod>12</ValidityPeriod>
<AdminEmail>owner@mydomain.com</AdminEmail>
<TechFName>John</TechFName>
<TechLName>Smith</TechLName>
<TechEmail>webmaster@mydomain.com</TechEmail>
<Message/>
<Command>AM_GETACCOUNTDETAIL</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
Related commands
l AM_AutoRenew
l AM_Configure
l AM_GetAccounts
l AM_Renew
- 171 -
AM_GetAccounts
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of GeoTrust Anti-Malware account for this login ID.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of GeoTrust Anti-Malware account for this login ID.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/web-site-anti-malware/manage.aspx
Constraints
Input parameters
nameofcommand&uid=yourloginid&pw=yourpassword&paramname
=paramvalue&nextparamname=nextparamvalue
- 172 -
Product identification number. Permitted values are:

ProdType Optional 175: GeoTrust Anti-Malware Scan With Seal 3
177: GeoTrust Anti-Malware Scan
Return results beginning with this position in the sor-

Optional; default ted list.
StartPosition 8
is 1 For example, StartPosition=26&PagingPageSize=25
returns accounts 26 through 50 in the sorted list.
Optional; default Number of accounts to return in this response. Max-

PagingPageSize 3
is 25 imum permitted value is 250.
Sorting parameter. Permitted values are:

DomainName
ExpirationDate
Status
Optional; default StatusID
SortBy 255
is DomainName SubStatus
SubStatusID
AutoRenew
AMID
ProdType

Optional; default
SortByDirection Asc 128
is Asc Sort order.
Desc
GeoTrust Anti-Malware StatusID/Status. Permitted

values are:
StatusID or Status Optional 4/50
0: Inactive
1: Active
GeoTrust Anti-Malware SubStatusID/SubStatus. Per-

mitted values are:
SubStatusID or 1: Awaiting Configuration
Optional 4/50
SubStatus 2: Expired
3: Canceled
4: Active
Auto Renew. Permitted values are:

AutoRenew Optional True: subscriptions with automatic renewal 4
False: subscriptions without automatic renewal
DomainNameContains Optional Specific word in domain names. 300
- 173 -
OrderDateStart Optional Order date start filter. Use format MM/DD/YYYY. 10
OrderDateEnd Optional Order date end filter. Use format MM/DD/YYYY. 10
ExpirationDateStart Optional Expiration date start filter. Use format MM/DD/YYYY. 10
ExpirationDateEnd Optional Expiration date end filter. Use format MM/DD/YYYY. 10
Format of response. Permitted values are Text



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of GeoTrust Anti-Malware account for this login ID,
Query
AM_GetAccounts&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw&ResponseType
- 174 -
=XML&PagingPageSize=5&Prodtype=175&SortBy=StatusID
Output

<AntiMalwareAccounts>
<Account>
<AMID>65</AMID>
<ProdDesc>GeoTrust Anti-Malware Scan With Seal</ProdDesc>
<DomainName></DomainName>
<Status>Inactive</Status>
<SubStatus>Awaiting Configuration</SubStatus>
<OrderDate>11/29/2011 4:08 PM</OrderDate>
<ConfigDate></ConfigDate>
<FullfilmentDate></FullfilmentDate>
<ExpirationDate>11/29/2012 4:08 PM</ExpirationDate>
</Account>
<Account>
.........
</Account>
<ProductType>175</ProductType>
<StatusID>all</StatusID>
<Status>all</Status>
<SubStatusID>all</SubStatusID>
<SubStatus>all</SubStatus>
<PagingPageSize>5</PagingPageSize>
<Count>18</Count>
<Sortby>statusid</Sortby>
<SortByDirection></SortByDirection>
<TotalRecords>98</TotalRecords>
</AntiMalwareAccounts>
<Command>AM_GETACCOUNTS</Command>
- 175 -
<MinPeriod />
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
Related commands
l AM_AutoRenew
l AM_Configure
l AM_Renew
AssignToDomainFolder
Description
Definition
Assign one or more domains to one folder.
Usage
Use this command to assign one or more domains to a folder. Most commonly, youll put
domains in a standard folder to organize them; in a Magic Folder to manage settings.
You can assign domains in several ways:
l Put a list of domains into a folder.
l Move a list of domains from one folder to another, or from all folders where the
domains currently reside to a single folder.
l Copy a list of domains to a folder so that they are in multiple folders (but a domain
can only be in one Magic Folder at a time; see Notes).

l Remove a list of domains from a folder or from all folders.
Availability
- 176 -

https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/Domain-Manager.aspx?tab=registered
At the bottom of the domain list, when the LIST ACTIONS menu is set to a folder option,
the GO button calls the AssignToDomainFolder command.
Constraints
l The folder must belong to this login ID.
l A domain can only be in one Magic Folder at a time. See Notes.
Input parameters
nameofcommand&uid=yourloginid&pw=yourpassword&paramname
=paramvalue&nextparamname=nextparamvalue

Comma-separated list of domain names

to put into this folder.
DomainNameList Required 1500
Permitted format is
sld1.tld1,sld2.tld2,sld3.tld3
Action to execute. Permitted values:

1 Copy to ToFolderName (and leave in
all folders where it is currently placed)
TransferMode Required 2 Move to ToFolderName (and remove 1
from FromFolderName or from all)
3 Remove from FromFolderName or
from all folders
FromFolderName Optional if Trans- If TransferMode=2 or 3, the query oper- 125

Ignored if Trans- ferMode=2 or 3;
- 177 -

ates only on domains that are currently in
FromFolderName. Permitted values are
one folder name or * (all folders)
If TransferMode=2 and no value is
provided for FromFolderName, domains
ferMode=1; default is * (all); are moved from all folders where they
are currently associated, to ToFolder-
Name.
If TransferMode=3 and no value is
provided for FromFolderName, domains
are deleted from all folders.
Required if Trans-
ferMode=1 or 2; Assign the listed domains to this folder.
ToFolderName 125
Ignored if Trans- Permitted value is one folder name.
ferMode=3

ToFolderName Destination folder for domains
FromFolderName Source folder for domains
Domain name IDs. To retrieve the domain names from these

ID
IDs, use the GetDomainSLDTLD command.
Type of reassignment done by this query. Values are:

1 Copy to ToFolderName (and leave in all folders where it is
currently associated)
TransferMode
2 Move to ToFolderName (and remove from FromFolderName
or from all folders where it is currently associated)
3 Remove from FromFolderName
Result of this query. Values are:

0 General failure
1 Success
2 Unable to add domains to folder
Result 3 No such folder
4 Cannot move a domain from a folder to the same folder
5 At least one domain is not found as active in this account
6 At least one domain cannot be removed from folder because
- 178 -
synchronization is in progress
7 At least one domain is already associated with another Magic
Folder
8 Unable to remove domains from folder

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l A domain can only be in one Magic Folder at a time.
l If a query string uses a wildcard value when removing domains from folders, or
does not specify a foldername (TransferMode=3&FromFolderName=*), it will
remove the domains from all folders they arecurrently in.
Example
The following query copies two domains into a folder and sends the response in XML
format:
Query
command=AssignToDomainFolder&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&DomainIDList=152656650,152656651&ToFolderName
=Lock&TransferMode=1&ResponseType=XML
In the response, a Result value 1 and an ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was
successful:
- 179 -
Output

<AssignResult>
<ToFolderName>Lock</ToFolderName>
<FromFolderName>*</FromFolderName>
<DomainNames>
<ID>152656650</ID>
<ID>152656651</ID>
</DomainNames>
<TransferMode>1</TransferMode>
<Result>1</Result>
</AssignResult>
<Command>ASSIGNTODOMAINFOLDER</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Server>RESELLER1-STG</Server>
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug> <![CDATA[ ]]> </debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainFolder
- 180 -
AuthorizeTLD
Description
Definition
Create or add to a list of TLDs that you offer to your resellers and retail customers.
Usage
Use this command to specify the TLDs that you offer to your resellers and retail cus-
tomers. This command controls which TLDs your Web site can offer for registrations,
renewals, and transfers.
The first time you use this command, the list of TLDs we return to you switches from the
list of all TLDs we offer, which is the default, to your own list that contains only the TLDs
you authorize.
You can also use this command to add to your list of authorized TLDs. When you want to
add one TLD, run AuthorizeTLD with that single TLD.
To revert from the authorized TLD mode back to the default mode (all TLDs that we sup-
port), or to remove TLDs from your list, use the RemoveTLD command.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/myaccount/Settings.asp
Clicking the TLD Pricing tab shows either the complete set of TLDs we offer, or the TLDs
you have authorized.
Constraints
l You can only authorize TLDs that we offer.
- 181 -
Input parameters
command=nameofcommand&uid=yourloginid
&pw=yourpassword&paramname=

One top-level domain (TLD) to add to

Either TLD or
your list of authorized TLDs. For
TLD DomainList is 15
example, if you want to add .biz, use
Required
TLD=biz
Comma-separated list of TLDs to add to

Either TLD or
your list of authorized TLDs. For
DomainList DomainList is 100
example, if you want to add .com, .net,
Required
and .org, use DomainList=com,net,org


TLD to add to authorized list. Indexed X when Respon-
AuthorizeTLDX
seType=Text or HTML.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 182 -
Notes
Example
The following query authorizes TLDs .com, .net, and .org for account resellid, and sends
the response in XML format:
Query
command=authorizetld&uid=resellid&pw=
resellpw&domainlist=com,net,org,info,biz&responsetype=xml
In the response, the list of TLDs and the ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was suc-
cessful:
Output
<tldlist>
<authorizetld>com</authorizetld>
<authorizetld>net</authorizetld>
<authorizetld>org</authorizetld>
<authorizetld>info</authorizetld>
<authorizetld>biz</authorizetld>
</tldlist>
<Command>AUTHORIZETLD</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
- 183 -
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>1b2b72b9-77df-4666-a0cc-30c02aefed-
e9</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l GetTLDList
l PE_SetPricing
l RemoveTLD
AutoRenew
Description
Definition
Set the Auto Renew flag for a GeoTrust Anti-Malware subscription.
Usage
Use this command to set the Auto Renew flag for a GeoTrust Anti-Malware subscription.
Availability
- 184 -
Constraints
Input parameters
command=nameofcommand&uid=yourloginid&pw
=yourpassword&paramname=paramvalue&nextparamname=nextparamvalue


Anti-Malware for which you want to set
AMID Required the Auto Renew flag. 8
To retrieve AMID numbers, use the AM_
GetAccounts command.

for this GeoTrust Anti-Malware sub-
scription. Permitted values are:
AutoRenew Required 5
True Automatically renew this sub-
scription

are Text (default),HTML, or XML.


ErrCount
- 185 -
ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query sets the Auto Renew flag for a GeoTrust Anti-Malware subscription,
Query
https://resellertest.enom.com/interface.asp?command=AM_
AutoRenew&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw&ResponseType=XML
&AMID=11&AutoRenew=True
Output
<AMID>2</AMID>
<Command>AM_AUTORENEW</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
- 186 -
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
Related commands
l AM_Configure
l AM_GetAccounts
l AM_Renew
CalculateAllHostPackagePricing
Description
Definition
Retrieve contents, and calculate cost and selling price, of all Web hosting packages con-
figured for an account.
Usage
Use this command to generate a complete list of Web hosting packages defined for an
account.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/myaccount/hostingpricing.asp
The Set Packages table, with the re-calculate and save packages buttons, calls and dis-
plays results of the CalculateAllHostPackagePricing command.
- 187 -
Constraints
Input parameters

Optional; default is Operating system of Web server. Per-

OSType 7
Windows mitted values are Windows or Linux.
Do you want to return results for only the

Optional; default is Web server operating system specified
FilterByOS 5
False by OSType? Permitted values are True
or False.


PackageID ID number (generated by us) for this Web hosting package
PackageName Name of this Web hosting package
- 188 -
Number of Web site content storage units in this Web hosting
StorageUnits
package. Each storage unit is 1GB.
Number of bandwidth units in this Web hosting package. Each

BandwidthUnits
bandwidth unit is 20GB.
Number of POP mail units in this Web hosting package. Each

PopUnits
POP unit is 10 mailboxes, with 100MB storage per mailbox.
Number of units of SQL database storage in this Web hosting

SQLUnits
package. Each SQL unit is 250MB.
Our ID for the operating system of this packages Web hosting

OSTypeID
server. 1 indicates Windows; 2 indicates Linux.
OSType Operating system of this packages Web hosting server.
PackageCost The cost to this account for this Web hosting package
The price this account charges customers for this Web hosting
SellPrice
package
Number of different Web hosting packages listed in this

PackageCount
response

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 189 -
Example
The following query retrieves the contents, cost, and selling price of all Web hosting
packages defined for account resellid, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=CalculateAllHostPackagePricing&uid=
resellid&pw=resellpw&responsetype=xml
In the response, a list of packages and an ErrCount value 0 indicate that the query was
successful:
Output

<resellerpackagepricing>
<package>
<PackageID>140</PackageID>
<PackageName>Corporate2</PackageName>
<StorageUnits>10</StorageUnits>
<BandwidthUnits>1</BandwidthUnits>
<PopUnits>10</PopUnits>
<SQLUnits>0</SQLUnits>
<PackageCost>5.50</PackageCost>
<SellPrice>7.40</SellPrice>
</package>
<package>
<PackageName>Corporate</PackageName>
</package>
<package>
<PackageName>Corporate3</PackageName>
- 190 -
</package>
<PackageCount>3</PackageCount>
</resellerpackagepricing>
<Command>CALCULATEALLHOSTPACKAGEPRICING</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
l GetHostAccount
l GetStorageUsage
l HostPackageDefine
l HostPackageDelete
l HostPackageModify
l HostPackageView
l HostParkingPage
- 191 -
CalculateHostPackagePricing
Description
Definition
Calculate the cost and selling price of Web hosting packages (both existing and
planned) based on the costs and selling prices of their components.
Usage
Use this command to configure one or more Web hosting packages and calculate their
cost based on the components they contain. This command does not create the pack-
ages; rather, it allows you to adjust quantities of each component and view the effect on
the overall price of the package. Once you have a configuration you like, you can create
the package using the HostPackageDefine command.
Note that this command does not check for a valid package. For example, if you specify
a PackageName that already exists as a Windows package but specify Linux in this
query, the response will give the pricing for the Linux package; however, if you try to run
HostPackageDefine with the Linux package, the query will fail.
Availability
In the Set Packages section, the re-calculate button calls the Cal-
culateHostPackagePricing command.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 192 -

Number of Web hosting packages being

PackageCount Required 2
defined in this query
Name of Web hosting package X. To

PackageNameX (X=1 to retrieve a list of currently defined pack-
Required 14
PackageCount) ages, use the WebHostGetReseller-
Packages command.
Operating system of Web hosting pack-

OSTypeIDX Required age X. Permitted values are: 1 Windows 2
2 Linux
Number of Web storage units to include

Optional; default is in Web hosting package X. Each unit con-
StorageUnitsX 2
1 tains 1GB; maximum permitted is 400
units (total of 400GB).
Number of bandwidth units to include in

Optional; default is Web hosting package X. Each unit con-
BandwidthUnitsX 2
1 tains 20GB; maximum permitted is 150
Number of POP email units to include in

Web hosting package X. Each unit con-
POPUnitsX tains 10 email boxes with 100MB storage 2
1
per mailbox; maximum permitted is 30
units (total of 300 mailboxes).
Number of SQL database storage units

Optional; default is to include in Web hosting package X.
SQLUnitsX 2
0 Each unit contains 250MB; maximum
permitted is 30 units (total of 7500MB).

- 193 -

(Responses in text format are numbered, X=1 to Pack-
PackageNameX
ageCount Name of this Web hosting package
Number of storage units for Web site content. Each storage

StorageUnitsX
unit is 1GB.
Number of bandwidth units in this package. Each bandwidth

BandwidthUnitsX
unit is 20GB.
Number of POP mail units in this package. Each POP unit is

POPUnitsX
10 mailboxes, with 100MB storage per mailbox.
Number of units of SQL database storage in this package.

SQLUnitsX
Each SQL unit is 250MB.
ID number of the operating system of the Web hosting server

OSTypeIDX for this Web hosting account. 1 indicates Windows; 2 indicates
Linux.
Operating system of the Web hosting server for this Web host-
OSTypeX
ing account. Return values are Windows or Linux.
PackageCostX The cost to this account for this package
SellPriceX The price this account charges customers for this package
Number of different Web hosting packages listed in this

PackageCount
response

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 194 -
Example
The following query defines Web hosting packages Silver and Gold, calculates their cost
and resale price, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=CALCULATEHOSTPACKAGEPRICING&uid=resellid
&pw-
w=resellpw&PackageName1=Silver&OSTypeID1=1&StorageUnits1=1
&BandwidthUnits1=1&PopUnits1=1&SQLUnits1=0
&PackageName2=Gold&OSTypeID2=1&&StorageUnits2=2
&BandwidthUnits2=2&PopUnits2=2&SQLUnits2=1&PackageCount=2
&responsetype=xml
In the response, package listings and an ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was
successful:
Output

<resellerpackagepricing>
<package>
<PackageName>Silver</PackageName>
<OSTypeID>1</OSTypeID>
<OSType>Windows</OSType>
</package>
<package>
<PackageName>Gold</PackageName>
- 195 -
</package>
</resellerpackagepricing>
<Command>CALCULATEHOSTPACKAGEPRICING</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
l GetHostAccount
l GetStorageUsage
l HostPackageDefine
l HostPackageDelete
l HostPackageModify
l HostPackageView
l HostParkingPage
- 196 -
CancelHostAccount
Description
Definition
Enable or disable a Web hosting account, or mark a Web hosting account for deletion at
the end of the current billing cycle.
Usage
Use this command to enable a Web hosting account, unless it has been disabled by our
system for nonpayment or overages. In those circumstances, the Web hosting account
must be enabled by a customer service representative.
Use this command to disable a Web hosting account.
Use this command to flag a Web hosting account for deletion at the end of the billing
cycle.
Use this command to remove a deletion flag on a Web hosting account.
Availability
Constraints
l This command cannot be used to enable an account that has been disabled by our
system for nonpayment or overages. In those circumstances, the Web hosting
account must be enabled by a customer service representative.
Input parameters
- 197 -

HostAccount Required Name of Web hosting account 14
Enabled status of this Web hosting

account. Set to 0 or false to disable the
Web hosting account. Anything else
enables the account unless it has been
Enable disabled by our system for nonpayment 5
1
or overages. If disabled by our system,
the Web hosting account can only be
enabled by a customer service rep-
resentative.
Deletion flag for this Web hosting

account. Set to 1 or true to flag the Web
Optional; default is hosting account for deletion at the end of
Delete 5
0 the billing cycle. Anything else leaves it
as an active account or removes any
deletion flag.
Optional; default is Cancel this Web hosting account? Set to

TotalCancel 5
0 1 to delete at the end of the billing cycle.
Reason for cancelling this Web hosting

account. Permitted values are: 1 No
longer needed 2 Not as expected 3 Price/-
DropdownReason Required 1
value 4 Technical issue 5 Support issue
6 Unsupported functionality 7 Other
reason not listed
Detailed explanation for cancelling this

FreeformReason Required Web hosting account. Most commonly, 200
this would be user-generated text.

- 198 -
Language Language flag for error messages
The number of errors if any occurred. If greater than 0 check the

ErrCount
Err(1 to ErrCount) values.

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l If a Web hosting account has been disabled, then the GetHostAccount commands
and other commands will return an error: Host account has been disabled. Please
contact customer service.
Example
The following query leaves Web hosting account B1027 enabled (Enable=1), flags it for
deletion at the end of the current billing cycle (Delete=1), and sends the response in
XML format:
Query
command=CANCELHOSTACCOUNTuid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&hostaccount=B1027&Enable=1&Delete=1
&responsetype=xml
- 199 -
In the response, the ErrCount value 0 confirms that the query was successful:
Output

<Command>CANCELHOSTACCOUNT</Command>
<Language>en</Language>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
l GetHostAccount
CancelOrder
Description
Definition
Cancel a pre-order for a specific domain name.
Usage
Use this command to cancel the order of a specific pre-registration domain name.
Availability
- 200 -
Constraints
l The OrderID and Domain Name must be passed in and be valid.
Input parameters
&pw=yourpassword&paramname=paramvalue
&nextparamname=nextparamvalue

DomainName Required The Domain Name to cancel 32
The Order ID the domain name belongs

OrderID Required
to

OrderID The Order ID
Success Boolean indicating if the action was successfull.
Text message indicating a success, or indicating an error mes-

Result
sage.
DomainName The domain name
- 201 -
Text message indicating the description as appropriate based
Description
on the action, and/or errors.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l The Domain Name must be a part of the order ID passed in, and both items must
belong to the reseller calling the API command.
Example
The following query cancels the domain abcd1234.catering from orderID 123456789,
and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=CancelOrderuid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&hostuid=resellid&pw=resellpw&OrderID=123456789
&DomainName=abcd1234.catering&responsetype=xml
In the response, the presence of spun names and the ErrCount value 0 indicate that the
query was successful:
Output

<Order>
- 202 -
<Result>Success</Result>
<Domains>
<DomainName>abcd1234.catering</DomainName>
<Description>Refunded</Description>
</Domains>
</Order>
<Command>CANCELORDER</Command>
<APIType>API.NET</APIType>
<Server>sjl21wresell01</Server>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<TrackingKey>dc60f425-1e6f-44de-86d8-e15390eea4e-
b</TrackingKey>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddToCart
l Check
l Purchase
CertChangeApproverEmail
Description
Definition
Change approver email for a Symantec, Verisign or GeoTrust certificate.
- 203 -
Usage
Use this command to change approver email for a Symantec, Verisign or GeoTrust cer-
tificate.
Availability
N/A
Constraints
l The cert must belong to this account.
Input parameters

ID number for this individual certificate.

CertID Required Retrieve this number using the Cer- 8
tGetCerts command.
Email addresses of qualified approvers

for the domain name embedded in a
ApproverEmail Required 79
CSR. Use the CertGetApproverEmail
command to retrieve the list.

- 204 -

Success status for retrieving the authoritative Whois registrant
Success
email
ApproverEmail Email address of approver

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query changes approver email for a GeoTrust Certificate, and requests the
Query
command=CertChangeApproverEmail&UID=resellid
&PW=resellpw&ResponseType=XML&CertID=111
&ApproverEmail=myemail@mydomain.com
Output
- 205 -

<CertChangeApproverEmail>
<ApproverEmail>myemail@mydomain.com</ApproverEmail>
</CertChangeApproverEmail>
<Command>CERTCHANGEAPPROVEREMAIL</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TrackingKey>00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l CertChangeApproverEmail
l CertConfigureCert
l CertGetCertDetail
l CertGetCerts
l CertModifyOrder
l CertParseCSR
l CertPurchaseCert
l CertReissueCert
l CertResendApproverEmail
l CertResendFulfillmentEmail
l GetCerts
- 206 -
CertConfigureCert
Description
Definition
Add or update certificate information in preparation to submit to Certificate Authority.
Usage
Use this command to add or update certificate information in preparation to submit to Cer-
tificate Authority.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/secure/ConfigureCerts.asp?CertID=289
The save changes button calls the CertConfigureCert command.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 207 -

ID number for this individual cer-

CertID Required tificate. Retrieve this number using 8
CertGetCerts
For UCC type,

Number of domains to be added to
DomainListNumber this parameter 3
the list
is Required
For UCC type,

UCCDomainListX X=1 to max-
this parameter Domain name 64
imum 100
is Required
For UCC type,

UCCEmailListX X=1 to maximum
this parameter Approver email 64
100
is Required
Type of Web server on which this

cert will be installed. Permitted val-
ues for GeoTrust, RapidSSL, and
VeriSign certs:
1 Apache + MOD SSL
2 Apache + Raven
3 Apache + SSLeay
4 C2Net Stronghold
7 IBM HTTP
8 iPlanet Server 4.1
9 Lotus Domino Go 4.6.2.51
10 Lotus Domino Go 4.6.2.6+
WebServerType (GeoTrust, Rap- 11 Lotus Domino 4.6+
idSSL, and VeriSign certs on this Required 12 Microsoft IIS 4.0 4
page; Comodo below) 13 Microsoft IIS 5.0
14 Netscape Enterprise/FastTrack
17 Zeus v3+
18 Other
20 Apache + OpenSSL
21 Apache 2
22 Apache + ApacheSSL
23 Cobalt Series
24 Cpanel
25 Ensim
26 Hsphere
27 Ipswitch
28 Plesk
- 208 -

29 Jakart-Tomcat
30 WebLogic (all versions)
31 OReilly WebSite Professional
32 WebStar
33 Microsoft IIS 6.0
Type of web server on which this

cert will be installed. Permitted
vabe installed. Permitted values for
Comodo certs:
1000 Otherold
1001 AOL
1002 Apache/ModSSL
1003 Apache-SSL (Ben-SSL, not
Strong-hold)
1004 C2Net Strongholdold
1005 Cobalt Raq
1006 Covalent Server Software
1007 IBM HTTP Server
1008 IBM Internet Connection
Server
1009 iPlanet
1010 Java Web Server (Javasoft /
Sun)
1011 Lotus Domino
WebServerType (Comodo certs
1012 Lotus Domino Go!
on this page; GeoTrust, Rap- Required 4
1013 Microsoft IIS 1.x to 4.x
idSSL, and VeriSign certs above)
1014 Microsoft IIS 5.x and later
1015 Netscape Enterprise Server
1016 Netscape FastTrack
1017 Novell Web Server
1018 Oracle
1019 Quid Pro Quo
1020 R3 SSL Server
1021 Raven SSL
1022 RedHat Linux
1023 SAP Web Application Server
1024 Tomcat
1025 Website Professional
1026 WebStar 4.x and later
1027 Web Ten ( from Tenon)
1028 Zeus Web Server
1029 Ensim
1030 Plesk
1031 WHM/cPanel
1032 H-Sphere
CSR Required Certificate Signing Request. We 4500
- 209 -

recommend saving this value to
use again in the CertParseCSR
command. Click on the links to for
more information about CSR:
GeoTrust certs RapidSSL certs
VeriSign certs EV certs require a
2048-bit CSR. When creating a
CSR for a wildcard cert, be sure to
submit the domain name as
*.sld.tld
Optional over-
allthe default
for a cert
Admin is the
Admin contact
for this
account; Given name of this ContactGiven
defaults for the name of this ContactType for this
ContactTypeFName cert Tech and cert. Permitted ContactTypes are 60
Billing contacts Admin, Tech, and Billing. For
are the cert example, AdminFName=John
Admin contact.
If you supply
information for
a ContactType,
this param is
Required
If you supply
Family name of this ContacFamily
information for
name of this ContactType for this
ContactTypeLName a ContactType, 60
cert. For example, AdminLName-
this param is
e=Doe
Required
If you supply
information for
Organization name of this
ContactTypeOrgName a ContactType, 60
ContactType for this cert
this param is
Optional
If you supply
information for
Job title of this ContactType for
ContactTypeJobTitle a ContactType, 60
this cert
this param is
Optional
If you supply Address, line 1, of this

ContactTypeAddress1 60
information for ContactType for this cert
- 210 -

a ContactType,
this param is
Required
If you supply
information for
Address, line 2, of this
ContactTypeAddress2 a ContactType, 60
this param is
Optional
If you supply
information for
City for this ContactType for this
ContactTypeCity a ContactType, 60
cert
this param is
Required
Either State or
Province is
State for this ContactType for this
ContactTypeState Required for 2
cert
each
ContactType
Either State or
Province is
Province for this ContactType for
ContactTypeProvince Required for 60
this cert
each
ContactType
If you supply Is this cert ContactTypes location

information for a state or province. Permitted val-
ContactTypeStateProvinceChoice a ContactType, ues are: 1
this param is S state
Optional P province
If you supply
information for
Postal code for this ContactType
ContactTypePostalCode a ContactType, 16
for this cert
this param is
Required
If you supply
information for Country for this ContactType for
ContactTypeCountry a ContactType, this cert, in two-letter country code 2
this param is format
Required
If you supply Phone for this this ContactType for

information for this cert. Required format is +Coun-
ContactTypePhone 17
a ContactType, tryCode.PhoneNumber, where
this param is CountryCode and PhoneNumber
- 211 -

Required the + is URL-encoded as a plus
sign (%2B).
If you supply
information for
Phone extension for this this
ContactTypePhoneExt a ContactType, 8
this param is
Optional
Fax number for this ContactType

If you supply for this cert. Required format is
information for +CountryCode.PhoneNumber,
ContactTypeFax a ContactType, where CountryCode and 17
this param is PhoneNumber use only numeric
Optional characters and the + is URL-
If you supply
information for Email address for this
ContactTypeEmailAddress a ContactType, ContactType for this cert. Use 128
this param is format Name@DomainName.com
Required

XML.

CertID Identification number of this individual cert
Success Has this cert been configured successfully?
Organization Organization embedded in this CSR
DomainName Domain name embedded in this CSR
Email Email addresss embedded in this CSR
HasBadExtensions Any bad extensions?
IsValidQuickDomainName Valid quick domain name?
IsValidTrueDomainName Valid true domain name?
- 212 -
Locality Locality embedded in this CSR
OrganizationUnit Organization unit embedded in this CSR
State State embedded in this CSR
Country Country embedded in this CSR
ApproverType Type of this approver
ApproverEmail Email address of this approver

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l Because the required parameters for this command exceed the length limits for
many browser address bars, you should submit your HTTP request using the
post instead of get method.
format, send
l ResponseType=HTML or ResponseType=XML in your request.
parameter
l Err(ErrCount) can be presented to the client. Otherwise process the returned para-
meters as defined above.
Example
The following query configures a cert, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=CERTCONFIGURECERT&uid=resellid
- 213 -
&pw=resellpw&ResponseType=XML&CertID=289
&Action=Configure&WebServerType=2
&CSR=MIIDPjCCAqcCAQAwYzEYMBYGA1UEAxMPa2ltYmVybHlza
GluLnVzMQwwCgYDVQQLEwNLaW0xDDAKBgNVBAoTA0tpbTERMA
8GA1UEBxMIQmVsbGV2dWUxCzAJBgNVBAgTAldBMQswCQYDV
QQGEwJVUzCBnzANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQEFAAOBjQA
wgYkCgYEA0gTzzYfBzisSajyZsb0wXPog%2FpHl
mYZp5v7ta5LbgSQ0XbLGGXU7KYwrhFZqZ1pgboflWgYSEM%2BVwYc%2B
0AZHd5yeAZKFN08GhTQxgaV0oiK3Q1Nj4pNVsju%2B7uwiBI
9v8S6Gyowa7LF4ZKcUWdHSX6e4%2Fgcgd1N%2FdWWQmzfpKisCAwEAAa
CCAZkwGgYKKwYBBAGCNw0CAzEMFgo1LjAuMjE5NS4yMHsGCisGAQQBg
jcCAQ4xbTBrMA4GA1UdDwEB%2FwQEAwIE8DBEBgkqhkiG9w0BCQ8ENzA1
MA4GCCqGSIb3DQMCAgIAgDAOBggqhkiG9w0DBAICAIAw
BwYFKw4DAgcwCgYIKoZIhvcNAwcwEwYDVR0lBAwwCgYIKwYBBQUHA
wEwgf0GCisGAQQBgjcNAgIxge4wgesCAQEeWgBNAGkAYwByAG
8AcwBvAGYAdAAgAFIAUwBBACAAUwBDAGgAYQBuAG4AZQBsACAAQwByAH
kAcAB0AG8AZwByAGEAcABoAGkAYwAgAFAAcgBvAHYAaQBkAGUAcgOBiQAn
Uv2qmJCagvl02VUuQzY%2FpQVwxgwTVxQyJ08RQcQZ%2FE4HV5MZe7
yuGC4l8NJxSLL2HVI6Qc7wKeMJAWhg%2BFv%2BJGFoJtu7VSw1%2Bgk
bWKYI%2FTsuvyTyA5bvrO6%2Bf7N9TkBtJCMl%2F9JtfItk71MNt7hj
ZqSVGjZp5kFWbYZfPd7ONgAAAAAAAAAAMA0GCSqGSIb3DQEBBQUAA4GBAG
vhsjZbtidJL48NqJecna5A0eIwGiizlYjJibLcdN6YnR%2BM
N4BP8JmX8T2CJPnHOf2PIeXUujLhzv5bajXvHVT
y1oG%2B%2FYLc%2B3LQzSm9rQXjMEk%2F1eJXi3OAShQX%2BS2Gby-
aUitu%2BlZ%2FK8QIzxCtoKf0vNlzbB70fOjWWQqfJhVsm
&AdminOrgName=Bel+Air&AdminJobTitle=Pres&AdminFName=F
&AdminLName=Bern&AdminAddress1=516+Apple&AdminCity=Bel+Air
&AdminState=MD&AdminPostalCode=21014&AdminCountry=US
&AdminPhone=5555555555&AdminEmailAddress=
john@resellerdocs.com&TechOrgName=Bel+Air&TechJobTitle=Pres
&TechFName=F&TechLName=Bern&TechAddress1=516+Apple
&TechCity=Bel+Air&TechState=MD&TechPostalCode=21014
&TechCountry=US&TechPhone=5555555555
&TechEmailAddress=john@resellerdocs.com
&BillingOrgName=Bel+Air&BillingJobTitle=Pres&BillingFName=F
&BillingLName-
e=Bern&BillingAddress1=516+Apple&BillingCity=Bel+Air
&BillingState=MD&BillingPostalCode=21014&BillingCountry=US
&BillingPhone=5555555555
&BillingEmailAddress=john@resellerdocs.com
In the response, a success value True confirms that the query was successful:
Output
- 214 -

<CertConfigureCert>
<CertID>289</CertID>
<CSRData>
<Organization>Acme</Organization>
<DomainName>resellerdocs.com</DomainName>
<Email />
<HasBadExtensions>false</HasBadExtensions>
<IsValidQuickDomainName>true</IsValidQuickDomainName>
<IsValidTrueDomainName>true</IsValidTrueDomainName>
<Locality>Townsville</Locality>
<OrganizationUnit>Sales</OrganizationUnit>
<State>WA</State>
<Country>US</Country>
</CSRData>
<ApproverEmail />
<Approver Type="Domain">
<ApproverEmail>johndoe@resellerdocs.com</ApproverEmail>
</Approver>
</Approver>
<Approver Type="Generic">
</Approver>
......
</CertConfigureCert>
<Command>CERTCONFIGURECERT</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
- 215 -
<Done>true</Done>
Related commands
l CertConfigureCert
l CertGetCertDetail
l CertGetCerts
l CertModifyOrder
l CertParseCSR
l CertPurchaseCert
l CertReissueCert
l GetCerts
CertGetApproverEmail
Description
Definition
Retrieve the email addresses of qualified approvers for the domain name embedded in a
CSR.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the email addresses of qualified approvers for the domain
name embedded in a CSR.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/secure/ConfigureCerts.asp?CertID=295
- 216 -
The save changes button calls the CertParseCSR command to retrieve the domain
name associated with this CSR. Then, the CertGetApproverEmail command calls the
authoritative WhoIs and retrieves the email address for the registrant of that domain.
Constraints
Input parameters

Domain name that is associated with this

cert, in format sld.tld. Use Cer-
Domain Required 79
tParseCSR or CertGetCertDetail to
retrieve this value.

tGetCerts command.


Success
email
- 217 -
ApproverType Type of approver

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query queries the authoritative Whois database for the domain registrants
email address, generates other email addresses that are likely to be valid approvers for
the cert, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=CertGetApproverEmail&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&Domain=resellerdocs.com&ResponseType=XML
In the response, a Success status True confirms that the query was successful:
Output
<CertGetApproverEMail>
- 218 -
<Approver-
Email>kdfmxykmg@whoisprivacyprotect.com</ApproverEmail>
</Approver>
<Approver-
Email>kdfmxykmg@whoisprivacyprotect.com</ApproverEmail>
</Approver>
<ApproverEmail>admin@resellerdocs.com</ApproverEmail>
</Approver>
<Approver-
Email>administrator@resellerdocs.com</ApproverEmail>
</Approver>
<ApproverEmail>hostmaster@resellerdocs.com</ApproverEmail>
</Approver>
<ApproverEmail>root@resellerdocs.com</ApproverEmail>
</Approver>
<ApproverEmail>webmaster@resellerdocs.com</ApproverEmail>
</Approver>
<ApproverEmail>postmaster@resellerdocs.com</ApproverEmail>
</Approver>
<Approver Type="Manual">
</Approver>
</CertGetApproverEMail>
<Command>CERTGETAPPROVEREMAIL</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
- 219 -
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l CertConfigureCert
l CertGetCertDetail
l CertGetCerts
l CertModifyOrder
l CertReissueCert
l CertParseCSR
l CertPurchaseCert
l GetCerts
CertGetCertDetail
Description
Definition
Retrieve configuration information on one SSL certificate.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve detailed configuration information on one SSL certificate.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.comsecure/configure-ssl-certificate.aspx?certid=295
- 220 -
Constraints
Input parameters

ID number of this cert. Use the Cer-

CertID Required tGetCerts command to retrieve the ID 8
number


CertID ID number of this individual cert
DomainName Domain this cert is associated with
ValidityPeriod Total validity duration of this cert, in months
OrderDate Date on which this cert was ordered
ConfigDate Date on which this cert was installed
RenewalIndicator Renewal indicator setting for this cert
WebServerTypeID ID number of the type of server this cert is configured for
- 221 -
WebServerTypeName Text description of the type of server this cert is configured for
OrderID ID number of the order that included this cert
OrderDetailID Item ID number of this cert when it was ordered
ExpirationDate Expiration date of this cert
ServerCount Should always be 1
ApproverEmail Email address of the registrant
Message Message
CertStatusID ID number that identifies this certs phase in its processing
CertStatus Text description of this certs status in its processing
CertStatusDetail Verbose description of status
ProdType Product ID number of this type of cert
ProdDesc Text description of this type of cert
Certificate Signing Request (CSR) code, provided by the cer-

CSR
tificate authority
ReferenceID Reference ID number for this cert
SSLCertificate SSL certificate, provided by the certificate authority.
ContactTypeOrgName Organization name of Admin, Tech, or Billing Contact
ContactTypeJobTitle Job title of Contact
ContactTypeFName Given name of Contact
ContactTypeLName Family name of Contact
ContactTypeAddress1 Contact address, first line
ContactTypeAddress2 Contact address, second line
ContactTypeCity Contact city
ContactTypeStateProvince Contact state or province
ContactTypeStateProvinceChoice Is this a state or a province?
ContactTypePostalCode Contact postal code
ContactTypeCountry Contact country
ContactTypePhone Contact phone
- 222 -
ContactTypeFax Contact fax
ContactTypeEmailAddress Contact email address
ContactTypePhoneExt Contact phone extension
WebServerTypeID ID number of this type of Web server
WebServerTypeName Text description of this type of Web server
WebServerTypeCode Text abbreviation of this type of Web server

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves information on a cert, and sends the response in XML
format:
Query
command=CERTGETCERTDETAIL&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&CertID=288&ResponseType=XML
- 223 -
In the response, cert information and an ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was suc-
cessful:
Output
<CertGetCertDetail>
<DomainName>kimberlyshin.us</DomainName>
<OrderDate>5/4/2005 2:21:07 PM</OrderDate>
<RenewalIndicator>False</RenewalIndicator>
<WebServerTypeID>33</WebServerTypeID>
<WebServerTypeName>Microsoft IIS 6.x or later-
</WebServerTypeName>
<ServerCount>1</ServerCount>
<ApproverEmail></ApproverEmail>
<Message></Message>
<CertStatusID>1</CertStatusID>
<CertStatus>Awaiting Configuration</CertStatus>
<CertStatusDetail></CertStatusDetail>
<ReissueStatus></ReissueStatus>
<ProdDesc>SSL Certificate - GeoTrust TrueBizID Wild-
card</ProdDesc>
<UseWebHosting>0</UseWebHosting>
<SSLCertificate></SSLCertificate>
<CSR>
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST-----
MIIDPjCCAqcCAQAwYzEYMBYGA1UEAxMPa2ltYmVy-
bHlzaGluLnVzMQwwCgYDVQQLEwNLaW0xDDAKB
gNVBAoTA0t-
pbTERMA8GA1UEBxMIQmVs-
bGV2dWUxCzAJBgNVBAgTAldBMQswCQYDVQQGEwJVUzCBnz
ANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQEFAAOBjQAwgYkCgYEA0gTzzYfBzisSa-
jyZsb0wXPog/pHlmYZp5v7ta5LbgSQ
0XbLGGXU7KYwrhFZqZ1p-
gboflWgYSEM+VwYc+0AZHd5yeAZKFN08GhTQxgaV0oiK3Q1Nj4pNVsju+
- 224 -
owa7LF4ZKcUWdHSX6e4/gcg-
d1N/dWWQmzfpKisCAwEAAaCCAZkwGgYKKwYBBAGCN
w0CAzEMFgo1LjAuMjE5NS4yMHsGCisGAQQBgjcCAQ4xbTBrMA4GA1UdDwEB-
/wQEAwIE8DBEBgkqhk
iG9w0BCQ8ENzA1MA4GCCqGSIb3DQMCAgIAgDAOBg-
gqhkiG9w0DBAICAIAwBwYFKw4DAgcwCgYIKoZ
IhvcNAw-
cwEwYDVR0lBAwwCgYIKwYBBQUHAwEwg-
f0GCisGAQQBgjcNAgIxge4wgesCAQEeWgBNAGkA
YwByAG8AcwBvAGYAdAAgAFIAUwBBACAAUwBDAGgAYQBuAG4AZQBsACAAQwB-
yAHkAcAB0AG8AZwByA
GEAcABoAGkAYwAgAFAAcgBvAHYAaQBkAGUAcgOBiQAnUv2qmJCagvl02VUu-
QzY/pQVwxgwTVxQyJ0
8RQcQZ/E4HV5MZe7y-
uGC4l8NJxSLL2HVI6Qc7wKeMJAWhg+Fv+JGFoJtu7VSw1+gk-
bWKYI/TsuvyT
yA5b-
vrO6+f7N9TkBtJCMl/9Jt-
fItk71MNt7hjZqSVGjZp5kFWbYZfPd7ONgAAAAAAAAAAMA0GCSqG
SIb3DQEBBQUAA4GBAGvh-
sjZbtidJL48NqJecna5A0eIwGiizlYjJibLcdN6YnR+MN4BP8JmX8T2CJ
PnHOf2PIeXUujLhzv5ba-
jXvHVTy1oG+/YLc+3LQzSm9rQXjMEk/1eJXi3OAShQX+S2GbyaUitu+lZ
/K8QIzxCtoKf0vNlzbB70fOjWWQqfJhVsm
-----END CERTIFICATE REQUEST-----
</CSR>
<PVT>
-----BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY-----
-----END RSA PRIVATE KEY-----
</PVT>
<ReferenceID></ReferenceID>
<AdminOrgName>Bel Air</AdminOrgName>
<AdminJobTitle>Pres</AdminJobTitle>
<AdminFName>F</AdminFName>
<AdminLName>Bern</AdminLName>
<AdminAddress1>516 Apple</AdminAddress1>
<AdminAddress2></AdminAddress2>
<AdminCity>Bel Air</AdminCity>
<AdminStateProvince></AdminStateProvince>
<AdminStateProvinceChoice>S</AdminStateProvinceChoice>
<AdminPostalCode>21014</AdminPostalCode>
<AdminCountry>US</AdminCountry>
<AdminPhone>5555555555</AdminPhone>
- 225 -
<AdminFax></AdminFax>
<AdminE-
mailAddress>john@resellerdocs.com</AdminEmailAddress>
<AdminPhoneExt></AdminPhoneExt>
<TechOrgName>Bel Air</TechOrgName>
<TechJobTitle>Pres</TechJobTitle>
<TechFName>F</TechFName>
<TechLName>Bern</TechLName>
<TechAddress1>516 Apple</TechAddress1>
<TechAddress2></TechAddress2>
<TechCity>Bel Air</TechCity>
<TechStateProvince></TechStateProvince>
<TechStateProvinceChoice>S</TechStateProvinceChoice>
<TechPostalCode>21014</TechPostalCode>
<TechCountry>US</TechCountry>
<TechPhone>5555555555</TechPhone>
<TechFax></TechFax>
<TechEmailAddress>john@resellerdocs.com</TechEmailAddress>
<TechPhoneExt></TechPhoneExt>
<BillingOrgName>Bel Air</BillingOrgName>
<BillingJobTitle>Pres</BillingJobTitle>
<BillingFName>F</BillingFName>
<BillingLName>Bern</BillingLName>
<BillingAddress1>516 Apple</BillingAddress1>
<BillingAddress2></BillingAddress2>
<BillingCity>Bel Air</BillingCity>
<BillingStateProvince></BillingStateProvince>
<BillingPhone>5555555555</BillingPhone>
<BillingFax></BillingFax>
<BillingE-
mailAddress>john@resellerdocs.com</BillingEmailAddress>
<BillingPhoneExt></BillingPhoneExt>
<WebServerTypes>
<WebServerType>
<WebServerTypeName>Apache + ApacheSSL</WebServerTypeName>
<WebServerTypeCode>apacheapachessl</WebServerTypeCode>
</WebServerType>
<WebServerType>
- 226 -
<WebServerTypeName>Apache + MOD SSL</WebServerTypeName>
<WebServerTypeCode>apachessl</WebServerTypeCode>
</WebServerType>
......
</WebServerTypes>
</CertGetCertDetail>
<Command>CERTGETCERTDETAIL</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>15d0de00-b38a-49ff-932e-f589252acf45</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l CertConfigureCert
l CertGetCerts
l CertModifyOrder
l CertReissueCert
l CertParseCSR
l CertPurchaseCert
l GetCerts
- 227 -
CertGetCerts
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of the SSL certificates currently registered in this account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of the types of SSL certificates that that are currently
registered in this account.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com /secure/manage-ssl-certificates.aspx
The table lists the certs currently registered in this account.
Constraints
Input parameters

- 228 -

Product identification number. Permitted
values are: 20: GeoTrust QuickSSL
Premium 21: GeoTrust True BusinessID
23: RapidSSL 24: GeoTrust TrueBizID
with EV 26: GeoTrust QuickSSL 27:
GeoTrust TrueBizID Wildcard 180: Ver-
ProdType Optional isign Secure Site 181: Verisign Secure 3
Site Pro 182: Verisign Secure Site EV
183: Verisign Secure Site Pro EV 211:
Comodo Essential 212: Comodo Instant
213: Comodo Premium Wildcard 214:
Comodo Essential Wildcard 221:
Comodo EV 222: Comodo EV SGC
Return results beginning with this pos-

ition in the sorted list. For example,
StartPosition StartPosition=26&PagingPageSize=25 8
1
returns accounts 26 through 50 in the sor-
ted list.
Number of accounts to return in this

PagingPageSize response. Maximum permitted value is 3
25
250.
Optional; default is Sorting parameter. Permitted values are:

SortBy 20
CertID CertID Domain CertStatus Expiration
Optional; default is Sort order. Permitted values are: Asc

SortByDirection 8
Asc Desc
Filter output by a specific cert status ID.

Permitted values are: 0: Return all certs
1: Awaiting Configuration 2: Processing
4: Certificate Issued 6: Rejected by Cus-
tomer 7: Refunded - No Cert Issued 8:
Refunded - Cert Issued 9: Approval Email
CertStatusID Optional 4
Sent (Comodo only) 10: Approved by
Domain Owner (Comodo only) 12: Pend-
ing Installation (associate with our host-
ing) 13: Cert Installed (associate with our
hosting) Note: CertStatusID=3, 5 and 11
are no longer valid
Order date start filter. Use format

OrderDateStart Optional 10
MM/DD/YYYY.
Order date end filter. Use format

OrderDateEnd Optional 10
MM/DD/YYYY.
- 229 -

Expiration date start filter. Use format
ExpirationDateStart Optional 10
MM/DD/YYYY.
Expiration date end filter. Use format

ExpirationDateEnd Optional 10
MM/DD/YYYY.


IsExpired Is this cert expired.
CertID ID number for this individual cert, from our database
OrderDate Date on which this cert was purchased
ConfigDate Date on which this cert was configured
DomainName Domain that this cert is associated with
ValidityPeriod Expiration date for this cert
RenewalIndicator Renewal indicator setting
ProdType Product ID number, from our records
ProdDesc Text description of product
ExpirationDate Expiration date of this cert
ServerCount Should always return 1
CertStatus Current status of this cert
CertStatusID ID number corresponding to current cert status
OrderID Identification number of the order that included this cert

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 230 -
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves all certs in a domain name account, and sends the
Query
com-
mand=CertGetcerts&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw&ResponseType=XML
In the response, cert information and the ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was
successful:
Output
<CertGetCerts>
<Certs>
<Cert>
<IsExpired>False</IsExpired>
<OrderDate>11/10/2011</OrderDate>
<DomainName></DomainName>
<ProdDesc>SSL Certificate - RapidSSL</ProdDesc>
<ExpirationDate>11/10/2012</ExpirationDate>
- 231 -
</Cert>
<Cert>
<IsExpired>False</IsExpired>
<DomainName>www.california.com</DomainName>
</Cert>
......
<ProductType>all</ProductType>
<PagingPageSize></PagingPageSize>
<Count>3253</Count>
<Sortby></Sortby>
<SortByDirection>desc</SortByDirection>
</Certs>
</CertGetCerts>
<Command>CERTGETCERTS</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
- 232 -
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
ingKey>
Related commands
l CertConfigureCert
l CertGetCertDetail
l CertModifyOrder
l CertReissueCert
l CertParseCSR
l CertPurchaseCert
l GetCerts
CertModifyOrder
Description
Definition
Cancel a cert configuration order. Cancellation is permitted while a cert is in status
Approval email sent or Processing. This command does not delete the cert from a cus-
tomers account; it only cancels the configuration order. This allows a customer to
change the configuration, including the domain name with which the cert will be asso-
ciated.
Usage
Use this command to cancel a cert configuration order. A cert configuration order can
only be canceled while the cert is in status Approval email sent or Processing.
Availability
- 233 -

https://resellertest.enom.com/secure/secure/configure-ssl-certificate.aspx?certid=295
Constraints
l The CertModifyOrder command must reach the Certification Authority before they
validate the cert.
Input parameters

ID number for this cert, from our records.

CertID Required Use the CertGetCerts command to 6
retrieve this number.


CertID Identification number of this cert
- 234 -

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query cancels the configuration order for a cert, and sends the response in
XML format:
Query
command=CertModifyOrder&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&CertID=294&ResponseType=XML
In the response, a cert ID number and an ErrCount value 0 confirms that the query was
successful:
Output

<CertModifyOrder>
</CertModifyOrder>
- 235 -
<Command>CERTMODIFYORDER</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
Related commands
l CertConfigureCert
l CertGetCertDetail
l CertGetCerts
l CertReissueCert
l CertParseCSR
l CertPurchaseCert
l GetCerts
CertParseCSR
Description
Definition
Parse a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) to determine the domain name and other
information associated with this cert.
Usage
- 236 -
Use this command to parse a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) to determine the
domain name and other information associated with this cert.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/secure/configure-ssl-certificate.aspx?certid=295
Constraints
Input parameters

Certificate Signing Request (CSR) gen-

CSR Required erated as an input parameter for the Cer- 4500
tConfigureCert command.
ID number of this cert. To retrieve this

CertID Required number, use the CertGetCerts com- 8
mand.

- 237 -

Success Success status of this parsing operation
Organization Organization name embedded in the CSR
DomainName Domain name embedded in the CSR
Email Email address embedded in the CSR
Locality Locality (usually a city) embedded in the CSR
OrganizationUnit Organizational unit embedded in the CSR
State State embedded in the CSR
Country Country embedded in the CSR

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query parses a CSR and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=CertParseCSR&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
- 238 -
&ResponseType=XML&CertID=295&CSR=CSR=%2D%2D%2D%2D%2D
BEGIN+NEW+CERTIFICATE+REQUEST%2D%2D%2D%2D%2D%0D%0AMIIDVzCC
AsACAQAwfDELMAkGA1UEBhMCVVMxCzAJBgNVBAgTAkRFMRMwEQYDV
QQH%0D%0AEwpXaWxtaW5ndG9uMRIwEAYDVQQKEwlBY21lIEluYy4xGDAWBg
NVBAsTD1NTTCBD%0D%0AZXJ0aWZpY2F0ZTEdMBsGA1UEAxMUd3d3LnJl
c2VsbGVyZG9jcy5jb20wgZ8wDQYJ%0D%0AKoZIhvcNAQEBBQADgY
0AMIGJAoGBAL0aEkBD2RkKOm82yJGy%2F
IhLRH7pYIGZCazh%0D%0ACxp731BjemXjSaVJLu0%2BoE6sIMRhV0
4X%2FJjVFgGGbswVvHT5qWZdpODe2EEBG971%0D%0ABJlUmBGEX%
2Flgkd%2BjjHbP3MnOqbkuRRYrdao2CPjB3dcv46IcjFvCl5P%2BS
EVx7Y9c%0D%0Awjk3n%2FxLAgMBAAGgggGZMBoGCisGAQQ
BgjcNAgMxDBYKNS4yLjM3OTAuMjB7Bgor%0D%0ABgEEAYI3AgEO
MW0wazAOBgNVHQ8BAf8EBAMCBPAwRAYJKoZIhvcNAQkPBDcwNTAO
%0D%0ABggqhkiG9w0DAgICAIAwDgYIKoZIhvcNAwQCAgCAMAcGBSsOAw
IHMAoGCCqGSIb3%0D%0ADQMHMBMGA1UdJQQ
MMAoGCCsGAQUFBwMBMIH9BgorBgEEAYI3DQICMYHuMIHrAgEB%0D%0AH
loATQBpAGMAcgBvAHMAbwBmAHQAIABSAFMAQQAgAFMAQwBo
AGEAbgBuAGUAbAAg%0D%0AAEMAcgB5AHAAdABvAGcAcgBhAHAAaABpAG
MAIABQAHIAbwB2AGkAZABlAHIDgYkA%0D%0AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA>A%0D%0AA
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA%0D%0AAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAADANBgkqhkiG
%0D%0A9w0B9w0BAQUFAAOBgQCfN86YfjwTGCMj84DFkvQBPX0zQ881
5bgqaZSNHQRYl67Gj4A%2B%0D%0Awmg3O18lX0NwBt%2BT
%2F57OaJS4HB6x6JvAo96N%2B1vX%2F
%2BiG2thcu1PqTb%2Fu%2BmUbapaa%0D%0Ackas6Ubbe2MVHKRz7o
0ZNfIKUrRBdCRtZBEVxz1ZrPMqRHVo1oq5N17SEA%3D%3D%0D%0A%2D%2D
%2D%2D%2DEND+NEW+CERTIFICATE+REQUEST%2D%2D%2D%2D%2D
In the response, parsed information and an ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was
successful:
Output

<interface-response><CertParseCSR>
<Organization>Acme Inc.</Organization>
<DomainName>www.resellerdocs.com</DomainName>
<Email />
<Locality>Wilmington</Locality>
<OrganizationUnit>SSL Certificate</OrganizationUnit>
<State>DE</State>
- 239 -
</CertParseCSR>
<Command>CERTPARSECSR</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
Related commands
l CertConfigureCert
l CertGetCertDetail
l CertGetCerts
l CertReissueCert
l CertModifyOrder
l CertPurchaseCert
l GetCerts
CertPurchaseCert
Description
Definition
Send a cert configuration to its Certification Authority for final approval and issuance of
the cert.
Usage
- 240 -
Once you have confirmed that all configuration information is correct, use this command
to send the configurationto the Certification Authority for final approval and issuance of
the cert.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/secure/configure-approval-email.aspx?CertID=295
Constraints
Input parameters

Email address of the registrant of record

for the domain to be associated with this
cert. Use the CertParseCSR command
to retrieve the domain name, and then
ApproverEmail Required 130
use the CertGetApproverEmail com-
mand to retrieve the registrants email
address (the approver) from the author-
itative Whois database.
ID number for this cert, from our records.

CertID Required 6
Use the CertGetCerts command to
- 241 -

retrieve this number.
For UCC type, this

Number of domains to be added to the
DomainListNumber parameter is 3
list
Required
For UCC type, this

UCCDomainListX X=1
parameter is Domain name 64
to maximum 100
Required
For UCC type, this

UCCEmailListX X=1 to
parameter is Approver email 64
maximum 100
Required
Required for all Name of the organization that will use

CSROrganization 64
Comodo certs this cert
Required for all Unit within the organization that will use
CSROrganizationUnit 64
Comodo certs this cert
Required for all Address, line 1, of the organization that

CSRAddress1 128
Comodo certs will use this cert
Required for all

CSRAddress2 Address, line 2 128
Comodo certs
Required for all

CSRAddress3 Address, line 3 128
Comodo certs
Required for all

CSRLocality Location (often a city) of the organization 128
Comodo certs
Required for all State or province in which the organ-

CSRStateProvince 128
Comodo certs ization is located
Required for all

CSRPostalCode Postal code of the organization 40
Comodo certs
Required for all Country in which the organization is loc-

CSRCountry 40
Comodo certs ated
Optional for all D-U-N-S Number. Speeds validation of

DUNSNumber 32
Comodo certs Secure, Secure Plus, and all EV certs

- 242 -

CertID Identification number of this cert

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query sends information to the Certification Authority for final validation of
the cert, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=CertPurchaseCert&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&ApproverEmail=johndoe@resellerdocs.com&CertID=295
&CSRAddress1=111+Main&CSRLocality=Wilmington
&CSRStateProvince=DE&CSRPostalCode=00123
&ResponseType=XML
In the response, an ErrCount value 0 confirms that the query was successful:
Output
- 243 -

<CertPurchaseCert>
</CertPurchaseCert>
<Command>CERTPURCHASECERT</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
Related commands
l CertConfigureCert
l CertGetCertDetail
l CertGetCerts
l CertReissueCert
l CertModifyOrder
l CertParseCSR
l GetCerts
CertReissueCert
Description
Definition
Reissue an existing Symantec, Verisign or GeoTrust certificate.
- 244 -
Usage
Use this command to reissue an existing Symantec, Verisign or GeoTrust certificate.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/secure/configure-ssl-certificate.aspx?certid=295
Constraints
Input parameters

Certificate Signing Request (CSR) gen-

CSR Required erated as an input parameter for the Cer- 4500
tConfigureCert command.
ID number of this cert. To retrieve this

CertID Required number, use the CertGetCerts com- 8
mand.

- 245 -

Success Success status of this parsing operation
Organization Organization name embedded in the CSR
DomainName Domain name embedded in the CSR
Email Email address embedded in the CSR
Locality Locality (usually a city) embedded in the CSR
OrganizationUnit Organizational unit embedded in the CSR
State State embedded in the CSR
Country Country embedded in the CSR

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query parses a CSR and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=CertReissueCert&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
- 246 -
&ResponseType=XML&CertID=111&CSR=%2D%2D%2D%2D%2D
BEGIN+NEW+CERTIFICATE+REQUEST%2D%2D%2D%2D%2D%0D%0AMI
IDVzCCAsACAQAwfDELMAkGA1UEBhMCVVMxCzAJBgNVBA
gTAkRFMRMwEQYDVQQH%0D%0AEwpXaWxtaW5ndG9uMRIw
EAYDVQQKEwlBY21lIEluYy4xGDAWBgNVBAsTD1NTTCBD%
0D%0AZXJ0aWZpY2F0ZTEdMBsGA1UEAxMUd3d3LnJlc2Vs
bGVyZG9jcy5jb20wgZ8wDQYJ%0D%0AKoZIhvcNAQEBBQA
DgY0AMIGJAoGBAL0aEkBD2RkKOm82yJGy%2FIhLRH7pYIG
ZCazh%0D%0ACxp731BjemXjSaVJLu0%2BoE6sI
MRhV04X%2FJjVFgGGbswVvHT5qWZdpODe2EEBG9
71%0D%0ABJlUmBGEX%2Flgkd%2BjjHbP3MnOqbkuRRYrd
ao2CPjB3dcv46IcjFvCl5P%2BSEVx7Y9c
%0D%0Awjk3n%2FxLAgMBAAGgggGZMBoGCisGAQQBgjc
NAgMxDBYKNS4yLjM3OTAuMjB7Bgor%0D%0ABgEEAYI3Ag
EOMW0wazAOBgNVHQ8BAf8EBAMCBPAwRAYJKoZIhvcNA
QkPBDcwNTAO%0D%0ABggqhkiG9w0DAgICAIAwDgYIKoZ
IhvcNAwQCAgCAMAcGBSsOAwIHMAoGCCqGSIb3%0D%0AD
QMHMBMGA1UdJQQMMAoGCCsGAQUFBwMBMIH9BgorBgEEA
YI3DQICMYHuMIHrAgEB%0D%0AHloATQBpAGMAcgBvAHMA
bwBmAHQAIABSAFMAQQAgAFMAQwBoAGEAbgBuAGUAbAAg
%0D%0AAEMAcgB5AHAAdABvAGcAcgBhAHAAaABpAGMAIAB
QAHIAbwB2AGkAZABlAHIDgYkA%0D%0AAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
AAAA>A%0D%0AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA%0D%0AAAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
DANBgkqhkiG%0D%0A9w0B9w0BAQUFAAOBgQCfN86YfjwT
GCMj84DFkvQBPX0zQ8815bgqaZSNHQRYl67Gj4A%2B%0D
%0Awmg3O18lX0NwBt%2BT%2F57OaJS4HB6x6JvAo96N
%2B1vX%2F%2BiG2thcu1PqTb%2Fu%2BmUbapaa%0D
%0Ackas6Ubbe2MVHKRz7o0ZNfIKUrRBdCRtZBEV
xz1ZrPMqRHVo1oq5N17SEA%3D%3D%0D%0A%2D%2D
%2D%2D%2DEND+NEW+CERTIFICATE+REQUEST%2D%2D
%2D%2D%2D
successful:
Output

<Message />
- 247 -
<Command>CERTREISSUECERT</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
Related commands
l CertConfigureCert
l CertGetCertDetail
l CertGetCerts
l CertModifyOrder
l CertParseCSR
l CertPurchaseCert
l GetCerts
CertResendApproverEmail
Description
Definition
Resend approver email for a Symantec, Verisign or GeoTrust certificate.
Usage
- 248 -
User this command to resend approver email for a Symantec, Verisign or GeoTrust cer-
tificate.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/secure/secure/configure-ssl-certificate.aspx?certid=295
Constraints
Input parameters


tGetCerts command.

- 249 -

Success
email

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
Query
command=CertResendApproverEmail&UID=resellid
successful:
Output
- 250 -
<CertResendApproverEmail>
<ApproverEmailType>ApproverEmail</ApproverEmailType>
</CertResendApproverEmail>
<Command>CERTRESENDAPPROVEREMAIL</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
Related commands
l CertConfigureCert
l CertGetCertDetail
l CertGetCerts
l CertModifyOrder
l CertParseCSR
l CertPurchaseCert
l CertReissueCert
l GetCerts
- 251 -
CertResendFulfillmentEmail
Description
Definition
Resend fulfillment email (final cert) for a Symantec, Verisign or GeoTrust certificate.
Usage
Use this command to resend fulfillment email (final cert) for a Symantec, Verisign or
GeoTrust certificate.
Availability
N/A
Constraints
Input parameters


CertID Required 8
Retrieve this number using the Cer-
- 252 -

tGetCerts command.


Success
email

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
Query
command=CertResendFulfillmentEmail&UID=resellid
- 253 -
successful:
Output
<CertResendFulfillmentEmail>
</CertResendFulfillmentEmail>
<Command>CERTRESENDFULFILLMENTEMAIL</Command>
<Server>blvdt112</Server>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
Related commands
l CertConfigureCert
l CertGetCertDetail
l CertGetCerts
l CertModifyOrder
l CertParseCSR
l CertPurchaseCert
l CertReissueCert
- 254 -
l GetCerts
Check
Description
Definition
Check the availability of a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to check whether a domain name is already registered.
Availability
The Check command is available to every reseller.
http://www.enom.com/
When you type a domain name in the Register A Domain boxes, the GO or Search but-
tons call the Check command.
Constraints
Domain names must meet the following requirements:
l Second-level domain (SLD) must be composed of the letters a through z, the num-
bers 0 through 9, and the hyphen (-) character.
l Some foreign character sets can display onscreen, but resolve to alphanumeric
plus hyphen characters in the underlying code.
l The SLD must not begin or end with the hyphen character.
l The SLD must not contain spaces.
l The SLD must not contain special characters other than the hyphen character.
l The third and fourth characters of the SLD must not both be hyphens unless it is an
encoded international-character domain name.
l The SLD must contain 2 to 63 characters, inclusive.
l SLDs are not case sensitive.
l The SLD-TLD combination must be unique.
- 255 -
Input parameters
Command=Check&UID=YourLogin&PW=YourPassword
&SLD=DesiredSLD&TLD=DesiredTLD&OptParam1=ParamValue1
&OptParam2=ParamValue2

Required unless
SLD DomainList is used 63
enom in enom.com)
Top-level domain name (extension). Per-

mitted values: Any single TLD, for
example, com * returns 11 of the most
Required unless
commonly used TLDs:com, org, net, biz,
TLD DomainList or 15
ws, info, cc, us, tv, bz, nu *1 returns
TLDList is used
com, net, org, info, biz, us, ws *2 returns
com, net, org, info, biz, us @ returns
com, net, org
A comma- or newline-delimited list of

DomainList Optional domains to check, up to 30 names. If 2000
used, SLD and TLD are ignored.
A comma- or newline-delimited list of

TLDList Optional TLDs to check, up to 30 names. If used, 2000
TLD is ignored.


If return includes multiple domains, the name of domain X
DomainX
(indexed X in HTML and Text output, but not in XML output)
Success code. Only 210 indicates that the name is available at

RRPCodeX
the Registry. 211 indicates the domain is not available at the
- 256 -
Registry.
Text which accompanies and describes the RRPCode. 210

RRPTextX
Domain available 211 Domain not available
IsPremiumName True indicates this is a premium name.
PremiumPrice Registration price per year for this premium name, in $US.
True indicates the registration price for this premium name is

PremiumAboveThresholdPrice
higher than for non-premium names.
DomainCount The number of names checked.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l When parsing the response, use the RRPCode value rather than the RRPText
value or the position in the response. Of these, only the RRPCode value is guar-
anteed by the Registry to be stable.
Example
The following checks whether the domain name unusualTVname.tv is available and
Query
- 257 -
com-
mand-
d=check&sld=unusualTVname&tld=tv&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&responsetype=xml
The response indicates that unusualTVname.tv is available:

Output
<DomainName>unusualtvname.tv</DomainName>
<RRPText>Domain not available</RRPText>
<Command>CHECK</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l AddBulkDomains
l InsertNewOrder
l NameSpinner
l Purchase
- 258 -
CheckLogin
Description
Definition
Validate user login for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command when you want to validate a users identity.
Availability
https://www.enom.com/Login.asp?page=%2Fmyaccount%2FDefault%2Easp%3F
Clicking the log-in button calls the CheckLogin command.
Constraints
Input parameters
Command=CheckLogin&UID=YourLogin&PW=YourPassword


- 259 -

PartyID PartyID of the account
Reseller Is this a reseller account.
ParentAccount Parent account ID number
IsETP Is this account an ETP account.
SEOPartner Is this an SEO partner.
BulkMembershipType BulkRegister membership type
BulkMembership Is this account a BulkRegister member?
bBulkMembershipStatus Status of BulkRegister membership
VerifiedBidder Is this a NameJet verified bidder.
RSA Reserved parameter. Should always return False.
SiteType Site
HelpEmailAddress Email address for the Billing contact for this account
Type Agreement type
Description Name of this agreement
Category Category of this agreement
RemoteURL URL of this agreement, if it is not served by us
LatestVersion Version number of this agreement
Agreed Has this account agreed to this agreement.
CurrentCompliance Is this account currently complying with this agreement.
AgreementNote Note on this agreement
ParentAccount Account ID of this accounts parent
IsETP Is the parent an ETP reseller.
Enforced Enforcement setting
ViewAgreement View setting for agreement
ClubDrop Is this account a Club Drop member?
- 260 -
ClubDropExpired Is this Club Drop membership expired
CartItems Number of items currently in cart
Language Language setting

ErrCount

ErrX
ResponseCount Number of responses
MinPeriod Minimum registration period (for domain names)
MaxPeriod Maximum registration period (for domain names)
Server Server name
Site Site for which this response is configured
IsLockable Can this domain be Registrar locked. (for domain names)
Is this a domain that can be purchased in real time. (for domain

IsRealTimeTLD
names)
TimeDifference Time difference between this site and our servers
ExecTime Time elapsed to execute this command

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 261 -
Example
The following query requests the party ID and reseller status of account resellid, and
requests the response in XML format:
Query
command=checklogin&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&responsetype=xml
The response provides basic information about the account:

Output
<PartyID>{BB4A2DE1-6485-45CB-A4FC-EE39BA0C1629}</PartyID>
<Reseller>True</Reseller>
<ParentAccount>000-00-0000</ParentAccount>
<IsETP>1</IsETP>
<SEOPartner>NA</SEOPartner>
<BulkMembershipType>None</BulkMembershipType>
<BulkMembership>False</BulkMembership>
<BulkMembershipStatus/>
<bBulkMembershipStatus>0</bBulkMembershipStatus>
<VerifiedBidder>False</VerifiedBidder>
<RSA>False</RSA>
<SiteType>E</SiteType>
<HelpE-
mailAddress>john.doe@resellerdocs.com</HelpEmailAddress>
<AgreementStatus>
<Agreement>
<Type>1</Type>
<Description>ResellerAgreement</Description>
<Category>ResellerAgreement</Category>
<RemoteURL/>
<LatestVersion>2.5</LatestVersion>
<Agreed>1</Agreed>
<CurrentCompliance>1</CurrentCompliance>
<AgreementNote/>
</Agreement>
<Agreement>
<Type>2</Type>
- 262 -
<Description>Network Solutions Service Agree-

ment</Description>
<Category>ClubDrop</Category>
<RemoteURL>http://www.networksolutions.com/legal/static-ser-
vice-agreement.jsp</RemoteURL>
<Agreed>0</Agreed>
<AgreementNote/>
</Agreement>
<Agreement>
<Type>3</Type>
<Description>NameJet Terms of Use</Description>
<RemoteURL/>
<Agreed>0</Agreed>
<AgreementNote/>
</Agreement>
<Agreement>
<Type>4</Type>
<Description>ResellerNotification</Description>
<Category>ResellerNotification</Category>
<RemoteURL/>
<Agreed>1</Agreed>
<AgreementNote/>
</Agreement>
<Agreement>
<Type>5</Type>
<Description>eNomCentral Registration Agree-
ment</Description>
<RemoteURL>ht-
tp://www.enomcentral.com/terms/agreement.asp</RemoteURL>
<Agreed>0</Agreed>
<AgreementNote/>
</Agreement>
- 263 -
<Agreement>
<Type>6</Type>
<Description>RegistrationAgreement</Description>
<Category>RegistrationAgreement</Category>
<RemoteURL/>
<Agreed>1</Agreed>
<AgreementNote/>
</Agreement>
<Agreement>
<Type>7</Type>
<Description>BulkRegister temp</Description>
<Category>Admin</Category>
<RemoteURL/>
<Agreed>0</Agreed>
<AgreementNote/>
</Agreement>
</AgreementStatus>
<AgreementCount/>
<Account>217-no-0647</Account>
<IsETP>1</IsETP>
<SecurePackageEnabled>False</SecurePackageEnabled>
<ForceAddedSecurity>False</ForceAddedSecurity>
<SecureLockToken/>
<FailureCount>0</FailureCount>
<SecureLockReturnMessage/>
<ExtraCheck>False</ExtraCheck>
<ViewAgreement>False</ViewAgreement>
<ClubDrop>True</ClubDrop>
<ClubDropExpired>False</ClubDropExpired>
<PdqAccountId>1000186</PdqAccountId>
<RSFAccountStatus>New</RSFAccountStatus>
<RSFExpDate>7/12/2012</RSFExpDate>
<IsBadEmail>False</IsBadEmail>
<Command>CHECKLOGIN</Command>
- 264 -
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l CreateAccount
l CreateSubAccount
l GetAccountInfo
l GetAllAccountInfo
l GetOrderDetail
l GetOrderList
l GetReport
l GetSubAccounts
l GetTransHistory
l UpdateAccountInfo
CheckNSStatus
Description
Definition
Retrieve information about a name server:
l If the name server exists and is registered using our credential, this command
returns status information.
l If a name server does not exist, this command informs you of that fact.
- 265 -
lIf a name server exists but is outside our credential, this command informs you of
that fact.
Usage
Use this command when you want status information about a name server, or want to
determine whether a name server exists, or is outside our credential.
Availability
Constraints
l To retrieve status information, the name server must exist and must be registered
under our credential.
l The query must call the name server in a valid format (by its use name, not its IP
address).
Input parameters

Name server use name to check. Use

CheckNSName Required 63
format dnsX.NameServerName.com.

- 266 -

Was this name server check successful. 1 indicates yes; 0
NSCheckSuccess
indicates no.
Other parameters will be returned, and will vary from one name
Other parameters
server to another

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l Check the return parameter Check the return parameter Err(ErrCount) can be
presented to the client. Otherwise process the returned parameters as defined
above.
Example
The following query requests the status of name server ns1.name-services.com, and
Query
command=checknsstatus&e.asp?command=checknsstatus
&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&checknsname=
ns1.name-services.com&responsetype=xml
The NsCheckStatus value of 1 indicates that the name server was found:
Output
- 267 -
<NsCheckSuccess>1</NsCheckSuccess>
<CheckNsStatus>
<name>ns2.budip.com</name>
<attrib-id>5693446_HOST_CNE-VRSN</attrib-id>
<ipaddress>12.123.225.3</ipaddress>
<attrib-upid>rccbatch</attrib-upid>
<attrib-clid>024</attrib-clid>
<attrib-crid>rccbatch</attrib-crid>
<status>
<status>ok</status>
<status>linked</status>
</status>
<attrib-update>2005-02-02T17:38:04.0000Z</attrib-update>
<attrib-crdate>2005-02-02T17:38:04.0000Z</attrib-crdate>
</CheckNsStatus>
<RRPText>Command completed successfully</RRPText>
<Command>CHECKNSSTATUS</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Server>SJL21WRESELL01</Server>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l DeleteNameServer
l GetDNS
l GetDNSStatus
l ModifyNS
l ModifyNSHosting
- 268 -
l UpdateNameServer
CommissionAccount
Description
Definition
Returns the current commission balance for an account.
Usage
Use this command to return the current commission balances for an account.
Availability
http://enomson/resellers/SubAccount.asp
On the subaccount page, the Access link calls the CommissionAccount command.
Constraints
Input parameters

- 269 -




ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the total and available commission balances for account
resellid, and requests the response in XML format:
Query
command=commissionaccount&uid=resellid
The response lists the balances:
- 270 -
Output
<CommissionAccount>
<PayInfoSaved>False</PayInfoSaved>
<Action/>
<data-errors>
</data-errors>
<CommissionBalance>172.41</CommissionBalance>
<AvailComBalance>172.41</AvailComBalance>
<HoldPeriod>90</HoldPeriod>
<AccountingInfo>
<OrgType/>
<OrgDesc/>
<TaxID/>
<PayableTo>Johnny Doety</PayableTo>
<Address1>15801 NE 24th Street</Address1>
<Address2/>
<City>Bellevue</City>
<StateProvince>WA</StateProvince>
<StateProvinceChoice>S</StateProvinceChoice>
<PostalCode>98008</PostalCode>
<Phone>+1.4252744500</Phone>
<Fax/>
<Updatable>1</Updatable>
</AccountingInfo>
</CommissionAccount>
<Command>COMMISSIONACCOUNT</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
- 271 -
Related commands
l GetBalance
l PE_GetRetailPrice
l PE_GetRocketPrice
l PE_SetPricing
Contacts
Description
Definition
Update contact information for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to set or change contact information for a domain.
If you want to update one contact type and leave the others as is, use this command with
the ContactType parameter.
When you create contacts for .eu and .be domain names, we recommend that you
always provide Registrant contact information that is separate from Billing contact inform-
ation; dont use the "same as Billing" default. Tip: If the Billing and Registrant contact
information are the same, we recommend changing the use or spelling of abbreviations
in the street address to help our system recognize that it needs to create multiple con-
tacts. Separating the Registrant and Billing information makes it easier to update Regis-
trant contact information in the future.
Availability
- 272 -
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/control-pan-
el/default.asp?DomainNameID=152533676
On the edit contact info page, typing information in the text boxes provides the parameter
values for the Contacts command.
Constraints
l The domain must exist in the account that is modifying it.
l Some country code TLDs require extended attributes (parameters that are specific
to the country code). To find out whether a country code TLD requires extended
parameters and what they are, run GetExtAttributes on the country code.
l The BILLING contact type cannot be updated with this command. To update billing
information, use UpdateAccountInfo.
l If you use the ContactType parameter, you can reset only one contact type.
l If you use the ContactType parameter, the contact type of the other parameters
must match it (for example, if you set ContactType=AUXBILLING, you must use
parameters
l AuxBillingOrganizationName, AuxBillingFirstName, and so on.
l If you dont use the ContactType parameter and dont supply new information for
all contacts, those that you dont supply will be empty in the database and will use
our defaults in interfaces.
Input parameters

Second-level domain name (for

SLD Required 63
- 273 -

Top-level domain name (exten-
TLD Required 15
sion)
If no contact parameters are sup-

plied, all contacts are set to the
Account Billing contact Type of
ContactType Optional 16
contact to add/update. Options
are REGISTRANT,
AUXBILLING, TECH, ADMIN
contact type you add or update

First name of ContactType. In
place of ContactType in the para-
meter name, substitute Regis-
ContactTypeFirstName Required 60
trant, AuxBilling, Tech, or Admin.
For example, to add or update the
Registrant, use Regis-
trantFirstName=John.

ContactTypeLastName Required Last name of ContactType con- 60
tact

ContactTypeOrganizationName Required Organization of ContactType con- 60
tact
ContactTypeJobTitle Optional Job title of ContactType contact 60

ContactTypeAddress1 Required 60
Address of ContactType contact
Additional address info of

ContactTypeAddress2 Optional 60
ContactType contact

ContactTypeCity Required 60
City of ContactType contact
State or province choice of

ContactTypeStateProvinceChoice
Optional ContactType contact. Permitted 1
values are: S State P Province
State or province of ContactType

ContactTypeStateProvince Optional 60
contact
Optional for most

Postal code of ContactType con-
ContactTypePostalCode TLDs; Required 16
tact
for .org

ContactTypeCountry Required 60
Country of ContactType contact
- 274 -

for each contact type you add or
ContactTypeEmailAddress Required update Email address of 128
ContactType contact

Phone number of ContactType
contact. Required format is
+CountryCode.PhoneNumber,
ContactTypePhone Required 17
where CountryCode and
PhoneNumber use only numeric
characters and the + is URL-
for each contact type you add or

ContactTypePhoneExt Optional update Phone extension of 17
ContactType contact
Fax number of ContactType con-

tact. Required format is +Coun-
ContactTypeFax Optional CountryCode and PhoneNumber 17
sign (%2B).
country codes Data required by

the Registry for some country
ExtendedAttributes Required codes. Use GetExtAttributes ?
whether this TLD requires exten-
ded attributes. varies

ResponseType Optional values are Text (default), HTML, 4
or XML.


ErrCount

ErrX
Done True indicates this entire response has reached you suc-
- 275 -
cessfully.
Notes
l The BILLING contact type cannot be updated with this command. To update billing
information, use UpdateAccountInfo.
l You can submit multiple contact data in a single request by omitting the
ContactType parameter and sending additional contact data by replacing Regis-
trant in the above optional parameters with the ContactTypes AUXBILLING,
TECH, or ADMIN.
l If you use the ContactType parameter, you can reset only one contact type.
l If you use the ContactType parameter, the contact type of the other parameters
must match it (for example, if you set ContactType=AUXBILLING, you must use
parameters AuxBillingOrganizationName, AuxBillingFirstName, and so on).
l If you dont use the ContactType parameter and dont supply new information for
all contacts, those that you dont supply will be empty in the database and will use
our defaults in interfaces.
l AUXBILLING masks the true billing contact in WhoIs output.
l Some country code TLDs require extended attributes (parameters that are specific
to the country code). To find out whether a country code TLD requires extended
parameters and what they are, run GetExtAttributes on the country code.
Example
The following query provides new technical contact information for resellerdocs.com and
Query
command=contacts&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&ContactType=Tech
&TechFirstName=John&TechLastName=Smith&TechPhone=
+1.5555555555&TechAddress1=100%20Main%20St.&TechCity=
- 276 -
Townsville&TechCountry=USA
&TechEmailAddress=john@resellerdocs.com&responsetype=xml
The error count of 0 in the response confirms that the query was successful:
Output
<Command>CONTACTS</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>fc1114b9-1773-4714-ae3a-db3a882f7c-
ab</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l AddContact
l GetAddressBook
l GetContacts
l GetExtAttributes
l GetServiceContact
l GetWhoisContact
l Preconfigure
- 277 -
CreateAccount
Description
Definition
Create a new subaccount.
Usage
Use this command to create a new retail subaccount.
CreateAccount differs from CreateSubAccount in that CreateAccount offers credit card
processing.
When you pass credit card information with this command, you must use the secure
HTTPS protocol.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/NewAccount.asp?page=
At the bottom of the information form, the submit button calls the CreateAccount com-
mand.
Constraints
l Parameter values submitted in the query must pass validation tests.
Input parameters
- 278 -

Subaccount login ID. Permitted

values are 6 to 20 characters in
NewUID Required length; permitted characters 20
include letters, numbers, hyphen,
and underscore
Subaccount password. Permitted

NewPW Required characters are letters, numbers, 20
hyphen, and underscore
Confirm subaccount password.

ConfirmPW Required Permitted characters are letters, 20
numbers, hyphen, and underscore
RegistrantOrganizationName Required Registrant organization 60
RegistrantPostalCode Required Registrant postal code 16
RegistrantStateProvinceChoice Registrant state or province

Optional 1
choice: S state P province

RegistrantPhone Required CountryCode and PhoneNumber 17
sign (%2B).

RegistrantFax Optional format is +Coun- 17
- 279 -

CountryCode and PhoneNumber
sign (%2B).
RegistrantEmailAddress Required Email address for Whois 128
Email address for us to contact

RegistrantEmailAddress_
Optional you about your domain name 128
Contact
account
Type of credit card. Permitted val-

ues are Visa, Mastercard, AmEx,
Discover.
CardType Required When you pass credit card inform- 20
ation with this command, you
must use the secure HTTPS pro-
tocol.
CCName Required Cardholder's name 60
CreditCardNumber Required Customer's credit card number 128
Credit card expiration month in

CreditCardExpMonth Required 2
MM format
Credit card expiration year in

CreditCardExpYear Required 4
YYYY format
CVV2 Required Credit card verification code 4
CCAddress Required Credit card billing address 60
CCZip Required Credit card billing postal code 15
Credit card billing country. The

CCCountry Required two-letter country code is a per- 60
mitted format.
Nature of the question used for

identity verification. Permitted val-
ues are:
smaiden mothers maiden name
sbirth city of birth
ssocial last 4 digits of SSN
AuthQuestionType Required 10
shigh high school
fteach favorite teacher
fvspot favorite vacation spot
fpet favorite pet
fmovie favorite movie
fbook favorite book
- 280 -

The answer to the question type
(mother's maiden name, city of
AuthQuestionAnswer Required 50
birth, last 4 digits of social secur-
ity, or high school)
The value of a send e-mail noti-

fication checkbox. If EmailIn-
fo=checked an email will be sent
EmailInfo Optional 10
to the registrant email parameter
posted with this request containing
this account information

XML.

OrganizationName Organization name of the Billing contact
FName First name (given name) of the Billing contact
LName Last name (family name) of the Billing contact
JobTitle Job title for the Billing contact
Address1 Address, line 1, for the Billing contact
Address2 Address, line 2, for the Billing contact
City City for the Billing contact
StateProvince State or province for the Billing contact
StateProvinceChoice Tells whether StateProvince value is a state or a province
PostalCode Postal code for the Billing contact
Country County for the Billing contact
Phone Phone number for the Billing contact
PhoneExt Phone extension for the Billing contact
Fax Fax number for the Billing contact
EmailAddress Email address for public WhoIs record
- 281 -
Email address that we use when contacting account owner
EmailAddress_Contact
about this account
Tells whether confirmation emails should be sent to these

EmailInfo
email addresses
CCType Type of credit card
CCName Cardholders name
CCNumber Credit card number
CCMonth Expiration month for this credit card
CCYear Expiration year for this credit card
CCAddress Billing address street address for this credit card
CCCity Billing address city for this credit card
CCStateProvince Billing address state or province for this credit card
CCZip Billing address postal code for this credit card
CCCountry Billing address country for this credit card
CCPhone Phone number on record for this credit card
1 indicates this subaccount is a reseller account; 0 indicates

Reseller
retail
NewUID Login ID for this subaccount
NewPW Password for this subaccount
ConfirmPW Repeat password, for confirmation purposes
AuthQuestionType Type of authorization question for this subaccount
AuthQuestionAnswer Answer to the authorization question
DefPeriod Default registration period for domain names, in years
StatusCustomerInfo Returns Successful if the subaccount was created
PartyID Party ID of this subaccount, for our records
Account ID code of this subaccount, for our records. We

Account
recommend that you store this value.
Code we use to log the user into the new subaccount imme-
sLoginPass
diately.
- 282 -

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l If there are errors validating the data passed in, the same parameters and values
are returned to rebuild the form.
Example
The following query creates subaccount ichiro, and requests the response in XML
format:
Query
command=CreateAccount&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&NewUID=ichiro&NewPW=ichiropw&ConfirmPW=ichiropw
&RegistrantOrganizationName=Reseller%20Documents
%20Inc.&RegistrantFirstName=John&RegistrantLastName=Doe
&RegistrantJobTitle=First%20Baseman&RegistrantAddress1=
111%20Main%20St.&RegistrantCity=Hometown
&RegistrantPostalCode=99999&RegistrantCountry=United+States
&RegistrantEmailAddress=john%2Edoe%40resellerdocs%2Ecom
&RegistrantFax=+1.5555555556&AuthQuestionType=smaiden
&AuthQuestionAnswer=jones&Reseller=0&CardType=visa
&CCName=test1&ResponseType=XML
- 283 -
The response confirms the successful creation of the subaccount and returns sub-
account information:
Output
<NewAccount>
<OrganizationName>Reseller Documents Inc.</Or-
ganizationName>
<Fname>John</Fname>
<Lname>Doe</Lname>
<JobTitle>First Baseman</JobTitle>
<Address1>111 Main St.</Address1>
<Address2/>
<City>Hometown</City>
<StateProvince/>
<StateProvinceChoice/>
<Phone>+1.5555555555</Phone>
<PhoneExt/>
<Fax>+1.5555555556</Fax>
<EmailAddress>john.doe@resellerdocs.com</EmailAddress>
<EmailAddress_Contact/>
<EmailInfo/>
<GetCustomerPaymentInfo>
<CCType>visa</CCType>
<CCName>test1</CCName>
<CCNumber/>
<CCMonth/>
<CCYear/>
<CCAddress/>
<CCCity/>
<CCStateProvince/>
<CCZip/>
<CCCountry/>
<CCPhone/>
</GetCustomerPaymentInfo>
<GetAccountInfo>
<Reseller>0</Reseller>
<NewUID>ichiro</NewUID>
<NewPW>ichiropw</NewPW>
<ConfirmPW>ichiropw</ConfirmPW>
- 284 -
<AuthQuestionType>smaiden</AuthQuestionType>
<AuthQuestionAnswer>jones</AuthQuestionAnswer>
</GetAccountInfo>
<GetCustomerPreferences>
<DefPeriod/>
</GetCustomerPreferences>
<StatusCustomerInfo>Successful</StatusCustomerInfo>
<PartyID>{779CA342-D320-E111-A3F0-005056BC7747}</PartyID>
<Account>599-nj-0803</Account>
<sLoginPass>7A1218131209144A4948401218131209140B0C404A49544
C54494B4A4A5B4F414E42414A4F5B3A36</sLoginPass>
</NewAccount>
<Command>CREATEACCOUNT</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l CheckLogin
l CreateSubAccount
l DeleteSubaccount
l GetAccountInfo
l GetAllAccountInfo
l GetOrderDetail
l GetOrderList
l GetReport
l GetSubAccounts
- 285 -
l GetTransHistory
l SubAccountDomains
l UpdateAccountInfo
CreateHostAccount
Description
Definition
Create a Web hosting account.
Usage
Use this command to establish an account for Web hosting.
This command automatically deducts the cost of this Web hosting account from the
domain name account balance, and the monthly fees for Web hosting are also deducted
from the account balance. This command does not accommodate our credit card pro-
cessing services.
NOTE: If you do your own billing, you should scan all Web hosting accounts on a
monthly basis to confirm that your billing reflects any upgrades customers have chosen.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/wsg/hostingconfig.asp
On the configure a package page, the add to cart button behaves similarly to the
CreateHostAccount command.
Constraints
l The domain account login ID and password must be valid.
l The domain account must be a reseller account.
l The name for the Web hosting account must contain 6 to 14 characters. The first
character must be alphabetic; the remaining characters must be alphanumeric.
- 286 -
l The password for the Web hosting account must contain 6 to 14 alphanumeric char-
acters.
l When you associate a domain name with this account, it must either be registered
with us or the host records must point to our servers (web1.ehost-services.com).
Input parameters

Name for this Web hosting account. Per-

mitted values are 6 to 14 characters in
length, begin with a letter, and the remain-
ing characters are alphanumeric.
Password for this Web hosting account;

HostPassword Required must be alphanumeric and 6 to 14 char- 14
acters in length.
First and last name of the contact person

FullName Required for this Web hosting account, for 44
example, John Doe
Email address for communications from

us regarding this Web hosting account,
HostAccountEmail Required 78
for example, john.-
doe@resellerdocs.com
Package name. To retrieve currently

Package Required defined packages, use 11
WebHostGetPackages
Your instructions for how we should

handle bandwidth overages, measured
on a per-month basis. Permitted values
OverageOption Required are: 1 Upgrade to the next bandwidth 1
package 2 Charge on a per-GB basis on
my next monthly bill 3 Disable the
account until the beginning of the next
- 287 -

monthly billing cycle
Optional, but to
reduce the pos-
sibility of fraud we IP address of the computer from which
EndUserIP recommend that the order is being placed, for tracking pur- 15
you require this poses
information from
customers
Send a confirmation email to me when a

customer successfully places and order
using this command. Permitted values
EmailNotify Optional 4
are: 1 Send email confirmation when pro-
cessed 0 Do not send email confirmation
when processed Default is 0

enom in enom.com) to associate this
Web hosting account with. Include SLD
and TLD if you know which domain you
SLD Optional 63
want to associate with this Web hosting
account. You can specify this asso-
ciation later using the AddDomainHeader
command.
Top-level domain name (extension) to

associate this Web hosting account with.
Include SLD and TLD if you know which
TLD Optional domain you want to associate with this 15
Web hosting account. You can specify
this association later using the AddDo-
mainHeader command.


OrderID Order ID number for this transaction, for our internal records
PackageID Web hosting package ID number, for our internal records
Successful Success status for creating this Web hosting account
- 288 -
ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query creates a Web hosting account WebHostTest in account resellid
Query
command=CREATEHOSTACCOUNT&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&hostaccount=resellwebid
&HostPassword=resellwebpw&FullName=John%20Doe
&HostAccountEmail=john%2edoe%40resellerdocs%2ecom
&package=Silver&OverageOption=1&EndUserIP=127.0.0.1

Output

<CreateHost>
- 289 -
<ServerIP>127.0.0.1</ServerIP>
</CreateHost>
<Command>CREATEHOSTACCOUNT</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable>0</IsLockable>
<IsRealTimeTLD>0</IsRealTimeTLD>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l GetHostAccount
CreateSubAccount
Description
Definition
Create a subaccount.
Usage
Use this command to create a new retail subaccount.
Resellers can also create subaccounts to help organize their business.
CreateSubAccount differs from CreateAccount in that CreateAccount offers credit card
processing;
CreateSubAccount does not.
Availability
- 290 -
https://www.enom.com/resellers/NewSubAccount.asp?
The submit button calls the CreateSubAccount command.
Constraints
l The account must have reseller status in eNoms database.
Input parameters

Subaccount login ID. Permitted

values are 6 to 20 characters in
NewUID Required length; permitted characters 20
include letters, numbers, hyphen,
and underscore
Subaccount password. Permitted

NewPW Required characters are letters, numbers, 20
hyphen, and underscore
Confirm subaccount password.

ConfirmPW Required Permitted characters are letters, 20
numbers, hyphen, and underscore
Nature of the question used for

AuthQuestionType Optional identity verification. Permitted val- 10
- 291 -

ues are: smaiden mothers maiden
name sbirth city of birth ssocial
last 4 digits of SSN shigh high
school fteach favorite teacher
fvspot favorite vacation spot fpet
favorite pet fmovie favorite movie
fbook favorite book

AuthQuestionAnswer Optional 50
birth, last 4 digits of social secur-
ity, or high school)
RegistrantCountry Required Registrant country 60
RegistrantEmailAddress Required Email address for WhoIs 128
Email address for us to contact

Contact
account

format is +Coun-
sign (%2B).
Registrant phone. Required format

is +CountryCode.PhoneNumber,
RegistrantPhone Required 17
RegistrantPostalCode Optional Registrant postal code 16
- 292 -

RegistrantStateProvinceChoice Registrant state or province

Optional 1
choice: S state P province

XML.

StatusCustomerInfo Returns Successful if account was created
PartyID Party ID for the new subaccount
Account Account ID for the new subaccount

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query creates a new subaccount, resellsub4, and requests the response in
XML format:
Query
- 293 -
command=CreateSubAccount&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&newuid=resellsub4&newpw=resellsub4&confirmpw=resellsub4
&RegistrantOrganizationName=Reseller%20Documents%20Inc.
&RegistrantFirstName=john&RegistrantLastName=doe
&RegistrantAddress1=111%20Main%20St.&RegistrantCity=
Hometown&RegistrantStateProvince=WA
&RegistrantStateProvinceChoice=S&RegistrantPostalCode=
98003&RegistrantCountry=United+States
&RegistrantEmailAddress=john%2Edoe%40resellerdocs
%2Ecom&RegistrantPhone=+1.5555555555
&RegistrantFax=+1.5555555556&AuthQuestionType=smaiden
&AuthQuestionAnswer=jones&ResponseType=XML
The response confirms the successful creation of the subaccount:

Output

<NewAccount>
<StatusCustomerInfo>Successful</StatusCustomerInfo>
<PartyID>{B301E3A9-1BFF-4600-9B2D-D214C29325A9}</PartyID>
<Account>661-zw-1374</Account>
</NewAccount>
<Command>CREATESUBACCOUNT</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CheckLogin
l CreateAccount
l GetAccountInfo
l GetAllAccountInfo
- 294 -
l GetOrderDetail
l GetOrderList
l GetReport
l GetSubAccounts
l GetTransHistory
l SubAccountDomains
l UpdateAccountInfo
DeleteAllPOPPaks
Description
Definition
Delete all POP3 email paks in a domain.
Usage
Use this command to delete all POP3 paks from a domain. Note that if you delete the
POP paks, the only way to replace them is to buy new paks.
Availability
Constraints
l The domain name must belong to this account.
l All POP paks in the domain must have no user emails configured. You can use the
DeletePOP3 command to remove user email accounts.
Input parameters
- 295 -


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


PaksRemoved Number of POP paks removed from the domain name

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l Use the DeletePOP3 command to delete any email user accounts before running
DeleteAllPOPPaks.
- 296 -
Example
The following query deletes all POP3 10-paks from resellerdocs.com and sends the
Query
command=DeleteAllPOPPaks&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
In the response, the error count 0 confirms that the command executed successfully:
Output
<PaksRemoved>35</PaksRemoved>
<Command>DELETEALLPOPPAKS</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l DeletePOP3
l DeletePOPPak
l Forwarding
l GetForwarding
l GetMailHosts
l GetPOP3
- 297 -
l ModifyPOP3
l PurchasePOPBundle
l SetUpPOP3User
DeleteContact
Description
Definition
Delete a contact from the address book.
Usage
Use this command to delete a contact from a domain name accounts address book.
Availability
Constraints
l Only contacts added with the AddContact command can be deleted.
Input parameters

- 298 -

Party ID number of the contact you want

RegistrantPartyID Required to delete. Use the Required format is the 40
Party ID enclosed in curly braces.



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query deletes a contact from a domain accounts address book, and sends
Query
command=DELETECONTACT&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
- 299 -
&registrantpartyid={4545A013-B40A-4D50-A15A-5D4356723794}
&responsetype=xml
Output

<Command>DELETECONTACT</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddContact
l GetAddressBook
l GetContacts
l GetSubAccounts
DeleteCustomerDefinedData
Description
Definition
Delete customer-defined data records.
- 300 -
Usage
Use this command to delete customer-defined data.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

Object ID number, an integer assigned

ObjectID Required when this customer-defined field was 2
first established.
Object type. Permitted values are:

1 Data pertaining to an account
Type Required 1
2 Data pertaining to a domain
3 Data pertaining to an order
Required If Type=2 Second-level domain name (for example,

SLD 63
enom in enom.com)
Required If Type=2
- 301 -

Required If Type=3 Order ID, which you can retrieve using
OrderID 11
the GetDomainStatus command
Title of this entry, or label describing this

Key Required 50
data field



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query deletes the customer-defined data labeled FavoriteCuisine from
account resellid, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=deletecustomerdefineddata&uid=resellid
- 302 -
&pw=resellpw&ObjectID=1&Type=1&Key=FavoriteCuisine
&responsetype=xml
Output
<Command>DELETECUSTOMERDEFINEDDATA</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
DeleteDomainFolder
Description
Definition
Delete a folder.
Usage
Use this command to delete one domain name folder.
This command does not delete domains; only the folder.
- 303 -
When you delete a folder, the domains that were in it keep the settings assigned by the
folder until you change them.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/Domain-Manager.aspx?tab=folder
In the list of folders, the delete link calls the DeleteDomainFolder command.
Constraints
l The folder must belong to this account.
Input parameters

FolderName Required Name of the folder you want to delete 125

- 304 -

FolderName Name of folder
Success of this query. Values are: 0 Failure 1 Success 2

Result
Folder not found in this account

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query deletes a domain folder, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=DeleteDOMAINFOLDER&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&FolderName=Favorites%202&ResponseType=XML

Output
- 305 -
<DeleteResult>
<FolderName>Favorites 2</FolderName>
<Result>1</Result>
</DeleteResult>
<Command>DELETEDOMAINFOLDER</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>50ab0431-8c68-4d63-b47b-a7b27b-
c56b54</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l AddDomainFolder
DeleteDomainHeader
Description
Definition
- 306 -
Delete a domain header (a pointer that associates a domain with a specific location in
your directory structure) from a Web hosting account.
Usage
Use this command to delete a domain header from a Web hosting account. When the
domain header is deleted, the domain name no longer resolves.
Note that when you delete a domain header, any host headers associated with that
domain header are also deleted.
Availability
http://enomson/wsg/hostingdomains.asp?HostAccount=resellwebid
In the Delete column, the delete links call the DeleteDomainHeader command.
Constraints
Input parameters

HostAccount Required Name of Web hosting account that con- 14
- 307 -

tains the domain header you want to
delete

enom in enom.com) of the domain you
SLD Required 63
want to remove from the Web hosting
account
Top-level domain name (extension) of the

TLD Required domain you want to remove from the 15
Web hosting account


Successful Success status of the query

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 308 -
Example
The following query deletes the domain header for domain testsld3.biz from Web hosting
account test20030903, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=deletedomainheader&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&hostaccount=test20030903&sld=testsld3&tld=biz
&responsetype=xml

Output

<Command>DELETEDOMAINHEADER</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainHeader
l ListDomainHeaders
- 309 -
DeleteFromCart
Description
Definition
Delete an item or all items from the shopping cart.
Usage
Use this command when you want to remove one or all items from the shopping cart.
Availability
http://www.enom.com/Cart.asp
The delete button behaves similarly to the DeleteFromCart command.
Constraints
l The shopping cart must contain one or more items.
l One or all items in the shopping cart must be deleted.
Input parameters

- 310 -

Item ID number of the item to be deleted
Either ItemNumber
from the shopping cart. Use the
ItemNumber or EmptyCart is 10
GetCartContent command to retrieve the
Required
item ID numbers.
Either Either
ItemNumber or Use EmptyCart=On to completely empty
EmptyCart 2
EmptyCart is the shopping cart.
Required


ItemDeleted True if deleted.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests that item 365485 be deleted from the shopping cart, and
- 311 -
Query
command=DeleteFromCart&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&ItemNumber=365485&ResponseType=XML
The response confirms the successful deletion from the shopping cart:
Output

<ItemDeleted>True</ItemDeleted>
<IDAction>update</IDAction>
<Command>DELETEFROMCART</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l AddBulkDomains
l AddToCart
l GetCartContent
l InsertNewOrder
l PurchasePreview
l UpdateCart
- 312 -
DeleteHostedDomain
Description
Definition
Discontinue our DNS hosting of a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to cancel our DNS hosting of a domain name.
Availability
Constraints
l The domain name must be hosted by this account.
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
- 313 -



OldRegistrationStatus Registration status before running this query
Status Success status for canceling DNS hosting on this domain

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query discontinues our DNS hosting of ExternalHostedDomain.com, and
Query
command=DeleteHostedDomain&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
- 314 -
&sld=ExternalHostedDomain&tld=com&responsetype=xml
In the response, the OldRegistrationStatus value Hosted and the ErrCount value 0 indic-
ate that the query was successful:
Output

<DeleteHostedDomain>
<OldRegistrationStatus>Hosted</OldRegistrationStatus>
<Status>Success</Status>
</DeleteHostedDomain>
<Command>DELETEHOSTEDDOMAIN</Command>
<Server>Reseller3</Server>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l ExtendDomainDNS
l PurchaseHosting
- 315 -
DeleteHostHeader
Description
Definition
Remove a host header (pointer to a third-level domain name) from your Web hosting
account.
Usage
Use this command to remove a host header from your Web hosting account. This com-
mand would commonly beused to disable a third-level domain name (host name).
Availability
Log on to webhostingtest.ehost-services.com with Login ID resellwebid, password resell-
webpw.
http://webhostingtest.ehost-services.com/websites/hostingdomains.asp
In the Manage column, the delete links call the DeleteHostHeader command.
Constraints
l The domain name must use our name servers.
l The domain header must exist.
l The host header must exist.
Input parameters
- 316 -

HostAccount Required Name of the Web hosting account 14
Required Second-level domain name (for

SLD Required 63
HostName Required Host header to be deleted 53



ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 317 -
Example
The following query deletes host header accountspayable from domain header reseller-
docs.com and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=deletehostheader&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&hostaccount=resellwebid&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com
&HostName=accountspayable&responsetype=xml
In the response, the error count 0 indicates that the query was successful:
Output

<Command>DELETEHOSTHEADER</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainHeader
l AddHostHeader
l CreateHostAccount
l GetDomainHeader
l GetHostAccount
l GetHostHeader
l ListDomainHeaders
- 318 -
l ListHostHeaders
l ModifyHostHeader
DeleteNameServer
Description
Definition
Delete a name server at the Registry.
Usage
Use this command to delete a name server at the Registry. This command does not
affect the name servers listed for any individual domain.
Availability
http://www.enom.com/domains/RegNameServer.asp
In the Delete a Name Server box, the submit button calls the DeleteNameServer com-
mand.
Constraints
l The domain name server must be registered.
l The domain name this DNS uses must belong to this account.
l The domain name server must have no domains using it.
l All registrar locks and Registry holds must be off, and the domain must be in an act-
ive state.
Input parameters
- 319 -

Use name of name server, in format

NS Required 60
dns1.ServerName.com

are Text (default) HTML, or XML.

RegistrarLock Registrar lock status
NSSuccess Success of the name server reset process
RegistrarLock Registrar lock setting
RRPCode Registry code
RRPText Description of Registry code

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 320 -
Example
The following query deletes the name server registration for dns3.resellerdocs.com at
the Registry, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=deletenameserver&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&ns=dns3.resellerdocs.com&responsetype=xml
In the response, the NsSuccess value 1, the RRPCode 200, and the RRPText Com-
mand completed successfully confirm that the query was successful:
Output

<RegisterNameserver>
<RegistrarLock>ACTIVE</RegistrarLock>
<NsSuccess>1</NsSuccess>
<RegistrarLock>REGISTRAR-LOCK</RegistrarLock>
</RegisterNameserver>
<Command>DELETENAMESERVER</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
- 321 -
Related commands
l CheckNSStatus
l GetDNS
l GetDNSStatus
l ModifyNS
l ModifyNSHosting
l UpdateNameServer
DeletePOP3
Description
Definition
Delete an individual POP3 user name from the database.
Usage
Use this command to delete an individual POP3 email user name. Once you delete it,
you can fill that vacancy with another name. This command has no effect on the POP 10-
pak nor on any other user names in the account.
Availability
Constraints
l The user name must be listed in the POP3 list for the account.
l The user name must be in a POP pak for which the subscription is current.
Input parameters
- 322 -

Second-level domain name (for example, enom

SLD Required 63
in enom.com)
POP mailbox user name to delete. Start with

UserName1 and index to delete multiple user
UserNameX Required 16
names, for example, User-
Name1=John.Doe&UserName2=Jane.Doe



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 323 -
Example
The following query deletes the POP user james and sends the response in XML format:
Query
com-
mand=DeletePOP3&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&sld=resellerdocs
&tld=com&UserName1=james&responsetype=xml
In the response, the error count of 0 confirms that the POP user was deleted suc-
cessfully:
Output
<AccountsDeleted>1</AccountsDeleted>
<Command>DELETEPOP3</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>ef0e27fe-c956-4f45-a1f9-da8b6b8adea5</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l DeleteAllPOPPaks
l DeletePOPPak
- 324 -
l Forwarding
l GetCatchAll
l GetForwarding
l GetMailHosts
l GetPOP3
l ModifyPOP3
l PurchasePOPBundle
l SetCatchAll
l SetUpPOP3User
DeletePOPPak
Description
Definition
Delete a POP Email pak under a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to delete an entire 10-pak of POP accounts. Note that once a pak is
deleted, the only way to replace it is to purchase a new one.
Availability
Constraints
l The pak must have no user email accounts currently configured.
Input parameters
- 325 -


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
ID number of the POP pak to delete. Use

BundleID Required 6
GetPOP3 to get POP pak IDs.



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
parameter Err (ErrCount) can be presented to the client. Otherwise process the
l Use the DeletePOP3 command to delete any email user accounts before running
DeletePOPPak.
- 326 -
Example
The following query deletes POP bundle 5733 from resellerdocs.com and sends the
Query
command=DeletePOPPak&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&BundleID=5733&ResponseType=XML
The ErrCount value 0 confirms that the command was successful:

Output
<Command>DELETEPOPPAK</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>31063cc4-7994-4d96-b8bd-1ff3665d6039</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l DeleteAllPOPPaks
l DeletePOP3
l Forwarding
l GetForwarding
l GetMailHosts
- 327 -
l GetPOP3
l ModifyPOP3
l PurchasePOPBundle
l SetUpPOP3User
DeleteRegistration
Description
Definition
Delete a domain name registration.
Usage
Use this command to delete a domain name registration. Fees will apply.
Availability
This command is available to resellers on our DeleteRegistration whitelist. If you wish to
have access to this command, contact your sales representative.
Constraints
l The domain name must have been purchased less than five days ago.
l The most common TLDs, including .com and .net, can be deleted. For other TLDs,
check the resellerpages on our Web site.
Input parameters
- 328 -


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
End users IP address. Permitted format

is NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN


DomainDeleted If domain deleted successfully, response is True
ErrString Error string
ErrSource Error source
ErrSection Error section
RRPCode Registry success code
RRPText Text that corresponds to and explains the RRPCode value

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 329 -
Example
The following query deletes a domain and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=deleteregistration&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs3&tld=info&responsetype=xml
In the response, an RRPCode value 200 confirms that the query was successful:
Output
<interface-response>response>
<deletedomain>
<domaindeleted>True</domaindeleted>
</deletedomain>
<ErrString/>
<ErrSource/>
<ErrSection>DELETEREGISTRATION</ErrSection>
<Command>DELETEREGISTRATION</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
[CDATA ]
- 330 -
</debug>
Related commands
l AddToCart
l Purchase
DeleteSubaccount
Description
Definition
Delete a subaccount.
Usage
Use this command to delete a retail or reseller subaccount.
Availability
http://enomson/resellers/subaccount-list.asp
On the subaccounts page, the Delete link calls the DeleteSubaccount command with the
Action=Confirm parameter.
Click a Delete link
On the Delete Sub-account page, the delete button calls the DeleteSubaccount com-
mand with the Action=Delete parameter.
Constraints
- 331 -

l The subaccount must belong to this account.
Input parameters

Subaccount ID number, in NNN-aa-

NNNN format. You can retrieve the sub-
Account Required 11
account ID number using the GetSubAc-
counts command.
Action to take. Permitted values are Con-

Optional; default firm Confirm which subaccount is to be
Action 7
value is Confirm deleted Delete Delete the subaccount
specified in this query


Action Action to be taken with regard to deleting this subaccount

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 332 -
Notes
Example
The following query deletes the sub-account with account number 332-ep-2379 and
Query
command=deletesubaccount&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&account=332-ep-2379&Action=delete&responsetype=xml
In the response, the Action return parameter and the ErrCount value 0 confirm that the
Output

<DeleteSubAccount>
<Action>DELETE</Action>
</DeleteSubAccount>
<Command>DELETESUBACCOUNT</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>e</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
- 333 -
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CreateAccount
l GetSubAccounts
DisableFolderApp
Description
Definition
Disable IIS Application functionality for a folder.
Usage
Use this command to disable execute permission for IIS Applications in the current
folder.
By default, subfolders inherit the enabled status of their parent. This remains the case
until you reset the status of a child. Once reset, the childs enabled status is no longer
inherited.
Availability
webpw.
http://webhostingtest.ehost-services.com/websites/advanced.asp?Path=/service
On the IIS Application line, the Remove link calls the DisableFolderApp command.
- 334 -
Constraints
Input parameters

Name of the directory to enable as an applic-

ation. Format is Dir-
ectory=DirectoryName/SubdirectoryName
Directory Required 254
Specify the directory path from the root, for-
ward slash or backslashdelimited, with no
initial slash before the first directory name.



ErrCount

Err(x)
- 335 -
Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query disables execute permissions for IIS Applications in folder acct, and
Query
command=disablefolderapp&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&hostaccount=resellwebid&directory=acct&responsetype=xml
Output

<Command>DISABLEFOLDERAPP</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
- 336 -
Related commands
l AddDomainHeader
l AddHostHeader
l CreateHostAccount
l EnableFolderApp
l IsFolderEnabled
DisableServices
Description
Definition
Switch off a service in an account.
Usage
Use this command to switch off a service in a domain name account.
This command does not shut down the service or cancel it at the end of the current
billing period; it merely toggles it off.
Availability
https://re-
sellertest.enom.-
com/domains/ServiceSelection.asp?DomainNameID=152533676&service=wpps
When the unprotected option button is selected, the save changes button calls the Dis-
ableServices command.
- 337 -
Constraints
l Other constraints may apply depending on the services being disabled.
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Name of the service to be disabled. Per-

mitted values are: WPPS (Whois Pri-
Service Required 15
vacy Protection) EmailForwarding
URLForwarding


Service Name of the service being disabled
ServiceStatus New status of this service

ErrCount
- 338 -
ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query disables the ID Protect Whois privacy protection service on reseller-
Query
command=DISABLESERVICES&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&service=wpps&responsetype=xml
In the response, the ServiceStatus value confirms the new status of the service:
Output
<Service>wpps</Service>
<ServiceStatus>Disabled</ServiceStatus>
<Command>DISABLESERVICES</Command>
- 339 -
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l EnableServices
l GetWPPSInfo
l ServiceSelect
EnableFolderApp
Description
Definition
Enable IIS Application functionality for a folder.
Usage
Use this command to enable execute permission for IIS Applications in the current
folder.
By default, subfolders inherit the enabled status of their parent. This remains the case
until you reset the status of a child. Once reset, the childs status is no longer inherited.
Availability
webpw.
http://webhostingtest.ehost-services.com/websites/advanced.asp?Path=/delivery
In the IIS Application line, the Create link calls the EnableFolderApp command.
- 340 -
Constraints
l The folder must already exist (this command does not create it).
Input parameters

Name of the directory to enable as an applic-

ation. Use format Dir-
ectory=/DirectoryName/SubdirectoryName
ward slash or backslashdelimited, with an
initial slash.



ErrCount
- 341 -
Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query makes folder acct executable and sends the response in XML
format:
Query
command=enablefolderapp&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&hostaccount=resellwebid&directory=/acct&responsetype=xml
Output

<Command>ENABLEFOLDERAPP</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
- 342 -
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainHeader
l AddHostHeader
l CreateHostAccount
l DisableFolderApp
l IsFolderEnabled
EnableServices
Description
Definition
Switch on a service in a domain name account.
Usage
Use this command to switch on a service in a domain name account.
This command does not give this account access to the service or subscribe to the ser-
vice. Rather, it toggles on a service that the account has already subscribed to but has
toggled off.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/ServiceSelection.asp?
DomainNameID=152533676&service=wpps
When the protected option button is selected, the save changes button calls the
EnableServices command.
- 343 -
Constraints
l Other constraints may apply depending on the services being enabled.
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Name of the service to be enabled. Per-

mitted values are: WPPS (ID Protect,
Service Required 15
our Whois privacy protection service)
EmailForwarding URLForwarding


Service Name of the service being enabled
ServiceStatus New status of this service

ErrCount
- 344 -
ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query enables the ID Protect Whois privacy protection service on reseller-
Query
command=ENABLESERVICES&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&service=wpps&responsetype=xml
In the response, the ServiceStatus value confirms the new status of the service:
Output
<Service>wpps</Service>
<ServiceStatus>Enabled</ServiceStatus>
<Command>ENABLESERVICES</Command>
- 345 -
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l AddToCart
l DisableServices
l GetWPPSInfo
l PurchaseServices
l ServiceSelect
l SetRenew
Extend
Description
Definition
Extend (renew) the registration period for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to renew domain registrations in real time. We recommend that you
renew at least a week before the domain expiration date.
HTTPS protocol.
Most commonly, this command is used by resellers who maintain their own databases.
Resellers who use a shopping cart and our order processing queue generally use the
AddToCart command with input parameter ProductType=Renew.
- 346 -
After a domain expires, use UpdateExpiredDomains to reactivate it and renew its regis-
tration.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/DomainDetail.asp?DomainNameID=152533676
The Extend command is a real-time command that is not implemented on enom.com;
however, on the domain control panel page, the add years button behaves similarly to
the Extend command.
Constraints
l To use our credit card processing, this must be an ETP reseller account.
l The domain name must be valid and active.
l The new expiration date cannot be more than 10 years in the future.
Input parameters


SLD Required 63

TLD Required 15
sion)
- 347 -

NumYears Optional Number of years to extend 10
Use OverrideOrder=1 to submit

more than one renewal request
OverrideOrder Optional 1
for this domain name within 24
hours of the first transaction
If UseCreditCard=yes, use
eNoms credit-card processing
services. When you pass credit
UseCreditCard Optional 3
card information with this com-
mand, you must secure HTTPS
protocol.

Required If used in fraud checking, as part of
EndUserIP UseCreditCard=yes our order processing service. 15
Use format
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
If UseCreditCard=yes Amount to
ChargeAmount Required charge per year for the renewal. 6
Use DD.cc format.

Required If
CardType ues are Visa, Mastercard, AmEx, 20
UseCreditCard=yes
Discover
Required If
CCName Cardholder's name 60
UseCreditCard=yes
Required If
CreditCardNumber Customer's credit card number 128
UseCreditCard=yes
Required If
Credit card expiration month in
CreditCardExpMonth UseCreditCard=yes 2
MM format
Required If Credit card expiration year in

CreditCardExpYear 4
UseCreditCard=yes YYYY format
Required If
CVV2 Credit card verification code 4
UseCreditCard=yes
Required If
CCAddress UseCreditCard=yes Credit card billing address 60
Required If
CCZip Credit card billing postal code 15
UseCreditCard=yes
- 348 -

Credit card billing country. The
Required If
CCCountry two-letter country code is a per- 60
UseCreditCard=yes
mitted format.
Required UseCred-
RegistrantFirstName Registrant first name 60
itCard=yes
Required If
RegistrantLastName Registrant last name 60
UseCreditCard=yes
Required If
RegistrantAddress1 UseCreditCard=yes Registrant address 60
Registrant additional address

RegistrantAddress2 Optional 60
info
Required If
RegistrantCity UseCreditCard=yes Registrant city 60
Optional Required If Registrant state or province

RegistrantStateProvinceChoice 1
UseCreditCard=yes choice: S state P province
Required If
RegistrantStateProvince Registrant state or province 60
UseCreditCard=yes
Required If
RegistrantPostalCode Registrant postal code 16
UseCreditCard=yes
Required If
RegistrantCountry Registrant country 60
UseCreditCard=yes
Required If
RegistrantEmailAddress Registrant email address 128
UseCreditCard=yes

Required If
RegistrantPhone CountryCode and PhoneNumber 20
UseCreditCard=yes
sign (%2B).

RegistrantFax Optional format is +Coun- 20
- 349 -

sign (%2B).

or XML.

Order number if successful. We recommend that you store this
OrderID
value for future use.
Extension Returns Successful, otherwise this parameter isn't returned.
RRPCode Success code. Only a 200 indicates success.
RRPText Text which accompanies and describes the RRPCode.
RegistryExpDate Domain expiration date at the Registry level.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l If using our credit card option ALL credit card information is required.
l We recommend that you store the OrderID valueat least the most recent one for
each domainfrom thereturn. Several other commands use this value as a
required input parameter.
- 350 -
Example
The following query requests that the registration period for resellerdocs.com be exten-
ded for 1 year, and requests the response in XML format:
Query
command=Extend&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&sld=resellerdocs
&tld=com&NumYears=1&ResponseType=XML
The response confirms the successful extension of the registration period for the domain:
Output
<Extension>successful</Extension>
<DomainName>12dectest.com</DomainName>
<DomainInfo>
<RegistryExpDate>2015-03-31 09:17:29.000</RegistryExpDate>
</DomainInfo>
<Command>EXTEND</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
- 351 -
Related commands
l Extend_RGP
l ExtendDomainDNS
l GetDomainExp
l GetExtendInfo
l GetPOPExpirations
l GetRenew
l InsertNewOrder
l RenewPOPBundle
l SetRenew
Extend_RGP
Description
Definition
Renew domain names that are in RGP status, in near-real time. This command charges
not only the usual renewal fee, but also the higher redemption fee.
Usage
Use this command to extend names that are in RGP status. This command does not yet
accommodate names in Extended RGP status. Use the GetExpiredDomains command
to check a names status.
RGP redemptions are performed at the Registry and generally take at least 3 hours to
complete. When you run this command, we recommend that you store the Order ID so
that you can check progress conveniently using the GetOrderDetail command.
This command will result in both a redemption and a renewal charge for the domain
name. We recommend that you check the RGP redemption price before running this com-
mand, as it can be quite high.
Availability
- 352 -
Constraints
l This command is available only to ETP reseller accounts.
l This command does not support our credit card processing; it deducts from the
reseller balance.
l This command applies only to names in RGP status, not Extended RGP or
domains in Expired status. Todetermine the status of a name, use the GetEx-
piredDomains command.
Input parameters


SLD Required enom in enom.com) of name in Redemp- 63
tion Grace Period (RGP) status
Top-level domain name (extension) of

TLD Required 15
name in RGP status

- 353 -

Extension Success status of the query
DomainName Name of the domain to be redeemed
Order ID number. Store this number to simplify progress

OrderID
checks.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l We recommend that you check the redemption price for RGP names before run-
ning this command, as theprice can be quite high. Use the PE_GetResellerPrice
command, and look at product types 16 (renew) and 17 (RGP).
Example
The following query redeems and renews a domain name that is in RGP status, and
Query
command=Extend_RGP&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=VeryExpiredName&tld=com&ResponseType=xml
- 354 -
In the response, the Extension value Successful value confirms that the query was suc-
cessful:
Output

<DomainRRP>E</DomainRRP>
<Extension>successful</Extension>
<DomainName>VeryExpiredName.com</DomainName>
<Command>EXTEND_RGP</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddToCart
l Extend
l ExtendDomainDNS
l GetExpiredDomains
l GetOrderDetail
l GetRenew
l PE_SetPricing
l Purchase
l PurchaseServices
- 355 -
l SetRenew
ExtendDomainDNS
Description
Definition
In real time, renew DNS hosting services for a domain name that is registered else-
where.
Usage
Use this command to renew DNS services for a name that is registered elsewhere. This
is a real-time command that is most commonly used by resellers who maintain their own
databases. Resellers who use a shopping cart and our order queue generally use the
AddToCart command with input parameter ProductType=HostRenew.
HTTPS protocol.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/Checkout.asp
The ExtendDomainDNS command is not implemented on www.enom.com. However, on
the checkout page, the purchase button calls InsertNewOrder, a similar command that ini-
tiates checkout. The difference is that InserNewOrder acquires contents of the shopping
cart and puts them in a queue for checkout; the ExtendDomainDNS command bypasses
the shopping cart and the queue.
Constraints
l The domain name must not be registered with us, but must use our name servers.
- 356 -
Input parameters


SLD Required 63

TLD Required 15
sion)
Number of years to add to the

DNS hosting subscription.
NumYears Optional 2
Default value is 1. Maximum
total is 10.
Required if using
RegistrantFirstName our credit card pro- Registrant first name 60
cessing
Required if using
RegistrantLastName our credit card pro- Registrant last name 60
cessing
Required if using
RegistrantAddress1 our credit card pro- Registrant address 60
cessing
Registrant additional address

RegistrantAddress2 Optional 60
info
Required if using
RegistrantCity our credit card pro- Registrant city 60
cessing
Required if using
RegistrantEmailAddress our credit card pro- Registrant email address 128
cessing
- 357 -

Registrant phone. Required

format is +Coun-
RegistrantPhone Optional CountryCode and PhoneNumber 20
sign (%2B).

format is +Coun-
sign (%2B).
Required if using
RegistrantPostalCode our credit card pro- Registrant postal code 16
cessing

choice:
RegistrantStateProvinceChoice Optional 1
S state
P province
Amount to charge to the credit

ChargeAmount Optional 6
card
If UseCreditCard=yes, use our

creditcard processing services.
When you pass credit card
UseCreditCard Optional 3
information with this command,
you must use the secure HTTPS
protocol.

used in fraud checking, as part of
Required If
EndUserIP our order processing service. 15
UseCreditCard=yes
Use format
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.

If UseCred-
CardType Required ues are Visa, Mastercard, AmEx, 20
itCard=yes
and Discover
- 358 -

Required If
UseCreditCard=yes
Required If
UseCreditCard=yes
Required If Credit card expiration month, in

CreditCardExpMonth 2
UseCreditCard=yes MM format
Required If Credit card expiration year, in

CreditCardExpYear 4
UseCreditCard=yes YYYY format
Required UseCred-
itCard=yes
Required If
CCAddress Credit card billing address 60
UseCreditCard=yes
Required If
UseCreditCard=yes
Required If
CCCountry Credit card billing country 60
UseCreditCard=yes

or XML.

CCTransResult Success status for the credit card transaction
OrderID Order ID, assigned by us
Command Name of the command

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 359 -
Notes
format, sendResponseType=HTML or ResponseType=XML
l in your request.
Example
The following query renews DNS hosting for domain resellerdnshost.com. It uses a
credit card, submits the credit card information using the secure HTTPS protocol, and
Query
command=EXTENDDOMAINDNS&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdnshost&tld=com&numyears=1
&RegistrantFirstName=John&RegistrantLastName=Doe
&RegistrantAddress1=17462&RegistrantCity=Redmond
&RegistrantPostalCode=98052&RegistrantCountry=USA
&UseCreditCard=yes&CardType=mastercard&CCName=John+Doe
&CredcVV2=555&ccAddress=17462&ChargeAmount=12
&responsetype=xml
In the response, the order ID and the ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was suc-
cessful:
Output
<Command>EXTENDDOMAINDNS</Command>
- 360 -
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l AddToCart
l Extend
l InsertNewOrder
l Purchase
l PurchaseHosting
l PurchasePOPBundle
l PurchaseServices
Forwarding
Description
Definition
Set email forwarding addresses.
Usage
Use this command to specify forwarding addresses for email sent to the domain.
A similar command, SetPOPForwarding, allows you to create, change, or delete mail-
boxes for either email forwarding or POP mail.
Availability
- 361 -
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/MailConfig.asp?DomainNameID=152533676
On the e-mail settings page,the save changes button calls the Forwarding command.
Constraints
l The domain must be using eNoms domain name server.
l The domain must exist in the account cited in the query.
l The query must include all addresses that you want to keep. Forwarding
addresses not included in thequery are deleted from the account.
Input parameters
Max
Parameter Status Description
Size

SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Address (mailbox user name) to be for-

AddressX Required 30
warded from this domain
Where this address will be forwarded to, in

ForwardToX Required 130
format UserName@sld.tld

- 362 -


ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l Example: thisAddress@mydomain.com to be forwarded to me@myhome.com.
Pass as Address1=thisAddress and ForwardTo1=me@myhome.com
Example
The following query gives instructions that email addressed to jane.-
doe@resellerdocs.com and john.doe@resellerdocs.com be forwarded to jane.-
doe@example.com and john.doe@example.com,and requests the response in XML
format:
Query
command=Forwarding&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&Address1=jane.doe
&ForwardTo1=jane.doe@example.com&ResponseType=XML
The error count 0 confirms that the email forwarding instructions are successful:
Output
- 363 -
<EmailForwardingEnabled>True</EmailForwardingEnabled>
<MailCount>0</MailCount>
<Command>FORWARDING</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l DeleteAllPOPPaks
l DeletePOP3
l DeletePOPPak
l GetCatchAll
l GetForwarding
l GetMailHosts
l GetPOP3
l ModifyPOP3
l PurchasePOPBundle
l SetCatchAll
l SetPOPForwarding
l SetUpPOP3User
- 364 -
GetAccountInfo
Description
Definition
Get account ID, password, authorization question and answer, reseller flag, and credit
card agreement settings.
Usage
Use this command to return a short list of account identification information and reseller
status.
GetAllAccountInfo, a similar command, returns a complete list of account information.
Availability
This command runs in the background of eNoms Web site.
Constraints
Input parameters

- 365 -


UserID Current login ID
Password Current account password
Nature of the question used for identity verification. Permitted

values are:
AuthQuestionType shigh high school
fpet favorite pet
fbook favorite book
AuthQuestionAnswer Current answer to the authorization question
Account Account number
Reseller Is this a reseller account or not
Returns True if the credit card agreement has been signed,

AcceptTerms
False otherwise

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 366 -
Example
The following query requests a limited list of account information for account resellid,
Query
command=GetAccountInfo&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&ResponseType=XML

Output

<GetAccountInfo>
<UserID>resellid</UserID>
<Password>resellpw</Password>
<AuthQuestionAnswer>Jones</AuthQuestionAnswer>
<AcceptTerms>True</AcceptTerms>
</GetAccountInfo>
<Command>GETACCOUNTINFO</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
- 367 -
Related commands
l CheckLogin
l CreateAccount
l CreateSubAccount
l GetAllAccountInfo
l GetOrderDetail
l GetOrderList
l GetReport
l GetSubAccounts
l GetTransHistory
l UpdateAccountInfo
GetAccountPassword
Description
Definition
Get the password for an account.
Usage
Use this command to have the password for an account e-mailed to the contact for that
account.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/help/
On the help page, the Password recovery link calls the GetAccountPassword command.
- 368 -
Constraints
l The AuthQuestionAnswer value must be correct.
Input parameters

Login ID for the account for which you

LoginID Required 20
want the password.
AuthQuestionAnswer Required Answer to the authorization question 50

are Text(default), HTML, or XML.

Account information has been located in the registrars data-
GotAccountInfo
base.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 369 -
Notes
parameter If greater than 0 the transaction failed. The parameter Err(ErrCount) can
be presented to the client. Otherwise process the returned parameters as defined
above.
Example
The following query requests the password for subaccountThe following query requests
the password for subaccount ichiro, and requests the response in XML format:
Query
command=GetAccountPassword&nAnswuid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&LoginID=ichiro&AuthQuestionAnswer=Jones&responsetype=xml
In the response, the true value for GotAccountInfo and the 0 value for ErrCount indicate
that the query was successful. The password is sent to the registrant e-mail address
almost instantly.
Output
<GetSubAcctLogin>
<ResultCode>1</ResultCode>
<ErrorMessage>Success</ErrorMessage>
<GotAccountInfo>true</GotAccountInfo>
</GetSubAcctLogin>
<Command>GETACCOUNTPASSWORD</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
- 370 -
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l CheckLogin
l CreateAccount
l CreateSubAccount
l GetAccountInfo
l GetAllAccountInfo
l GetOrderDetail
l GetOrderList
l GetReport
l GetSubAccounts
l GetTransHistory
l SendAccountEmail
l UpdateAccountInfo
GetAccountValidation
Description
Definition
Retrieve the authorization question and answer for a subaccount.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the authorization question and answer for a subaccount.
Typically, you would use this command to validate the identity of a user before using the
GetAccountPassword command to email their password to them.
Availability
- 371 -

https://resellertest.enom.com/myaccount/EditContact.asp
In the Login ID and Password Information section, the Secret Word Type and Secret
Word fields display the return values of the GetAccountValidation command.
Constraints
Input parameters

UID Required Login ID of the parent account 20
PW Required Password of the parent account 20
LoginID Required Login ID of the subaccount 20


AuthQuestionType values are:
- 372 -
shigh high school
fpet favorite pet
fbook favorite book
AuthQuestionAnswer The answer to the authorization question for the subaccount
LoginID The login ID of the subaccount

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the authorization question and answer for subaccount
ichiro and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=getaccountvalidation&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&loginid=ichiro&responsetype=xml
- 373 -
In the response, values for AuthQuestionType and AuthQuestionAnswer indicate that

Output

<GetAcctValidation>
<AuthQuestionType>Mother's Maiden Name</AuthQuestionType>
<AuthQuestionAnswer>Smith</AuthQuestionAnswer>
<LoginID>ichiro</LoginID>
</GetAcctValidation>
<Command>GETACCOUNTVALIDATION</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l GetSubAccounts
l SendAccountEmail
- 374 -
GetAddressBook
Description
Definition
Retrieve all contact information that has been entered for all domains in this account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve all contact information that has been entered for domains
in this account.
This command retrieves only information associated with names in this account. It does
not retrieve information from subaccounts.
A typical use for this command is for accounts that offer real-time purchases, where the
account contains domain names registered by many customers.
Availability
This command is not implemented on enom.com. This command will typically be used
by a domain name reseller for administrative purposes.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 375 -

Optional; default is Number of contacts to return in this

PageSize 4
100 response
Which page of responses to return. For

Optional; default is example, if PageSize=100&Page=2 gen-
Page 3
1 erates the second page of 100 con-
tacts: contacts 101 through 200.


Record number for this contact, assigned dynamically when
AddressRec
this query runs
PartyID Party ID for this contact, a permanent value
OrganizationName Organization name
JobTitle Job title
FirstName First name
LastName Last name
Address1 Street address, first line
Address2 Street address, second line
City City
StateProvince State or province
S indicates the StateProvince value is a state; P indicates

StateProvinceChoice
province
PostalCode Postal code
Country Country
Phone Phone number
PhoneExt Phone extension
- 376 -
Fax Fax number
Email Email address
Number of contacts returned in this response (may be fewer

Count
than the PageSize value)
Total number of pages of contacts that exist for this account,

TotalPages
given the Page Size value submitted in this query.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l The first contact in the response will always be the Billing contact for the account.
This is true regardless ofthe Page and PageSize values submitted in the query.
l Other than the first contact in the response, contacts are listed in the order they are
retrieved from ourdatabase. No sort parameters are offered for this command.
Example
The following query retrieves the first 100 contacts recorded for account resellid and
Query
command=GETADDRESSBOOK&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&responsetype=xml
- 377 -
In the response, address records, a Count value, and a TotalPages value confirm that
Output
<AddressBook>
<Address rec="1">
<PartyId>{BB4A2DE1-6485-45CB-A4FC-EE39BA0C1629}</PartyId>
<OrganizationName>Extraordinary Sales</OrganizationName>
<JobTitle>Manager</JobTitle>
<FirstName>Johnny</FirstName>
<LastName>Doety</LastName>
<Address2/>
<Phone>+1.4252744500</Phone>
<PhoneExt/>
<Fax/>
<Email>john.doe@resellerdocs.com</Email>
</Address>
<Address rec="2">
<PartyId>{F543B7C7-8FAC-44C3-8081-000766DDC905}</PartyId>
<OrganizationName/>
<JobTitle/>
<FirstName>R</FirstName>
<LastName>R</LastName>
<Address1>Italy, Torino</Address1>
<Address2/>
<City>Torino</City>
<StateProvince>Torino</StateProvince>
<StateProvinceChoice>P</StateProvinceChoice>
<Country>IT</Country>
<Phone>+39.13123658</Phone>
<PhoneExt/>
<Fax/>
<Email>rescussreda@srcu.com</Email>
</Address>
- 378 -
.
.
.
<Address rec="100">
<PartyId>{0D9BABA5-B3F4-E011-872B-005056BC7747}</PartyId>
<OrganizationName/>
<JobTitle/>
<FirstName>TestViji</FirstName>
<LastName>test</LastName>
<Address1>TestAddr</Address1>
<Address2>test</Address2>
<City>Test City</City>
<StateProvince/>
<StateProvinceChoice>N</StateProvinceChoice>
<Phone>91.9835643473</Phone>
<PhoneExt/>
<Fax/>
<Email>vijirajt@gmail.com</Email>
</Address>
<Count>100</Count>
<TotalPages>101</TotalPages>
</AddressBook>
<Command>GETADDRESSBOOK</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
- 379 -
Related commands
l AddContact
l Contacts
l DeleteContact
l GetContacts
l GetExtAttributes
l GetResellerInfo
l GetServiceContact
l GetWhoisContact
l Preconfigure
GetAgreementPage
Description
Definition
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the up-to-date verbiage for the requested agreement. You
can implement this command in your own Web site so that your agreement page always
contains the current language.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/help/HostTerms.asp
The eNoms Registration Agreement link calls the GetAgreementPage command.
Constraints
- 380 -
Input parameters

Which agreement to retrieve. Permitted

values are:
----General----
Agreement General Registration Agree-
ment
Anti-Malware GeoTrust Anti-Malware
Agreement
DRP Uniform Domain Name Dispute
Policy
ID-Protect ID-Protect Agreement
goMobi additional requirements for
goMobi
POP-Email POP E-Mail Agreement
TLDPortal TLDPortal Agreement
TrustePrivacyPolicy
Truste Privacy Policy TrustePri-
Optional; default is vacyPolicySeal Truste with Seal Privacy
Page Policy 20
Agreement
TrustSeal Symantec Safe Site (aka Ver-
isign Trust Seal) Service Agreement
Watchlist TLD Watchlist Agreement
WBL_Terms Business Listing Agree-
ment
----TLD----
AC additional requirements for .ac
Altdotcom additional Registry require-
ments for CentralNIC's TLDs (such as
.br.com and .se.net)
AM additional requirements for .am
AT additional requirements for .at
AU additional requirements for .au
BE additional requirements for .be
- 381 -

BIZ additional requirements for .biz
BZ additional requirements for .bz
CA additional requirements for .ca
CC additional requirements for .cc
CN additional requirements for .cn
CO additional requirements for .co
DE additional requirements for .de
ES additional requirements for .es
EU additional requirements for .eu
GS additional requirements for .gs
IN additional requirements for .in
INFO additional requirements for .info
IO additional requirements for .io
IT additional requirements for .it
JOBS additional requirements for .jobs
JP additional requirements for .jp
LA additional requirements for .la
MOBI additional requirements for .mobi
MS additional requirements for .ms
MX additional requirements for .mx
NAME additional requirements for .name
NL additional requirements for .nl
NU additional requirements for .nu
NZ additional requirements for .nz
PE additional requirements for .pe
PRO additional requirements for .pro
SH additional requirements for .sh
TC additional requirements for .tc
TLDTW additional requirements for .tw
3rd level domain
TM additional requirements for .tm
TV additional requirements for .tv
TW additional requirements for .tw
UK additional requirements for .uk
US additional requirements for .us
VG additional requirements for .vg
WS additional requirements for .ws
XXX additional requirements for .xxx
Language of agreement. Permitted val-

Language ues are: Eng English Ger German Por 3
Eng
Portuguese Spa Spanish

are Text (default), HTML, or XML. For
ResponseType Optional this command, the text response is URL- 4
encoded so that the response will parse
correctly
- 382 -

Content Content of the Registration Agreement

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l For RichContent, display the user agreement found at http://www.rich-
contentwidget.com/terms.aspx
l For Comodo SSL certificates, display the user agreement that link from http://www.-
comodo.com/about/comodo-agreements.php
l For GeoTrust SSL certificates, display the user agreement found at http://www.geo-
trust.com/resources/cps/pdfs/gt_ssl_SA_v.2.0.pdf
l For VeriSign SSL certificates, display the user agreement found at http://www.ver-
isign.com/repository/agreements/serverClass3Org.html
Example
The following query retrieves the Registration Agreement text and sends the response in
XML format.
Query
command=GetAgreementPage&uid=resellid
- 383 -
Output
<content>
THIS AGREEMENT HAS A PROVISION FOR ARBITRATION OF
DISPUTES
BETWEEN THE PARTIES.

This Registration Agreement ("Agreement") sets forth the
terms
and conditions of your use of domain name registration and
related services ("Services"). In this Agreement "you" and
"your" refer to you and the registrant listed in the WHOIS
contact information for the domain name. "We", "us" and
"our" refer to the registrars listed at the <a href=
"#registrars">bottom of this document</a>, any one of which
will be the registrar for your domain name and all of which
share common ownership, common terms and conditions, and a
shared Services infrastructure. To determine which regis-
trar
your domain name is registered with, perform a WHOIS lookup
at <a href="http://www.uwhois.com" target="_blank">http://
www.uwhois.com</a>. You obtain the Services through your
primary service provider, with whom we have a wholesale
relationship (your "Primary Service Provider"). Your
relationship with your Primary Service Provider may be
governed by additional terms, as you and your Primary Ser-
vice
Provider may agree. "We," "us" and "our" does not include
your
Primary Service Provider, except when specifically men-
tioned
or unless your Primary Service Provider is one of us (i.e.,
if your Primary Service Provider is also one of the regis-
trars
listed at the <a href="#registrars">bottom of this document
</a>)).

.
- 384 -
.
.
</content>
<Command>GETAGREEMENTPAGE</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>b6812a69-5c50-43dd-85db-aeb3f37ff497</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l None
GetAllAccountInfo
Description
Definition
Combines GetAccountInfo, GetCustomerPaymentInfo, and GetCustomerPreferences.
Usage
Use this command to access all information for an account.
Availability
- 385 -
This command runs in the background of eNoms Web site.
Constraints
Input parameters



OrganizationName Name of organization
JobTitle Job title
FName First Name
LName Last Name
Address1 Address line 1
Address2 Address line 2
City City
- 386 -
StateProvince State or province
StateProvinceChoice State or province choice
Country Country
Phone Telephone number
Fax Fax number
EmailAddress Email address for Whois
Email address for us to contact you about your domain name

EmailAddress_Contact
account
UserID Current account ID
Password Current account password

values are:
smaiden mothers maiden name sbirth city of birth ssocial last
4 digits of SSN
shigh high school
AuthQuestionType
fpet favorite pet
fbook favorite book
AuthQuestionAnswer Current question answer
Account Account number
Reseller Is this a reseller account or not
CardType Type of credit card
CCName Cardholder's name
CreditCardNumber Customer's credit card number
CreditCardExpMonth Credit card expiration month
CreditCardExpYear Credit card expiration year
CCAddress Credit card billing address
CCZip Credit card billing postal code
CCCountry Credit card billing country
- 387 -
DefPeriod Default number of years to register a name
PIN Personal identification number for our technical support
Enabled Is the technical support PIN enabled.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests all account information for account resellid, and requests
Query
command=GetAllAccountInfo&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&ResponseType=XML

Output
- 388 -
<Fname>Johnny</Fname>
<Lname>Doety</Lname>
<Address2/>
<Phone>+1.4252744500</Phone>
<PhoneExt/>
<Fax/>
<URL/>
<CreationDate>6/25/2002</CreationDate>
<GetAccountInfo>
</GetAccountInfo>
<CCName>ww</CCName>
<CCNumber>************1111</CCNumber>
<CCType>VISA</CCType>
<CCMonth>04</CCMonth>
<CCYear>2017</CCYear>
<CCAddress>asd</CCAddress>
<CCZip>234</CCZip>
<CCCity>asd</CCCity>
<CCStateProvince>asd</CCStateProvince>
<CCCountry>AI</CCCountry>
<CCPhoneDial/>
<CCPhone>+United States.34534</CCPhone>
<GetCustomerPreferences>
- 389 -
<DefPeriod/>
</GetCustomerPreferences>
<GetCustomerSupportPin>
<pin>2619237</pin>
<enabled>True</enabled>
</GetCustomerSupportPin>
<Command>GETALLACCOUNTINFO</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l CheckLogin
l CreateAccount
l CreateSubAccount
l GetAccountInfo
l GetOrderDetail
l GetOrderList
l GetReport
l GetResellerInfo
l GetSubAccounts
l GetTransHistory
l RPT_GetReport
l UpdateAccountInfo
- 390 -
GetAllDomains
Description
Definition
Get all domain names in an account.
Usage
Use this command to list all the domain names in an account, with their domain name
IDs and expiration dates.
We recommend that you use this command only for accounts with fewer than 200
names, because longer lists can time out. For large accounts, use GetDomains.
Availability
Constraints
l We recommend that you use this command only for accounts with fewer than 200
names, becauselonger lists can time out. For large accounts, use GetDomains.
Input parameters

- 391 -

Returns a list of domains that use cus-

UseDNS Optional tom (user-specified) name servers. Per- 10
mitted value is custom.
Returns default name servers. Value is

GetDefaultOnly Optional 1
1.
Returns domains with the specified first

Letter Optional character. Permitted values are 0 through 1
9 and A through Z.
Returns domains with the specified

RegistrarLock Optional Registrar Lock status. Permitted values 10
are Locked and Not Locked.
Returns domains with the specified Auto

AutoRenew Optional Renew status. Permitted values are Yes 3
and No.

name, on record for the contact type spe-
Name Optional cified in ContactType. Permitted values 40
are space-separated first and last
names, for example, Name=John Doe.

name, on record for the contact type spe-
ContactType Optional cified in ContactType. Permitted values 14
are Registrant, Aux Billing, Technical, or
Administrative.
Returns domains that use the specified

NameServer Optional name server. Use format dns1.- 135
nameserver.com.
Returns domains that use the specified

UseEnomNS Optional name servers. Permitted values are Yes 3
or No.
Format of response. Options are XML

ResponseType Optional (recommended), HTML, or Text (default). 4
- 392 -

DomainName Name of the domain described in this node
DomainNameID Database ID of this domain
Expiration-Date Expiration date of this domain

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests all domains in account resellid, and requests the response
in XML format:
Query
command=GetAllDomains&uid=resellid
The response lists all domain names in the account, with the ID number and expiration
date for each domain:
Output
- 393 -
<GetAllDomains>
<DomainDetail>
<DomainName>00000000001111.com</DomainName>
<expiration-date>7/7/2012 8:37:00 AM</expiration-date>
<lockstatus>Locked</lockstatus>
<AutoRenew>No</AutoRenew>
</DomainDetail>
<DomainDetail>
<DomainName>00000startajay.info</DomainName>
<lockstatus>Not Locked</lockstatus>
<AutoRenew>No</AutoRenew>
</DomainDetail>
.
.
.
<domaincount>3077</domaincount>
<UserRequestStatus>DomainBox</UserRequestStatus>
</GetAllDomains>
<Command>GETALLDOMAINS</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
- 394 -
Related commands
l GetDomainCount
l GetDomainExp
l GetDomainInfo
l GetDomains
l GetExtendInfo
l GetHomeDomainList
l GetPasswordBit
l GetRegLock
l GetRenew
l SetPassword
l SetRegLock
l SetRenew
l StatusDomain
l ValidatePassword
GetAllHostAccounts
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of all Web hosting accounts in a domain name account, with attributes.
Usage
Use this command to list the Web hosting accounts in your eNom account, and some
attributes of each.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/wsg/
In the left-hand menu, the manage link calls the GetAllHostAccounts command.
- 395 -
Constraints
Input parameters



WebHostID Web hosting package ID from our internal records
HostAccount Web hosting account name assigned by the account holder
WebStorage Web storage setting, in MB
BandWidth Current traffic capacity, in GB
SQLSize Current database storage, in MB
DatabaseType Type of database that currently supports this account
POPMailBoxes Number of POP mailboxes allotted to this account
Overage Current setting for accommodating bandwidth overage
BillingDate Next billing date for this Web hosting account
- 396 -
Status Status of this Web hosting account
OSType Operating system of the Web server
Terminate flag. If True, this Web hosting account will be

Terminate
deleted at the end of this billing period.
Date on which this Web hosting account will be deleted, if one

TerminateDate
has been set
HasWSC Does this account subscribe to WebSite Creator?
WSCEnabled Is WebSite Creator enabled?
WSCLaunchURL URL to launch WebSite Creator, specific to this account

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of the Web hosting accounts in account resellid, and
Query
command=GETALLHOSTACCOUNTS&uid=resellid
- 397 -
&pw=reselluid=resellid&pw=resellpw&responsetype=xml

Output

<HostAccounts>
<HostPackage>
<WebHostID>10000056</WebHostID>
<HostAccount>resellwebid</HostAccount>
<WebStorage>1000</WebStorage>
<BandWidth>20</BandWidth>
<SQLSize>500</SQLSize>
<DatabaseType>SQL Server</DatabaseType>
<POPMailBoxes>100</POPMailBoxes>
<Overage>pay premium</Overage>
<BillingDate>9/5/2003</BillingDate>
</HostPackage>
<HostPackage>
<HostAccount>test20030903</HostAccount>
<Overage>pay premium</Overage>
</HostPackage>
.
.
.
</HostAccounts>
<Command>GETALLHOSTACCOUNTS</Command>
- 398 -
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
l GetHostAccount
GetAllResellerHostPricing
Description
Definition
Retrieve your wholesale costs and retail selling prices, for all quantity levels, for Web
hosting components, for either Windows or Linux.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of your wholesale costs and retail selling prices, for
all quantity levels, for all Web hosting components. One run of the command retrieves
either Windows or Linux pricing; send the query twice if you want to display both sets of
pricing on one page.
A similar command, GetResellerHostPricing, retrieves prices you charge to your sub-
accounts for Web hosting components.
Availability
- 399 -
The Set Component Unit Pricing table displays the results of the GetAllReseller-
HostPricing command.
Constraints
The login ID and password must be valid.
Input parameters

UID Required Domain name account login ID 20
PW Required Domain name account login password 20
Optional; default is Which set of pricing to retrieve. Per-

OSType 4
Windows mitted values are Windows and Linux


In the wholesale pricing structure for this account, the lower
end of the quantity range for this component. For example, if
ResellerQtyX (in HTML and text output,
one ResellerQty=1 and the next largest is ResellerQty=5, the
X=1 to PackageCount
prices in the ResellerQty=1 node apply to quantities of 1 to 4 of
each Web hosting component listed in this query string.
In the retail (selling price) structure for this account, the lower
RetailQtyX
one RetailQty=1 and the next largest is RetailQty=5, the prices
in the RetailQty=1 node apply to quantities of 1 to 4 of each
- 400 -
Web hosting component listed in this query string.
Cost to this account (wholesale price) of bandwidth units in

ResellerBandwidthPriceX
this quantity range. Each bandwidth unit contains 20GB.
Selling (retail) price of bandwidth units in this quantity range.

RetailBandwidthPriceX
Each bandwidth unit contains 20GB.
Cost to this account (wholesale price) of Web storage units in

ResellerWebStoragePriceX
this quantity range. Each Web hosting unit contains 1GB.
Selling (retail) price of Web storage units in this quantity range.

RetailWebStoragePriceX
Each Web hosting unit contains 1GB.
Cost to this account (wholesale price) of SQL database stor-

ResellerDBStoragePriceX age units in this quantity range. Each SQL database unit con-
tains 250MB.
Selling (retail) price of SQL database storage units in this quant-

RetailDBStoragePriceX
ity range. Each SQL database unit contains 250MB.
Cost to this account (wholesale price) of POP email units to

ResellerPOPMailPriceX include in this quantity range. Each POP mail unit contains 10
email boxes, with 100MB storage for each mailbox.
Selling (retail) price of POP email units to include in this quant-

RetailPOPMailPriceX ity range. Each POP mail unit contains 10 email boxes, with
100MB storage for each mailbox.
PackageCount Number of quantity brackets listed in this response

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 401 -
Example
The following query returns the reseller (wholesale) costs and retail (selling) prices for
all quantity levels of all components and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=GETALLRESELLERHOSTPRICING&uid=resellid
In the response, a list of components and prices comfirms that the query was successful:
Output

<resellerhostpricing>
<components>
<ResellerQty>1</ResellerQty>
<RetailQty>1</RetailQty>
<ResellerBandwidthPrice>1.00</ResellerBandwidthPrice>
<RetailBandwidthPrice>2.00</RetailBandwidthPrice>
<ResellerWebStoragePrice>.50</ResellerWebStoragePrice>
<RetailWebStoragePrice>1.00</RetailWebStoragePrice>
<ResellerDBStoragePrice>3.00</ResellerDBStoragePrice>
<RetailDBStoragePrice>5.00</RetailDBStoragePrice>
<ResellerPOPMailPrice>.75</ResellerPOPMailPrice>
<RetailPOPMailPrice>1.50</RetailPOPMailPrice>
</components>
<components>
<ResellerBandwidthPrice>.55</ResellerBandwidthPrice>
<RetailBandwidthPrice>.65</RetailBandwidthPrice>
<RetailWebStoragePrice>.39</RetailWebStoragePrice>
<RetailPOPMailPrice>.45</RetailPOPMailPrice>
- 402 -
</components>
<components>
<ResellerDBStoragePrice />
<RetailDBStoragePrice />
</components>
<components>
<ResellerWebStoragePrice />
<RetailWebStoragePrice />
<ResellerPOPMailPrice />
<RetailPOPMailPrice />
</components>
</resellerhostpricing>
<Command>GETALLRESELLERHOSTPRICING</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
- 403 -
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
l GetHostAccount
l GetStorageUsage
l HostPackageDefine
l HostPackageDelete
l HostPackageModify
l HostPackageView
l HostParkingPage
GetBalance
Description
Definition
Get account balances.
Usage
Use this command to return the current balance on an account.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/resellers/SubAccount.asp
The Access link calls the GetBalance command.
- 404 -
Constraints
Input parameters



Reseller Returns 1 if this is a reseller account, 0 otherwise
Balance Current account balance
AvailableBalance Current available balance
Price Default price for names
COMPrice Price for .com
NETPrice Price for .net
ORGPrice Price for .org
CCPrice Price for .cc
TVPrice Price for .tv
- 405 -
DomainCount Current count of domains in the account

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l This command only returns the price for original purchase of domains, not tranfers
or renewals. For acomplete list of prices, use PE_GetRetailPricing or PE_
GetResellerPrice.
Example
The following query requests the account balance for account resellid, and requests the
Query
command=GetBalance&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&responsetype=xml
The response lists the balance and the available balance:

Output
- 406 -
<Balance>2,261.65</Balance>
<AvailableBalance>1,939.50</AvailableBalance>
<Price>8.95</Price>
<COMPrice>8.95</COMPrice>
<NETPrice>8.95</NETPrice>
<ORGPrice>8.95</ORGPrice>
<CCPrice>24.95</CCPrice>
<TVPrice>39.95</TVPrice>
<BZPrice>24.95</BZPrice>
<NUPrice>24.95</NUPrice>
<DomainCount>2943</DomainCount>
<Command>GETBALANCE</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l CommissionAccount
l RefillAccount
GetCartContent
Description
Definition
- 407 -
Get the contents of the shopping cart.

Usage
Use this command to display the contents of the shopping cart.
Availability
http://www.enom.com/
The cart link calls the GetCartContent command. The command creates the list of cart
contents on the cart page.
Constraints
Input parameters


- 408 -

ItemID Item number
Description Nature of the transaction. Options are Register, Renew
Years Number of years to register
NameID Name ID
Name Domain name
Current status of the name. Value A indicates item is active

StatusID
and will be affected by future transactions, or I for inactive
ItemPrice Item price
Auto-renew setting. Value 1 indicates this item is set to auto-

Renew
renew, 0 indicates this item is not set to auto-renew
A NeedsConfig value of 1 indicates that the Preconfigure icon

should be displayed for this cart item. This happens when the
NeedsConfig
cart item is a domain name that requires preconfiguration, and
the preconfiguration has not yet been done.
An IsMailPak value of 1 indicates that the POP Email icon

should be displayed for this cart item. This happens when the
IsMailPak cart item is a domain name for which POP mail is available,
and the user has not added the POP Email to the shopping
cart.
A ShowWPPSLink value of 1 indicates that the Whois Privacy

Protection Service (WPPS, ID Protect) icon should be dis-
ShowWPPSLink played for this cart item. This happens when the cart item is a
domain name for which WPPS is available, and the user has
not added WPPS to the shopping cart.
QtyDesc Unit by which this item is sold
A SubItem value of 0 indicates that this item is a single line

SubItem
item in the shopping cart
A FreeTrial value of 0 indicates that the user begins paying for

FreeTrial
this item as soon as it is purchased

ErrCount
- 409 -

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l Check the return parameter ErrCount. If greater than If greater than 0 the trans-
action failed. The parameter Err(ErrCount) can be presented to the client. Other-
wise process the returned parameters as defined above.rameter StThe parameter
StatusID returns A for active and will be affected by future transactions, or I for inact-
ive.
Example
The following quThe following query requests the contents of the shopping cart for
account resellid, and requests the response in XML format:
Query
command=GetCartContent&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&ResponseType=XML
The response indicates that the shopping cart currently contains a domain to register
(resellerdocs.us):
Output
<GetCartContent>
<ContainsDomain>true</ContainsDomain>
<item>
<Description>Email Pak - 10 email boxes</Description>
<Years>1</Years>
- 410 -
<NameID>152533676</NameID>
<Name>resellerdocs.com</Name>
<StatusID>A</StatusID>
<ItemPrice>9.95</ItemPrice>
<ItemTotalPrice>9.9500</ItemTotalPrice>
<ItemUnitPrice>9.9500</ItemUnitPrice>
<Renew>0</Renew>
<cd>
<IsMailPak>1</IsMailPak>
<ShowWPPSLink>0</ShowWPPSLink>
<ShowWBLLink>0</ShowWBLLink>
<ShowMobilizerLink>0</ShowMobilizerLink>
<ShowMailLink>0</ShowMailLink>

<QtyDesc>Pak(s)</QtyDesc>
<SubItem>0</SubItem>
<FreeTrial>0</FreeTrial>

</cd>
</item>
<item>
<Description>Register</Description>
<Years>1</Years>
<Name>resellerdocs1.com</Name>
<Renew>0</Renew>
<cd>

<QtyDesc>Year(s)</QtyDesc>
- 411 -
<BaseItemPrice>8.75</BaseItemPrice>

</cd>
</item>
<item>
<Description>Register</Description>
<Years>1</Years>
<Name>resellerdocs123.com</Name>
<Renew>0</Renew>
<cd>

<BaseItemPrice>8.75</BaseItemPrice>

</cd>
</item>
</GetCartContent>
<GroupCounts>
<Group ParentItemID="889049" GroupCount="1"/>
</GroupCounts>
<Command>GETCARTCONTENT</Command>
- 412 -
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l AddBulkDomains
l AddToCart
l DeleteFromCart
l InsertNewOrder
l PurchasePreview
l UpdateCart
GetCatchAll
Description
Definition
Get the forwarding address for emails addressed to nonexistent mailboxes.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the forwarding address for nonexistent email addresses
under a domain name. The domain name must be in our system, but the forwarding
address does not need to be.
Availability
- 413 -

https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/POPConfig.asp?DomainNameId=152533676
The Catch-All Email box at the bottom of the page uses the GetCatchAll command.
Constraints
Input parameters
Max
Size
Second-level domain name (for example, enom in

SLD Required 63
enom.com)


Email address that mail will be sent to if the addressee mailbox
CatchAll
does not exist
- 414 -
ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the Catch-All email address for this domain name, and
Query
command=GetCatchAll&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
In the response, the presence of the Catch-All email address confirms that the query was
successful:
Output

<CatchAll>john.doe@resellerdocs.com</CatchAll>
<Command>GETCATCHALL</Command>
- 415 -
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l DeletePOP3
l Forwarding
l GetForwarding
l GetPOP3
l GetPOPForwarding
l SetCatchAll
l SetPOPForwarding
l SetUpPOP3User
GetCerts
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of the SSL certificates that we offer.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of the types of SSL certificates that we offer.
Availability
- 416 -
https://resellertest.enom.com/secure/PurchaseCerts.asp?
The table that lists the certs we offer could be populated by the GetCerts command. Our
page uses GetCerts to retrieve prices and hard codes the cert names, but GetCerts does
return cert names as well.
Constraints
Input parameters



Reseller Is this a reseller account.
ProdCode Product text ID
ProdType Product number ID
ProdDesc Product description
- 417 -
QtyDesc Units in which this product is sold
RetailPrice Retail selling price charged to customers
ResellerPrice Wholesale price this account pays
Enabled Is this product enabled for selling.
Quantities available. For example, Years=3 indicates that a

Years
customer can buy a 3-year registration of this product.
CertCount Number of SSL certificate products listed in this return

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of the SSL certificate products we offer, and sends
Query
command=GetCerts&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw
&ResponseType=XML
- 418 -
In the response, a list of certificates and an ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was
successful:
Output
<GetCerts>
<Certs>
<Cert1>
<ProdCode>certificate-rapidssl-rapidssl</ProdCode>
<RetailPrice>$19.95</RetailPrice>
<ResellerPrice>$9.95</ResellerPrice>
<Enabled>True</Enabled>
<Years>1</Years>
<Years>2</Years>
<Years>3</Years>
<Years>4</Years>
<Years>5</Years>
</Cert1>
<Cert2>
<ProdCode>certificate-geotrust-quickssl</ProdCode>
<ProdDesc>SSL Certificate - GeoTrust QuickSSL</ProdDesc>
<RetailPrice>$125.00</RetailPrice>
<ResellerPrice>$69.00</ResellerPrice>
<Years>1</Years>
<Years>2</Years>
<Years>3</Years>
<Years>4</Years>
<Years>5</Years>
</Cert2>
.
.
.
</Certs>
<CertCount>16</CertCount>
</GetCerts>
- 419 -
<Command>GETCERTS</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>c0a2fd36-f8f8-451b-9eb4-8b5b406b69c5</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l CertConfigureCert
l CertGetCertDetail
l CertGetCerts
l CertModifyOrder
l CertParseCSR
l CertPurchaseCert
GetConfirmationSettings
Description
Definition
Retrieve the settings for email confirmations of orders.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the current settings for email confirmations of orders (con-
firmations sent to you when a customer places an order).
- 420 -
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/myaccount/ConfirmationSettings.asp
The settings on the Reseller Confirmation Email Settings page are retrieved using the
GetConfirmationSettings command.
Constraints
Input parameters



The setting for sending copies of order confirmation emails to
OrderConfirmation
you, when orders are placed on this account
TransferOrderConfirmation The setting for sending copies of transfer request emails to
- 421 -
you, when orders are placed on this account
The setting for sending copies of order confirmation emails to

OrderConfirmationBCC
you, when orders are placed on a subaccount of this account
The setting for sending copies of transfer request emails to

TransferOrderConfirmationBCC
you, when orders are placed on a subaccount of this account
EmailHead If set for custom email text, the header string that will be used
EmailTail If set for custom email text, the tail string that will be used

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the settings for order confirmation emails, and sends the
Query
command=GetConfirmationSettings&uid=resellid
- 422 -
In the response, return values in the ConfirmationSettings node confirms that the query
was successful:
Output
<ConfirmationSettings>
<OrderConfirmation>True</OrderConfirmation>
<TransferOrderConfirmation>True</TransferOrderConfirmation>
<OrderConfirmationBCC>True</OrderConfirmationBCC>
<Trans-
ferOrderConfirmationBCC>True</TransferOrderConfirmationBCC>
<EmailHead></EmailHead>
<EmailTail></EmailTail>
</ConfirmationSettings>
<Command>GETCONFIRMATIONSETTINGS</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l GetAccountInfo
l GetCusPreferences
l GetTLDList
l PE_SetPricing
- 423 -
GetContacts
Description
Definition
Get all contact data for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to display contact information for this account.
Availability
In the utilities section, the Contact/WhoIs Information link calls the GetContacts com-
mand.
Constraints
Input parameters

- 424 -


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


DomainName Domain name
SLD Second-level domain name (for example, enom in enom.com)
TLD Top-level domain name (extension)
DomainNameID Identification number for this domain name, in our system
None indicates no separate Registrant information has been

Registrant entered for this domain name. Otherwise, Registrant inform-
ation is returned
None indicates no separate Auxiliary Billing information has

AuxBilling been entered for this domain name. Otherwise, Auxiliary Billing
contact information is returned
None indicates no separate Technical contact information has

Tech been entered for this domain name. Otherwise, Technical con-
tact information is returned
None indicates no separate Admin contact information has

Admin been entered for this domain name. Otherwise, Admin contact
information is returned
Billing information is returned for most TLDs, with some excep-

Billing
tions like .eu
ContactTypePartyID Party ID
ContactTypeAddress1 Address 1
ContactTypeAddress2 Address 2
ContactTypeCity City
- 425 -
ContactTypeCountry Country
ContactTypeEmailAddress Email Address
ContactTypeFax Fax
ContactTypeFirstName First Name
ContactTypeLastName Last Name
ContactTypeJobTitle Job Title
ContactTypeOrganizationName Organization Name
ContactTypePhone Phone number
ContactTypePhoneExt Phone extension
ContactTypePostalCode Postal Code
ContactTypeStateProvince State or Province
ContactTypeStateProvinceChoice State or Province? S indicates State; P indicates Province
True indicates that AuxBilling appears on the Contacts page

UseBelowAuxInfo
as an optional alternative for this ContactType
AuxID PartyID for Auxiliary Billing contact
RegID PartyID for Registrant contact
Registry-specific data for some country-code TLDs. For each

ExtendedAttributes TLD, you can retrieve the expected extended attributes by run-
ning this command or the GetExtAttributes command.
WPPSAllowed Is ID Protect permitted for this TLD?
Is there a current ID Protect subscription for this domain

WPPSExists
name?
Is the ID Protect subscription currently being used to protect

WPPSEnabled
this domain name?
WPPSExpDate Expiration date for ID Protect subscription
WPPSAutoRenew Auto renew setting for ID Protect subscription
EscrowLiftDate If this domain name is currently in escrow, the lift date
EscrowHold Is this domain name currently in escrow?
Does this TLD have restrictions on the freedom to update con-

ContactRestrictedTLD
tact information without a trade (transfer).
- 426 -

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l If there are additional contact entries, Billing in the above return parameter names
is replaced with REGISTRANT, AUXBILLING, TECH, or ADMIN.
Example
The following query requests the contact information for resellerdocs.com, and requests
Query
command=getcontacts&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
The response gives contact information for the registrant party and billing party, and
states that no different information was provided for the auxiliary billing, technical, and
administrative contacts. Where no different information is provided, these contacts
default to the billing party information:
Output
- 427 -
<GetContacts>
<domainname sld="resellerdocs" tld="com" domain-
nameid="152533676">resellerdocs.com</domainname>
<Registrant>
<RegistrantPartyID>{bb4a2de1-6485-45cb-a4fc-ee39ba0c1629}
<RegistrantOrganizationName>Extraordinary Sales</Re-
gistrantOrganizationName>
<RegistrantJobTitle>Manager</RegistrantJobTitle>
<RegistrantFirstName>Johnny</RegistrantFirstName>
<RegistrantLastName>Doety</RegistrantLastName>
<RegistrantAddress1>15801 NE 24th Street</Re-
gistrantAddress1>
<RegistrantAddress2/>
<RegistrantCity>Bellevue</RegistrantCity>
<RegistrantCountry>US</RegistrantCountry>
<RegistrantStateProvince>WA</RegistrantStateProvince>
<Regis-
trantStateProvinceChoice>S</RegistrantStateProvinceChoice>
<RegistrantPostalCode>98008</RegistrantPostalCode>
<Regis-
trantE-
mailAddress>john.doe@resellerdocs.com</RegistrantEmailAddress>
<RegistrantPhone>+1.4252744500</RegistrantPhone>
<RegistrantPhoneExt/>
<RegistrantFax/>
</Registrant>
<AuxBilling>
<AuxBillingPartyID>{bb4a2de1-6485-45cb-a4fc-ee39ba0c1629}
</AuxBillingPartyID>
<AuxBillingOrganizationName>Extraordinary
Sales</AuxBillingOrganizationName>
<AuxBillingJobTitle>Manager</AuxBillingJobTitle>
<AuxBillingFirstName>Johnny</AuxBillingFirstName>
<AuxBillingLastName>Doety</AuxBillingLastName>
<AuxBillingAddress1>15801 NE 24th Street</AuxBillingAd-
dress1>
<AuxBillingAddress2/>
<AuxBillingCity>Bellevue</AuxBillingCity>
<AuxBillingCountry>US</AuxBillingCountry>
<AuxBillingStateProvince>WA</AuxBillingStateProvince>
<AuxBillingStateProvinceChoice>S</AuxBillingStateProvinceCh-
oice>
- 428 -
<AuxBillingPostalCode>98008</AuxBillingPostalCode>
<AuxBillingE-
mailAd-
dress>john.doe@resellerdocs.com</AuxBillingEmailAddress>
<AuxBillingPhone>+1.4252744500</AuxBillingPhone>
<AuxBillingPhoneExt/>
<AuxBillingFax/>
<UseRegInfoAbove>True</UseRegInfoAbove>
<auxID>{bb4a2de1-6485-45cb-a4fc-ee39ba0c1629}</auxID>
<regID>{bb4a2de1-6485-45cb-a4fc-ee39ba0c1629}</regID>
</AuxBilling>
<Tech>
<TechPartyID>{5e731431-d986-405e-a9ae-4feb5dd2d6ae}
</TechPartyID>
<TechOrganizationName/>
<TechJobTitle/>
<TechFirstName>John</TechFirstName>
<TechLastName>Smith</TechLastName>
<TechAddress1>100 Main St.</TechAddress1>
<TechAddress2/>
<TechCity>Townsville</TechCity>
<TechCountry>US</TechCountry>
<TechStateProvince/>
<TechStateProvinceChoice> </TechStateProvinceChoice>
<TechPostalCode/>
<TechEmailAddress>john@resellerdocs.com</TechEmailAddress>
<TechPhone>+1.5555555555</TechPhone>
<TechPhoneExt/>
<TechFax/>
</Tech>
<Admin>
<AdminPartyID>{bb4a2de1-6485-45cb-a4fc-ee39ba0c1629}</Ad-
minPartyID>
<AdminOrganizationName>Extraordinary Sales</Ad-
minOrganizationName>
<AdminJobTitle>Manager</AdminJobTitle>
<AdminFirstName>Johnny</AdminFirstName>
<AdminLastName>Doety</AdminLastName>
<AdminAddress1>15801 NE 24th Street</AdminAddress1>
<AdminAddress2/>
<AdminCity>Bellevue</AdminCity>
- 429 -
<AdminStateProvince>WA</AdminStateProvince>
<AdminE-
mailAddress>john.doe@resellerdocs.com</AdminEmailAddress>
<AdminPhone>+1.4252744500</AdminPhone>
<AdminPhoneExt/>
<AdminFax/>
</Admin>
<Billing>
<BillingPartyID>{bb4a2de1-6485-45cb-a4fc-ee39ba0c1629}
</BillingPartyID>
<BillingOrganizationName>Extraordinary Sales</BillingOr-
ganizationName>
<BillingJobTitle>Manager</BillingJobTitle>
<BillingFirstName>Johnny</BillingFirstName>
<BillingLastName>Doety</BillingLastName>
<BillingAddress1>15801 NE 24th Street</BillingAddress1>
<BillingAddress2/>
<BillingCity>Bellevue</BillingCity>
<BillingE-
mailAddress>john.doe@resellerdocs.com</BillingEmailAddress>
<BillingPhoneExt/>
<BillingFax/>
<BillingFullCountry>United States</BillingFullCountry>
</Billing>
<Nexus category=""/>
<Purpose/>
<CurrentAttributes>
</CurrentAttributes>
<WPPSAllowed>1</WPPSAllowed>
<WPPSExists>1</WPPSExists>
<WPPSEnabled>1</WPPSEnabled>
<WPPSExpDate>12/22/2011</WPPSExpDate>
<WPPSAutoRenew>No</WPPSAutoRenew>
<WPPSContactData>
<ContactType>WPPS</ContactType>
- 430 -
<OrganizationName>Whois Privacy Protection Service,

Inc.</OrganizationName>
<JobTitle>Agent</JobTitle>
<FName>Whois</FName>
<LName>Agent</LName>
<Address1>PMB 368, 14150 NE 20th St - F1</Address1>
<Address2>C/O resellerdocs.com</Address2>
<Phone>+1.4252740657</Phone>
<PhoneExt/>
<Fax>+1.4256960234</Fax>
<EmailAd-
dress>cmktwnrb@whoisprivacyprotect.com</EmailAddress>
<DateTimeChanged>12/7/2011 5:50:30 AM</DateTimeChanged>
</WPPSContactData>
<escrowliftdate/>
<escrowhold/>
<Attributes>
</Attributes>
<IsContactShared>False</IsContactShared>
</GetContacts>
<ContactRestrictedTLD>False</ContactRestrictedTLD>
<Command>GETCONTACTS</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>d2027a10-719e-4b86-a648-2ebea88e-
f45e</TrackingKey>
- 431 -

Related commands
l AddContact
l Contacts
l DeleteContact
l GetAddressBook
l GetExtAttributes
l GetResellerInfo
l GetServiceContact
l GetWhoisContact
l Preconfigure
GetCusPreferences
Description
Definition
Retrieve global preferences for an account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve global preferences for an account.
Availability
On the settings page, many of the settings shown can be retrieved using GetCusPrefer-
ences.
- 432 -
Constraints
Input parameters

Reseller EC key for this Instant Reseller

ResellerKey Optional or Registry Rocket site, if different from 40
this UID
ResellerStatus=1 retrieves information

ResellerStatus Optional about Registry Rocket sites and reseller 1
balances


Default period for registrations, renewals, and transfers, in
DefPeriod
years
AllowDNS True allows name servers other than eNoms
ShowPopUps True shows pop-up menus
True automatically renews the domain 30 days before it

AutoRenew
expires
- 433 -
True requires the account holders permission to transfer the
RegLock
domain to another registrar
True automatically renews POP paks 30 days before they

AutoPakRenew
expire.
UseDNS True uses eNoms name servers
ResellerStatus Is this a reseller account.
0 indicates no email; 1 indicates send notice; 2 indicates con-

RenewalSetting
tact and charge customer
1 indicates send copy of email to reseller; 0 indicates no copy

RenewalBCC
to reseller
True automatically renews URL forwarding 30 days before the

RenewalURLForward
URL forwarding subscription expires.
True automatically renews email forwarding 30 days before the

RenewalEMailForward
email forwarding subscription expires.
HostName Name of this default host record
Address Address of this default host record
RecordType Record type of this default host record
DefaultHostRecordOwn Is this account using its own set of default host records?
UseOurDNS Does this account use eNoms DNS servers by default?
DNSX Default DNS server X for this domain name account
True indicates this account has signed a credit-card pro-

AcceptTerms
cessing agreement with us
URL URL for reseller site listed in email notices
ParentAccount This accounts parent
NoService Service status
Maximum number of names this account can register in a

BulkRegLimit
single query
ResellerKey Reseller key for this Registry Rocket site
HostPrice Price this Registry Rocket account charges for DNS hosting
CCPrice Price this Registry Rocket account charges for .cc
InfoPrice Price this Registry Rocket account charges for .info
- 434 -
PictureURL URL of image file used in this Registry Rocket site
ContactEmail Contact email address for this Registry Rocket account
CompanyName Company name for this Registry Rocket account
Referrer Referrer for this Registry Rocket account
Balance Current balance for this reseller account
BalanceThreshold Balance threshold for this reseller account
Price Wholesale price this account pays for .com
CCPrice Wholesale price this account pays for .cc
AvailableBalance Available balance for this account
ResCustomerPrice ?
CommissionBalance Current commission balance for this account
Send a notification email to the Billing contact for this account

NotifyAmount
when available balance drops below this amount

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 435 -
Example
The following query retrieves the account settings for resellid and sends the response in
XML format:
Query
&responsetype=xml

Output
<CustomerPrefs>
<DefPeriod>1</DefPeriod>
<AllowDNS>False</AllowDNS>
<ShowPopups>False</ShowPopups>
<AutoRenew>False</AutoRenew>
<RegLock>False</RegLock>
<AutoPakRenew>False</AutoPakRenew>
<UseDNS>True</UseDNS>
<ResellerStatus/>
<RenewalSetting>1</RenewalSetting>
<RenewalBCC>1</RenewalBCC>
<RenewalURLForward>False</RenewalURLForward>
<RenewalEmailForward>False</RenewalEmailForward>
<MailNumLimit>100</MailNumLimit>
<IDProtect>False</IDProtect>
<DefIDProtectRenew>False</DefIDProtectRenew>
<DefWBLRenew>False</DefWBLRenew>
<NameJetSales>False</NameJetSales>
<defaulthostrecords>
<hostrecord hostname="@" address="69.25.142.5" record-
type="A"/>
<hostrecord hostname="*" address="69.25.142.5" record-
type="A"/>
<hostrecord hostname="www" address="69.25.142.5" record-
type="A"/>
<hostrecord hostname="" address="" recordtype="A"/>
- 436 -
</defaulthostrecords>
<UseOurDNS>False</UseOurDNS>
<NameServers>
<DNS1>ns1.nicmus.com</DNS1>
</NameServers>
</CustomerPrefs>
<CustomerInformation>
<URL/>
<ParentLogin>Main-eNom</ParentLogin>
<BulkRegLimit>100</BulkRegLimit>
</CustomerInformation>
<Command>GETCUSPREFERENCES</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
- 437 -
GetCustomerDefinedData
Description
Definition
Retrieve customer-defined data.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve custom data.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters


ObjectID Required when this customer-defined field was 2
first established.
- 438 -

Object type. Options are: 1 Data per-
Type Required taining to an account 2 Data pertaining to 1
a domain 3 Data pertaining to an order

SLD Required If Type=2 63
enom in enom.com)
Required If Type=2
Order ID, which you can retrieve using

OrderID Required If Type=3 11
GetDomainStatus

Key Required 50
data field


Value Content of this entry
Visibility to subaccount. Options are: 0 This entry not visible

DisplayFlag when logged on using subaccount ID 1 This entry is visible
when logged on using subaccount ID
EnteredBy Name of the person adding this entry
LastUpdatedDate Last date on which this entry was changed

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 439 -
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the value for the customer-defined data titled Favor-
iteCuisine for account resellid, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=getcustomerdefineddata&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&ObjectID=1&Type=1&Key=FavoriteCuisine&responsetype=xml

Output

<CustomerData>
<Value>Italian</Value>
<DisplayFlag>True</DisplayFlag>
<EnteredBy>John</EnteredBy>
<LastUpdatedDate>7/7/2003 5:46:10 PM</LastUpdatedDate>
</CustomerData>
<Command>GETCUSTOMERDEFINEDDATA</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
- 440 -
Related commands
GetCustomerPaymentInfo
Description
Definition
Retrieve customer payment information.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve customer payment information.
Availability
The Credit Card Information box contains the return values supplied by the GetCus-
tomerPaymentInfo command.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 441 -



CCName Credit card holders name
CCNumber Credit card number
CCType Credit card type
CCMonth Credit card expiration month
CCYear Credit card expiration year
CCAddress Credit card billing address street address
CCZip Credit card billing address postal code
CCCity Credit card billing address city
CCStateProvince Credit card billing address province
CCCountry Credit card billing address country
CCPhoneDial Telephone country code
CCPhone Telephone number with area code

ErrCount

ErrX
- 442 -
Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the payment information on record for an account, and
Query
command=GetCustomerPaymentInfo&uid=resellid

Output

<CCName>John Doe</CCName>
<CCType>MASTERCARD</CCType>
<CCAddress>17462</CCAddress>
<CCZip>98052</CCZip>
<CCCity>Hometown</CCCity>
<CCStateProvince>WA</CCStateProvince>
<CCCountry>US</CCCountry>
- 443 -
<CCPhoneDial>1</CCPhoneDial>
<CCPhone>5555559999</CCPhone>
<Command>GETCUSTOMERPAYMENTINFO</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<ExecTime>8.203125E-02</ExecTime>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CreateAccount
l CreateSubAccount
l GetAccountInfo
l GetAllAccountInfo
l GetSubAccounts
l UpdateAccountInfo
GetDNS
Description
Definition
Retrieve the name server settings for a domain name.
Usage
- 444 -
Use this command to retrieve name servers for one domain name.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


NSCount Number of DNS entries
- 445 -
Name server X. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or
DNSX
HTML.
Which name servers a domain is using. Default indicates our

UseDNS
name servers
NSStatus Returns yes if using registrar's name servers.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the domain name servers for resellerdocs.com, and
Query
command=GetDNS&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw

Output
- 446 -
<dns>dns1.name-services.com</dns>
<UseDNS>default</UseDNS>
<HostsNumLimit>15</HostsNumLimit>
<DNSRegistrySynced>True</DNSRegistrySynced>
<RRPCodeGDNS>200</RRPCodeGDNS>
<Command>GETDNS</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l CheckNSStatus
l DeleteNameServer
l GetDNSStatus
l ModifyNS
l ModifyNSHosting
l UpdateNameServer
- 447 -
GetDNSStatus
Description
Definition
Get the nameserver status for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to determine what DNS this domain uses. The query returns values
only if the domain uses eNom servers.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
- 448 -



Which name servers a domain is using. Default indicates our
UseDNS
name servers.
Maximum number of host records permitted for this domain, of

HostsNumLimit
types A, AAAA, CNAME, URL, and FRAME

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the DNS status of resellerdocs.com -- that is, whether the
domain uses its registrars servers. The query also requests the response in XML format:
Query
- 449 -
command=GetDNSStatus&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
The NS status Yes indicates that the domain uses the registrars name servers:
Output
<UseDNS>default</UseDNS>
<HostsNumLimit>15</HostsNumLimit>
<Command>GETDNSSTATUS</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l CheckNSStatus
l DeleteNameServer
l GetDNS
l ModifyNS
l ModifyNSHosting
l UpdateNameServer
- 450 -
GetDomainCount
Description
Definition
Get the count for registered, hosted, processing, watch list, cart item and expired
domains.
Usage
Use this command to return the number of domains in each category.
Availability
GetDomainCount is not implemented on eNom.com, but clicking the log-in button returns
information that includes counts of the domains in each category.
Constraints
Input parameters

- 451 -


RegisteredCount Number of registered domain names
HostCount Number of hosted domain names
ExpiringCount Number of expiring domain names
ExpiredDomainsCount Number of expired domain names
RGP Number of domain names in Redemption Grace Period
Number of domain names in Extended Redemption Grace

ExtendedRGP
Period
KeywordCount Number of keywords (obsolete feature)
ProcessCount Number of domain names that are still processing
WatchlistCount Number of domain names in the watchlist
CartItemCount Number of items in the shopping cart

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 452 -
Example
The following query requests a tally of domains in account resellid, and requests the
Query
command=GetDomainCount&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&ResponseType=XML
The response indicates that the account has 3084 registered and 190 hosted domains:
Output
<RegisteredCount>3084</RegisteredCount>
<HostCount>190</HostCount>
<ExpiringCount>565</ExpiringCount>
<ExpiredDomainsCount>5379</ExpiredDomainsCount>
<RGP>0</RGP>
<ExtendedRGP>0</ExtendedRGP>
<KeywordCount>0</KeywordCount>
<ProcessCount>0</ProcessCount>
<WatchlistCount>160</WatchlistCount>
<CartItemCount>3</CartItemCount>
<trafficmsg>
<VistaCustomer>True</VistaCustomer>
<RedirectorData>False</RedirectorData>
<Month/>
<PageViews/>
<Visitors/>
<FreeTrial>False</FreeTrial>
<PDQVista/>
</trafficmsg>
<Command>GETDOMAINCOUNT</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
- 453 -
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l GetAllDomains
l GetDomainExp
l GetDomainInfo
l GetDomains
l GetExtendInfo
l GetPasswordBit
l GetRegLock
l GetRenew
l SetPassword
l SetRegLock
l SetRenew
l StatusDomain
l ValidatePassword
GetDomainExp
Description
Definition
Get domain expiration date.
Usage
Use this command to display the expiration date for a domain name.
Availability
- 454 -

https://resellertest.enom.com/myaccount/
GetDomainExp is not implemented on eNom.com, but clicking the domain names link on
the my enom page returns information that includes expiration dates.
Constraints
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)

- 455 -

ExpirationDate Expiration date for the domain registration.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the expiration date for resellerdocs.com, and requests the
Query
command=GetDomainExp&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
The response indicates that the expiration date for the domain is 6/10/2019:
Output
- 456 -
<Command>GETDOMAINEXP</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l Extend
l Extend_RGP
l GetAllDomains
l GetDomainCount
l GetDomainInfo
l GetDomains
l GetExtendInfo
l GetPasswordBit
l GetRegLock
l GetRenew
l InsertNewOrder
l SetPassword
l SetRegLock
l SetRenew
l StatusDomain
l ValidatePassword
- 457 -
GetDomainFolderDetail
Description
Definition
Retrieve an extensive set of information on a domain folder.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve an extensive set of information on a domain folder.
Availability
Clicking a Settings link calls the GetDomainFolderDetail command.
Constraints
l The folder must belong to this account
Input parameters

- 458 -

Name of the folder for which you want
FolderName Required 125
details


Result of this query. Values are: 0 Failure 1 Success 2 Folder
Result
does not exist in this account
FolderID Identification number of this folder, used by our database
FolderName Name of this folder
FolderDescription Description entered by user when this folder was created
Folder type. Values are:

FolderType 0 regular folder (for organizing domains)
1 Magic Folder (for managing domain settings)
Folder status. Values are:

1 Standard folder
2 Magic Folder that is in sync
FolderStatus
3 Magic Folderuser has revised settings, but not processed
yet
4 Magic Folder that is out of sync
FolderDomainCountan Number of domains in this folder
ShouShould DNS settings be the same for all domains in this

folder? Values are:
SyncDNS
0 Leave DNS records for each domain as is
1 Update DNS records for all domains to this folders settings
SyncSynchronization status of DNS settings. Values are:

1 In sync and eligible for updates to DNS settings
SyncDNSStatusan
2 Newly created and eligible for updates to DNS settings
3 Pendingrevisions to DNS settings are not yet processed
NameName server status. Values are:

NSStatusan Yes Domains use our name servers
NA Domains use custom name servers
Should auto-renew settings be the same for all domains in this

SyncRenewan folder. If auto-renew is on, domains automatically renew 30
days before they expire. Values are:
- 459 -
0 Leave auto-renew settings for each domain as is
1 Update auto-renew settings for all domains to this folders set-
ting
SyncSynchronization status of auto-renew settings. Values

are:
1 In sync and eligible for updates to auto-renew settings
SyncRenewStatusan
2 Newly created and eligible for updates to auto-renew settings
3 Pendingrevisions to auto-renew settings are not yet pro-
cessed
AutoAuto-renew setting for this folder, if one is set. Values are:

RenewStatusan 0 Do not auto-renew domains in this folder
1 Automatically renew domains in this folder
ShouShould registrar lock settings be the same for all domains

in this folder? If registrar lock is on, domains can be transferred
only after the registrant >grants permigrants permission. Val-
SyncRegLockan ues are:
0 Leave registrar lock settings for each domain as is
1 Update registrar lock settings for all domains to this folders
setting
Synchronization status of registrar lock settings. Values are:

1 In sync and eligible for updates to registrar lock settings
2 Newly created and eligible for updates to registrar lock set-
SyncRegLockStatus
tings
3 Pendingrevisions to registrar lock settings are not yet pro-
cessed
Registrar lock setting for this folder, if one is set. Values are:
RegLockStatus 0 Do not lock domains in this folder
1 Automatically lock domains in this folder
Should domain password settings be the same for all domains

in this folder. If domain password is on, domains folder? If
domain password is on, domains can be managed individually
by their registrants, without logging in to the domain name
SyncDomainPwd
account. Values are:
0 Leave domain password settings for each domain as is
1 Update domain password settings for all domains to the
folder setting
Synchronization status of domain password settings. Values

are:
1 In sync and eligible for updates to domain password settings
SyncDomainPwdStatus 2 Newly created and eligible for updates to domain password
settings
3 Pendingrevisions to domain password settings are not yet
processed
- 460 -
Domain password setting for this folder, if one is set. Values
are:
DomainPwdValue
0 Do not require a password for domains in this folder
1 Require a password for all domains in this folder
Should host records be the same for all domains in this folder?
Host records are also known as third-level domain names, like
SyncHostse www. Values each are:
0 Leave host records for each domain as is
1 Update host records for all domains to the folder settings
Synchronization status of host records. Values are:

1 In sync and eligible for updates to host records
SyncHostsStatus
2 Newly created and eligible for updates to host records
3 Pendingrevisions to host records are not yet processed
Should any contacts be reset to match the Should any con-

tacts be reset to match the accounts Billing contact? Values
are:
SyncContact
0 Leave contact information for each domain as is
1 Update any contacts that have a SyncContactContactType
value 1
Synchronization status of contact information. Values are:

1 In sync and eligible for updates to contact settings
SyncContactStatus
2 Newly created and eligible for updates to contact settings
3 Pendingrevisions to contact settings are not yet processed
Should the contact information for this contact type (Regis-

trant, Tech, Admin, or AuxBilling) be revised to match another
contact type. Values are:
SyncContactContact
0 Leave contact information for each domain as is
1 Update the contact information of this ContactType for all
domains in this folder
PartyID Party ID of this contact
OrganizationName Organization name of this contact
JobTitle Job title of this contact
FName First (given) name of this contact
LName Last (family) name of this contact
Address1 Address, first line, of this contact
Address2 Address, second line, of this contact
City City of this contact
- 461 -
StateProvince State or province of this contact
Is StateProvince value a state or a province? Values are: S

StateProvinceChoice
State S State P Province
Country Country of this contact
Phone Phone number of this contact
Fax Fax number of this contact
EmailAddress Email address of this contact
PhoneExt Phone extension of this contact
SameAs Same As setting of this contact
FolderNameEnc Name of folder
TrafficOnly True indicates that this is a Traffic Only account
NameOnly True indicates that this is a Name Only account
ParkingEnabled True indicates that parking is enabled
Customer Type. True indicates that this account is in our

Reseller
reseller category (Reseller, Name Only, or Traffic Only).

ErrCount
the Err(1 to The number of errors if any occurred.
Messages explaining the failure. These can be presented as is

Err(x)
back to the client.

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l The default response format is plain text. To receive the response in HTML or
XMThe default response format is plain text. To receive the response in HTML or
XML format, send ResponseType=HTML or ResponseType=XML in your request.
l Check the return parameter e parameterErr Err(ErrCount) can be presented to the
client. Otherwise process the returned parameters as defined above.
- 462 -
Example
The following query retrieves details on a folder, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=GetDomainFolderDetail&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&FolderName=Favorites&responsetype=XML
In the response, the presence of data and an ErrCount value 0 indicate that the query
was successful:
Output
<Result>1</Result>
<Folder>
<FolderID>9140</FolderID>
<FolderName>Favorites</FolderName>
<Folder-
Description>FolderForMyFavoriteNames</FolderDescription>
<FolderType>1</FolderType>
<FolderDomainCount>0</FolderDomainCount>
<DNS>
<SyncDNS>1</SyncDNS>
<SyncDNSStatus>2</SyncDNSStatus>
<NSStatus>NA</NSStatus>
<NameServer>ns769.hostgator.com</NameServer>
<NameServer>ns770.hostgator.com</NameServer>
</DNS>
<Renew>
<SyncRenew>0</SyncRenew>
<SyncRenewStatus>2</SyncRenewStatus>
<RenewStatus/>
</Renew>
<RegLock>
<SyncRegLock>0</SyncRegLock>
<SyncRegLockStatus>2</SyncRegLockStatus>
<RegLockStatus/>
</RegLock>
<DomainPwd>
- 463 -
<SyncDomainPwd>0</SyncDomainPwd>
<SyncDomainPwdStatus>2</SyncDomainPwdStatus>
<DomainPwdValue></DomainPwdValue>
</DomainPwd>
<Hosts>
<SyncHosts>0</SyncHosts>
<SyncHostsStatus>2</SyncHostsStatus>
</Hosts>
<Contacts>
<SyncContact>0</SyncContact>
<SyncContactStatus>2</SyncContactStatus>
<BillingContact>
<PartyID>BB4A2DE1-6485-45CB-A4FC-EE39BA0C1629</PartyID>
<FName>Johnny</FName>
<LName>Doety</LName>
<Address2></Address2>
<FullCountry>United States</FullCountry>
<Phone>+1.4252744500</Phone>
<Fax></Fax>
<PhoneExt></PhoneExt>
<SameAs/>
</BillingContact>
<RegistrantContact>
<SyncContactRegistrant>0</SyncContactRegistrant>
<PartyID/>
<OrganizationName></OrganizationName>
<JobTitle></JobTitle>
<FName></FName>
<LName></LName>
<City></City>
<StateProvince></StateProvince>
- 464 -
<StateProvinceChoice></StateProvinceChoice>
<PostalCode></PostalCode>
<Country></Country>
<FullCountry></FullCountry>
<Phone></Phone>
<Fax></Fax>
<EmailAddress></EmailAddress>
<SameAs/>
</RegistrantContact>
<AdminContact>
<SyncContactAdmin>0</SyncContactAdmin>
<PartyID/>
<FName></FName>
<LName></LName>
<City></City>
<Country></Country>
<Phone></Phone>
<Fax></Fax>
<SameAs/>
</AdminContact>
<TechContact>
<SyncContactTech>0</SyncContactTech>
<PartyID/>
<FName></FName>
<LName></LName>
<City></City>
- 465 -
<Country></Country>
<Phone></Phone>
<Fax></Fax>
<SameAs/>
</TechContact>
<AuxBillingContact>
<SyncContactAuxBilling>0</SyncContactAuxBilling>
<PartyID/>
<FName></FName>
<LName></LName>
<City></City>
<Country></Country>
<Phone></Phone>
<Fax></Fax>
<SameAs/>
</AuxBillingContact>
</Contacts>
</Folder>
<FolderNameEnc>Favorites</FolderNameEnc>
<TrafficOnly>False</TrafficOnly>
<NameOnly>False</NameOnly>
<ParkingEnabled>False</ParkingEnabled>
<Command>GETDOMAINFOLDERDETAIL</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
- 466 -
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainFolder
GetDomainFolderList
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of folders that a domain is in, or retrieve a list of all folders in an account.
Usage
Use this command to find out which folders a domain is in, or to retrieve a list of all
folders in an account.
Availability
- 467 -
The folders link calls the GetDomainFolderList command.
Constraints
Input parameters

SLD (second-level domain name) of the

domain for which you want to retrieve
folder information. Use this parameter if
SLD Optional 63
you want information for one domain.
Without SLD and TLD, the response lists
all folders in the account.
TLD (top-level domain name) of the

domain for which you want to retrieve
folder information. Use this parameter if
TLD Optional 15
you want information for one domain.
Without SLD and TLD, the response lists
all folders in the account.

- 468 -

Result Result of this query. Possible results are: 1 Successful
ID Folder identification number, assigned by us
Name Folder name, assigned by you
Folder type. Possible values are: 0 Standard folder; not Magic

Type
1 Magic
DomainCount Number of domains in this folder
Status of this folder. Possible results are: 0 Standard 2 Magic,

Status in sync 3 Magic, in process of synchronization 4 Magic, out of
sync
Count Total number of folders in this account

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests a list of folders that contain the specified domain, and
Query
- 469 -
command=GetDomainFolderList&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&responsetype=xml
In the response, a Result value 1 and an ErrCount value 0 indicate that the query was
successful:
Output

<GetResult>
<Result>1</Result>
</GetResult>
<folders>
<item>
<ID>3100</ID>
<Name>ResellFolder</Name>
<Type>1</Type>
<Status>4</Status>
</item>
<item>
<ID>974</ID>
<Name>a3223</Name>
<Type>0</Type>
<Status>0</Status>
</item>
</folders>
<count>2</count>
<Command>GETDOMAINFOLDERLIST</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
- 470 -
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainFolder
GetDomainHeader
Description
Definition
Retrieve status of a domain header (a pointer for a domain name that associates the
sld.tld portion of the name with a specific location in your Web hosting directory struc-
ture) in your Web hosting account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve information on a domain header from your Web hosting
account.
Availability
The GetDomainHeader command is not implemented on enom.com; however, the fol-
lowing gives a similar result:
https://resellertest.enom.com/wsg/packagemanager.asp
- 471 -
The modify link calls the GetDomainHeader command.
Constraints
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


Domain Domain name being checked with this query
Location of the directory in which this domain resides, from

Path
root
Success status for retrieving a domain header that matches

Successful
this query
- 472 -

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query checks whether a domain header record has been established for
resellerdocs.com, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=GETDOMAINHEADER&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&HostAccount=resellwebid&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com
&ResponseType=xml
The response indicates that resellerdocs.com does indeed have a domain header, and it
is pointed to \resellwebid:
Output

<DomainHeader>
<Domain>resellerdocs.com</Domain>
- 473 -
<Path>\resellwebid</Path>
</DomainHeader>
<Command>GETDOMAINHEADER</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainHeader
l CreateHostAccount
l ListDomainHeaders
GetDomainInfo
Description
Definition
Get information about a single domain name.
Usage
Use this command to display current information about a single domain name. This com-
mand also retrieves the DomainNameID value, which is required by some other com-
mands in our API.
Availability
- 474 -

https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/DomainManager.asp
On the my domains page, clicking a link in the Domain Name column calls the GetDo-
mainInfo command.
Constraints
Input parameters



SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


- 475 -
DomainNameID ID number of this individual domain
Multy-LangSLD Is this a multi-language SLD?
Expiration Expiration date of this domain registration
Registrar Registrar of this domain
RegistrationStatus Registration status of this domain
Purchase-Status Purchase status of this domain
Party-ID Party ID of the account in which this domain is registered
Belongs-To Login ID of the account in which this domain is registered
EntryName Name of the product or service described in this node
Changable Can this service be changed?
Service Setting for the service. Permitted values are:
(which domain name servers):

1006 use our name servers
1012 use user-specified domain servers, including none
DNSSettings (host records):
1021 host records WSB (Web site services):
1060 no Web site building or hosting services
1063 Web Site Builder
1066 Web site hosting accounts
EmailSet (Email services):
DNSServer 1048 no email
1051 email forwarding (to a POP or WebMail address)
1054 user (mail server name required)
1105 user simplified (mail servers IP address required)
1114 POP3/WebMail plus email forwarding
WPPS (ID Protect Whois Privacy Protection):
1120 WhoIs information is masked
1123 WhoIs information is viewable
WBL (Business Listing):
1130 Business Listing settings
ServiceChangable Can this service be toggled on or off, or switched?
ConfigurationChangable Is this a configurable product or service?
WBLID Business Listing identification number
StatusID Status number of this Business Listing
- 476 -
StatusDescr Status ID of this Business Listing
ExpDate Expiration date of this Business Listing
Visibility status of this Business Listing in the WhoisBusi-

Enabled nessListings.com directory. 1 indicates Business Listing is vis-
ible; 0 indicates Business Listing is hidden.
Renew Automatic renewal setting of this Business Listing
CompanyName Company name for this Business Listing
CompanyDescription Description of company
DomainName Domain name to which this Business Listing is attached
Street Street address of this Business Listing
City City of this Business Listing
PostalCode Postal code of this Business Listing
Country Country of this Business Listing
CategoryIDX Category identification number(s) of this Business Listing
FieldName Name of descriptive field
Value Descriptive content associated with this field name
Name Name of this host record
Type Type of product, service, or host record
Address Host record address
MXPref Priority value of this host record

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 477 -
Notes
Example
The following query requests domain informationstatus and services for reseller-
docs.com, and requests the response in XML format:
Query
command=GetDomainInfo&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw

Output
<GetDomainInfo>
nameid="152533676">resellerdocs.com
</domainname>
<multy-langSLD>
</multy-langSLD>
<status>
<expiration>6/10/2019 3:56:56 PM</expiration>
<escrowliftdate/>
<escrowhold/>
<deletebydate>6/10/2019 3:56:56 PM</deletebydate>
<deletetype/>
<registrar>eNom, Inc.</registrar>
<registrationstatus>Registered</registrationstatus>
<purchase-status>Paid</purchase-status>
<belongs-to party-id="{BB4A2DE1-6485-45CB-A4FC-
EE39BA0C1629}">resellid</belongs-to>
- 478 -
</status>
<services>
<entry name="dnsserver">
<enomDNS value="YES" isDotName="NO"/>
<service changable="1">1006</service>
<configuration changable="0" type="dns">
</configuration>
</entry>
<entry name="dnssettings">
<configuration changable="1" type="host">
<host>
<name>@</name>
<type>A</type>
<address>66.150.5.189</address>
<mxpref>10</mxpref>
<iseditable>1</iseditable>
</host>
.
.
.
</configuration>
</entry>
<entry name="wsb">
<configuration changable="1" type="wsb">
<wsb>LWSC353x2587</wsb>
<siteid>1348</siteid>
<prodtype>86</prodtype>
<nextbilldate>Jun 27 2011 12:00AM</nextbilldate>
</configuration>
</entry>
<entry name="emailset">
<configuration changable="1" type="pop">
<pop>
- 479 -
<username>dell</username>
</pop>
.
.
.
</configuration>
</entry>
<entry name="wpps">
<configuration changable="1" type="id protect">
<wpps>
<cloak-
edemail>cmktwnrb@whoisprivacyprotect.com</cloakedemail>
<forward-to>john.doe@resellerdocs.com</forward-to>
<expiredate>Dec 22, 2011</expiredate>
<autorenew>No</autorenew>
</wpps>
</configuration>
</entry>
<entry name="wbl">
<wbl>
<wblid>1010</wblid>
<statusdescr>Configured</statusdescr>
<expdate>2012-11-13T14:25:57.460</expdate>
<enabled>1</enabled>
<renew>no</renew>
<companyname>My Super Company</companyname>
<companydescription>We make super cool stuff</-
companydescription>
<domainname>resellerdocs.com</domainname>
<street>123 Anywhere Street</street>
<street2>Suite 100</street2>
<city>Peoria</city>
<stateprovince>IL</stateprovince>
<postalcode>10001</postalcode>
<country>US</country>
<categoryid1>11</categoryid1>
<configuration>
- 480 -
<fields>
<field fieldname="Associations">
<value>My associations</value>
</field>
<field fieldname="Tags">
<value>My tags</value>
</field>
<field fieldname="Promotions">
<value>My Promotions</value>
</field>
</fields>
</configuration>
</wbl>
</entry>
.
.
.
</services>
</GetDomainInfo>
<Command>GETDOMAININFO</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l GetAllDomains
l GetDomainCount
l GetDomainExp
l GetDomains
- 481 -
l GetExpiredDomains
l GetExtendInfo
l GetPasswordBit
l GetRegLock
l GetRenew
l SetPassword
l SetRegLock
l SetRenew
l StatusDomain
l ValidatePassword
GetDomainNameID
Description
Definition
Retrieves the ID number for a domain.
Usage
In some API commands, you can use the domain name ID instead of the SLD and TLD.
Our database associates a unique ID with each domain name, and all activity in the data-
base is tracked by ID rather than by domain name.
Availability
Constraints
- 482 -
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


DomainRRP Processor identifier of the registrar which manages the domain
DomainNameID Identification number of this domain name

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 483 -
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the domain name ID for resellerdocs.com, and sends the
Query
command=getdomainnameid&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
The successful response returns the domain name ID:

Output
<SLD>resellerdocs</SLD>
<TLD>com</TLD>
<Command>GETDOMAINNAMEID</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
- 484 -
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l GetDomainSLDTLD
GetDomains
Description
Definition
Get a single page of domain names with the ability to load the next or previous page of
names.
Usage
Use this command to list a single page of domains in an account. GetAllDomains is our
older command for large accounts. GetAllDomains, a similar command, returns the com-
plete list of domain names in an account but can time out for accounts with more than
200 domain names. AdvancedDomainSearch is the most up-to-date command for
accounts of all sizes.
Availability
In the my enom section, the x domain names link calls the GetDomains command.
Constraints
- 485 -
Input parameters

The type of domains to return. Per-

mitted values are:
IOwn current names in this account
Sub_IOwn names in retail subaccounts
WatchList names in this accounts
watchlist
Optional; default is IHost DNS hosting names, this
Tab 10
IOwn account
ExpiringNames names nearing expir-
ation
ExpiredDomains expired but able to
renew
RGP RGP and Extended RGP names
Promotion names on promotional basis
Return names that expire with in this

Optional with Tab-
DaysToExpired number of days, whether they are set to 4
b=ExpiringNames
auto-renew or not
Optional with Tab- The type of domains to return for a sub-

RegStatus b=Sub_IOwn; account. Permitted values are 10
default is Registered Registered and Expired.
Number of domains to return in one

Display response. Permitted values are 0 to 4
25
100.
Return names that start with this num-

ber in the sorted list. For example, Dis-
Start Optional; default is 1 play=25&Start=26 returns the 26th 4
through 50th names from a numero-
alphabetically sorted list.
OrderBy Optional The order to return the results. Per- 15
- 486 -

mitted values are SLD, TLD, DNS, and
ExpirationDate.
StartLetter Optional Return names that start with this letter 1
If MultiLang=On, display SLD in native

MultiLang Optional 1
character set in UI.
Return names that match this name.

Domain Optional 60
Use format SLD.TLD
Returns XML tags without hyphens, to

more rigorously adhere to XML stand-
ards and allow more trouble-free per-
ExtFormat Optional 1
formance with automated parsers. Use
ExtFormat=1 to return tags without
hyphens.


Domain name ID. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or
DomainNameIDX
HTML.
Second-level domain name (for example, enom in enom.com).

SLDX
Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
Top-level domain name (extension). Indexed X when Respon-

TLDX
Name server status. YES indicates this domain uses our name
NS-StatusX
servers. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
Expiration date of the domain registration. Indexed X when

Expiration-DateX
ResponseType=Text or HTML.
Auto-renew setting. Return values are Yes or No. Indexed X

Auto-RenewX
when ResponseType= Text or HTML.
WhoIs privacy protection setting. Return values are Enabled or

WPPSStatusX
Disabled. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
RR processor. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or

RRProcessor
HTML.
- 487 -

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests a list of domains and basic information about them for
account resellid, and requests the response in XML format. This command returns 25
domains at a time. Because it does not specify which domain to start with, the response
by default starts with the first domain (sorting by domain name: numbers first, then let-
ters):
Query
command=GetDomains&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&ResponseType=XML
The response lists the first 25 domains in account resellid, starting with resellerdocs.com
and resellerdocs3.info. It also provides some summary information about the total con-
tents of the account:
Output
- 488 -
<GetDomains>
<tab/>
<multirrp>False</multirrp>
<domain-list type="Registered">
<domain>
<sld>00000000001111</sld>
<tld>com</tld>
<ns-status>YES</ns-status>
<expiration-date>7/7/2012</expiration-date>
<auto-renew>No</auto-renew>
<wppsstatus>disabled</wppsstatus>
</domain>
<domain>
<sld>00000startajay</sld>
<tld>info</tld>
<ns-status>NA</ns-status>
<auto-renew>No</auto-renew>
<wppsstatus>disabled</wppsstatus>
</domain>
.
.
.
</domain-list>
<EndPosition>25</EndPosition>
<PreviousRecords>0</PreviousRecords>
<NextRecords>26</NextRecords>
<OrderBy/>
<Result>True</Result>
<TotalDomainCount>3084</TotalDomainCount>
<StartLetter/>
</GetDomains>
<Command>GETDOMAINS</Command>
- 489 -
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l GetAllDomains
l GetDomainCount
l GetDomainExp
l GetDomainInfo
l GetExpiredDomains
l GetExtendInfo
l GetHomeDomainList
l GetPasswordBit
l GetRegLock
l GetRenew
l SetPassword
l SetRegLock
l SetRenew
l StatusDomain
l ValidatePassword
GetDomainServices
Description
Definition
Retrieve the settings for domain services and value-added services for a domain.
- 490 -
Usage
Use this command to retrieve information about email forwarding, URL forwarding, and
other domain and valueadd services for a domain.
Availability
On the domain control panel, change and configure buttons give access to current set-
tings and the ability to change value-add settings.
Constraints
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)

- 491 -

WebSite Web site setting
Phone Name-My-Phone setting
IPResolver Setting for resolving dynamic IP addresses
Map Name-My-Map setting
DomainNameID ID number for this domain, from our internal records
EMailForwarding Email forwarding setting for this domain
EmailForwardExpDate Expiration date for email forwarding
EMailAutoRenew Auto-renew setting for email forwarding
URLForwarding URL forwarding setting for this domain
URLForwardExpDate Expiration date for email forwarding
URLAutoRenew Auto-renew setting for email forwarding
EMailForwardingPrice Price for email forwarding
URLForwardingPrice Price for URL forwarding

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 492 -
Example
The following query retrieves the domain and value-add service settings for reseller-
Query
command=GetDomainServices&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&responsetype=xml&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com

Output
<domainservices>
<website>1</website>
<phone>false</phone>
<ipresolver>1</ipresolver>
<map>true</map>
<domainnameid>152533676</domainnameid>
<mobilizer>1117</mobilizer>
<mobilizersourcedomain/>
<valueadd>
<EmailForwarding>0</EmailForwarding>
<EmailForwardExpDate/>
<EmailAutoRenew/>
<URLForwarding>0</URLForwarding>
<URLForwardExpDate/>
<URLAutoRenew/>
<emailForwardingPrice>0.00</emailForwardingPrice>
<urlForwardingPrice>0.00</urlForwardingPrice>
</valueadd>
</domainservices>
<Command>GETDOMAINSERVICES</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
- 493 -
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>fa977e24-b1d0-4837-b145-9c26b5f96990</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l DisableServices
l EnableServices
l GetIPResolver
l ServiceSelect
l SetDomainSubServices
l SetIPResolver
GetDomainSLDTLD
Description
Definition
Retrieve the domain name (SLD and TLD).
Usage
Use this command when you have the domain name ID and want the domain name
(SLD and TLD).
Availability
- 494 -
Constraints
Input parameters

DomainNameID Required Domain name ID 11


DomainRRP Registrar ide ntifier
DomainNameID Domain name ID

ErrCount

ErrX
- 495 -
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the SLD and TLD for domain name ID 152533676 and
Query
command=getdomainsldtld&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&domainnameid=152533676&responsetype=xml

Output
<TLD>com</TLD>
<Command>GETDOMAINSLDTLD</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
- 496 -
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l GetDomainInfo
l GetDomainNameID
GetDomainSRVHosts
Description
Definition
Retrieve SRV host records for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of all SRV records for a domain name.
Availability
el/default.asp?DomainNameID=152533676#
The list of SRV records is populated by the GetDomainSRVHosts command.
Constraints
- 497 -

l The domain must use our DNS servers.
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


HostID Identification number for this SRV record, assigned by us
HostName Use name you have assigned to this SRV record
Protocol Internet protocol you have assigned for this SRV record
Fully qualified domain name you have assigned for this SRV
Address
record
RecordType Host record type for this recordshould always be SRV
MXPref MXPref value. Not used for SRV records
Weight you have assigned to this SRV record (for load bal-
Weight
ancing)
Priority Priority you have assigned to this SRV record (for backup serv-
- 498 -
ers)
Port Port you have assigned to this SRV record

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves SRV records and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=GETDOMAINSRVHOSTS&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw

Output
<srv-records>
<srv>
<HostID>18459357</HostID>
- 499 -
<HostName>_imap</HostName>
<Protocol>_TCP</Protocol>
<Address>imap.resellerdocs.com.</Address>
<RecordType>SRV</RecordType>
<mxPref>0</mxPref>
<Weight>50</Weight>
<priority>10</priority>
<Port>1</Port>
</srv>
<srv>
<HostID>18459358</HostID>
<HostName>_xmpp</HostName>
<Protocol>_UDP</Protocol>
<Address>xmpp.resellerdocs.com.</Address>
<RecordType>SRV</RecordType>
<mxPref>0</mxPref>
<Weight>50</Weight>
<priority>10</priority>
<Port>98</Port>
</srv>
</srv-records>
<Command>GETDOMAINSRVHOSTS</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l GetDomainInfo
l GetHosts
- 500 -
l SetDomainSRVHosts
l SetHosts
GetDomainStatus
Description
Definition
Check the registration status of TLDs that do not register in real time.
Usage
Use this command to check the status of domains that do not register in real time (includ-
ing .ca, .co.uk, .org.uk,and others). Because of the delay inherent in the non-real-time
registrations, wait at least five minutes after yourtransaction to run this command, and
run it at intervals of five minutes or longer. This command runs more quicklythan a sim-
ilar command, StatusDomain.
Use this command to retrieve the most recent order ID for a domain name.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters
- 501 -


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Order ID of the most recent transaction

OrderID Recommended 15
for this domain
Optional; default is Type of order. Permitted values are

OrderType 10
Purchase Purchase (default), Transfer, or Extend


Status of the domain in our database: 0 not in our database 1 in our database and in the
InAccount account cited in this query 2 in our database but in a different account than the one cited in
this query
StatusDesc More detailed explanation of the InAccount value
ExpDate Expiration date of the domain registration
OrderID Order identification number of the most recent transaction for this domain
ErrCount The number of errors if any occurred. If greater than 0 check the Err(1 to ErrCount) values.
ErrX Error messages explaining the failure. These can be presented as is back to the client.
Done True indicates this entire response has reached you successfully.
Notes
- 502 -
Example
The following query retrieves the status of domain resellerdocs.co.uk and sends the
Query
command=GETDOMAINSTATUS&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=net&orderID=156375934
&ordertype=purchase&responsetype=xml
In the response, the InAccount value 0 and the StatusDesc value Awaiting Registry
Response confirm that the order is currently being processed at the co.uk Registry:
Output
<DomainStatus>
<DomainName>resellerdocs.net</DomainName>
<InAccount>1</InAccount>
<ExpDate>10/25/2007 5:18:12 AM</ExpDate>
</DomainStatus>
<Command>GETDOMAINSTATUS</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
- 503 -
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l GetAllDomains
l GetDomainCount
l GetDomainExp
l GetDomainInfo
l GetDomains
l GetExtendInfo
l GetPasswordBit
l GetRegLock
l GetRenew
l SetPassword
l SetRegLock
l SetRenew
l StatusDomain
l ValidatePassword
GetDomainSubServices
Description
Definition
Get current settings for domain services (active or inactive).
Usage
Use this command to get which services are enabled to control whether to present the
user the ability to get or update information related to the service. (eg. Host or email for-
warding records). For some services, you can get more detailed information using the
GetDomainServices command.
Availability
- 504 -
Constraints
Input parameters
command=GetDomainSubServices&uid=yourloginid
&pw=yourpassword&sld=domain&tld=com


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


EmailForwarding True, False or empty
HostRecords True, False or empty
SetDomainServices Successful or Failed

ErrCount
- 505 -
ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query sets the subservices of a domain and sends the response in XML
format:
Query
command=GetDomainSubServices&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
The error count value of 0 confirms that hosts have been set successfully:
Output
<DomainServices>
<EmailForwarding>True</EmailForwarding>
<HostRecords>True</HostRecords>
</DomainServices>
<Command>GETDOMAINSUBSERVICES</Command>
- 506 -
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l GetIPResolver
l ServiceSelect
l SetDomainSubServices
l SetIPResolver
GetDotNameForwarding
Description
Definition
Retrieve the current address for email forwarding by the .name Registry.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the email forwarding address used by the .name Registry
for forwarding email addressed to this domain.
Availability
On the domain names menu, click my domains, and then click a .name domain.
- 507 -
In the email settings box of the domain control panel, the .name email button calls the
GetDotNameForwarding command.
Constraints
l The domain must be a .name domain.
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Top-level domain. For this command,

TLD Required 15
value must be name.


DomainNameID Domain name ID, eNoms internal accounting number
TLD Top-level domain. For this command, value is name.
- 508 -
Status Status
Email address to which email addressed to this domain is for-

Address
warded.
The number of errors if any occurred. If greater than 0 check the Err
ErrCount
(1 to ErrCount) values.
Error messages explaining the failure. These can be presented as

ErrX
is back to the client.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the email forwarding address for john.doe.name and sends
Query
command=getdotnameforwarding&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=john.doe&tld=name&responsetype=xml

Output

- 509 -
<dotnameforwarding>
<domainname domainnameid="157171163" sld="john.doe" tld-
d="name" />
<status>1</status>
<address>john.doe@resellerdocs.com</address>
</dotnameforwarding>
<Command>GETDOTNAMEFORWARDING</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l Forwarding
l GetCatchAll
l GetForwarding
l GetPOP3
l SetCatchAll
GetExpiredDomains
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of an accounts domains that are in Expired, Redemption Grace Period
(RGP), and Extended RGP status.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of Expired, RGP, and Extended RGP names in the
account specified in the query string. Typically, a reseller will use this information to
- 510 -
determine which command to use to reactivate a domain, and what price they will
charge.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/DomainManager.asp?tab=iown
Clicking the expired or redemption tabs call the GetExpiredDomains command.
Constraints
Input parameters



- 511 -
DomainNameID Domain name ID number, from our database
Status Expiration status of this domain
Expiration-Date Expiration date of this domain
LockStatus Registrar lock status of this domain

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes Notes
l Check the return paramet If greater than 0 the transaction failed. The parameter Err
(ErrCount) can be presented to the client. Otherwise process the returned para-
meters as defined above. ters as defined above.
Example
The following query retrieves the expired domains in account resellid; identifies them as
Expired, RGP, or Extended RGP status; and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=getexpireddomains&uid=resellid

Output
- 512 -

<DomainDetail>
<DomainName>northwestcrafts.com</DomainName>
<status>Extended RGP</status>
</DomainDetail>
<DomainDetail>
<DomainName>fabrics-wallpaper.com</DomainName>
<status>RGP</status>
</DomainDetail>
<DomainDetail>
<DomainName>onlinebrochure.com</DomainName>
<status>RGP</status>
<expiration-date>6/4/2002 6:18:36 PM</expiration-date>
</DomainDetail>
<DomainDetail>
<DomainName>eweathervane.com</DomainName>
<status>Expired</status>
</DomainDetail>
<DomainDetail>
<DomainName>signonworldwide.com</DomainName>
</DomainDetail>
<DomainDetail>
<DomainName>Youcanhelp.net</DomainName>
- 513 -
</DomainDetail>
<DomainDetail>
<DomainName>ccpays.com</DomainName>
<status>Extended RGP</status>
</DomainDetail>
.
.
.
<domaincount>120</domaincount>
<Command>GETEXPIREDDOMAINS</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddToCart
l Extend_RGP
l GetDomainInfo
l GetDomains
l PE_SetPricing
l Purchase
- 514 -
GetExtAttributes
Description
Definition
This command retrieves the extended attributes for a country code TLD (required para-
meters specific to the country code).
Usage
Use this command to determine whether a country code TLD requires extended attrib-
utes, and what they are.
Extended attributes supplied by this command are used in the Preconfigure command to
configure some TLDs.
Input parameter names for the Preconfigure command are tagged <Name> in the return
of this command, and permitted values for the Preconfigure command are tagged
<Value> in the return for this command.
Availability
Constraints
l The country code TLD must be valid.
Input parameters
- 515 -



ID ID number for our internal use
Parameter name. Use this as the input parameter name in the

Name
Preconfigure command.
Parameter value for the query string. Use this as the input para-
Value
meter value in the Preconfigure command.
Title Short definition of the parameter value
Application Application. 2 indicates Registrant contact.
User must supply the value for this parameter from outside
UserDefined
sources
Obligation of this parameter. 0 indicates optional, 1 indicates

required, 2 indicates a child attribute/parameter that is require d
Required
for some values of the parent. Values that require the child are
indicated in the <Required> node of the parent.
Description Extended definition of the parameter value
If IsChild=1, this parameter is the child of another extended

IsChild
attribute.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 516 -
Notes
l Check the return parameter ter ErrCount. Err(ErrCount) can be presented to the cli-
ent. Otherwise process the returned parameters as defined above.
Example
The following query requests the extended attributes for the .us TLD and requests the
Query
command=getextattributes&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&tld=us&responsetype=xml
The response indicates that the entended attributes for .us are us_nexus, global_cc_us,
and us_purpose. In the Preconfigure command, these parameters would be input, for
example, as us_nexus=C11&us_purpose=P2:=P2:
Output

<Attributes>
<Attribute>
<ID>1</ID>
<Name>us_nexus</Name>
<Description>Nexus Category</Description>
<Options>
<Option>
<ID>12</ID>
<Value>C11</Value>
<Title>US Citizen</Title>
- 517 -
<Description>A natural person who is a US Cit-

izen</Description>
</Option>
<Option>
<ID>13</ID>
<Value>C12</Value>
<Title>Permanent Resident</Title>
<Description>A natural person who is a Permanent Res-
ident</Description>
</Option>
.
.
.
</Options>
</Attribute>
<Attribute>
<ID>4</ID>
<Name>global_cc_us</Name>
<Description>Country</Description>
<Options />
</Attribute>
<Attribute>
<ID>2</ID>
<Name>us_purpose</Name>
<Description>Application Purpose</Description>
<Options>
<Option>
<ID>17</ID>
<Value>P1</Value>
<Title>For Profit</Title>
<Description>Business use for profit</Description>
</Option>
<Option>
<ID>18</ID>
- 518 -
<Value>P2</Value>
<Title>Non-profit</Title>
<Description>
Non-profit business, club, association, religious organ-
ization, etc.
</Description>
</Option>
.
.
.
</Options>
</Attribute>
</Attributes>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA [ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddContact
l Contacts
l GetAddressBook
l GetContacts
l GetWhoisContact
l Preconfigure
GetExtendInfo
Description
Definition
Get extension (renewal) information.
- 519 -
Usage
Use this command to display information about the expiration date of a domain name.
Availability
On the domain control panel page, the add years button calls the GetExtendInfo com-
mand.
Constraints
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)

- 520 -

The enabled status of a domain. If RegistrarHold is True, the
RegistrarHold
domain is disabled.
Expiration Current expiration date.
MaxExtension Maximum # of years that can be added.
CCAuthorized Credit card transaction successfully authorized.
Price Price for one-year extension for this type of TLD.
Balance Current balance in this account.
AvailableBalance Available balance in this account.
Account-level setting for default renewal period for domain

DefPeriod
name registrations
Account-level settingTrue allows domain name servers other

AllowDNS
than eNoms
ShowPopups Account-level settingTrue shows popup menus
Account-level settingTrue automatically renews the domain

AutoRenew
registration 30 days before it expires
Account-level settingTrue requires the account holders per-

RegLock
missiont to transfer the domain to another registrar
Account-level settingTrue automatically renews POP paks

AutoPakRenew
30 days before they expire
UseDNS Account-level settingTrue uses eNoms name servers
ResellerStatus Account-level settingReseller status of this account
Account-level setting 0 Send no renewal reminder when

domain expiration approaches 1 Send renewal reminder by
RenewalSetting
email 2 Contact customer, renew registration, and charge
account
Account-level setting 1 Send blind carbon copy of renewal

RenewalBCC
email to reseller 0 Do not send blind carbon copy to reseller
Account-level settingTrue automatically renews URL for-

RenewalURLForward
warding 30 days before the subscription expires
Account-level settingTrue automatically renews email for-

RenewalEmailForward
- 521 -
Account-level settingTrue automatically renews email for-
MailNumLimit
Account-level settingTrue automatically renews ID Protect

IDProtect
30 days before the subscription expires
Account-level settingTrue automatically renews ID Protect

DefIDProtectRenew
30 days before the subscription expires
HostNameX Account-level settingName of default host record
AddressX Account-level settingDefault host record address
RecordTypeX Account-level settingDefault host record type
Indicates whether this domain is associated with a Web Host-

DefaultHostRecordOwn
ing account
Account-level settingBy default, does this account assign

DefaultHostRecordOwn
user-defined host records?
Account-level settingBy default, does this account assign our

UseOurDNS
DNS to domain names?
DNSX Account-level settingDefault name servers
True has signed a credit card processing agreement with

AcceptTerms
eNom
URL URL for reseller site, used in email notices

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 522 -
Example
The following query requests renewal information for resellerdocs.com and requests the
Query
command=getextendinfo&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw

Output
<RegistrarHold>False</RegistrarHold>
<Expiration>6/10/2019</Expiration>
<MaxExtension>2</MaxExtension>
<MinAllowed>1</MinAllowed>
<CCAuthorized>True</CCAuthorized>
<Price>8.95</Price>
<Balance>2,491.60</Balance>
<AvailableBalance>2,106.75</AvailableBalance>
<CustomerPrefs>
<DefPeriod>1</DefPeriod>
<AllowDNS>False</AllowDNS>
<ShowPopups>False</ShowPopups>
<RegLock>False</RegLock>
<AutoPakRenew>False</AutoPakRenew>
<UseDNS>True</UseDNS>
<ResellerStatus/>
<RenewalSetting>1</RenewalSetting>
<RenewalBCC>1</RenewalBCC>
<RenewalURLForward>False</RenewalURLForward>
<RenewalEmailForward>False</RenewalEmailForward>
<MailNumLimit>100</MailNumLimit>
<IDProtect>False</IDProtect>
<DefIDProtectRenew>False</DefIDProtectRenew>
<DefWBLRenew>False</DefWBLRenew>
- 523 -
<NameJetSales>False</NameJetSales>
<defaulthostrecords>
<hostrecord hostname="@" address="69.25.142.5" record-
type="A"/>
<hostrecord hostname="*" address="69.25.142.5" record-
type="A"/>
<hostrecord hostname="www" address="69.25.142.5" record-
type="A"/>
</defaulthostrecords>
<UseOurDNS>False</UseOurDNS>
<NameServers>
</NameServers>
</CustomerPrefs>
<CustomerInformation>
<URL/>
<ParentLogin>Main-eNom</ParentLogin>
<BulkRegLimit>100</BulkRegLimit>
</CustomerInformation>
<RRPText/>
<Command>GETEXTENDINFO</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
- 524 -
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l Extend
l GetAllDomains
l GetDomainCount
l GetDomainExp
l GetDomainInfo
l GetDomains
l GetPasswordBit
l GetRegLock
l GetRenew
l InsertNewOrder
l SetPassword
l SetRegLock
l SetRenew
l StatusDomain
l ValidatePassword
GetFilePermissions
Description
Definition
Retrieves write permissions for a Web hosting folder.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve write permissions for a Web hosting folder.
Availability
- 525 -
Log on to webhostingtest.ehost-services.com with Login ID resellid, password resellpw.

http://webhostingtest.ehost-services.com/websites/advanced.asp?Path=/acct
The Write access allowed check box indicates the return value for the GetFilePer-
missions command.
Constraints
l The root directory always has write permission.
Input parameters

Name of the directory to retrieve write per-

mission on. Use format Dir-
initial slash.

- 526 -

Write permission on this directory. Value F indicates that write
Permission
permission is on; R indicates that write permission is off.

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the write access permissions for directory testdir and
Query
command=getfilepermissions&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&hostaccount=resellwebid&directory=testdir&
responsetype=xml
In the response, the Successful value True confirms that the query was successful. In
this example the Permission value R indicates that write permission is currently off for dir-
ectory testdir:
Output
- 527 -

<Permissions>
<Permission>R</Permission>
</Permissions>
<Command>GETFILEPERMISSIONS</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainHeader
l AddHostHeader
l CreateHostAccount
l DisableFolderApp
l EnableFolderApp
l IsFolderEnabled
l ListWebFiles
l MetaBaseGetValue
l MetaBaseSetValue
GetForwarding
Description
Definition
Get email forwarding records for a domain name.
- 528 -
Usage
Use this command to display email forwarding records for a domain name.
A similar command, GetPOPForwarding, displays both email forwarding and POP
records for a single email address.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/DomainDetail.asp?domainnameid=152533676
On the domain control panel, if the e-mail settings service is set to e-mail forwarding, the
configure button calls the GetForwarding command.
Constraints
l The domain must use eNoms domain name servers.
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
- 529 -

If this is set to 1, extra blank input
records are returned for user input on the
email forwarding form. Primarily used in
XML output.

are Text (default), HTML, or XML

Alias name to forward. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text
UserNameX
or HTML.
Alias Alias name to forward. Present when ResponseType=XML
Email address to forward the alias to. Indexed X when Respon-

ForwardToX
Email address to forward the alias to. Present when Respon-

Forward-To
seType=XML
Enabled status of email forwarding: 0 Email forwarding enabled

StatusX 1 Email forwarding disabled Indexed X when Respon-
EmailCount Number of email forwarding records currently configured
Total number of email forwarding records permitted for this

MaxEmail
domain name
EmailForwarding True
HostRecords True

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 530 -
Notes
Example
The following query requests e-mail forwarding information for resellerdocs.com and
Query
command=getforwarding&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw

Output
<eforward>
<alias>john.doe</alias>
<forward-to>john.doe@example.com</forward-to>
<status>0</status>
<rejectreason/>
<mailid>3370493</mailid>
</eforward>
<EmailCount>1</EmailCount>
<MaxEmail>100</MaxEmail>
<DomainServices>
</DomainServices>
<Command>GETFORWARDING</Command>
- 531 -
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l DeleteAllPOPPaks
l DeletePOP3
l DeletePOPPak
l Forwarding
l GetCatchAll
l GetMailHosts
l GetPOP3
l ModifyPOP3
l PurchasePOPBundle
l SetUpPOP3User
GetGlobalChangeStatus
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of IDs for instances in which a global edit command was run on this
account.
Usage
- 532 -
Use this command to retrieve RequestID values for global edits performed on domains
in this account. Commonly, you will run this command to get a RequestID in order to run
the GetGlobalChangeStatusDetail command.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/globaledit.asp
The Click here to view the status and history of your previous global edits link calls the
GetGlobalChangeStatus command.
Constraints
Input parameters


- 533 -

RequestID ID number of the request for the change described in this node
ReqDate Time-stamp for this request
ReqTypeDesc Description of the requested change
ReqStatusDesc Status of the requested change

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query Retrieves the global changes that have been requested in account
resellid and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=GetGlobalChangeStatus&UID=resellid
&PW=resellpw&ResponseType=XML

Output
- 534 -
<GetGlobalChangeStatus>
<GlobalStatusInfo>
<RequestID>11016</RequestID>
<ReqDate>11/10/2008 12:47:03 PM</ReqDate>
<ReqTypeDesc>Custom DNS changes</ReqTypeDesc>
<ReqStatusDesc>Complete</ReqStatusDesc>
</GlobalStatusInfo>
<GlobalStatusInfo>
<ReqDate>3/7/2008 9:00:07 AM</ReqDate>
</GlobalStatusInfo>
<GlobalStatusInfo>
</GlobalStatusInfo>
<GlobalStatusInfo>
</GlobalStatusInfo>
<GlobalStatusInfo>
</GlobalStatusInfo>
<GlobalStatusInfo>
<ReqTypeDesc>Registrar-lock off</ReqTypeDesc>
</GlobalStatusInfo>
<GlobalStatusInfo>
- 535 -
</GlobalStatusInfo>
<GlobalStatusInfo>
</GlobalStatusInfo>
<GlobalStatusInfo>
</GlobalStatusInfo>
<GlobalStatusInfo>
<ReqTypeDesc>Registrar-lock on</ReqTypeDesc>
</GlobalStatusInfo>
<GlobalStatusInfo>
</GlobalStatusInfo>
<GlobalStatusInfo>
<ReqTypeDesc>Auto renew on</ReqTypeDesc>
</GlobalStatusInfo>
<GlobalStatusInfo>
</GlobalStatusInfo>
<GlobalStatusInfo>
<ReqTypeDesc>Auto renew on</ReqTypeDesc>
- 536 -
</GlobalStatusInfo>
<GlobalStatusInfo>
<ReqTypeDesc>Contact changes</ReqTypeDesc>
</GlobalStatusInfo>
<GlobalStatusInfo>
</GlobalStatusInfo>
</GetGlobalChangeStatus>
<Command>GETGLOBALCHANGESTATUS</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l GetGlobalChangeStatusDetail
GetGlobalChangeStatusDetail
Description
Definition
- 537 -
Retrieve a list of the domains affected by the specified global update, and the success
status for each.
Usage
Use this command to check the success of global changes.
Availability
http://www.enom.com/domains/globalaccountstatus.asp
Clicking any of the RequestID links calls the GetGlobalChangeStatusDetail command.
Constraints
l The ResponseID must match a global update that was performed in this account.
Input parameters

ID number for the global change to one

parameter. Use the GetG-
RequestID Required 6
lobalChangeStatus command to retrieve
this value.
- 538 -


StatusDesc Status of this change to this domain
ErrorDesc Description of any error encountered during this change

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the status for each domain affected by global change
RequestID=8331 and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=GetGlobalChangeStatusDetail&UID=resellid
- 539 -
&PW=resellpw&RequestID=8331&ResponseType=XML

Output
<GetGlobalChangeStatusDetail>
<GlobalStatusDetail>
<DomainName>enomretailcart070103.biz</DomainName>
<StatusDesc>Processed successfully</StatusDesc>
<ErrorDesc>none</ErrorDesc>
</GlobalStatusDetail>
<DomainName>enomretailcart070103.com</DomainName>
<DomainName>enomretailcart070803.biz</DomainName>
<DomainName>enomretailcart071703.us</DomainName>
</GetGlobalChangeStatusDetail>
<Command>GETGLOBALCHANGESTATUSDETAIL</Command>
- 540 -
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l GetGlobalChangeStatus
GetHomeDomainList
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of registered and hosted domains in this account that use our domain
name servers.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of registered and hosted domains in this account that
use our domain name servers.
A typical use of this command is to retrieve domains that are eligible to use our DNS-
dependent services.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/websitecreator/wscsignup.asp
- 541 -
For accounts with 25 or fewer domain names that use our DNS, the Select a domain text
box is a dropdown menu populated by the GetHomeDomainList command.
Constraints
Input parameters

Return domain names beginning with this

Optional; default is number. For example, if StartPos-
StartPosition 5
1 ition=26&Display=25, display names 26
through 50 in the ordered list.
Optional; default is How many domain names to include in

Display 100
25 response. Permitted values are 1 to 100.
Sort the response by this criterion. Per-

OrderBy mitted values are SLD, TLD, or 9
SLD
RegStatus.


ID Our numeric ID number for this domain
- 542 -
Name Domain name
RegStatus Registration status

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of domains in this account that use our DNS servers,
sorted by TLD, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=GETHOMEDOMAINLIST&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&display=25&orderby=tld&responsetype=xml

Output
<GetHomeDomains>
<StartPosition/>
- 543 -
<Display>25</Display>
<OrderBy>tld</OrderBy>
<NewStartPosition>26</NewStartPosition>
<TotalDomains>3274</TotalDomains>
<Domains>
<Domain>
<ID>152926976</ID>
<Name>vras.ac</Name>
<RegStatus>Registered</RegStatus>
</Domain>
<Domain>
<ID>152926784</ID>
<Name>fert.am</Name>
<RegStatus>Registered</RegStatus>
</Domain>
.
.
.
</Domains>
</GetHomeDomains>
<Command>GETHOMEDOMAINLIST</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l AddToCart
l GetAllDomains
- 544 -
l GetDomains
l GetReport
l PurchaseServices
GetHostAccount
Description
Definition
Retrieve account and usage information about a Web hosting account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve account information, limits, and this months usage-to-date
information for a Web hosting account.
To retrieve day-by-day usage information, use the WebHostGetStats command.
To retrieve bandwidth overage information for end-of-month account reconciliation, use
the
GetAccountOverages command.
Availability
Links in the Login Name column call the GetHostAccount command.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 545 -

Name of Web hosting account. You can

HostAccount Required retrieve Web hosting account names 14
using GetAllHostAccounts


WebHostID Web hosting package ID number from our internal records
HostAccount Web hosting account name
Password Web hosting account password
Operating system of the computer in our data center that runs

OSType
this account
The type of database support currently associated with this

DatabaseType
Web hosting account
The bandwidth currently available to this Web hosting account

BandwidthGB
per billing cycle, in GB
The bandwidth currently used by this Web hosting account, in

BandwidthUsedGB
GB
Web storage space available to this Web hosting account, in

WebStorageMB
MB
Web storage space currently used by this Web hosting

WebStorageUsedMB
account, in MB
Database storage space available to this Web hosting

DBStorageMB
account, in MB
Database storage space currently used by this Web hosting

DBStorageUsedMB
account, in MB
- 546 -
POPMailBoxes POP mail boxes allocated to this domain name
POPMailBoxCount POP mail boxes currently used by this domain name
OptionID Current setting for how to handle bandwidth overages
BillingDate Account creation date for bookkeeping purposes
Status Status of this Web hosting account
Price Subscription rate for this Web hosting account, per billing cycle
Number of domain headers defined for this Web hosting

DomainHeaderCount
account
SQLTableCount Number of SQL tables defined for this Web hosting account

Terminate

TerminateDate
has been set
Percentage of this months bandwidth allocation that has been

PercentBandwidthUsed
used.
HasDisabledWSCAccount Has this WebSite Creator account been disabled?

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 547 -
Example
The following query requests information on Web hosting account resellwebid and
Query
command=GETHOSTACCOUNT&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&HostAccount=resellwebid&responsetype=xml

Output

<HostAccount>
<HostPackage>
<Password>resellwebpw</Password>
<BandwidthGB>20</BandwidthGB>
<BandwidthUsedGB>0</BandwidthUsedGB>
<WebStorageMB>1000</WebStorageMB>
<WebStorageUsedMB>0</WebStorageUsedMB>
<DBStorageMB>500</DBStorageMB>
<DBStorageUsedMB>0</DBStorageUsedMB>
<POPMailBoxCount>0</POPMailBoxCount>
<OptionID>1</OptionID>
<Price>4.00</Price>
</HostPackage>
</HostAccount>
<Command>GETHOSTACCOUNT</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
- 548 -
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
GetHostAccounts
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of all Web hosting accounts in a domain name account, with attributes.
Usage
Use this command to list Web hosting accounts and their current configurations.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/wsg/
In the left-hand menu, the manage link calls the GetHostAccounts command.
Constraints
- 549 -
Input parameters



WebHostIDX Responses in Text format ID number of the Web hosting account, from our internal
are numbered, X=1 to PackageCount records
HostAccountX Name of the Web hosting account, assigned by the user
WebStorageX Amount of Web storage available to this Web hosting account
BandWidthX Amount of bandwidth available to this Web hosting account
Amount of SQL database storage available to this Web hosting

SQLSizeX
account
DatabaseTypeX Type of database, chosen by the user
Number of POP mailboxes available to this Web hosting

POPMailBoxesX
account
OverageX Overage handling method, chosen by the user
BillingDateX Next billing date for this Web hosting account
StatusX Status of this Web hosting account
Operating system of the Web server for this Web hosting

OSTypeX
account

TerminateX
- 550 -
Date on which this Web hosting account will be deleted, if Ter-
TerminateDateX
minate=True
PackageCount Number of Web hosting accounts in this domain name account
Language Language of response messages

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following queThe following query retrieves a list of the Web hosting accounts in
domain name account resellid and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=GETHOSTACCOUNTS&uid=resellid&pw=ruid=resellid
In the response, the list of Web hosting account names and properties, and the Web host-
ing PackageCount, indicate that the query was successful:
Output
- 551 -
<?xml version="1.0" ?>esponse>

<HostAccounts>
<HostPackage>
<HostAccount>A31027</HostAccount>
<Overage>upgrade</Overage>
<Terminate>False</Terminate>
<TerminateDate />
</HostPackage>
.
.
.
<HostPackage>
<Overage>upgrade</Overage>
<TerminateDate />
</HostPackage>
</HostAccounts>
<Command>GETHOSTACCOUNTS</Command>
- 552 -
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
l GetHostAccount
GetHostHeader
Description
Definition
List attributes of a host header (pointer for a third-level domain name) in your Web host-
ing account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve information about a host header in your Web hosting
account.
Availability
Constraints
- 553 -

l The domain header must exist.
Input parameters

Name of the Web hosting account that

HostAccount Required contains the host header you are inquir- 14
ing about

SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Host header (third-level domain name)

HostName Required 53
that you want information about


Host header (third-level domain name) that the software looked
HostName
for
Path Directory path to the host header
HostHeaderID Host header ID number, our internal record
Successful Successful completion status of the query
HostHeaderFound Return status of the host header; whether the software found
- 554 -
the host header

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l The default response format is plain text. To receive the response in HTML or XML-
Example
The following query asks whether there is a host header accountspayable under domain
header resellerdocs.com and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=gethostheader&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&hostaccount=resellwebid&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com
&hostname=accountspayable&responsetype=xml
In the response, a return value of True for the HostHeaderFound parameter indicates
that the specified host header exists:
Output

- 555 -
<HostHeader>
<HostName>accountspayable</HostName>
<Path>/accounts</Path>
<HostHeaderID>457</HostHeaderID>
<HostHeaderFound>True</HostHeaderFound>
</HostHeader>
<Command>GETHOSTHEADER</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainHeader
l AddHostHeader
l CreateHostAccount
l DeleteHostHeader
l GetHostAccount
l ListHostHeaders
GetHosts
Description
Definition
Get host records for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to return all host records. GetRegHosts, a similar command, does not
return mail host records.
- 556 -
Availability
On the domain control panel, the DNS settings (zone file) box retrieves its information
using the GetHosts command. Clicking the configure button brings up the GetHosts com-
mand in editable form.
Constraints
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)

- 557 -

Name Host name of record.
Record Type. Returns A, AAAA, URL, MX, MXE, CNAME or

Type
FRAME.
Preference level: the lower this value, the higher priority this
MXPref
service. Default value is 10.
Address. Can be an IP for record types A, MXE and FRAME

only. Record type AAAA accepts an IP address in IPv6 format.
Address Record types URL and FRAME can be a full URL. Record
types MX, URL, FRAME and CNAME can be a fully qualified
domain name.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests all host records, including mail hosts, and sends the
Query
- 558 -
command=gethosts&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
The response lists the hosts:

Output
<host>
<name>@</name>
<type>A</type>
<hostid>18149735</hostid>
</host>
<host>
<name>photos</name>
<type>CNAME</type>
<address>photos.msn.com.</address>
</host>
<host>
<name>yahoo</name>
<type>URL</type>
</host>
<host>
<name>msn</name>
<type>FRAME</type>
<address>http://www.msn.com</address>
</host>
<host>
<name>mail</name>
<type>MXE</type>
<mxpref>10</mxpref>
</host>
<DomainServices>
- 559 -
</DomainServices>
<Command>GETHOSTS</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l GetMetaTag
l GetRegHosts
l GetSPFHosts
l SetDNSHost
l SetHosts
l SetSPFHosts
l UpdateMetaTag
GetIDNCodes
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of language codes currently supported for a TLD.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of language codes currently supported for a TLD.
Availability
- 560 -
Log on to resellertest.enom.comwith Login ID resellid, password resellpw.
Go to: https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/PreConfigure.asp
With a configurable domain in the cart, click the configure button below the list of cart
contents.
Constraints
Input parameters

TLD Required Top-level domain name 15


Language Language name and code value

ErrCount
the Err(1 to ErrCount) values
- 561 -
ErrX
as is back to the client

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves list of language codes currently supported for a TLD, and
requests the response in XML format.
Query
Command=GetIDNCodes&UID=ResellID
&PW=resellpw&ResponseType=XML&TLD=com
Output

<tlds>
<tld tld="com">
<language code="afr" name="Afrikaans" />
<language code="alb" name="Albanian" />
<language code="ara" name="Arabic" />
<language code="arg" name="Aragonese" />
........<cut> ........
<language code="wel" name="Welsh" />
<language code="yid" name="Yiddish" />
</tld>
- 562 -
</tlds>
<Command>GETIDNCODES</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
<debug />
Related commands
l Purchase
l Preconfigure
GetIPResolver
Description
Definition
Get IP Resolver settings.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the NameMyComputer settings for a domain name.
Availability
- 563 -

On the domain control panel page, the GetIPResolver command provides the content of
the name my computer box.
Constraints
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


IP-Resolver-ID Currently 1240 for ICQ.
Host-Name Host name for the service.
- 564 -
Client-Service Currently only service type 1 for ICQ.
Client-User-ID Client ID (ICQ #).
ID Option ID for the client service.
Name Currently returns only ICQ.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests IP resolver information for the domain resellerdocs.com,
Query
command=getipresolver&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
The response indicates that the IP resolver host name is home, and the client user ID is
12345678:
Output
- 565 -
<GetIPResolver>
<domainname sld="resellerdocs" tld="com" id="152533676">r-
resellerdocs.com</domainname>
<configuration>
<ipresolver>
<ip-resolver-id>1243</ip-resolver-id>
<host-name>home</host-name>
<client-service>1</client-service>
<client-user-id>12345678</client-user-id>
</ipresolver>
</configuration>
<options>
<clients>
<client>
<id>1</id>
<name>ICQ</name>
<short-name>icq</short-name>
<description>ICQ</description>
</client>
</clients>
</options>
</GetIPResolver>
<Command>GETIPRESOLVER</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
- 566 -
Related commands
l ServiceSelect
l SetIPResolver
GetMailHosts
Description
Definition
Get mail hosts (DNS information) only.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the mail records associated with a domain name.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters
- 567 -


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


Host name. For theHost name. For the GetMailHosts com-
HostNameX
mand, this is mail.sld.tld
Record type. Permitted values are MXE (email forwarding) or

RecordTypeX
MX (POP3 mail).
AddressX IP address of eNoms mail forwarding service.
Preference level: the lower this value, the higher priority this
MXPrefX
service. Default value is 10.
The identification number of the email service for this domain.

1048 no email
1051 email forwarding ("easy" mail)
ServiceSelect
1054 user configured
1105 user simplified
1114 enable POP Mail

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 568 -
Notes
Example
The following query requests the mail host information for the domain resellerdocs.com,
Query
command=getmailhosts&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw

Output
<mailhosts>
<EmailForwarding>False</EmailForwarding>
<host>
<hostID/>
<HostName>@ (none)</HostName>
<RecordType>MX</RecordType>
<Address/>
<MXPref>10</MXPref>
</host>
<host>
<hostID/>
<HostName/>
<Address/>
<MXPref>10</MXPref>
</host>
<host>
- 569 -
<hostID/>
<HostName/>
<Address/>
<MXPref>10</MXPref>
</host>
<host>
<hostID/>
<HostName/>
<Address/>
<MXPref>10</MXPref>
</host>
<host>
<hostID/>
<HostName>* (other)</HostName>
<Address/>
<MXPref>10</MXPref>
</host>
<LastNum-
berFromRegHostCounter>10</LastNumberFromRegHostCounter>
<MailHostCount>15</MailHostCount>
</mailhosts>
<ServiceSelect/>
<Command>GETMAILHOSTS</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
- 570 -
Related commands
l DeleteAllPOPPaks
l DeletePOP3
l DeletePOPPak
l Forwarding
l GetForwarding
l GetPOP3
l ModifyPOP3
l PurchasePOPBundle
l SetUpPOP3User
GetMetaTag
Description
Definition
Retrieve the metatags for one of a domains host records.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the current metatags for one host record for a domain.
Availability
Log on to resellertest.enom.com with login ID resellid, password resellpw.
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/HostConfig.asp?DomainNameID=152533676
After you assign to a host record a record type of URL Frame, then click save changes,
then in the DNS Settings (zone file) section click configure, the edit link calls the
GetMetaTag command.
Constraints
- 571 -
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Host record ID for this host record for this

domain; our internal tracking number.
MetaTagHostID Required 8
You can retrieve all host IDs for a domain
using the GetRegHosts command.


TitleBar Metatag content for browser title bar
SiteDescription Metatag content for search engine results
Keywords Metatag content for search engine keywords
DomainNameID ID number for this domain, our internal tracking number

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 572 -
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the HTML metatag contents for the specified host record,
Query
command=getmetatag&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&MetaTagHostID=11415002
&ResponseType=XML

Output

<metatags>
<titlebar>MY COOL TITLE</titlebar>
<sitedescription>MY SITE DESCRIPTION</sitedescription>
<keywords>MY SITE KEYWORDS</keywords>
</metatags>
<Command>GETMETATAG</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
- 573 -
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l GetHosts
l GetRegHosts
l SetHosts
l UpdateMetaTag
GetNameSuggestions
Description
Definition
Generate variations of a domain name based on a search term.
Usage
Use this command to generate variations of the domain name you specify. This com-
mand will return a list of domains across a variety of sld/tld combinations.
Availability
http://resellertest.enom.com/domainsearch/search-results.aspx
Type an SLD into the Register A New Domain box and click GO. The results in the
Related section are generated by the GetNameSuggestions command.
Constraints
l A search term must be passed in.
- 574 -
Input parameters
Max
Size
The term to use to generate suggestions, most

SearchTerm Required 32
commonly use is SLD
A coma seperated list of TLDs to generate results

on. Only TLDs included in this list will be included
TldList in the results. When used with AllGA it will also ?
all TLDs
include additional TLDs you specify, such as
some in pre-register status if desired.
A coma seperated list of TLDs to generate results

OnlyTldList on. Only TLDs included in this list will be included ?
blank
in the results, even if AllGA is true.
Optional; default is TLDs A coma seperated list of TLDs to exclude

ExclueTldList ?
no from the results.
Maximum number of suggested names to return

Optional; default is in addition to your input. The number actually
MaxResults 2
50 returned may be lower based on search term. Per-
mitted values are numbers 1 through 100
Determine the type of results you will get;

0 - Both TLD and Spun recommendations - com-
bination of 1 & 2
1 - Only TLD recommendations (exact SLD
SpinType match) - no suggestions 5
0
2 - Only Spun recommendations - only sug-
gestions
3 - Will allow suggestions such as domaintld to be
treated as domain.tld suggestions
Optional; default is Allow domain names that may be considered

Adult 5
False "adult" in nature. Permitted values are True or
- 575 -
Max
Size
False.
Allow suggestions that are considered to be

Premium "premium" to be returned in the result set. Per- 5
True
mitted values are True or False.
Controls if only TLDs in GA (General Availability)

Optional; default is are returned, or if it will return ALL TLDs, including
AllGA 5
True those in pre-registration. Permitted values are
True or False.

DomainSuggestionCount Number of Suggestions returned in this response
Score Relevancy of the result to the search term
Tld Parsed TLD for this set of results
Sld Parsed SLD for this set of results
Idn Is this domain an IDN. True indicates yes; False indicates no.
Is this domain considerd "Premium"? True indicates yes; False

Premium indicates no. Unknown indicates that this is a TLD which we
cant know for sure.
In_GA Is this TLD in GA. True indicates yes; False indicates no.
NativeSld If the item is an IDN, the Native language SLD.
NativeTld If the item is an IDN, the Native language TLD.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 576 -
Notes
l Note: The Premium output attribute is a best guess based on data provided by the
registries. This data is subject to change on a daily basis, so for the best results it
is recomended to do a an EPP Check (Check API Command) on any domain to
verify the domain is premium.
Example
The following query retrieves 8 domains that resemble the input SLD hand, and sends
Query
command=GETNAMESUGGESTIONS&UID=resellid
&PW=resellpw&SearchTerm=hand&MaxResults=5
&ResponseType=XML
Output
<DomainSuggestions>
<Domain score="0.3" tld="uno" sld="hand" idn="false" in_
ga="true" premium="false">hand.uno</Domain>
<Domain score="0.25" tld="co.com" sld="hand" idn="false"
in_ga="true" premium="false">hand.co.com</Domain>
<Domain score="0.22" tld="best" sld="hand" idn="false" in_
ga="true" premium="false">hand.best</Domain>
<Domain score="0.21" tld="guru" sld="hand" idn="false" in_
ga="true" premium="false">hand.guru</Domain>
<Domain score="0.18" tld="shop" sld="hand" idn="false" in_
ga="true" premium="false">hand.shop</Domain>
- 577 -
</DomainSuggestions>
<DomainSuggestionCount>5</DomainSuggestionCount>
<Command>GETNAMESUGGESTIONS</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>9efbb8e7-1cc3-4f2b-bbc2-cbe2517522aa</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l AddToCart
l Check
l Purchase
GetNews
Description
Definition
Getting registry maintenance schedule details.
Usage
Use this command to get registry maintenance alert messages.
Availability
- 578 -
This command is implemented on enom.com.
Constraints
Input parameters



Product Details of the product
Message Registry message for the product
Total Number of subscriptions

ErrCount

ErrX
- 579 -
Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query is used to get registry maintenance alerts that have been requested
in account resellid and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=GetNews&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&responsetype=xml

Output
<Alerts>
<Alert>
<Product>
<![CDATA[ cn ]]>
</Product>
<Message>
<![CDATA[
CNNIC, the registry that manages .CN registrations has made
a temporary policy
decision to stop all new .CN registrations effective Jan
06, 2010. Renewals will
continue to work as expected. Meanwhile all attempts to
register new .CN domains
- 580 -
will fail or be returned as unavailable by eNom. No date

has been set
for when the new registrations will be re-opened.
That is all the information we have at this time but we are
working directly
with the registry to get this resolved as soon as possible.
]]>
</Message>
</Alert>
<Total>1</Total>
</Alerts>
<Command>GETNEWS</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<TrackingKey>ceee4a3f-e1ea-45c0-83fd-62cb5-
faf38df</TrackingKey>
<debug/>
Related commands
l GetProductNews
GetOrderDetail
Description
Definition
Get detailed information about an order.
- 581 -
Usage
Use this command to retrieve contents and details of an order when you know the order
number.
Use this command to monitor status when an order includes non-real-time domain
names (names that, at the time you submit the order, have an RRPCode value of 1300
and an IsRealTimeTLD value of false).
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/myaccount/ViewOrders.asp
On the view orders page, clicking a link in the Order # column calls the GetOrderDetail
command.
Constraints
Input parameters

The identification number of the order for

OrderID Required which you want details. You can retrieve 10
this number using the GetOrderList com-
- 582 -

mand.


OrderID 9-digit order identification number.
True/False -- True indicates that this order exists, and exists

Result
under this account.
Time at which customers account was billed for the trans-

BillDate
action amount.
Credit card reference number for this transaction, generated by

CCRefNum
us.
OrderBillAmount Total amount of this order, in $US.
AdjustToAccount Adjustments to this account
Certs Any SSL certificates in this order?
ProductType Description of this item.
Description of the item. Return value is usually a domain

Description
name.
Status for fulfilling the order for this item. Only a status Suc-
Status cessful indicates that the Registry has registered this name to
you.
Quantity Number of years.
Amount paid for this item. If the Registry has processed this
name and has not registered it to you, the AmountPaid va lue is
AmountPaid
Not billed. If the value is Not billed, check the Status parameter
for the reason for failure.
DomainPassword Domain password, if one was assigned
Order status. If OrderStatus is Open, check back later: the

order is still being processed. If OrderStatus is Closed, check
OrderStatus
the Status parameter. If we registered the domain the Status
value is Successful. Any other value indicates a failure.
- 583 -

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the details of order 156062775, and requests the response
in XML format:
Query
command=GetOrderDetail&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&orderid=157770751&responsetype=xml
The response indicates that in this order, the account successfully purchased 2
products:
Output
<Order>
<Result>true</Result>
<BillDate>11/7/2011 5:40:05 AM</BillDate>
- 584 -
<CCRefNum/>
<OrderBillAmount>$8.95</OrderBillAmount>
<AdjustToAccount/>
<Certs>false</Certs>
<OrderStatus>6</OrderStatus>
<StatusDesc>Successful</StatusDesc>
<OrderDate>11/7/2011 5:37:42 AM</OrderDate>
<OrderDetail>
<ProductType>Register</ProductType>
<Description>testnum10.com</Description>
<Status>Successful</Status>
<Quantity>1</Quantity>
<DetailStatusID>9</DetailStatusID>
<AmountPaid>8.95</AmountPaid>
<DomainPassword/>
<OrderStatus>Closed</OrderStatus>
<BundleID/>
<BundleInstanceID/>
<Discount/>
<BundleDescription/>
<BundleName/>
<ExpiryDatetime>11/7/2012 5:37:00 AM</ExpiryDatetime>
</OrderDetail>
</Order>
<Command>GETORDERDETAIL</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>caef4da0-86af-4684-9232-2346b034789f</Track-
ingKey>
- 585 -
Related commands
l CheckLogin
l CreateAccount
l CreateSubAccount
l GetAccountInfo
l GetAllAccountInfo
l GetDomainStatus
l GetOrderList
l GetReport
l GetSubAccounts
l GetTransHistory
l RPT_GetReport
l UpdateAccountInfo
GetOrderList
Description
Definition
Get a list of the orders placed through this account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of orders, identified by order number.
Availability
http://www.enom.com/myaccount/newreports.asp
In the Report Categories menu, select the view orders option. Clicking the view report
button calls the GetOrderList command.
- 586 -
Constraints
Input parameters

Return sets of 25 records in reverse chro-

Optional; default is nological order. For example, Start=26
Start 4
1 returns the 26th through 50th most recent
orders.
Optional; if omit-
ted, six months of Must be no more than six months before
BeginDate orders are returned EndDate. Permitted format is 10
Beginning date of MM/DD/YYYY
orders to return.
Optional; if omit-
Must be no more than six months after
ted, EndDate is
EndDate BeginDate. Permitted format is 10
today End date of
MM/DD/YYYY
orders to return.


OrderID Order identification number, in nine-digit format.
OrderDate Date on which the order was placed. Time stamp indicates the
- 587 -
time at which our database received the order.
Overall status of the order. Options are: 0 New 1 Authorization

StatusDesc Succeeded 2 Authorization Failed 3 Processing 5 Ready for
billing 6 Order complete 7 Order canceled
OrderProcessFlag True/False -- True indicates the order has been processed.
Yes/No -- Yes gives user access to previous and next trans-

ShowPreviousAndNext
actions.
Yes/No -- Yes displays a link that calls the previous block of

ShowPreviousLink
transactions.
First transaction to include in the response, counting back from

PreviousStartPosition the most recent, if user clicks a Previous link on your Web
page.
First transaction to include in the response, counting back from

ShowStart
the most recent.
Last transaction to include in the response, counting back from

ShowEnd
the most recent.
Yes/No -- Yes displays a link that calls the next block of trans-
ShowNextLink
actions.
RecordCount Total number of orders stored for this account.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 588 -
Example
The following query requests a list of orders successfully submitted through account
resellid. The optional Start=26 parameter specifies that the list should start with the 26th
most recent order. The query requests the response in XML format:
Query
command=GetOrderList&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&Start=26&responsetype=xml
The response gives an overview of orders starting with the 26th most recent. Normally,
the response would include the 26th through 50th most recent orders; this response
ends with the 37th because only 37 orders have been placed in the lifetime of the
account:
Output
<OrderList>
<BeginDate>6/8/2011 5:11:16 AM</BeginDate>
<EndDate>12/8/2011 5:11:16 AM</EndDate>
<OrderDetail>
<StatusDesc>Order complete</StatusDesc>
<OrderProcessFlag>True</OrderProcessFlag>
</OrderDetail>
<OrderDetail>
<StatusDesc>Order complete</StatusDesc>
</OrderDetail>
.
.
.
<ShowPreviousAndNext>Yes</ShowPreviousAndNext>
<ShowPreviousLink>Yes</ShowPreviousLink>
<PreviousStartPosition>1</PreviousStartPosition>
<ShowStart>26</ShowStart>
- 589 -
<ShowEnd>50</ShowEnd>
<ShowNextLink>Yes</ShowNextLink>
<NextStartPosition>51</NextStartPosition>
<RecordCount>1020</RecordCount>
</OrderList>
<Command>GETORDERLIST</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l CheckLogin
l CreateAccount
l CreateSubAccount
l GetAccountInfo
l GetAllAccountInfo
l GetOrderDetail
l GetReport
l GetSubAccounts
l GetTransHistory
l RPT_GetReport
l UpdateAccountInfo
- 590 -
GetPasswordBit
Description
Definition
Check to see if a password is set for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to determine whether a password is set for a domain name, and what
the password is.
Availability
On the domain control panel, in the utilities box, the Domain Access Password link calls
the GetPasswordBit command.
Constraints
Input parameters

- 591 -


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


PasswordSet Returns 1 if a password is set, 0 otherwise.
If PasswordSet=1, then a password is returned in this para-

DomainPassword
meter.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the domain name password for resellerdocs.com, and
Query
- 592 -
command=getpasswordbit&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
In the response, the password-set value of 1 indicates that a password is set. The
DomainPassword value indicates that the domain password is userpw.
Output

<DomainPassword>userpw</DomainPassword>
<password-set>1</password-set>
<Command>GETPASSWORDBIT</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l GetAllDomains
l GetDomainCount
l GetDomainExp
l GetDomainInfo
l GetDomains
l GetExtendInfo
l GetRegLock
l GetRenew
l SetPassword
l SetRegLock
l SetRenew
l StatusDomain
l ValidatePassword
- 593 -
GetPOP3
Description
Definition
Gets all POP3 accounts for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to generate a list of the POP mail accounts belonging to a domain
name. Return information includes mailbox names and BundleID numbers for the
domains POP paks.
Availability
In the domain control panel, email settings box, if the current service is POP mail, click-
ing the configure button calls the GetPOP3 command.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 594 -


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
If this is set to 1, extra blank input

records are returned for user input on the
POP3 form. Primarily used in XML out-
put.


EmailCount Number of email accounts on the domain name.
POP user name for this email account (this mailbox). Indexed
UsernameX
X = 1 to
EmailCount if ResponseType=text or HTML.
POP password name for the email account. Indexed X = 1 to

PasswordX
Maximum storage capacity for each mailbox, in megabytes.

QuotaX
Indexed X = 1 to EmailCount if ResponseType=text or HTML.
Expiration date of the POP3 account. Indexed X = 1 to

ExpDateX
ID number of this POP pak. Indexed X = 1 to EmailCount if

BundleIDX
ResponseType=text or HTML.
Auto-renewal setting for this POP3 account and its POP pak. 1
AutoRenewX signifies that auto-renew is on, 0 off. Indexed X = 1 to
Number of MB of storage space currently in use for this

QuotaUsedX account. Indexed X =1 to EmailCount if ResponseType=text
or HTML.
ID number of this POP pak. Prefixed Pak and indexed X = 1 to

[Pak]BundleIDX
Count if ResponseType=text or HTML.
- 595 -
Total number of POP accounts that have been purchased for
[Pak]QtyPurchasedX this domain name. Prefixed xed X = 1 to Count if Respon-
seType=text or HTML.
Total number of POP accounts currently configured for this

[Pak]QtyAvailableX domain name. Prefixed xed Pak and indexed X = 1 to Count if
Expiration date of this POP pak. Prefixed Pak and indexed X =

[Pak]ExpDateX
1 to Count if ResponseType=text or HTML.
Auto-renewal setting for this POP pak. 1 signifies that auto-

[Pak]AutoRenewX renew is on, 0 off. Prefixed Pak and indexed X = 1 to Count if
Maximum storage capacity for each mailbox, in megabytes.

[Pak]QuotaX Prefixed Pak and indexed X = 1 to Count if Respon-
seType=text or HTML.
The number of errors if any occurred. If The number of errors if

ErrCount any occurred. If greater than 0 check the Err(1 to ErrCount) val-
ues.

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l The default response format is plain textThe default response format is plain text.
To receive the response in HTML or XML format, send ResponseType=HTML or
ResponseType=XML in your request.
l Check the return parameter eater than 0 the transaction failed If greater than 0 the
transaction failed. The parameter Err(ErrCount) can be presented to the client.
Otherwise process the returned parameters as defined above.
Example
The following query requests a list of alThe following query requests a list of all POP
mail accounts in resellerdocs.com, and requests the response in XML format:
Query
- 596 -
command=getpop3&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
The response lists the eight POP mail accounts that belong to resellerdocs.com. Four
are part of bundle 26770 and one is from bundle 26771:
Output
<pop>
<username>dell</username>
<password>78910</password>
<quota>1024</quota>
<expdate>5/3/2010 2:14:59 AM</expdate>
<BundleId>26770</BundleId>
<admin>0</admin>
<quotaused>0</quotaused>
</pop>
<pop>
<username>hp</username>
<quota>1024</quota>
<admin>0</admin>
</pop>
<pop>
<username>lenovo</username>
<quota>1024</quota>
<admin>0</admin>
</pop>
<pop>
<username>sss</username>
- 597 -
<password>aaaaaaa</password>
<quota>1024</quota>
<admin>0</admin>
</pop>
<pop>
<username>facebook</username>
<quota>1024</quota>
<admin>0</admin>
</pop>
<pop>
<username>google</username>
<quota>1024</quota>
<admin>0</admin>
</pop>
<pop>
<username>instragram</username>
<quota>1024</quota>
<admin>0</admin>
</pop>
<pop>
<username>twitter</username>
<quota>1024</quota>
- 598 -

<admin>0</admin>
</pop>
<EmailCount>8</EmailCount>
<Paks>
<Pak>
<QtyPurchased>10</QtyPurchased>
<QtyAvailable>6</QtyAvailable>
<Quota>1024</Quota>
</Pak>
<Pak>
<QtyPurchased>10</QtyPurchased>
<QtyAvailable>6</QtyAvailable>
<Quota>1024</Quota>
</Pak>
</Paks>
<Count>2</Count>
<AdditionalHostPop>
</AdditionalHostPop>
<AdditionalHostAcctLogin/>
<Command>GETPOP3</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
- 599 -
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>9940727e-36fd-4b47-92f8-732af897c07a</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l DeleteAllPOPPaks
l DeletePOP3
l DeletePOPPak
l Forwarding
l GetCatchAll
l GetForwarding
l GetMailHosts
l GetPOPExpirations
l GetPOPForwarding
l ModifyPOP3
l PurchasePOPBundle
l RenewPOPBundle
l SetPakRenew
l SetPOPForwarding
l SetUpPOP3User
GetPOPExpirations
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of POP paks and their expiration dates, and the domains they are asso-
ciated with.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of POP paks and their expiration dates, and the
domains they are associated with.
- 600 -
This command allows you to synchronize your database with ours. In particular, you can
use it to identify POP paks that are about to expire or have recently expired, update the
expiration dates of POP paks that were renewed in a site other than yours, or retrieve the
expiration date of POP paks associated with domains that were transferred or pushed
into your account.
Availability
In the email settings section, the configure button returns expiration dates for POP mail
paksone component of the information retrieved by the GetPOPExpirations command.
Constraints
Input parameters


- 601 -

Domain name with which this POP pak is associated. The
DomainX
response is indexed X if ResponseType=text or HTML.
ID number of this POP pak, from our internal records. Use this
ID number to renew the POP pak using the RenewPOPBundle
BundleIDX
command. The response is indexed X if ResponseType=text or
HTML.
Expiration date of this POP pak. The response is indexed X if

ExpDateX

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves POP pak expiration dates, and sends the response in XML
format:
Query
command=GetPOPExpirations&uid=resellid
- 602 -
In the response, the list of POP paks and the ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query
was successful:
Output
<popexpirations>
<pop>
<domain>1986anotherappz.us</domain>
<bundleid>30631</bundleid>
</pop>
<pop>
<domain>1986anotherappz.us</domain>
<bundleid>30630</bundleid>
</pop>
.
.
.
<count>125</count>
</popexpirations>
<Command>GETPOPEXPIRATIONS</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>0a7ee088-86c5-4067-885c-d141144e8ae7</Track-
ingKey>
- 603 -
Related commands
l Extend
l GetPOP3
l GetRenew
l Purchase
l PurchasePOPBundle
l RenewPOPBundle
GetPOPForwarding
Description
Definition
Retrieve the email forwarding recordeither POP or our email forwardingfor a spe-
cified mailbox name.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the email forwarding record for a specified mailbox user
name.
Availability
In the Email Settings section, the configure button retrieves forwarding records in a man-
ner similar to the GetPOPForwarding command.
Constraints

l The user name must be an existing email address for this domain name.
- 604 -
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Mailbox name (for example, john in

UserName Required 50
john@example.com)


DomainName Domain SLD and TLD
DomainNameID Numeric domain name ID, from our database
UserName Mailbox name
ForwardTo Email forwarding address
Active Is this forwarding address active. 1 indicates yes.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 605 -
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the email forwarding record for Jane.Doe@re-
sellerdocs.com and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=GETPOPFORWARDING&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&username=Jane.Doe
&ResponseType=xml
In the response, the presence of the popforwarding node and the absence of an
ErrString parameter confirm that the query was successful:
Output
<popforwarding>
<domainnameid>152533676</domainnameid>
<username>Jane.Doe</username>
<forwardto/>
<active/>
</popforwarding>
<Count>0</Count>
<Command>GETPOPFORWARDING</Command>
- 606 -
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>0a5b34f2-b363-41f0-8686-4f64c8e32f30</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l DeletePOP3
l GetCatchAll
l GetPOP3
l PurchasePOPBundle
l SetPOPForwarding
l SetUpPOP3User
GetProductNews
Description
Definition
Getting product maintenance schedule details at a time.
Usage
Use this command to get product maintenance alert messages.
Availability
This command is implemented on enom.com.
- 607 -
Constraints
Input parameters



Product Details of the product
Message Maintenance message for the product
Total Number of subscriptions

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 608 -
Notes
Example
The following query is used to get maintenance alert for the products that have been
requested in account resellid and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=GETPRODUCTNEWS&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&responsetype=xml&

Output
<Alerts>
<Total>0</Total>
</Alerts>
<Command>GETPRODUCTNEWS</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
- 609 -
<TrackingKey>b1bcb817-53ce-4c7f-ba6a-dd853d1f4de0</Track-
ingKey>
<debug/>
Related commands
l GetNews
GetProductSelectionList
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of sorting or filtering values (such as status values) for a given product.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve options for placement in a sorting or filtering selection form
field for a given product.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters
- 610 -


values are:
ProdType Required 260: SiteLock Basic 3
262: SiteLock Premium
264: SiteLock Enterprise
Product description. Permitted values

are:
ProdDesc Optional SiteLock-Basic 3
SiteLock-Premium
SiteLock-Enterprise
Optional; Default is Option values to be returned. Permitted

Action 8
status value is: Status



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 611 -
Example
The following query retrieves a list of SiteLock account for this login ID, and requests the
Query
command=GetProductSelectionList&UID=resellid
&Action=status
Output
<GetProductSelectionList>
<ProdDesc />
<Action>status</Action>
<Statuses>
<Status>
<ID>1</ID>
<Desc>Awaiting Configuration</Desc>
</Status>
<Status>
<ID>2</ID>
<Desc>Service Active</Desc>
</Status>
<Status>
<ID>7</ID>
<Desc>Pending Expiration</Desc>
</Status>
<Status>
<ID>8</ID>
<Desc>Service Expired</Desc>
</Status>
</Statuses>
<SubStatuses>
<SubStatus>
- 612 -
<ID>1</ID>
<Desc>Auto Renew Off</Desc>
</SubStatus>
<SubStatus>
<ID>2</ID>
<Desc>Billing Failed CC</Desc>
</SubStatus>
<SubStatus>
<ID>3</ID>
<Desc>Billing Failed Balance</Desc>
</SubStatus>
</SubStatuses>
</GetProductSelectionList>
<Command>GETPRODUCTSELECTIONLIST</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
Related commands
l SL_GetAccounts
- 613 -
GetRegHosts
Description
Definition
Get host records for a domain without mail host records.
Usage
Use this command to display host record information for a domain. The response does
not include mail host entries. GetHosts, a similar command, returns all host records
including mail host records.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/DomainDetail.asp?domainnameid=152533676
In the domain control panel, DNS settings box, the configure button calls the
GetRegHosts command.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 614 -


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
ExtFormat=1 encloses the repeating

ExtFormat Optional host information in a separate tag so it is 1
easier to parse.


HostIDX Identification number of this individual host record
HostNameX Name of this individual host record
AddressX Address of this individual host record
RecordTypeX Record type of this individual host record

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 615 -
Example
The following query requests the DNS host records for a domain name, specifies
ExtFormat=1 to enclose the host records in a separate tag, and requests the response in
XML format:
Query
command=getreghosts&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&ExtFormat=1&responsetype=xml

Output
<hostrecords>
<host>
<hostID/>
<HostName>www</HostName>
<Address/>
<RecordType>CNAME</RecordType>
</host>
<host>
<hostID>18149735</hostID>
<HostName>@ (none)</HostName>
<Address>66.150.5.189</Address>
<RecordType>A</RecordType>
</host>
<host>
<HostName>msn</HostName>
<Address>http://www.msn.com</Address>
<RecordType>FRAME</RecordType>
</host>
<host>
<HostName>photos</HostName>
<Address>photos.msn.com.</Address>
- 616 -
</host>
<host>
<HostName>yahoo</HostName>
<Address>204.71.200.72</Address>
<RecordType>URL</RecordType>
</host>
<host>
<hostID/>
<HostName/>
<Address/>
</host>
<host>
<hostID/>
<HostName/>
<Address/>
</host>
<host>
<hostID/>
<HostName/>
<Address/>
</host>
<host>
<hostID/>
<HostName/>
<Address/>
</host>
<host>
<hostID/>
<HostName>* (other)</HostName>
<Address/>
</host>
</hostrecords>
<ServiceSelect>1114</ServiceSelect>
<Command>GETREGHOSTS</Command>
- 617 -
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l GetHosts
l GetMetaTag
l SetDNSHost
l SetHosts
l UpdateMetaTag
GetRegistrationStatus
Description
Definition
Get the registration and paid status of a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to get the registration status and paid status of domains in your
account.
Availability
- 618 -
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/DomainManager.asp?tab=iown
This command is not implemented on enom.com; however, the registered tab of the my
domains page returns similar information.
Constraints
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


Registration Status of the Domain name. Options are Pro-
RegistrationStatus
cessing, Registered, Hosted, Null.
Purchase status of the Domain name. Options are Processing,

PurchaseStatus
Paid, Null.
- 619 -

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves information on whether the domain name resellerdocs.com
is registered and paid for, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=getregistrationstatus&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw

Output

<RegistrationStatus>Registered</RegistrationStatus>
<Command>GETREGISTRATIONSTATUS</Command>
- 620 -
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l GetAllDomains
l GetDomainCount
l GetDomainExp
l GetDomainInfo
l GetDomains
l GetExtendInfo
l GetPasswordBit
l GetRegLock
l GetRenew
l SetPassword
l SetRegLock
l SetRenew
l StatusDomain
l ValidatePassword
GetRegLock
Description
Definition
Get the registrar lock setting for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to determine whether one of your domain names is locked, that is,
whether it is protected from being transferred to another registrar.
Availability
- 621 -

In the domain control panel, utilities box, clicking the Set reg-lock/auto-renew options
link calls the GetRegLock command.
Constraints
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


Reg-Lock Returns 1 if locked, 0 otherwise if the responsetype is Text.
RRPCode Response code from Registry.
- 622 -
RRPText Response text from Registry.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the lock status of a domain name, and sends the response
in XML format:
Query
command=getreglock&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
In the response, the reg-lock value of 1 indicates that the domain name is locked:
Output
<reg-lock>1</reg-lock>
<registrar>eNom</registrar>
- 623 -

<Command>GETREGLOCK</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>95f6daeb-3bd3-4bf3-a97f-e82be665ed-
c2</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l GetAllDomains
l GetDomainCount
l GetDomainExp
l GetDomainInfo
l GetDomains
l GetExtendInfo
l GetPasswordBit
l GetRenew
l SetPassword
l SetRegLock
l SetRenew
l StatusDomain
l ValidatePassword
- 624 -
GetRenew
Description
Definition
Get the auto-renew setting for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to determine whether a domain in your account is set to renew auto-
matically. If so, the renewal is charged to your account a month before the expiration
date for the domain name. Fifteen days before that, you receive an email notifying you of
the auto-renew charges.
Availability
In the domain control panel, utilities box, the Set reg-lock/auto-renew options link calls
the GetRenew command.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 625 -


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


RenewName Returns 1 if this domain is set to auto-renew, 0 otherwise.
1 if there are POP paks associated with this domain, 0 oth-

PakExist Returns
erwise.
Returns 1 if the POP paks for this domain are set to auto-
AutoPakRenew
renew, 0 otherwise.
Returns 1 if this domain subscribes to email forwarding, 0 oth-

EMailFwdExists
erwise.
Returns 1 if the email forwarding for this domain is set to auto-

EMailForwardRenew
renew, 0 otherwise.
Returns 1 if this domain subscribes to URL forwarding, 0 oth-

URLFwdExists
erwise.
Returns 1 if the URL forwarding for this domain is set to auto-

URLForwardRenew
renew, 0 otherwise.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 626 -
Notes
Example
The following query requests the auto-renew status of resellerdocs.com and sends the
Query
command=getrenew&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
In the response, the auto-renew value of 1 indicates that the domain is set to auto-
matically renew:
Output
<auto-renew>1</auto-renew>
<AutoPakRenew>0</AutoPakRenew>
<PakExist>1</PakExist>
<EmailForwardRenew>0</EmailForwardRenew>
<EmailFwdExists>0</EmailFwdExists>
<URLForwardRenew>0</URLForwardRenew>
<URLFwdExists>0</URLFwdExists>
<IDProtectRenew>0</IDProtectRenew>
<IDProtectExists>1</IDProtectExists>
<MobilizerRenew>0</MobilizerRenew>
<Command>GETRENEW</Command>
- 627 -
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l Extend
l GetAllDomains
l GetDomainCount
l GetDomainExp
l GetDomainInfo
l GetDomains
l GetExtendInfo
l GetPasswordBit
l GetPasswordBit
l GetPOPExpirations
l GetRegLock
l InsertNewOrder
l RenewPOPBundle
l SetPakRenew
l SetPassword
l SetRegLock
l SetRenew
l StatusDomain
l ValidatePassword
GetReport
Description
Definition
- 628 -
Get a report on a users account.

Usage
Use this command to retrieve an overview of the domains in an account: domain names,
name server status, registration status, and expiration date.
Availability
http://enomson/domains/DomainManager.asp?tab=iown
The GetReport command works in the background of the my domains page. Each of the
four tabs on the page displays one category of domain names returned by the GetReport
query.
Constraints
Input parameters


- 629 -

FName First (use) name of the account registrant.
LName Last (family) name of the account registrant.
Party identification number. Format is 32 hexadecimal digits,

Party
hyphenated.
DN Domain name parameter.
DomName Domain name attribute.
Name server status. Value yes indicates our name servers.

NSStatus
Value no indicates not our name servers.
Registration status in this account. Return values are:

Deleted Domain has been deleted from registrars database.
Expired Domain registration has expired but has not been
deleted from registrars database (domain is within grace
period for reactivaton).
Expired Transfers Domain that is being transferred to another
registrar in expired state.
Hosted Domain that is hosted by us but registered with another
registrar.
Hosted Deleted Domain that was hosted by us but registered
elsewhere, its registration has expired, and it has been deleted
RegistrationStatus from our database.
Hosted Expired Domain that is hosted by us but registered else-
where, its registration has expired, but it is still present in our
database.
Hosted Transfers Domain that is hosted by us but registered
elsewhere, and the registration is transferring to another regis-
trar.
Keyword Keyword, an obsolete feature.
Registered Domain that is registered by us.
Transferred away Hosted and Registered Domain that was
registered and hosted by us, and both the registration and host-
ing services are transferring away from us.
ExpirationDate Date on which this domain registration expires.

ErrCount

ErrX
- 630 -
Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests a report on account resellid, and requests the response in
XML format:
Query
command=getreport&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&responsetype=xml
In the response, the ReportDetail section lists the domains in account resellid:
Output

<GetReport>
<FName>John</FName>
<LName>Doe</LName>
<Party>{BB4A2DE1-6485-45CB-A4FC-EE39BA0C1629}</Party>
<ReportDetail>
<dn DomName="resellerdocs.com" nsstatus="No" regis-
trationstatus="Hosted"
ExpirationDate="07/15/03" />
<dn DomName="resellerdocs2.net" nsstatus="Yes" regis-
trationstatus="Registered"
- 631 -
<dn DomName="resellerdocs3.info" nsstatus="Yes" regis-

trationstatus="Registered"
</ReportDetail>
</GetReport>
<Command>GETREPORT</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CheckLogin
l CreateAccount
l CreateSubAccount
l GetAllAccountInfo
l GetAllAccountInfo
l GetHomeDomainList
l GetOrderDetail
l GetOrderList
l GetSubAccounts
l GetTransHistory
l RPT_GetReport
l UpdateAccountInfo
GetResellerHostPricing
Description
Definition
- 632 -
Retrieve pricing for the components of Web hosting packages, including price breaks for
larger packages.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve pricing for components of Web hosting packages.
To retrieve the prices you currently pay, use parameter AccountType=reseller.
To retrieve the prices you currently charge, use parameter AccountType=retail.
To retrieve the prices you currently charge a specific subaccount, use parameter SubID-
D=SubaccountName.
Availability
The Set Component Unit Pricing table displays both the AccountType=reseller and
AccountType=retail return values.
Constraints
Input parameters

- 633 -

Either Accoun- Use AccountType=reseller to retrieve
tType or SubID is the prices this account pays. Use
AccountType 8
Required; default AccountType=retail to retrieve the prices
value is reseller this account charges.
Either Accoun-
tType or SubID is
Name of the subaccount to retrieve the
Required. If you
prices for. Return values are the prices
SubID use the SubID para- 20
the subaccount pays (wholesale prices)
meter, do not use
for components.
the AccountType
parameter.


Number of units of each component. This number represents
the lowest value in the range. For example, if a query returns a
Qty
node with Qty=1 and another with Qty=5, the node with Qty=1
gives prices for 1 to 4 units of each component.
BandwidthPrice Price for each bandwidth unit (each unit contains 20GB)
WebStoragePrice Price for each Web storage unit (each unit contains 1GB)
Price for each database storage unit (each unit contains

DBStoragePrice
250MB)
Price for each POP mail unit (each unit contains 10 email
POPMailPrice
boxes, with 100MB storage per mailbox)
PackageCount Number of pricing levels present in this account.

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
- 634 -
Notes
Example
The following query retrieThe following query retrieves the prices that account resellid
pays for Web hosting components, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=GETRESELLERHOSTPRICING& uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&Auid=resellid&pw=resellpw&AccountType=reseller
&responsetype=xml
In the response, a list of component prices and the ErrCount value 0 indicate that the
Output
<?xml version="1.0" ?>t;

<components>
<Qty>1</Qty>
<BandwidthPrice>1.00</BandwidthPrice>
<WebStoragePrice>.50</WebStoragePrice>
<DBStoragePrice>3.00</DBStoragePrice>
<POPMailPrice>.75</POPMailPrice>
</components>
<components>
<Qty>5</Qty>
<BandwidthPrice>.55</BandwidthPrice>
<DBStoragePrice>2.50</DBStoragePrice>
</components>
- 635 -
<components>
<Qty>10</Qty>
<DBStoragePrice />
</components>
<components>
<Qty>20</Qty>
<WebStoragePrice />
<DBStoragePrice />
<POPMailPrice />
</components>
<Command>GETRESELLERHOSTPRICING</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
l GetHostAccount
l GetStorageUsage
l HostPackageDefine
l HostPackageDelete
l HostPackageModify
l HostPackageView
- 636 -
l HostParkingPage
GetResellerInfo
Description
Definition
Retrieve the contact information for the account holder.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve contact information for a reseller account.
Availability
On the my info page, the Organization (or Individual) Information box displays the results
of the GetResellerInfo command.
Constraints
- 637 -
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


OrganizationName Reseller organization name
FName Reseller first name
LName Reseller last name
Address1 Address first line
Address2 Address second line
City City
StateProvince Name of state or province
StateProvinceChoice S indicates StateProvince is a state; P, a province
Country Two-letter country code
Phone Phone number
Fax Fax number
- 638 -
EMailAddress Email address
PhoneExt Phone extension

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves reseller contact information for the specified account and
domain, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=GetResellerInfo&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw

Output
<ResellerInfo>
- 639 -
<FName>Johnny</FName>
<LName>Doety</LName>
<Address2/>
<Phone>+1.4252744500</Phone>
<Fax/>
<PhoneExt/>
<Site>E</Site>
</ResellerInfo>
<Command>GETRESELLERINFO</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l AddContact
l GetAccountInfo
l GetAddressBook
l GetAllAccountInfo
l GetContacts
l GetWhoisContact
- 640 -
GetServiceContact
Description
Definition
Retrieve the customer service contact information for a domain name account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve customer service contact information for an account. If
there is a PDQ subscription associated with this account, this command can return the
PDQ contact information. Otherwise, this command returns the Billing contact inform-
ation.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/pdq/RE_Default.asp?maintab=overview
Clicking the my site tab calls the GetServiceContact command.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 641 -

Use Service=PDQ to return the contact

information for this accounts PDQ sub-
Service Optional scription. If the Service parameter is omit- 20
ted, the Billing contact information is
returned.


Organization Name of contacts organization
Address1 Contact address, line 1
Address2 Contact address, line 2
City Contacts city
StateProvince Contacts state or province
PostalCode Contacts postal code
Country Contacts country
Phone Contacts phone number
Fax Contacts fax number
EmailAddress Contacts email address
URL URL of PDQ site, if any
ResellerKey Reseller key of PDQ site, if any

ErrCount

ErrX
- 642 -
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the customer service contact information for resellid and
Query
command=GETSERVICECONTACT&uid=resellid
In the response, the presence of contact information, and the ErrCount value 0, indicate
that the query was successful:
Output

<ServiceContact>
<Organization>Reseller Documents Inc.</Organization>
<Address2 />
<Phone>+1.5555555555</Phone>
<Fax>+1.5555555556</Fax>
- 643 -
<URL />
<ResellerKey />
</ServiceContact>
<Command>GETSERVICECONTACT</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddContact
l Contacts
l GetAddressBook
l GetContacts
l GetWhoisContact
GetSPFHosts
Description
Definition
Retrieve Sender Policy Framework (SPF) host records for a domain.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve SPF host records for a domain.
Availability
- 644 -

In the DNS settings (zone file) section, the test record shows the SPF host record.
Constraints
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


Name Name of this SPF record
- 645 -
Type Type of this SPF record
A-Radio Setting for A-radio
MX-Radio Setting for MX-radio
PTR-Radio Setting for PTR-radio
ALL-Radio Setting for ALL-radio
A-Records Value for A records
MX-Records Value for MX records
IP-Records Value for IP records
INC-Records Value for INC record
HostID Host ID number

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the SPF hosts for a domain and sends the response in
XML format:
Query
- 646 -
command=getspfHosts&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
In the response, host values confirm that the query was successful and that SPF records
have been configured for this domain:
Output
<?xml version="1.0" ?>>

<host>
<name>test</name>
<type>TXT</type>
<a-radio>off</a-radio>
<mx-radio>on</mx-radio>
<ptr-radio>on</ptr-radio>
<all-radio>on</all-radio>
<a-records>regular hostnames po</a-records>
<mx-records>mx servers to</mx-records>
<ip-records>127.0.0.1</ip-records>
<inc-records>myisp.net mydomain.com</inc-records>
</host>
<Command>GETSPFHOSTS</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
- 647 -
Related commands
l GetHosts
l SetHosts
l SetSPFHosts
GetStorageUsage
Description
Definition
Retrieve the current usage of Web storage resources for this Web hosting account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the current Web storage usage for a Web hosting account.
Availability
webpw.
http://webhostingtest.enom.com/
In the Web Sites section, the Storage Usage line displays the results of the GetSt-
orageUsage command.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 648 -

HostName Required Web hosting account name 14


Usage Web storage usage by this account, in MB

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 649 -
Example
The following query retrieThe following query retrieves the amount of Web storage
space currently being used by Web hosting account resellwebid and sends the
Query
command=GETSTORAGEUSAGE&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&huid=resellid&pw=resellpw&hostaccount=resellwebid
&responsetype=xml
In the response, a return value for Usage indicates that the query was successful:
Output

<Usage>
<Usage>11</Usage>
</Usage>
<Command>GETSTORAGEUSAGE</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
- 650 -
GetSubAccountDetails
Description
Definition
For one subaccount, get the wholesale prices you charge this subaccount for products
and services, and whether enabled settings for one subaccount.
Usage
Use this command to list prices for one subaccount.
To set TLD prices for one subaccount, use the SetResellerTLDPricing or UpdateAc-
countPricing.
To set prices for services for one subaccount, use the UpdateAccountPricing command.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/resellers/SubAccount-List.asp
On the sub-account page, clicking a link in the LoginID column calls the GetSubAc-
countDetails command without the Action=Manage parameter.
https://resellertest.enom.com/resellers/SubAccount-Manage.asp?Account=154-dz-5567
On the Sub-account configuration page, clicking the save changes button calls the
GetSubAccountDetails command with the Action=Manage parameter.
Constraints
l The account must be a reseller account.
- 651 -
Input parameters


NNNN format. You can retrieve this num-
Account Required 20
ber using the GetSubAccounts command
Action to take. Permitted values are List

and Info. Action=List returns a long list of
Optional; default
Action current price settings. Action=Info 20
value is List
returns a short list of information about
the subaccount and parent account
Year bracket to retrieve prices for. For

example, UseQtyEngine=2 retrieves the
annual price for domain name regis-
trations of 2 to 4 years; UseQtyEngine=5
UseQtyEngine Optional retrieves the annual price for 5 to 9 years. ?
Permitted values are 1, 2, 5, and 10. You
may use only one UseQtyEngine para-
meter per query. Use this parameter with
Action=List


Action Type of action you specified in the query string
Display Which content to display here
Party identification number expressed as 32 hexadecimal char-

PartyID
acters, hyphenated
- 652 -
LoginID Account login ID of the subaccount
DomainCount Number of domains in this subaccount
Account Subaccount ID number, in NNN-aa-NNNN format
TLD Top-level domain; for example, com for .com domains
RegisterPrice Price for registering a domain of this type for one year
True/FalseTrue indicates that this subaccount allows cus-

RegisterEnabled
tomers to register domain names
RenewPrice Price for renewing a domain of this type for one year
True/False True indicates that this subaccount allows cus-

RenewEnabled
tomers to renew domain names
TransferPrice paying for one year of registration
True/False True indicates that this subaccount allows cus-

TransferEnabled
tomers to transfer domain names
POP3 Price for one 10-mailbox POP pak, per year, in $US
Price for a one-year registration of a .name domain, with the

DotNameBundle
.name Registrys email forwarding
DNSHosting Price for one year of DNS hosting
Price for one year of ID Protect Certificate-GeoTrust-Quick-

WPPS SSL-Premium Price for one year registration of a GeoTrust
QuickSSL Premium SSL certificate
Price for one year registration of a GeoTrust True BusinessID

Certificate-GeoTrust-TrueBizID
SSL certificate
Certificate-RapidSSL-RapidSSL Price for one year registration of a RapidSSL certificate
Price for one year registration of a GeoTrust True BusinessID

Certificate-GeoTrust-TrueBizID-EV
EV certificate
Price for one year registration of a GeoTrust QuickSSL cer-

Certificate-GeoTrust-QuickSSL
tificate
Certificate-GeoTrust-TrueBizID-Wild- Price for one year registration of a GeoTrust True BusinessID

card Wildcard SSL certificate
Price for one year registration of a VeriSign Secure Site SSL

Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site
certificate
Price for one year registration of a VeriSign Secure Site PRO

Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site-Pro
SSL certificate
- 653 -
Price for one year registration of a VeriSign Secure Site Exten-
Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site-EV
ded Validation SSL certificate
Price for one year registration of a VeriSign Secure Site Pro

Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site-Pro-EV
with Extended Validation SSL certificate
Price for one year registration of a Comodo Essential SSL cer-

Certificate-Comodo-Essential
tificate
Price for one year registration of a Comodo Instant SSL cer-

Certificate-Comodo-Instant
tificate
Price for one year registration of a Comodo PremiumWildcard

Certificate-Comodo-Premium-Wildcard
SSL certificate
Price for one year registration of a Comodo Essential Wildcard

Certificate-Comodo-Essential-Wildcard
SSL certificate
Certificate-Comodo-EV Price for one year registration of a Comodo EV SSL certificate
Price for one year registration of a Comodo EV SGC SSL cer-

Certificate-Comodo-EV-SGC
tificate
Seal-VeriSign-Trust-Seal Price for one year subscription to VeriSign Trust Seal
LWSC-Basic Price for one month of Web Site Creator Basic
LWSC-Full Price for one month of Web Site Creator Full
LWSC-Ecommerce Price for one month of Web Site Creator eCommerce
RichContentFreeTrial Price for RichContent free trial, per month
Price for RichContent, per month. Additional prices for further

RichContent down in the response, in the ValueAdd nodes and ProductType
and following return parameters
DNSHostingRenew Price to renew one year of DNS hosting
POPStorage Price for one unit of extra POP storage, for one year
POPStorageRenew Price to renew one year of extra POP storage, for one year
Price to renew POP service for one year, for one 10-mailbox
POPRenew
POP pak
Price for one year of email forwarding by the .name Registry,

DotNameMail
for one domain name
Price to renew one year of registration and email forwarding by

DotNameRegMailRenew
the .name Registry
EmailForwardingRenew Price to renew our email forwarding service, for one year and
- 654 -
one domain name
Price to renew our URL forwarding service, for one year and
URLForwardingRenew
one domain name
WPPSRenew Price to renew ID Protect for one year, for one domain
WBL Price for Business Listing for one year, for one domain
WBLRenew Price for a one-year renewal of Business Listing
ProductType Product ID number
Product Product name
ProductEnabled Enabled status of this product
Price of this product. Both Email Forwarding and URL For-

Price
warding are yearly subscriptions.
TimeBracket Billing period for this product-billing cycle-price set

ErrCount

ErrX
Done successfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests for a subaccount of resellid, subaccount 659-fs-2869. The
query retrieves the prices for all products and requests the response in XML format:
Query
- 655 -
command=GetSubaccountDetails&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&Account=659-fs-2869&responsetype=xml
The response lists the prices given in the query for each of the domain name products,
and then lists identification information and the updated prices for subaccount 154-dz-
5567:
Output

<SubAccountsManage>
<YearBracket />
<Action />
<Display>all</Display>
<Get>
<PartyID>{18FC24BC-07D5-4591-8A16-A4D32DF934B4}</PartyID>
<LoginID>resellidsub</LoginID>
<Account>659-fs-2869</Account>
<Site>enom</Site>
<pricestructure>
<product>
<tld>com</tld>
<tldid>0</tldid>
<registerprice>29.95</registerprice>
<resellerpricereg>29.95</resellerpricereg>
<registerenabled>True</registerenabled>
<renewprice>29.95</renewprice>
<resellerpricerenew>29.95</resellerpricerenew>
<renewenabled>True</renewenabled>
<transferprice>29.95</transferprice>
<resellerpricetran>29.95</resellerpricetran>
<transferenabled>True</transferenabled>
</product>
<product>
<tld>net</tld>
<tldid>1</tldid>
- 656 -
</product>
.
.
.
<count>78</count>
</pricestructure>
<pop3>9.95</pop3>
<dotnamebundle>19.95</dotnamebundle>
<DNSHosting>4.00</DNSHosting>
<wpps>6.00</wpps>
.
.
.
<ValueAdds>
<valueadd>
<producttype>190</producttype>
<productenabled>True</productenabled>
<price>12.50</price>
<timebracket>1</timebracket>
</valueadd>
<valueadd>
<timebracket>12</timebracket>
</valueadd>
.
.
.
</ValueAdds>
</Get>
</SubAccountsManage>
<Command>GETSUBACCOUNTDETAILS</Command>
- 657 -
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CheckLogin
l CreateAccount
l CreateSubAccount
l DeleteSubaccount
l GetAccountInfo
l GetAllAccountInfo
l GetOrderDetail
l GetOrderList
l GetReport
l GetSubAccounts
l GetTransHistory
l GetWebHostingAll
l SubAccountDomains
l UpdateAccountInfo
- 658 -
GetSubAccountPassword
Description
Definition
Get the password for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the password for a domain name that belongs to your
account. The password is emailed to the Registrant contact address.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/help/
On the help page, the Password recovery link calls the GetSubAccountPassword com-
mand.
Constraints
Input parameters

- 659 -


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the password for domain resellerdocs.com, and requests
Query
command=GetSubAccountPassword&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
- 660 -
The 0 value for ErrCount indicates that the request has been processed successfully.
The password is e-mailed to the registrant almost instantly.
Output

<Command>GETSUBACCOUNTPASSWORD</Command>
<Server>Dev Workstation</Server>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l GetAllDomains
l GetDomainCount
l GetDomainExp
l GetDomainInfo
l GetDomains
l GetExtendInfo
l GetPasswordBit
l GetRegLock
l GetRenew
l SetPassword
l SetRegLock
l SetRenew
l StatusDomain
l ValidatePassword
- 661 -
GetSubAccounts
Description
Definition
List subaccounts.
Usage
Use this command to list subaccounts for an account.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/resellers/SubAccount.asp
On the subaccount page,clicking the List/Manage link calls the GetSubAccounts com-
mand.
Constraints
Input parameters

- 662 -

Sorting parameter. Options are LName,
ListBy Optional 12
EMailAddress, LoginID.
StartLetter Optional First letter of the ListBy value 1
First return value in the list generated

with the ListBy and StartLetter para-
StartPosition Optional 7
meters. Maximum number of sub-
accounts returned per query is 25.


Party identification number expressed as 32 hexadecimal char-
PartyID
acters, hyphenated
LoginID Login ID of the subaccount
DomainCount Number of domains in this subaccount
Account Subaccount ID number in NNN-aa-NNNN format.
Reseller=0 indicates that this subaccount is a retail account;

Reseller
Reseller=1 indicates this subaccount is a reseller account
Number of subaccounts in this account that fit the ListBy and

Count
StartLetter criteria

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 663 -
Example
The following query requests a list of subaccounts for account resellid. It specifies that
the return values should be listed by last name, starting with the letter D, and starting
with the seventh subaccount in that list. Finally, the string requests the response in XML
format:
Query
command=getsubaccounts&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&ListBy-
y=LName&StartLetter=D&StartPosition=7&responsetype=xml
The response indicates that account resellid has 12 subaccounts that fit the parameters,
and returns the seventh through twelfth subaccounts in that list:
Output
<SubAccounts>
<SubAccount>
<Account>012-gf-7319</Account>
<PartyID>c3f7c836-f3d6-42ab-b628-519bf957786c</PartyID>
<LoginID>23</LoginID>
<FName>john</FName>
<LName>doe</LName>
</SubAccount>
<SubAccount>
<Account>946-bw-5211</Account>
<PartyID>80585e17-7a95-4f35-a8cd-c2261b7f2f02</PartyID>
<LoginID>23142123412341</LoginID>
<FName>John</FName>
- 664 -
<LName>Doe</LName>
<EmailAddress>john@resellerdocs.com</EmailAddress>
</SubAccount>
.
.
.
<PreviousRecords>-18</PreviousRecords>
<Count>88</Count>
<RecordsDisplayed>25</RecordsDisplayed>
<StartLetter>D</StartLetter>
</SubAccounts>
<Command>GETSUBACCOUNTS</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>5de6f4fa-69b3-4107-a34e-a1f6b-
beb58f4</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l CheckLogin
l CreateAccount
l CreateSubAccount
l DeleteContact
l DeleteSubaccount
l GetAccountInfo
- 665 -
l GetAllAccountInfo
l GetOrderDetail
l GetOrderList
l GetReport
l GetTransHistory
l GetWebHostingAll
l SendAccountEmail
l SubAccountDomains
l UpdateAccountInfo
GetSubaccountsDetailList
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of subaccounts, and contact information for their owners.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve contact information for your subaccounts.
Availability
Constraints
- 666 -
Input parameters



LoginID Subaccount ID
FName First name of the subaccount owner
LName Last name of the subaccount owner
EMailAddress Email address of the subaccount owner
OrganizationName Organization of the subaccount owner
URL URL of the subaccount owners business
JobTitle Job title of the subaccount owner
Address1 Street address of the subaccount owners address, first line
Address2 Street address of the subaccount owners address, second line
City Subaccount owners city
StateProvince Subaccount owners state or province
PostalCode Subaccount owners postal code
Country Subaccount owners country
Phone Subaccount owners phone number
- 667 -
Fax Subaccount owners fax number
PhoneExt Extension of subaccount owners phone number
Reseller status. 1 indicates this is a reseller subaccount; 0

Reseller
indicates retail.
Password If this is a retail account, the account password

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests a list of the subaccounts of account resellid, with owners
contact information, and requests the response in XML format:
Query
command=GetSubaccountsDetailList&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&ResponseType=xml
The response is a list of subaccounts with the owner information:

Output
- 668 -
<SubAccountDetailList>
<SubAccount>
<LoginID>-Oler</LoginID>
<FName>John</FName>
<LName>Doe</LName>
<OrganizationName>-</OrganizationName>
<URL/>
<JobTitle>-</JobTitle>
<Address2/>
<StateProvince>AL</StateProvince>
<Phone>+1.1234567890</Phone>
<Fax/>
<PhoneExt/>
<Reseller>False</Reseller>
<Password>tester123</Password>
</SubAccount>
<SubAccount>
<LoginID>.Olerud5</LoginID>
<FName>John</FName>
<LName>Doe</LName>
<OrganizationName>-</OrganizationName>
<URL/>
<JobTitle>-</JobTitle>
<Address2/>
<StateProvince/>
<Phone>test</Phone>
<Fax/>
<PhoneExt/>
<Reseller>False</Reseller>
<Password>.Olerud5</Password>
</SubAccount>
- 669 -
.
.
.
<SubAccounts>409</SubAccounts>
</SubAccountDetailList>
<Command>GETSUBACCOUNTSDETAILLIST</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l GetSubAccounts
l GetWebHostingAll
l SubAccountDomains
GetTLDDetails
Description
Definition
Retrieve TLD characteristics in detail for a specified TLD.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve TLD characteristics in detail for a specified TLD.
- 670 -
Availability
Multiple pages to drive specific characteristic based on TLD.
Constraints
Input parameters

Top Level Domain. If not declared, this

command returns sumarized chara-
TLD Optional 16
teristics for all authorized TLD for this
account.


TLDID Top Level Domain identification number
TLD Top Level Domain name
AbleToLock Support domain lock to prevent transfer?
- 671 -
Allow domain's contacts to use WHOIS Privacy Protection
AllowWPPS
Service (WPPS)?
AutoRenewOnly Allow user to renew domain manually at any time?
Require user to add extended attributes on domain regis-

ExtAttributes
tration?
AllowWBL Allow domain to use WHOIS Business Listing (WBL)?
TransRequiresNewContact Require a new registrant contact for transfer
Support Internationalized Domain Name (IDN)? If not empty,

EncodingType
the TLD supports IDN
LangCode IDN natural character encoding type
NativeDisplay Native characters for the IDN TLD
ClearPhoneNumber Clear phone number as part of contact creation
ClearFax Clear fax number as part of contact creation
ValidateDNSHosting Perform check to the Registry if this TLD can be hosted
HasPremiumNames Support premium domain name category?
Registration - Realtime Support realtime registration?
Registration - Unit Registration quantity unit
Registration - Minimum Registration minimum unit
Registration - Maximum Registration maximum unit
Registration - HasPremiumNames Support premium domain name registration?
Registration - ExtAttributes Require extended attributes for registration?
Registration - DomainLevel Support domain level extended attributes?
Registration - DNSRequired Require DNS for registration?
Registration - DNSMinimum Minimum number of DNS
Registration - DNSMaximum Maximum number of DNS
Registration - Gen-
Date and time the TLD enters General Availability
eralAvailabilityStartDate
Renewal - AutoRenewOnly Allow user to renew domain manually at any time?
Does Registry renew the domain automatically on day of expir-

Renewal - AutoRenewed
ation?
- 672 -
How many months does the registry allow user to renew the
Renewal - RenewBeforeExpMonths
domain prior to the expiration date?
Renewal - DeleteType Deletion type. Legacy parameter
Number of days from the expiration date, that we delete a

Renewal - DeleteDay domain name. If negative, we delete the domain name prior to
the expiration date
How many days after registration/renewal can the domain be

Renewal - GracePeriod
deleted and a full refund issued?
Can the domain be renewed after the expiration date? Flag

Renewal - Reactivate
used by order processing
Can the domain be renewed after the expiration date? Flag

Renewal - Restorable
used by user interface
Can domain be restored after deletion. Flag used by auto

Renewal - RGP
renewals
After domain is deleted, how long does the Registry allow for
Renewal - RGPDays
redemption period
Renewal - ExtendedRGP Support Extended RGP?
The number of years the expiration date will be extended when

Renewal - TransferPeriod
a domain transfers.
Transfer - Transferable Support transfer?
Support Authorization Info or Extensible Provisioning Protocol

Transfer - AuthInfo
(EPP) Key
Transfer - Realtime Support realtime transfer request?
Transfer - AutoVerification Support auto verification transfer?
Transfer - AutoFax Support auto fax transfer?
Support transfer approval using an FOA email to the losing

Transfer - TransferByFOA
registrant
Transfer - RequiresNewContact Require a new registrant contact for transfer
PremiumNames - HasPremiumNames Support premium domain name registration?
PremiumNames - MaxPremi- Maximum number of years a premium domain can be

umRegYears registered
The date when the registry will support TM claims check. If

PremiumNames - TrademarkStartDate
null, the Registry does not support TM claims check
- 673 -
NameServers - RequiresDNS Require DNS for registration?
NameServers - MinNameServers Minimum number of DNS
NameServers - MaxNameServers Maximum number of DNS

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves TLD characteristics in detail for a specified TLD, and
Query
Command=GetTLDDetails&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw
&Responsetype=xml&SLD=Ninja

Output
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
- 674 -
<tlds>
<tld>
<TLDID>298</TLDID>
<TLD>ninja</TLD>
<AbleToLock>True</AbleToLock>
<AllowWPPS>True</AllowWPPS>
<AutoRenewOnly>False</AutoRenewOnly>
<ExtAttributes>False</ExtAttributes>
<AllowWBL>True</AllowWBL>
<TransRequiresNewContact>False</TransRequiresNewContact>
<EncodingType>PUNY</EncodingType>
<LangCode></LangCode>
<NativeDisplay></NativeDisplay>
<ClearPhoneNumber>False</ClearPhoneNumber>
<ClearFax>False</ClearFax>
<ValidateDNSHosting>False</ValidateDNSHosting>
<HasPremiumNames>True</HasPremiumNames>
<Registration>
<Realtime>True</Realtime>
<Unit>Year</Unit>
<Minimum>1</Minimum>
<Maximum>10</Maximum>
<ExtAttributes>False</ExtAttributes>
<ExtAttributesDomainLevel>False</ExtAttributesDomainLevel>
<DNSRequired>True</DNSRequired>
<DNSMinimum>2</DNSMinimum>
<DNSMaximum>13</DNSMaximum>
<GeneralAvailabilityStartDate>2014-05-28T10:00:00</Gen-
eralAvailabilityStartDate>
</Registration>
<Renewal>
<AutoRenewOnly>False</AutoRenewOnly>
<AutoRenewed>True</AutoRenewed>
<RenewBeforeExpMonths>0</RenewBeforeExpMonths>
<DeleteType>0</DeleteType>
<DeleteDay>42</DeleteDay>
<GracePeriod>5</GracePeriod>
<Reactivate>True</Reactivate>
<Restorable>True</Restorable>
<RGP>True</RGP>
- 675 -
<RGPDays>32</RGPDays>
<ExtendedRGP>True</ExtendedRGP>
<TransferPeriod>1</TransferPeriod>
</Renewal>
<Transfer>
<Transferable>True</Transferable>
<AuthInfo>True</AuthInfo>
<Realtime>False</Realtime>
<AutoVerification>True</AutoVerification>
<AutoFax>True</AutoFax>
<TransferByFOA>False</TransferByFOA>
<RequiresNewContact>False</RequiresNewContact>
</Transfer>
<PremiumNames>
<MaxPremiumRegYears>True</MaxPremiumRegYears>
<TrademarkStartDate>2014-04-30T10:00:00</Trade-
markStartDate>
</PremiumNames>
<NameServers>
<RequiresDNS>True</RequiresDNS>
<MinNameServers>False</MinNameServers>
<MaxNameServers>False</MaxNameServers>
</NameServers>
</tld>
</tlds>
<Command>GETTLDDETAILS</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<TrackingKey>1bfc0cc0-69c4-446c-93a0-79bafe666ee3</Track-
ingKey>
- 676 -

<debug/>
GetTLDList
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of the TLDs that you offer.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of the TLDs that you offer. If you have not specifically
authorized TLDs then this command returns all TLDs offered by us.
Use the AuthorizeTLD command to authorize TLDs and the RemoveTLD command to
remove TLDs from authorized status for your account.
Availability
Clicking the TLD pricing tab shows a table that includes all TLDs offered by this account
(although the contents of this particular table are retrieved by a different command than
GetTLDList).
Constraints
Input parameters
- 677 -



Top-level domain name (extension). If ResponseType=text or
TLDX
html, each entry is indexed X.
Number of TLDs listed in this response (that is, the number of

TLDCount
TLDs authorized by this account)

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 678 -
Example
The following query retrieves a list of TLDs authorized for this account, and sends the
Query
command=gettldlist&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&responsetype=xml

Output

<tldlist>
<tld>
<tld>com</tld>
</tld>
<tld>
<tld>net</tld>
</tld>
<tld>
<tld>org</tld>
</tld>
<tld>
<tld>us</tld>
</tld>
<tld>
<tld>info</tld>
</tld>
<tld>
<tld>biz</tld>
</tld>
<tld>
<tld>co.uk</tld>
</tld>
<tld>
<tld>org.uk</tld>
</tld>
<tld>
- 679 -
<tld>de</tld>
</tld>
<tldcount>9</tldcount>
</tldlist>
<Command>GETTLDLIST</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site />
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AuthorizeTLD
l PE_SetPricing
l RemoveTLD
GetTransHistory
Description
Definition
Return a list of up to 25 transactions in an account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve an overview of transactions.
Availability
- 680 -
When the my enom submenu is open on the left side of the Web page, clicking the trans-
actions link calls the GetTransHistory command.
Constraints
Input parameters

Return sets of 25 records in reverse chro-

Optional; default is nological order. For example, StartPos-
StartPosition 4
1 ition=26 returns the 26th through 50th
most recent transactions. Defaults to 1.
Beginning date of transactions to return.

Optional; if omit-
Must be no more than six months before
StartDate ted, six months of 10
EndDate. Permitted format is
orders are returned
MM/DD/YYYY
End date of transactions to return. Must

Optional; default is be no more than six months after
EndDate 10
todays date StartDate. Permitted format is
MM/DD/YYYY
- 681 -


AdjustedBeginDate Start date for this response
AdjustedEndDate End date for this response
FName First (given) name
LName Last (family) name
Party identification number. Format is 32 hexadecimal char-

PartyID
acters, hyphenated, in curly braces
Start position of this response, in the reverse chronological list

CurrentStartPosition
of transactions
RecordCount Number of transactions in the transaction history
Start position of the next response, in the reverse chronological

NewStartPosition
list of transactions
Start position of the previous response, in the reverse chro-

OldStartPosition
nological list of transactions
Time stamp indicates when the transaction was submitted to

Trans-Date
our accounting system
Amount Amount of the transaction, $US
TransDescription Word description of this transaction
Identification number of this transaction type. Values are:

1 Order
2 Debit Credit Card
3 Credit Credit Card
4 Refill Reseller Account
5 Check Refill
TransType 7 Credit Reseller Balance
6 Debit Reseller Balance
8 Transfer Order
9 Reverse Refi ll
10 Refund and Reverse Commissions
11 Transfer from commission account
12 Commission account cashout
- 682 -
16 Sales Commission
17 CCTransaction Fee
20 Refund and Reverse Commissions with Charge Back
21 Charge Back
22 Reverse Commission
23 Reverse Commission with Charge Back
25 Preregistration Fee
26 Activation Fee
28 Refill Service Convenience Charge
30 PDQ Annual Fee
32 Refill Reseller Account (No Service Charge)
LinkValue Used in XML to build links to individual orders.
OrderID Order identification number, a nine-digit number
OrderProcessFlag True indicates the order has been successfully processed.
Balance Balance in the account following this transaction.
ComBalance Commission balance following this transaction.
Status of the transaction. Options are:

1 Ready for billing (Processing in UI)
TransStatus 2 Transaction failed (Failed in UI)
3 Transaction successful (Successful in UI)
6 Void (Voided in UI)
Language Language

ErrCount

ErrX
ResponseCount Response count
MinPeriod Minimum registration period, for domain name purchases
MaxPeriod Maximum registration period, for domain name purchases
Server Name of server
Site Name of site
IsLockable Is this a lockable domain name.
IsRealTimeTLD Is this a TLD that supports real-time purchase.
- 683 -
TimeDifference Time difference between end user and our server
ExecTime Time to execute this API query

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the transaction history for account resellid, and requests
Query
command=GetTransHistory&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&responsetype=xml
By default, the response gives a summary of the 25 most recent transactions:

Output

<GetTransHistory>
<AdjustedBeginDate />
<AdjustedEndDate />
<FName>John</FName>
<LName>Doe</LName>
<PartyID>{BB4A2DE1-6485-45CB-A4FC-EE39BA0C1629}</PartyID>
<CurrentStartPosition>1</CurrentStartPosition>
- 684 -
<RecordCount>396</RecordCount>
<NewStartPosition>26</NewStartPosition>
<OldStartPosition>0</OldStartPosition>
<TransHistory>
<Transaction>
<Trans-Date>7/18/2007 1:25:11 PM</Trans-Date>
<Amount>-$4.40</Amount>
<TransDescription>Order</TransDescription>
<TransType>1</TransType>
<LinkValue>
OrderDetail.asp?OrderID=157385793&OrderProcess=Successful
</LinkValue>
<Balance>$7,028.39</Balance>
<ComBalance />
<TransStatus>Successful</TransStatus>
</Transaction>
<Transaction>
<Trans-Date>7/16/2007 2:05:01 AM</Trans-Date>
<Amount>-$8.95</Amount>
<TransDescription>Order</TransDescription>
<TransType>1</TransType>
<LinkValue>
OrderDetail.asp?OrderID=157385407&OrderProcess=Successful
</LinkValue>
<Balance>$7,032.79</Balance>
<ComBalance />
<TransStatus>Successful</TransStatus>
</Transaction>
.
.
.
</TransHistory>
</GetTransHistory>
<Command>GETTRANSHISTORY</Command>
<MinPeriod />
- 685 -
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CheckLogin
l CreateAccount
l CreateSubAccount
l GetAccountInfo
l GetAllAccountInfo
l GetOrderDetail
l GetOrderList
l GetReport
l GetSubAccounts
l RefillAccount
l RPT_GetReport
l UpdateAccountInfo
GetWebHostingAll
Description
Definition
Retrieve reseller keys for Registry Rocket accounts.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve reseller keys for Registry Rocket accounts.
- 686 -
Do not use this command to retrieve prices, because the prices returned here may be
obsolete. Instead, use one of the PE_Get* pricing commands.
Availability
In the Registry Rocket Settings box at the bottom of the page, the ResellerKey line posts
the return value from the GetWebHostingAll command.
Constraints
Input parameters


- 687 -

ResellerKey Registry Rocket reseller key
Price when this Registry Rocket account was created; likely to

HostPrice
be obsolete. For current pricing, use the PE_Get*commands.

CCPrice

InfoPrice

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of the reseller keys for account resellid, and sends
Query
command=GetWebhostingAll&uid=resellid
- 688 -
In the response, the results for ResellerKey and the ErrCount of 0 confirm that the query
was successful:
Output
<RocketLink>
<ResellerKey>20B0FF00-18C2-4425-9198-5</ResellerKey>
<HostPrice>11.21</HostPrice>
<CCPrice>27.69</CCPrice>
<InfoPrice>11.21</InfoPrice>
<BizPrice>7.14</BizPrice>
<TvPrice>43.14</TvPrice>
<WsPrice>16.36</WsPrice>
<BzPrice>27.69</BzPrice>
<NuPrice>27.69</NuPrice>
<UsPrice>11.21</UsPrice>
<PictureURL/>
<ContactEmail/>
<CompanyName>RRTest</CompanyName>
<Referrer/>
<NameMyPhone>False</NameMyPhone>
<NameMyComputer>False</NameMyComputer>
<NameMyMap>False</NameMyMap>
<SiteBuilder>False</SiteBuilder>
<StyleSheetNum>1</StyleSheetNum>
</RocketLink>
<success>False</success>
<Command>GETWEBHOSTINGALL</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
- 689 -
<TrackingKey>75373637-e0d2-4b8a-b56d-55765f16d96a</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l GetSubAccounts
l PE_GetRetailPrice
l PE_GetRocketPrice
l PE_SetPricing
l Purchase
GetWhoisContact
Description
Definition
Get Whois contact information for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to get contact information for any domain name registered through
eNom or its resellers.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com
On the enom.com home page, the Whois link at the top of the page calls the
GetWhoisContact command.
- 690 -
Constraints
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


ContactType Type of contact data being returned
RegistrantOrganization Organization information
RegistrantFName First name
RegistrantLName Last name
RegistrantAddress1 Address line 1
RegistrantAddress2 Address line 2
RegistrantCity City
- 691 -
RegistrantStateProvince State or province
RegistrantPostalCode Postal Code
RegistrantCountry Country
RegistrantPhone Phone number
RegistrantFax Fax number
RegistrantEmailAddress Email address
Whoisregistrar Registrar for the name
Whoisupdated-by Registrar that last updated the Whois info
Whoisstatus Status of the name
Whoisupdated-date Date of last update
Whoiscreated-date Creation date for the name
Whoisregistration-expiration-date Current expiration date
Whoiscreated-by Registrar that created the information for the name
WhoisnameserverCount Number of name servers associated with this name
Name servers. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or

WhoisnameserverX
HTML.

ErrCount
Error messages explaining the failure. These can be presen-

ErrX
tedas is back to the client.

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 692 -
l If additional contact types are returned other than Registrant they will be
"ContactType" Technical,Administrative or Billing.
Example
The following query requests the whois contact information for resellerdocs.com, and
Query
command=getwhoiscontact&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw

Output
<GetWhoisContacts>
<domainname sld="resellerdocs" tld-
d="com">resellerdocs.com</domainname>
<AboutusLink>True</AboutusLink>
<contacts>
<contact ContactType="Registrant">
<Organization>Whois Privacy Protection Service, Inc.</Or-
ganization>
<Phone>+1.4252740657</Phone>
<PhoneExt/>
<Fax>+1.4256960234</Fax>
<EmailAd-
dress>cmktwnrb@whoisprivacyprotect.com</EmailAddress>
</contact>
- 693 -
.
.
.
</contacts>
<businesslisting>
<listing>
<wblid>1010</wblid>
<expdate>2012-11-13T14:25:57.460</expdate>
<expdate>1</expdate>
<companyname>My Super Company</companyname>
<companydescription>We make super cool stuff</-
companydescription>
<street>123 Anywhere Street</street>
<street2>Suite 100</street2>
<city>Peoria</city>
<stateprovince>IL</stateprovince>
<postalcode>10001</postalcode>
<country>US</country>
<configuration>
<fields>
<field fieldname="Associations">
<value>My associations</value>
</field>
<field fieldname="Tags">
<value>My tags</value>
</field>
<field fieldname="Promotions">
<value>My Promotions</value>
</field>
</fields>
</configuration>
</listing>
</businesslisting>
<rrp-info>
<nameserver>
<nameserver>DNS3.NAME-SERVICES.COM</nameserver>
- 694 -
</nameserver>
<updated-date>2011-09-28 20:17:36.000</updated-date>
<created-date>2002-06-25 20:24:35.000</created-date>
<registration-expiration-date>2015-08-21 17:45:35.000</re-
gistration-expiration-date>
<status>
<status>ok</status>
</status>
<domain>resellerdocs.com</domain>
</rrp-info>
<StatusValues>True</StatusValues>
</GetWhoisContacts>
<DomainExpired>False</DomainExpired>
<Source>ENOM</Source>
<Command>GETWHOISCONTACT</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l AddContact
l Contacts
l GetAddressBook
l GetContacts
- 695 -
l GetExtAttributes
l GetResellerInfo
l GetServiceContact
l Preconfigure
GetWPPSInfo
Description
Definition
Retrieve the ID Protect (Whois privacy protection) status and contact information for a
domain name.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve ID Protect status for a domain name.
Availability
http://enomson/domains/DomainDetail.asp?DomainNameID=152533676
In the id protect section, the configure button calls the GetWPPSInfo command.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 696 -


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


DomainNameID Domain name ID number, from our database
WPPSAllowed Whether ID Protect is available for this TLD
WPPSExists Whether this domain has an ID Protect subscription
WPPSEnabled Whether ID Protect is enabled for this domain
WPPSExpDate Expiration date for this domains ID Protect subscription
Whether auto-renew is enabled for this domains ID Protect

WPPSAutoRenew
subscription
WPPSPrice Yearly fee for this domains ID Protect subscription
ContactType The contact type for this set of contact information
Organization The organization name for this contact
FName First name for this contact
LName Last name for this contact
Address1 Address, first line, for this contact
Address2 Address, second line, for this contact
City City for this contact
- 697 -
StateProvince State or province for this contact
PostalCode Postal code for this contact
Country Country for this contact
Phone Phone number for this contact
Fax Fax number for this contact
EmailAddress Email address for this contact

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests ID Protect settings for resellerdocs.com and sends the
Query
command=GetWPPSInfo&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
- 698 -
In the response, the ID Protect status information, and the ErrCount value 0, confirm that
the query wassuccessful:
Output

<GetWPPSInfo>
nameid="152533676">
resellerdocs.com
</domainname>
<WPPSAllowed>1</WPPSAllowed>
<WPPSExists>1</WPPSExists>
<WPPSEnabled>1</WPPSEnabled>
<WPPSExpDate>Nov 26, 2014</WPPSExpDate>
<WPPSAutoRenew>No</WPPSAutoRenew>
<WPPSPrice>$12.00</WPPSPrice>
<contacts>
<contact ContactType="Administrative">
<Organization>Reseller Documents Inc.</Organization>
<FName>John</FName>
<LName>Doe</LName>
<Address2 />
<Phone>+1.5555555555</Phone>
<Fax>+1.5555555556</Fax>
</contact>
.
.
.
<contact ContactType="WPPS">
<Organization>Whois Privacy Protection Service, Inc.</Or-
ganization>
- 699 -
<Phone>+1.4252740657</Phone>
<Fax>+1.4256960234</Fax>
<EmailAd-
dress>ahxkghas@whoisprivacyprotect.com</EmailAddress>
</contact>
</contacts>
</GetWPPSInfo>
<Command>GETWPPSINFO</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l DisableServices
l EnableServices
l PurchaseServices
l ServiceSelect
GM_CancelSubscription
Description
Definition
- 700 -
Cancel a goMobi subscription.

Usage
Use this command to cancel a goMobi subscription.
This command is suitable to use in conjunction with the GM_GetCancelReasons com-
mand:
GM_CancelSubscription command submits the cancellation request, and GM_
GetCancelReasons populates the menu for reasons to cancel.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/web-site-mobile-2/manage.aspx
Click a domain name.
On the subscription details page, click Cancel Service.
The Cancel Service button launches the GM_CancelSubscription command.
Constraints
l The goMobi subscription must belong to this account.
Input parameters

- 701 -

Identification number of the subscription

to be cancelled. To retrieve subscription
SubscriptionID Required 8
ID numbers, use the GM_GetSub-
scriptions command.
Reason for cancellation. Permitted val-

ues are: 1 No longer needed 2 Not as
expected 3 Price/value 4 Technical issue
5 Support issue 6 Unsupported func-
ReasonID Required 1
tionality 7 Other reason not listed You
can retrieve these reason identification
numbers and descriptions using the GM_
GetCancelReasons command.
Comment Required Users comments 250


Success Success status of this query

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 702 -
Example
The following query cancels a goMobi subscription and sends the response in XML
format:
Query
command=GM_CancelSubscription&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&SubscriptionID=90&ReasonID=7&Comment=Obsolete
&responsetype=xml
In the response, a Success value True indicates that the query was successful:
Output

<CancelSubscription>
<Success>true</Success>
</CancelSubscription>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ GM_CANCELSUBSCRIPTION ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
<![CDATA[ sjl21wresell01 ]]>
</Server>
<Site>
- 703 -
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>

</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 1.406 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ a0f04d13-51de-479b-8518-78cc7c32f4dc ]]>
</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l GM_CheckDomain
l GM_GetStatuses
GM_CheckDomain
Description
Definition
Check whether a third-level domain name is available for a goMobi mobile Web site.
- 704 -
Usage
Use this command to check whether a third-level domain of gomobinow.mobi is avail-
able for a goMobi mobile web site. For example, check example if you want users to
access your mobile Web site at example.gomobinow.mobi.
This third-level domain functionality is one of four methods by which goMobi subscribers
can provide access to their mobile web site. Other options for mobilizing their Web site
include:
l Use the third-level domain name assigned when the subscription was created (in
format GMNNN.gomobinow.mobi).
l Associate the mobilized site with a separate domain name (for example, example.-
mobi could be the mobile-friendly version of the desktop site example.com).

l Embed a JavaScript snippet in the header of the code for the desktop Web site.
The snippet identifies thevisitors device, and delivers content formatted for that
device.
Availability
Click a goMobi domain name.
In the Mobile URL row, click edit.
The Check button launches the GM_CheckDomain command.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 705 -

Third-level (host) record to check (for

example, if you want to use example.go-
ThirdLevelDomain Required 63
mobinow.mobi to access the mobile site,
use ThirdLevelDomain=example)


Available Availability status of this third-level domain.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 706 -
Example
The following query checks the availability of example.gomobinow.mobi and sends the
Query
command=GM_CheckDomain&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&ThirdLevelDomain=example&responsetype=xml

Output

<Available>
<![CDATA[ True ]]>
</Available>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ GM_CHECKDOMAIN ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
- 707 -
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 0.281 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ b4d7b79f-5b70-4388-bd89-a320c484af5f ]]>
</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l GM_GetStatuses
GM_GetCancelReasons
Description
Definition
Retrieve a menu of reasons for cancelling a goMobi subscription.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a menu of reasons for cancelling a goMobi subscription.
- 708 -
This command is suitable to use in conjunction with the GM_CancelSubscription com-

mand:
l GM_GetCancelReasons populates a dropdown menu of reasons for cancelling,
and GM_CancelSubscription submits the cancellation request.
Availability
Click a link in the Mobile Domain column.
Click Cancel Service.
The Select Reason dropdown menu is populated by the GM_GetCancelReasons com-
mand.
Constraints
Input parameters


- 709 -

Reason Reason for cancelling a goMobi subscription
ID ID number associated with this reason

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves reasons for cancelling goMobi and the identification num-
bers associated with them, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=GM_getcancelreasons&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&ThirdLevelDomain=example&responsetype=xml
In the response, a list of cancellation reasons and an ErrCount value 0 indicate that the
Output
- 710 -
<?xml version="1.0" ?><interface-response>

<CancellationReasons>
<Reason id="1">No longer Needed</Reason>
<Reason id="2">Not as expected</Reason>
<Reason id="3">Price/Value</Reason>
<Reason id="4">Technical Issue</Reason>
<Reason id="5">Support Issues</Reason>
<Reason id="6">Unsupported Functionality</Reason>
<Reason id="7">Other reason not listed</Reason>
</CancellationReasons>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ GM_GETCANCELREASONS ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 0.172 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
- 711 -
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ 19ee6f64-1d33-451c-a73c-60ad4e4a91c9 ]]>
</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l GM_CheckDomain
l GM_GetStatuses
GM_GetControlPanelLoginURL
Description
Definition
Retrieve a URL for the goMobi control panel.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a URL for the goMobi control panel. The URL includes a
five-minute login token.
All subscribers should use the control panel to confirm, or provide, content for their
mobile site.
Availability
- 712 -
The Login to goMobi Control Panel link launches the GM_GetControlPanelLoginURL
command.
Constraints
l The MobileDomainName value must be a domain name in this account.
Input parameters

Domain name associated with the

MobileDomainName Required goMobi account you want to manage, in 63
sld.tld format


URL for the goMobi control panel. The URL includes a 5-minute
LoginURL
login token
- 713 -
ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a URL for the goMobi control panel, and sends the
Query
command=GM_GetControlPanelLoginURL&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&MobileDomainName=resellerdocs.com&responsetype=xml
In the response, the presence of a URL indicates that the query was successful:
Output

<LoginUrl>
<![CDATA[ https://cpsand-
box.instantmobilizer.com/48/resellerdocs.com/
1285292045/NHodIsxGNXyDgcU%2f4Pd3PGw28xr48%2bdg9%2bApYv
OpcZ7KBowds%2bu8Xb8KYPD3U5bz8Ee%2fJjvJEl62JTPOW5pNUcMt9Fj
l7j0AetdU9CWW6hkbCVggl14Ky0x3cR9oLG6Y2S8wThDBMguwZdFq8YSE
- 714 -
1fr1dO1x1RtV375qBkbsfzo%3d/eng ]]>
</LoginUrl>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ GM_GETCONTROLPANELLOGINURL ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 0.156 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ a6436432-c856-4738-b4b6-58c7ee86058d ]]>
</TrackingKey>
- 715 -
Related commands
l GM_CheckDomain
l GM_GetStatuses
GM_GetRedirectScript
Description
Definition
Retrieve the goMobi JavaScript snippet, which the customer embeds in the header for
their source (desktop) site to power the reformatting for mobile devices.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the goMobi JavaScript snippet. The customer embeds the
snippet in the header for the desktop site associated with the source domain name.
goMobi uses this header information to detect the visitors mobile device and reformat
the desktop site for the specific mobile device.
Availability
Click any subscription that displays a designated source domain.
In the Add Mobile Site Redirect row, the text box contains a JavaScript snippet supplied
by the GM_GetRedirectScript command.
- 716 -
Constraints
l Redirect scripts require a designated source domain name.
Input parameters

Domain name of the desktop Web site to

SourceDomainName Required 70
be mobilized
Domain name that mobile device user

MobileDomainName Required types to access the mobile-formatted 70
Web site


Script, suitable for cutting and pasting into the header code for
RedirectScript the Web site associated with the SourceDomainName value
specified in the query string

ErrCount

ErrX
- 717 -
Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a JavaScript snippet for goMobi, and sends the response
in XML format:
Query
command=GM_GetRedirectScript&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&SourceDomainName=example.com
In the response, the presence of a JavaScript snippet and an ErrCount value 0 indicate
Output

<RedirectScript>
<![CDATA[ <script type="text/javascript" src="http://
detect.deviceatlas.com/redirect.js?d=example.com&
m=resellerdocs.com"></script> ]]>
</RedirectScript>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ GM_GETREDIRECTSCRIPT ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
- 718 -
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>

</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 0.141 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ 638275b6-c66f-4e9d-b092-fa5bf2f3a740 ]]>
</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l GM_CheckDomain
l GM_GetStatuses
- 719 -
GM_GetStatuses
Description
Definition
Retrieve the list of possible statuses for goMobi.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of the possible statuses for goMobi.
Availability
This command is not directly implemented on the eNom Web site, but can be used on
any page that displays a goMobi subscription status description.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 720 -



StatusID Subscription status identification number and description

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of possible statuses for goMobi, and sends the
Query
command=GM_GetStatuses&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
- 721 -
&responsetype=xml
In the response, a list of statuses and an ErrCount value 0 indicate that the query was
successful:
Output

<GoMobiStatuses>
<Status id="4">Billing Failed</Status>
<Status id="2">Cancellation Pending</Status>
<Status id="1">Service Active</Status>
<Status id="3">Service Disabled</Status>
</GoMobiStatuses>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ GM_GETSTATUSES ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
- 722 -
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 0.094 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ 2977d696-5efc-4f06-b7bd-91bb520bf708 ]]>
</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l GM_CheckDomain
GM_GetSubscriptionDetails
Description
Definition
Retrieve details for one goMobi subscription.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve details for one goMobi subscription.
Availability
- 723 -

https://resellertest.enom.com/web-site-mobile-2/details.aspx?id=90
The GM_GetSubscriptionDetails command populates this page.
Constraints
Input parameters

Identification number for the subscription

for which you want information. To
retrieve this number, use the GM_
GetSubscriptions API Command.


GMSubscriptionID Identification number for this goMobi subscription
PartyID Party identification number associated with this subscription
MobileDomainName Domain name that an end user of a mobile device should use
- 724 -
to access the mobile web site
Domain name of the desktop-format web site that needs to be

SourceDomainName
converted to mobile format
StatusDesc Status of this subscription
BillingCycleDesc Billing cycle for this subscription
NextBillingDate Next billing date for this subscription
Status identification number for this subscription. Corresponds

StatusID
to the StatusDesc value
NextBillingCycleDesc Description for the next billing cycle
RenewDate Start date for the next billing cycle

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves details for one goMobi subscription, and sends the
Query
- 725 -
command=GM_GetSubscriptionDetails&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&SubscriptionID=90&responsetype=xml
In the response, subscription details and an ErrCount value 0 indicate that the query was
successful:
Output
<GoMobiSubscriptionDetails>
<GMSubscriptionId>90</GMSubscriptionId>
<PartyId>bb4a2de1-6485-45cb-a4fc-ee39ba0c1629</PartyId>
<MobileDomainName>resellerdocs.com</MobileDomainName>
<SourceDomainName>example.com</SourceDomainName>
<StatusDesc>Service Disabled</StatusDesc>
<BillingCycleDesc>Yearly</BillingCycleDesc>
<NextBillingDate>8/31/2011</NextBillingDate>
<StatusId>3</StatusId>
<NextBillingCycleDesc>Monthly</NextBillingCycleDesc>
<RenewDate>9/14/2011</RenewDate>
<HasPassword>false</HasPassword>
</GoMobiSubscriptionDetails>
<Command>GM_GETSUBSCRIPTIONDETAILS</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>43bae90d-28bf-4223-b654-eb424831ed00</Track-
ingKey>
- 726 -
Related commands
l GM_CheckDomain
l GM_GetStatuses
GM_GetSubscriptions
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of the goMobi subscriptions in an account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of the goMobi subscriptions in an account.
Availability
The GM_GetSubscriptions command generates the list of goMobi subscriptions on this
page.
Constraints
- 727 -
Input parameters

Sort the list of goMobi subscriptions by

this parameter. Permitted values are the
return parameters in a GM_GetSub-
scriptions response:
MobileDomainName
SortBy SourceDomainName 16
StatusID
StatusDesc
NextBillingDate
StatusID
GMSubscriptionID
RenewDate
Arrange the sorted list in ascending or

SortOrder descending order? Permitted values are 4
Asc
Asc or Desc
Optional; default is Number of records to return in this

RecordsToReturn 5
25 response. Permitted values are numeric
In the sorted list, start with the entry in

this position.
StartPosition For example, to return items 26 through 5
1
50 in a sorted list, submit Record-
sToReturn=25&StartPosition=26
Return records that match this filter. Per-

mitted values are the StatusID values
Optional; if no returned by the GM_GetStatuses com-
value is supplied, mand:
StatusFilter 1
all statuses are 1 Service Active
returned 2 Cancellation Pending
3 Service Disabled
4 Billing Failed

- 728 -

MobileDomainName Domain name that displays this mobilized site
Domain name of the desktop web site from which this mobile
SourceDomainName
site derives its content
StatusDesc Status description of this goMobi subscription
Next billing date:

NextBillingDate 7 days ahead of expiration date for monthly billing
14 days ahead of expiration for yearly billing
Status identification number corresponding to the StatusDesc

StatusId
value
GMSubscriptionId Identification number for this goMobi subscription
TotalCount Total number of goMobi subscriptions in this list

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of goMobi subscriptions and sends the response in
XML format:
- 729 -
Query
command=GM_GetSubscriptions&uid=resellid
In the response, a list of subscriptions and an ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query
was successful:
Output
<GoMobiSubscriptions>
<Subscription>
<MobileDomainName>GM89.gomobinow.mobi</MobileDomainName>
<SourceDomainName>teldom.si</SourceDomainName>
<StatusDesc>Service Active</StatusDesc>
</Subscription>
<Subscription>
<SourceDomainName/>
</Subscription>
<Subscription>
<SourceDomainName/>
</Subscription>
<Subscription>
<SourceDomainName>teldom.si</SourceDomainName>
- 730 -
</Subscription>
<Subscription>
<SourceDomainName/>
</Subscription>
<Subscription>
<MobileDomainName>namita.gomobinow.mobi</MobileDomainName>
<SourceDomainName/>
</Subscription>
<Subscription>
<MobileDomainName>resellerdocs.com</MobileDomainName>
<SourceDomainName>example.com</SourceDomainName>
<StatusDesc>Service Disabled</StatusDesc>
</Subscription>
<TotalCount>9</TotalCount>
</GoMobiSubscriptions>
<Command>GM_GETSUBSCRIPTIONS</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
- 731 -
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>ccf60879-a285-4b79-9315-897859daf6b7</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l GM_CheckDomain
l GM_GetStatuses
GM_ReactivateSubscription
Description
Definition
Remove the cancellation flag from a goMobi subscription.
Usage
Use this command to undo the cancellation request for a goMobi subscription.
Availability
- 732 -

Click a subscription that is in status Cancellation Pending.
The Reactivate Now link launches the GM_ReactivateSubscription command.
Constraints
l The goMobi subscription must belong to this account, and must be flagged for can-
cellation.
Input parameters

Identification number of the goMobi sub-

scription to be reactivated. To retrieve
the subscription ID, use the GM_GetSub-
scriptions command.


- 733 -

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query removes the cancellation request from a goMobi subscription, and
Query
command=GM_ReactivateSubscription&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
Output

<ReactivateSubscription>
</ReactivateSubscription>
<Command>
- 734 -
<![CDATA[ GM_REACTIVATESUBSCRIPTION ]]>

</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 1.000 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ 96296481-599f-4385-a60a-1d1570c6d8d3 ]]>
</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l GM_CheckDomain
- 735 -
l GM_GetStatuses
GM_RenewSubscription
Description
Definition
Renew a goMobi subscription for which the status is Service Disabled (status 3) or
Billing Failed (status 4).
Usage
Us this command to renew a goMobi subscription Service Disabled (status 3, usually an
expired subscription) or Billing Failed (status 4, usually due to insufficient account bal-
ance).
Availability
For any subscription with status Billing Failed (StatusID=4), clicking the Charge Account
link launches the GM_RenewSubscription command.
Constraints
l The goMobi subscription must be in Billing Failed status.
- 736 -
Input parameters

Identification number of the expired

goMobi subscription. To retrieve the Sub-
scriptionID, use the GM_GetSub-
scriptions command.



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 737 -
Example
The following query renews a goMobi subscription for which the previous billing attempt
failed, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=GM_RenewSubscription&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
In the response, a Success value True and an OrderID number indicate that the query
was successful:
Output

<RenewSubscription>
</RenewSubscription>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ GM_RENEWSUBSCRIPTION ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
- 738 -
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 1.172 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ 1a5d4041-46d3-41f4-b84c-ec138035732f ]]>
</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l GM_CheckDomain
l GM_GetStatuses
- 739 -
GM_UpdateBillingCycle
Description
Definition
Change a goMobi billing cycle to monthly or yearly.
Usage
Use this command to switch between monthly and yearly billing for a goMobi sub-
scription.
Availability
In the Subscription Details section, the Switch to Annual Subscription link launches the
GM_UpdateBillingCycle command (the API command also allows you to change from
yearly to monthly billing, but we do not implement this option in our user interface).
Constraints
l The goMobi subscription must be in this account.
Input parameters
- 740 -

Identification number for the goMobi sub-

scription. To retrieve SubscriptionID val-
ues, use the GM_GetSubscriptions
command.
Billing cycle to change to. Permitted val-

ues are:
Months Required 15
1 Monthly billing
12 Yearly billing



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 741 -
Example
The following query updates a goMobi subscription to yearly billing, and sends the
Query
command=GM_UpdateBillingCycle&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&SubscriptionID=89&Months=12&responsetype=xml
Output

<UpdateBillingCycle>
</UpdateBillingCycle>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ GM_UPDATEBILLINGCYCLE ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
- 742 -
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 0.109 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ cf2d2d1b-5f13-4687-9f52-caa5aa5074ed ]]>
</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l GM_CheckDomain
l GM_GetStatuses
GM_UpdateSubscriptionDetails
Description
Definition
Configure or update the source and mobile domain names for a goMobi subscription.
Usage
- 743 -
Use this command to configure or update the source domain name (the full-sized web
site) and mobile domain name (site you want to display on mobile devices).
Availability
Click the domain name for the subscription you want to configure.
The Subscription Overview section receives input parameters, and the Save Settings but-
ton launches the GM_UpdateSubscriptionDetails command.
Constraints
l The mobile domain name must be in the same account as the goMobi sub-
scription.
Input parameters

Identification number for this goMobi sub-

scription. To retrieve SubscriptionID val-
ues, use the GM_GetSubscriptions
command.
- 744 -

Domain name for the main Web site (the
full-size site). Permitted input formats
include: SLD.TLD subdomain.SLD.TLD
SourceDomainName Required 70
goMobi does not limit the number of
levels of subdomains in the domain name
The domain mobile device users should

use to access the mobile-optimized site.
This domain must be registered with us
or use our DNS Hosting. This domain
MobileDomainName Required can be any TLD except .tel. Permitted 70
input formats include: SLD.TLD host-
names.SLD.TLD goMobi does not limit
the number of levels of host names (sub-
domains) in the mobile domain name



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 745 -
Example
The following query specifies that resellerdocs.com should be the mobile domain name
associated with desktop Web site example.com, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=GM_UpdateSub-
scriptionDetails&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&SubscriptionID=90&SourceDomainName=example.com
Output

<UpdateSubscriptionDetails>
</UpdateSubscriptionDetails>
<Command>
- <![CDATA[ GM_UPDATESUBSCRIPTIONDETAILS ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
- <![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
- <![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
- <![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
- <![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
- <![CDATA[ sjl21wresell01 ]]>
</Server>
<Site>
- <![CDATA[ enom ]]>
- 746 -
</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
- <![CDATA[ 4.547 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
- <![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ c769a335-5f2b-4440-9797-a65bc0a95641 ]]>
</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l GM_CheckDomain
l GM_GetStatuses
HostPackageDefine
Description
Definition
Create and configure, or reconfigure, a Web hosting package that you offer to your retail
customers.
- 747 -
Usage
Use this command to create and configure, or reconfigure, a Web hosting package that
you offer to your retail customers.
Availability
http://enom.staging.enom.com/myaccount/hostingpricing.asp
The save packages button calls the HostPackageDefine command.
Constraints
Input parameters

Name of this Web hosting package. To

Either Pack-
retrieve a list of currently defined pack-
PackageName ageName or Pack- 11
ages, use the WebHostGetReseller-
ageID is Required
Packages command.
ID number of this Web hosting package.

Either Pack-
To retrieve a list of currently defined
PackageID ageName or Pack- 6
packages, use the WebHostGetReseller-
ageID is Required
Packages command.
- 748 -

Operating system of the Web server for
OSType this Web hosting package. Permitted val- 2
Windows
ues are Windows or Linux

this Web hosting package. Each unit con-
BandwidthUnits Required 2
tains 20GB; maximum permitted is 150

in this Web hosting package. Each unit
WebStorageUnits Required 2
contains 1GB; maximum permitted is
400 units (total of 400GB).
Type of database storage to offer with

Optional; default is this Web hosting package. Permitted val-
DBType 6
Access ues are Access and MSSQL. If this para-
meter is omitted, the default is Access.
Recommended if
DBType=MSSQL.
to include in this Web hosting package.
If this input param
DBStorageUnits Each unit contains 250MB of MDF file 2
is omitted, value
capacity; maximum permitted is 30 units
remains at the last
(7500MB).
value set.

POPUnits Required 2
tains 10 email boxes; maximum per-
mitted is 30 units (300 mailboxes).
Number of domain header units to

include in this Web hosting package.
DomainHeaders Required Each unit includes 10 domain headers; 2
maximum permitted is 10 units (100
domain headers).
Operating system of the server that will

OSType Optional host this Web hosting package. Per- 2
mitted value is Windows.

- 749 -

Success Success status of the query

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query defines a Web hosting package named Enterprise and sends the
Query
command=HOSTPACKAGEDEFINE&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&PackageName=Enterprise&BandWidthUnits=5
&WebStorageUnits=10&DBType=MSSQL
&DBStorageUnits=5&PopUnits=10&DomainHeaders=50
&responsetype=xml
In the response, the Success value True and the ErrCount value 0 confirm that the Web
hosting package was defined successfully:
Output
- 750 -

<Command>HOSTPACKAGEDEFINE</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
l GetHostAccount
l GetStorageUsage
l HostPackageDelete
l HostPackageModify
l HostPackageView
l HostParkingPage
- 751 -
HostPackageDelete
Description
Definition
Delete a host package configuration.
Usage
Use this command to delete a host package configuration.
Availability
In the Set Packages section, clicking a delete link and then the save packages button
calls the HostPackageDelete command.
Constraints
Input parameters
&pw=yourpassword&paramname=paramvalue&
nextparamname=nextparamvalue

- 752 -

Name of the Web hosting package to be

Either Pack- deleted. To retrieve a list of currently
PackageName ageName or Pack- defined packages, use the 11
ageID is Required WebHostGetResellerPackages com-
mand.
ID number of the Web hosting package

Either Pack- to be deleted. To retrieve a list of cur-
PackageID ageName or Pack- rently defined packages, use the 6
ageID is Required WebHostGetResellerPackages com-
mand.



ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 753 -
Example
The following query deleteThe following query deletes Web hosting package Cor-
porate4 and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=HOSTPACKAGEDELETE&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&PackageName=Corporate4&responsetype=xml
In the response, the Success value True confirms that that query was successful:
Output
<?xml version="1.0" ?>t;

<Command>HOSTPACKAGEDELETE</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
l GetHostAccount
l GetStorageUsage
l HostPackageDefine
l HostPackageModify
- 754 -
l HostPackageView
l HostParkingPage
HostPackageModify
Description
Definition
Change the quantity of one or more components in a Web hosting package.
Usage
Use this command to change the configuration of storage, bandwidth, and so on in a
Web hosting package. If you make changes to a package that customers have already
subscribed to, their configuration remains the same as when they subscribed; the
change applies only to future customers.
Availability
Changing quantities in the Set Packages grid and clicking the save changes button calls
the
HostPackageModify command.
Constraints
- 755 -
Input parameters

Either the Pack- ID number of this Web hosting package.

ageID or Pack- To retrieve a list of currently defined
PackageID 6
ageName is packages, use the WebHostGetReseller-
Required Packages command.
Either the Pack- Name of this Web hosting package. To

ageID or Pack- retrieve a list of currently defined pack-
PackageName 11
ageName is ages, use the WebHostGetReseller-
Required Packages command.

tains 20GB; maximum permitted is 150

WebStorageUnits Required contains 1GB of MDF file capacity; max- 2
imum permitted is 400 units (total of
400GB).
Optional; default is Type of database. Permitted values are

DBType 7
Access Access and MSSQL.
Recommended if
DBType=MSSQL. Number of SQL database storage units
If this input param to include in this Web hosting package.
DBStorageUnits 2
is omitted, value Each unit contains 250MB; maximum
remains at the last permitted is 30 units (total of 7500MB).
value set.
- 756 -

POPUnits Required 2
tains 10 email boxes; maximum per-
mitted is 30 units (300 mailboxes).
Number of domain header units to

include in this Web hosting package.
DomainHeaders Recommended Each unit includes 10 domain headers; 2
maximum permitted is 10 units (100
domain headers).



ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 757 -
Example
The following query modifies the contents of Web hosting package Silver and sends the
Query
command=HOSTPACKAGEMODIFY&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&PackageID=137&PackageName=Silver&BandWidthUnits=7
&WebStorageUnits=15&DBType=MSSQL&DBStorageUnits=5
&PopUnits=20&DomainHeaders=100&responsetype=xml
In the response, the Success value True indicates that the query was successful:
Output

<Command>HOSTPACKAGEMODIFY</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
- 758 -
l GetHostAccount
l GetStorageUsage
l HostPackageDefine
l HostPackageDelete
l HostPackageView
l HostParkingPage
HostPackageView
Description
Definition
View the configurations of Web hosting packages available to your retail customers.
Usage
Use this command to display the contents of the Web hosting packages available to your
retail customers.
Use this command to display the contents of a single Web hosting package available to
your retail customers.
Availability
The Set Packages table displays the results of the HostPackageView command.
- 759 -
Constraints
l The Web hosting package must belong to this domain name account.
Input parameters

Name of the Web hosting package you

want information about. Include this para-
Optional; if omit- meter or PackageID to specify a single
PackageName ted, all are returned package you want information about. To 11
retrieve a list of currently defined pack-
ages, use the WebHostGetReseller-
Packages command.
Package ID of the Web hosting package

you want information about. Include this
parameter or PackageName to specify a
Optional; if omit- single package you want information
PackageID 8
ted, all are returned about. To retrieve a list of currently
defined packages, use the
WebHostGetResellerPackages com-
mand.

- 760 -

Responses in HTML or text format are numbered, X=1 to
PackageIDX
Count ID number for this Web hosting package
PackageNameX Name of this Web hosting package
Gigabytes per calendar month allocated to the Web hosting

BandwidthGBX
account
Megabytes of storage for Web site content available to the

WebStorageMBX
Web hosting account
Megabytes of database storage available to this Web hosting

DBStorageMBX
account
Number of POP email boxes supplied with this web hosting

POPMailBoxesX
account
Number of units of storage for Web site content available to the

WebStorageUnitsX
Web hosting account
Number of units of bandwidth allocated to this Web hosting

BandwidthUnitsX
account
Number of units of database storage available to this Web host-

DBStorageUnitsX
ing account
Number of POP email units supplied with this web hosting

POPUnitsX
account
Number of domain headers allowed in this Web hosting

DomainHeadersX
account
DBTypeX Type of database configured for this Web hosting account
OSTypeX Operating system of the Web server that serves this account
EnabledX Enabled status of this Web hosting package
Total number of Web hosting packages in this domain name

Count
account

ErrCount

Err(x)
- 761 -
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the Web hosting packages defined for account resellid and
Query
command=HOSTPACKAGEVIEW&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&responsetype=xml
In the response, a list of packages and an ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was
successful:
Output

<HostPackages>
<Package>
<WebStorageUnits>1</WebStorageUnits>
- 762 -
<DBStorageUnits>1</DBStorageUnits>
<POPUnits>5</POPUnits>
<DomainHeaders>100</DomainHeaders>
<DBType>MSSQL</DBType>
</Package>
<Package>
<DBType>MSSQL</DBType>
</Package>
.
.
.
<Count>4</Count>
</HostPackages>
<Command>HOSTPACKAGEVIEW</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
- 763 -
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
l GetHostAccount
l GetStorageUsage
l HostPackageDefine
l HostPackageDelete
l HostPackageModify
l HostParkingPage
HostParkingPage
Description
Definition
Set the text for the parking page for a Web hosting account. This is the default parking
page used by all domains in the account that do not have a designated home page.
Usage
Use this command to set the title-bar and page content of the parking page for a Web
hosting account.
Availability
webpw.
http://webhostingtest.ehost-services.com/websites/parking.asp
- 764 -
On the PARKING PAGE SETTINGS page, the save button calls the HostParkingPage
command.
Constraints
Input parameters

PageTitle Content for browser title bar 94
Welcome
Optional; a default
PageText Content for parking page 1890
is provided


ParkingPage Parking page
- 765 -
ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query sets parking text and title bar caption for domains in Web hosting
account resellwebid and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=hostparkingpage&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&hostaccount=resellwebid&PageTitle=Test+page+title
&PageText=Test+page+text&responsetype=xml
Output

<ParkingPage />
<Command>HOSTPARKINGPAGE</Command>
- 766 -
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
l GetHostAccount
l HostPackageDefine
l HostPackageModify
l HostPackageView
InsertNewOrder
Description
Definition
Insert a checkout order of items in the shopping cart.
Usage
Use this command if you use our shopping cart, to finalize purchase of the cart contents.
This command checks out the items in a shopping cart that are in A (active) status, and
puts the order in a queue.
Purchase, a similar command, completes the purchase of selected products in real time,
without using our shopping cart or waiting for the order processing queue.
Because of the high prices for some Premium Domains, we offer you a wider variety of
payment methods than for most purchases. In addition to immediate payment using your
account balance, as you do for other domains and services, we offer two additional pay-
ment options for high-value Premium Domains: wire transfer, or delayed payment using
- 767 -
your account balance. Use the UseWireTransfer parameter in the InsertNewOrder com-
mand to signal that you want to pay later, then either wire your payment or use the NM_
ProcessOrder command to pay
using your account balance.
Availability
On the checkout page, the purchase button calls the InsertNewOrder command.
Constraints
l If the shopping cart is empty, ItemCount must equal 1 or the query will return an
error message.
Input parameters


NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
ItemCount Optional Number of items ready to purchase. All 4
- 768 -

with a status of A (active). To retrieve the
statuses of items in the shopping cart,
use the GetCartContent command
If UseWireTransfer=Yes, process this

Premium Domain order as a deferred pay-
ment order. Options for later payment are
Optional overall,
wire transfer or account balance. If you
but Required defer
pay by wire transfer, contact your sales
UseWireTransfer payment of a 3
representative for wire transfer instruc-
Premium Domain
tions. If you pay using your account bal-
order
ance (but after submitting the order using
the InsertNewOrder command), use the
NM_ProcessOrder command.


Identification number for the order that includes all Premium
PremiumDomainOrderID Domains and the services directly associated with those
Premium Domains.
Identification number for the order that includes all items not
OrderID
associated with Premium Domains
ProdTypeX Product type identification number for domain names

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 769 -
Example
The following query requests purchase of the contents of the shopping cart, defers pay-
ment for the Premium Domains in the cart, and requests the response in XML format:
Query
command=insertneworder&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&UseWireTransfer=Yes&responsetype=xml
In the response, an order ID number for Premium Domains, regular items, or both con-
firms that the query string was successful:
Output
<ProdType10>10</ProdType10>
<Command>INSERTNEWORDER</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
- 770 -
Related commands
l AddBulkDomains
l AddToCart
l Check
l DeleteFromCart
l Extend
l Extend_RGP
l ExtendDomainDNS
l GetDomainExp
l GetExtendInfo
l GetRenew
l Purchase
l PurchasePreview
l SetRenew
l UpdateCart
IsFolderEnabled
Description
Definition
Retrieve the IIS-enabled status of a folder.
Usage
Use this command to determine the IIS-enabled status of a folder
Availability
Log on to webhostingtest.enom.com with Login ID resellwebid, password resellwebpw.
http://webhostingtest.enom.com/websites/advanced.asp
In the list of directories, the folder icons indicate whether the folder is enabled.
Constraints
- 771 -

Input parameters

HostAccount Required Host account name 14
Path to the directory. Use format Dir-

Directory Required Specify the directory path from the root, for- 254
initial forward slash or backslash.


Enabled IIS-enabled status of the folder

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
- 772 -
Notes
Example
The following query requests the IIS-enabled status of folder acct, and sends the
Query
command=isfolderenabled&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&hostaccount=resellwebid&directory=/acct&responsetype=xml

Output

<Enabled>False</Enabled>
<Command>ISFOLDERENABLED</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
- 773 -
Related commands
l AddDomainHeader
l AddHostHeader
l CreateHostAccount
l DisableFolderApp
l EnableFolderApp
ListDomainHeaders
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of domain headers (pointers for domain names) and host headers for a
Web hosting account.
Usage
Use this command to list the domain headers and host headers for one Web hosting
account.
Availability
In the Domains column, the modify link calls the ListDomainHeaders command.
Constraints
l The domain header must belong to this Web hosting account.
- 774 -
Input parameters

Name of the Web hosting account for

which you want a list of domain headers


Domain Domain associated with the headers listed in this node
WebHostDomainID ID number from our internal records
HostHeaders Number of headers available for this host account
HostHeaderCount Number of domain headers currently defined for this domain
WebHostHeaderID ID number from our internal records
HostName Name of the host record, to be used in the URL
FilePath File path location of this host record
DomainCount Number of domains associated with this Web hosting account
Operating system for the Web hosting server for this Web host-
ServerType
ing account
Successful Success status of this query

ErrCount
- 775 -
Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests a list of domain headers in Web hosting account resell-
webid and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=ListDomainHeaders&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&HostAccount=resellwebid&ResponseType=xml
The response lists the domains associated with the Web hosting account and the head-
ers in each:
Output

<DomainHeaders>
<DomainHeader>
<Domain>TestSLD1.biz</Domain>
<WebHostDomainID>105</WebHostDomainID>
<DomainNameId>152549645</DomainNameId>
<HostHeaders>15</HostHeaders>
<HostHeaderCount>2</HostHeaderCount>
- 776 -
<HostHeader>
<WebHostHeaderID>123</WebHostHeaderID>
<HostName>@</HostName>
<FilePath>\test20070903</FilePath>
</HostHeader>
<HostHeader>
<WebHostHeaderID>122</WebHostHeaderID>
<FilePath>\test20070903</FilePath>
</HostHeader>
<HeaderCount>2</HeaderCount>
</DomainHeader>
.
.
.
<ServerType>Windows</ServerType>
</DomainHeaders>
<Command>LISTDOMAINHEADERS</Command>
<Server>INTERFACESON</Server>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainHeader
l CreateHostAccount
- 777 -
ListHostHeaders
Description
Definition
List the host headers (pointers to third-level domain names) in your Web hosting
account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of host headers in your Web hosting account, with
attributes.
Availability
The ListHostHeaders command is not implemented on enom.com; however, the fol-
lowing gives a similar result:
webpw.
http://webhostingtest.ehost-services.com/wsg/packagemanager.asp
In the table, the modify links call the ListHostHeaders command.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 778 -

Web hosting account that contains the

HostAccount Required domain header you want a list of host 14
headers for

SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


The host header name; third-level domain name. For example,
HostName
in sales.example.com, the host name is sales.
Path Path from root to this host header
HostHeaderID Host header ID number, our internal record
Total number of host headers associated with this domain

Count
header

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
- 779 -
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of the host headers for Web hosting account resell-
webid, domain resellerdocs.com, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=listhostheaders&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&hostaccount=resellwebid&sld=resellerdocs
&tld=com&responsetype=xml
In the response, a list of host names and a count of the total number of host headers for
the domain indicate that the query was successful:
Output

<HostHeaders>
<HostHeader>
<HostName>@</HostName>
<Path>/</Path>
</HostHeader>
<HostHeader>
<HostName>service</HostName>
<Path>/servicedir</Path>
</HostHeader>
<HostHeader>
<Path>/</Path>
- 780 -
</HostHeader>
<Count>3</Count>
</HostHeaders>
<Command>LISTHOSTHEADERS</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainHeader
l AddHostHeader
l CreateHostAccount
l DeleteHostHeader
l GetHostAccount
l GetHostHeader
ListWebFiles
Description
Definition
List the subdirectories and files in a directory of a Web hosting account.
Usage
Use this command to create a list of subdirectories and files in a directory in your Web
hosting account.
Availability
- 781 -
webpw.
http://webhostingtest.ehost-services.com/websites/advanced.asp?Path=
The Change Directory box on the right side of the page displays some of the results of
the ListWebFiles command.
Constraints
Input parameters

HostAccount Required Web hosting account name 14
Name of the directory to list contents of. Use

format Dir-
Specify the directory path from the root, back-
slashor forward slashdelimited, with an ini-
tial backslash, forward slash, or no slash.

- 782 -

Responses in HTML or text format are numbered, X=1 to
DirectoryNameX FileCount Name of a subdirectory in the directory specified in
the query string
DirectoryAppX Is this subdirectory enabled for IIS applications?
FileNameX Name of a file in the directory specified in the query string
Number of subdirectories in the directory specified in the query

FolderCount
string
FileCount Number of files in the directory specified in the query string
ServerIP IP address of the Web server of this Web hosting account

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of directories and files in the root directory of Web
hosting account resellwebid and sends the response in XML format:
Query
- 783 -
command=listwebfiles&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&hostaccount=resellwebid&directory=\&responsetype=xml
In the response, the Successful value True confirms that the query was successful:
Output

<WebFiles>
<Directories>
<Directory>
<DirectoryName>Db</DirectoryName>
<DirectoryApp>False</DirectoryApp>
</Directory>
<Directory>
<DirectoryName>images</DirectoryName>
</Directory>
<Directory>
<DirectoryName>testdir</DirectoryName>
</Directory>
.
.
.
</Directories>
<Files>
<FileName>Default.htm</FileName>
</Files>
<FolderCount>10</FolderCount>
<FileCount>1</FileCount>
</WebFiles>
<Command>LISTWEBFILES</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
- 784 -
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainHeader
l AddHostHeader
l CreateHostAccount
l DisableFolderApp
l EnableFolderApp
l IsFolderEnabled
l MetaBaseGetValue
l MetaBaseSetValue
MetaBaseGetValue
Description
Definition
Retrieve some current IIS settings for a directory in a Web hosting account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve current settings for HTTP access, anonymous access, dir-
ectory browsing, and the pages to display in case of 404 or ASP errors.
Availability
webpw.
- 785 -
http://webhostingtest.ehost-services.com
In the menu, clicking web sites and then advanced calls the MetaBaseGetValue com-
mand. The results display on the Advanced IIS Settings page.
Constraints
l The directory must be a subdirectory you have created in this Web hosting
account.
Input parameters

Path from root to the directory you want

status for. Use format Dir-
initial forward slash, backslash, or no slash.

- 786 -

HTTPAccessible Is this directory accessible by HTTP?
AnonymousAccess Does this directory permit anonymous access?
DirectoryBrowsing Does this directory permit browsing?
Err404Page Page to display in case of HTTP 404 errors
ErrASPPage Page to display in case of ASP errors
Successful Success status for this query

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the metabase settings for directory testdir and sends the
Query
command=metabasegetvalue&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&hostaccount=resellwebid&directory=testdir
&responsetype=xml
- 787 -
In the response, the MetaBase node and the ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query
was successful:
Output

<MetaBase>
<HTTPAccessible>off</HTTPAccessible>
<Anonymousaccess>on</Anonymousaccess>
<Directorybrowsing>off</Directorybrowsing>
<Err404page>404error.htm</Err404page>
<ErrASPpage>ASPerror.htm</ErrASPpage>
</MetaBase>
<Command>METABASEGETVALUE</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainHeader
l AddHostHeader
l CreateHostAccount
l DisableFolderApp
l EnableFolderApp
l IsFolderEnabled
l ListWebFiles
l MetaBaseSetValue
- 788 -
MetaBaseSetValue
Description
Definition
Specify values for IIS settings for one directory in a Web hosting account.
Usage
Use this command to set HTTP access, anonymous access, directory browsing, the 404
error page, and the ASP error page for a directory in a Web hosting account.
Availability
webpw.
http://webhostingtest.ehost-services.com/websites/advanced.asp?Path=/testdir
The SAVE NEW FOLDER SETTINGS button calls the MetaBaseSetValue command.
Constraints
l The directory must be a subdirectory you have created in the Web hosting account.
Input parameters
- 789 -

Name of the directory to set. Use format Dir-

Directory Required Specify the directory path from the root, for- 254
initial slash.
Allow HTTP access to this directory? Per-

HTTPAccessible Optional mitted values are on and off. Default value is 3
on.
Allow anonymous access to this directory?

AnonymousAccess Optional Permitted values are on and off. Default value 3
is off.
Allow browsing to this directory? Permitted

DirectoryBrowsing Optional 3
values are on and off. Default value is on.
Location of 404 error page. Use format

Err404Page=/DirectoryName/FileName Spe-
Err404Page Optional cify the directory path from the root, forward 254
slashdelimited, with an initial forward slash.
Default is the browsers 404 error page.
Location of ASP error page. Use format

ErrASPPage=/DirectoryName/FileName Spe-
ErrASPPage Optional cify the directory path from the root, forward 254
slashdelimited, with an initial forward slash.
Default is the browsers ASP error page.



ErrCount
- 790 -
Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query sets metabase values for directory testdir and sends the response in
XML format:
Query
command=metabasesetvalue&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&hostaccount=resellwebid&directory=testdir
&HTTPAccessible=on&AnonymousAccess=off&Directorybrowsing=on
&Err404Page=404error.htm&ErrASPpage=ASPerror.htm
&responsetype=xml
Output

<MetaBase>
</MetaBase>
<Command>METABASESETVALUE</Command>
- 791 -
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainHeader
l AddHostHeader
l CreateHostAccount
l DisableFolderApp
l EnableFolderApp
l IsFolderEnabled
l ListWebFiles
l MetaBaseGetValue
ModifyDomainHeader
Description
Definition
Add a domain header (a pointer that associates a domain name with a specific location
in your Web hosting directory structure), or redirect a domain header from one directory
to another within your Web hosting account.
Usage
Use this command to change the path to the content displayed for your Web site.
- 792 -
Note that if you modify a domain header, all host records associated with the domain
header are deleted.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/wsg/hostingdomains.asp?HostAccount=resellwebid
The add button calls the ModifyDomainHeader command.
Constraints
l The directory (domain header) you want to move the domain to must already exist.
l The domain designated by the SLD and TLD parameters must be hosted by us.
l If we are the registrar for this domain, it must be in this account.
Input parameters

Directory in the Web hosting account to

add a domain header to. This parameter
Directory Optional is necessary only if you want host 213
records to point to a different page than
the home page in your root directory. Sup-
- 793 -

ply the directory name; no leading slash
is needed.

SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)



ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query points resellerdocs.com to directory acct, and sends the response in
XML format:
Query
- 794 -
command=modifydomainheader&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&hostaccount=resellwebid&directory=acct
Output

<DomainHeader>
</DomainHeader>
<Command>MODIFYDOMAINHEADER</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainHeader
l CreateHostAccount
l GetDomainHeader
l ListDomainHeaders
- 795 -
ModifyHostHeader
Description
Definition
Redirect a host header (a pointer to third-level domain name) to a different directory in
your Web hosting account.
Usage
Use this command to change the directory a host header points to.
Availability
webpw.
http://webhostingtest.ehost-ser-
vices.com/websites/hostheader.asp?hn=accountspayable&
d=resellerdocs.com
The SAVE HOST HEADER SETTINGS button calls the ModifyHostHeader command.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 796 -


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
HostName Required Name of the host header 53
Path from root to the directory you want

the host header to point to. If you do not
FilePath Optional include this parameter, the host header 254
points to the default, root. Path can be for-
ward slash or backslashdelimited.



ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully
Notes
- 797 -
Example
The following query changes the accountspayable host header to point to the directory
/accounting and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=modifyhostheader& uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&SLD=resellerdocs&TLD=com&hostaccount=resellwebid
&HostName=accountspayable&FilePath=accounting
&responsetype=xml
Output

<HostHeader>
</HostHeader>
<Command>MODIFYHOSTHEADER</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
- 798 -
Related commands
l AddDomainHeader
l AddHostHeader
l CreateHostAccount
l DeleteHostHeader
l GetDomainHeader
l GetHostAccount
l GetHostHeader
l ListDomainHeaders
l ListHostHeaders
ModifyNS
Description
Definition
Modify name servers for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command if you want to use name servers that are different than the name serv-
ers currently set for a domain.
ModifyNS updates DNS records at the Registry and in the registrars database. Modi-
fyNSHosting, a similar command, redirects to another set of name servers without updat-
ing the Registry records.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/DNSConfig.asp?DomainNameID=152533676
On the Domain Name Maintenance page, the save changes button calls the ModifyNS
command.
- 799 -
Constraints
l The query must pass name servers that are registered at NSI.
l Name servers for .us names must be located in the United States.
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Use this parameter to switch to our name

Either UseDNS or
UseDNS servers. Permitted value is UseDNS- 4
NSX is Required
S=Default
Use this parameter to switch to custom

name servers or no name servers. Max-
imum of 12 name servers can be set. To
NSX X=1 to maximum Either UseDNS or designate custom name servers, supply
60
of 12 NSX is Required the use names, for example, NS1-
1=ns1.name-services.com To designate
no name servers, supply an empty para-
meter: NS1=

- 800 -


ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l To set name servers to eNoms set the UseDNS=ours param and don't pass NS(x)
name servers. To setname servers to your name servers, set NSX-
X=YourNameServerX and don't pass UseDNS=default. Youcan set up to 12 of
your own name servers.
Example
The following query changes the name servers for resellerdocs.com to ns1.name-ser-
vices.com and ns2.name-services.com, and requests the response in XML format:
Query
command=modifyns&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&ns1=ns1.name-services.com
&ns2=ns2.name-services.com&responsetype=xml
In the reponse, an ErrCount value 0 indicates that the change of name servers was suc-
cessful:
Output
- 801 -
<?xml version="1.0" ?>0" ?>

<Command>MODIFYNS</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CheckNSStatus
l DeleteNameServer
l GetDNS
l GetDNSStatus
l ModifyNSHosting
l UpdateNameServer
ModifyNSHosting
Description
Definition
Modify the name server settings for a domain name, in our database, without changing
the settings at the Registry.
Usage
ModifyNSHosting redirects to another set of name servers without updating the Registry
records. ModifyNS, a similar command, updates name server records at the Registry and
in the registrars database.
- 802 -
Use this command when name servers are set correctly at the Registry but incorrectly in
our records.
Use this command when a domain name is registered in your account, and uses DNS
Hosting in a different account. In this case, set the name servers to our name servers at
the Registry, and to N/A in our database.
Availability
Constraints
l The name server cited in the query must exist.
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Name servermaximum of 12 can be

set. Permitted value is the use name of
NSX X=1 to 12 Required 60
the name server, for example, NS1-
1=ns1.name-services.com
- 803 -



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query designates ns1.name-services.com as the name server for reseller-
docs.com, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=modifynshosting&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&ns1=ns1.name-services.com
&responsetype=xml

Output
- 804 -

- <interface-response>
<Command>MODIFYNSHOSTING</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
- <debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CheckNSStatus
l DeleteNameServer
l GetDNS
l GetDNSStatus
l ModifyNS
l UpdateNameServer
ModifyPOP3
Description
Definition
Modify POP account password.
Usage
Use this command to change the password of one or more POP3 mail accounts in a
domain.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/POPConfig.asp?DomainNameID=152533676
- 805 -
On the Domain Name Maintenance page, in the Edit POP mail accounts box, typing a
new password and clicking the add to cart button to save modifications calls the Modi-
fyPOP3 command.
Constraints
l The POP3 service need not be active for the password change to be successful.
l The values of UserName in the query must exist for the domain.
l The value for EmailCount must match the number of UserNames and Passwords
in the query.
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Number of accounts on this domain to

EmailCount Required 2
update.
UserNameX X=1 to POP3 user name to update the password

Required 30
EmailCount on.
Either IsAdminX or Should UserNameX have administrative

PasswordX is privileges over all mailboxes associated
IsAdminX X=1 to with this domain name? Administrative
Required They 1
EmailCount privileges allow this user to reset the
may be used
together. password for mailboxes, and delete mail-
- 806 -

boxes. Permitted values are:
0 Regular user (can change the pass-
word for their own mailbox but no one
elses)
1 Administrator (when this user logs on
to Webmail and goes to the admin page,
he or she can see all mailboxes for this
domain name, can reset passwords for
any or all mailboxes, and can delete any
or all mailboxes)
Either IsAdminX or
PasswordX is
PasswordX X=1 to New password for UserNameXs mail-
Required They 50
EmailCount box.
may be used
together.



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 807 -
Example
The following query requests that two POP3 passwords change in resellerdocs.com:
user name john should now have password johnpw and user name jane should now
have password janepw. The query also requests that the response be in XML format:
Query
command=modifypop3&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&emailcount=2&username1=john
&password1=johnpw&username2=jane
&password2=janepw&responsetype=xml

Output
<success>False</success>
<Command>MODIFYPOP3</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>47a90b83-b576-4345-a883-f322c-
ccdf219</TrackingKey>
- 808 -
Related commands
l DeleteAllPOPPaks
l DeletePOP3
l DeletePOPPak
l Forwarding
l GetForwarding
l GetMailHosts
l GetPOP3
l PurchasePOPBundle
l SetUpPOP3User
MySQL_GetDBInfo
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of the MySQL databases in a Web hosting account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of the MySQL databases in a Web hosting account.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/wsg/packagemanager.asp?
In the resellwebid row, click access.
In the menu, click MySQL / PHP.
The Manage MySQL Databases table is populated by the MySQL_GetDBInfo command.
Constraints
- 809 -
Input parameters



Status of this Web hosting account: 1 Host account is active 2
Account disabled for exceeding allowed monthly bandwidth 3
AccountStatusID
Account disabled for exceeding the 3000GB bandwidth limit 4,
5, 6, 7 Account disabled; contact customer service
MySQLCount Number of MySQL databases in this Web hosting account
Total number of MySQL databases permitted in this Web host-

MySQLAllowed
ing account
DBName Name of this database
DBStatus Status of this database
DBDateCreated Date this database was created
DBMaxSize Maximum size permitted for this database
DBCurrentSize Current size of this database

ErrCount
- 810 -
Err(x)

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of the MySQL databases in a Web hosting account,
Query
command=MySQL_GetDBInfo&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&HostAccount=resellwebid&responsetype=xml
Output

<AccountStatusID>1</AccountStatusID>
<MySQLDatabases>
<MySQLCount>3</MySQLCount>
<MySQLAllowed>15</MySQLAllowed>
<Database>
<DBName>resellwebid_db159</DBName>
<DBStatus>Active</DBStatus>
<DBDateCreated>8/2/2005 4:54:25 PM</DBDateCreated>
- 811 -
<DBMaxSize>50</DBMaxSize>
<DBCurrentSize>0</DBCurrentSize>
</Database>
<Database>
<DBDateCreated>8/2/2005 4:54:40 PM</DBDateCreated>
</Database>
<Database>
<DBDateCreated>8/3/2005 10:43:50 AM</DBDateCreated>
</Database>
</MySQLDatabases>
<Command>MYSQL_GETDBINFO</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
l GetHostAccount
- 812 -
NameSpinner
Description
Definition
Generate variations of a domain name that you specify, for .com, .net, .tv, and .cc TLDs.
Usage
Use this command to generate variations of the domain name you specify. This com-
mand will return TLDs .com, .net, .tv, and .cc.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/default.asp
Type an SLD into the Register A New Domain box and click GO. The results in the We
also recommend section are generated by the NameSpinner command.
Constraints
Input parameters

- 813 -

SLD Required 32
enom in enom.com)
Block potentially offensive content. Per-

SensitiveContent mitted values are True or False. True fil- 5
False
ters out offensive content.
Optional; default is Maximum length of SLD to return. Per-

MaxLength 2
63 mitted values are numbers 2 to 63.
Maximum number of suggested names

to return in addition to your input. The
Optional; default is number actually returned may be lower
MaxResults 2
20 because of the spinning algorithm
developed by the Registry. Permitted val-
ues are numbers 0 to 99.
Return domain names that include

UseHyphens hyphens. Permitted values are True or 5
False
False.
Optional; default is Return domain names that include num-

UseNumbers 5
True bers. Permitted values are True or False.
Higher values return suggestions that are

Optional; default is built by adding prefixes, suffixes, and
Basic 6
Medium words to the original input. Permitted val-
ues are Off, Low, Medium, and High.
Higher values return domain names by

interpreting the input semantically and
construct suggestions with a similar
Related meaning. Related=High will find terms 6
High
that are synonyms of your input. Per-
mitted values are Off, Low, Medium, and
High.
Higher values return suggestions that are

similar to the customers input, but not
necessarily in meaning. Similar=High will
Similar generate more creative terms, with a 6
Medium
slightly looser relationship to your input,
than Related=High. Permitted values are
Off, Low, Medium, and High.
Higher values return suggestions that

Optional; default is reflect current topics and popular words.
Topical 6
Medium Permitted values are Off, Low, Medium,
and High.
- 814 -


SpinCount Number of SLDs returned in this response
TLDList TLDs returned in this response
Domain name SLD for this set of results
Is this SLD available from the .com Registry. Y indicates yes;

Com
N indicates no.
The Registrys score of how closely this SLD matches the

ComScore SLD input you supplied in the query string. Highest possible
score is 1000.
Is this SLD available from the .net Registry. Y indicates yes; N

Net
indicates no.

NetScore SLD input you supplied in the query string. Highest possible
score is 1000.
Is this SLD available from the .tv Registry. Y indicates yes; N

Tv
indicates no.

TvScore SLD input you supplied in the query string. Highest possible
score is 1000.
Is this SLD available from the .cc Registry. Y indicates yes; N

Cc
indicates no.

CcScore SLD input you supplied in the query string. Highest possible
score is 1000.
OriginalSLD The SLD value you supplied in the input query string

ErrCount

ErrX
- 815 -
Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves 8 domains that resemble the input SLD hand, and sends
Query
command=NameSpinner&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw
&SLD=hand&TLD=com&MaxResults=8&Similar=High
&ResponseType=XML
Output
<namespin>
<spincount>8</spincount>
<TLDList/>
<domains>
<domain name="Richandbob" com="n" comscore="778" net="y"
netscore="806" tv="y" tvscore="742" cc="y" ccscore="709"/>
<domain name="Cardbyhand" com="y" comscore="799" net="y"
<domain name="Side" com="n" comscore="831" net="n"
- 816 -
<domain name="Glove" com="n" comscore="819" net="n"

<domain name="Handytune" com="y" comscore="783" net="y"
<domain name="Palm" com="n" comscore="806" net="n"
<domain name="Fingers" com="n" comscore="793" net="n"
<domain name="Shandawl" com="y" comscore="751" net="y"
</domains>
</namespin>
<originalsld>hand</originalsld>
<Command>NAMESPINNER</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
ingKey>
Related commands
l AddToCart
l Check
l Purchase
- 817 -
NM_CancelOrder
Description
Definition
Cancel a Premium Domains order that was created with the AddToCart or Purchase
command with the pay-later parameter UseWireTransfer=Yes, but which was never com-
pleted.
Usage
Use this command to cancel a Premium Domains order that was created with the
AddToCart or Purchase command with the deferred payment parameter UseWireTrans-
fer=Yes, but which was never completed.
This command cancels an entire order. We do not offer a means of splitting an order that
includes multiple items.
If you do not redeem, extend, or cancel an order within 10 days, the order cancels auto-
matically.
Availability
You must be a direct ETP Reseller to sell Premium Domains.
This command is not implemented on enom.com..
Constraints
l The Premium Domains order must be associated with this account.
l The Premium Domains order must have been submitted using the UseWireTrans-
fer=Yes parameterand must still be in Payment Pending status.
Input parameters
- 818 -

Identification number for the Premium

OrderID Required 10
Domains order to be cancelled



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query cancels an uncompleted Premium Domains order, and sends the
- 819 -
Query
command=NM_CancelOrder&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
Output

<Success>
<![CDATA[ True ]]>
</Success>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ NM_CANCELORDER ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
- 820 -
<![CDATA[ 0.750 ]]>

</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ c4e94efc-c70f-4c0a-a9b1-9d41ee05b1ab ]]>
</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l NM_ExtendOrder
l NM_ProcessOrder
l NM_Search
NM_ExtendOrder
Description
Definition
Extend the payment period for a Premium Domain to 10 days from today.
Usage
Use this command to extend the payment deferral period for a Premium Domain. This
command can be used for Premium Domains purchased using either the AddToCart or
Purchase command with the UseWireTransfer=Yes parameter.
This command extends the payment period to 10 days from today.
A Premium Domains order that was submitted with payment deferral can be extended
once.
If you do not pay for, extend, or cancel the order, it will automatically cancel 10 days after
being placed.
Availability
- 821 -
You must be a direct ETP Reseller to sell Premium Domains.

Constraints
l The Premium Domains order must have been submitted with UseWireTrans-
fer=Yes, and must be inpayment pending status.
l An order can only be extended once.
Input parameters

Identification number of the Premium

OrderID Required 10
Domains order you want to extend.


ErrCount The number of errors if any occurred. If greater than 0 check
- 822 -

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query extends a Premium Domains order that was submitted with
UseWireTransfer=Yes, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=NM_ExtendOrder&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
In the repsonse, a Success status True indicates that the query was successful:
Output

<Success>
<![CDATA[ True ]]>
</Success>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ NM_EXTENDORDER ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
- 823 -
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>

</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 0.141 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ 1afd0df6-79fa-420a-b498-f423926ba50a ]]>
</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l NM_CancelOrder
l NM_ProcessOrder
- 824 -
l NM_Search
NM_GetPremiumDomainSettings
Description
Definition
Retrieve account-level settings associated with Premium Domains.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve account-level settings that are specific to Premium
Domains:
The minimum and maximum price of Premium Domains to be returned by Instant
Reseller.
The threshold price above which you want to pay by wire transfer instead of using your
account balance.
Availability
Premium Domains can only be sold by our direct ETP resellers.
https://resellertest.enom.com/myaccount/premium-domain-pricing.aspx
The NM_GetPremiumDomainSettings command populates the Premium Domain Pri-
cing dollar amount.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 825 -



Minimum price of Premium Domains to be returned in searches
MinimumPrice
in your Instant Reseller site
Maximum price of Premium Domains to be returned in

MaximumPrice
searches your Instant Reseller site
$US amount above which you want to pay by wire transfer

WireTransferThreshold instead of account balance or credit card. See Usage notes in
NM_SetPremiumDomainSettings

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 826 -
Example
The following query retrieves and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=NM_GetPremiumDomainSettings&uid=resellid

Output

<PremiumDomainSettings>
<MinimumPrice>250.00</MinimumPrice>
<MaximumPrice>25000.00</MaximumPrice>
<WireTransferThreshold>4000.00</WireTransferThreshold>
</PremiumDomainSettings>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ NM_GETPREMIUMDOMAINSETTINGS ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
- 827 -
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 0.109 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ 5681f3a4-551c-4b01-8e63-20bc6ab7086a ]]>
</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l NM_CancelOrder
l NM_ExtendOrder
l NM_ProcessOrder
l NM_Search
NM_GetSearchCategories
Description
Definition
Retrieve Premium Domain search categories and subcategories.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve search categories and/or subcategories for Premium
Domains.
- 828 -
You can use this command to populate the Category and Subcategory values in the
NM_Search command.These would typically be rendered as Category and Subcategory
menus in a user interface.
Availability
Only our direct ETP resellers can sell Premium Domains.
Constraints
Input parameters

Which part of the search category tax-

onomy to display. Permitted values are:
Optional; default is All Retrieve all categories and sub cat-
Display 13
All egories Categories Retrieve categories
Subcategories Retrieve the sub-
categories for one category
Which category to display subcategories

Optional overall,
for. Permitted values are category ID
but Required if Dis-
CategoryID numbers, which you can retrieve by run- 3
play= Sub-
ning this command with Dis-
categories
play=Categories.
- 829 -


ID Identification number of this category or subcategory
ParentID Identification number of this subcategorys parent category
Name Name of this category or subcategory

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the subcategories associated with category 169 (Recre-
ation) and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=NM_GetSearchCategories&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&Display=SubCategories&CategoryID=169&responsetype=xml
- 830 -
In the response, a list of subcategories and an ErrCount value 0 indicate that the query
was successful:
Output

<category id="155" parentid="169" name="Photography" />
<category id="170" parentid="169" name="Cartoons" />
<category id="171" parentid="169" name="Aviation" />
<category id="172" parentid="169" name="Boating" />
<category id="174" parentid="169" name="Games" />
<category id="177" parentid="169" name="Restaurants and
Bars" />
<category id="178" parentid="169" name="Fun and Humor" />
<category id="179" parentid="169" name="Computer Games" />
<category id="180" parentid="169" name="Hobbies" />
<category id="181" parentid="169" name="Popular Culture" />
<category id="182" parentid="169" name="Movies" />
<category id="183" parentid="169" name="Music" />
<category id="184" parentid="169" name="People" />
<category id="185" parentid="169" name="Performing Arts" />
<category id="186" parentid="169" name="Radio" />
<category id="187" parentid="169" name="TV" />
<category id="188" parentid="169" name="Videos" />
<category id="189" parentid="169" name="Video Games" />
<category id="253" parentid="169" name="Books" />
<category id="318" parentid="169" name="Wine" />
<category id="368" parentid="169" name="Writing" />
<category id="386" parentid="169" name="General" />
<Command>
<![CDATA[ NM_GETSEARCHCATEGORIES ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
- 831 -
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 0.156 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ 7ba0df6d-6c15-4b16-84d3-0e31e6c2f8d3 ]]>
</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l NM_CancelOrder
l NM_ExtendOrder
l NM_ProcessOrder
l NM_Search
NM_ProcessOrder
Description
Definition
- 832 -
Finish processing a Premium Domain order that you initiated with the AddToCart or
Purchase command, using the deferred payment parameter, UseWireTransfer=Yes.
Usage
Use this command to use the account balance to pay for a Premium Domain order that
was originally submitted with the AddToCart or Purchase command, using the pay-later
parameter, UseWireTransfer=Yes.
Availability
You must be one of our direct ETP Resellers to sell Premium Domains.
Constraints
l The Premium Domain order ID must be associated with this account.
Input parameters

Identification number for the Premium

OrderID Required 10
Domain order you want to pay now

- 833 -

Success Success status of this query string

ErrCount
Error message explaining the failure. These can be presented

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query uses the account balance to pay for a Premium Domains order that
was originally submitted with our deferred payment option, UseWireTransfer=Yes:
Query
command=nm_processorder&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
Output

- 834 -
<Success>
<![CDATA[ True ]]>
</Success>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ NM_PROCESSORDER ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
- <![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
- <![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
- <![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
- <![CDATA[ sjl21wresell01 ]]>
</Server>
<Site>
- <![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
- <![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
- <![CDATA[ 0.391 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
- <![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ 000e422f-fbee-4da2-bbe5-6bb9e9a33c67 ]]>
</TrackingKey>
- 835 -
Related commands
l NM_CancelOrder
l NM_ExtendOrder
l NM_Search
NM_Search
Description
Definition
Search for available Premium Domains.
Usage
Use this command to search for Premium Domains that are available for purchase.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domainsearch/search-premium.aspx
The text box populates the Keyword parameter, we set Record-
sToReturn=50&SortBy=Quality, and the Search button calls the NM_Search command.
Our UI divides the 50 results into five pages of 10 domains each.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 836 -

Word to include in search results. Does not

function if query string includes the
StartsWith or EndsWith parameter. This para-
Recommended; meter expects full words to function as inten-
Keyword default is no ded. Permitted values are single strings or ?
keyword comma-delimited lists of strings. For
example, Keyword=Box,Office returns
matches that contain Box and Office, fol-
lowed by matches that contain Box or Office
Words to exclude from search results. This fil-

ter expects complete words, not just the first
few letters, and does not extrapolate to vari-
ations such as plurals. Permitted values are
single strings or comma-delimited lists of
Optional; default
Filter strings. For example, Key- ?
is no filter
word=Box,Office&Filter=Exchange,Chart
returns matches that contain Box or Office,
then removes any items from that list that con-
tain Exchange or Chart, but does not remove
items that contain Charts.
Optional; default Return domain names that start with this char-
StartsWith 1
is no filter acter. Permitted values are alphanumeric
Optional; default Return domain names that end with this char-
EndsWithWith 1
is no filter acter. Permitted values are alphanumeric
Optional; by
default, the Topic category to search. Use the NM_
Category scope of a GetSearchCategories command to retrieve 3
search is all cat- search categories
egories
Optional; by
default, the Topic subcategory to search. Use the NM_
Subcategory scope of a GetSearchCategories to retrieve search sub- 3
search is all subcategories
categories
- 837 -

TLDs to include in results. Permitted format is
Optional; default tld or tld1,tld2,tld3, . . .. For example, TLDList-
TLDList ?
is com t=com,net,org returns .com, .net, and .org
matches to your search
Exclude domain names that contain

Optional; default
ExcludeHyphens hyphens? Use ExcludeHyphens=Yes to 3
is No
exclude hyphens
Minimum number of characters in the SLDs

Optional; default returned by the search. Most registries
MinLength 2
is no minimum impose a minimum of 1 letter for TLDs. Per-
mitted values are numeric
Maximum number of characters in the SLDs

Optional; default returned by the search. Most registries
MaxLength 2
is no maximum impose a maximum of 63 characters for
SLDs. Permitted values are numeric
Filter return so that all results are at or below

Optional; default this price. We dont impose a maximum price
PriceHigh ?
is no maximum but you may want to, to manage risk. Per-
mitted values are in DD or DD.cc format
Filter return so that all results are at or above

Optional; default
PriceLow this price. Permitted values are in DD or ?
is no minimum
DD.cc format
Sort order for the list of domains that matches

your search criteria. Note that search results
will include topics related to the keyword you
specify, and commonly include thousands of
Optional; default items. Choosing a sort criterion other than
SortBy ?
is Quality Quality can return unexpected matches. Per-
mitted values: Quality Quality of match to spe-
cified keyword(s) Domain Alphabetic Alpha
Alphabetic Price Price, lowest to highest
PriceDesc Price, highest to lowest
Updated Optional Date added to inventory 9
Number of domains to return in this response.

Permitted values are integers 1 to 500. For
Optional; default example, if you return domains 25 at a time
RecordsToReturn 3
is 50 and want to retrieve the third set of 25
domains, use Record-
Optional; default For this set of results, start with this position
StartPosition ?
is 1 in the set of 25 domains, use Record-
- 838 -

sToReturn=25&StartPosition=51 to retrieve
the third set of 25 domains, use Record-


Count Number of Premium Domains returned in this response
PremiumDomain Premium Domain name
Price Selling price for this domain name

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
format, sendResponseType=HTML or ResponseType=HTML or Respon-
seType=XML in your request.
l Check the return parameter o the client. Otherwise process the If greater than 0 the
transaction failed. The parameter Err(ErrCount) can be presented to the client.
Otherwise process the returned parameters as defined above.
Example
The following query searches on comma-dilimited keywords, sorts by quality, and pages
the results:
Query
- 839 -
Command=NM_Search& uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&Keyword=Box,Office&SortBy=quality
&RecordsToReturn=10&StartPosition=1&responsetype=xml
In the response, a list of matches and an ErrCount value 0 indicate that the query was
successful:
Output

<domains count="10">
<premiumdomain price-
e="589.00">boxofficechart.net</premiumdomain>
e="589.00">boxofficecharts.org</premiumdomain>
e="888.00">BoxOfficeBabes.com</premiumdomain>
e="677.00">boxofficegroup.com</premiumdomain>
e="499.00">boxofficemanagement.com</premiumdomain>
e="2788.00">BoxOfficeReviews.com</premiumdomain>
e="1588.00">BoxOfficeUpdate.com</premiumdomain>
e="589.00">boxofficechart.org</premiumdomain>
e="2588.00">BoxOfficeBuzz.com</premiumdomain>
e="1888.00">BoxOfficeChallenge.com</premiumdomain>
</domains>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ NM_SEARCH ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
- 840 -
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 0.406 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ 122c8b26-60f6-4dde-8a2d-dae0a5898bf7 ]]>
</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l NM_CancelOrder
l NM_ExtendOrder
l NM_ProcessOrder
- 841 -
NM_SetPremiumDomainSettings
Description
Definition
Set the threshold at which you want to require payment for Premium Domains by wire
transfer to us.
Usage
Use this command to set the threshold price above which you want to always pay your
Premium Domains order by wire transfer. You can use this setting as a means of ensur-
ing that orders dont fail due to an insufficient account balance.
You also have the option of deferring payment at lower price levels, using the
UseWireTransfer parameter in the Purchase or InsertNewOrder commands.
The account-level deferred payment threshold that you set with the NM_SetPremi-
umDomainSettings command applies in the following ways:
l If you use the Purchase command to purchase domain names, the threshold
applies to the price of thesingle Premium Domain in the query string.
l If you use AddToCart and InsertNewOrder to purchase domain names, the
threshold applies to the sumof the Premium Domains, plus the services attached to
them, in an order.
There are a few considerations within our system to be aware of, to guide you in choos-
ing a threshold for deferredpayment:
l We place a limit on orders that use our merchant services to process credit cards. If
you normally use our merchant services and want to offer your customers Premium
Domains over that limit in value, you must establish a system to pay us, and to
charge your customers, that is outside our merchant services environment. The
lower the wire transfer threshold you choose, the more likely you are to need this
system.
l When youre ready to submit your deferred payment, use the NM_ProcessOrder
command to completethe order using your account balance, or contact your sales
representative for wire transfer instructions.
Availability
- 842 -
Constraints
Input parameters

Threshold at or above which you want to

always pay for your Premium Domain
WireTransferThreshold order by wire transfer. See Usage sec- 14
5000
tion for more information. Permitted val-
ues are in DD or DD.cc format


Status Success status of this query string

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 843 -
Notes
Example
The following query specifies account-level settings for Premium Domains: wire transfer
threshold. It sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=NM_SetPremi-
umDomainSettings&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&wiretransferthreshold=4000&responsetype=xml
In the response, a Status value Successful indicates that the query was successful:
Output

<Command>
<![CDATA[ NM_SETPREMIUMDOMAINSETTINGS ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
- 844 -
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 0.141 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ e5f9e424-f92f-40a7-92e3-0786ca6035cc ]]>
</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l NM_CancelOrder
l NM_ExtendOrder
l NM_ProcessOrder
l NM_Search
ParseDomain
Description
Definition
Separate the domain name into its host, SLD, and TLD.
- 845 -
Usage
Use this command to separate a domain name into its constituent parts.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

Full name to parse, including the third

PassedDomain Required 70
level if appropriate


Host Host name
- 846 -

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query separates the domain name www.resellerdocs.com into its Host,
SLD, and TLD, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=parsedomain&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&passeddomain=www.resellerdocs.com&responsetype=xml

Output

<ParseDomain>
- 847 -
<Host>www</Host>
<TLD>com</TLD>
</ParseDomain>
<Command>PARSEDOMAIN</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l None
PE_GetCustomerPricing
Description
Definition
Get retail prices that this account charges to consumers. These are also the prices that
this accounts subaccounts will be charged, unless you change them for each individual
subaccount.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve prices that you have changed from their default values.
Availability
- 848 -
If you click a Login ID of a retail subaccount, the link calls the PE_GetCustomerPricing
command. If you click a Login ID of a reseller subaccount, the link calls the PE_
GetResellerPrice command.
Constraints
Input parameters



Pricing engine index, for use by eNoms database. Pro-
ductType for domains Product type for domains. Permitted val-
ues are:
10 Domain registration
13 DNS hosting
CPID 14 DNS hosting renew
16 Domain renewal
17 Domain redemption grace period (RGP)
18 Domain Extended RGP (available at our discretion, and
decided by us on a name-by-name basis)
19 transfer
- 849 -
41 Registration and email forwarding by the .name Registry
44 .name registration and email forwarding renewal
Product type for SSL certificates. Permitted values are:

211 SSL certificate - Comodo Essential
212 SSL certificate - Comodo Instant
214 SSL certificate - Comodo Essential Wildcard
213 SSL certificate - Comodo Premium Wildcard
221 SSL certificate - Comodo EV
222 SSL certificate - Comodo EV SGC
20 SSL certificate - GeoTrust QuickSSL Premium
ProductType for SSL certificates 21 SSL certificate - GeoTrust True BusinessID
24 SSL certificate - GeoTrust True BusinessID with EV
26 SSL certificate - GeoTrust QuickSSL
27 SSL certificate - GeoTrustTrueBizID Wildcard
23 SSL certificate - RapidSSL
180 SSL certificate - VeriSign Secure Site
181 SSL certificate - VeriSign Secure Site Pro
182 SSL certificate - VeriSign Secure Site EV
183 SSL certificate - VeriSign Secure Site Pro EV
Product type for Web hosting and Web site creation services.
50 Web hosting account with Access database
51 Web hosting component - 20GB bandwidth
52 Web hosting component - 1GB Web storage
53 Web hosting component - 250MB SQL database storage
54 Web hosting component - 10 POP mailboxes
55 Web hosting setup fee
ProductType for Web hosting and Web 56 Web hosting bandwidth overage, at per-1GB overage pro-
site creation services tection rate
57 Web hosting bandwidth overage fee, with upgrade
58 Web hosting component - 100MB POP storage
86 Web Site Creator without Web hosting - Basic
87 Web Site Creator without Web hosting - Full
88 Web Site Creator without Web hosting - eCommerce
90 Web Site Creator added to Web hosting - Basic
91 Web Site Creator added to Web hosting - Full
92 Web Site Creator added to Web hosting - eCommerce
Product type for email services. Permitted values are:

35 Additional storage for POP pak - renewal - 512MB/box
36 Additional storage for POP pak - 512MB per mailbox
38 POP mail 10-pak
ProductType for email services 39 POP mail 10-pak renewal
42 Email forwarding by the .name Registry
45 Email forwarding by us
- 850 -
46 Email forwarding by us - renewal
Product type for all other services. Permitted values are:

47 URL forwarding
48 URL forwarding - renewal
65 Private label annual subscription
66 Private label annual renewal
72 ID Protect (Whois Privacy Protection)
73 ID Protect - renewal
140 Business Listing
141 Business Listing renewal
235 goMobi
ProductType for all other services
236 goMobi free trial 190
200 RichContent free trial
201 RichContent
215 Instant Reseller
216 Instant Reseller renewal
217 Instant Reseller upgrade
240 TRUSTe Privacy Policy
241 TRUSTe Privacy Policy renewal
242 TRUSTe Privacy Policy with Seal
243 TRUSTe Privacy Policy with Seal renewal
Product description. Values are listed under ProductType,

ProductDescription
above.
TLDID Top-level-domain ID number.
TLD Top-level domain name.
Retail price. Response contains a value only if price overrides

RetailPrice
the default value.
ResellerPrice Reseller price.
Registry Rocket price. Response contains a value only if price

RocketPrice
overrides the default value.
Enabled Enabled state for this TLD. Options are True or False.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 851 -
Notes
Example
The following query requests the price that subaccount ichiro charges for transferring a
.org domain name, and requests the response in XML format:
Query
command=PE_GETCUSTOMERPRICING& uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&ProductType=19&tld=org&responsetype=xml
The response indicates that the price for transferring a .org name is $8.95, and .org trans-
fers are enabled in this subaccount:
Output
<productstructure>
<product>
<cpid>2490167</cpid>
<productdescription>Register</productdescription>
<tldid>0</tldid>
<tld>com</tld>
<retailprice>15</retailprice>
<resellerprice/>
<rocketprice/>
<minimumregistration>1</minimumregistration>
</product>
<product>
<cpid>2490168</cpid>
- 852 -
<productdescription>Register</productdescription>
<tldid>0</tldid>
<tld>com</tld>
<retailprice>25.95</retailprice>
<resellerprice>8.95</resellerprice>
<rocketprice/>
</product>
.
.
.
</productstructure>
<Command>PE_GETCUSTOMERPRICING</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l CommissionAccount
l GetBalance
l PE_GetPOPPrice
l PE_GetRetailPrice
l PE_GetRocketPrice
l PE_SetPricing
- 853 -
PE_GetDomainPricing
Description
Definition
Get the retail pricing that this account charges for registrations, renewals, and transfers,
by top-level domain.
Usage
Use this command when you want a list of retail prices for one top-level domain, for regis-
trations, renewals, and transfers. To get a list of retail prices for all products offered by
this account, use PE_GetRetailPricing.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/resellers/SubAccount-Manage.asp?Account=850-tn-1053
PE_GetDomainPricing is not implemented on enom.com. The sub-account configuration
page displays similar information, but for all top-level domains.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 854 -

Optional; default is Return prices for multiple-year regis-

UseQtyEngine 1
0 trations. Permitted values are 0 and 1.
Number of years for multiple-year regis-

Years trations. Permitted values are 1, 2, 5, 2
1
and 10.



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the pricing for account resellid for the various top-level
domains, with the response in XML format:
Query
- 855 -
command=PE_GETDOMAINPRICING&uid=resellid
The response indicates that the price of .com domains is $8.95 per year, .net is $8.95 per
year, and so on:
Output
<DisplayPriceIncrease>0</DisplayPriceIncrease>
<pricestructure>
<product>
<tld>com</tld>
<tldid>0</tldid>
</product>
<product>
<tld>net</tld>
<tldid>1</tldid>
</product>
.
.
.
<count>96</count>
- 856 -
</pricestructure>
<Command>PE_GETDOMAINPRICING</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l CommissionAccount
l GetBalance
l PE_GetPOPPrice
l PE_GetRetailPrice
l PE_GetRocketPrice
l PE_SetPricing
PE_GetEapPricing
Description
Definition
Get Early Access Program (EAP) pricing and phase information for a list of TLDs, includ-
ing if there are pending orders for the domain for the given EAP day.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve prices for a list of domains in EAP status.
- 857 -
Availability
This is used to show the pre-registration options for a TLD on the queue search results.
http://resellertest.enom.com/tld-queue/pages/search-results.aspx?sld=trading&tld=cards
Constraints
l At least one domain must be passed in
l The TLD must be a TLD sold through Donuts Inc.
Input parameters


SLDX Required enom in enom.com) X = integer, 1, 2, 3, 63
etc
Top-level domain name (extension) X =

TLDX Required 15
integer, 1, 2, 3, etc

- 858 -

Domain Domain Name.
SLD Second level domain name.
TLD Top-level domain name.
TLDID Top-level-domain ID number.
Phase The name of the phase
EAP Day number for that phase. Will only be present for EAP
Day
phase items.
Price The calling accounts price for the item.
Retail price. Response contains a value only if the api is called

RetailPrice
as a reseller.
ReleaseDate Localized time that the phase gets released. Time is in PST.
ReleaseDate-UTC Release Date converted to UTC
Order(s) exist for this SLD.TLD in the given EAP day? Will not
OrderCount
be returned for non EAP phases.
Valid values are 0 and 1.

ErrX
Notes
Example
The following query requests the price that account resellid will be charged and their
retail price for registering the domain name trading.cards, and requests the response in
XML format:
- 859 -
Query
command=PE_GetEapPricing& uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld1=trading&tld1=cards&responsetype=xml
The response indicates the available days to place a pre-registration for EAP and the pri-
cing available to the reseller.
Output
<domains>
<domain domain="trading.cards" sld="trading" tld="cards"
tldid="488">
<pricing>
<phase>Pre-registration</phase>
<retailprice>1,208.00</retailprice>
<releasedate>2014-06-18T09:00:00</releasedate>
<releasedate-utc>2014-06-18T16:00:00</releasedate-utc>
<ordercount/>
</pricing>
<pricing>
<phase>EAP</phase>
<day>1</day>
<price>11,920.00</price>
<ordercount>0</ordercount>
</pricing>
<pricing>
<phase>EAP</phase>
<day>2</day>
</pricing>
<pricing>
<phase>EAP</phase>
- 860 -
<day>3</day>
</pricing>
<pricing>
<phase>EAP</phase>
<day>4</day>
</pricing>
<pricing>
<phase>EAP</phase>
<day>5</day>
</pricing>
<pricing>
<phase>EAP</phase>
<day>6</day>
</pricing>
<pricing>
<phase>EAP</phase>
<day>7</day>
- 861 -
</pricing>
</domain>
</domains>
<Command>PE_GETEAPPRICING</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<debug/>
Related commands
l PE_GetPOPPrice
l PE_GetRetailPrice
l PE_GetRocketPrice
l PE_SetPricing
PE_GetPOPPrice
Description
Definition
Retrieve the wholesale price that this account pays for POP mail 10-paks.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the wholesale price that this account pays for POP mail
10-paks.
- 862 -
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/myaccount/ProductPricing.asp?tab=domainaddons
In the POP3 email paks row, the value in the Your cost column is supplied by the PE_
GetPOPPrice command.
Constraints
Input parameters



Pop Wholesale price this account pays per POP 10-pak
- 863 -
ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the wholesale price that account resellid pays for a POP
10-pak, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=PE_GETPOPPRICE&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&responsetype=xml
In the response, a pop pricing value and an ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was
successful:
Output

<pricing>
<pop>18.4015</pop>
</pricing>
<Command>PE_GETPOPPRICE</Command>
- 864 -
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l GetPOP3
l PE_GetRetailPrice
l PE_GetRocketPrice
l PE_SetPricing
l PurchasePOPBundle
PE_GetPremiumPricing
Description
Definition
Retrieve the premium pricing for a list of domains.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the premium pricing for a list of domains.
Availability
- 865 -

https://resellertest.enom.com/tld-queue/pages/manage/purchase.aspx
Constraints
l The login ID and password must be valid
Input parameters

SLDx X=1 to
Required Second level domain 8
DomainCount
TLDx Required Top level domain 8
QNamex Required Queue name 32
Product type. Permitted values are:

Register
Renew
RGP
Extended RGP
Transfer

- 866 -

Domain Domain name
IsPremium Is premium domain?
ICANNFees ICANN Fees
Premium domain price. Empty value will be returned for a non-

Price premium domain or if the domain is not eligible in a specified
queue

ErrCount
the Err (1 to ErrCount) values

ErrX

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the premium pricings for a list of domains, and requests the
response in XML format.
Query
command=PE_GetPremiumPricing&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&responsetype=xml&sld1=bike48n25&tld1=bike
&qname1=sunrise&sld2=bike48n01&tld2=ninja
&qname2=sunrise&producttype=register
- 867 -
Output

<results>
<result>
<Domain>bike48n25.bike</Domain>
<IsPremium>true</IsPremium>
<Price>230.00</Price>
</result>
<result>
<Domain>bike48n01.ninja</Domain>
<IsPremium>false</IsPremium>
<Price></Price>
</result>
</results>
<Command>PE_GETPREMIUMPRICING</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
<debug/>
Related commands
l Queue_GetInfo
l Queue_GetExtAttributes
l Queue_DomainPurchase
- 868 -
l Queue_GetDomains
l Queue_GetOrders
l Queue_GetOrderDetail
l GetAgreementPage
PE_GetProductPrice
Description
Definition
Retrieve the wholesale cost that this account pays for a product.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve wholesale pricing information for a single product.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/myaccount/RenewalPricing.asp?tab=1
Each value in the Your Cost column could be retrieved using one call to the PE_GetPro-
ductPrice command.
Constraints
Input parameters
command =nameofcommand&uid=yourloginid&pw=yourpassword
- 869 -

Product type for domains. Permitted val-

ues are:
13 DNS hosting
14 DNS hosting renew
16 Domain renewal
17 Domain redemption grace period
ProductType for
A ProductType is (RGP)
domains (other Pro- 63
Required 18 Domain Extended RGP (available at
ductTypes follow)
our discretion, and decided by us on a
name-by-name basis)
19 transfer
41 Registration and email forwarding by
the .name Registry
44 .name registration and email for-
warding renewal
Product type for SSL certificates. Per-

mitted values are:
Wildcard
213 SSL certificate - Comodo Premium
Wildcard
Premium
ProductType for SSL cer- 21 SSL certificate - GeoTrust True Busi-
tificates (see adjacent nessID
Required 63
rows for other Pro- 24 SSL certificate - GeoTrust True Busi-
ductTypes) nessID with EV
27 SSL certificate - GeoTrustTrueBizID
Wildcard
180 SSL certificate - VeriSign Secure
Site
Site Pro
Site EV
Site Pro EV
- 870 -

Product type for Web hosting and Web
site creation services. Permitted values
are:
50 Web hosting account with Access
database
51 Web hosting component - 20GB band-
width
52 Web hosting component - 1GB Web
storage
53 Web hosting component - 250MB
SQL database storage
54 Web hosting component - 10 POP
mailboxes
ProductType for Web
56 Web hosting bandwidth overage, at
hosting and Web site cre-
per-1GB overage protection rate
ation services (see adja- Required 63
57 Web hosting bandwidth overage fee,
cent rows for other
with upgrade
ProductTypes)
POP storage
86 Web Site Creator without Web host-
ing - Basic
ing - Full
ing - eCommerce
90 Web Site Creator added to Web host-
ing - Basic
ing - Full
ing - eCommerce
Product type for email services. Per-

mitted values are:
35 Additional storage for POP pak -
renewal - 512MB/box
512MB per mailbox
ProductType for email
38 POP mail 10-pak 39 POP mail 10-pak
services (see adjacent
Required renewal 63
rows for other Pro-
ductTypes)
the .name Registry
42 Email forwarding by the .name
Registry
warding renewal
- 871 -

Product type for all other services. Per-

mitted values are:
47 URL forwarding
ProductType for all other 141 Business Listing renewal
services (see previous 235 goMobi
Required 63
rows for other Pro- 236 goMobi free trial
ductTypes) 200 RichContent free trial
201 RichContent
renewal
ProductType is 10, 16, or 19 Top-level

TLD Required 15
domain name (extension)
Year bracket for which to retrieve prices.

Optional; default Permitted values are 1, 2, 5, and 10. For
Years 20
value is 1 example, Years=2 retrieves prices for
registrations of 2 to 4 years.

Price Wholesale price that the UID pays for this product
ProductEnabled Enabled status of this product
- 872 -

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the price for registering a .com domain, and sends the
Query
command=PE_GETPRODUCTPRICE&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&ProductType=10&tld=com&responsetype=xml
In the response, a price and an enabled status for the product confirm that the query was
successful:
Output

<productprice>
<price>8.95</price>
- 873 -
</productprice>
<Command>PE_GETPRODUCTPRICE</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l PE_GetPOPPrice
l PE_GetRetailPrice
l PE_GetRocketPrice
l PE_SetPricing
PE_GetResellerPrice
Description
Definition
Get the wholesale price that this account pays for one product, and tell whether that
product is enabled.
Usage
- 874 -
Use this command to retrieve the price of one product. For example, you can use this
command to retrieve the price you pay for registering a .com name.
Availability
On the home > pricing info page, each individual price can be retrieved using PE_
GetResellerPrice.
Constraints
Input parameters


ues are: 10 Domain registration 13 DNS
hosting 14 DNS hosting renew 16
Domain renewal 17 Domain redemption
ProductType for
A ProductType is grace period (RGP) 18 Domain Extended
domains (other Pro- 63
Required RGP (available at our discretion, and
ductTypes follow)
19 transfer 41 Registration and email for-
warding by the .name Registry 44 .name
registration and email forwarding renewal
- 875 -

mitted values are: 211 SSL certificate -
Comodo Essential 212 SSL certificate -
Comodo Instant 214 SSL certificate -
Comodo Essential Wildcard 213 SSL cer-
tificate - Comodo Premium Wildcard 221
SSL certificate - Comodo EV 222 SSL
certificate - Comodo EV SGC 20 SSL
ProductType for SSL certificate - GeoTrust QuickSSL
certificates (see adja- Premium 21 SSL certificate - GeoTrust
Required 63
cent rows for other Pro- True BusinessID 24 SSL certificate -
ductTypes) GeoTrust True BusinessID with EV 26
SSL certificate - GeoTrust QuickSSL 27
SSL certificate - GeoTrustTrueBizID
Wildcard 23 SSL certificate - RapidSSL
Site 181 SSL certificate - VeriSign
Secure Site Pro 182 SSL certificate - Ver-
iSign Secure Site EV 183 SSL certificate
- VeriSign Secure Site Pro EV

are: 50 Web hosting account with
Access database 51 Web hosting com-
ponent - 20GB bandwidth 52 Web host-
ing component - 1GB Web storage 53
Web hosting component - 250MB SQL
database storage 54 Web hosting com-
ponent - 10 POP mailboxes 55 Web host-
ProductType for Web
ing setup fee 56 Web hosting bandwidth
hosting and Web site
overage, at per-1GB overage protection
creation services (see Required 63
rate 57 Web hosting bandwidth overage
adjacent rows for other
fee, with upgrade 58 Web hosting com-
ProductTypes)
ponent - 100MB POP storage 86 Web
Site Creator without Web hosting - Basic
ing - Full 88 Web Site Creator without
Web hosting - eCommerce 90 Web Site
Creator added to Web hosting - Basic 91
Web Site Creator added to Web hosting -
Full 92 Web Site Creator added to Web
hosting - eCommerce
ProductType for email Product type for email services. Per-

services (see adjacent Required mitted values are: 35 Additional storage 63
rows for other Pro-
- 876 -

for POP pak - renewal - 512MB/box 36
Additional storage for POP pak - 512MB
per mailbox 38 POP mail 10-pak 39 POP
mail 10-pak renewal 41 Registration and
email forwarding by the .name Registry
ductTypes)
Registry 44 .name registration and email
forwarding renewal 45 Email forwarding
by us 46 Email forwarding by us -
renewal

mitted values are: 47 URL forwarding 48
URL forwarding - renewal 65 Private
label annual subscription 66 Private label
annual renewal 72 ID Protect (Whois Pri-
vacy Protection) 73 ID Protect - renewal
ProductType for all other 140 Business Listing 141 Business List-
services (see previous ing renewal 235 goMobi 236 goMobi free
Required 63
rows for other Pro- trial 200 RichContent free trial 201
ductTypes) RichContent 215 Instant Reseller 216
Instant Reseller renewal 217 Instant
Reseller upgrade 240 TRUSTe Privacy
Policy 241 TRUSTe Privacy Policy
renewal 242 TRUSTe Privacy Policy
with Seal 243 TRUSTe Privacy Policy
with Seal renewal
Required for Pro- If the ProductType is 10, 16, or 19, spe-

TLD ductType 10, 16, or cify the TLD for which you want pricing 20
19 information.
Retrieve quantity discount information.

For some products like domains, this
Optional; default is value represents the price break for multi-
Years 3
1 year registrations. For other products, it
represents the price for multiple units of
the product.


- 877 -
ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the price for registration of a .org domain name, and
Query
command=PE_GETRESELLERPRICE&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&tld=org&ProductType=10&responsetype=xml
The response indicates that a .org domain name is $8.95 per year:
Output

<productprice>
<price>8.95</price>
</productprice>
<Command>PE_GETRESELLERPRICE</Command>
- 878 -
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CommissionAccount
l GetBalance
l PE_GetPOPPrice
l PE_GetRetailPrice
l PE_GetRocketPrice
l PE_SetPricing
PE_GetRetailPrice
Description
Definition
Get the Retail pricing for a specified product, and tell whether the product is enabled.
The Retail price is the price you charge to your retail customers; it is also the price you
charge your subaccounts unless you set prices specifically for each subaccount using
commands such as UpdateAccountPricing, GetSubAccountDetails, or PE_SetPricing.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve pricing for a single product. For example, you can use this
command to retrieve the price for renewing a .org name that you currently have set for
one retail subaccount.
Availability
- 879 -

https://resellertest.enom.com/resellers/SubAccount-Manage.asp?Account=850-tn-1053
PE_GetRetailPrice is not implemented on enom.com. The sub-account configuration
page
displays similar information, but for all top-level domains and for registering,
renewing, and transferring domains.
Constraints
Input parameters


ues are:
13 DNS hosting
16 Domain renewal
ProductType for A ProductType is
(RGP) 63
domains Required
18 Domain Extended RGP (available at
name-by-name basis)
19 transfer
the .name Registry
- 880 -

warding renewal

mitted values are:
Wildcard
Wildcard
Premium
21 SSL certificate - GeoTrust True Busi-
ProductType for SSL cer- AProductTypeis nessID
63
tificates Required 24 SSL certificate - GeoTrust True Busi-
nessID with EV
Wildcard
Site
Site Pro
Site EV
Site Pro EV

are:
database
width
ProductType for Web
A ProductType is storage
hosting and Web site cre- 63
Required 53 Web hosting component - 250MB
ation services
mailboxes
56 Web hosting bandwidth overage, at
per-1GB overage protection rate
57 Web hosting bandwidth overage fee,
- 881 -

with upgrade
POP storage
ing - Basic
ing - Full
ing - eCommerce
ing - Basic
ing - Full
ing - eCommerce

mitted values are:
renewal - 512MB/box
512MB per mailbox
38 POP mail 10-pak
ProductType for email A ProductType is 39 POP mail 10-pak renewal
63
services Required 41 Registration and email forwarding by
the .name Registry
Registry
warding renewal

mitted values are:
47 URL forwarding
ProductType for all other A ProductType is 73 ID Protect - renewal 63
services Required 140 Business Listing
235 goMobi
236 goMobi free trial
201 RichContent
- 882 -

renewal
If ProductType is 10, 16, or 19, include

TLD Optional the TLD for which you want the retail 15
price setting.
Retrieve prices for bulk discounts. In

some cases like domains, this value rep-
resents the price for multi-year regis-
Years Optional 3
trations. In other cases, this value
represents the price for multiple units sub-
scribed concurrently.



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 883 -
Example
The following query requests the price for registering a .org name, and requests the
Query
command=PE_GETRETAILPRICE&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&ProductType=10&responsetype=xml

Output
<productprice>
<price>15</price>
</productprice>
<Command>PE_GETRETAILPRICE</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l CommissionAccount
l GetBalance
- 884 -
l PE_GetPOPPrice
l PE_GetRocketPrice
l PE_SetPricing
PE_GetRetailPricing
Description
Definition
Retrieve the retail prices that this account charges for all products, and their enabled
status.
"Retail" prices apply to retail customers of this account. They also apply to any sub-
accounts in which the prices the subaccount pays have not been set for that individual
subaccount using a command such as UpdateAccountPricing, GetSubAccountDetails,
or PE_SetPricing.
Usage
Use this command to display the full list of retail prices for this account.
Availability
On the my enom > settings page, the Default Account/Sub-Account Pricing section dis-
plays the query results for PE_GetRetailPricing.
Constraints
- 885 -
Input parameters

Use TLDOnly=1 if you want only domain

Optional; default is name prices; otherwise this command
TLDOnly 20
0 returns prices for domain names and all
other products and services.
Beginning of year range for which to

retrieve prices. Permitted values are 1, 2,
Optional; default
Years 5, and 10. For example, Years=2 20
value is 1
retrieves prices for registrations of 2 to 4
years.


TLDID Our ID number for this TLD
Product type for domains. Permitted values are:

13 DNS hosting
16 Domain renewal
ProductType for domains 17 Domain redemption grace period (RGP)
18 Domain Extended RGP (available at our discretion, and
19 transfer
- 886 -
Product type for SSL certificates. Permitted values are:
214 SSL certificate - Comodo Essential Wildcard
213 SSL certificate - Comodo Premium Wildcard
20 SSL certificate - GeoTrust QuickSSL Premium
ProductType for SSL certificates 21 SSL certificate - GeoTrust True BusinessID
24 SSL certificate - GeoTrust True BusinessID with EV
27 SSL certificate - GeoTrustTrueBizID Wildcard
180 SSL certificate - VeriSign Secure Site
181 SSL certificate - VeriSign Secure Site Pro
182 SSL certificate - VeriSign Secure Site EV
183 SSL certificate - VeriSign Secure Site Pro EV
Product type for Web hosting and Web site creation services.
50 Web hosting account with Access database
51 Web hosting component - 20GB bandwidth
52 Web hosting component - 1GB Web storage
53 Web hosting component - 250MB SQL database storage
54 Web hosting component - 10 POP mailboxes
ProductType for Web hosting and Web 56 Web hosting bandwidth overage, at per-1GB overage pro-
site creation services tection rate
57 Web hosting bandwidth overage fee, with upgrade
58 Web hosting component - 100MB POP storage
86 Web Site Creator without Web hosting - Basic
87 Web Site Creator without Web hosting - Full
88 Web Site Creator without Web hosting - eCommerce
90 Web Site Creator added to Web hosting - Basic
91 Web Site Creator added to Web hosting - Full
92 Web Site Creator added to Web hosting
Product type for email services. Permitted values are:

35 Additional storage for POP pak - renewal - 512MB/box
36 Additional storage for POP pak - 512MB per mailbox
38 POP mail 10-pak
39 POP mail 10-pak renewal
ProductType for email services
42 Email forwarding by the .name Registry
- 887 -
Product type for all other services. Permitted values are:
47 URL forwarding
235 goMobi
ProductType for all other services
201 RichContent
243 TRUSTe Privacy Policy with Seal renewal

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the prices that account resellid
is charging for all products, and whether the
- 888 -
products are enabled. It also requests the response in XML format:

Query
uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&command=PE_GetRetailPricing
&responsetype=xml
The response lists the prices for all products, and tells whether they are offered in this
account:
Output

<pricestructure>
<tld>
<tld>com</tld>
<tldid>0</tldid>
</tld>
<tld>
<tld>net</tld>
<tldid>1</tldid>
</tld>
.
.
.
<product>
- 889 -
</product>
<product>
</product>
</pricestructure>
<Command>PE_GETRETAILPRICING</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l PE_GetPOPPrice
l PE_GetRetailPrice
l PE_GetRocketPrice
l PE_SetPricing
PE_GetRocketPrice
Description
Definition
- 890 -
Get the pricing and enabled state for a Registry Rocket key.
Usage
Use this command to get the price for one product, for one top-level domain. For
example, you can use this command to retrieve the price for renewing a .org name. This
command is most useful to resellers who offer a restricted set of top-level domains.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/resellers/CCProcessingSignUp.asp
This command is not implemented on enom.com. However, on the registry rocket page,
the create link button returns similar information.
Constraints
Input parameters
&paramname=paramvalue &nextparamname=nextparamvalue

Top-level domain (extension, e.g. com)

TLD Required 15
for which you want information.
Product type. Options are: 10 register 13

DNS hosting 14 DNS hosting renew 16
- 891 -

renew 19 transfer
Unique key created for each Registry

ResellerKey Required 40
Rocket site.



ErrCount
Error messages explaining the failure. These can be presen-

ErrX
ted as is back to the client.

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l Product types are: 10=register, 13=hosting, 14=hosting renew, 16=renew, 19=tran-
nsfer.
Example
The following query requests the Registry Rocket price for .org domain names, with
Query
- 892 -
command=PE_GetRocketPrice&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&tld=org
&ProductType=10&responsetype=xml
The response indicates that the price for .org names is $29.95 per year, and sales of .org
are enabled:
Output

<productprice>
<years>1</years>
</productprice>
<Command>PE_GETROCKETPRICE</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CommissionAccount
l GetBalance
l GetWebHostingAll
l PE_GetPOPPrice
l PE_GetRetailPrice
l PE_SetPricing
- 893 -
PE_GetTLDID
Description
Definition
Retrieve the ID number for a TLD.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the ID number for a TLD.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters


- 894 -

TLDID ID number for the TLD specified in the query string.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the ID number for the .org TLD, and sends the response in
XML format:
Query
command=PE_GETTLDID&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&tld=org&responsetype=xml
In the response, a value for the TLDID parameter confirms that the query was successful:
Output

- 895 -
<productid>
<tldid>2</tldid>
</productid>
<Command>PE_GETTLDID</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l PE_SetPricing
PE_SetPricing
Description
Definition
Set prices you charge subaccounts for our products and services. You can use this com-
mand to set any number of prices.
Usage
Use this command to set the prices you charge subaccounts for our products and ser-
vices. You can use this command to set any number of prices.
Availability
- 896 -

https://resellertest.enom.com/myaccount/renewalpricing.asp
On the my enom > settings page, scroll to the Default Account/Sub-Account Pricing sec-
tion and click change. You can use PE_SetPricing to set the price of any or all products.
Constraints
Input parameters

If setting sub-
account prices,
Party ID of the subaccount to set pricing
PartyID either PartyID or 40
for
LoginID is
Required
If setting sub-
account prices,
Login ID of the subaccount to set pricing
LoginID either PartyID or 20
for
LoginID is
Required
If you want to update more than one

UpdateResellerPrice product price in a reseller subaccount, 5
false
supply UpdateResellerPrice=true
- 897 -

Required for Pro-
Top-level domain name (extension) to
TLDX X=1, 2, 3, . . . ductType 10, 13, 15
set pricing for
14, 16, 19
Year bracket to set prices for. For

example, Years=2 sets the annual price
for the time bracket from 2 to 4 years;
YearsX X=1, 2, 3, . . . Required Years=5 sets the annual price for 5 to 9 2
years. Permitted values are 1, 2, 5, and
10. You can use only one Years para-
meter per query.

ues are:
13 DNS hosting
16 Domain renewal
ProductTypeX X=1, 2, 3, A ProductType is (RGP)
63
. . . Domains Required 18 Domain Extended RGP (available at
name-by-name basis)
19 transfer
the .name Registry
warding renewal

mitted values are:
Wildcard
Wildcard
ProductTypeX X=1, 2, 3, 222 SSL certificate - Comodo EV SGC
Required 63
. . . SSL 20 SSL certificate - GeoTrust QuickSSL
Premium
nessID
nessID with EV
Wildcard
- 898 -

Site
Site Pro
Site EV
Site Pro EV

are:
database
width
storage
mailboxes
ProductTypeX X=1, 2, 3, 56 Web hosting bandwidth overage, at
. . . Web hosting and per-1GB overage protection rate
Required 63
Web site creation ser- 57 Web hosting bandwidth overage fee,
vices with upgrade
POP storage
ing - Basic
ing - Full
ing - eCommerce
ing - Basic
ing - Full
ing - eCommerce

mitted values are:
ProductTypeX X=1, 2, 3, 35 Additional storage for POP pak -
Required 63
. . . Email services renewal - 512MB/box
- 899 -

512MB per mailbox
38 POP mail 10-pak
39 POP mail 10-pak renewal
the .name Registry
Registry
warding renewal

mitted values are:
47 URL forwarding
ProductTypeX X=1, 2, 3,
235 goMobi
. . . Miscellaneous ser- Required 63
vices
201 RichContent
renewal
Enable or disable the product type. Set

EnabledX X=1, 2, 3, . . . Optional 1
=1 to enable or =0 to disable.
Optional; use when

PriceX X=1, 2, 3, . . . setting retail prices Set the product price. Use format DD.cc 5000.00
for this UID
Reseller price for this product type. If

you use this parameter, you can reset
Optional; use when
the reseller price for only one product per
setting one whole-
ResellerPrice query. If you use this parameter, use 5000.00
sale price for one
parameters ProductType and Enabled
subaccount
rather than ProductTypeX and
EnabledX.
- 900 -

Retail price for this product type. If you
use this parameter, you can reset the
Optional; use when retail price for only one product per
RetailPrice setting one retail query. If you use this parameter, use 5000.00
price for this UID parameters ProductType and Enabled
rather than ProductTypeX and
EnabledX.
Registry Rocket price for this product

RocketPrice Optional 5000.00
type
Required if setting
ResellerKey a Registry Rocket Registry Rocket key 40
price


ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l Either LoginID or PartyID is required. If LoginID is passed in then it will override the
PartyID if it is also
- 901 -
l passed in.
l At least one Price must be supplied.
Example
The following query requests that the retail price for registering .org names be set at
$44.00 and for renewing .org names $45.00, and requests the response in XML format:
Query
command=PE_SetPricing&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&ProductType1=10&TLD1=org&Enabled1=1&Price1=44
&ProductType2=16&TLD2=org&Enabled2=1&Price2=45
&responsetype=xml
In the response, the Status Successful and Errcount 0 confirm that the query suc-
cessfully reset 2 prices:
Output

<Count>2</Count>
<Command>PE_SETPRICING</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AuthorizeTLD
l CommissionAccount
- 902 -
l GetBalance
l GetTLDList
l GetWebHostingAll
l PE_GetPOPPrice
l PE_GetRetailPrice
l PE_GetRocketPrice
l PE_GetTLDID
l RemoveTLD
Portal_GetAwardedDomains
Description
Definition
This command will get a list of domains awarded to watchlist users belonging to the par-
ent reseller.
Usage
This command will get a list of all domains that have been awarded to the resellers
watchlist users. Only domains that have not yet been marked as provisioned will be
returned by this command.
Availability
This command is not utilized on enom.com as it is intended for partner integration
Constraints
- 903 -
Input parameters

The maximum number of records to

RecordCount return. maximum records is capped at 3
25
100
Determine the type of domains you will

get back; Permitted values are:
0 - Only return domains that a Reseller
Optional; default is has not provisioned
RecordOption 5
0 1 - Only return domains that a Reseller
has already provisioned
2 - Return all data, even ones that have
already been awarded
Optionally set which value to start at.

StartPosition This allows you to optionally page 5
1
through the results.
Optional; default is Optionally allows you to filter the results

Tld 5
NULL only to domains with the specified TLD
Optionally allows you to filter the results

DomainNameID only to the single domain with the spe- 5
NULL
cified Domain Name ID.

DomainCount Number of domains returned in this response
TotalDomainCount Total number of domains available to be returned
- 904 -
Next starting position to use for those paging through the res-
NextStartPosition
ults.
DomainName The Domain Name
EmailAddress The Email Address of the portal user
ExpirationDate The domains expiration date.
RegisterDate The domains registration date.
ForeignLoginID The login ID on your system that registered the domain.
PortalDomainId The Portal Domain Name ID of the domain.
RegisterPrice The users registration price. This is the price that they paid.
The users registration price. This is the price that they would
RenewPrice
pay to renew the domain at your current pricing.
RegistrationPeriod The number of years the domain is registered for
Boolean value indicating if you have marked this domain as pro-

ResellerProvisioned
visioned into your system.
If the domain is marked as provisioned, this is the date that it

ResellerProvisionedDate
was done so.
Registration status of the domain. Example: Registered,

RegistrationStatus
Expired, etc.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 905 -
l Note: NewStartPosition is calculated by total results, start position and records to

return. It is advised that if you are paging through the results that you do the cal-
culation yourself with the values that make sense for your application.
l Note: ForeignLoginID is the "LoginID" that you pass along to the PORTAL_
GETTOKEN API Command
Example
The following query retrieves a single domain, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=Portal_GetAwardedDomains&UID=resellid
&PW=resellpw&RecordCount=1&RecordOption=1&ResponseType=XML
In the response, the presence of Success with a value of True AND the ErrCount value 0
indicate that the query was successful:
Output
<Domains>
<Domain>
<DomainName>mynewdomain.ninja</DomainName>
<EmailAddress>someguy@gmail.com</EmailAddress>
<RegisterDate>5/28/2014</RegisterDate>
<ForeignLoginId>Fred Penner</ForeignLoginId>
<PortalDomainId>123456789</PortalDomainId>
<RegisterPrice>19.99</RegisterPrice>
<RenewPrice>19.99</RenewPrice>
<RegistrationPeriod>5</RegistrationPeriod>
<ResellerProvisioned>1</ResellerProvisioned>
<Reseller-
ProvisionedDate>5/29/2014</ResellerProvisionedDate>
<IsPremium>0</IsPremium>
</Domain>
- 906 -
</Domains>
<Command>Portal_GetAwardedDomains</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
ingKey>
Related commands
l PORTAL_GETTOKEN
l PORTAL_UPDATEAWARDEDDOMAINS
Portal_GetDomainInfo
Description
Definition
Get information about a domain registered through portal.
Usage
Use this command to get information about a domain registered through portal.
Availability
- 907 -
Constraints
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


EmailAddress Email address of the portal account
ExpirationDate Expiration date
RegisterDate Registration date
ForeignLoginId Portal account's login ID
PortalDomainId Domain name ID
RegisterPrice Registration price
- 908 -
RenewPrice Renewal price
RegistrationPeriod Registration period (year)
ResellerProvisioned Is provisioned by the reseller?
ResellerProvisionedDate Provisioned date
IsPremium Is premium domain?
RegistrationStatus Domain registration status
Collections of domain activities, such as registrations, renew-

<domains>
als and transfers.
<orders> Collections of order histories.
<pushes> Collections of push activities.
Collections of domain services including nameserrver, host

<entry>
records and other value added items.
<RAASettings> RAA Information about contact update.
<Payment> Portal account payment information.
<Contacts> Collections of domain contacts.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully
Notes
- 909 -
Example
The following query gets information about a domain registered through portal, and
Query
command=portal_getdomaininfo&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&responsetype=xml&sld=domaintest&tld=camera
Output

<Domain>
<DomainName>domaintest.camera</DomainName>
<EmailAddress>someone@domain.com</EmailAddress>
<RegisterDate>10/14/2013</RegisterDate>
<ForeignLoginId>someone@domain.com</ForeignLoginId>
<PortalDomainId>155238298</PortalDomainId>
<RegisterPrice>20.00</RegisterPrice>
<RenewPrice>10.99</RenewPrice>
<RegistrationPeriod>1</RegistrationPeriod>
<ResellerProvisioned>0</ResellerProvisioned>
<ResellerProvisionedDate />
<IsPremium>0</IsPremium>
</Domain>
<Transactions>
<domains>
<domain AutoRenew="Yes" ExpDate="2015-10-14T18:46:00" Regis-
trationStatus="Registered" Cred="eNom, Inc." DomainName-
e="domaintest.camera" DomainNameID="152718298" SiteID="E"
LoginID="resellid" />
</domains>
<orders />
<pushes />
</Transactions>
<services>
<entry name="dnsserver">
- 910 -
<enomDNS value="NA" isDotName="NO" />

<configuration changable="1" type="dns">
<dns />
</configuration>
</entry>
<entry name="wpps">
</entry>
<entry name="wbl">
<wbl>
<statusdescr>Available</statusdescr>
</wbl>
</entry>
<entry name="mobilizer">
<mobilizer />
</entry>
</services>
<RAASettings>
<FirstName />
<LastName />
<EmailAddress />
<VerificationStatus>Pending Suspension</VerificationStatus>
<ValidationType>New Domain</ValidationType>
<IsSuspended>False</IsSuspended>
<IsPendingSuspension>True</IsPendingSuspension>
<SuspensionDate/>
<ToBeSuspendedDate>12/18/2013 7:35:57 AM</ToBeSus-
pendedDate>
<ResultText/>
<EmailsSent/>
</RAASettings>
<Payment>
<CCType>Mastercard</CCType>
<CCName>Jim Smith</CCName>
<CCExpDate>01/2017</CCExpDate>
<CCAddress1>1st Ave</CCAddress1>
<CCCity>Kirkland</CCCity>
- 911 -
<CCCountry>US</CCCountry>
<CCPhone>+1.4252744500</CCPhone>
</Payment>
<Contacts>
<Registrant>
<RegistrantPartyID>{3c850aea-ff6b-e311-acb1-0050568631ab}
<RegistrantOrganizationName>-</RegistrantOrganizationName>
<RegistrantJobTitle>-</RegistrantJobTitle>
<RegistrantFirstName>Jim</RegistrantFirstName>
<RegistrantLastName>Smith</RegistrantLastName>
<RegistrantAddress1>1st Ave</RegistrantAddress1>
<RegistrantAddress2 />
<RegistrantCity>Kirkland</RegistrantCity>
<Regis-
<Regis-
trantE-
mailAddress>someone@domain.com</RegistrantEmailAddress>
<RegistrantPhone>+1.4252744500</RegistrantPhone>
<RegistrantPhoneExt />
<RegistrantFax />
</Registrant>
<AuxBilling>
<AuxBillingPartyID>{3c850aea-ff6b-e311-acb1-0050568631ab}
</AuxBillingPartyID>
<AuxBillingOrganizationName>-</AuxBillingOrganizationName>
<AuxBillingJobTitle>-</AuxBillingJobTitle>
<AuxBillingFirstName>Jim</AuxBillingFirstName>
<AuxBillingLastName>Smith</AuxBillingLastName>
<AuxBillingAddress1>1st Ave</AuxBillingAddress1>
<AuxBillingAddress2 />
<AuxBillingCity>Kirkland</AuxBillingCity>
<AuxBillingCountry>US</AuxBillingCountry>
<AuxBillingStateProvince>WA</AuxBillingStateProvince>
<AuxBillingStateProvinceChoice>S</AuxBillingStateProvinceCh-
oice>
<AuxBillingPostalCode>98033</AuxBillingPostalCode>
- 912 -
<AuxBillingE-
mailAddress>someone@domain.com</AuxBillingEmailAddress>
<AuxBillingPhone>+1.4252744500</AuxBillingPhone>
<AuxBillingPhoneExt />
<AuxBillingFax />
<auxID>{3c850aea-ff6b-e311-acb1-0050568631ab}</auxID>
<regID>{3c850aea-ff6b-e311-acb1-0050568631ab}</regID>
</AuxBilling>
<Technical>
<TechnicalPartyID>{3c850aea-ff6b-e311-acb1-0050568631ab}
</TechnicalPartyID>
<TechnicalOrganizationName>-</TechnicalOrganizationName>
<TechnicalJobTitle>-</TechnicalJobTitle>
<TechnicalFirstName>Jim</TechnicalFirstName>
<TechnicalLastName>Smith</TechnicalLastName>
<TechnicalAddress1>1st Ave</TechnicalAddress1>
<TechnicalAddress2 />
<TechnicalCity>Kirkland</TechnicalCity>
<TechnicalCountry>US</TechnicalCountry>
<TechnicalStateProvince>WA</TechnicalStateProvince>
<Tech-
nicalStateProvinceChoice>S</TechnicalStateProvinceChoice>
<TechnicalPostalCode>98033</TechnicalPostalCode>
<Tech-
nic-
alEmailAddress>someone@domain.com</TechnicalEmailAddress>
<TechnicalPhone>+1.4252744500</TechnicalPhone>
<TechnicalPhoneExt />
<TechnicalFax />
</Technical>
<Admin>
<AdminPartyID>{3c850aea-ff6b-e311-acb1-0050568631ab}</Ad-
minPartyID>
<AdminOrganizationName>-</AdminOrganizationName>
<AdminJobTitle>-</AdminJobTitle>
<AdminFirstName>Jim</AdminFirstName>
<AdminLastName>Smith</AdminLastName>
<AdminAddress1>1st Ave</AdminAddress1>
<AdminAddress2 />
<AdminCity>Kirkland</AdminCity>
- 913 -
<AdminStateProvince>WA</AdminStateProvince>
<AdminEmailAddress>someone@domain.com</AdminEmailAddress>
<AdminPhone>+1.4252744500</AdminPhone>
<AdminPhoneExt />
<AdminFax />
</Admin>
</Contacts>
<Command>PORTAL_GETDOMAININFO</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<TrackingKey>7d438b0f-3fd1-4d5d-9da8-4af45468b-
d76</TrackingKey>
Portal_GetToken
Description
Definition
Get an access token which allows a user to auto login to a tld portal.
Usage
Use this command to get an access token which allow users to auto login to a tld portal.
Availability
- 914 -
Constraints
l The Portal User ID must be unique.
l The Email address has to be valid.
Input parameters

PortalUserID Required Unique user login ID on the reseller site 200
Email Required User email address 300


Token Access token which allows a user to auto login to a tld portal.

ErrCount

ErrX
- 915 -
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves list of TLDs currently offered for this account, and requests
the response in XML format.
Query
command=PORTAL_GETTOKEN&UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw
&PortalUserID=uniqueUserLoginID&email=user@example.com
&ResponseType=XML
Output
<token>E8888BD8D1D9DDD98DC4D8D1DADEC4DD8C8D8BC4888ADA8FC48D-
8CDD8CD8DEDC</token>
<Command>PORTAL_GETTOKEN</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
- 916 -
<Done>true</Done>
<TrackingKey>4cca5db4-a074-4d8d-baa2-f3b1317f97ff</Track-
ingKey>
Portal_UpdateAwardedDomains
Description
Definition
This command will update a set list of domains awarded as reseller provisioned.
Usage
Use this command to to update a single domain or a list of domains that have been awar-
ded to your customers through the portal as reseller provisioned and imported into your
system. Doing this will remove the domain from being able to be managed by the cus-
tomer through the portal, and will ensure that they will do so from your system.
Availability
This command is not utilized on enom.com as it is intended for partner integration
Constraints
l A search term must be passed in.
l At least one item to update must be passed in.
Input parameters
- 917 -

A comma seperated list of PortalDo-

DomainList Required 10000
mainIDs to update

Success True indicates that the request was completed successfully.

ErrCount

ErrX
Notes
l Note: This process is not reversible. Once a domain is marked as provisioned, it
will be removed from the portal and the end user will no longer be able to manage
the domain through the portal in any capacity.
Example
The following query updates 3 domains as "reseller provisioned" and sends the
- 918 -
Query
command=Portal_UpdateAwardedDomains&UID=resellid
&PW=resellpw&domainlist=123456,7890123,4567890
&ResponseType=XML
In the response, the presence of Success with a value of True AND the ErrCount value 0
Output
<Command>Portal_UpdateAwardedDomains</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
ingKey>
Related commands
l PORTAL_GETTOKEN
l PORTAL_GETAWARDEDDOMAINS
- 919 -
PP_CancelSubscription
Description
Definition
This command flags a TRUSTe Privacy Policy subscription for deletion at the end of the
current billing period.
Usage
Use this command to flag a TRUSTe Privacy Policy subscription for deletion at the end
of the current billing period. The subscription will remain active until the next billing date.
If a customer wants to remove the TRUSTe Seal from their Web site before that date,
they can do so by removing the TRUSTe code snippet from their Web site source code.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/web-site-privacy/manage.aspx
Click the domain name associated with the subscription you want to cancel. Click
Cancel Service. The Cancel Service Service button calls the PP_CancelSubscription
command.
Constraints
l The TRUSTe Privacy Policy subscription must belong to this account.
Input parameters
- 920 -

Identification number of the Privacy

Policy subscription to be canceled. To
retrieve SubscriptionID values, use the
PP_GetSubscriptions command.
Identification number of the reason for

canceling. You can use the PP_
GetCancelReasons command to retrieve
this list. Permitted values:
1 No longer Needed
ReasonID Required 2 Not as expected 1
3 Price/Value
4 Technical Issue
5 Support Issues
6 Unsupported Functionality
7 Other reason not listed
Text, supplied by customer, describing

Comment Required 256
reason for canceling.


Success status of this query. Success=true indicates that the
Success subscription has successfully been flagged for cancelation,
and will become inactive at the end of this billing cycle.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 921 -
Notes
Example
The following query flags a TRUSTe Privacy Policy subscription for cancelation, and
Query
command=PP_CancelSubscription&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&SubscriptionID=20&ReasonID=1&Comment=Not+needed
&responsetype=xml
In the response, a Success value true indicates that the query was successful:
Output

<CancelSubscription>
</CancelSubscription>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ PP_CANCELSUBSCRIPTION ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
- 922 -
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 0.250 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ 9b15959c-52e3-4161-a708-782043c69f3e ]]>
</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l PP_CheckUpgrade
l PP_GetStatuses
- 923 -
PP_CheckUpgrade
Description
Definition
Use this command to trigger display of a dialog box that confirms that the end user
intends to substitute a Privacy Policy with Seal for an existing Privacy Policy
subscription.
Usage
This is a command that you can implement to support a warning or confirmation dialog
box in your UI, to confirm that a customer intends to consolidate a configured TRUSTe
Privacy Policy subscription with an unconfigured Privacy Policy with Seal subscription.
Most commonly, its used as a precursor to the PP_UpdateSubscriptionDetails com-
mand,
to confirm the users intent to merge an existing Privacy Policy subscription with a new
Privacy Policy with Seal subscription.
This API command is optional support for your UI. Regardless of whether you implement
this command, TRUSTe subscriptions that meet the configuration criteria (the customer
specifies the same domain name for a new Privacy Policy with Seal that is already
assigned to an existing Privacy Policy) will be consolidatedin effect, deleting the
Privacy Policy subscription.
Availability
- Click a Privacy Policy subscription that is identified by its associated domain name.
- Make a note of the domain name associated with this subscription.
- Click the browser Back button to return to the Privacy Policy list.
- 924 -
- Click a Privacy Policy with Seal that is still labeled Awaiting Configuration.
- Fill in the domain name that you have noted for the Privacy Policy subscription, specify
an email address, and click Submit. In our implementation, the Submit button calls the
PP_CheckUpgrade command, and if the response includes IsUpgrade=true, a dialog
box inquires whether the user intends to consolidate two subscriptions. If the user clicks
OK in the dialog box, we call the PP_UpdateSubscriptionDetails command.
Constraints
Input parameters

Identification number of the Privacy

Policy with Seal subscription that will
replace an existing, configured Privacy
Policy subscription. To retrieve a list of
Privacy Policy subscriptions, use the
PP_GetSubscriptions command.
The domain name associated with the

DomainName Required existing Privacy Policy subscription, in 79
sld.tld format.
The email address to associate with the

EmailAddress Required 128
new Privacy Policy subscription.

- 925 -

True indicates that the domain name and email address sup-
plied in the query string will constitute an upgrade of an existing
IsUpgrade Privacy Policy subscription, and will cause that existing sub-
scription to be replaced by the Privacy Policy with Seal sub-
scription ID specified in this query string.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests a check of whether a TRUSTe Privacy Policy subscription
qualifies as an upgrade, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=PP_CheckUpgrade&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&SubscriptionID=22&DomainName=MyVeryOwnDomain.com
&EmailAddress=john.doe@resellerdocs.com&ResponseType=XML
In the response, the presence of an IsUpgrade value, and an ErrCount value 0,
- 926 -
indicate that the query is successful:

Output

<IsUpgrade>
<![CDATA[ True ]]>
</IsUpgrade>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ PP_CHECKUPGRADE ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 0.109 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
- 927 -
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ 7db66e5a-0f35-4fff-bc9a-f8ab9bf1bc56 ]]>
</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l PP_GetStatuses
PP_GetCancelReasons
Description
Definition
This command retrieves a list of reasons for cancelling a subscription to TRUSTe Pri-
vacy Policy or TRUSTe Privacy Policy with Seal.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of reasons for cancelling a subscription to TRUSTe
Privacy Policy or TRUSTe Privacy Policy with Seal.
Availability
- 928 -
In the Domain column, click a domain name or the Awaiting Configuration link. Click
Cancel Service. The Select Reason dropdown menu is populated by the PP_
GetCancelReasons API command.
Constraints
Input parameters



id Identification number for this cancellation reason
Reason Description of this cancellation reason

ErrCount

ErrX
- 929 -
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of reasons for cancelling a Privacy Policy sub-
scription, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=pp_getcancelreasons&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&responsetype=xml
In the response, a list of cancellation reasons indicates that the query was successful:
Output

<CancellationReasons>
<Reason id="1">No longer Needed</Reason>
<Reason id="2">Not as expected</Reason>
<Reason id="3">Price/Value</Reason>
<Reason id="4">Technical Issue</Reason>
<Reason id="5">Support Issues</Reason>
<Reason id="6">Unsupported Functionality</Reason>
<Reason id="7">Other reason not listed</Reason>
</CancellationReasons>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ PP_GETCANCELREASONS ]]>
- 930 -
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 0.219 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ ffbee395-a3ae-4f31-ba8e-e5265be90bbe ]]>
</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l PP_CheckUpgrade
- 931 -
l PP_GetStatuses
PP_GetControlPanelLoginURL
Description
Definition
Retrieve a URL to the TRUSTe control panel, including a 5-minute login token.
Usage
Use this command to provide a link to the TRUSTe control panel, logged in for the sub-
scription specified in the query string. The return URL includes a 5-minute login token.
For a more long-lived means of logging in, you can direct end users to trustem-
anager.com, where they can log in with their domain name and the password they chose
when configuring their TRUSTe subscription.
The TRUSTe control panel allows your customer to create a privacy policy, allows your
customer to notify TRUSTe that their Web site is ready for the certification scan for the
TRUSTe Seal, and displays code snippets for their privacy policy and Seal.
Availability
All subscriptions also use this command to log into the TRUSTe control panel so that a
customer can build or edit their privacy policy. Click a domain name. The Login to my
control panel button uses the PP_GetControlPanelLoginURL command to log the user
into the TRUSTe control panel, to configure the Privacy Policy associated with the
domain name they clicked.
When a customer subscribes to Privacy Policy with Seal and configures subscription
details, our subscription list shows a Setup Required link until the customer configures
- 932 -
their privacy policy and generates it for review. This link also calls the PP_GetCon-
trolPanelLoginURL command.
Constraints
Input parameters


TRUSTe Privacy Policy subscription for
DomainName Required 79
which you want a URL for the TRUSTe
control panel, in sld.tld format


LoginURL Login URL for the TRUSTe control panel.

ErrCount
- 933 -

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a login URL for the TRUSTe control panel for one Privacy
Policy subscription, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=PP_GetControlPanelLoginURL&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&DomainName=resellerdocs.com&responsetype=xml
In the response, the presence of a login URL, and an ErrCount value 0, indicate that the
Output

<LoginUrl>
<![CDATA[ https://reseller-qa.truste-svc.net/re-
seller/ppg?token=
a26c35f1-b352-409b-a9fa-8f831e932614 ]]>
</LoginUrl>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ PP_GETCONTROLPANELLOGINURL ]]>
</Command>
- 934 -
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 1.172 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ 9f4193ea-54d8-4163-8a57-3ec33c9fcc45 ]]>
</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l PP_CheckUpgrade
l PP_GetStatuses
- 935 -
PP_GetStatuses
Description
Definition
This command retrieves a list of subscription statuses for TRUSTe Privacy Policy.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of our subscription statuses for TRUSTe Privacy
Policy.
Availability
The PP_GetStatuses command populates the Filter By dropdown menu.
Constraints
Input parameters

- 936 -



id Identification number for this subscription status
Status Description of this subscription status

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of Privacy Policy subscription statuses, and sends
Query
- 937 -
command=pp_getstatuses&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&responsetype=xml
In the response, a list of statuses indicates that the query was successful:
Output

<PrivacyPolicyStatuses>
<Status id="1">Awaiting Configuration</Status>
<Status id="5">Billing Failed</Status>
<Status id="4">Pending Renewal</Status>
<Status id="2">Service Active</Status>
<Status id="6">Service Disabled</Status>
</PrivacyPolicyStatuses>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ PP_GETSTATUSES ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
- 938 -
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>

</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 0.094 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ 14334e9a-2037-4f66-b691-2cfc59e9fa43 ]]>
</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l PP_CheckUpgrade
PP_GetSubscriptionDetails
Description
Definition
Retrieve details for one TRUSTe Privacy Policy subscription.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve details for one TRUSTe Privacy Policy subscription.
Availability
- 939 -

Click a domain name. The PP_GetSubscriptionDetails command populates the Sub-
scription Details section of the TRUSTe Manager page.
Constraints
Input parameters

Identification number for this TRUSTe

subscription. To retrieve SubscriptionID
values, use the PP_GetSubscriptions
command.


Domain name associated with this TRUSTe Privacy Policy
DomainName
subscription
EmailAddress Email address associated with this TRUSTe Privacy Policy
- 940 -
subscription
StatusDesc Status of this TRUSTe Privacy Policy subscription
NextBillingDate Next billing date of this TRUSTe Privacy Policy subscription
Identification number for this Privacy Policys current status: 1

StatusId Awaiting Configuration 5 Billing Failed 4 Pending Renewal 2
Service Active 6 Service Disabled
Identification number of this subscription Description of this

PPSubscriptionId Type
subscription
Type Description of this subscription
Renew Auto-renew setting of this subscription
Has this subscription configured a password to log into trustem-

HasPassword
anager.com?
Status of this subscription at TRUSTe. Values are:

New Customer has associated this subscription with a domain
name and email address. Next action needed from customer is
to work through the TRUSTe control panel and generate a com-
pleted privacy policy.
Pending This status applies only to Privacy Policy with Seal.
Customer has completed the TRUSTe wizard and has gen-
erated a privacy policy, and is waiting for TRUSTes review to
certify the TRUSTe Seal. No actions needed from customer
when subscription is in this status.
Onhold This status applies only to Privacy Policy with Seal.
TRUSTe has compared the privacy policy and the customers
PolicyStatus
site, and has detected inconsistencies. TRUSTe com-
municates directly with the customer to explain the problems.
Next actions from the customer are to resolve the incon-
sistencies listed by TRUSTe, and go to the control panel to
retrieve the code snippet for their Seal (TRUSTe displays the
code snippet after customer agrees to address problems).
Verified This status applies only to Privacy Policy with Seal.
TRUSTe has scanned the customers Web site and has
determined that it is consistent with their privacy policy, and
has issued code snippets for privacy policy and Seal. Cus-
tomers next action is to log into TRUSTe control panel, where
code snippets for privacy policy and Seal are delivered.
Customer has accessed their code snippets on the TRUSTe

Verified_Viewed control panel. Customer can return to control panel as often as
needed to retrieve code snippets.
- 941 -
ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves details about a TRUSTe Privacy Policy subscription, and
Query
command=PP_GetSubscriptionDetails&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
In the response, subscription details and an ErrCount value 0 indicate that the query was
successful:
Output

<PrivacyPolicySubscriptionDetails>
- 942 -
<PPSubscriptionId>20</PPSubscriptionId>
<Type>TRUSTe Privacy Policy + Seal</Type>
<Renew>true</Renew>
<HasPassword>false</HasPassword>
<PolicyStatus>New</PolicyStatus>
</PrivacyPolicySubscriptionDetails>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ PP_GETSUBSCRIPTIONDETAILS ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 0.141 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
- 943 -
<![CDATA[ 3bec3eb8-950d-4998-a746-64ccf930105a ]]>

</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l PP_CheckUpgrade
l PP_GetStatuses
PP_GetSubscriptions
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of the Privacy Policy subscriptions in this account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of the Privacy Policy subscriptions in this account,
along with configuration and status information for each subscription. This command
allows you to sort and filter the results.
Availability
The PP_GetSubscriptions command populates the list on this page. It also sorts and fil-
ters the list based on the filter selected in the Filter by dropdown menu, and sort order
selected by clicking the column headers.
- 944 -
Constraints
Input parameters

Sort the list of Privacy Policy sub-

scriptions by this parameter. Permitted
values are:
Optional; default is DomainName
SortBy 12
NextBillDate EmailAddress
StatusDesc
NextBillDate
Type
Optional; default is Sort in ascending or descending order?

SortOrder 4
Asc Permitted values are Asc and Desc.
In a list, what item in the list should be

StartPosition returned first? Permitted values are 5
0
integers.
How many items to return in this

RecordsToReturn response? Permitted values are 5
25
integers.
Optional; If no Filter the list of Privacy Policy sub-

StatusFilter value is supplied, scriptions by this parameter. Permitted 1
all statuses are values are:
- 945 -

1 Awaiting Configuration
5 Billing Failed
returned 4 Pending Renewal
2 Service Active
6 Service Disabled

DomainName Domain name associated with this Privacy Policy subscription
EmailAddress Email address associated with this Privacy Policy subscription
StatusDesc Current status of this Privacy Policy subscription
NextBillingDate Next billing date for this Privacy Policy subscription
Identification number for this Privacy Policys current status: 1 Awaiting Configuration
StatusID
5 Billing Failed 4 Pending Renewal 2 Service Active 6 Service Disabled
Identification number for this Privacy Policy subscription Type of Privacy Policy sub-
scription:
PPSubscriptionID
TRUSTe Privacy Policy
TRUSTe Privacy Policy with Seal
Type of Privacy Policy subscription:

Type TRUSTe Privacy Policy
TRUSTe Privacy Policy with Seal
Renew Auto-renew setting for this subscription
Status of this subscription at TRUSTe. Values are:

New Customer has associated this subscription with a domain name and email
address. Next action needed from customer is to work through the TRUSTe control
panel and generate a completed privacy policy.
Pending This status applies only to Privacy Policy with Seal. Customer has com-
pleted the TRUSTe wizard and has generated a privacy policy, and is waiting for
PolicyStatus TRUSTes review to certify the TRUSTe Seal. No actions needed from customer
when subscription is in this status.
Onhold This status applies only to Privacy Policy with Seal. TRUSTe has compared
the privacy policy and the customers site, and has detected inconsistencies.
TRUSTe communicates directly with the customer to explain the problems. Next
actions from the customer are to resolve the inconsistencies listed by TRUSTe, and
go to the control panel to retrieve the code snippet for their Seal (TRUSTe displays the
- 946 -
code snippet after customer agrees to address problems).

Verified This status applies only to Privacy Policy with Seal. TRUSTe has scanned
the customers Web site and has determined that it is consistent with their privacy
policy, and has issued code snippets for privacy policy and Seal.
Customers next action is to log into TRUSTe control panel, where code snippets for
privacy policy and Seal are delivered.
Customer has accessed their code snippets on the TRUSTe control panel. Customer
Verified_Viewed
can return to control panel as often as needed to retrieve code snippets.
Total number of Privacy Policy subscriptions in this account that satisfy the filtering
TotalCount
criterion in the query string
The number of errors if any occurred. If greater than 0 check the Err(1 to ErrCount) val-
ErrCount
ues.
Error messages explaining the failure. These can be presented as is back to the cli-
ErrX
ent.
Notes
Example
The following query string retrieves a list of Privacy Policy subscriptions in this account,
Query
command=pp_getsubscriptions&uid=resellid
- 947 -
In the response, the presence of a TotalCount value, and an ErrCount value 0, indicate
Output
<Subscriptions>
<Subscription>
<PublisherID>208</PublisherID>
<SubscriptionID>2787</SubscriptionID>
<Email>EndUserEmailAddress@example.com</Email>
<DomainName>news.yahoo.com</DomainName>
<SubscriptionName>FriendlyName21</SubscriptionName>
<Status>Service Active</Status>
</Subscription>
<Subscription>
<Email>EndUserEmailAddress@example.com</Email>
<DomainName>example.com</DomainName>
<SubscriptionName>FriendlyName3</SubscriptionName>
<Status>Service Active</Status>
</Subscription>
.
.
.
</Subscriptions>
<Command>RC_GETSUBSCRIPTIONS</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
- 948 -
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>43389105-0bba-4fb2-9486-17b5cfc0322a</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l PP_CheckUpgrade
l PP_GetStatuses
PP_ReactivateSubscription
Description
Definition
Remove the cancellation flag from a TRUSTe Privacy Policy subscription that has been
flagged for cancellation.
Usage
Use this command to remove the cancellation flag from a TRUSTe Privacy Policy sub-
scription that has been flagged for cancellation.
Availability
- 949 -
In the row of a subscription in status Cancellation Pending, the Reactivate Now link calls
the
PP_ReactivateSubscription command.
Constraints
Input parameters

Identification number of the subscription

to be reactivated. To retrieve sub-
scription IDs, use the PP_GetSub-
scriptions command.


Success=true indicates that the subscription has been react-
Success
ivated successfully
ErrCount The number of errors if any occurred. If greater than 0 check the
- 950 -

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query removes the cancellation flag from a TRUSTe Privacy Policy sub-
Query
command=PP_ReactivateSubscription&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
Output

<ReactivateSubscription>
</ReactivateSubscription>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ PP_REACTIVATESUBSCRIPTION ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
- 951 -
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>

</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 0.094 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ f485f8fb-fabe-4656-b46b-4f7fb6f4740b ]]>
</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l PP_CheckUpgrade
l PP_GetStatuses
- 952 -
PP_UpdateSubscriptionDetails
Description
Definition
Configure or update subscription details for TRUSTe Privacy Policy subscription.
Usage
Use this command to configure or update the subscription details for a TRUSTe Privacy
Policy subscription:
Associate a domain name with the subscription (note that once a domain name has
been configured, it cannot be changed).
Configure or update the email address that will appear in your privacy policy.
Configure or update the password that the end customer uses to log into trustem-
anager.com (our portal which redirects them to the TRUSTe Privacy Policy control
panel).
Availability
This command is available only to ETP resellers
Click a TRUSTe Privacy Policy subscription that is in status Awaiting Configuration. On
the configuration page, the Submit button calls the PP_UpdateSubscriptionDetails com-
mand.
Constraints
- 953 -
l This command allows you to perform an initial configuration on domain name,

email address, and password. Subsequent updates are only permitted for email
address and password.
Input parameters


Identification number of the TRUSTe Pri-

vacy Policy subscription that you want to
SubscriptionID Required configure. To retrieve SubscriptionID val- 10
ues, use the PP_GetSubscriptions com-
mand
Domain name to associate with this sub-

scription. Once configured, the domain
name cannot be changed. Permitted
format is sld.tld
Email address to be associated with this

EmailAddress Required subscription. Permitted format is mail- 128
box@sld.tld
Password for logging into trustem-

anager.com, if you choose to offer your
customers that option for accessing the
SubscriptionPassword Optional 20
TRUSTe control panel. Permitted values
are alphanumeric and 6 to 20 characters
in length.

- 954 -

A return value of true indicates that this TRUSTe Privacy
Success
Policy subscription was configured successfully.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query configures subscription details for a TRUSTe Privacy Policy sub-
scription, and returns the response in XML format:
Query
command=PP_UpdateSubscriptionDetails&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&SubscriptionID=40&DomainName=Example.com
&EmailAddress=John.Doe@resellerdocs.com&ResponseType=XML
Output
- 955 -

<UpdateSubscriptionDetails>
</UpdateSubscriptionDetails>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ PP_UPDATESUBSCRIPTIONDETAILS ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 0.266 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ 1ef1a485-91f8-48c1-8c88-900d05ca4c8e ]]>
</TrackingKey>
- 956 -
Related commands
l PP_CheckUpgrade
l PP_GetStatuses
PP_ValidatePassword
Description
Definition
Use this command to validate the password for a TRUSTe Privacy Policy subscription,
when a user logs into the TRUSTe control panel through a page you build.
Usage
Use this command when you want to build your own login portal for the TRUSTe control
panel.
This command supports one of the three means we have created to give your customers
access to the TRUSTe control panel:
l Auto-login: The PP_GetControlPanelLoginURL command retrieves an auto-login
URL with 5-minute token. This URL opens TRUSTes control panel.
l White-labeled portal: We provide trustemanager.com, a white-labeled portal that
allows your customer to log into TRUSTes control panel using their domain name
and password.
l Your own portal: You can build a page that accepts the domain name and pass-
word associated with a TRUSTe subscription, validate with the PP_Val-

idatePassword command, then use the PP_GetControlPanelLoginURL command
to redirect to TRUSTes control panel.
Availability
- 957 -

On trustemanager.com, the Submit button calls the PP_ValidatePassword command.
Constraints
Input parameters


TRUSTe Privacy Policy or Privacy
DomainName Required Policy with Seal subscription that this 79
customer wants to access. Permitted
format is sld.tld
SubscriptionPassword Required Password for this TRUSTe subscription. 20


A Success value True indicates that this DomainName/Sub-
Success
scriptionPassword value is exists as submitted, for a TRUSTe
- 958 -
subscription in this account

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following submits a domain name associated with a TRUSTe subscription, and a
password, and inquires whether the pair are valid for logging into trustemanager.com (or
the portal you have built to use in place of trustemanager.com):
Query
command=PP_ValidatePassword&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&DomainName=resellerdocs.com&SubscriptionPassword=tester
&ResponseType=XML
In the response, a Success value True indicates that the DomainName/Sub-

scriptionPassword pair is valid:
Output
- 959 -
<Success>
<![CDATA[ True ]]>
</Success>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ PP_VALIDATEPASSWORD ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod />
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ enom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +0.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 0.094 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ ad261088-6b11-4ea6-83c2-6d3cc4d616fe ]]>
</TrackingKey>
- 960 -
Related commands
l PP_CheckUpgrade
l PP_GetStatuses
Preconfigure
Description
Definition
Configure the extended attributes for the Active domains in a shopping cart. Most
commonly, extended attributes are added for certain country codes, including .us,
.ca, .co.uk, and .org.uk.
Usage
Use this command when registering domains that require extended attributes (inform-
ation required by some registries for some TLDs). To retrieve extended attributes, use
the GetExtAttributes command.
This command operates only if you use our shopping cart, and only on the domains in
the cart that have status Active. If you use the Purchase command instead of our shop-
ping cart, supply the extended attributes in the Purchase command.
Optionally, you can also use this command to configure many universal attributes for
domains in your shopping cart that are in status Active. Preconfigurable attributes
include the Auto Renew setting, Registrar-Lock setting, IDN codes, name servers, host
records, access passwords, and contacts.
Many of the universal attributes that this command can set in a cart can also be set for all
future registrations by using the UpdateCusPreferences command.
Availability
- 961 -

https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/PreConfigure.asp
With a configurable domain in the cart, click the configure button below the list of cart
contents. On the Pre-configure page, one or more specific information boxes contain text
boxes that set values for the Preconfigure command when you click save changes.
Constraints
l This command operates only if you use our shopping cart, and only on the
domains in the cart that have status Active.
l There must be at least one configurable domain in the cart.
l The extended attributes (configuration parameters) you provide in the query must
match those required for the current TLD. For example, configuring a .us name
requires that you provide the attributes for .us, not those for .ca.
Input parameters
Max
Size
1 use the previously configured values for all pre-

Required .ca,
configuration information
Load .co.uk, and .or- 1
2 submit new preconfiguration information (con-
g.uk
tacts, name servers, extended attributes)
Data required by the Registry for some country

Required for
codes. Use GetExtAttributes to determine var-
ExtendedAttributes some country
whether this TLD requires extended attributes. If ies
codes
extended attributes are required, the GetEx-
- 962 -
Max
Size
tAttributes return supplies parameter names
tagged as <Name> and permitted values tagged
as <Value>
Set to Auto Renew. Permitted values are:

1 Set the preconfigured domains to renew auto-
matically (recommended)
0 Set the domains to not auto-renew
Set Registrar-Lock. Permitted values are:

1 Set the preconfigured domains to registrar lock
RegLock Required (recommended, to prevent unauthorized trans- 1
fers)
0 Do not lock the domains
Required for
PUNY
International Domain Name code for each lan-
encoded
guage used by a domain in the cart that has
names that use
IDNX X = 1 to Num- status Active. To retrieve the Active domains in
characters 3
berOfLanguages the cart, use command GetCartContent . For a
other than the
list of IDN codes, go to http://www.enom.-
English alpha-
com/resellers/newdocumentation.asp
bet, numbers,
and hyphen
Which name servers this domain uses: default

PreConfigDNS Required our name servers other name servers specified 7
in this query using the NSX parameter
Required if you
want to use Names of the name servers a domain is using.
NSX X=1 . . . 12 2
name servers Maximum of 12 name servers.
other than ours
Use host records provided in this query string.

Permitted values are: 0 Use this accounts
UseHostRecords Optional 1
default host records 1 Store the host records
provided in this string
HostNameX Optional Name of host record X, for example, www 60
Record type of host record X. Permitted values

are:
A IP address
AAAA IPv6 address
RecordTypeX Optional CNAME Alias record type, to associate a host 5
name with another host
URL URL redirect
FRAME Frame redirect
- 963 -
Max
Size
MX Mail. Can be a host name under this domain
name or the name of a mail server
MXE Mail Easy (email forwarding)
TXT Text (SPF) record
Address to redirect to.

If RecordTypeX=A, AddressX must be an IP
address
If RecordTypeX=AAAA, AddressX must be an
IPv6 address
If RecordTypeX=CNAME, AddressX must be a
fully qualified domain name (see Note) or a host
name defined in this domain
If RecordTypeX=URL, AddressX must be the
exact URL of the page you redirect to, or an IP
address, or a fully qualified domain name (see
Note)
If RecordTypeX=FRAME, AddressX is the
AddressX Optional 260
actual URL, or the IP address, or the fully qual-
ified domain name (see Note) of the page you
want to display when someone types Your_
Domain.com
If RecordTypeX=MX, AddressX must be a fully
qualified domain name (see Note) or a host
name defined in this domain
If RecordTypeX=MXE, AddressX must be an
IP address
If RecordTypeX=TXT, AddressX is a text (SPF)
record.
For help writing an SPF record, go to http://sp-
f.pobox.com/wizard.html
AccessPassword1 Optional Domain name password 50
Domain name password. Must be identical to

AccessPassword2 Optional 50
AccessPassword1.
Either
ExpressCheck- If ExpressCheckout=1, the accounts default
out or all four contacts will be applied. If ExpressCheckout=0
ExpressCheckout 1
Opt* para- or is not used, supply contact information using
meters are the Opt* and ContactType* parameters below.
Required
Either Permitted values are:

ExpressCheck- UseBilling Use the account billing contact as the
OptContactReg Registrant contact for this domain 1
out or all four
Opt* para- UseRegistrant Use the account default Regis-
- 964 -
Max
Size
trant contact as the Registrant contact for this
meters are domain
Required UseExisting Use the Registrant contact inform-
ation supplied in this query string

Either UseBilling Use the account billing contact as the
ExpressCheck- Technical contact for this domain
out or all four UseRegistrant Use the account default Regis-
OptTechnical 1
Opt* para- trant contact as the Technical contact for this
meters are domain
Required UseExisting Use the Technical contact inform-
ation supplied in this query string

ExpressCheck- Administrative contact for this domain
OptAdministrative 1
Opt* para- trant contact as the Administrative contact for
meters are this domain
Required UseExisting Use the Administrative contact
information supplied in this query string

ExpressCheck- Auxiliary Billing contact for this domain
OptContactAux 1
Opt* para- trant contact as the Auxiliary Billing contact for
meters are this domain
Required UseExisting Use the Auxiliary Billing contact
information supplied in this query string
Name of Contacts organization. ContactType

can be REGISTRANT, AUXBILLING, TECH,
ContactTypeOrg Optional ADMIN. Supply ContactType parameters for 60
any contact type where you supplied Opt*-
*=UseExisting.
ContactTypeJobTitle Optional Contacts job title 60
ContactTypeFName Optional Contacts first name 60
ContactTypeLName Optional Contacts last name 60
ContactTypeAddress Optional Contacts address 60
ContactTypeAddress2 Optional Contacts address, second line 60
ContactTypeCity Optional Contacts city 60
- 965 -
Max
Size
ContactTypeState Optional Contacts state 60
ContactTypeProvince Optional Contacts province 60
Contacts state or province choice. Use value S

ContactTypeStateProvinceC-
Optional if Contact is located in a state; use P if a 1
hoice
province.
Optional for
most TLDs;
ContactTypeZip Contacts postal code 16
Required for
.org
Contacts country. 2-letter country code is a per-

ContactTypeCountry Optional 60
mitted format
Contacts phone number. Required format is

+CountryCode.PhoneNumber, where Coun-
ContactTypePhone Optional tryCode and PhoneNumber use only numeric 17
characters and the + is URL-encoded as a plus
sign (%2B).
ContactTypePhoneExt Optional Contacts phone extension 6
Contacts fax number. Required format is

ContactTypeFax Optional tryCode and PhoneNumber use only numeric 17
characters and the + is URL-encoded as a plus
sign (%2B).
ContactTypeEmail Optional Contacts email address 128


1 indicates no extended attributes required. 2 indicates query
PreConfigSuccess
failed at Registry.
Count Number of TLDs affected

ErrCount
- 966 -
ErrX
0 indicates the domain is not lockable; 1 indicates the domain

IsLockable
is lockable
Indicates whether this is a TLD that registers in real time. 0

IsRealTimeTLD
indicates no; 1 indicates yes.

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l A fully qualified domain name is expressed in the format hostname.SLD.TLD..
Note that the trailing period is an essential component of a fully qualified domain
name.
Example
The following query supplies the extended attributes for resellerdocs.us and requests
Query
command=preconfigure&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=us&Load=2&us_nexus=c11
&us_purpose=p3&PreConfigDNS=default
&ExpressCheckout=1&responsetype=xml

Output
- 967 -

<PreConfigBillingInfo>
<BillingOrganizationName>Reseller Documents Inc.</BillingOr-
ganizationName>
<BillingJobTitle>President</BillingJobTitle>
<BillingFirstName>John</BillingFirstName>
<BillingLastName>Doe</BillingLastName>
<BillingAddress1>111 Main St.</BillingAddress1>
<BillingAddress2 />
<BillingCity>Hometown</BillingCity>
<BillingCountry>United States</BillingCountry>
<BillingPhone>5555555555</BillingPhone>
<BillingFax>5555555556</BillingFax>
<BillingE-
</PreConfigBillingInfo>
<PreConfigSuccess>2</PreConfigSuccess>
.
.
.
<Command>PRECONFIGURE</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddContact
l Contacts
l GetContacts
- 968 -
l GetExtAttributes
l GetWhoisContact
Purchase
Description
Definition
Purchase a domain name or Premium Domain in real time, or put in a real time order into
the pre-registration queue for an EAP domain.
Usage
The Purchase command enables direct real-time purchase of a domain name or
Premium Domain. The Purchase command bypasses the shopping cart and the queuing
delay associated with it.
HTTPS protocol.
The Purchase command is typically used for a single-name purchase and returns an
immediate success/failure response.
Most commonly, the Purchase command is used by resellers who maintain their own
databases.
Usage notes for .eu and .be
When you register a .eu or .be domain name, we recommend that you always provide
Registrant contact information that is separate from Billing contact information; dont use
the same as Billing default.
Tip: If the Billing and Registrant contact information are the same, we recommend chan-
ging the use or spelling of abbreviations in the street address to help our system recog-
nize that it needs to create multiple contacts. Separating the Registrant and Billing
information makes it easier to update Registrant contact information in the future.
Usage notes for Premium Domains
Because of the high prices for some Premium Domains, we offer you a wider variety of
payment methods than for most purchases:
l You can pay immediately using your account balance or credit card, just as you do
for non-premium domains (but note that we place a maximum on credit card trans-
actions).
- 969 -
l For Premium Domains, you can also pay by wire transfer, or you can pay later
using your account balance. Use the UseWireTransfer parameter in the Purchase
command to defer payment. When youre ready to pay, either wire your payment,
or use the NM_ProcessOrder command to pay with your account balance. Just be
aware that we will not release the Premium Domain to your account until we
receive payment.
Availability
All resellers can sell domain names that are available at the Registry, but only our
direct ETP resellers can sell Premium Domains.
https://resellertest.enom.com/cart/purchase.aspx?
The Purchase command is not implemented on www.enom.com. However, on the
Review
Your Order page, the Submit Order button calls InsertNewOrder , a similar command
that initiates order creation. The difference is that InsertNewOrder acquires contents of
the shopping cart and puts them in a queue for checkout; the Purchase command
bypasses the shopping cart and the queue and submits an order in real time.
Constraints
l To use our credit card processing, this must be a reseller account directly under
eNom, and must have
l signed a credit card agreement with us.
l The domain name(s) to be purchased must be valid. (See requirements under the
Check command.)
l eNom must be licensed to sell the names you attempt to register (eNom is not
licensed with the
l Registries for all TLDs).
l .co.uk and .org.uk names must have at least two name servers.
- 970 -
Input parameters
Max
Size

SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
International Domain Name code for each

Optional for PUNY-
language used by a domain in the cart that
encoded names that
has status Active. To retrieve the Active
use characters other
IDNCode domains in the cart, use command 3
than the English alpha-
GetCartContent . For a list of IDN codes,
bet, Arabic numbers,
go to http://www.enom.-
and hyphen
com/resellers/newdocumentation.asp
The exact price for this domain to acknow-

Optional. Required for ledge this domain comes at a price higher
CustomerSuppliedPrice purchasing a Premium than most registrations. Use the PE_ 8
Domain GetPremiumPricing command to retrieve
the price.
Optional. Required for PremiumDomain=Yes is required when pur-

purchasing a Premium chasing a Premium Domain, to acknow-
PremiumDomain 3
Domain via NM_* com- ledge this domain comes at a price higher
mands than most registrations
Optional. Required for Which EAP Registration period you are

RegPeriod purchasing an EAP attempting to purchase. Supported values 20
domain are "pre-registration".
Optional. Required for Specify which EAP day you are intending
EapDay purchasing an EAP to purchase. Supported values are between 1
domain 1 and 7.
Optional. Required for The contents of the SMD (Signed Mark

1200-
Signed_Mark_Data purchasing domain Data) file that the TMCH (Trade Mark Clear-
0
with a trademark ing House) has provided you.
- 971 -
Max
Size
Specify UseDNS=default to use our name
Either UseDNS or servers (most of the services that we
UseDNS 7
NSX is Required provide require our name servers). See
Note.
Use this parameter to assign user-specified

name servers. Permitted values are the use
Either UseDNS or
NSX names of registered name servers, for 60
NSX is Required
example, NS1=ns1.name-services.com
See Note.
Optional; default value

UnLockRegistrar Set to 1 to unlock or 0 to lock the name. 1
is 0
Optional; default value Set to 1 to renew the name automatically

RenewName 1
is 0 before it expires.
Set a password on the domain name. For

Premium Domains, you cannot set a pass-
Optional; default value
DomainPassword word in the Purchase command, but you 60
is no password
can set a password once the domain name
is in your account.
Set to 1 to receive email notification of cus-

EmailNotify Optional; default is 0 tomer orders, set to 0 or don't use it oth- 1
erwise.
Optional for non-

premium domains;
Number of years to register the name. For
default is the number
most registrations, permitted values are 1
you set with
to 10 but some TLDs vary from this range.
NumYears UpdateCusPrefer- 2
For Premium Domains, we ignore this para-
ences For Premium
meter if you supply it, and automatically set
Domains, we auto-
NumYears to 1
matically set this
value to 1.
If QueueOrder=1, register the domain at the

Registry and return an order ID, then put
this order in our order queue instead of pro-
cessing in real time. This option reduces
the risk of the order timing out when our sys-
tem is under stress. This option is suitable
QueueOrder Optional 6
for real-time TLDs like .com and .net but
less relevant for manually processed TLDs
like .de and .co.uk. The slight delay asso-
ciated with this option makes it unsuitable if
your processes immediately execute sec-
ondary calls like setting host recordsthey
- 972 -
Max
Size
must be done after the order completes.
If the Registry would fail this order due to

stresses it is experiencing, submit
AllowQueuing=1 to queue and process this
AllowQueuing Optional; default is 1 1
order when the Registry recovers. Submit
AllowQueuing=0 to fail the order when the
Registry is under stress.
Continue processing even if name servers

cannot be applied. If IgnoreNSFail=Yes,
this purchase request will succeed even if
the Registry does not recognize the name
IgnoreNSFail Optional; default is No 6
servers listed in this query. If you use
IgnoreNSFail=Yes and failures are
returned, you should confirm the status of
name servers with the Registry.
If UseWireTransfer=Yes , process this

Premium Domain order as a deferred pay-
ment order. Use this parameter if you want
to use either of our pay-later options: wire
Optional overall, but
transfer or account balance. If you pay by
Required if you want
UseWireTransfer wire transfer, contact your sales rep- 3
to defer payment for a
resentative for wire transfer instructions. If
Premium Domain
you pay using your account balance (but
after submitting the order using the
Purchase command), use the NM_Pro-
cessOrder command.
If UseCreditCard=Yes, use our credit card

processing services. This service is avail-
able only to resellers who have entered into
UseCreditCard Optional a credit card processing agreement with us. 3
When you pass credit card information with
this command, you must use the secure
HTTPS protocol.
Amount to charge per year for the regis-

tration (this value will be multiplied by
Required if using our
NumYears to calculate the total charge to
credit card processing
the credit card). Required format is DD.cc
to purchase a non-
For Premium Domains, we ignore this para- 5000.-
ChargeAmount premium domain
meter if you supply it, and charge the pos- 00
name. This parameter
ted price. We cover your merchant services
is ignored for Premium
fees for Premium Domains so that the con-
Domains.
venience charges do not reduce your com-
mission.
- 973 -
Max
Size
End users IP address. This is used in fraud
Required if using our checking, as part of our order processing
EndUserIP 15
credit card processing service. Use format
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
Required if using our Type of credit card. Permitted values are

CardType 20
credit card processing Visa, Mastercard, AmEx, Discover


Required if using our Credit card expiration month. Permitted

credit card processing format is MM
Required if using our Credit card expiration year. Permitted

CreditCardExpYear 4
credit card processing format is YYYY



CCCity Credit card billing city 60

CCStateProvince Credit card billing state or province 60

Credit card billing phone number. Required

format is +CountryCode.PhoneNumber,
CCPhone where CountryCode and PhoneNumber 15
use only numeric characters and the + is
URLencoded as a plus sign (%2B).
Required our credit Credit card billing country. The two-letter

CCCountry 60
card processing country code is a permitted format
Data required by the Registry for some

Required for some country codes. Use GetExtAttributes to var-
ExtendedAttributes
country code TLDs determine whether this TLD requires exten- ies
ded attributes.
RegistrantFirstName Required if extended Registrant first name 60
- 974 -
Max
Size
attributes are required
OR if you supply one
of the other core Regis-
trant attributes (see
Note)
Required if extended
Note)
Regis-
Optional Registrant organization 60
trantOrganizationName
Required if param
Regis-
RegistrantJobTitle trantOr- Registrant job title 60
ganizationName is
used
RegistrantAddress1 Registrant Address 60
Note)
RegistrantCity Registrant city 60
Note)
Regis- Registrant state or province choice: S state

Optional 1
trantStateProvinceChoice P province
RegistrantStateProvince Registrant state or province 60
Note)
RegistrantPostalCode Required for .org Registrant postal code 16
- 975 -
Max
Size
names or when you
supply one of the other
core Registrant attrib-
utes
OR if you supply one Registrant country. The twocharacter coun-
RegistrantCountry 60
of the other core Regis- try code is a permitted format
Note)
Note)
Registrant phone. Required format is
RegistrantPhone tryCode and PhoneNumber use only 20
numeric characters and the + is URLen-
coded as a plus sign (%2B).
Note)
Registrant fax number. Required format is

Required if Regis-
+CountryCode. PhoneNumber, where
trantOr-
RegistrantFax CountryCode and PhoneNumber use only 20
ganizationName is
used
ContactType first name. Replace

ContactType in the parameter names with
Tech, Admin or AuxBilling. Use these para-
meters if you want the Technical, Admin-
ContactTypeFirstName Optional istrative, or Auxiliary Billing contact 60
information to be different from the Billing
contact. You can also supply or change con-
tact information later using the Contacts
API command.
Required if you supply

one of the other core
ContactTypeLastName attributes for this ContactType last name 60
ContactType (see
Note)
ContactTypeOr- Optional ContactType organization 60
- 976 -
Max
Size
ganizationName

ContactTypeJobTitle attributes for this ContactType job title 60
ContactType (see
Note)

ContactTypeAddress1 attributes for this ContactType address, line 1 60
ContactType (see
Note)
ContactTypeAddress2 Optional ContactType additional address info 60

ContactTypeCity attributes for this ContactType city 60
ontactType (see Note)
ContactTypeStateProvinc- ContactType state or province choice: S

Optional 1
eChoice state P province
ContactTypeStateProvinc-
Optional ContactType state or province 60
e
Optional; Required for

.org names if you sup-
ContactTypePostalCode ply one of the other ContactType postal code 16
core attributes for this
ContactType

ContactType country, expressed as the
ContactTypeCountry attributes for this 60
two-character country code
ContactType (see
Note)

ContactTypeE-
attributes for this ContactType email address 128
mailAddress
ContactType (see
Note)
Required if you supply ContactType phone. Required format is

ContactTypePhone one of the other core +CountryCode. PhoneNumber, where 20
attributes for this CountryCode and PhoneNumber use only
- 977 -
Max
Size
ContactType (see numeric characters and the + is URLen-
Note) coded as a plus sign (%2B).
ContactType fax number. Required format

is +CountryCode.PhoneNumber, where
ContactTypeFax Optional CountryCode and PhoneNumber use only 20


Returned if this order was queued due to stresses at the
OrderDelayed
Registry
ContactTypeContact Returned if new contacts were created with this query string
Order number if successful. We recommend that you store this

OrderID
number for future use
TotalCharged Total points or $US charged for this order
FailedNameServers Not implemented
RegistrantPartyID Party ID number for registrant, for our database
Success code. Response code 200 indicates successful pro-

RRPCode cessing in real time; response code 1300 indicates a suc-
cessful queued order.
RRPText Text which accompanies and describes the RRPCode value.
Expiration date of this domain when response code is 200 and

RegistryExpDate
processing is in real time.
Create date of this domain when response code is 200 and pro-
RegistryCreateDate
cessing is in real time.

ErrCount
- 978 -

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l If using our credit card option ALL registrant and credit card information is required.
l For most TLDs (those that dont require extended attributes), Registrant contact
information is optional: if not supplied, it is inherited from the Billing contact.
However, if you supply any one of the core Registrant values, you must supply
them all. The core Registrant values are:
l RegistrantFirstName
l RegistrantLastName
l RegistrantAddress1
l RegistrantCity
l PostalCode (for .org names)
l RegistrantCountry
l RegistrantEmailAddress
l RegistrantPhone
l Additional parameters for contact information can be passed by replacing Regis-

trant in the parameter names above with Tech, Admin or AuxBilling.
l To set name servers to eNoms, set the UseDNS=default param and don't pass NS
(x) name servers. To set name servers to your name servers, set NSX-
X=YourNameServerX and don't pass UseDNS=default. You can set up to 12 of
your own name servers.
l Some TLDs, including .de, require you to specify name servers. The Registry will
automatically delete the domain name if no name servers are specified.
l We recommend that you store the OrderID valueat least the most recent one for
each domainfrom the return. Several other commands use this value as a
required input parameter.
l In the return, an RRPCode of 200 indicates a successful registration. Otherwise,
check the return parameter ErrCount. If greater than 0 the transaction failed. The
l In the return, if the RRPCode value is 1300 and the IsRealTimeTLD value is false,
then this is a nonreal-time TLD. For these names, use the GetOrderDetail com-
mand roughly every 24 hours to check the progress of the registration.
- 979 -
Example
The following query requests the purchase of domain name resellerdocs2.net, and
Query
command=Purchase&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs2&tld=net
&RegistrantOrganizationName=Reseller%20Documents%20Inc.
&RegistrantFirstName=john&RegistrantLastName=doe
&RegistrantAddress1=111%20Main%20St.
&RegistrantCity=Hometown&RegistrantStateProvince=WA
&RegistrantStateProvinceChoice=S&RegistrantPostalCode=98003
&RegistrantCountry=United+States
&RegistrantEmailAddress=john%2Edoe%40resellerdocs%2Ecom
&RegistrantPhone=%2B1.5555555555
&RegistrantFax=%2B1.5555555556&ResponseType=XML
The response includes the three components that indicate a successful transaction: an
order ID indicates success at the registrar level, and the RRPCode value of 200 and
RRP text with a success message indicate success at the Registry level:
Output
<RegistrantPartyID>{1C3E82CA-FE3F-E011-B28A-005056BC7747}
<RRPText>Command completed successfully -
157781021</RRPText>
<Site>eNom</Site>
- 980 -
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l AddBulkDomains
l Check
l PurchaseServices
PurchaseHosting
Description
Definition
Subscribe to our domain name hosting services, while leaving the registration of the
domain name at another registrar. This is a real-time command.
Usage
Use this command to purchase domain name hosting services in real time, while leaving
the registration of a domain name at another registrar.
HTTPS protocol.
To purchase DNS hosting using the shopping art and order queue, use the AddToCart
command.
Availability
This command is not imThis command is not implemented on eNom.com, but is the real-
time analog to two commands that are. On our site, we use AddToCart to allow a cus-
- 981 -
tomer to specify that they want to purchase DNS Hosting, and InsertNewOrder to submit
the order.
Constraints
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
DomainPassword Optional Set a password on the domain name 60
NumYears Optional Number of years to register the name 2
Renewname Optional Set =1 to auto-renew the name 1
Amount to charge per year for the regis-

ChargeAmount Optional 6
tration
Optional overall, but Permitted values are yes and no. The
Required for credit card supplied in this query string
resellers who have is charged only if UseCreditCard=yes.
a credit card pro- If this param is omitted, or if the value
UseCreditCard cessing agreement supplied is anything other than yes, the 3
with us AND want account balance rather than the credit
to use our CC pro- card is debited for this transaction. This
cessing to charge is true even if the query string includes
- 982 -

this transaction to
all the required credit card information.
the credit card
When you pass credit card information
included in this
with this command, you must use the
query string. Default
secure HTTPS protocol.
is no.

Required if
EndUserIP UseCreditCard=yes 15
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
Required if
Type of credit card. Permitted values
CardType UseCreditCard=yes 20
are Visa, Mastercard, AmEx, Discover
Required if
CreditCardNumber UseCreditCard=yes Customer's credit card number 128
Required if
CreditCardExpMonth UseCreditCard=yes Credit card expiration month 2
Required if
CreditCardExpYear UseCreditCard=yes Credit card expiration year 4
Required if
CVV2 UseCreditCard=yes Credit card verification code 4
Required for our CC

CCName Cardholders name 60
processing
Required for our CC

CCAddress Credit card billing street address 60
processing
Optional for our CC

CCCity Credit card billing city ?
processing
Optional for our CC

processing
Required for our CC Credit card billing country. Two-char-

CCCountry 40
processing acter country code is a permitted format
Required for our CC

processing
Optional for our CC Credit card billing phone. Required

CCPhone 20
processing format is +CountryCode.PhoneNumber,
- 983 -

where CountryCode and PhoneNumber
use only numeric characters and the +
is URL-encoded as a plus sign (%2B).
Set =1 to receive email notification for

EmailNotify Optional orders, set =0 or omit this parameter oth- 1
erwise.


OrderID Order number if successful.
RRPCode Success code. Only a 200 indicates success.
RRPText Text which accompanies and describes the RRPCode.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l Additional params for contact information can be passed by replacing Registrant in
the param names above with Tech, Admin or AuxBilling.
l If using our credit card option ALL registrant and credit card information is required.
- 984 -
Example
The following query orders and pays for one year of DNS hosting for the site reseller-
docs.com, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=purchasehosting&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&numyears=1
&RegistrantAddress1=111+Main+St.+&RegistrantCity=Hometown
&RegistrantCountry=USA
&RegistrantEmailAddress=test@here.net
&RegistrantFirstName=John&RegistrantLastName=Doe
&RegistrantPostalCode=99999&Renewname=1
&UseCreditCard=yes&EndUserIP=127.0.0.1
&CreditCardNumber=4111111111111111
&CreditCardExpMonth=05&CreditCardExpYear=2005
&CCName=John+Doe&CardType=visa
&ChargeAmount=12&responsetype=xml
Output
<Command>PURCHASEHOSTING</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>672bb050-769a-4562-82a8-d1b6dae96077</Track-
ingKey>
- 985 -
Related commands
l ExtendDomainDNS
l GetHosts
l SetHosts
PurchasePOPBundle
Description
Definition
Purchase, in real time, a pak of 10 POP Email accounts for the specified domain name.
Usage
Use this command to purchase, in real time, a pak of 10 POP Email accounts for the spe-
cified domain name.
We recommend the POP3 mail service for parties who want to be able to send mail from
their domain name (instead of, for example, a yahoo or hotmail senders address), and
for parties who want to manage multiple email accounts as a body (rather than having
everyones email forwarded to scattered locations).
After you sell a POP Email bundle, you can set up users with the SetUpPOP3User com-
mand.
Availability
On the POP3 Mail page, the add an Email Pak button calls the PurchasePOPBundle
command.
- 986 -
Constraints
l This command can be used only for purchasing POP paks for reseller accounts.
Retail accounts must
l use a queue-based shopping cart process.
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Quantity Required Number of 10-address paks. 10
Optional in all Format of response. Permitted values

ResponseType 4
cases are Text (default), HTML, or XML.

OrderID Identification number of the order
BundleID Identification number of each POP3 10-pak
Number of POP 10-paks sold in this transaction, if more than

BundleCount
one
- 987 -

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests 1 pak of 10 POP3 mailboxes for resellerdocs.com, and
Query
command=PurchasePOPBundle&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&Quantity=1&responsetype=xml
In the response, the return of an orderid value and a bundleid value confirm a successful
query:
Output
<orderid>157781024</orderid>
<Bundles>
<BundleID>30823</BundleID>
</Bundles>
- 988 -
<BundleCount>1</BundleCount>
<Command>PURCHASEPOPBUNDLE</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l DeleteAllPOPPaks
l DeletePOP3
l DeletePOPPak
l Forwarding
l GetForwarding
l GetMailHosts
l GetPOP3
l GetPOPExpirations
l GetPOPForwarding
l ModifyPOP3
l PurchaseHosting
l PurchaseServices
l RenewPOPBundle
l SetPOPForwarding
l SetUpPOP3User
- 989 -
PurchasePreview
Description
Definition
Preview a shopping cart order.
Usage
Use this command to view the items that will be purchased if you check out now.
Availability
http://www.enom.com/Cart.asp
On the cart page, the checkout button calls the PurchasePreview command. It creates
the list of items on the checkout page.
Constraints
Input parameters

- 990 -


ItemID Shopping cart item ID, from our internal records
Description Description of shopping cart item
Years Number of time units customer wants to subscribe
NameID Domain name ID, from our internal records
Name Name the customer has requested for this item
StatusID Status ID
ItemPrice Price for one unit of this item
ExtPrice ItemPrice multiplied by Years (number of time units)
NeedsConfig Flag that marks domains requiring pre-configuration
ProductType Product type ID number, from our internal records
FreeTrial Is this product being offered as a free trial?
ParentItemID Parent item ID number, from our internal records
ICANNFees Fees charged by ICANN for this product
BasePrice Price of this product before the ICANN fee

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 991 -
Notes
Example
The following requests a preview of account resellid and an inventory of its shopping
cart, and requests the response in XML format:
Query
command=purchasepreview&uid=resellid
The response gives some general information about the account, plus the current con-
tents of the shopping cart:
Output
<Purchase-Summary>
<PremDomainSalesAmount/>
<Balance>2454.8</Balance>
<AvailableBalance>2083.85</AvailableBalance>
<DotComPrice>8.95</DotComPrice>
<DotNetPrice>8.95</DotNetPrice>
<DotOrgPrice>8.95</DotOrgPrice>
<DotCcPrice>24.95</DotCcPrice>
<DotTvPrice>39.95</DotTvPrice>
<TotalPrice>0.00</TotalPrice>
<TotalDiscount>0</TotalDiscount>
</Purchase-Summary>
<Command>PURCHASEPREVIEW</Command>
- 992 -
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l AddBulkDomains
l AddToCart
l DeleteFromCart
l GetCartContent
l InsertNewOrder
l UpdateCart
PurchaseServices
Description
Definition
Purchase one of our services in real time.
The PurchaseServices command allows you to purchase one service each time you run
the query.
Usage
Use this command to purchase one value-added service in real time, as opposed to
going through a shopping cart and our order queue. Most commonly, real-time com-
mands are used by resellers who maintain their own databases.
Our credit card services are available for ID Protect and DNS hosting.
- 993 -
HTTPS protocol.
Availability
The PurchaseServices command is not implemented on www.enom.com. Its func-
tionality is most similar to the combined functionality of AddToCart and InsertNewOrder.
The difference is that AddToCart and InsertNewOrder can put multiple items into a shop-
ping cart and then put items selected from that cart into a queue for checkout, whereas
the PurchaseServices command purchases a single item in real time.
Constraints
l Some products are available to only some TLDs. For example, ID Protect is not
available for .us.
l To use our credit card processing (available only for ID Protect, Business Listing,
and DNS hosting in the PurchaseServices suite of products), this must be an ETP
reseller account that has signed a credit card agreement with us.
Input parameters
Click a link in the table below to go directly to a specific product:
Input parameters for SSL Certificates
- 994 -

Input parameters for DNS hosting

The table below lists input parameters for ID Protect.

Service Required Permitted value for ID Protect is WPPS 15
Required for Second-level domain name (forexample,

SLD 63
WPPS enom in enom.com).
Required for
TLD Top-level domain name (extension). 15
WPPS
Optional for
Number of years to subscribe to ID Pro-
NumYears WPPS; default is 1 2
tect
Optional for Use RenewName=1 to automatically

RenewName WPPS; default is 0 renew ID Protect 30 days before it 1
expires
Permitted values are 0 and 1. 1 sends

Optional; default is you an email confirmation when a cus-
EmailNotify 3
0 tomer makes a purchase using this com-
mand.
- 995 -

Optional overall, Available for WPPS. Permitted values
but Required for are yes and no. The credit card supplied
resellers who have in this query string is charged only if
a credit card pro- UseCreditCard=yes. If this param is
cessing agreement omitted, or if the value supplied is any-
with us AND want thing other than yes, the account balance
UseCreditCard to use our CC pro- rather than the credit card is debited for 3
cessing to charge this transaction. This is true even if the
this transaction to query string includes all the required
the credit card credit card information. When you pass
included in this credit card information with this com-
query string. mand, you must use the secure HTTPS
Default is no. protocol.

Required for our
EndUserIP credit card pro- 15
cessing
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
Amount to charge for each year;

Required for our cc
ChargeAmount ChargeAmount will be multiplied by 6
processing
NumYears. Required format is DD.cc
Required for our cc Credit card type. Permitted values are

CardType 20
processing Visa, Mastercard, AmEx, Discover
Required for our cc

CreditCardNumber Credit card number 128
processing
Required for our cc Expiration month of the credit card, in

processing format MM
Required for our cc Expiration year of the credit card, in

CreditCardExpYear 4
processing format YYYY
Required for our cc

CVV2 processing, if prin- Credit card verification value 4
ted on the card
Required for our cc

processing
Required for our cc

processing
Optional for our CC

processing
Optional for our CC

processing
- 996 -

Required for our cc Credit card billing country. Two-character
CCCountry 40
processing country code is a permitted format
Required for our cc

processing
Credit card billing phone. Required

Optional for our CC
processing
URL-encoded as a plus sign (%2B).

ResponseType 4
Input parameters for SSL Certificates

The table below lists input parameters for SSL certificates.
Service to purchase. Permitted values for certs are:

Certificate-Comodo-Essential
Certificate-Comodo-Instant
Certificate-Comodo-Essential-Wildcard
Certificate-Comodo-Premium-Wildcard
Certificate-Comodo-EV
Certificate-Comodo-EV-SGC
Service Required Certificate-GeoTrust-QuickSSL 15
Certificate-GeoTrust-QuickSSL-Premium
Certificate-GeoTrust-TrueBizID
Certificate-GeoTrust-TrueBizID-Wildcard
Certificate-GeoTrust-TrueBizID-EV
Certificate-RapidSSL-RapidSSL
Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site
Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site-Pro
- 997 -
Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site-EV
Certificate-VeriSign-Secure-Site-Pro-EV
Certificate-Comodo-UCC-DV
Certificate-Comodo-UCC-OV
Number of years to purchase this SSL certificate. Permitted val-

ues are 1 to the following maximum values:
5 Comodo Essential
5 Comodo Instant
3 Comodo Essential Wildcard
5 Comodo Premium Wildcard
2 Comodo EV
2 Comodo EV SGC
4 GeoTrust QuickSSL
Optional for
4 GeoTrust QuickSSL Premium
NumYears certs; default is 1 2
4 GeoTrust True BusinessID
4 GeoTrust True BusinessID Wildcard
2 GeoTrust True BusinessID with EV
4 RapidSSL
4 VeriSign Secure Site
4 VeriSign Secure Site Pro
2 VeriSign Secure Site with EV
2 VeriSign Secure Site Pro with EV
3 Comodo UCC DV
3 Comodo UCC OV
ResponseType Optional in all Format of response. Permitted values are Text (default), HTML,
4
cases or XML.

The table below lists input parameters for TRUSTe Privacy Policy and TRUSTe Privacy
Policy with Seal.

- 998 -

TRUSTePrivacyPolicy
Service Required TRUSTePrivacyPolicyFreeTrial 23
TRUSTePrivacyPolicySeal
TRUSTePrivacyPolicySealFreeTrial

Optional; default is TRUSTe Privacy Policy or TRUSTe Pri-
NumYears 1
1 vacy Policy with Seal. Permitted values
are 1, 2, or 3

EmailNotify 3
mand.
Optional overall, Available for TRUSTe products. Per-

but Required for mitted values are yes and no. The credit
resellers who have card supplied in this query string is
a credit card pro- charged only if UseCreditCard=yes. If
cessing agreement this param is omitted, or if the value sup-
with us AND want plied is anything other than yes, the
UseCreditCard to use our CC pro- account balance rather than the credit 3
cessing to charge card is debited for this transaction. This
this transaction to is true even if the query string includes all
the credit card the required credit card information.
included in this When you pass credit card information
query string. with this command, you must use the
Default is no. secure HTTPS protocol.
Required for our End users IP address. This is used in

EndUserIP credit card pro- fraud checking, as part of our order pro- 15
cessing cessing service.

Required for our cc
processing
Required for our cc Credit card type. Permitted values are

CardType 20
Required for our cc

processing
Required for our cc Expiration month of the credit card, in

Required for our cc Expiration year of the credit card, in

CreditCardExpYear 4
- 999 -

Required for our cc
CVV2 processing, if prin- Credit card verification value 4
ted on the card
Required for our cc

processing
Required for our

CC processing
Optional for our CC

processing
Optional for our CC

processing
Required for our Credit card billing country. Two-character

CCCountry 40
CC processing country code is a permitted format
Required for our

CC processing

Optional for our CC
processing

ResponseType 4

The table below lists input parameters for VeriSign Trust Seal.

- 1000 -

Service to purchase. Permitted values
Service Required for VeriSign Trust Seal: Seal-VeriSign- 15
Trust-Seal
Number of years to subscribe to VeriSign

NumYears Required Trust Seal. Permitted values are 1, 2, or 1
3

ResponseType 4

The table below lists input parameters for GeoTrust Anti-Malware.


for GeoTrust Anti-Malware: GeoTrust-
Service Required 15
Anti-Malware-Scan GeoTrust-Anti-Mal-
ware-Scan-With-Seal

Optional; default=1
NumYears GeoTrust Anti-Malware. Permitted value 1
is 1

ResponseType 4

The table below lists input parameters for SiteLock.
- 1001 -


Service Required for SiteLock: SiteLock-Basic SiteLock- 15
Premium SiteLock-Enterprise
Optional; default=1 Number of years to subscribe to

NumYears 1
SiteLock. Permitted value is 1

ResponseType 4

The table below lists input parameters for RichContent.

Permitted values for RichContent are:

Service Required 15
RichContent RichContentFreeTrial
Email address of the RichContent cus-

Either EmailAd-
tomer. An email address can be used for
dress or Pub-
EmailAddress multiple RichContent subscriptions in 150
lisherID is
the same domain name account, but can
Required
only be used for a free trial once.
Either EmailAd- Identification number for this email

PublisherID 10
dress or Pub- address in our records of RichContent
- 1002 -

subscriptions. To retrieve this number
lisherID is
use the RC_GetSubscriptions com-
Required
mand. Permitted values are integers
RichContentFreeTrial Domain name,

Optional for with host records, to associate with this
SourceDomain 272
RichContent RichContent subscription. Permitted
format is host.sld.tld
Billing period, in months. For RichCon-

tent, permitted values are 1, 3, 6, or 12.
Optional; default is For RichContentFreeTrial, the permitted
Quantity 2
1 value is 1, and the subscription auto-
matically converts to monthly billing after
the one-month free trial

EmailNotify 3
mand.

NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.

ResponseType 4

The table below lists input parameters for Business Listing.

Permitted value for Business Listing is

Service Required 15
BusListing
- 1003 -

Required for Second-level domain name (for example,
SLD 63
BusListing enom in enom.com).
Required for
BusListing
Optional for
Number of years to subscribe to ID Pro-
NumYears BusListing; default 2
tect. Permitted values are 1 to 10.
is 1
Optional for Use RenewName=1 to automatically

RenewName BusListing; default renew Business Listing 30 days before it 1
is 1 expires

EmailNotify 3
mand.
Optional overall, Available for BusListing. Permitted val-

but Required for ues are yes and no. The credit card sup-
resellers who have plied in this query string is charged only if
a credit card pro- UseCreditCard=yes . If this param is
cessing agreement omitted, or if the value supplied is any-
with us AND want thing other than yes, the account balance
UseCreditCard to use our CC pro- rather than the credit card is debited for 3
cessing to charge this transaction. This is true even if the
this transaction to query string includes all the required
the credit card credit card information. When you pass
included in this credit card information with this com-
query string. mand, you must use the secure HTTPS
Default is no. protocol.

Required for our fraud checking, as part of our order pro-
EndUserIP 15
CC processing cessing service. Use format
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.

Required for our
CC processing
Required for our Credit card type. Permitted values are

CardType 20
CC pprocessing Visa, Mastercard, AmEx, Discover
Required for our

CC processing
Required for our Expiration month of the credit card, in

CC processing format MM
- 1004 -

Required for our Expiration year of the credit card, in on
CreditCardExpYear 4
CC processing year of the credit card, in format YYYY
Required for our

CVV2 CC processing, if Credit card verification value 4
printed on the card
Required for our

CC processing
Required for our

CC processing
Optional for our CC

processing
Optional for our CC

processing
Required for our Credit card billing country. Two-character

CCCountry 40
Required for our

CC processing

Optional for our CC
processing

ResponseType 4

The table below lists input parameters for POP Email.
Using the PurchaseServices command, you can purchase POP Email for 1 year.
You can renew in real time using the RenewPOPBundle command, or set auto-renew
preferences with the SetPakRenew or SetRenew commands.
- 1005 -

Type of service to purchase. For POP

Service Required 15
Email, Service=POP3.
Required for POP3 Second-level domain name (for example,

SLD 63
enom in enom.com).
Required for POP3

For POP3, number of 10-address POP

Quantity Required for POP3 10
paks.

EmailNotify 3
mand.

ResponseType 4

The table below lists input parameters for Web Site Creator (WSC).
Using the PurchaseServices command, you can subscribe to WSC with a monthly
billing cycle.

Type of service to purchase. For WSC,

Service Required 15
use Service=LWSCBasic, LWSCFull, or
- 1006 -

LWSCECom.

LWSCBasic, enom in enom.com). For LWSC*, this is
SLD 63
LWSCFull, and the domain WSC will be associated with.
LWSCECom
Required for
Top-level domain name (extension). For
LWSCBasic,
TLD LWSC*, this is the domain WSC will be 15
LWSCFull, and
associated with.
LWSCECom

EmailNotify 3
mand.

ResponseType 4

The table below lists input parameters for Web hosting.

Type of service to purchase. For Web

Service Required 15
hosting, use Service=WebHosting

Optional for enom in enom.com). For WebHosting,
SLD 63
WebHosting this is the domain the Web hosting pack-
age will be associated with.
Top-level domain name (extension). For

Optional for
TLD WebHosting , this is the domain the Web 15
WebHosting
hosting package will be associated with.
- 1007 -

Name for this Web hosting account. Per-
Required for mitted values are 6 to 14 characters in
HostAccount 14
WebHosting length, begin with a letter, and the remain-
ing characters are alphanumeric.
Password for this Web hosting account;

Required for
HostPassword must be alphanumeric and 6 to 14 char- 14
WebHosting
acters in length.
First and last name of the contact person

Required for
FullName for this Web hosting account, for 44
WebHosting
example, John Doe
Email address for communications from

Optional for us regarding this Web hosting account,
HostAccountEmail 78
WebHosting for example, john.-
doe@resellerdocs.com
Package name. To retrieve currently

Required for defined packages, use the
Package 11
WebHosting WebHostGetPackages command from
the Web hosting API catalog.
Your instructions for how we should

handle bandwidth overages, measured
on a per-month basis. Permitted values
Required for are: 1 Upgrade to the next bandwidth
OverageOption 1
WebHosting package 2 Charge on a per-GB basis on
my next monthly bill 3 Disable the
account until the beginning of the next
monthly billing cycle

EmailNotify 3
mand.

ResponseType 4
Input parameters for DNS hosting

The table below lists input parameters for DNS hosting.
- 1008 -

Type of service to purchase. For DNS

Service Required 15
hosting, use Service=DNSHosting.
Required for Number of years to subscribe to this ser-

NumYears 2
DNSHosting vice. Permitted values are 1 to 10.

SLD 63
DNSHosting enom in enom.com).
Required for
DNSHosting
Optional for
DomainPassword Set a password on the domain name 60
DNSHosting
Optional for
RenewName Set to 1 to auto-renew the name 1
DNSHosting

EmailNotify 3
mand.
Optional overall, Credit card processing is available for

but Required for DNSHosting. Permitted values are yes
resellers who have and no. The credit card supplied in this
a credit card pro- query string is charged only if UseCred-
cessing agreement itCard=yes. If this param is omitted, or if
with us AND want the value supplied is anything other than
UseCreditCard to use our CC pro- yes, the account balance rather than the 3
cessing to charge credit card is debited for this transaction.
this transaction to This is true even if the query string
the credit card includes all the required credit card
included in this information. When you pass credit card
query string. information with this command, you must
Default is no. use the secure HTTPS protocol.

Required for credit fraud checking, as part of our order pro-
EndUserIP 15
card processing cessing service. Use format
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
ChargeAmount Required for our Amount to charge for each year of DNS 6
- 1009 -

hosting; ChargeAmount is multiplied by
CC processing NumYears to yield the total charge for
this order. Required format is DD.cc

CardType 20
CC processing Visa, Mastercard, AmEx, Discover
Required for our

CC processing

Required for our Expiration year of the credit card, in

CreditCardExpYear 4
CC processing format YYYY
Required for our

printed on the card
Required for our

CC processing
Required for our

CC processing
Optional for our CC

processing
Optional for our CC

processing
Required pro- Credit card billing country. Two-character

CCCountry 40
cessing country code is a permitted format
Required for our cc

processing

Optional for our CC
processing

ResponseType 4
- 1010 -

The table below lists input parameters for goMobi, our product that
instantly converts any Web site to a compact format suitable for display
on mobile devices.

Type of service to purchase. For goMobi,

Service Required permitted values are: goMobi 15
goMobiFreeTrial
Billing cycle for goMobi. Permitted val-

Quantity Required ues are: 1 Monthly billing 12 Yearly billing 2

EmailNotify 3
mand.

ResponseType 4

Credit card preauthorization result; included when using our
CCTransResult credit card processing for Service=WPPS, BusListing, or
DNSHosting
Our identification number for the email address associated with

PublisherID this RichContent purchase; included for Service=RichContent
and RichContentFreeTrial
- 1011 -
Our identification number for the Domain Name associated
SubscriptionID with this GoMobi purchase; included for Service=GoMobi and
GoMobiFreeTrial
Our identification number for this POP pak; included for Ser-
BundleID
vice=POP3
Total number of POP paks purchased with this query; included

BundleCount
for Service=POP3
LWSCHostAccount WSC account name; included for Service=LWSC*
Success status for adding WSC to this domain; included for

LWSCUpgrade
Service=LWSC*
Success status for setting up monthly billing for this WSC

SetBilling
account; included for Service=LWSC*
Web hosting package ID number assigned by us; included for

PackageID
Service=WebHosting
IP of the Web hosting server for this Web hosting account;

ServerIP
included for Service=WebHosting
Success status of this query; included for Ser-

Successful
vice=WebHosting
OrderID Order ID number
Cert ID for the cert purchased in this order; included for any
CertID
cert purchase

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Note that the period at the
l end is an essential component of a fully qualified domain name.
- 1012 -
Example
The following query adds three POP mail paks to domain resellerdocs.com and sends
Query
command=PURCHASESERVICES&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&Service=POP3&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com
&Quantity=3&responsetype=xml
In the response, the presence of an OrderID and the ErrCount value 0 confirm that the
Output

<Bundles>
</Bundles>
<BundleCount>3</BundleCount>
<Command>PURCHASESERVICES</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
- 1013 -
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l Forwarding
l GetHomeDomainList
l Purchase
l PurchaseHosting
l PurchasePOPBundle
l RenewServices
l SetHosts
PushDomain
Description
Definition
Push a domain name into another account.
Usage
Use this command to transfer a domain name from one eNom account to another.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/Push.asp?DomainNameID=152533676
On the push a domain page, the submit button calls the PushDomain command.
- 1014 -
Constraints
l The account to which the domain name is being pushed must be under eNom or
one of its resellers.
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Login ID of the account to push the name

AccountID Required into. Use GetSubAccounts to list sub- 16
accounts.
Push the contact information for this

domain from the old account to the new
account. Permitted values are:
PushContact 0 Do not push contact information with 16
1
the domain
1 Push contact information with the
domain

- 1015 -

PushDomain Returns =1 if successful or =0 if it fails

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests that the domain name resellerdocs2.net be pushed from
account resellid to account ichiro, and requests the response in XML format:
Query
command=pushdomain&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs2&tld=net&accountid=ichiro
&responsetype=xml

Output
- 1016 -
<Push>
<domainname sld="resellerdocs2" tld="net" id="152533887">
resellerdocs2.net
</domainname>
<PushDomain>1</PushDomain>
</Push>
<Command>PUSHDOMAIN</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l TP_CancelOrder
l TP_CreateOrder
l TP_GetOrder
l TP_GetOrderDetail
l TP_ResubmitLocked
l TP_SubmitOrder
l UpdatePushList
Queue_DomainPurchase
Description
Definition
Purchase a domain in a specified queue. Note, these orders will be processed once the
queue closes.
Usage
- 1017 -
Use this command to purchase a domain in a specified queue. Note, these orders will be
processed once the queue closes.
Premium Domain
A unique, memorable or noteworthy name might be considered as a premium domain.
This type of domain will be more expensive depending on the name and TLD. If Queue_
DomainPurchase returns error:
"CustomerSuppliedPrice is required for mydomain.bike"
this domain is considered as the premium domain. The exact price for this domain must
be declared in the parameter module as CustomerSuppliedPrice. Use the PE_GetPremi-
umPricing command to retrieve the price.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/tld-queue/pages/manage/purchase.aspx
Constraints
Input parameters
Max
Size
- 1018 -
Max
Size
Collection of domain orders, grouped in domain module(s).
Each parameters for a domain are separated by pipe sym-
bol or "|". Multiple domain entry is allowed by adding comma
or "," between each domain module. Use the PE_GetPremi-
umPricing command to retrieve the premium domain price
for CustomerSuppliedPrice. Domain module format:
QName= [phase] | SLD= [sld] | TLD= [tld] | ExtAttributes |
Signed_Mark_Data | CustomerSuppliedPrice Example:
ItemList Required ItemList- ?
t=QName=Sunrise|SLD=IWantToBeA|TLD=ninja|ninja_
name=Super+Samurai|ninja_number=007|signed_mark_
data=Shogun, QName-
e=Sunrise|SLD=Training|TLD=ninja|ninja_name-
e=Jim+Smith|signed_mark_
data=DkOnNp...CustomerSuppliedPrice=65.00 Note:
please use URL Encoding for ListItem or the entire API
string to avoid any unexpected results.
If UseCreditCard=Yes, use our credit card processing ser-

vices. This service is available only to resellers who have
UseCreditCard Optional entered into a credit card processing agreement with us. 3
When you pass credit card information with this command,
you must use the secure HTTPS protocol.
Required if
Amount UseCred- Amount to charge for this order. Format: DDD.CC 8
itCard=Yes
Required if using End users IP address. This is used in fraud checking, as

EndUserIP our credit card pro- part of our order processing service. Format: 15
cessing NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
Required if using
CCName our credit card pro- Cardholder's name 60
cessing
Required if using
12-
CCNumber our credit card pro- Customer's credit card number
8
cessing
Required if using
CCExpMonth our credit card pro- Credit card expiration month. Format: MM 2
cessing
Required if using
CCExpYear our credit card pro- Credit card expiration year. Format: YYYY 4
cessing
CVV2 Required if using Credit card verification code 4
- 1019 -
Max
Size
our credit card pro-
cessing
Required if using
CCAddress our credit card pro- Credit card billing address 60
cessing
Required if using
CCCity our credit card pro- Credit card billing city 60
cessing
Required if using
CCStateProvin-
our credit card pro- Credit card billing state or province 60
ce
cessing
Required if using
CCZip our credit card pro- Credit card billing postal code 15
cessing
Required if using
CCCountry our credit card pro- Credit card billing country (2 letter code) Format: XX 60
cessing
Format of response. Permitted values are Text (default),

HTML, or XML

Overall item status. If there is one failure within a transaction
Success
(multiple domains), the entire transaction fails.
Order ID for this transaction. All domains are purchased in a

OrderID
single order.
Total amount for this transaction. Please notice that the

Amount amount might be modified if the price does not meet the
account's minimum cost
TransactionNumber Credit card transaction number
TransactionReference Credit card transaction reference

ErrCount
- 1020 -
ErrX

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query purchases a .NINJA domain name from the corresponding sunrise
queue, and requests the response in XML format.
Query
NON-PREMIUM - without Signed Mark Data
&Command=Queue_DomainPurchase&ItemList=qname
%3dsunrise%7csld%3dmydomain%7ctld%3dninja
%7csigned_mark_data%3d
PREMIUM - with Signed Mark Data and CustomerSuppliedPrice samples
&Command=Queue_DomainPurchase&ItemList=qname%3dsunrise
%7csld%3dbike48N12%7ctld%3dninja%7csigned_mark_data
%3dDQo8......TaW1cmU%2bPC9zbWQ6c2dEFmdGVyPg0KIClnTWFyaz4
%3d%7cCustomerSuppliedPrice%3d365.00
Output
- 1021 -

<Queue_DomainPurchase>
<Amount>30.00</Amount>
<TransactionNumber>819799639717151206</TransactionNumber>
<Trans-
actionRe-
ference>otbfEzxtoEeWgzdhq11L/Q==</TransactionReference>
</Queue_DomainPurchase>
<Command>QUEUE_DOMAINPURCHASE</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
Related commands
l Queue_GetInfo
l Queue_GetDomains
l Queue_GetOrders
l PE_GetPremiumPricing
l GetAgreementPage
- 1022 -
Queue_GetDomains
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of domains currently in the specified queue for the account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of domains currently in the specified queue in the
account.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/tld-queue/pages/manage/preorders.aspx
Constraints
Input parameters

Optional; dafault is Display queue domain's metric. Per-

DisplayMetrics 1
true mitted values are true and false
- 1023 -

Optional; dafault is Display a list of domains. Permitted val-
DisplayDomains 1
false ues are true and false

RecordStart StartPosition=26&PagingPageSize=25 8
1
ted list

Optional default is
PagingSize response. Maximum permitted value is 3
25
500.

SortBy Optional 20
DomainName TLD Price
Optional; default is Sort order. Permitted values are Asc and

SortOrder 4
Asc Desc
FilterTLD Optional Filter by TLD 15
FilterQueue Optional Filter by Queue 15
FilterStatus Optional Filter by Status ID 3
FilterStatusDesc Optional Filter by Status Description 500
Filter by domain name, contains specific

DomainNameFilter Optional 500
word

Text (default), HTML, or XML

Total items in Watchlist (not a distinct list). For example,
WatchlistTotal
domain.ninja and .ninja are counted as two (2) entries
WatchlistPreorder Total items in Watchlist available for Pre-Order
WathclistDomainWatched Total domains (SLD.TLD) watched
WatchlistTLDWatched Total TLD watched
NewTLDOrders Number of orders entered to the Queue
NewTLDValidated Number of orders have been Validated
- 1024 -
NewTLDPending Number of orders in Pending status
NewTLDRejected Number of orders in Rejected status
QueuesDisabled Is Queue disabled for this account?
PreregDisabled Is PreRegistration disabled for this account?
OrderID Order ID
TLDID TLD ID
TLDName TLD name
TLDDesc TLD description
DateStart Queue opening date
DateEnd Queue closing date
Price Price
QID Queue ID
QName Queue name
StatusID Status ID
StatusName Status name
ItemCount Total items return in this search (filter)
ItemTotal Total items in this account

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully
Notes
- 1025 -
Example
The following query retrieves a list of domains currently in the queue, and requests the
Query
&Command=Queue_GetDomains&DisplayDomains=true
Output

<Queue_GetDomains>
<Metrics>
<WatchlistTotal>42</WatchlistTotal>
<WatchlistPreorder>23</WatchlistPreorder>
<WathclistDomainWatched>24</WathclistDomainWatched>
<WatchlistTLDWatched>21</WatchlistTLDWatched>
<NewTLDOrders>786</NewTLDOrders>
<NewTLDValidated>450</NewTLDValidated>
<NewTLDPending>70</NewTLDPending>
<NewTLDRejected>68</NewTLDRejected>
<QueuesDisabled>false</QueuesDisabled>
<PreregDisabled>false</PreregDisabled>
</Metrics>
<Domains>
<Domain>
<DomainName>domain.ninja</DomainName>
<TLDID />
<TLDName>NINJA</TLDName>
<TLDDesc></TLDDesc>
<DateStart>6/12/2013 2:32 PM</DateStart>
<DateEnd>6/28/2013 2:32 PM</DateEnd>
- 1026 -
<QID>57</QID>
<QName>Sunrise B</QName>
<StatusName>Awaiting Submission</StatusName>
</Domain>
<Domain>
<DomainName>teacher.ninja</DomainName>
<TLDID />
<TLDName>NINJA</TLDName>
<TLDDesc></TLDDesc>
<DateStart>6/12/2013 2:32 PM</DateStart>
<DateEnd>6/28/2013 2:32 PM</DateEnd>
<QID>57</QID>
<QName>Sunrise B</QName>
<StatusName>Awaiting Submission</StatusName>
</Domain>
</Domains>
<ItemCount>120</ItemCount>
<ItemTotal>120</ItemTotal>
</Queue_GetDomains>
<Command>QUEUE_GETDOMAINS</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
- 1027 -
Related commands
l Queue_GetInfo
l Queue_GetOrders
l GetAgreementPage
Queue_GetExtAttributes
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of extended attributes for a specific queue.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of extended attributes for a specific queue.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/tld-queue/pages/preconfigure.aspx
Constraints
Input parameters
- 1028 -

Queue identification list in comma-sep-

arated format. Use Queue_GetInfo com-
QIDList Required -
mand to retrieve queue identification
number


ID Queue indetifier
TLD Top level domain
Attributes Attributes collection in XML format

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully
Notes
- 1029 -
Example
The following query retrieves a list of extended attributes for a TLD available in a queue,
and requests the response in XML format.
Query
&Command=Queue_GetExtAttributes&QIDList=53
Output

<Queue_GetExtAttributes>
<Queues>
<Queue>
<ID>53</ID>
<TLD>NINJA</TLD>
<Attributes>
<Attribute>
<ID>331</ID>
<Name>ninja_username</Name>
<Description>Username</Description>
<Options />
</Attribute>
......<cut>......
<Attribute>
<ID>333</ID>
<Name>ninja_emailaddress</Name>
<Description>Email Address</Description>
<Options />
</Attribute>
- 1030 -
</Attributes>
</Queue>
</Queues>
</Queue_GetExtAttributes>
<Command>QUEUE_GETEXTATTRIBUTES</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
Related commands
l Queue_GetInfo
l Queue_GetDomains
l Queue_GetOrders
l GetAgreementPage
Queue_GetInfo
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of all queues, which can be fitered as appropriate.
Usage
- 1031 -
Use this command to retrieve a list of all queues, which can be fitered as appropriate.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/tlds/watchlist.aspx
Constraints
Input parameters

Category Optional Filter by category 500
FilterTLD Optional Filter by TLD 500
FilterTLDStatusDesc Optional Filter by TLD status description 100
FilterQStatusName Optional Filter by queue status name 100
FilterExtAttributes Optional Filter by extended attributes requirement 1
FilterStartDate Optional Filter by queue start date -
FilterEndDate Optional Filter by queue end date -

- 1032 -

TLD Top level domain
NativeIDN IDN TLD in native characters
CategoryName TLD category
CategoryDesc TLD category description
QID Queue indetifier
QName Queue name
QStatusID Queue status identifier
QStatusName Queue status name
ExtAttributes Does this Queue require extended attributes?
StartDate Start date
EndDate End date

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully
Notes
- 1033 -
Example
The following query retrieves a list of queues for .NINJA, and requests the response in
XML format.
Query
&Command=Queue_GetInfo&FilterTLD=Ninja
Output

<Queue_GetInfo>
<Queue>
<TLD>NINJA</TLD>
<NativeIDN></NativeIDN>
<CategoryName>Novelty</CategoryName>
<CategoryDesc></CategoryDesc>
<TLDDescription><![CDATA[For the self-professed masters of
the world,
.NINJA provides a fun, unique, and flexible TLD option. Use
it as blog.NINJA,
homeimprovement.NINJA, homecooking.NINJA, and more. .NINJA
can also be
used for more traditional applications of the word, to pro-
mote ninja books, comics,
movies, and cultural references, such as comics.NINJA.
Whatever the use,
.NINJA is a memorable domain namespace guaranteed to help
any business,
group, or individual using it make a lasting impression.]]>
</TLDDescription>
<TLDStatusID>2</TLDStatusID>
<TLDStatusDesc>Evaluation Passed</TLDStatusDesc>
<QID>53</QID>
<QName>Sunrise</QName>
<QStatusID>1</QStatusID>
<QStatusName>Open</QStatusName>
<ExtAttributes>false</ExtAttributes>
<StartDate>2013-04-16T15:59:00</StartDate>
- 1034 -
<EndDate>2013-10-28T14:32:21</EndDate>
<AnnouncementDate>2013-02-05T08:00:00</AnnouncementDate>
</Queue>
</Queue_GetInfo><Command>QUEUE_GETINFO</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
Related commands
l Queue_GetDomains
l Queue_GetOrders
l GetAgreementPage
Queue_GetOrderDetail
Description
Definition
Retrieve a detailed queue domain order.
Usage
- 1035 -
Use this command to retrieve a detailed queue domain order.

Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/myaccount/reports.aspx
Constraints
Input parameters

The identification number of the order for

which you want details. You can retrieve
OrderID Required 10
this number using the Queue_GetOrders
command.
PortalUserPartyID Optional Portal user identification 36

- 1036 -

OrderID Order ID
OrderDate Order Date
PaidAmount Amount charged for this transaction
DomainName Domain Name
OrderType Order type. In a queue process, this value will be 'Register'
ExtTime Registration time applied to this item
OrderStatus Order status
RegistrationFee Registration Fee
ApplicationFee Application Fee
TotalFee Total fee for this item
RecordStart Record start position
PagingSize Record size per page
NextRecord Record next position
TotalResults Total records for this account

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully
Notes
- 1037 -
Example
The following query retrieve a list of queue domain order history, and requests the
Query
UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw&ResponseType=XML
&Command=Queue_GetOrderDetail&OrderID=157896057
Output

<Queue_GetOrderDetail>
<Orders>
<Order>
<PaidAmount>54.00</PaidAmount>
<DomainName>superdomain.ninja</DomainName>
<OrderType>Register</OrderType>
<ExtTime>1</ExtTime>
<OrderStatus>Pending</OrderStatus>
<RegistrationFee>32.00</RegistrationFee>
<ApplicationFee>22.00</ApplicationFee>
<TotalFee>54.00</TotalFee>
</Order>
</Orders>
<RecordStart>1</RecordStart>
<PagingSize>25</PagingSize>
<NextRecord>1</NextRecord>
<TotalResults>1</TotalResults>
</Queue_GetOrderDetail>
<Command>QUEUE_GETORDERDETAIL</Command>
- 1038 -
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
Related commands
l Queue_GetInfo
l Queue_GetDomains
l Queue_GetOrders
l GetAgreementPage
Queue_GetOrders
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of queue domain order history.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of queue domain order history.
Availability
- 1039 -
Constraints
Input parameters

PortalUserPartyID Optional Portal user identification 36


OrderID Order ID
StatusID Status ID
StatusName Status Name
StatusDesc Status Description
Success Total number of successful item in this order
Failed Total number of failed item in this order
Pending Total number of pending item in this order
OrderDate Order date
- 1040 -
ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query retrieve a list of queue domain order history, and requests the
Query
UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw&ResponseType=XML
&Command=Queue_GetOrders
Output

<Queue_GetOrders>
<Orders>
<Order>
<StatusName>New</StatusName>
<StatusDesc></StatusDesc>
- 1041 -
<Success>0</Success>
<Failed>0</Failed>
<Pending>1</Pending>
</Order>
</Orders>
<ItemCount>1</ItemCount>
<ItemTotal>1</ItemTotal>
</Queue_GetOrders>
<Command>QUEUE_GETORDERS</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
Related commands
l Queue_GetInfo
l Queue_GetDomains
l GetAgreementPage
- 1042 -
RAA_GetInfo
Description
Definition
Get Registrar Accreditation Agreement (RAA) information for a contact change.
Usage
Use this command to get RAA information for a contact change.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/control-panel/default.aspx
Constraints
Input parameters

Domain name which contact change

DomainName Required* 272
was made on (or new registration)
- 1043 -

Verification code that is generated on a
VerificationCode Required* ?
contact change
FirstName Required* First name of contact change 60
LastName Required* Last name of contact change 60
EmailAddress Required* Email address of contact change 128

*NOTE: only one (1) RAA parameter is required to be passed in. If more than one of the
RAA parameters are present in the query string, the first value based on the order below
will be processed (other values will be ignored):
l DomainName
l VerificationCode
l FirstName, LastName, EmailAddress
Example: if DomainName and VerificationCode parameters are being passed, only

DomainName value will be taken.

Domain Domain name
VerificationCode Verification code
VerificationStatus Verification status
ValidationType Validation type
FirstName First name
LastName Last name
EmailAddress Email address
IsSuspended Is this domain suspended?
IsPendingSuspension Is this domain in pending suspension?
SuspensionDate Suspension date
ToBeSuspendedDate Following suspension date
- 1044 -
ResultText Result description
List of notification emails sent out to the domain owner(s).

EmailsSent
Information includes destination email adrress and sent date

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query gets RAA information for a contact change in various types, and
Query
Passing DomainName
You will only get back what information you passed in and was used for the API Call.
If you send in DomainName you would only get back the domain name in the output,
the other parameters if sent are cleared and not used or returned.
command=raa_getinfo&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&domainname=testingdomain.com&responsetype=xml
Passing VerificationCode
- 1045 -
If you send in VerificationCode you would only get back the verification code
in the output, the other parameters if sent are cleared and not used or returned.
&verificationcode=1558f096-9202-4b21-81d6-9f34d207514d
&responsetype=xml
Passing FirstName, LastName, EmailAddress

For example if you send in FirstName, LastName, EmailAddress you would only get
back the firstname, lastname, emailaddress in the output, the other parameters
if sent are cleared and not used or returned.
&firstname=Joe&lastname=Tester
&emailaddress=joetester@test.com&responsetype=xml
Output
Passing DomainName
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>

<Domain>testingdomain.com</Domain>
<VerificationCode />
<FirstName />
<LastName />
<EmailAddress />
<SuspensionDate/>
pendedDate>
<ResultText/>
<EmailsSent>
- 1046 -
<Email>
<To> joetester@test.com</To>
<SendDate>12/3/2013 7:45:00 AM</SendDate>
</Email>
<Email>
<SendDate>12/4/2013 12:45:00 PM</SendDate>
</Email>
</EmailsSent>
<Command>RAA_GETINFO</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<TrackingKey>9769b21b-5e3f-42fb-88d2-e470f4b4-
fa5f</TrackingKey>

<Domain />
<VerificationCode>
1558f096-9202-4b21-81d6-9f34d207514d
</VerificationCode>
<FirstName />
<LastName />
<EmailAddress />
- 1047 -
<SuspensionDate/>
pendedDate>
<ResultText/>
<EmailsSent>
<Email>
</Email>
<Email>
</Email>
</EmailsSent>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
fa5f</TrackingKey>

<Domain />
<VerificationCode />
<FirstName>Joe</FirstName>
<LastName>Tester</LastName>
- 1048 -
<EmailAddress>joetester@test.com</EmailAddress>
<SuspensionDate/>
pendedDate>
<ResultText/>
<EmailsSent>
<Email>
</Email>
<Email>
</Email>
</EmailsSent>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
fa5f</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l RAA_GetInfo
l RAA_ResendNotification
l RPT_GetReport
- 1049 -
RAA_ResendNotifications
Description
Definition
Resend Registrar Accreditation Agreement (RAA) notification email for a contact
change.
Usage
Use this command to resend RAA notification email for a contact change.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/control-panel/default.aspx
Constraints
Input parameters

Domain name which contact change

DomainName Required* 272
was made on (or new registration)
- 1050 -

Verification code that is generated on a
VerificationCode Required* ?
contact change
FirstName Required* First name of contact change 60
LastName Required* Last name of contact change 60
EmailAddress Required* Email address of contact change 128

*NOTE: only one (1) RAA parameter is required to be passed in. If more than one of the
RAA parameters are present in the query string, the first value based on the order below
will be processed (other values will be ignored):
l DomainName
l VerificationCode
l FirstName, LastName, EmailAddress
Example: if DomainName and VerificationCode parameters are being passed, only

DomainName value will be taken.


ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully
Notes
- 1051 -
Example
The following query resends RAA notification email for a contact change in various
types, and requests the response in XML format.
Query
Passing DomainName
command=raa_resendnotification&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&domainname=testdomain.com&responsetype=xml
&verificationcode=1558f096-9202-4b21-81d6-9f34d207514d
&responsetype=xml
&firstname=Joe&lastname=Tester
&emailaddress=joetester@test.com&responsetype=xml
Output

<Command>RAA_RESENDNOTIFICATION</Command>
- 1052 -
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<TrackingKey>b708ed6c-7ba1-427d-a467-3015b4373e5b</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l RAA_GetInfo
l RAA_ResendNotification
l RPT_GetReport
RC_CancelSubscription
Description
Definition
Cancel a RichContent subscription.
Usage
Use this command to cancel a RichContent subscription.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/richcontent/manage.aspx
Click a Subscription link. At the bottom of the RichContent Manager page, click Cancel
this service. At the bottom of the form, the Cancel Service button calls the RC_
CancelSubscription command.
- 1053 -
Constraints
l The RichContent subscription must be associated with this domain name account.
Input parameters

Identification number for the RichContent

subscription that is being canceled. To
RC_GetSubscriptions command
Reason for cancellation. Permitted val-

ues are: 1 No longer needed 2 Not as
ReasonID Required expected 3 Price/value 4 Technical issue 1
5 Support issue 6 Unsupported func-
tionality 7 Other reason not listed
User-supplied text explaining can-

Comments Required 250
cellation
Rescind a cancellation request. Supply

UndoCancellation=true to undo a can-
UndoCancellation Required 5
cellation request on a RichContent sub-
scription

- 1054 -

Success Success result of this query
ResultCode Success code of this query
Success status of this query, corresponding to the ResultCode

ResultText
value

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query cancels a RichContent subscription and sends the response in XML
format:
Query
command=RC_CancelSubscription&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&SubscriptionID=2811&ReasonID=1
&Comments=No%20longer%20needed&responsetype=xml
Output
- 1055 -

<ResultText>Success</ResultText>
<Command>RC_CANCELSUBSCRIPTION</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>125ceacc-814c-4cc1-94f2-b18f77b-
d1a91</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l RC_FreeTrialCheck
l RC_GetLoginToken
l RC_ResetPassword
l RC_SetPassword
RC_FreeTrialCheck
Description
Definition
- 1056 -
Validate whether an email address is eligible for a free trial of RichContent.

Usage
Use this command to validate whether an email address is eligible for a free trial of
RichContent.
To be eligible, the email must never have been used for a RichContent subscription.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/richcontent/purchase.aspx
Filling out the form and clicking the Continue button launches the RC_FreeTrialCheck
command (as well as the AddToCart command).
Constraints
l Reseller accounts can generally have one free trial for each email address that has
not previously
l subscribed to RichContent (although we reserve the right to end free trials for
accounts that appear to be
l abusing the free trials).
l Retail accounts are limited to one free trial.
Input parameters

- 1057 -

Email for which you want a RichContent

Email Required 128
free trial


FreeTrialOK Is this email address eligible for a free trial of RichContent?

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query checks whether a RichContent free trial is available for a domain
name, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
Command=RC_FreeTrialCheck&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
- 1058 -
&email=john.doe@example.com&responsetype=xml

Output

<FreeTrialOK>True</FreeTrialOK>
<Command>RC_FREETRIALCHECK</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>ef83bfb0-7284-49c6-be11-3671f7280e57</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l RC_GetLoginToken
l RC_ResetPassword
l RC_SetPassword
- 1059 -
RC_GetLoginToken
Description
Definition
Retrieve the URL for the RichContent control panel.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the URL for the RichContent control panel. Using this com-
mand allows your customers to instantly link to the control panel to integrate the
RichContent into their sites without interruption.
Using this command logs your customers in to RichContentWidget.com as a branded
site. If you prefer to build your own custom-branded control panel, contact your reseller
sales representative.
Availability
The Login to the control panel link launches the RC_GetLoginToken command.
Constraints
l The RichContent account must belong to this login ID.
Input parameters
- 1060 -

Either Email or Pub-

Email address associated with this
Email lisherID is ?
RichContent account
Required
Identificaton number of the email

Either Email or Pub- address associated with this RichCon-
PublisherID lisherID is tent account. To retrieve this number, ?
Required use the RC_GetSubscriptions com-
mand.


RichContentToken Login token for the RichContent control panel

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 1061 -
Example
The following query retrieves a RichContent login token and sends the response in XML
format:
Query
command=RC_GetLoginToken&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&PublisherID=208&responsetype=xml

Output

<RichContentToken>
<![CDATA[ http://www.richcontentwidget.com/default.aspx?h=
A9CE979D85989985989A9A938A9B909E9F909F9E8AFAE78CCB97CFC
4CEDFD9CFD8CFC7CBC3C6CBCECED8CFD9D9EACFD2CBC7DAC6CF84C9
C5C78CDF97CB9F9B9FCBCC9CCB87C993C9CE879E9998CB8792939DC
9879ECCCB929BCF92999F9E9D9D8CDE979A8CCF97CFC4CEDFD9CFD8
CFC7CBC3C6CBCECED8CFD9D9EACFD2CBC7DAC6CF84C9C5C78CC2979
D9DCB9FC9C892CE9E98C9929298C89993C99D99C8999E93CBCC989D
9DCB9BCF ]]>
</RichContentToken>
<Command>RC_GETLOGINTOKEN</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>e589d86a-d789-4fad-90a0-7fa51d53d-
d99</TrackingKey>
- 1062 -
Related commands
l RC_FreeTrialCheck
l RC_ResetPassword
l RC_SetPassword
RC_GetSubscriptionDetails
Description
Definition
Retrieve information on one RichContent subscription.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve information on one RichContent subscription.
Availability
Clicking on any subscription name launches the RC_GetSubscriptionDetails command.
Constraints
- 1063 -

l The SubscriptionID must be for a RichContent subscription in this domain name
account.
Input parameters

Identification number for this RichCon-

SubscriptionID Required tent subscription. To retrieve this value, 10
use the RC_GetSubscriptions command


User-configurable display name associated with this RichCon-
SubscriptionName
tent subscription
DomainName Domain name associated with this RichContent subscription
Email Email address associated with this RichContent subscription
Password for logging into the management console to manage

this RichContent subscription. The testing management con-
Password
sole is beta.richcontentwidget.com The production man-
agement console is www.richcontentwidget.com
NextBillingDate Next billing date for this RichContent subscription
BillingCycle Duration in months of the current billing period
NextBillingCycle Duration in months of next billing period
- 1064 -
Status of this RichContent subscription. Possible values: 1
Status Service Active 2 Service Disabled 3 Pending Cancellation 4
Policy Violation
Identification number for this email address in our records of

PublisherID
RichContent subscriptions
Date the customer originally created this RichContent sub-

DateCreated
scription
Unique identification number for the email address associated

APIKey
with this Rich- Content subscription

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves details for one RichContent subscription and sends the
Query
command=RC_GetSubscriptionDetails&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&SubscriptionID=1817&responsetype=xml
- 1065 -
In the response, subscription information and an ErrCount value 0 indicate that the query
was successful:
Output

<SubscriptionDetails>
<SubscriptionName>RC156-1</SubscriptionName>
<DomainName>steve422-2.com</DomainName>
<Email>steve422@resellerdocs.com</Email>
<Password>ef1a315e</Password>
<BillingCycle />
<NextBillingCycle />
<Status>Enabled</Status>
<DateCreated>6/17/2009</DateCreated>
</SubscriptionDetails>
<Command>RC_GETSUBSCRIPTIONDETAILS</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
<TrackingKey>b93d0d57-864b-438d-b6e4-abd269ec9b03</Track-
ingKey>
- 1066 -
Related commands
l RC_FreeTrialCheck
l RC_GetLoginToken
l RC_ResetPassword
l RC_SetPassword
RC_GetSubscriptions
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of RichContent subscriptions for a domain name account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of RichContent subscriptions for an account.
Availability
The RC_GetSubscriptions command populates the table on this page.
Constraints
- 1067 -
Input parameters

Sort so that response is ordered by the

Optional; default is values of this parameter. Permitted val-
SortBy 16
SubscriptionName ues are: SubscriptionName Status Nex-
tBillingDate Email DomainName
Send sorted response in ascending or

SortOrder descending order. Permitted values are: 4
Asc
Asc Desc
Filter so that list includes only one sub-

Optional; if omit-
scription status. Permitted values are:
Status ted, all statuses 15
Service Active Service Disabled Pend-
are returned
ing Cancellation Policy Violation
Filter so that the list includes only sub-

EmailSearchTerm Optional scriptions with this string in their email 272
addresses
In the sorted list, which item to start with

StartPosition in this set of returns. Permitted values ?
1
are integers.
Optional; default is How many items to return in this

RecordsToReturn ?
25 response. Permitted values are integers.


Identification number for this email address in our records of
PublisherID
RichContent subscriptions
- 1068 -
SubscriptionID Identification number for this RichContent subscription
Email Email address associated with this PublisherID value
DomainName Domain name associated with this RichContent subscription
User-configurable display name associated with this RichCon-

SubscriptionName
tent subscription
Status of this RichContent subscription. Possible values: 1

Status Service Active 2 Service Disabled 3 Pending Cancellation 4
Policy Violation
NextBillingDate Next billing date for this RichContent subscription

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of RichContent subscriptions for this domain name
account, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=RC_GetSubscriptions&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&responsetype=xml
- 1069 -
In the response, a list of Subscriptions and an ErrCount value 0 indicate that the query
was successful:
Output

<Subscriptions>
<Subscription>
<DomainName>fido.cats.myfavdomain414-1.com</DomainName>
<NextBillingDate />
</Subscription>
<Subscription>
<NextBillingDate />
</Subscription>
<Subscription>
<NextBillingDate />
</Subscription>
.
.
.
</Subscriptions>
<Command>RC_GETSUBSCRIPTIONS</Command>
- 1070 -
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>80f3b325-4694-4038-bb9b-8b641d69a932</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l RC_FreeTrialCheck
l RC_GetLoginToken
l RC_ResetPassword
l RC_SetPassword
RC_RebillSubscription
Description
Definition
Rebill a RichContent subscription for which the initial billing failed because of insuf-
ficient account balance.
Usage
When a billing for RichContent fails because of an insufficient account balance, use this
command to rebill.
- 1071 -
Availability
In the Periodic Billing History Report section, click Run Report. Any RichContent sub-
scriptions that are in their rebill period but have not rebilled successfully appear in this
list. Clicking the Rebill link runs the RC_RebillSubscription command.
Constraints
l The RichContent subscription must belong to this domain name account.
Input parameters

Identification number for the RichContent

subscription that is being cancelled. To
RC_GetSubscriptions command

- 1072 -

Success status of this rebill attempt. Possible results are True
Success
or False.
ResultCode Numerical result code. Corresponds to ResultText.
ResultText Result of this rebill attempt in text format.
If this rebill attempt is successful, return value is an order ID. If

OrderID
this rebill attempt fails, the return value is the ResultCode.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query attempts to rebill the account for the specified RichContent sub-
Query
command=RC_RebillSubscription&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
- 1073 -
In the response, an ErrCount value 0 indicates that the query executed successfully. A
Success value True indicates that this rebill attempt was successful. In this example, the
Success value False is due to an insufficient account balance:
Output

<Success>False</Success>
<ResultText>Failed</ResultText>
<Command>RC_REBILLSUBSCRIPTION</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>dcf5420f-c8a4-4ec4-b81b-7ec5f7d52c0f</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l RC_FreeTrialCheck
l RC_GetLoginToken
l RC_ResetPassword
l RC_SetPassword
- 1074 -
RC_ResetPassword
Description
Definition
When the customer has forgotten their password, create a new password and email it to
the email address associated with this RichContent subscription.
Usage
Use this command when a customer has forgotten the password to their RichContent
control panel. This command generates a new password and emails it to the customer.
Availability
Clicking the Forgot your password? link launches the RC_ResetPassword command.
Constraints
l The RichContent identification number must be associated with this domain name
account.
Input parameters
- 1075 -

PublisherID Required Identification number 10


ResultCode Result code for this query
Success status of this query, corresponding to the ResultCode

ResultText
value

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query generates a new password and sends it to the customer, and sends
- 1076 -
Query
command=RC_ResetPassword&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&PublisherID=208&responsetype=xml
Output

<Command>RC_RESETPASSWORD</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>3096ccd5-b654-4df1-b1a5-156594578eda</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l RC_FreeTrialCheck
l RC_GetLoginToken
- 1077 -
l RC_SetPassword
RC_SetBillingCycle
Description
Definition
Specify the billing cycle for a RichContent subscription.
Usage
Specify the billing cycle for a RichContent subscription. This command also allows you
to choose whether to bill now for the new billing cycle or wait until the next posted billing
date.
Availability
Click on any subscription name. Making changes in the Modify your Billing Cycle
options section and then clicking Save Changes launches the RC_SetBillingCycle com-
mand.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 1078 -

Identification number of this RichContent

subscription. To retrieve SubscriptionID
values, use the RC_GetSubscriptions
command
Duration of billing cycle. Permitted val-

Months Required 2
ues are 1, 3, 6, and 12
Does customer want to pay for this imme-

diately. BillNow=True allows customer to
pay immediately for a change that will go
Optional; default is into effect on the next billing date.
BillNow 5
False BillNow=False submits the change
request to be effective for the next billing
cycle, and charges for the change on the
next billing date.


Result of this query; this text corresponds to the result code

ResultText
value

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 1079 -
Notes
Example
The following query sets the billing cycle for a RichContent subscription to 12 months,
Query
command=RC_SetBillingCycle&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&SubscriptionID=2787&Months=12&responsetype=xml
Output

<Command>RC_SETBILLINGCYCLE</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
- 1080 -
<Done>true</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>651aca03-b767-488e-aab9-d969c431c584</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l RC_FreeTrialCheck
l RC_GetLoginToken
l RC_ResetPassword
l RC_SetPassword
RC_SetPassword
Description
Definition
Set a user-specified password for all RichContent subscriptions associated with one
email address.
Usage
Use this command to set a user-specified password for the RichContent subscriptions
associated with one email address.
Availability
- 1081 -
Click on any subscription name. In the Subscription Settings section, changing the pass-
word and then clicking Save Settings launches the RC_SetPassword command.
Constraints
l The RichContent subscriptions must be associated with this domain name
account.
Input parameters

Identification number for all RichContent

subscriptions that use the same email
PublisherID Required address. To retrieve the PublisherID 10
value, use the RC_GetSubscriptions
command. Permitted values are integers
CurrentPassword Required Current password of this PublisherID 20
New password of this PublisherID. Per-

NewPassword Required mitted values are alphanumeric and 6 to 20
20 characters in length

- 1082 -

Result of this query; this text corresponds to the result code

ResultText
value

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query changes the password for the set of RichContent subscriptions that
are associated with a single email address, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=RC_SetPassword&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&PublisherID=207&CurrentPassword=asdasdaf
&NewPassword=NewPassword208&responsetype=xml
Output
- 1083 -

<Command>RC_SETPASSWORD</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>f1b43428-86e3-4d13-8455-36274e2d5701</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l RC_FreeTrialCheck
l RC_GetLoginToken
l RC_ResetPassword
- 1084 -
RC_SetSubscriptionDomain
Description
Definition
Associate a domain name with a RichContent subscription.
Usage
Use this command to associate a domain name with a RichContent subscription.
Availability
Click on any subscription name. In the Subscription Settings section, supplying a
domain name and then clicking Save Settings launches the RC_SetSub-
scriptionDomain command.
Constraints
l The RichContent subscription must be part of this domain name account.
l Our system does not validate for the existence of the source domain.
Input parameters
- 1085 -

Identification number for this RichCon-

SubscriptionID Required tent subscription. To retrieve this value, 10
use the RC_GetSubscriptions command
Domain name, with host records, to asso-

SourceDomain Required ciate with this RichContent account. Per- 1000
mitted format is host.sld.tld


ResultText Result of this query; this text corresponds to the result code

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
TrackingKey Tracking identifier for this query string, for our logging
Notes
- 1086 -
Example
The following query sets the domain for a RichContent subscription and sends the
Query
command=RC_SetSubscriptionDomain&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&SubscriptionID=2787&SourceDomain=news.yahoo.com
&responsetype=xml
Output

<Command>RC_SETSUBSCRIPTIONDOMAIN</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>dcc55144-5ce5-4fde-be70-2de051772485</Track-
ingKey>
- 1087 -
Related commands
l RC_FreeTrialCheck
l RC_GetLoginToken
l RC_ResetPassword
l RC_SetPassword
RC_SetSubscriptionName
Description
Definition
Specify a user-created display name for this RichContent subscription.
Usage
Use this command to specify a display name for this RichContent subscription.
Availability
Click on any subscription name. In the Subscription Details section, clicking edit, then
supplying a subscription name, and then clicking Save Settings launches the RC_
SetSubscriptionName command.
Constraints
- 1088 -
l RichContent subscription names must be unique to this domain name account, but
do not need to be
l unique relative to the entire RichContent system.
Input parameters

Identification number of this RichContent

SubscriptionID Required subscription. Permitted values are 10
integers
User-specified display name for this sub-

scription. Must be unique to this domain
NewSubscriptionName Required name account but need not be unique 200
across the entire RichContent system.
Permitted values are alphanumeric


ResultCode Numeric code for success status
Text description of success status (corresponds to Res-

ResultText
ultCode)

ErrCount
- 1089 -
ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query assigns a new user-specified display name to a RichContent sub-
scription and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=RC_SetSubscriptionName&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&SubscriptionID=2787
&NewSubscriptionName=FriendlyName21
&responsetype=xml
Output

<Command>RC_SETSUBSCRIPTIONNAME</Command>
- 1090 -
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>8e8ff6af-9c62-49a9-9e5c-7f4fe7b-
b41a5</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l RC_FreeTrialCheck
l RC_GetLoginToken
l RC_ResetPassword
l RC_SetPassword
RefillAccount
Description
Definition
Add funds to your account using a credit card.
Usage
To add funds to your account, set parameter Debit=True and include the credit card para-
meters.
- 1091 -
To remove your credit card information from our database, set parameter Debit=True and
omit the credit card parameters.
To retrieve your account balance without adding funds, and to retrieve the current credit
card information for the account, set parameter Debit=False.
HTTPS protocol.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/myaccount/RefillAccount.asp
At the bottom of the Credit Card section, the submit button calls the RefillAccount com-
mand.
Constraints
Input parameters

Debit the credit card; options are True or

Debit Required False. Debit=True uses the credit card in 1
- 1092 -

this query string for this transaction, and
replaces the credit card information for
the account record with the values in this
query string. Debit=False retrieves your
account balance without changing it, and
without charging your credit card; it also
retrieves the current credit card inform-
ation for the account. When you pass
credit card information with this com-
mand, you must use the secure HTTPS
protocol.

Required to add
EndUserIP funds to this 15
account
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
Amount to charge to credit card, in

Required to add
DD.cc format. We charge a 3% con-
CCAmount funds to this ?
venience fee which is deducted imme-
account
diately from the CCAmount. Min $100
Required to add
Credit card type. Options are AmEx, Dis-
CCType funds to this 10
cover, MasterCard, Visa.
account
Required to add
Credit card holders name as imprinted
CCName funds to this 60
on the credit card
account
Required to add
CCNumber funds to this 16-digit credit card number 16
account
Required to add
Month in which credit card expires, in
CCMonth funds to this 2
MM format
account
Required to add
Year in which credit card expires, in
CCYear funds to this 4
YYYY format
account
Required to add Credit card security verification code, 3-

CVV2 funds to this or 4- digit number from the back of the 4
account credit card
Required to add
Optional Street address as shown on
CCAddress funds to this 60
credit card bill
account
- 1093 -

Required to add
CCCity funds to this Optional City as shown on credit card bill 60
account
Required to add
State or province as shown on credit card
CCStateProvince funds to this 60
bill
account
Required to add
Zip code or postal code as shown on
CCZip funds to this 16
credit card bill
account
Required to add
Country of credit card billing address,
CCCountry funds to this 2
expressed as 2-character country code
account
Phone number as shown on credit card

bill. Required format is +Coun-
Required to add
tryCode.PhoneNumber, where Coun-
CCPhone funds to this 20
tryCode and PhoneNumber use only
account
numeric characters and the + is URL-
Send email confirmation to the billing con-

Optional; default is tact for this account. 0 or No turns off the
SendMail 2
1 email; any other value or omitting this
parameter sends the email.


Reseller 1 indicates that this is a reseller account
CCTRANSRESULT Result of the credit card transaction
ResellerRefill Success status of the account refill
CreditCardStatus Success status of the credit card transaction

ErrCount
- 1094 -

Done
cessfully.
Notes
format, send ResponseType=HTML or ResponseType=XML
l in your request.
Example
The following query adds $100.00 to the account balance for resellid. It uses a card dif-
ferent from the one stored for the account, passes the credit card information using the
secure HTTPS protocol, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=REFILLACCOUNT&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&CCAmount=100&CCType=MasterCard&CCName=JohnDoe
&CCNumber=5200520052005200&CCMonth=02
&CCYear=2013&cvv2=200&ccaddress=100+Main+St.
&CCStateProvince=WA&cczip=99999&debit=true
&CCCountry=us&CCPhone=+1.5555559999&ResponseType=xml
In the response, the values for CCTRANSRESULT, ResellerRefill, CreditCardStatus,

and ErrCount confirm that the refill was successful:
Output

<CurrentDate>Wednesday, August 20, 2007</CurrentDate>
<RefillAccount>
- 1095 -
<FName>John</FName>
<LName>Doe</LName>
<CCTRANSRESULT>APPROVED</CCTRANSRESULT>
<ResellerRefill>Transactions processed suc-
cessfully.</ResellerRefill>
<CreditCardStatus>Successful</CreditCardStatus>
<CCName>JohnDoe</CCName>
<PaymentType>MasterCard</PaymentType>
<CCAddress>100 Main St.</CCAddress>
<CCCity>Hometown</CCCity>
<CCCountry>us</CCCountry>
<CCPhoneDial />
<CCPhone>5555559999</CCPhone>
</RefillAccount>
<Command>REFILLACCOUNT</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l GetBalance
l GetTransHistory
- 1096 -
RegisterNameServer
Description
Definition
Register a domain name server.
Usage
Use this command to register one of your own servers as a domain name server.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/RegNameServer.asp
On the register a name server page, the submit button calls the RegisterNameServer
command.
Constraints
l The server you register must use a domain name that is in your account.
l eNom must be licensed with the Registry in which you want to register a name
server; you can only register name servers for TLDs that we support.
l The registrar lock for the domain must be set to off while you register a name
server. You can switch the registrar lock back on (and we recommend that you do
so) once the name server is registered.
l .co.uk and .org.uk names must have at least two name servers.
Input parameters
- 1097 -

Authority to add a name server. Set Add-

Add Required 5
d=true to authorize.
Name server to register. Use format

NSName Required 60
dns1.NameServerName.com
IP Required IP of the name server. 15



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 1098 -
Example
The following query requests that the computer with IP address 127.0.0.1, known as ns1.-
nameservices.com, be registered as a name server. The query requests the response in
XMLL format:
Query
command=registernameserver&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&add=true&nsname=dns1.resellerdocs.com
&ip=127.0.0.1&responsetype=xml
In the response, the RRP code of 200 and success message in the RRP text indicate a
successful registration:
Output

<NS>dns1.resellerdocs.com</NS>
<IP>127.0.0.1</IP>
<RegistrarLock>ACTIVE</RegistrarLock>
<RegistrarLock>REGISTRAR-LOCK</RegistrarLock>
<Command>REGISTERNAMESERVER</Command>
<Server>TestServer</Server>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
- 1099 -
Related commands
l CheckNSStatus
l DeleteNameServer
l GetDNS
l GetDNSStatus
l ModifyNS
l ModifyNSHosting
l UpdateNameServer
RemoveTLD
Description
Definition
Remove TLDs from your list of authorized TLDs that you offer to your resellers and retail
customers. Or, revert to our default list, which includes all TLDs that we support.
Usage
Use this command to remove TLDs from your custom list of authorized TLDs that you
offer to your resellers and retail customers. This command controls the list of TLDs we
send you for registrations, renewals, and transfers.
This command does not function unless you have previously used the AuthorizeTLD
command to authorize TLDs. It will not remove TLDs if your account is using our default
list.
If you run RemoveTLD with one TLD, our system starts with your current list, removes
the single TLD, and leaves the rest. If you remove all TLDs from your list of authorized
TLDs, your account will revert to our default list (all TLDs that we support).
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/myaccount/RenewalPricing.asp?tab=1
If you remove TLDs from your authorized list, refreshing this page will reflect the change.
- 1100 -
Constraints
l You can only remove TLDs that you added using the AuthorizeTLD command.
Input parameters

One top-level domain (TLD) to remove

Either TLD or
from your list of authorized TLDs. For
TLD DomainList is 15
example, if you want to remove .biz, use
Required
TLD=biz
Comma-separated list of TLDs to

Either TLD or remove from your list of authorized
DomainList DomainList is TLDs. For example, if you want to 100
Required remove .com, .net, and .org, use
DomainList=com,net,org


List of TLDs to remove from the list of TLDs authorized for this
DeleteTLDX
account. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.

ErrCount
- 1101 -
ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query removes TLDs .us and .ca from resellids list of authorized TLDs,
Query
command=removetld&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&domainlist=us,ca&responsetype=xml
In the response, the list of TLDs and the ErrCount value of 0 confirm that the query was
successful:
Output

<tldlist>
<deletetld>us</deletetld>
<deletetld>ca</deletetld>
</tldlist>
<Command>REMOVETLD</Command>
- 1102 -
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AuthorizeTLD
l GetTLDList
l PE_SetPricing
RemoveUnsyncedDomains
Description
Definition
Remove out-of-sync domains from a specified Magic Folder, or from all Magic Folders in
the account.
Usage
Use this command to remove out-of-sync domains from a specified Magic Folder, or from
all Magic Folders in the account.
Availability
- 1103 -
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/folder-control-pan-
el/default.asp?FolderName=AAAaa
The Remove Names button calls the RemoveUnsyncedDomains command.
Constraints
Input parameters

Folder from which to remove unsynced

domains. If no FolderName is supplied,
FolderName all folders in 125
all unsynced domains in all Magic
account
Folders are removed.


Result of processing this query. Possible return values are:
Result 1 Success
2 Failure
ErrCount The number of errors if any occurred. If greater than 0 check
- 1104 -

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query removes out-of-sync domains from one folder, and sends the
Query
command=RemoveUnsyncedDomains&uid=resellid
&pw=resellpw&FolderName=Master-Magic&responsetype=XML
In the response, a Result value 1 indicates that the query was successful:
Output

<RemoveResult>
<Result>1</Result>
</RemoveResult>
<Command>REMOVEUNSYNCEDDOMAINS</Command>
- 1105 -
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainFolder
RenewPOPBundle
Description
Definition
Renew the annual subscription on a POP mail 10-pak in real time.
Usage
Use this command to renew, in real time, the annual subscription on a POP mail 10-pak.
HTTPS protocol.
Availability
- 1106 -
The add years button behaves similarly to the RenewPOPBundle command.
Constraints
l This command is available for reseller accounts only. Retail accounts must use the
queue-based
l shopping cart process to renew POP bundles.
Input parameters

Account login ID. Must be a reseller
UID Required 20
account.

SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
ID number of this POP pak. You can

retrieve the ID numbers of all POP paks
PakID Required 10
in the account with the GetPOPEx-
pirations command.
Number of years to renew this POP pak

Quantity Required 2
subscription
- 1107 -

Permitted values are yes and no. The
credit card supplied in this query string is
Optional overall,
charged only if UseCreditCard=yes. If
but Required for
this param is omitted or if UseCred-
resellers who use
itCard=no, the account balance rather
our credit card pro-
than the credit card is debited for this
UseCreditCard cessing AND want 3
transaction. This is true even if the query
to charge this trans-
string includes all the Registrant contact
action to the credit
and credit card information. When you
card included in
pass credit card information with this
this query string
command, you must use the secure
HTTPS protocol.

Required for our
cessing
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
Required for our

RegistrantFirstName Registrant first name 60
CC processing
Required for our

CC processing
Required for our

RegistrantAddress1 First line of Registrant address 60
CC processing
Optional for our CC

RegistrantAddress2 Second line of Registrant address 60
processing
Required for our

RegistrantCity Registrant city 60
CC processing
Required for our Registrant country. Two-letter country

RegistrantCountry 60
CC processing code is a permitted format.
Required for our

RegistrantPostalCode Registrant postal code 16
CC processing
Registrant phone. Required format is

+CountryCode.PhoneNumber, where
Required for our
RegistrantPhone CountryCode and PhoneNumber use 20
CC processing
only numeric characters and the + is
RegistrantEmailAddress Required for our

Registrant email address 128
CC processing

CardType 20
- 1108 -

Required for our
CC processing
Requiredfor our
CC processing

Required for our Expiration year of the credit card, in

CreditCardExpYear 4
CC processing format YYYY
Required for our

CC processing
Required for our

CC processing
Required for our Amount to charge this credit card.

ChargeAmount 6
CC processing Required format is DD.cc


OrderID Identification number for tracking this order in our system

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 1109 -
Example
The following query renews POP pak 5105 for 1 year and sends the response in XML
format:
Query
command=renewpopbundle&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&pakid=5105
&quantity=1&responsetype=xml
In the response, an OrderID value and an ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was
successful:
Output

<Command>RENEWPOPBUNDLE</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
- 1110 -
Related commands
l Extend
l GetPOP3
l GetPOPExpirations
l GetRenew
l Purchase
l PurchasePOPBundle
l RenewServices
RenewServices
Description
Definition
Renew one value-added service in real time.
Usage
Use this command to renew one value-added service in real time, as opposed to going
through our shopping cart.
This real-time command currently supports ID Protect and DNS hosting.
HTTPS protocol.
Availability
Constraints
l The service must currently be subscribed for this domain. If not already subscribed,
do so using the PurchaseServices or AddToCart commands.
- 1111 -
Input parameters

Service to be renewed. Permitted values:

Service Required WPPS ID Protect DNSHosting DNS 15
Hosting BusListing Business Listing
NumYears Number of years to renew this service 2
1

Required for
SLD enom in enom.com) for the domain this 63
WPPS BusListing
service is associated with
Top-level domain name (extension) for

Required for
TLD the domain this service is associated 15
WPPS BusListing
with
Optional overall, Available for WPPS DNSHosting

but Required BusListing Permitted values are yes and
resellers who have no. The credit card supplied in this query
a credit card pro- string is charged only if UseCred-
cessing agreement itCard=yes. If this param is omitted, or if
with us AND want the value supplied is anything other than
UseCreditCard to use our CC pro- yes, the account balance rather than the 3
cessing to charge credit card is debited for this transaction.
this transaction to This is true even if the query string
the credit card includes all the required credit card
included in this information. When you pass credit card
query string. information with this command, you must
Default is no. use the secure HTTPS protocol.

Required for our
cessing
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
Required our CC Amount to charge for each year;

ChargeAmount 6
processing ChargeAmount is multiplied by
- 1112 -


CardType 20
Required our CC
processing

Required our CC Expiration year of the credit card, in

CreditCardExpYear 4
Required for our

printed on the card
Required for our

CC processing
Required for our

CC processing
Optional for our CC

processing
Optional for our CC

processing
Required for our Credit card billing country. Twocharacter

CCCountry 60
Required for our

CC processing

Optional for our CC
processing

- 1113 -

OrderID Identification number for tracking this order in our system

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query renews ID Protect for two years and sends the response in XML
format:
Query
command=renewservices&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&service=WPPS
&numyears=2&responsetype=xml
In the response, an order ID number confirms that the query was successful:
Output
- 1114 -
<Command>RENEWSERVICES</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l PurchaseServices
l RenewPOPBundle
RPT_GetReport
Description
Definition
Retrieve an itemized list of one type of activity in a domain name account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of one of the following types of account activity in a
domain name account: registrations, renewals, transfers, private label, subaccounts,
accounting, or expiring names.
Availability
- 1115 -
https://resellertest.enom.com/myaccount/newReports.asp
When you choose one of the seven report types listed above under Usage, the view
report button calls the RPT_GetReport command.
Constraints
l The beginning date for reports must be no earlier than 6 months before today.
l The ResponseType must be XML. You can parse the XML response after receiv-
ing it.
Input parameters

Version of this command. Permitted val-

ues are 0 and 1. Use Version=1 to
receive the return parameters listed in
the Returned parameters table below.
Optional; default is Version=0 and Version=1 return para-
Version 20
0 meters vary slightly in the data returned
and in the tag names. We recommend
that you use Version=1,which avoids
timeouts by supporting paging of results,
and queueing of the query.
Type of report to generate. Permitted val-

ReportType Required 1?
- 1116 -

ues are:
0 Registrations
1 Renewals
2 Transfers In
11 Transfers Out
3 Private Label (Instant Reseller and
Registry Rocket)
4 Sub-Accounts
5 Accounting
6 Expiring Domains
10 Pricing Editor Updates
13 Business Listing Bulk Update
15 Business Listing Domain Update
16 Transactions
17 Order History
18 Periodic Billing History
20 Premium Registration
21 Monthly Invoices
22 Invoice History
23 Invoice Detail
24 List of Invoices
25 Top Watchlist TLDs
26 Watchlist Summary
27 Top Watchlists
28 All Watchlists
29 All Watchlist Details
30 Domain Name History
31 Domain Verification/Suspension
the last day of the First date to include in the report. Must
BeginDate month, two months be no earlier than six months before 10
before the current today. Use format MM/DD/YYYY
month
Optional; default is Last date to include in the report. Use

EndDate 10
todays date format MM/DD/YYYY
In the overall list of returns for this report

Start type and date range, the start position for 8
1
the return to this query.
RecordsToReturn 100 if Down- Number of items to return in this report. 8
load=False
Do you wish to run report in real time or

Download Required deliver to this accounts Billing contact ?
email address? Permitted values are:
- 1117 -

True Send the report via email False
Real-time and deliver in API response
Reports will always be delivered by
email if they extend past four months
before today, or if they includemore than
25,000 results.
If delivering the report via email,

ReportOutputType Required ?
ReportOutputType must be 2.
Format of response. Permitted value is

ResponseType Required 4
XML.

RptString List report descriptions
ThreeMoPast The date three months before today
SixMoPast The date six months before today
BeginDate The first date included in this report
EndDate The last date included in this report
ID Report type identification number
Name Report name
ReportType Report type specified in this query string
ReportName Name of the report type specified in this query string
Should report results be queued. Permitted values are 1 to

QueueReportResults
queue results; 0 to send results immediately via HTTP.
Results specific to this report type. The results, and return para-
ReportResults
meters, vary by report type.
OrderID Order identification number
Commission Commission
SalePrice Sale price
DateApplied Date sale was recorded
- 1118 -
LoginID Login ID to which this order was delivered
In the full list of results, the start position of the next page of
NewStartPosition
results
In the full list of results, the position of the first result listed on
ThisStartPosition
this page
In the full list of results, the position of the last result listed on
ThisEndPosition
this page
In the full list of results, the position of the previous page of res-
PreviousStartPosition
ults
TotalReturned Number of results listed on this page
TotalRows Number of results total for this report
ShowPrevious Should this page show a link to the previous page of results?
ShowNext Should this page show a link to the next page of results?
ShowPaging Should this page show links to previous and next results?
Version Version of this command that generated this return

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 1119 -
Example
The following query requests a list of registrations for the period 12/1/2009 to 1/1/2010,
and sends the response in XML format.
Query
command=RPT_GETREPORT&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&ReportType=0&BeginDate=12/01/2010&EndDate=01/01/2011
&responsetype=xml
Output
<rpt>
<rptString>Registrations | Renewals | Transfers In | Priv-
ate Label |
Sub-Accounts | Accounting | Expiring Domains | | | | Pri-
cing Editor Updates |
Transfers Out | | Business Listing Bulk Update | | Business
Listing
Domain Update | Transactions | Order History | Periodic
Billing History | |
Premium Registration | Monthly Invoices | Invoice History |
Invoice Detail |
List of Invoices | Top Watchlist TLDs | Watchlist Summary |
Top Watchlists |
All Watchlists | All Watchlist Details | Domain Name His-
tory |
Domain Verification/Suspension
</rptString>
<threemopast>9/12/2011</threemopast>
<sixmopast>6/12/2011</sixmopast>
<begindate>12/6/2011</begindate>
<enddate>12/12/2011</enddate>
<option>
<reporttype id="0" name="Registrations"></reporttype>
<reporttype id="1" name="Renewals"></reporttype>
<reporttype id="2" name="Transfers In"></reporttype>
<reporttype id="11" name="Transfers Out"></reporttype>
<reporttype id="3" name="Private Label"></reporttype>
<reporttype id="4" name="Sub-Accounts"></reporttype>
- 1120 -
<reporttype id="5" name="Accounting"></reporttype>

<reporttype id="6" name="Expiring Domains"></reporttype>
<reporttype id="10" name="Pricing Editor Updates"></re-
porttype>
<reporttype id="13" name="Business Listing Bulk
Update"></reporttype>
<reporttype id="15" name="Business Listing Domain
Update"></reporttype>
<reporttype id="16" name="Transactions"></reporttype>
<reporttype id="17" name="Order History"></reporttype>
<reporttype id="18" name="Periodic Billing His-
tory"></reporttype>
<reporttype id="20" name="Premium Regis-
tration"></reporttype>
<reporttype id="21" name="Monthly Invoices"></reporttype>
<reporttype id="22" name="Invoice History"></reporttype>
<reporttype id="23" name="Invoice Detail"></reporttype>
<reporttype id="24" name="List of Invoices"></reporttype>
<reporttype id="25" name="Top Watchlist TLDs"></reporttype>
<reporttype id="26" name="Watchlist Summary"></reporttype>
<reporttype id="27" name="Top Watchlists"></reporttype>
<reporttype id="28" name="All Watchlists"></reporttype>
<reporttype id="29" name="All Watchlist Details"></re-
porttype>
<reporttype id="30" name="Domain Name His-
tory"></reporttype>
<reporttype id="31" name="Domain Veri-
fication/Suspension"></reporttype>
</option>
<reporttype>0</reporttype>
<reportname> Registrations </reportname>
<results>
<rpttld>
<report0-single tld="com" sum="2"/>
<report0-single tld="net" sum="1"/>
</rpttld>
<rptrawxml>
<row OrderID="157781016" SLD="resellerdocs1"
TLD="com" CreationDate="2011-12-09T03:25:03.253"
ExpDate="2012-12-09T11:25:00" PaidAmount="8.9500"
BilledToCust="0.0000"/>
- 1121 -
TLD="com" CreationDate="2011-12-09T03:25:06.657"
TLD="net" CreationDate="2011-12-09T03:58:41.283"
</rptrawxml>
<NewThisMonth>3</NewThisMonth>
<AverageRegPeriod>1.000000</AverageRegPeriod>
</results>
</rpt>
<Command>RPT_GETREPORT</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l CreateAccount
l CreateSubAccount
l GetAccountInfo
l GetAllAccountInfo
l GetOrderDetail
l GetOrderList
l GetReport
l GetSubAccounts
l GetTransHistory
- 1122 -
SendAccountEmail
Description
Definition
Email subaccount login information to the billing contact of record.
Usage
Use this command to email subaccount login information to the billing contact for that
subaccount.
Availability
Constraints
l The subaccount must be a child of this account.
Input parameters

LoginID Required Login ID of subaccount 20
- 1123 -

ID number of subaccount, in NNN-aa-
NNNN format. Use GetSubAccounts
Account Required 11
command to retrieve the subaccount ID
number.



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query sends an email to the owner of the subaccount, and sends the
Query
command=SendAccountEmail&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&loginID=resellidsub&account=659-fs-2869&responsetype=xml
- 1124 -
Output
<Command>SENDACCOUNTEMAIL</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l GetSubAccounts
ServiceSelect
Description
Definition
Enable and disable services for a domain. You can also use this command to retrieve
the current settings for a service.
Usage
Use this command to enable or disable email (MX or MXE), DNS, Web Site Creator,
Web hosting, ID Protect services for a domain.
Use this command to create a Web Site Creator account.
- 1125 -
Use this command to get the current settings for a service.

Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/
ServiceSelection.asp?DomainNameID=152533676&service=emailset
On the email settings page, the save changes button calls the ServiceSelect command.
Constraints
l One query can select only one service. You must repeat the query for each service
you want to select.
Input parameters

Required; if Service
is used without
Permitted values are: WSB (Web Site
NewOptionID and
Creator and Web hosting services)
Service Update, the 15
EmailSet (email services) WPPS (ID
response gives the
Protect Whois Privacy Protection)
current setting Ser-
vice type.
- 1126 -

Service=DNSServer (which domain
name servers):
l 1006 use our name servers
l 1012 use user-specified domain
servers, including none
Service=WSB (Web site services):

l 1060 no Web site services
l 1063 Web Site Creator stand-
alone (use this option to create or
enable Web Site Creator stand-
alone)
Optional; if you use
l 1066 Web hosting account
NewOptionID you
NewOptionID must also use Service=EmailSet (Email services): 4
Update Setting for l 1048 no email
the service. l 1051 email forwarding (to a POP
or WebMail address)
l 1054 user (mail server name
required)
l 1105 user simplified (mail
servers IP address required)
l 1114 POP3/WebMail plus email
forwarding
Service=WPPS (ID Protect Whois Pri-
vacy Protection):
l 1120 WhoIs information is
masked
l 1123 WhoIs information is view-
able
Required if you use True updates the NewOptionID value for

Update 5
NewOptionID the service
Required for Ser- WPPS Second-level domain name (for

SLD 63
vice=EmailSet example, enom in enom.com)
Required for Ser-

TLD vice=EmailSet Top-level domain name (extension) 15
WPPS Messaging
Required if Ser-
vice=WSB and Name of the Web hosting account to
HostAccount 14
NewOptionID=1066 enable or disable.
- 1127 -


current-svc Current service option setting

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query enables email services, and requests the response in XML format:
Query
command=serviceselect&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&newoptionid=1114
&service=emailset&update=True&responsetype=xml
The response indicates that email services have changed from option 1048 (no email) to
1114 (POP3/WebMail plus email forwarding):
- 1128 -
Output
<ServiceSelect>
nameid="152533676"
>resellerdocs.com</domainname>
<service name="emailset">
<option name="1048"/>
</service>
<current-svc>1114</current-svc>
</ServiceSelect>
<Command>SERVICESELECT</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>a0987545-ce87-4455-9965-559cbae-
f1d1e</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l GetWPPSInfo
l GetIPResolver
l ModifyNS
l PE_SetPricing
- 1129 -
l SetHosts
l SetIPResolver
SetCatchAll
Description
Definition
Set a forwarding address for any emails addressed to nonexistent mailboxes.
Usage
Use this command to forward email addressed to nonexistent email addresses under a
domain name. The domain name must be in our system, but the forwarding address
does not need to be.
Availability
The Catch-All Email box at the bottom of the page uses the SetCatchAll command.
Constraints
l The ForwardTo address does not need to be in our system.
Input parameters
- 1130 -


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Email address to forward mail to. Use

ForwardTo Required 130
format mailbox@sld.tld


Email address that mail will be sent to if the addressee mailbox
CatchAll
does not exist

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 1131 -
Example
The following query forwards any email addressed to nonexistent mailboxes for this
domain name, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=SetCatchAll&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com
&ForwardTo=john.doe@resellerdocs.com&responsetype=xml
In the response, the presence of the CatchAll email address you supplied confirms that
Output
<CatchAll>john.doe@resellerdocs.com</CatchAll>
<Command>SETCATCHALL</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l DeletePOP3
l Forwarding
l GetCatchAll
- 1132 -
l GetForwarding
l GetPOP3
l GetPOPForwarding
l SetPOPForwarding
l SetUpPOP3User
SetCustomerDefinedData
Description
Definition
Enter data fields defined by you, and the corresponding data.
Usage
Use this command to create a storage place for data fields that do not currently exist.
Also use this command to put data into those custom data fields. This command allows
you to add data one field at a time.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters
command=nameofcommand&uid=yourloginid&pw=yourpassword&
paramname=paramvalue&nextparamname=nextparamvalue
- 1133 -


ObjectID Required 2
by you.
Object type. Options are:

1 Data pertaining to an account
Type Required 1
2 Data pertaining to a domain
3 Data pertaining to an order
Required if Type=2 Second-level domain name (for example,

SLD 63
enom in enom.com)
Required if Type=2
Required if Type=3 Order ID, which you can retrieve using

OrderID 11
GetDomainStatus.

Key Required 50
data field
Value Required Content of this entry 50
Visibility to subaccount. Options are:

0 Not visible when logged on with sub-
DisplayFlag Recommended account ID 1
1 Visible when logged on using sub-
account ID
EnteredBy Recommended Name of the person adding this entry 50


The number of errors if any occurred. If greater than 0, check

ErrCount
- 1134 -
as-is back to the client.

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query creates a new data field labeled FavoriteCuisine and assigns a
value Italian for this account.:
Query
command=SetCustomerDefinedData&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&ObjectID=1&Type=1&Key=FavoriteCuisine&Value=Italian&
DisplayFlag=0&EnteredBy=John&responsetype=xml
In the response, the value 0 for ErrCount confirms that the query executed successfully:
Output
<Command>SETCUSTOMERDEFINEDDATA</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
- 1135 -
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
SetDNSHost
Description
Definition
Dynamically updates the IP address of the host computer in our name server records.
Usage
Use this command to update the IP address of a host that does not have a static IP
address.
If possible, use this command in a secure mode: https instead of http.
Availability
All customers have access to this command.
Constraints
- 1136 -
l The domain name must have a password.

l The host must be set as an IP address.
Input parameters
Query

The host and domain name that you want

Zone Required to update in the DNS. For example, 93
www.resellerdocs.com
Password for managing the domain (a

DomainPassword Required domain that uses the SetDNSHost com- 60
mand must have a password)
The IP address to set the DNS record to.

If omitted, the IP you are coming from (as
our server sees it) is used. For example,
Address Optional 15
if you are connecting to our server
through a proxy, the proxy server's IP will
be used.



ErrCount
- 1137 -
ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l Check the return parameter ErrCount. If greater than 0, the transaction failed. The
parameter Err(ErrCount) can be presented to the client. Otherwise, process the
Example
The following query uses a secure server to set the host for resellerdocs.com. Because
the query string does not specify the IP, the command sets the IP to that from which the
server received the query:
Query
command=SetDNSHost&zone=resellerdocs.com&
DomainPassword=tester&responsetype=xml
The error count value 0 confirms that the DNS host was set successfully:
Output

<Command>SETDNSHOST</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
- 1138 -
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l GetHosts
l GetRegHosts
l SetHosts
SetDomainSRVHosts
Description
Definition
Create or edit SRV host records for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to create or edit SRV (service) records for a domain name.
This command deletes all previously existing SRV records for the domain name. You
must include all SRV records that you want to end up with, in the query string.
SRV records are required for some newer Internet protocols such as SIP and XMPP.
Some other protocols support, but do not require, SRV records.
This command allows a user to supply the components of an SRV record that are dis-
cretionary, then adds TTL, Class, and formatting to produce a complete SRV record.
Availability
The save button calls the SetDomainSRVHosts command.
- 1139 -
Constraints
l The domain name must use our name servers.
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
ID number of an existing host record, if it

Optional exists and you want to edit it. Use the
HostIDX
Required GetDomainSRVHosts command to
retrieve SRV record ID numbers.
Service type of this record. Required

format is 1 to 14 characters in length;
ServiceX Required includes lower-case letters, digits, and 14
hyphens; and begins and ends with a let-
ter or digit
Transport protocol for this record, such

ProtocolX Required 14
as TCP or UDP
Priority for this record. Lowest priority val-

ues are used first, working toward higher
PriorityX Required priority values when lower values are 5
unavailable. Use this value to designate
backup service. Permitted values are
- 1140 -

numbers from 0 to 65535
Proportion of time to use this record.

Records of equal priority are added and
the total normalized to 100%. Use this
WeightX Required parameter to specify load balancing 5
among records of the same priority. Per-
mitted values are numbers from 0 to
65535
Port to use for this service. Permitted

PortX Required 5
format is numbers from 0 to 65535
Fully qualified domain name for this SRV

record. Permitted format is SRVRe-
TargetX Required
cordName.SLD.TLD. (include the trailing
period in a fully qualified domain name)


InsertedCount Number of SRV records added
UpdatedCount Number of SRV records edited
DeletedCount Number of SRV records deleted

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 1141 -
Notes
Example
The following query keeps an existing SRV record and adds a new record, and sends
Query
command=SETDOMAINSRVHOSTS&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&HostID1=17217418&Service1=imap&
Protocol1=TCP&Priority1=10&Weight1=50&Port1=1&
Target1=imap.resellerdocs.com.&HostID2=&Service2=xmpp&
Protocol2=UDP&Priority2=10&Weight2=50&Port2=98&
Target2=xmpp.resellerdocs.com.&ResponseType=XML
In the response, the Success value True and the ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query
was successful. In addition, the response specifies the numbers of SRV records that
were added, changed, and deleted:
Output
<InsertedCount>0</InsertedCount>
<UpdatedCount>0</UpdatedCount>
<DeletedCount>0</DeletedCount>
<Command>SETDOMAINSRVHOSTS</Command>
- 1142 -
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l GetDomainInfo
l GetDomainSRVHosts
l GetHosts
l SetHosts
SetDomainSubServices
Description
Definition
Update settings for domain services (active or inactive for email forwarding host
records).
Usage
Use this command to enable or disable services. (e.g., Host or email forwarding
records).
Availability
Constraints
- 1143 -

Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Enable email forwarding. Permitted val-

Optional; ues are:
ActivateForwarding 1
default is 1 1 to enable
0 to disable
Enable URL forwarding. Permitted val-

Optional; ues are:
ActivateHostRecords 1
default is 1 1 to enable
0 to disable


EmailForwarding 1, 0 or empty
HostRecords 1, 0 or empty
SetDomainServices Successful status of this query
- 1144 -
ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
format, send ResponseType=HTML or ResponseType=XMLin your request.
Example
The following query sets the subservices of a domain and sends the response in XML
format:
Query
command=setdomainsubservices&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
sld=resellerdocs2&tld=net&ActivateForwarding=1&
ActivateHostRecords=1&responsetype=xml
In the response, the SetDomainServices value Successful and the ErrCount value of 0
confirm that services have been set successfully:
Output

<DomainServices>
<EmailForwarding>1</EmailForwarding>
<HostRecords>1</HostRecords>
- 1145 -
<SetDomainServices>Successful</SetDomainServices>
</DomainServices>
<Command>SETDOMAINSUBSERVICES</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l GetDomainSubServices
l GetIPResolver
l ServiceSelect
l SetIPResolver
SetDotNameForwarding
Description
Definition
Set the email forwarding address for a .name domain.
Usage
Use this command if you want to use the .name Registrys email forwarding feature (you
can also use eNoms email forwarding with .name domains).
Availability
On the domain names menu, click my domains, and then click a .name domain.
- 1146 -
On the domain control panel of the .name domain, scroll down to Email Settings.
Click the .name email button.
On the Manage this domain's ".NAME email forward" settings page, the save changes
button calls the SetDotNameForwarding command.
Constraints
l The domain must have a .name TLD.
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Email address to forward to, in the format

EMailAlias@DomainName.tld

- 1147 -

ForwardTo Email address to which email will be forwarded

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
format, send ResponseType=HTMLor ResponseType=XML in your request.
Example
John Doe registers domain john.doe.name, which automatically includes the email
address john@doe.name. The following query forwards email addressed to john@-
doe.name to john.doe@resellerdocs.com, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=setdotnameforwarding&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
sld=john.doe&tld=name&ForwardTo=john.doe@resellerdocs.com&
responsetype=xml

Output
- 1148 -

<dotnameforwarding>
<ForwardTo>john.doe@resellerdocs.com</ForwardTo>
</dotnameforwarding>
<Command>SETDOTNAMEFORWARDING</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l Forwarding
l GetCatchAll
l GetForwarding
l PurchasePOPBundle
l SetUpPOP3User
SetFilePermissions
Description
Definition
Set write permissions on Web hosting folders.
Usage
Allow or deny write permissions for Web hosting folders.
Availability
- 1149 -
Log on to webhostingtest.ehost-services.com with Login ID resellwebid, password
resellwebpw.
http://webhostingtest.ehost-services.com/websites/advanced.asp?Path=/testdir
The Write access allowed check box sets the value, and the SAVE NEW FOLDER
SETTINGS button calls the SetFilePermissions command.
Constraints
l The SetFilePermissions command applies to subdirectories but not to root.
Input parameters

Name of the directory to allow write per-

mission on.
Use format Dir-
Directory Required ectory=DirectoryName/SubdirectoryName 254
initial slash.
Write permission setting. Permitted values

WriteAccess Required 3
are on and off.
ResponseType Optional Format of response. Options are Text 4
- 1150 -



ErrCount

Err(x)
as-is back to the client

Done
cessfully
Notes
parameterErr(ErrCount) can be presented to the client. Otherwise, process the
Example
The following query grants write access for directory testdir, and sends the response in
XML format:
Query
command=setfilepermissions&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
hostaccount=resellwebid&directory=testdir&
WriteAccess=On&responsetype=xml
- 1151 -
In the response, the Successful value True and the ErrCount value 0 confirm that the
Output

<Permissions>
</Permissions>
<Command>SETFILEPERMISSIONS</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainHeader
l AddHostHeader
l CreateHostAccount
l DisableFolderApp
l EnableFolderApp
l IsFolderEnabled
l ListWebFiles
l MetaBaseGetValue
l MetaBaseSetValue
- 1152 -
SetHosts
Description
Definition
Set host records for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to change the host records for a domain name.
This command deletes the existing host records before replacing them with the host
records included in the query string. To avoid unpleasant surprises for the user, some
resellers use the GetHosts command to retrieve existing host records, and populate the
SetHosts query string with existing host records while also allowing the user to add or
delete host records.
To set SRV records, use the SetDomainSRVHosts command.
To enable or disable email, use the ServiceSelect command.
Availability
On the host settings page, the save changes button calls the SetHosts command.
Constraints
l This command deletes your existing host records before replacing them with the
records you include in the query string. See Usage note, above.
Input parameters
- 1153 -


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Name of the host record to add. This com-

mand deletes all existing host records
and replaces them with the records you
HostNameX
Required supply in this query string. Index the para- 60
X=1 to maximum 50
meters for each host record X; X must be
numeric and in sequence beginning with
1.
Record type of host record X. Permitted

values are:
A IP address
AAAA IPv6 address
CNAME Alias record type, to associate a
RecordTypeX host name
Required 5
X=1 to maximum 50 URL URL redirect
MX Mail. Can be a host name under this
domain name or the name of a mail
Address to redirect to.

If RecordTypeX=A, AddressX must be
an IP address
If RecordTypeX=AAAA, AddressX must
be an IPv6 address
If RecordTypeX=CNAME, AddressX
AddressX must be a fully qualified domain name
Required 260
X=1 to maximum 50 (see Note) or a host name defined in this
domain
If RecordTypeX=URL, AddressX must
be the exact URL of the page you redir-
ect to, or an IP address, or a fully qual-
ified domain name (see Note)
- 1154 -

If RecordTypeX=FRAME, AddressX is
the actual URL, or the IP address, or the
fully qualified domain name (see Note) of
the page you want to display when
someone types Your_Domain.com
If RecordTypeX=MX, AddressX must be
a fully qualified domain name (see Note)
or a host name defined in this domain
If RecordTypeX=MXE, AddressX must
be an IP address
If RecordTypeX=TXT, AddressX is a
text (SPF) record.
For help writing an SPF record, go to
http://spf.pobox.com/wizard.html
Optional; use with Host record preference for setting mail

MXPrefX
record type MX; redirection. The lower the number, the 5
X=1 to maximum 50)
default is 10 higher the priority



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Note that the period at the end is an essential component of a fully qualified
domain name.
- 1155 -
l On executing this command, the MX records are not deleted. But all other hosts are
deleted and re-created as required.
Example
The following query sets four host records for resellerdocs.com. The results:
lresellerdocs.com forwards mail to IP address 66.150.5.189.
l photos.resellerdocs.com points to domain name photos.msn.com
l yahoo.resellerdocs.com points to IP address 204.71.200.72
l msn.resellerdocs.com points to URL http://www.msn.com
Query
command=sethosts&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&HostName1=@&RecordType1=A&
Address1=66.150.5.189&HostName2=photos&RecordType2=CNAME&
Address2=photos.msn.com.&HostName3=yahoo&RecordType3=URL&
Address3=204.71.200.72&HostName4=msn&RecordType4=FRAME&
Address4=http://www.msn.com&responsetype=xml
The error count value of 0 confirms that hosts have been set successfully:
Output

<Command>SETHOSTS</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
- 1156 -
Related commands
l GetHosts
l GetMetaTag
l GetRegHosts
l GetSPFHosts
l PurchaseServices
l SetDomainSRVHosts
l SetDNSHost
l SetSPFHosts
l UpdateMetaTag
SetIPResolver
Description
Definition
Update IP Resolver settings.
Usage
Use this command to set information for the NameMyComputer service.
Availability
https://re-
sellertest.enom.com/domains/IPResolverConfig.asp?DomainNameID=152533676
On the name my computer page, the save changes button calls the SetIPResolver com-
mand.
Constraints
- 1157 -
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
IPResolverID Optional IP resolver ID 60
OrigHostName Optional Original host name 60
HostName Required Name for your host 60
ClientUserID Required ICQ# or UserID 60
ServiceID Required City to build the map for 60
OfflineURL Optional Offline URL 78


ip-resolver-id Current ID if one exists.
host-name Name for your host.
client-user-id Current ICQ# or UserID.
service-id Current service ID ("1").
SetIPResolver Success of this query. Response is Successful or Failed.
- 1158 -

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query sets information for the Name My Computer service, and requests
Query
command=SetIPResolver&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&ClientUserID=12345678&
HostName=home&ServiceID=1&responsetype=xml

Output

<SetIPResolver>
<domainname sld="resellerdocs" tld="com" id="152533676">
resellerdocs.com
- 1159 -
</domainname>
<IPResolver>
<ip-resolver-id />
<orig-host-name />
<host-name>home</host-name>
<client-user-id>
<![CDATA[ 12345678 ] ]>
</client-user-id>
<service-id>1</service-id>
<offine-url>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</offine-url>
<data-errors />
</IPResolver>
<SetIPResolver>Successful</SetIPResolver>
</SetIPResolver>
<Command>SETIPRESOLVER</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l GetIPResolver
l ServiceSelect
SetPakRenew
Description
Definition
Set the auto-renew behavior for a POP email pak.
Usage
Use this command to set auto-renew behavior for an individual POP pak.
- 1160 -
Availability
At the bottom of the section for each POP pak, the Attempt to auto-renew check box calls
the SetPakRenew command.
Constraints
l The POP pak bundle ID must belong to this domain.
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Numerical ID for the POP pak (retrieve

BundleID Required the bundle ID using the GetPOP3 com- 4
mand)
Auto-renew setting to be applied to this

AutoPakRenew Required 1
POP pak. Permitted values are 1 (on) or
- 1161 -

0 (off)


DomainRRP Domain type
Bundle ID of the POP pak for which the auto-renew value is

PakUpdated
being reset
AutoPakRenew Auto-renew setting for the pak. Values are 1 (on) or 0 (off)

ErrCount

ErrX
as is back to the cli-ent.

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query turns the POP pak auto-renew setting for bundle 5105 on, and
Query
- 1162 -
command=SETPAKRENEW&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
DomainNameID=152533676&bundleid=5105&
AutoPakRenew=1&ResponseType=XML
In the response, the error count of 0 and absence of error messages confirm that the
Output
<PakUpdated>5105</PakUpdated>
<AutoPakRenew>1</AutoPakRenew>
<Command>SETPAKRENEW</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l GetPOP3
l GetRenew
l SetRenew
- 1163 -
SetPassword
Description
Definition
Set a password for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to set a password for access to a domain name.
Availability
https://re-
sellertest.enom.com/domains/SubAccountConfig.asp?DomainNameID=152533676
On the domain password page, the save changes button calls the SetPassword com-
mand.
Constraints
l The domain name password must use ASCII characters, and must be 6 to 60 char-
acters in length.
Input parameters
- 1164 -


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Password to access and manage the

domain name. Must use ASCII char-
DomainPassword Required 60
acters and be 6 to 60 characters in
length.



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 1165 -
Example
The following query sets the domain password for resellerdocs.com as resellerdocspw,
Query
com-
mand=setpassword&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&sld=resellerdocs&
tld=com&domainpassword=resellerdocspw&responsetype=xml
The response confirms that the password is set successfully:

Output
<Command>SETPASSWORD</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l GetAllDomains
l GetDomainCount
l GetDomainExp
l GetDomainInfo
l GetDomains
l GetExtendInfo
- 1166 -
l GetPasswordBit
l GetRegLock
l GetRenew
l SetRegLock
l SetRenew
l StatusDomain
l ValidatePassword
SetPOPForwarding
Description
Definition
Create, change, or delete an email forwarding address for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to create, update, or delete email forwarding records for a domain
name.
This command can be used to configure email forwarding addresses for both our POP
mail and our email forwarding services.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/MailConfig.asp?DomainNameID=152533676
The save changes button calls the SetPOPForwarding command.
Constraints
- 1167 -
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
The user name for this mailbox (email

address will be UserName@sld.tld).
Domain for this mailbox. Must be the

same values as SLD and TLD above.
EMail Required 78
Use format SLD.TLD (email address will
be UserName@sld.tld).
Email address to forward to. Use format

ForwardingAddress@example.com
Add this email forwarding. Permitted val-

ues are:
Enable Required 0 Delete this email forwarding address 1
1 Add or change this email forwarding
address
Deliver to forwarding address. Permitted

values are:
no value Deliver to original mailbox only
StatusFlags Optional 1
0 Deliver to both original mailbox and for-
warding address
1 Deliver only to the forwarding address

- 1168 -

Success 1 indicates the query was successful

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query creates an email forwarding record: Email addressed to sales@re-
sellerdocs.com will be forwarded to info@resellerdocs.com. The query string also
requests a response in XML format:
Query
command=SETPOPFORWARDING&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&username=sales&
Email=resellerdocs.com&forwardTo=info@resellerdocs.com&
Enable=1&StatusFlags=1&ResponseType=xml
In the response, the Success value 1 indicates that the query was successful:
Output
- 1169 -

<success>1</success>
<Command>SETPOPFORWARDING</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l DeletePOP3
l GetCatchAll
l GetPOP3
l GetPOPForwarding
l PurchasePOPBundle
l SetUpPOP3User
SetRegLock
Description
Definition
Set the registrar lock for a domain name.
Usage
- 1170 -
Set the registrar unlock value to 0 to prevent unauthorized transfer of a domain name to
another registrar.
Set the registrar unlock value to 1 to allow unrestricted transfer of a domain name.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/Domain-Man-
ager.aspx?DomainNameID=152533676
On the Domain Name Maintenance page, the check box marked Do not allow this
name to be transferred sets the value for the UnlockRegistrar parameter, and the save
changes button calls the SetRegLockcommand.
Constraints
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
- 1171 -

Lock option to be set. Permitted values
UnlockRegistrar Required 1
are 1 to unlock, 0 to lock).


reg-lock Current lock status.
RRPCodeSR Registry response code for our internal use.
RRPText Verbose description of RRPCodeSR.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Identification number for this query, for our history and error
TrackingKey
logs.
Notes
Example
The following query requests that the registrar lock be set (unlockregistrar set to false),
Query
- 1172 -
com-
mand=setreglock&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&sld=resellerdocs&
tld=com&unlockregistrar=0&responsetype=xml
In the response, an ErrCount value 0 indicates that the query was successful:
Output

<reg-lock>REGISTRAR-LOCK</reg-lock>
<RRPCodeSR>200</RRPCodeSR>
<Command>SETREGLOCK</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<TrackingKey>d79aed2c-73e9-4503-bc38-c700a61b-
fe54</TrackingKey>
</debug>
Related commands
l GetAllDomains
l GetDomainCount
l GetDomainExp
l GetDomainInfo
l GetDomains
l GetExtendInfo
- 1173 -
l GetPasswordBit
l GetRegLock
l GetRenew
l SetPassword
l SetRenew
l StatusDomain
l ValidatePassword
SetRenew
Description
Definition
Set the auto-renew flag for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command with RenewFlag set to 1 to renew the domain registration auto-
matically. Use this command with RenewFlag set to 0 to require the owner to actively
renew.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/Domain-Man-
ager.aspx?DomainNameID=152533676
On the Domain Name Maintenance page, the check box marked Renew the registration
sets the value for the RenewFlag parameter, and the save changes button calls the
SetRenew command.
Constraints
- 1174 -
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Turn the auto-renew setting for the

RenewFlag Required domain on or off. Options are 1 to auto- 1
renew, 0 otherwise
Turn the auto-renew setting for all POP

paks in this domain on or off. Permitted
values are 1 to autorenew, 0 otherwise.
AutoPakRenew Optional 1
To control the auto-renew settings for
individual POP paks, use the SetPakRe-
new command.
Turn the auto-renew setting for email for-

warding in this domain on or off. Per-
EmailForwardRenew Optional 1
mitted values are 1 to auto-renew, 0
otherwise.
Turn the URL forwarding setting for POP

URLForwardRenew Optional paks in this domain on or off. Permitted 1
values are 1 to auto-renew, 0 otherwise.
Turn the auto-renew setting for Whois Pri-

vacy Protection Service in this domain
WPPSRenew Optional 1
on or off. Permitted values are 1 to auto-
renew, 0 otherwise.

- 1175 -

RenewName Current auto-renew setting (1 = on, 0 = off)
Current auto-renew setting for POP paks (True = on, False =

AutoPakRenew off). This return parameter only appears if the AutoPakRenew
is an input parameter.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests that resellerdocs.com renew automatically, and requests
Query
command=setrenew&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&sld=resellerdocs&
tld=com&renewflag=1&responsetype=xml
The response confirms that the autorenew flag is set successfully (RenewName=1):
Output
- 1176 -
<RenewName>True</RenewName>
<Command>SETRENEW</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l Extend
l GetAllDomains
l GetDomainCount
l GetDomainExp
l GetDomainInfo
l GetDomains
l GetExtendInfo
l GetPasswordBit
l GetRegLock
l GetRenew
l InsertNewOrder
l SetPakRenew
l SetPassword
l SetRegLock
l StatusDomain
l ValidatePassword
- 1177 -
SetResellerServicesPricing
Description
Definition
Set the prices you charge your reseller for services.
Usage
Use this command to set prices you charge a subaccount for services.
This command differs from the GetSubAccountDetails command in that the SetReseller-
ServicesPricing command allows you to set pricing of any combination of services,
SetResellerServicesPricing does not require you to simultaneously convert an account
to reseller status, and SetResellerServicesPricing does not require you to set all service
prices in a single query.
To cover all the functionality of the GetSubAccountDetails command without its restric-
tions, use SetResellerTLDPricing, and SetResellerServicesPricing.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/resellers/SubAccount-Manage.asp?Account=107-vm-2729
The save changes button calls the SetResellerServicesPricing command.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 1178 -

Either SubUID or
SubUID Account is 20
for.
Required
Account ID of the subaccount to set pri-

Either SubUID or
cing for, in NNN-aa-NNNN format. To
Account Account is 11
retrieve the subaccount ID, use the
Required
GetSubAccounts command.
Price you are charging this subaccount

DotNameBundle Optional for a name-and-email .name bundle, in 5
DD.cc format

DNSHosting Optional for one year ofDNS hosting, in DD.cc 5
format
Price your are charging this subaccount

WPPS Optional for a one-yearsubscription to ID Protect, 5
in DD.cc format

RichContent Optional for a monthlyRichContent subscription, 5
in DD.cc format

POP3 Optional 5
for a POP310-pak, in DD.cc format


Name of this service. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or
ServiceX
HTML.
Price you set for this service. Indexed X when Respon-

PriceX
Number of services listed in this response (all services, not

ServicesCount
just those for which you set prices in your query)
- 1179 -

ErrCount

ErrX
as- is back to the client.

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query sets prices for services-wholesale prices that resellid charges sub-
account 443-up-6579 and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=SETRESELLERSERVICESPRICING&uid=resellid&
pw=resellpw&account=443-up-6579&pop3=19.95&responsetype=xml
In the response, the list of prices that match those you set, and the ErrCount value 0,
Output

<services>
<service name="pop3" price="19.95" />
<service name="dotnamebundle" price="" />
- 1180 -
</services>
<servicescount>2</servicescount>
<Command>SETRESELLERSERVICESPRICING</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l GetSubAccounts
l PE_SetPricing
SetResellerTLDPricing
Description
Definition
Set the prices you charge your resellers for domain names. You can use this command
to set any number of prices.
Usage
Use this command to set prices you charge your resellers for domain names.
We recommend that you use SetResellerTLDPricing for setting prices charged to sub-
accounts. The GetSubAccountDetails command also offers this functionality, but with
much stricter requirements on the query string.
- 1181 -
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/resellers/SubAccount-Manage.asp?Account=107-vm-2729
The save changes button calls the SetResellerTLDPricing command.
Constraints
l The subaccount must belong to this domain name account.
Input parameters

Either SubUID or
SubUID Account is 20
for.
Required
Account ID number of the subaccount to

Either SubUID or
set pricing for, in NNN-aa-NNNN format.
Account Account is 11
To retrieve the subaccount ID number,
Required
use the GetSubAccounts command.

TLDPrice Optional 5
for registering this TLD, in DD.cc format

TLDRenew Optional 5
for renewing this TLD, in DD.cc format
- 1182 -

TLDTransfer Optional 5
for transferring this TLD, in DD.cc format

DotNameBundle Optional for a name-and-email .name bundle, in 5
DD.cc format

POP3 Required 5
for a POP3 10-pak, in DD.cc format

WPPS Required for WhoIs Privacy Protection Service, in 5
DD.cc format


When ResponseType=XML, this multi-part parameter name is
price tld="TLD" id="ID" prod="Prod" used as the XML tag. The return value is the price of the
product described by the param name.
tldX TLD. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
TLD ID number from our database. Indexed X when Respon-

tldIDX
Product ID number from our database. Indexed X when

productIDX
priceX Product price. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
The price of a one-year subscription to a .name name-and-

DotNameBundle
email bundle
Name of product. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or

NameX
HTML.
The price for a one-year subscription to product. Indexed X

PriceX
when ResponseType=Text or HTML.

ErrCount
- 1183 -
ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query sets prices for some TLDs and services in account resellid, and
Query
command=SETRESELLERTLDPRICING&uid=resellid&
pw=resellpw&account=443-up-6579&comprice=12.95&
comrenew=12.95&comtransfer=12.95&netprice=12.95&
netrenew=12.95&nettransfer=12.95&orgprice=8.95&
orgrenew=8.95&orgtransfer=8.95&wpps=8.50&pop3=19.95&
responsetype=xml
In the response, the list of TLDs and services and their prices, and the ErrCount value 0,
confirm that the query was successful:
Output

<tlds>
<price tld="biz" id="6" prod="10" />
- 1184 -

<price tld="com" id="0" prod="10">12.95</price>
<price tld="info" id="5" prod="10" />
<price tld="net" id="1" prod="10">12.95</price>
<price tld="org" id="2" prod="10">12.95</price>
</tlds>
<services>
<service name="dotnamebundle" price="" />
</services>
<servicescount>3</servicescount>
<Command>SETRESELLERTLDPRICING</Command>
<Site />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AuthorizeTLD
l GetSubAccounts
l GetTLDList
- 1185 -
l PE_GetTLDID
l PE_SetPricing
l RemoveTLD
SetSPFHosts
Description
Definition
Create or update Sender Policy Framework (SPF) host records for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to create or update SPF host records for a domain name.
The SetSPFHosts command creates or updates one record per query. To set more than
one SPF host record per query, use the SetHosts command.
Availability
The host records setup section behaves similarly to the SetSPFHosts command.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 1186 -


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Required when Host ID number from our database. You

HostID updating an SPF can retrieve this value using the 10
host record GetSPFHosts command.
HostName Required Host name, assigned by you 63
For SPF records, the required value is txt

RecordType Required 5
The SPF record. For help writing this

Address Required record, you can go to 255
Host record preference for setting the

SPF record. The lower the number, the
MXPref Optional 5
higher the priority. If not specified, default
value is 10.



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 1187 -
Notes
format, sendResponseType=HTMLor ResponseType=XMLin your request.
Example
The following query sets SPF host records for domain resellerdocs.com and sends the
Query
command=SETSPFHOSTS&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&HostName=test&
Address=v%3dspf1%20mx%20ptr%20a:regular%20a:hostnames
%20a:po%20mx:MX%20mx:servers%20mx:to%20ip4:63.251.174.113
%20include:myISP.net%20include:mydomain.com%20-all&
RecordType=txt&mxPref=&responsetype=xml
Output
<Command>SETSPFHOSTS</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
- 1188 -
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l GetHosts
l GetSPFHosts
l SetHosts
SetUpPOP3User
Description
Definition
Set up a POP3 mailbox for your domain.
Usage
Use this command when you have purchased a POP3 email pak (see
PurchasePOPBundle) and want to set up mailboxes for your domain.
Availability
On the POP3 Mail page, below the Add users to this Email Pak box, the save changes
button calls the SetUpPOP3User command.
Constraints
l A POP mail pak must have been purchased for the domain and the correct
BundleID supplied.
- 1189 -
l There must be at least one mailbox available in the email pak (BundleID) ref-
erenced.
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
POP pak ID number to add the user to

(must have already been purchased).
The order confirmation for purchasing the
BundleID Required integer
bundle contains the Bundle ID, or you
can retrieve it using the GetPOP3 com-
mand.
The user name to set up (email address

will be UserNameX@sld.tld).
UserNameX Required UserNameX is indexed, starting with 30
UserName1. You can configure multiple
user names in a single query string
Should UserNameX have administrative

privileges over all mailboxes associated
with this domain name. Administrative
privileges allow this user to reset the
password for mailboxes, and delete mail-
boxes. Permitted values are:
IsAdminX Optional 0 Regular user (can change the pass- 1
word for their own mailbox but no one
elses)
1 Administrator (when this user logs on to
Webmail and goes to the admin page, he
or she can see all mailboxes for this
domain name, can reset passwords for
- 1190 -

any or all mailboxes, and can delete any
or all mailboxes).
IsAdminX is indexed, starting with IsAd-
min1. You can configure multiple user
names in a single query string
POP3 password.
PasswordX is indexed, starting with
PasswordX Required 50
Password1. You can configure multiple
user names in a single query string
User's full name, as it appears in return

name in Web mail.
DisplayNameX Optional DisplayNameX is indexed, starting with 60
DisplayName1. You can configure mul-
tiple user names in a single query string



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 1191 -
Example
The following query creates mailbox james@resellerdocs.com and requests the
Query
command=SetupPop3user&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&BundleID=5134&UserName1=james&
Password1=resellpw&DisplayName1=James+Doe&responsetype=xml
In the response, the value 0 for parameter ErrCount indicates that the query was suc-
cessful:
Output
<AccountsCreated>1</AccountsCreated>
<AccountsFailed>0</AccountsFailed>
<Command>SETUPPOP3USER</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>37bb5652-5250-4483-a877-368f2e-
b7674f</TrackingKey>
- 1192 -
Related commands
l DeleteAllPOPPaks
l DeletePOP3
l DeletePOPPak
l Forwarding
l GetCatchAll
l GetForwarding
l GetMailHosts
l GetPOP3
l GetPOPForwarding
l ModifyPOP3
l PurchasePOPBundle
l SetUpPOP3User
SL_AutoRenew
Description
Definition
Set the Auto Renew flag for a SiteLock subscription.
Usage
Use this command to set the Auto Renew flag for a SiteLock subscription.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/web-site-lock/details.aspx?id=11
Constraints
l The SiteLock subscription must belong to this account.
- 1193 -
Input parameters

Identification number of the SiteLock sub-

scription for which you want to set the
SLID Required Auto Renew flag. To retrieve SLID num- 8
bers, use the SL_GetAccounts com-
mand.

for this SiteLock subscription. Permitted
values are:
True Automatically renew this sub-
scription



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 1194 -
Notes
Example
The following query sets the Auto Renew flag for a SiteLock subscription, and requests
Query
command=SL_AutoRenew&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw&
ResponseType=XML&SLID=11&AutoRenew=True
Output
<SiteLockAutoRenew>
<SLID>11</SLID>
</SiteLockAutoRenew>
<Command>SL_AUTORENEW</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
- 1195 -
ingKey>
Related commands
l SL_Configure
l SL_GetAccounts
SL_Configure
Description
Definition
Configure a SiteLock subscription.
Usage
Use this command to configure a SiteLock subscription after initial purchase.
Availability
Constraints
- 1196 -
Input parameters

Identification number of the SiteLock for

which you want to configure. To retrieve
SLID Required 8
SLID numbers, use the SL_GetAccounts
command.
Domain name. Permitted input format

DomainName Required includes the range from sld.tld to a com- 256
plete URL.
Email address. SiteLocks sends email to

EmailAddress Required this address for authorization and noti- 256
ficatons related to the subscription.
Password value to login to SiteLock con-

trol panel (different from your account
password). Random value will be gen-
Password Optional erated when left empty. Once the pass- 20
word is created, you cannot update it
from API. Password length: 5-20 char-
acters.



ErrCount
- 1197 -

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l Check the return parameter rameter ErrCount If greater than 0, the transaction
failed. The parameter Err(ErrCount) can be presented to the client. Otherwise, pro-
Example
The following query configures a SiteLock subscription after initial purchase, and
Query
command=SL_Configure&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw&
ResponseType=XML&SLID=11&DomainName=mydomain.com&
Email=owner@mydomain.com
Output
<SiteLockConfigure>
<SLID>11</SLID>
<EmailAddress>owner@mydomain.com</EmailAddress>
</SiteLockConfigure>
<Command>SL_CONFIGURE</Command>
- 1198 -
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site> <IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
Related commands
l SL_AutoRenew
l SL_GetAccounts
SL_GetAccountDetail
Description
Definition
Retrieve detailed information for one SiteLock subscription.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve detailed information for a SiteLock subscription.
Availability
- 1199 -
Constraints
Input parameters

Identification number of the SiteLock. To

SLID Required retrieve SLID numbers, use the SL_ 8
GetAccounts command.



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 1200 -
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves detailed information for one SiteLock subscription, and
Query
command=SL_GetAccountDetail&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw&
ResponseType=XML&SLID=11
Output
<SiteLockAccountDetail>
<SLID>11</SLID>
<ProdDesc>SiteLock Premium</ProdDesc>
<DomainName><![CDATA[mydomain.com]]></DomainName>
<EmailAddress><![CDATA[owner@mydomain.com]]></EmailAddress>
<StatusDesc>Service Active</Status>
<SubStatusID/>
<SubStatusDesc/>
<ReferenceID>519325</ReferenceID/>
<ConfigDate>04/16/2012</ConfigDate>
<FulfillmentDate>04/16/2012</FulfillmentDate/>
- 1201 -
<LoginURL><![CDATA[https://www.s-
itelock.com/rlogin.php?token=
393179cee551e0c147b5fe5a2e7d7c34]]></LoginURL>
</SiteLockAccountDetail>
<Command>SL_GETACCOUNTDETAIL</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
Related commands
l SL_AutoRenew
l SL_Configure
l SL_GetAccounts
SL_GetAccounts
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of SiteLock subscriptions for this login ID.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of SiteLock subscriptions for this login ID.
- 1202 -
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/web-site-lock/manage.aspx
Constraints
Input parameters


values are:
ProdType Optional 260: SiteLock Basic 3
262: SiteLock Premium
264: SiteLock Enterprise

Optional;
StartPosition StartPosition=26&PagingPageSize=25 8
default is 1
ted list.

Optional;
PagingPageSize response. Maximum permitted value is 3
default is 25
250.
- 1203 -

DomainName
StatusID
StatusDesc
SubStatusID
Optional;
SubStatusDesc
SortBy default is 255
AutoRenew
DomainName
SLID
ProdType
ProdDesc
OrderDate
ExpirationDate
Sort order. Permitted values are:

Optional;
default is Asc
Desc
To retrieve information about all possible

statuses for this product, use the GetPro-
ductSelectionlist command.
StatusID/StatusDesc. Permitted values

are:
1: Awaiting Configuration
StatusID, StatusDesc,
2: Service Active
SubStatusID or Optional 4/50
7: Pending Expiration
SubStatusDesc
8: Service Expired
SubStatusID/SubStatusDesc. Permitted
values are:
1: Auto Renew Off
2: Billing Failed CC
3: Billing Failed Balance
Auto Renew. Permitted values are:

True: subscriptions with automatic
AutoRenew Optional renewal 4
False: subscriptions without automatic
renewal
Order date start filter. Use format

OrderDateStart Optional
MM/DD/YYYY.
Order date end filter. Use format

OrderDateEnd Optional
MM/DD/YYYY.
Expiration date start filter. Use format

ExpirationDateStart Optional
MM/DD/YYYY.
- 1204 -

Expiration date end filter. Use format
ExpirationDateEnd Optional
MM/DD/YYYY.



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of SiteLock account for this login ID, and requests the
Query
command=SL_GetAccounts&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw&
ResponseType=XML&PagingPageSize=5&Prodtype=262&
SortBy=StatusID
- 1205 -
Output

<SiteLockAccounts>
<Account>
<SLID>65</SLID>
<ProdDesc>SiteLock Premium</ProdDesc>
<DomainName><![CDATA[ ]]></DomainName>
<StatusDesc>Awaiting Configuration</StatusDesc>
<SubStatusID/>
<SubStatusDesc/>
<ConfigDate/>
<FullfilmentDate/>
</Account>
<Account>
.........
</Account>
<ProductType>262</ProductType>
<Sortby>statusid</Sortby>
<StatusDesc>all</Status>
<SubStatusID>all</SubStatusID>
<SubStatusDesc>all</SubStatus>
<RecordsCount>18</RecordsCount>
</SiteLockAccounts>
<Command>SL_GETACCOUNTS</Command>
<MinPeriod />
- 1206 -
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
Related commands
l SL_AutoRenew
l SL_Configure
StatusDomain
Description
Definition
Get information about the status of a single domain name: registrar, expiration date, and
whether it is in your account.
Usage
Use this command when you have received an RRPCode value of 724 when attempting
to register a domain. The response for the Purchase command gives additional inform-
ation explaining the 724 code.
For other aspects of domain status, use the GetDomainStatus command for the fastest
response.
Availability
- 1207 -
Constraints
l The query returns an error if the domain does not belong to this account.
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Options are Purchase(default), Transfer

OrderType Optional 10
or Extend.


DomainName Name being statused
Registrar Returns Known, Unknown, or None.
Returns 0 if not in an eNom account, 1 if in your eNom account

InAccount
or 2 if in another eNom account.
- 1208 -
OrderID ID number of the most recent order that included this domain.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests information about domain resellerdocs.com, and requests
Query
command=statusdomain&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&responsetype=xml

Output
<DomainStatus>
<Registrar>Known</Registrar>
- 1209 -
<InAccount>1</InAccount>
<ExpDate>6/10/2019 3:56:56 PM</ExpDate>
<OrderID/>
</DomainStatus>
<Command>STATUSDOMAIN</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l GetAllDomains
l GetDomainCount
l GetDomainExp
l GetDomainInfo
l GetDomains
l GetDomainStatus
l GetExtendInfo
l GetPasswordBit
l GetRegLock
l GetRenew
l SetPassword
l SetRegLock
l SetRenew
l ValidatePassword
- 1210 -
SubAccountDomains
Description
Definition
List the domains in a subaccount.
Usage
Use this command to list the domains in a subaccount.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/resellers/subaccount-list.asp
In the list of subaccounts, click any Enter link. Clicking the X domain names link pro-
duces a similar result to using the SubAccountDomains command.
Constraints
Input parameters

- 1211 -


Account Required NNNN format. Use the GetSubAccounts 11
command to retrieve this code.
Which category of names to return. Per-

mitted values are:
iown names registered here
Tab Required ihost names that use our DNS hosting 9
progress names that are expiring or
expired
watchlist names you are interested in


Tab Category of names returned
Do names in this account include credentials of more than one

MultiRRP
registrar?
Domain-List Type Description of the category of names returned
DomainNameID Domain name ID number, from our records
NS-Status YES indicates that this domain uses our default name servers
Expiration-Date Expiration date of this domain registration
Auto-Renew Is this domain set to renew automatically?
Position in the overall list of the last domain returned with this
EndPosition
query
Number of domains in the overall list before the first domain in

PreviousRecords
this list
Number of domains in the overall list after the last domain in

NextRecords
this list
- 1212 -
OrderBy Sorting parameter for names
Result Did this query yield any names?
Position in the overall list of the first domain returne d with this
StartPosition
query
DomainCount Total number of domains in this subaccount
TotalDomainCount Total number of domains in this parent account
StartLetter First letter of the domains returned with this query

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query returns the registered (iown) domain names in the subaccount, and
Query
command=SUBACCOUNTDOMAINS&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
Account=493-yp-5836&tab=iown&responsetype=xml
- 1213 -
Output

<GetDomains>
<tab>iown</tab>
<multirrp>False</multirrp>
<domain-list type="Registered">
<domain>
<sld>subresellerdocs</sld>
<tld>com</tld>
<auto-renew>Yes</auto-renew>
</domain>
<domain>
<sld>subresellerdocs2</sld>
<tld>net</tld>
</domain>
<domain>
<sld>subresellerdocs3</sld>
<tld>info</tld>
</domain>
</domain-list>
<PreviousRecords>0</PreviousRecords>
<OrderBy />
<Result>True</Result>
<StartLetter />
</GetDomains>
- 1214 -
<Command>SUBACCOUNTDOMAINS</Command>
<Site>e</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CreateAccount
l CreateSubAccount
l GetSubAccounts
SynchAuthInfo
Description
Definition
Synchronize a domains EPP key with the Registry, and optionally email it to the regis-
trant.
Usage
Use this command to create a new EPP key, synchronize the key with the Registry, and
optionally email it to the registrant.
Availability
- 1215 -

On the General Settings page, the Email Auth Code to Registrant link calls the
SynchAuthInfo command.
Constraints
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Should we mail the EPP key to the regis-

EmailEPP Required trant of this domain name. Permitted val- 5
ues are True and False
Should we synchronize the EPP key for

this domain and make sure our records
RunSynchAutoInfo Required 5
are identical to the Registrys. Permitted
values are True and False.
- 1216 -


Returns True if EPP key has been synchronized at Registry.
InfoSynched
This parameter displays when EmailEPP=False
Returns confirmation that EPP key is emailed to registrant.

EPPEmailMessage
This parameter displays when EmailEPP=True

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query synchronizes the EPP key between the Registry and our database,
emails the EPP key to the registrant of record in our database, and sends the response
in XML format:
Query
command=SynchAuthInfo&UID=resellid&pw=resellpw&
sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&EmailEPP=True&
- 1217 -
RunSynchAutoInfo=True&ResponseType=xml

Output

<EPPEmailMessage>Email has been sent.</EPPEmailMessage>
<Command>SYNCHAUTHINFO</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug><![CDATA[ ]]></debug>
Related commands
l TP_CreateOrder
TEL_AddCTHUser
Description
Definition
This command creates a CTH account with a username, domain, zone, and simple
record.
Usage
- 1218 -
Use this command to create a new Community TelHosting (CTH) account for .tel dir-
ectory records.
Use this command to configure a .tel domain after it is registered.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/control-panel/panels/domain_tel.as-
px?tab=update&DomainNameID=152768051&sld=resellerdocs&tld=tel
If this form initially displays with all fields blank (due to a domain name transfer or push,
or when the preconfiguration information was invalid), clicking the save button calls the
TEL_AddCTHUser command.
Constraints
l The domain name must belong to this domain name account.
l The domain name must be a .tel domain.
Input parameters

Login ID for your .tel CTH account. Per-

mitted values are 6 to 32 alphanumeric
Username Required 32
characters, must start with a letter, and
must not contain spaces
- 1219 -

Password for your .tel CTH account. Per-
Password Required 32
The .tel domain name for which you are

creating a CTH account
Contact email address for this CTH

account. You can have more than one
Email Required 128
CTH account using the same email
address


ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query creates a new CTH user account, and sends the response in XML
format:
- 1220 -
Query
command=TEL_AddCTHUser&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
domainname=susantest20091128-1.tel&
username=susan1&password=susanpassword&
email=susan@enom.com&responsetype=xml
In the response, a success value true confirms that the query was successful:
Output

<tel_addcthuser>
<success>true</success>
</tel_addcthuser>
<Command>TEL_ADDCTHUSER</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>62c4ffa2-c7a0-4840-a403-be4ed-
c566f54</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l TEL_GetPrivacy
l TEL_IsCTHUser
- 1221 -
l TEL_UpdateCTHUser
l TEL_UpdatePrivacy
TEL_GetCTHUserInfo
Description
Definition
This command retrieves information on the CTH account information associated with a
domain name.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve information on the CTH account information associated
with a domain name.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/control-panel/panels/
domain_tel.aspx?tab=update&DomainNameID=152768051&sld=resellerdocs&tld=tel
The TEL_GetCTHUserInfo command populates this page.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 1222 -

The .tel domain name for which you want

CTH account information


User name for the CTH account associated with this domain
UserName
name
Email address for the CTH account associated with this

Email
domain name
Status Success status of this query

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 1223 -
Example
The following query creates a new CTH user account, and sends the response in XML
format:
Query
command=TEL_GetCTHUserInfo&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&domainname=resellerdocs.tel&responsetype=xml
In the response, a status value success confirms that the query was successful:
Output
<tel_getcthuserinfo>
<username>Susan2</username>
<email>susan@enom.com</email>
<status>success</status>
</tel_getcthuserinfo>
<Command>TEL_GETCTHUSERINFO</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>b0c88377-05c6-45b5-bef7-1f9102c7a105</Track-
ingKey>
- 1224 -
Related commands
l TEL_AddCTHUser
l TEL_GetPrivacy
l TEL_IsCTHUser
l TEL_UpdateCTHUser
l TEL_UpdatePrivacy
TEL_GetCTHUserList
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of CTH accounts.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of CTH accounts, for example, to populate a drop-
down menu.
Availability
Put a .tel domain name in the shopping cart.
https://resellertest.enom.com/cart/preconfigure.aspx
The Select an existing username link displays a dropdown menu populated by the TEL_
GetCTHUserList command.
Constraints
- 1225 -
Input parameters



Login ID for your .tel CTH account. Permitted values are 6 to
UserName
32 alphanumeric characters and must start with a letter
Password for your .tel CTH account. Permitted values are 6 to

Password
32 alphanumeric characters and must start with a letter
Contact email address for this CTH account. You can have
Email
more than one CTH account using the same email address
The .tel domain name for which you are creating a CTH
DomainName
account

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 1226 -
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of CTH account usernames and sends the response
in XML format:
Query
command=TEL_GetCTHUserList&uid=resellid&
pw=resellpw&responsetype=xml
In the response, a list of usernames and an ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query
string was successful:
Output
<tel_getcthuserlist>
<users>
<user>
<password>tester</password>
<domainname/>
</user>
<user>
<password>tester</password>
<domainname/>
</user>
<user>
<username>testviji</username>
- 1227 -
<password>testviji</password>
<email>test123@gmail.com</email>
<domainname/>
</user>
</users>
</tel_getcthuserlist>
<Command>TEL_GETCTHUSERLIST</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>280cada8-f988-4bed-b0ed-b834e610b0a1</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l TEL_AddCTHUser
l TEL_GetPrivacy
l TEL_IsCTHUser
l TEL_UpdateCTHUser
l TEL_UpdatePrivacy
TEL_GetPrivacy
Description
Definition
Retrieve the current setting for displaying private CTH contact information.
- 1228 -
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the current for displaying private CTH contact information.
Availability
The response from this command populates the Privacy Settings section on the .TEL Set-
tings page.
Constraints
Input parameters


DomainName Required the current privacy setting. Permitted 67
format is sld.tel

- 1229 -

TelWhoisType Is this CTH contact type for a natural person or a legal person.
Should this CTH contact information be published in the

TelPublishWhois
Whois?

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the privacy setting and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=TEL_GetPrivacy&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
DomainName=resellerdocs.tel&responsetype=xml
In the response, a Success value true confirms that the query executed successfully:
Output
- 1230 -

<telwhoistype>natural_person</telwhoistype>
<telpublishwhois>Y</telpublishwhois>
<Command>TEL_GETPRIVACY</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>2876f62e-8ea6-4544-9961-93f745a0c7b-
b</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l TEL_AddCTHUser
l TEL_IsCTHUser
l TEL_UpdateCTHUser
l TEL_UpdatePrivacy
TEL_IsCTHUser
Description
Definition
Check the existence of a CTH account username.
Usage
- 1231 -
Use this command to check the existence of a CTH account username.

Availability
Put a .tel domain name in the shopping cart
https://resellertest.enom.com/cart/default.aspx
Click the preconfigure link by the .tel domain name.
The Save My Settings button calls the TEL_IsCTHUser command to verify that the User-
name supplied in this form may be used with this domain name.
As a last-minute check, you may optionally run TEL_IsCTHUser a second time, imme-
diately before submitting the order, to make sure the registration doesnt fail due to a
username being taken by another customer.
Constraints
Input parameters

CTH account username you want to

check
- 1232 -


UserExists Response value for whether this user exists in our system
Response value for whether this user exists in this domain

UserExistsInAccount
name account

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query checks whether a username exists, and sends the response in XML
format:
Query
command=TEL_IsCTHUser&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
username=Example2&responsetype=xml
- 1233 -
In the response, a userexists value confirms that the query executed successfully:
Output

<tel_iscthuser>
<userexists>false</userexists>
<userexistsinaccount>false</userexistsinaccount>
</tel_iscthuser>
<Command>TEL_ISCTHUSER</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>7659c1d8-2a37-42ae-b7f7-6a88b0a7a487</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l TEL_AddCTHUser
l TEL_GetPrivacy
l TEL_UpdateCTHUser
l TEL_UpdatePrivacy
- 1234 -
EL_UpdateCTHUser
Description
Definition
Change the domain name, email address, or password associated with a CTH account.
Usage
Use this command to change the domain name, email address, or password associated
with a CTH account.
Availability
If this form contains data when first displayed, clicking the save button calls the TEL_
UpdateCTHUser command.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 1235 -

Login ID for your .tel CTH account. Per-

Username Required 32
The .tel domain name for which you are

creating a CTH account
Password for your .tel CTH account. Per-

Either Password or mitted values are 6 to 32 alphanumeric
Password 32
Email is Required characters, must start with a letter, and
Contact email address for this CTH

Either Password or account. You can have more than one
Email 128
Email is Required CTH account using the same email
address


Success Success status for execution of this query

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 1236 -
Example
The following query changes the CTH account associated with the specified domain
name, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=TEL_UpdateCTHUser&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
username=Example7&password=tester&
domainname=resellerdocs.tel&
email=john.doe@example.com&responsetype=xml
In the response, the Success value true confirms that the query was successful:
Output

<tel_updatecthuser>
</tel_updatecthuser>
<Command>TEL_UPDATECTHUSER</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>7b6e6e73-6fe3-4fe7-80fd-d9c2d47e9b87</Track-
ingKey>
- 1237 -
Related commands
l TEL_AddCTHUser
l TEL_GetPrivacy
l TEL_IsCTHUser
l TEL_UpdatePrivacy
TEL_UpdatePrivacy
Description
Definition
This command changes the privacy settings for .tel Whois contact information.
Usage
Use this command to change the privacy settings for .tel Whois contact information.
Availability
Changing the Privacy Settings and clicking save calls the TEL_UpdatePrivacy com-
mand.
Constraints
- 1238 -
Input parameters


to reset privacy settings
Contact type. Permitted values are:

natural_person (Human beings, per-
ceptible to the senses and subject to
physical laws. Public whois is optional)
TelWhoisType Required 15
legal_person (Companies, businesses,
partnerships, non-profit entities, asso-
ciations, or other types of legal con-
structs. Public whois required)
Publish the CTH contact information for

Required natural_ a natural person. Permitted values are
person; yes or no. If TelWhoisType=legal_per-
TelPublishWhois 3
not needed for son, TelPublishWhois is automatically
legal_person set to yes to comply with Registry
requirements


Success Success status of this query.
- 1239 -
ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query changes the privacy settings for a .tel domain name and sends the
Query
command=TEL_UpdatePrivacy&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
domainname=resellerdocs.tel&telwhoistype=natural_person&
telpublishwhois=no&responsetype=xml
In the response, the Success value true confirms that the query executed successfully:
Output

<Command>TEL_UPDATEPRIVACY</Command>
- 1240 -
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>6eab0016-ef6b-467e-bee6-60b45ed6a3e1</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l TEL_AddCTHUser
l TEL_GetPrivacy
l TEL_IsCTHUser
l TEL_UpdateCTHUser
TLD_AddWatchlist
Description
Definition
Add a list of domain(s) to an existing the watchlist or create new watchlist with these
domains. An empty watchlist cannot be created.
Usage
Use this command to add a list of domain(s) to an existing the watchlist or create new
watchlist with these domains. An empty watchlist cannot be created.
LIST
consist of a ListID, ListName and ListEmail.
- 1241 -
be changed.
Example:

*.ninja
.art
two.ceo ..... .....
two.ninja
.....
Operational/Logic Table:
ListID ListName ListEmail Result

No No - Error: ListID or ListName are required
Error: Email Address is required if ListName is

No Yes No
sent
Create a new LIST and add domain(s). ListID

No Yes Yes will be automatically created and returned in
the output
Yes - No Add domain(s) to specified LIST
Add domain(s) to specified LIST and update

Yes - Yes
email address
Note:
l No = input parameter is not declared
l Yes = input parameter is declared and has value
l - = input parameter could be declared or not declared. Does not affect the end res-
ult
Availability
- 1242 -
The Watch Domains button calls the TLD_AddWatchlist command.
Constraints
Input parameters

A comma-separated list of domains
Format:
blogging.ninja
*.ninja
blogging.*
International Domain Name (IDN) allows

more web users to navigate the Internet
in their preferred native language. Most
domain names are registered in ASCII
DomainList Required characters. The non-Latin scripts such 4096
as Chinese, Russian, Korean or other lan-
guages cannot be rendered in ASCII.
IDN is fully supported in PUNY Code
and URL Encoded format.
To get more information and conversion

tool for PUNY Code, check the sites
below:
- Verisign's IDN Tool: http://mct.verisign-
grs.com
- RFC 3492: http://tools.i-
- 1243 -

etf.org/html/rfc3492
List ID. See Operational/Logic table for

Conditional; conditional information Use the TLD_
ListID
default is 0 GetWatchlist with Action=GetListID com-
mand to retrieve LIST
ListName Conditional Name of the LIST (must be unique) 50
ListEmail Conditional Email address for the List 128


ID Watchlist item ID for each domain
Success Domain add status
ResultMessage Domain add message
FailCount Number of domain(s) failed to add to the Watchlist
SuccessCount Number of domain(s) successfully added to the Watchlist
TotalRecords Total number of domain(s) processed
Type Reserved for future implementation
List ID. New number will be created whenever a new LIST is

ListID
created
ListName List Name
ListEmail List Email Address

ErrCount

ErrX
- 1244 -
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query adds domain(s) to the watchlist, and requests the response in XML
format.
Query
Add to default watchlist
command=TLD_Addwatchlist&UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw&
ResponseType=XML&
DomainList=blogging.ninja,*.ninja,blogging.*&
ListID=&ListName=&ListEmail=
Create a new LIST and add domains
command=TLD_AddWatchlist&UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw&
ResponseType=XML&
domainlist=blogging.ninja,*.ninja,blogging.*&
ListID=&ListName=Customer1&ListEmail=clark@kent.com
Add to a specific LIST
command=TLD_AddWatchlist&UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw&
ResponseType=XML&
domainlist=blogging.ninja,*.ninja,blogging.*&
- 1245 -
ListID=16&ListName=&ListEmail=
Output
Add to default watchlist
<TLD_Watchlist>
<Item>
<ID>74670</ID>
<DomainName><![CDATA[ blogging.ninja ]]></DomainName>
<ResultMessage><![CDATA[ ]]></ResultMessage>
</Item>
<Item>
<ID>74671</ID>
<DomainName><![CDATA[ domain.ninja ]]></DomainName>
<ResultMessage><![CDATA[ ]]></ResultMessage>
</Item>
.....
<FailCount>0</FailCount>
<SuccessCount>3</SuccessCount>
<Type>Account</Type>
<ListID>0</ListID>
<ListName />
<ListEmail />
</TLD_Watchlist>
<Command>TLD_ADDWATCHLIST</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
- 1246 -
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
Create a new LIST and add domains
<TLD_Watchlist>
<Item>
<ID>74681</ID>
<ResultMessage><![CDATA[ ]]> </ResultMessage>
</Item>
<Item>
<ID>74682</ID>
</Item>
.....
<ListID>33</ListID>
<ListName>customer1</ListName>
<ListEmail>clark@kent.com</ListEmail>
</TLD_Watchlist>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
- 1247 -
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
Add to a specific LIST
<TLD_Watchlist>
<Item>
<ID>74698</ID>
</Item>
<Item>
<ID>74699</ID>
</Item>
.....
<ListID>33</ListID>
<ListName>customer1</ListName>
<ListEmail>superman@dailyplanet.com</ListEmail>
</TLD_Watchlist>
<Site>eNom</Site>
- 1248 -
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
Related commands
l TLD_GetCategory
l TLD_GetWatchlist
l TLD_GetTLD
l TLD_GetAgreementPage
TLD_DeleteWatchlist
Description
Definition
Delete a set of domains from a LIST or delete an entire LIST from the watchlist. Deleting
all domains in a LIST does not delete the LIST
Usage
Use this command to delete a set of domains from a LIST or delete an entire LIST from
the watchlist. Deleting all domains in a LIST does not delete the LIST
LIST
be changed.
Example:
- 1249 -

*.ninja
.art
two.ceo ..... .....
two.ninja
.....
Operational/Logic Table:
Action WatchlistItemID ListID Result

DeleteList - No Error: ListID must be supplied
Delete the LIST and all domains in

DeleteList - Yes
it
Error: WatchlistItemID must be

DeleteListItem No -
supplied
Delete WatchlistItemID(s) in the

DeleteListItem Yes No
default account (ListID=0)
Delete WatchlistItemID(s) in the

DeleteListItem Yes Yes
specified ListID
Note:
l No = input parameter is not declared
l Yes = input parameter is declared and has value
l - = input parameter could be declared or not declared. Does not affect the end res-
ult
Availability
The Delete button calls the TLD_DeleteWatchlist command.
- 1250 -
Constraints
Input parameters

Type of delete operation. Permitted val-

ues are:
Action Required 8
DeleteList
DeleteListItem
The ID for a specified LIST in the

account. See Operational/Logic table for
ListID Required conditional information. Use the TLD_
GetWatchlist with Action=GetListIDs
command to retrieve the LIST
A comma-separated list of Watch-

WatchlistItemID Conditional listItemID. Use the TLD_GetWatchlist
command to retrieve these IDs


ID WatchlistItemID for each domain name
- 1251 -
Success Success status for deleting domain name from the Watchlist
ResultMessage Message returned from the processing system
Type Reserved for future implementation
FailCount Number of domain(s) failed to add to the watchlist
SuccessCount Number of domain(s) successfully added to the Watchlist
TotalRecords Total number of domain(s) processed

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query deletes list of domain(s) or a LIST from the Watchlist, and requests
Query
Delete domain(s)
command=TLD_DeleteWatchlist&UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw&
ResponseType=XML&Action=DeleteListItem&
WatchlistIDList=73995&ListID=23
Delete LIST
- 1252 -
command=TLD_DeleteWatchlist&UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw&
ResponseType=XML&Action=DeleteList&
WatchlistIDList=&ListID=23
Output
Delete domain(s)
<TLD_Watchlist>
<Item>
<ID>73995</ID>
<DomainName>73995</DomainName>
<ResultMessage><![CDATA[ ]]></ResultMessage />
</Item>
<Action>DELETELISTITEM</Action>
<ListID>23</ListID>
</TLD_Watchlist>
<Command>TLD_DELETEWATCHLIST</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
- 1253 -
Delete LIST
<TLD_Watchlist>
<Action>DELETELISTITEM</Action>
<ListID>4</ListID>
</TLD_Watchlist>
<Command>TLD_DELETEWATCHLIST</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
Related commands
l TLD_AddWatchlist
l TLD_GetCategory
l TLD_GetWatchlist
l TLD_GetTLD
TLD_GetTLD
Description
Definition
- 1254 -
Retrieve a list of TLDs currently offered for this account.

Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of TLDs currently offered for this account.
Availability
The Browse TLDs tab calls the TLD_GetTLD command.
Constraints
Input parameters

Return a list of TLDs filtered by Primary

Category Optional 500
Category

- 1255 -

TLD name (IDN is displayed as PUNY Code).
International Domain Name (IDN) allows more web users to

navigate the Internet in their preferred native language. Most
domain names are registered in ASCII characters. The non-
Latin scripts such as Chinese, Russian, Korean or other lan-
Name guages cannot be rendered in ASCII. IDN is fully supported in
PUNY Code and URL Encoded format.
To get more information and conversion tool for PUNY Code,

check the sites below:
- Verisign's IDN Tool: http://mct.verisign-grs.com
- RFC 3492: http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3492
TLD Category. Each TLD may have more than one category.
CategoryNames The first category in this list (comma delimited format) is the
Primary
NativeIDN TLD Name in native characters
Description Description of NativeIDN
StatusID TLD Status ID
StatusDesc TLD Status Description

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully
Notes
- 1256 -
Example
The following query retrieves list of TLDs currently offered for this account, and requests
Query
command=TLD_GetTLD&UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw&
ResponseType=XML
Output
<TLD_GetTLD>
<TLD>
<Name><![CDATA[ ABOGADO ]]></Name>
<CategoryNames>Services</CategoryNames>
<NativeIDN><![CDATA[ ]]></NativeIDN>
<Description><![CDATA[ ]]></Description>
<TLDStatusDesc><![CDATA[ Awaiting Evaluation ]]
></TLDStatusDesc>
</TLD>
......<cut>......
<TLD>
<Name><![CDATA[ xn--io0a7i ]]></Name>
<CategoryNames>IDN,Technology</CategoryNames>
<NativeIDN><![CDATA[ ]]></NativeIDN>
<Description>
<![CDATA[ The string of " " means network. It is a col-
lection
of hardware components and computers interconnected by com-
munication
channels that allow sharing of resources and information.
]]>
</Description>
<TLDStatusDesc><![CDATA[ Awaiting Evaluation ]]
></TLDStatusDesc>
</TLD>
- 1257 -
</TLD_GetTLD>
<Command>TLD_GETTLD</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
Related commands
l TLD_AddWatchlist
l TLD_GetCategory
l TLD_GetWatchlist
TLD_GetWatchlist
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of domains currently in a Watchlist LIST in this account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of domains currently in a Watchlist LIST in this
account.
LIST
- 1258 -
be changed.
Example:

*.ninja
.art
one.ceo two.ceo
.education
one.ninja two.ninja
one.ceo
one.fun two.fun
one.ninja
..... .....
two.ceo
two.ninja .....
Availability
The My Watchlist tab calls the TLD_GetWatchlist command.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 1259 -

This parameter determines which result

set will be provided. If this parameter is
not declared, or has no value, the API will
return a list of all of the domains in the
Optional specified LIST. Set the parameter to
Action
default is Empty GetListIDs to retreive a list of all of the
LISTs for this account. Check the
example section see the differences. Per-
mitted values are: Empty (not declared)
GetListIDs
Return only those domain(s) belonging to

a specific LIST. Not declaring this para-
ListID Optional
meter will result in the domains returned
from the default LIST (ListID=0).

WatchID
Optional
DomainName
SLD
DomainName
TLD
TLDCategory
Optional Sorting order. Permitted values are: Asc

SortByDirection 4
default is Asc Desc

ition in the sorted list For example,
Optional
StartPosition StartPosition=26&PagingPageSize=25
default is 1
returns results 26 through 50 in the sorted
list
Optional default is Number of results to return in this

PagingPageSize
25 response
SLD Optional Filter by SLD 275
TLD Optional Filter by TLD 15
Category Optional Filter by Category 500
Filter by Domain Name. When present,

this will filter the result set according to
the text supplied. This parameter is sim-
DomainNameFilter Optional 300
ilar to using the LIKE clause in SQL to
generate a result set based on the input
string. For example, if the string is ion,
- 1260 -

the results may include mydo-
main.auction, *.auction, ion-drive.ceo,
ion-drive.*, etc.


ID Watchlist Item ID for each domain name
SLD SLD value
TLD TLD value
NativeIDN Domain name in Native IDN format
StatusID Status ID for this specific domain
StatusDesc Status description for this specific domain
SubStatusID Sub-Status ID for this specific domain
SubStatusDesc Sub-Status description for this specific domain
TLDCategory TLD Primary Category
TLDCategoryDesc TLD Category description
TLDStatusID Status ID for this specific TLD
TLDStatusDesc Status description for this specific TLD
ListID List ID
ListName List Name
ListEmail List Email Address
SortBy Sort By value
SortByDirection Sort By Direction type
StartPosition Start Position value
PagingPageSize Paging Page Size value
- 1261 -
FilterByDomainName Filter by Domain Name value
FilterBySLD Filter by SLD value
FilterByTLD Filter by TLD value
FilterByTLDCategory Filter by TLD Category value
RecordsCount Records return in one page for this request
TotalRecords Total records for this type of request
AllRecords All records for this account

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves list of domains currently added to the Watchlist in this
account, and requests the response in XML format.
Query
Get LIST domains
command=tld_getwatchlist&uid=ResellID&pw=resellpw&
responsetype=xml&pagingpagesize=2&
- 1262 -
tld=xn--nqv7f&ListID=0&Action=
Get LIST
command=tld_getwatchlist&uid=ResellID&pw=resellpw&
responsetype=xml&pagingpagesize=2&tld=&
ListID=&Action=GetListID
Output
Get Watchlist domains
<TLD_Watchlist>
<Item>
<ID>69018</ID>
<DomainName><![CDATA[ blogging.xn--nqv7f ]]></DomainName>
<SLD><![CDATA[ blogging ]]></SLD>
<TLD><![CDATA[ xn--nqv7f]]></TLD>
<NativeIDN><![CDATA[ blogging. ]]></NativeIDN>
<StatusDesc><![CDATA[ Watching ]]></StatusDesc>
<SubStatusDesc><![CDATA[ ]]></SubStatusDesc>
<TLDCategory><![CDATA[ IDN ]]></TLDCategory>
<TLDCategoryDesc><![CDATA[ ]]></TLDCategoryDesc>
<TLDStatusDesc><![CDATA[ Awaiting Evaluation ]]>
</TLDStatusDesc>
</Item>
.....
<ListID />
<ListName />
<ListEmail />
<SortBy>none</SortBy>
<SLD />
- 1263 -
<TLD>ninja</TLD>
<Category />
<DomainName />
<RecordsCount>2</RecordsCount>
<AllRecords>3023</AllRecords>
</TLD_Watchlist>
<Command>TLD_GETWATCHLIST</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
Get LIST IDs
<TLD_Watchlist>
<Item>
<ListID>0</ListID>
<ListName><![CDATA[ ]]></ListName>
<ListEmail><![CDATA[ ]]></ListEmail>
</Item>
<Item>
<ListID>18</ListID>
<ListName><![CDATA[ Customer1 ]]></ListName>
<ListEmail><![CDATA[ john@smith.com ]]></ListEmail>
</Item>
<SortByDirection>asc</SortByDirection>
- 1264 -
</TLD_Watchlist>
<Command>TLD_GETWATCHLIST</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
Related commands
l TLD_AddWatchlist
l TLD_GetCategory
l TLD_GetTLD
TLD_GetWatchlistTlds
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of Tlds currently in a Watchlist LIST in this account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of Tlds currently in a Watchlist LIST in this account.
- 1265 -
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

ApplicationFeeMin Optional Filter based on minimum Application fee
ApplicationFeeMax Optional Filter based on Maximum Application fee
DateStart Optional Filter based on Date
DateEnd Optional Filter based on Date
Return only those Tlds belonging to a spe-

cific LIST. Not declaring this parameter
ListID Optional
will result in the tlds returned from the
default LIST (ListID=0).

Optional
WatchID
DomainName
DomainName
SLD
- 1266 -

TLD
TLDCategory
Sorting order. Permitted values are:

Optional
default is Asc
Desc

ition in the sorted list For example,
Optional
StartPosition StartPosition=26&PagingPageSize=25
default is 1
returns results 26 through 50 in the sorted
list
Optional Number of results to return in this

PagingPageSize
default is 25 response
SLD Optional Filter by SLD 275
TLD Optional Filter by TLD 15
Category Optional Filter by Category 500
Permitted values
True / False
IsOpen Optional
or
0/1
RegistrationFeeMin Optional Filter based on minimum Registration fee
Filter based on Maximum Registration

RegistrationFeeMax Optional
fee


TLD TLD value
TLDCategoryDesc TLD Category description
TLDCategory TLD Primary Category
DomainCount Displays Domain count
SortBy Sort By value
- 1267 -
SortByDirection Start Position value
StartPosition Records starting position
PagingPageSize Paging size for records to display
TotalRecords Total records for this type of request
SubStatusDesc Sub-Status description for this specific domain

ErrCount

ErrX
as- is back to the client.

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves list of domains currently added to the Watchlist in this
account, and requests the response in XML format.
Query
Get LIST
command=tld_getwatchlisttlds&uid=ResellID&pw=resellpw&
responsetype=xml&pagingpagesize=2&tld=&ListID=&
Action=GetListID
Output
- 1268 -
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8" ?>

<TLD_WatchlistTlds>
<Item>
<TLD>
<![CDATA[ AGENCY ]]>
</TLD>
<TLDCategoryDesc>
<![CDATA[ Awaiting Evaluation ]]>
</TLDCategoryDesc>
<DomainCount>
<![CDATA[ 1 ]]>
</DomainCount>
</Item>
<Item>
<TLD>
<![CDATA[ NINJA ]]>
</TLD>
<TLDCategoryDesc>
</TLDCategoryDesc>
<DomainCount>
<![CDATA[ 1 ]]>
</DomainCount>
</Item>
<Item>
<TLD>
<![CDATA[ PHOTOS ]]>
</TLD>
<TLDCategoryDesc>
</TLDCategoryDesc>
<DomainCount>
<![CDATA[ 1 ]]>
</DomainCount>
</Item>
<Item>
<TLD>
<![CDATA[ ACTOR ]]>
</TLD>
<TLDCategoryDesc>
- 1269 -
</TLDCategoryDesc>
<DomainCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</DomainCount>
</Item>
<Item>
<TLD>
<![CDATA[ AIRFORCE ]]>
</TLD>
<TLDCategoryDesc>
</TLDCategoryDesc>
<DomainCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</DomainCount>
</Item>
</TLD_WatchlistTlds>
<Command>TLD_GETWATCHLISTTLDS</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<TrackingKey>89271891-f58d-4920-8b0d-ef0ce-
f6b8b6a</TrackingKey>
<debug/>
- 1270 -
Related commands
l TLD_AddWatchlist
l TLD_GetCategory
l TLD_GetTLD
TLD_Overview
Description
Definition
Retrieve a detailed overview of a TLD.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a detailed overview of a TLD.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/help/faq-tlds.aspx
Constraints
Input parameters
- 1271 -

TLD Required Top level domain 500


ID TLD identification (if applicable)
Name TLD name
NativeIDN TLD name in native language
Description TLD description
TimeFrameDescription TLD timeframe description (pre-order phase)
Requirements TLD requirements
DrawNumbers TLD drawnumbers (pre-order phase)
Categories TLD categories
QueueInfo Collection of queue(s) information
StatusID Queue status ID
StatusDesc Queue status description
StatusAdditional Queue status sub-description
QID Queue ID
Phase Queue name or phase
DateStart Queue start date
DateEnd Queue end date
IsActive Is queue open for registration?
ApplicationFee Queue application fee
ApplicationFeeRefundable Is queue application fee refundable?
- 1272 -
RegistrationFee Queue registration fee
RegistrationFeeRefundable Is queue registration fee refundable?
PopularDomains Popular domain(s) suggestion based on this TLD
SimilarNewTLDs Similar new TLD(s) suggestion based on this TLD
SimilarTLDs Similar existing TLD(s) suggestion based on this TLD

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves detailed overview of TLD, and requests the response in
XML format.
Query
command=TLD_Overview&UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw&
ResponseType=XML&TLD=ninja
Output
- 1273 -

<TLD_Overview>
<ID />
<Name>ninja</Name>
<NativeIDN><![CDATA[]]></NativeIDN>
<Description><![CDATA[For the self-professed masters of the
world, .NINJA provides a fun, unique, and flexible TLD
option. Use it as blog.NINJA, homeimprovement.NINJA, home-
cooking.NINJA, and more. .NINJA can also be used for more
traditional applications of the word, to promote ninja
books, comics, movies, and cultural references, such as com-
ics.NINJA. Whatever the use, .NINJA is a memorable domain
namespace guaranteed to help any business, group, or indi-
vidual using it make a lasting impression.]]>
</Description>
<TimeFrameDescription><![CDATA[This new TLD is not yet
available, but it is expected to open for registration
Spring of 2013. Please sign up to watch this new gTLD and
we will notify you when registration opens. ]]>
</TimeFrameDescription>
<Requirements />
<DrawNumbers>856</DrawNumbers>
<Categories>Featured,gTLD,Novelty</Categories>
<QueueInfo>
<Queue>
<StatusDesc>Evaluation Passed</StatusDesc>
<StatusAdditional>
All applications for TLD have passed ICANNs evaluation.
</StatusAdditional>
<QID />
<Phase>Evaluation Passed</Phase>
<DateStart />
<DateEnd />
<IsActive>false</IsActive>
<ApplicationFee></ApplicationFee>
<ApplicationFeeRefundable />
<RegistrationFee></RegistrationFee>
<RegistrationFeeRefundable />
</Queue>
</QueueInfo>
- 1274 -
<PopularDomains><![CDATA[car, computer, design, management,

training,
yourname, yourcompany, info]]>
</PopularDomains>
<SimilarNewTLDs><![CDATA[.guru, .help, .expert]]></Sim-
ilarNewTLDs>
<SimilarTLDs><![CDATA[none]]></SimilarTLDs>
</TLD_Overview>
<Command>TLD_OVERVIEW</Command>
<Server>sjl0vwresell_t1</Server>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<TrackingKey>5e84a3c3-f928-4076-9239-c8c2255ca4ee</Track-
ingKey>
<debug/>
Related commands
l Queue_GetInfo
l Queue_GetDomains
l Queue_GetOrders
l GetAgreementPage
- 1275 -
TM_Check
Description
Definition
Check a trademark claim for a domain name from Trademark Clearinghouse (TMCH).
Usage
Use this command to check a trademark claim for a domain name from Trademark Clear-
inghouse (TMCH).
The Lookup Key returns a value when 1 (one) or more claim(s) exist for the specified
domain name.
The key value is valid for up to 24 hours. The countdown starts immediately after this
command (TM_Check) is successfully executed.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters
- 1276 -


SLD Required 20
enom in enom.com)

ResponseType Optional
are Text (default), HTML, or XML 4

Lookup Key value. Valid for up to 24 hours. The countdown
LookupKey starts immediately after this command is successfully
executed

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query checks a trademark claim for test---validate.claimsgatwo domain
name from Trademark Clearinghouse (TMCH), and requests the response in XML
- 1277 -
format.
Query
UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw&ResponseType=xml&
Command=TM_Check&SLD=test---validate&tld=claimsgatwo
Output

<LookupKey>2014011000/6/e/2/bi1ZaGOpzse22CALy</LookupKey>
<Command>TM_CHECK</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<TrackingKey>96f0dd31-9692-4405-b960-aa120a815a4a</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l TM_Check
l TM_GetNotice
l TM_UpdateCart
- 1278 -
TM_GetNotice
Description
Definition
Retrieve an itemized list of Trademark Clearinghouse (TMCH) Claims for an SLD using
a Lookup Key.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve an itemized list of Trademark Clearinghouse (TMCH)
Claims for an SLD using a Lookup Key.
tcnID (Trademark Clearinghouse Claims Notification ID) is valid for 24 to 48 hours. The
countdown starts immediately after TP_Check command is successfully executed.
Availability
Constraints
Input parameters

- 1279 -


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
A unique Lookup Key for a domain. Use

the TM_Check command to retrieve the
value.
LookupKey Required 32
Please use URL Encoding to avoid incor-
rect data being sent.


tcnID TMCH Claims Notification ID
tcnStart TMCH Claims start date (UTC)
tcnExpDate TMCH Claims expiration date (UTC)
SLD Second level domain
MarkName Trademark name
Holder Entitlement Holder entitlement
Org Organization name
Street Address
City City
State State
ZipCode Postal code
Country Country
Email Email address
Jur Desc Jurisdiction description
Class Desc Class description
GoodsAndServices Goods and Services name
- 1280 -
ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves an itemized list of Trademark Clearinghouse (TMCH)
Claims for an SLD using a Lookup Key, and requests the response in XML format.
Query
UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw&SLD=test---validate&
ResponseType=xml&Command=TM_GetNotice&
LookupKey=2013112100%2f4%2f1%2fd%2fQdw2tSZ9X6FSqUH
Output

<TMNotice>
<tcnID>83ee89dc0000000000000020012</tcnID>
<tcnStartDate>2013-11-21T00:00:00.0Z</tcnStartDate>
<tcnExpDate>2013-11-23T00:00:00.0Z</tcnExpDate>
<Sld>test---validate</Sld>
<Claims>
- 1281 -
<Claim>
<MarkName>Test & Validate</MarkName>
<Holder Entitlement="owner">
<Org>Test Organization</Org>
<Address>
<Street>101 West Arques Avenue</Street>
<City>Sunnyvale</City>
<State>CA</State>
<ZipCode>10023-3241</ZipCode>
</Address>
<Email>info@example.example</Email>
</Holder>
<Jur Desc="United States of America" Country="US" />
<Class Desc="Musical instruments. " Num="15" />
<GoodsAndServices>guitar</GoodsAndServices>
</Claim>
<Claim>
<MarkName>Test & Validate</MarkName>
<Holder Entitlement="owner">
<Org>Test Organization</Org>
<Address>
<Street>101 West Arques Avenue</Street>
<City>Sunnyvale</City>
<State>CA</State>
<ZipCode>10023-3241</ZipCode>
</Address>
<Email>info@example.example</Email>
</Holder>
<Jur Desc="United States of America" Country="US" />
<Class Desc="Precious metals and their alloys and goods
in precious metals or coated therewith, not included
in other classes; jewellery, precious stones; horological
and chronometric instruments. " Num="14" />
<GoodsAndServices>Musical instruments</GoodsAndServices>
</Claim>
</TMNotice>
<Command>TM_GetNotice</Command>
- 1282 -
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
Related commands
l TM_Check
l TM_GetNotice
l TM_UpdateCart
TM_UpdateCart
Description
Definition
Acknowledge and record the date time for a Trademark Clearinghouse (TMCH) Claims
ID for a domain in the shopping cart.
Usage
Use this command to acknowledge and record the date time for a Trademark Clear-
inghouse (TMCH) Claims ID a domain in the shopping cart.
Availability
- 1283 -
Constraints
Input parameters


SLD Required Second Level Domain 20
Trademark Claims notification ID. Use

tcnID Required the TM_GetNotice command to retrieve 32
the value
Trademark Claims expiration date (UTC)

tcnExpDate Required 16
The date and time when the registrant

tcnAcceptDate Required acknowledged the Trademark Claims 16
Notice


Success Update status
- 1284 -
ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query acknowledges and records the date time for a Trademark Clear-
inghouse (TMCH) Claims ID for a domain in the shopping cart, and requests the
Query
UID=ResellID&PW=resellpw&ResponseType=xml&
Command=TM_Notify&SLD=test---validate&
tcnID=bbbf6a2f0000000000000031553&
tcnAcceptDate=2014-01-10T08:00:00.0Z
Output

<Command>TM_UpdateCart</Command>
- 1285 -
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
ingKey>
Related commands
l TM_Check
l TM_GetNotice
l TM_UpdateCart
TP_CancelOrder
Description
Definition
Cancel a transfer order that has been submitted by eNom, but not yet processed by the
Registry.
Usage
Use this command to cancel the parts of a transfer order that has been submitted by us,
but not yet processed by the Registry (there is an interval of approximately 5 days
between the two events).
Availability
- 1286 -

https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/TransferStatus.asp?transferorderid=445425
On the Transfer Order Detail page, the Cancel This Order link calls the TP_CancelOrder
command.
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/TransferOrderReview.asp?
TransferOrderID=445428&OrderType=Auto+Verification&RegistrantFirstName=&
RegistrantLastName=
On the Pending orders page, the cancel button calls the TP_CancelOrder command.
Constraints
l The transfer order must be valid and must belong to this account.
l A transfer order can be cancel only for domains that have a TransferOrderDetail
StatusID of 0, 9, 10,11, 12, 13, 28, or 29. Use TP_GetOrderDetail to retrieve the
statuses of each domain in the order.
Input parameters

Transfer order ID number. To retrieve

TransferOrderID Required this value, use the TP_GetOrder- 10
Statuses command.

- 1287 -

Success Returns True if transfer request was successfully cancelled

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l To be eligible for cancellation, each domain must be in one of the following
statuses. Retrieve an orders status by calling TP_GetOrder. Eligible Trans-
ferOrderDetail StatusIDs:
l 0 Transfer request created - awaiting fax
l 9 Awaiting auto verification of transfer request
l 10 Unable to retrieve current domain contacts from UWhois
l 11 Auto verification of transfer request initiated
l 12 Awaiting for auto transfer string validation
l 13 Domain awaiting transfer initiation
l 28 Fax received - awaiting registrant verification
l 29 Awaiting manual fax verification.
Example
The following query requests that transfer order ID 445413 be cancelled, and requests
Query
- 1288 -
command=TP_CancelOrder&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
transferOrderID=445413&responsetype=xml
In the response, the return value True for the Success parameter confirms the successful
cancellation of the order:
Output

<Command>TP_CANCELORDER</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l PushDomain
l TP_CreateOrder
l TP_GetOrder
l TP_GetOrderDetail
l TP_GetOrderReview
l TP_ResubmitLocked
l TP_SubmitOrder
l UpdatePushList
- 1289 -
TP_CreateOrder
Description
Definition
Transfer domains into an account. Accepts Fax and AutoVerification order types.
Usage
Use this command to create an order to transfer domains from another registrar to eNom
or one of its resellers.
You can also use this command to create but not submit a transfer order, using the
PreConfig parameter.
HTTPS protocol.
When you transfer a .eu or .be domain name from another registrar, we recommend that
you always provide Registrant contact information that is separate from Billing contact
information; dont use the same as Billing default. Tip: If the Billing and Registrant con-
tact information are the same, we recommend changing the use or spelling of abbre-
viations in the street address to help our system recognize that it needs to create multiple
contacts. Separating the Registrant and Billing information makes it easier to update
Registrant contact information in the future.
Premium Domain
A unique, memorable or noteworthy name might be considered as a premium domain.
This type of domain will be more expensive depending on the name and TLD. If the TP_
CreateOrder command returns the error "CustomerSuppliedPrice is required",then this
domain is considered as a premium domain. The exact price for this domain must be
declared in the parameter CustomerSuppliedPrice. Use the PE_GetPremiumPricing
command to retrieve this price.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/TransferNew.asp
On the transfer a name page, the next button calls the TP_CreateOrder command.
- 1290 -
Constraints
l All domain names in the order must be in top-level domains supported by this regis-
trar.
l To transfer EPP names, the query must include the authorization key from the
Registrar.
l When using the Fax order type, the registrant contact information must match the
current Whois registrant.
Input parameters

Set PreConfig=1 to create, but not

send, the order at this time. Using
PreConfig=1 allows you to use TP_
UpdateOrderDetail to modify
Optional; default
PreConfig DomainPassword, Lock, Renew, 1
is 0
contacts, and extended attributes
before submitting the order. When
you are ready to submit the order,
call TP_SubmitOrder.
Permitted values are Fax or

OrderType Required 20
Autoverification
For premium domain(s), the exact

price for this domain must be
CustomerSuppliedPrice Optional declared in this parameter. Use the 8
PE_GetPremiumPricing command
to retrieve the price.
- 1291 -

The number of domain names to be
submitted on the order. This num-
DomainCount Required 4
ber must match the actual number
of names submitted.

SLDX X=1 to DomainCount Required 63
TLDX Required Top-level domain name (extension) 15
EPP TLDs Current (losing) regis-

AuthInfoX Required 20
trars authorization key
Set a domain access password on

DomainPassword Optional 16
the domain name
Set Lock=1 to turn on Regis-

Lock Optional 1
trarLock option
Set Renew=1 to turn on Auto-

Renew Optional 1
Renew option
Authorization string for automated

AuthString Optional transfer order entries (approved 100
accounts only)
Optional for Set UseContacts=1 to transfer

TLDs that do not existing Whois contacts with a
require extended domain that does not require exten-
UseContacts attributes; ded attributes. Set UseContacts=0 1
Required TLDs if you want to supply new contacts,
that require exten- or when the Registry is one that
ded attributes requires extended attributes.
Required for Extended attributes, required for

TLDs that use some country code TLDs. You can
ExtendedAttributes extended attrib- retrieve a list of required extended n/a
utes, when attributes for any TLD using the
UseContacts =0 GetExtAttributes command.
Optional;
RegistrantAddress1 Required for Fax Registrant address 60
orders
Optional
RegistrantAddress2 Required Fax Registrant additional address info 60
orders
Optional
RegistrantCity Required for Fax Registrant city 60
orders
- 1292 -

Optional;
RegistrantCountry Required for Fax Registrant country 60
orders
Optional;
RegistrantEmailAddress Required for Fax Registrant email address 128
orders

format is +Coun-
the + is URLencoded as a plus sign
(%2B). .
Optional;
RegistrantFirstName Required for Fax Registrant first name 60
orders
Optional;
RegistrantLastName Required for Fax Registrant last name 60
orders
Optional;
RegistrantOrganizationName Required for Fax Registrant organization 60
orders

Optional;
RegistrantPhone Required for Fax 20
orders
characters and the + is URLen-
coded as a plus sign (%2B). .
Required .org
names when you
RegistrantPostalCode supply new Registrant postal code 16
Registrant inform-
ation
Registrant state or province choice:

RegistrantStateProvinceChoice
Optional S state 1
P province
UseCreditCard Optional for Permitted values are yes and no. 3
- 1293 -

The credit card supplied in this
query string is charged only if
resellers who use UseCreditCard=yes. If this param
our credit card is omitted or if UseCreditCard=no,
processing AND the account balance rather than the
want to charge credit card is debited for this trans-
this transaction action. This is true even if the query
to the credit card string includes all the Registrant
included in this contact and credit card information.
query string When you pass credit card inform-
ation with this command, you must
use the secure HTTPS protocol.

Required our CC in fraud checking, as part of our
EndUserIP 15
processing order processing service. Use
format NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
Credit card type. Permitted values

Required our CC
CardType are Visa, Mastercard, AmEx, Dis- 20
processing
cover
Required our CC
processing
Required our CC Expiration month of the credit card,

processing in format MM

CreditCardExpYear 4
Required our CC
processing
Required our CC
processing
Required our CC
processing
Optional for our

CC processing
Optional for our

CC processing
Credit card billing country. Two-

Required our CC
CCCountry character country code is a per- 40
processing
mitted format
CCZip Required our CC Credit card billing postal code 60
- 1294 -

processing

format is +Coun-
Optional for our
CCPhone CountryCode and PhoneNumber 20
CC processing
the + is URL- encoded as a plus
sign (%2B).
Required our CC Amount to charge this credit card.

ChargeAmount 6
processing Required format is DD.cc

Optional in all
ResponseType ues are Text (default), HTML, or 4
cases
XML.

TransferOrderID Transfer order number.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 1295 -
Notes
l Example of SLD and TLD params:
SLD1=first SLD
TLD1=first TLD
SLD2=second SLD
TLD2=secondTLD
l Additional params for contact information can be passed by replacing Registrant in
the param names above with Tech, Admin or AuxBilling.
l If UseContacts is set =1 and contact information is passed in the URL, current
Whois contacts are transferred and preconfigured contacts (passed in the URL) are
ignored.
l Automatic transfer of Whois information is available only for the largest registrars.
l An OrderType of Fax requires a signed fax to process the order, an OrderType of
Autoverification uses an electronic verification process to authorize and initiate the
transfer.
Example
The following query requests the creation of an autoverification transfer order, to transfer
domains resellerdocs2.net and resellerdocs3.info, and requests the response in XML
format:
Query
command=TP_CreateOrder&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
orderType=AutoVerification&sld1=resellerdocs2&
tld1=net&AuthInfo1=ros8enQi&sld2=resellerdocs3&tld2=info&
AuthInfo2=pkv7ihRb& domaincount=2&responsetype=xml
The response confirms the successful creation of transfer order 445413, and gives
details of the transfer:
Output
- 1296 -

<transferorder>
<authamount>17.90</authamount>
<sld>resellerdocs2</sld>
<tld>net</tld>
<price>8.95</price>
<tld>info</tld>
<price>8.95</price>
</transferorder>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
- 1297 -
Related commands
l PushDomain
l SynchAuthInfo
l TP_CancelOrder
l TP_GetOrder
l TP_GetOrderDetail
l TP_GetOrderReview
l TP_GetTLDInfo
l TP_ResendEmail
l TP_ResubmitLocked
l TP_SubmitOrder
l UpdatePushList
TP_GetDetailsByDomain
Description
Definition
Get transfer order information for a domain using sld.tld.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve status information on one domain name that is in the pro-
cess of transferring.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/TransferStatus.asp?transferorderid=445431
- 1298 -
On the Transfer Order Detail page, one row of the Domain Name table returns the same
information as one query using the TP_GetDetailsByDomain command.
Constraints
l The domain name must be in a transfer order that belongs to this account.
Input parameters
paramname=paramvalue &nextparamname=nextparamvalue


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


Number of transfer orders that have been submitted for this
OrderCount
domain.
OrderIDX Transfer order detail number. Indexed X when Respon-

X=1 to OrderCount seType=Text or HTML.
The date the order was submitted. Indexed X when Respon-

OrderDateX
- 1299 -
TransferOrderDetail status ID -- a number that indicates the
StatusIDX status of this domain in the transfer process. See Notes.
TransferOrderDetail status descriptiona text description of the

StatusDescX status of this domain in the transfer process. See Notes.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l TransferOrderDetail StatusID is the status of this domain in the transfer process:
l 0=Transfer request created - awaiting fax
l 5=Transferred successfully
l 9=Awaiting auto verification of transfer request
l 10=Unable to retrieve current domain contacts from UWhois
l 11=Auto verification of transfer request initiated
l 12=Awaiting for auto transfer string validation
l 13=Domain awaiting transfer initiation
l 14=Domain transfer initiated and awaiting approval
l 15=Canceled - cannot obtain domain contacts from UWhois
l 16=Canceled - domain contacts did not respond to verification e-mail
l 17=Canceled - domain contacts did not approve transfer of domain
l 18=Canceled - domain validation string is invalid
l 19=Canceled - Whois information provided does not match current registrant
l 20=Canceled - Domain is currently not registered and cannot be transferrred
l 21=Canceled - Domain is already registered in account and cannot be trans-
ferred
l 22=Canceled - Domain is locked at current registrar
l 23=Canceled - Transfer already initiated for this domain
- 1300 -
l 24=Canceled - Unable to transfer due to unknown error

l 25=Canceled - Transfer rejected by losing registrar
l 26=Canceled - Transfer authorization fax not received
l 27=Canceled by customer
l 28=Fax received - awaiting registrant verification
l 29=Awaiting manual fax verification
l 30=Canceled - Domain name is invalid or is Invalid for Transfers
l 35=Transfer request not yet submitted.
Example
The following query requests transfer information for resellerdocs2.net, and requests the
Query
command=TP_GetDetailsByDomain&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
sld=resellerdocs2&tld=net&responsetype=xml
The response confirms that resellerdocs2.net is part of transfer order ID 445413, and
gives current status of that order:
Output
<TransferOrder>
<statusdesc>Canceled - Invalid EPP/authorization key -
Please contact current registrar to obtain correct
key</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
key</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
- 1301 -
<TransferOrder>
key</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
key</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
key</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
key</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
key</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
- 1302 -
key</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
key</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
key</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
<statusdesc>Canceled - cannot obtain domain contacts from
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
- 1303 -
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
- 1304 -
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
- 1305 -
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
- 1306 -
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
UWhois</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
<statusdesc>Canceled - domain contacts did not respond to
verification e-mail</statusdesc>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
</TransferOrder>
<TransferOrder>
- 1307 -
</TransferOrder>
<Command>TP_GETDETAILSBYDOMAIN</Command>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>c3f152ab-e92c-4de5-8193-1898f91a6b-
f9</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l PushDomain
l TP_CancelOrder
l TP_CreateOrder
l TP_GetOrder
l TP_GetOrderDetail
l TP_GetOrderReview
l TP_ResendEmail
l TP_ResubmitLocked
l TP_SubmitOrder
l UpdatePushList
- 1308 -
TP_GetOrder
Description
Definition
Get a list of domains in a single transfer order.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve status information on each item in a transfer order.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/TransferStatus.asp
On the transfer a name page, clicking a link in the Transfer Order ID column calls the
TP_GetOrder command.
Constraints
l The transfer order ID must be valid.
l The transfer order must have originated from this account.
Input parameters

- 1309 -

Transfer order ID number. You can

TransferOrderID Required retrieve this number by calling the TP_ 10
GetOrderStatuses command.


TransferOrderID Transfer order number
OrderDate Date the order was entered
OrderTypeID Type ID of order
OrderTypeDesc Type of order
StatusID Status ID of order. See Notes.
StatusDesc Status description of order. See Notes.
AuthAmount Charge amount for this order
TransferOrderDetailID Transfer order detail number
Price Cost of the name transfer
UseContacts Use original contacts or not

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 1310 -
Notes
format, send ResponseType=HTMLor ResponseType=XML in your request.
l TransferOrder StatusID:
l 0 Transfer request has been made
l 1 Fax has been received
l 2 Order canceled
l 3 Order complete
l 4 Processing
l 5 Order not submitted
l TransferOrderDetail StatusID:
l 1 WhoIs information matches
l 2 Canceled due to WhoIs error
l 3 Pending due to domain status
l 4 Canceled due to domain status
l 5 Transferred and paid successfully
l 6 Transfer incomplete - charge problem
l 7 Frozen due to charge problem
l 8 NSI rejected transfer
l 14 Domain transfer initiated and awaiting approval
l 15 Canceled - cannot obtain domain contacts from UWhois
l 16 Canceled - domain contacts did not respond to verification e-mail
l 17 Canceled - domain contacts did not approve transfer of domain
l 18 Canceled - domain validation string is invalid
l 19 Canceled - Whois information provided does not match current registrant
l 20 Canceled - Domain is currently not registered and cannot be transferred
l 21 Canceled - Domain is already registered in account and cannot be trans-
ferred
l 22 Canceled - Domain is locked at current registrar, or is not yet 60 days old
l 23 Canceled - Transfer already initiated for this domain
l 24 Canceled - Unable to transfer due to unknown error
l 25 Canceled - The current registrar has rejected transfer (please contact
them for details)

l 26 Canceled - Transfer authorization fax not received
l 27 Canceled by customer
- 1311 -

l 29 Awaiting manual fax verification
l 30 Canceled - Domain name is invalid or is Invalid for Transfers
l 31 Canceled - Domain is currently undergoing transfer by another Registrar
l 32 Canceled - Invalid EPP/authorization key - Please contact current regis-
trar to obtain correct key
l 33 Canceled - Cannot transfer domain from name-only account
l 34 Unable to complete transfer. Transfers must include a change in registrar.
l 35 Transfer request not yet submitted
l 36 Canceled - Account is not authorized to perform domain transfers
l 37 Canceled - Domain was not retagged or not retagged in time by losing
registrar
l 45 Order cancelled
Example
The following query requests transfer information for transfer order ID 445413, and
Query
command=TP_GetOrder&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
TransferOrderID=445413&responsetype=xml
The response provides information on transfer order ID 445413:

Output

<transferorder>
<authamount>17.90</authamount>
- 1312 -
<tld>net</tld>
<price>8.95</price>
<tld>info</tld>
<price>8.95</price>
</transferorder>
<Command>TP_GETORDER</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l PushDomain
l TP_CancelOrder
l TP_CreateOrder
l TP_GetOrderDetail
l TP_GetOrderReview
l TP_ResubmitLocked
l TP_SubmitOrder
- 1313 -
l UpdatePushList
TP_GetOrderDetail
Description
Definition
Get information for a single domain on a transfer order.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a long list of information on a single domain that is in the
process of transferring.
Availability
Constraints
l The transfer order detail ID must belong to a transfer order created under this
account.
l Input parameters


- 1314 -

Transfer order detail number returned by
TransferOrderDetailID Required 10
calling TP_GetOrder.


SLD Second level name
TLD Top level name
Lock Lock status of the name
Renew Renew status of the name
DomainPassword Password to be set for the name
StatusID Status ID of this order. See Notes.
StatusDesc Status description of this order. See Notes.
Price Charge amount for this order
UseContacts Use original contacts or not

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 1315 -
l TransferOrderDetail StatusID and StatusDesc:
l 1 WhoIs information matches
l 2 Canceled due to WhoIs error
l 3 Pending due to domain status
l 4 Canceled due to domain status
l 5 Transferred and paid successfully
l 6 Transfer incomplete - charge problem
l 7 Frozen due to charge problem
l 8 NSI rejected transfer
l 14 Domain transfer initiated and awaiting approval
l 15 Canceled - cannot obtain domain contacts from UWhois
l 16 Canceled - domain contacts did not respond to verification e-mail
l 17 Canceled - domain contacts did not approve transfer of domain
l 18 Canceled - domain validation string is invalid
l 19 Canceled - Whois information provided does not match current registrant
l 20 Canceled - Domain is currently not registered and cannot be transferred
l 21 Canceled - Domain is already registered in account and cannot be trans-
ferred
l 22 Canceled - Domain is locked at current registrar, or is not yet 60 days old
l 23 Canceled - Transfer already initiated for this domain
l 24 Canceled - Unable to transfer due to unknown error
l 25 Canceled - The current registrar has rejected transfer (please contact
them for details)

l 26 Canceled - Transfer authorization fax not received
l 27 Canceled by customer
l 29 Awaiting manual fax verification
l 30 Canceled - Domain name is invalid or is Invalid for Transfers
l 31 Canceled - Domain is currently undergoing transfer by another Registrar
l 32 Canceled - Invalid EPP/authorization key - Please contact current regis-
trar to obtain correct key

l 33 Canceled - Cannot transfer domain from name-only account
l 34 Unable to complete transfer. Transfers must include a change in registrar.
l 35 Transfer request not yet submitted
l 36 Canceled - Account is not authorized to perform domain transfers
- 1316 -
l 37 Canceled - Domain was not retagged or not retagged in time by losing

registrar
l 45 Order cancelled
Example
The following query requests information on transfer order detail (one item in a transfer
order) ID 301770, and requests the response in XML format:
Query
command=TP_GetOrderDetail&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
TransferOrderDetailID=301770&responsetype=xml
The response indicates that tranfer order detail ID 301770 is for the transfer of domain
resellerdocs2.net, and provides details of the order:
Output

<tld>net</tld>
<lock>True</lock>
<renew>False</renew>
<domainpassword />
<price>8.95</price>
<ordertype />
<contacts>
<Registrant>None</Registrant>
<AuxBilling>None</AuxBilling>
<Tech>None</Tech>
<Admin>None</Admin>
<Billing>
- 1317 -
<BillingPartyID>{BB4A2DE1-6485-45CB-A4FC-EE39BA0C1629}
</BillingPartyID>
<BillingAddress1>111 Main Street</BillingAddress1>
<BillingAddress2 />
<BillingE-
<BillingFax>+1.5555555556</BillingFax>
ganizationName>
<auxID />
<regID />
</Billing>
</contacts>
<Command>TP_GETORDERDETAIL</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l PushDomain
l TP_CancelOrder
l TP_CreateOrder
l TP_GetOrder
- 1318 -
l TP_GetOrderReview
l TP_ResendEmail
l TP_ResubmitLocked
l TP_SubmitOrder
l UpdatePushList
TP_GetOrderReview
Description
Definition
Retrieve information on a transfer order.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve information on a transfer order a request originated by
you to transfer a name into your account.
This command differs from the TP_GetOrderDetail command in that TP_GetOrderDetail
retrieves a larger set of information, including the status of the order and detailed contact
information.
Availability
Constraints
l The transfer order must have originated from this account.
Input parameters
- 1319 -

Order ID number that was returned when

you originated your transfer. You can
TransferOrderID Required 7
also retrieve this number using the TP_
GetOrderStatuses command.
OrderType Required Permitted value is Transfer 8


TransferOrderID ID number of the transfer order
OrderType Type of the order
TransferOrderDetailID Transfer order detail ID number, from our records
Price that will be charged to this account if the transfer is suc-

Price
cessful
Lock Registrar lock setting that was specified in the transfer order
Renew Auto-renew setting that was specifie d in the transfer order
DomainPassword Domain password, if one was specified in the transfer order
UseContacts Use this accounts default contacts
EPP Key associated with this domain. Some TLDs require this
AuthInfo
code to authorize a transfer
RRProcessor RRProcessor we use
- 1320 -
TransferOrderDetailCount Number of domain names in this order
TransferTotalPrice Total charges if all domains in this order transfer successfully
Yes indicates we have not yet received the EPP key (author-
ization code) for at least one domain in this order. If you use the
TP_CreateOrder command to begin an order, then allow cus-
AuthInfoStillRequired
tomers to supply authorization codes on a separate page
before using TP_SubmitOrder, you would use this value to
determine whether to display the auth code page.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests details on transfer order 465681 and sends the response
in XML format:
Query
command=TP_GetOrderReview&uid=resellid&
pw=resellpw&TransferOrderID=175623473&OrderType=Transfer
&responsetype=xml
- 1321 -
Output

<ordertype>Transfer</ordertype>
<transferorderreview>
<sld>transferdomain</sld>
<tld>com</tld>
<price>8.95</price>
<lock>True</lock>
<renew>True</renew>
<domainpassword />
<authinfo />
<RRProcessor>Reseller Documents Inc.</RRProcessor>
<transfertotalprice>8.95</transfertotalprice>
<authinfostillrequired>No</authinfostillrequired>
</transferorderreview>
<Command>TP_GETORDERREVIEW</Command>
<Site>e</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
- 1322 -
Related commands
l PushDomain
l TP_CancelOrder
l TP_CreateOrder
l TP_GetOrder
l TP_GetOrderDetail
l TP_ResubmitLocked
l TP_SubmitOrder
l UpdatePushList
TP_GetOrdersByDomain
Description
Definition
Retrieve transfer information for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to list a history and status of transfer orders for a domain name.
Availability
Constraints
- 1323 -
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


Number of transfer orders that have been submitted for this
OrderCount
domain.
TransferOrderIDX Transfer order detail number. Indexed X when Respon-

X=1 to OrderCount seType=Text or HTML.
The account this transfer order is in. Indexed X when Respon-

LoginIDX
The date the order was submitted. Indexed X when Respon-

OrderDateX
Current status of the order. Indexed X when Respon-

OrderStatusX
TransferOrder StatusID number. Options are:

0 New
1 Authorization Succeeded
StatusIDX 2 Authorization Failed
3 Processing
4 Order queued
5 Ready for Billing
- 1324 -
6 Order complete
7 Order canceled.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests transfer order information for domain name reseller-
docs2.net, and requests the response in XML format:
Query
command=TP_GetOrdersByDomain&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
sld=resellerdocs2&tld=net&responsetype=xml
The response indicates that resellerdocs2.net is in transfer order ID 445413, initiated by

account resellid:
Output

- 1325 -
<TransferOrder>
<loginid>resellid</loginid>
<orderstatus>Processing</orderstatus>
</TransferOrder>
<Command>TP_GETORDERSBYDOMAIN</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l PushDomain
l TP_CancelOrder
l TP_CreateOrder
l TP_GetOrder
l TP_GetOrderDetail
l TP_GetOrderReview
l TP_ResubmitLocked
l TP_SubmitOrder
l UpdatePushList
TP_GetOrderStatuses
Description
Definition
- 1326 -
Get a list of orders including Closed for the last 6 months.

Usage
Use this command to list all transfer orders for an account ID.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/Transfers.asp
On the transfer a name page, the Click here to view existing transfer orders link calls the
TP_GetOrderStatuses command.
Constraints
Input parameters
command=nameofcommand& uid=yourloginid&pw=yourpassword&

IncludeClosedOrders Optional Set =1 to return closed orders in the list. 1

- 1327 -

TransferOrderID Transfer order number
OrderDate Date the order was entered
OrderTypeID Type ID of order
OrderTypeDesc Type of order
Status ID of transfer order. Options: 0 Transfer request has

StatusID been made 1 Fax has been received 2 Order canceled 3 Order
complete 4 Processing 5 Order not submitted
Status description of transfer order. See text descriptions of

StatusDesc
statuses in StatusID parameter, above.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l The OrderIDs returned can be used to call functions to view or update transfer
orders.
Example
The following query requests the status of all transfer orders by account resellid, and
Query
- 1328 -
command=TP_GetOrderStatuses&uid=resellid&
The response lists the status of every transfer order placed by resellid. The complete out-
put for transfer order ID 445413 is included here; details of other orders are abridged:
Output

<transferorder>
<orderdate>2002-07-29T17:19:29.437</orderdate>
<tos>
<tot>
</tot>
</tos>
</transferorder>
<transferorder>
.
.
.
</transferorder>
<FoundAtLeastOnePend-
ingOrder>False</FoundAtLeastOnePendingOrder>
<Command>TP_GETORDERSTATUSES</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
- 1329 -
Related commands
l PushDomain
l TP_CancelOrder
l TP_CreateOrder
l TP_GetOrder
l TP_GetOrderDetail
l TP_GetOrderReview
l TP_ResubmitLocked
l TP_SubmitOrder
l UpdatePushList
TP_GetTLDInfo
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of information required for transferring domains, for each TLD.
Usage
Use this command to list the information that each Registry requires when domains are
transferred.
A typical use for this command is administrative. When your customers submit transfer
requests, you can use this command to guide you in what is required for processing the
orders.
Availability
Constraints
- 1330 -
Input parameters
command =nameofcommand& uid=yourloginid&pw=yourpassword&

Which subset of TLDs to return. Per-

mitted values are:
0 All TLDs
1 Transferable TLDs
QueryFlag Required 2 Transferable via auto-verification 1
3 Transferable via fax
4 Authorization key required for transfer
5 Lockable TLDs
6 Both lockable and transferable


ID number for this TLD, used by our database. Indexed X when
TLDIDX
Top-level domain name (extension). Indexed X when Respon-

TLDX
Registry protocol. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text or

ProtocolX
HTML.
Registry permits locking (user ability to prevent domain from

AbleToLockX being transfered without authorization). Indexed X when
Registry processes domain registrations in real time. Indexed

RealTimeX
X when ResponseType=Text or HTML.
- 1331 -
Is this TLD transferable. Indexed X when ResponseType=Text
TransferableX
or HTML.
Does this TLD require an authorization code for transfers?

HasAuthInfoX
Does this Registry permit transfers by auto-verification.

TransByAutoVeriX
Does this Registry permit transfers by fax. Indexed X when

TransByFaxX

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of TLDs that satisfy QueryFlag=6-TLDs that are both
lockable and transferable-and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=TP_GETTLDINFO&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
QueryFlag=6&ResponseType=XML
- 1332 -
In the response, a list of TLDs and their characteristics, and an ErrCount value 0, confirm
Output
<tldtable>
<tld>
<TLDID>0</TLDID>
<TLD>com</TLD>
<Protocol>RRP</Protocol>
<RealTime>True</RealTime>
<HasAuthInfo>True</HasAuthInfo>
<TransByAutoVeri>True</TransByAutoVeri>
<TransByFax>True</TransByFax>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>1</TLDID>
<TLD>net</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>2</TLDID>
<TLD>org</TLD>
<Protocol>EPP</Protocol>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>3</TLDID>
<TLD>cc</TLD>
- 1333 -
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>4</TLDID>
<TLD>tv</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>5</TLDID>
<TLD>info</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>6</TLDID>
<TLD>biz</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
- 1334 -
<TLDID>10</TLDID>
<TLD>us</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>15</TLDID>
<TLD>name</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>23</TLDID>
<TLD>ca</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>43</TLDID>
<TLD>br.com</TLD>
- 1335 -
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>44</TLDID>
<TLD>cn.com</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>45</TLDID>
<TLD>eu.com</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>46</TLDID>
<TLD>uk.com</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>47</TLDID>
<TLD>uk.net</TLD>
- 1336 -
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>48</TLDID>
<TLD>us.com</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>49</TLDID>
<TLD>uy.com</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>50</TLDID>
<TLD>hu.com</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>51</TLDID>
<TLD>no.com</TLD>
- 1337 -
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>52</TLDID>
<TLD>qc.com</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>53</TLDID>
<TLD>ru.com</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>54</TLDID>
<TLD>sa.com</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>55</TLDID>
<TLD>se.com</TLD>
- 1338 -
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>56</TLDID>
<TLD>se.net</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>57</TLDID>
<TLD>za.com</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>58</TLDID>
<TLD>de.com</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>85</TLDID>
- 1339 -
<TLD>mobi</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>86</TLDID>
<TLD>web.com</TLD>
<TransByAutoVeri>False</TransByAutoVeri>
<TransByFax>False</TransByFax>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>87</TLDID>
<TLD>jpn.com</TLD>
<TransByAutoVeri>False</TransByAutoVeri>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>91</TLDID>
<TLD>la</TLD>
</tld>
- 1340 -
<tld>
<TLDID>92</TLDID>
<TLD>asia</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>93</TLDID>
<TLD>me</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>95</TLDID>
<TLD>abc</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>96</TLDID>
<TLD>xyz</TLD>
- 1341 -
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>97</TLDID>
<TLD>que</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>98</TLDID>
<TLD>ram</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>99</TLDID>
<TLD>woz</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>100</TLDID>
<TLD>tel</TLD>
<RealTime>False</RealTime>
- 1342 -
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>101</TLDID>
<TLD>pro</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>102</TLDID>
<TLD>aaa.pro</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>103</TLDID>
<TLD>aca.pro</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>105</TLDID>
<TLD>acct.pro</TLD>
- 1343 -
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>106</TLDID>
<TLD>eng.pro</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>107</TLDID>
<TLD>avocat.pro</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>108</TLDID>
<TLD>bar.pro</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>110</TLDID>
<TLD>jur.pro</TLD>
- 1344 -
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>111</TLDID>
<TLD>recht.pro</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>200</TLDID>
<TLD>co</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>201</TLDID>
<TLD>com.co</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
- 1345 -
<TLDID>202</TLDID>
<TLD>nom.co</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>203</TLDID>
<TLD>net.co</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>205</TLDID>
<TLD>pl</TLD>
<HasAuthInfo>False</HasAuthInfo>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>245</TLDID>
<TLD>com.pl</TLD>
- 1346 -
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>246</TLDID>
<TLD>info.pl</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>247</TLDID>
<TLD>net.pl</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>248</TLDID>
<TLD>org.pl</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>253</TLDID>
<TLD>gr.com</TLD>
- 1347 -
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>254</TLDID>
<TLD>us.org</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>256</TLDID>
<TLD>com.de</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>257</TLDID>
<TLD>ae.org</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>258</TLDID>
<TLD>ar.com</TLD>
- 1348 -
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>259</TLDID>
<TLD>gb.com</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>260</TLDID>
<TLD>gb.net</TLD>
</tld>
<tld>
<TLDID>261</TLDID>
<TLD>kr.com</TLD>
</tld>
</tldtable>
<Command>TP_GETTLDINFO</Command>
- 1349 -
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l AddToCart
l TP_CancelOrder
l TP_CreateOrder
l TP_SubmitOrder
TP_ResendEmail
Description
Definition
Resend the Domain Transfer Request authorization email. This is the email we send to
the WhoIs contact on record at the Registry, requesting their authorization to transfer the
domain name into the account specified in this query string.
Usage
Use this command to resend the Domain Transfer Request email for a transfer. You
would typically use this command when the owner who is losing the domain updates
their email address after we have sent an initial authorization email.
- 1350 -
This command can only be used between the time we send an initial Domain Transfer
Request email, and the time we receive a response.
Availability
Constraints
l The domain name must be one that is transferring into this account.
Input parameters

Login ID of the account that requested
UID Required 20
the transfer (the gaining account)
Password of the account that requested

PW Required 20
the transfer (the gaining account)

SLD Required enom in enom.com) of the domain to be 63
transferred
Top-level domain name (extension) of

TLD Required 15
the domain to be transferred

- 1351 -

Success True indicates the query was successful

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l If you are transferring a domain name between two of your own accounts at dif-
ferent registrars, you can reduce delays by updating your email address in the los-
ing account before you submit a transfer order.
Example
The following query resends confirmation emails for the transfer of resellerdocs3.info,
Query
command=TP_RESENDEMAIL&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
SLD=resellerdocs3&tld=info&responsetype=xml
In the response, a Success value of True indicates that the query was successful:
Output
- 1352 -

<Command>TP_RESENDEMAIL</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l TP_CreateOrder
l TP_GetOrderDetail
l TP_ResubmitLocked
l TP_SubmitOrder
TP_ResubmitLocked
Description
Definition
Resubmit a request for a previously locked domain name.
Usage
- 1353 -
Use this command after you have previously submitted a transfer request, received an
error message saying the domain was locked, and have had the registrant of the domain
unlock it. This command may also be used to resubmit a transfer that was rejected
because the domain was registered less than 60 days ago.
Availability
On the Transfer order detail page, the Resubmit locked domain link (when it is present)
calls the TP_ResubmitLocked command.
Constraints
l The transfer order detail ID must be valid.
l The transfer order detail ID must belong to a domain that previously failed to trans-
fer because it was locked.
Input parameters

Transfer Order Detail ID. To retrieve this

TransferOrderDetailID Required 10
value, use the TP_GetOrder command.

- 1354 -

TransferOrderID New Transfer Order ID

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
Previously, account resellid had requested that a domain be transferred into this
account, and received an e-mail stating that the transfer could not complete because the
domain was locked. The owner of account resellid contacted the owner of the domain
and had the lock removed. The following query resubmits the transfer request, and
Query
command=TP_ResubmitLocked&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
TransferOrderDetailID=607291&responsetype=xml
The Success=True parameter value in the response, and the new TransferOrderID, con-
firm a successful request:
Output
- 1355 -

<transferorder>
</transferorder>
<Command>TP_RESUBMITLOCKED</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![ CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l PushDomain
l TP_CancelOrder
l TP_CreateOrder
l TP_GetOrder
l TP_GetOrderDetail
l TP_GetOrderReview
l TP_ResendEmail
l TP_SubmitOrder
l UpdatePushList
TP_SubmitOrder
Description
Definition
Submit a preconfigured transfer order.
Usage
- 1356 -
Use this command to submit a transfer order that has been created and configured using
the TP_CreateOrder command, but not submitted. Domain names in this status appear
on the Pending orders page. When you pass credit card information with this command,
you must use the secure HTTPS protocol.
Availability
Enter a domain name and click Next.
On the Pending orders page, the submit button calls the TP_SubmitOrder command.
Constraints
l The TransferOrderID must identify an order that has been successfully created but
not submitted.
Input parameters

Transfer order ID number. To retrieve this

TransferOrderID Required 10
value, use the
EndUserIP Required our CC End users IP address. This is used in 15
- 1357 -

processing cessing service. Use format
NNN.NNN.NNN.NNN.
Permitted values are yes. or no. The

credit card supplied in this query string is
Optional for charged only if UseCreditCard=yes. If
resellers who use this param is omitted or if UseCred-
our credit card pro- itCard=no , the account balance rather
cessing AND want than the credit card is debited for this
UseCreditCard 3
to charge this trans- transaction. This is true even if the query
action to the credit string includes all the Registrant contact
card included in and credit card information. When you
this query string pass credit card information with this
command, you must use the secure
HTTPS protocol.
Required our CC Credit card type. Permitted values are

CardType 20
Required our CC
processing
Required our CC
processing
Required our CC Expiration month of the credit card, in


CreditCardExpYear 4
Required our CC
processing
Required our CC
processing
Required our CC
processing
Optional for our CC

processing
Optional for our CC

processing
Required our CC Credit card billing country. Two-character

CCCountry 40
processing country code is a permitted format
CCZip Required our CC Credit card billing postal code 60
- 1358 -

processing

Optional for our CC
processing
Required our CC Amount to charge this credit card.

ChargeAmount 6
processing Required format is DD.cc


ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
Transfer order 445440 was created with command TP_CreateOrder, with parameter
PreConfig=1. With that parameter value, the order was created and atransfer order ID
was assigned, but the order was not submitted instantly. The following query uses the
transfer order ID to submit the preconfigured order, and sends the response in XML
format:
- 1359 -
Query
command=TP_SubmitOrder&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
TransferOrderID=445440&responsetype=xml
In the response, the error count of 0 indicates that the order was submitted successfully:
Output

<Command>TP_SUBMITORDER</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l PushDomain
l TP_CancelOrder
l TP_CreateOrder
l TP_GetOrder
l TP_GetOrderDetail
l TP_GetOrderReview
l TP_GetTLDInfo
l TP_ResendEmail
l TP_ResubmitLocked
l UpdatePushList
- 1360 -
Description
Definition
Update a preconfigured transfer order before submitting the order.
Usage
Use this command to configure registrar lock, auto-renew, domain password, or contact
information for a domain name that is in the process of being transferred to eNom.
This command is typically used after an order has been created using the TP_
CreateOrder command with the parameter PreConfig=1. Once the transfer order has
been configured using this command, the next step is typically to use the TP_Sub-
mitOrder command, which causes the transfer order to be processed.
Availability
Enter a domain name and click next.
On the Pending orders page, click the domain name.
In the Editing transfer order for domain name box, the check boxes set the parameter val-
ues for the TP_UpdateOrderDetail command, and the next button calls the command.
Constraints
l The transfer order detail ID must be valid and must be part of an order created
under this account.
l The transfer order must be in a StatusID of 5 (Order not submitted).
- 1361 -
Input parameters

Transfer order detail ID. Use the

TransferOrderDetailID Required TP_GetOrder command to retrieve 10
this value.
Optional; default Set registrar lock on the name. Per-

Lock 5
is True mitted values are True or False.
Optional; default Set auto-renew. Permitted values

Renew 5
is True are True or False.
Set a domain password on the

name
Remove all names from this order,.

DeleteOrderDetail Optional To remove all names, supply 3
DeleteOrderDetail=Yes
Optional;
RegistrantAddress1 Required Fax Registrant address 60
orders
Optional;
RegistrantCity Required Fax Registrant city 60
orders
Optional;
RegistrantCountry Required Fax Registrant country 60
orders
Optional;
Required Fax
orders and for
.org names for
which you are
supplying new
- 1362 -

Registrant
information

format is +Coun-
use only numeric characters and the
+ is URL-encoded as a plus sign
(%2B). .
Optional;
RegistrantFirstName Required Fax Registrant first name 60
orders
Optional;
RegistrantLastName Required Fax Registrant last name 60
orders
Optional;
RegistrantOrganizationName Required Fax Registrant organization 60
orders

Optional;
RegistrantPhone Required Fax 20
orders
characters and the + is URLen-
coded as a plus sign (%2B). .
Registrant state or province choice:

RegistrantStateProvinceChoice
Optional S state 1
P province
Set =1 to transfer existing Whois

contacts when the transfer is com-
plete. If you supply UseContacts=0
Optional; default
UseContacts for a domain that has extended 1
is 0
attributes, you must supply contact
information and extended attributes
before submitting the transfer order.
Required Extended attributes, required for

ExtendedAttributes TLDs that use some country code TLDs. You can n/a
extended attrib- retrieve a list of required extended
- 1363 -

utes, when attributes for any TLD using the
UseContacts=0 GetExtAttributes command.
If set =none then Billing contact will

RegistrantUseContact Optional be used, otherwise Registrant con- 3
tact data must be submitted
Tech* Optional Technical contact data. See Note. *
If set =none then no contact will be

TechUseContact Optional used, otherwise Tech contact data 3
must be submitted.
Auxiliary Billing contact data. See

AuxBilling* Optional *
Note.
If set =none then no contact will be

AuxBillingUseContact Optional used, otherwise Auxbilling contact 3
data must be submitted.

XML.

SLD Second-level domain name
TLD Top-level domain name
lock Registrar lock status
renew Auto-renew status
domainpassword Password to set for the domain name
statusid Status ID of the order
statusdesc Description of the status
price Transfer price
usecontacts Use the current contacts flag
Registrant* Registrant contact data
- 1364 -
AuxBilling* Auxilliary Billing contact data
Tech* Technical contact data
Admin* Administrative contact data
Billing* Billing contact data

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
l Check the return parameter ErrCount. If greater than 0 the transaction failed.
l The parameter Err(ErrCount) can be presented to the client. Otherwise process the
l To update Technical or Auxilliary Billing contacts submit the contact data by repla-
cing Registrant* param names with Tech* or AuxBilling* param names.
Example
The following query requests that for transfer order detail ID 301770, the registrar lock
and automatic renew options both be set to On. It also instructs that contact information
should remain unchanged, and requests the response in XML format:
Query
command=TP_UpdateOrderDetail&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
TransferOrderDetailID=301770&Lock=On&Renew=On&
RegistrantUseContact=none&TechUseContact=none&
AuxBillingUseContact=none&responsetype=xml
- 1365 -
The response indicates the successful setting of the registrar lock and automatic renew
options:
Output

<tld>net</tld>
<lock>True</lock>
<renew>True</renew>
<domainpassword />
<statusdesc>Unable to retrieve current domain contacts from
UW</statusdesc>
<price>8.95</price>
<ordertype />
<contacts>
<Registrant>
<RegistrantPartyID>
{BB4A2DE1-6485-45CB-A4FC-EE39BA0C1629}
<RegistrantAddress1>111 Main Street</RegistrantAddress1>
<RegistrantAddress2 />
<RegistrantCity>Hometown</RegistrantCity>
<Regis-
trantE-
mailAddress>john.doe@resellerdocs.com</RegistrantEmailAddress>
<RegistrantFax>555-555-5556</RegistrantFax>
<RegistrantFirstName>John</RegistrantFirstName>
<RegistrantJobTitle>President</RegistrantJobTitle>
<RegistrantLastName>Doe</RegistrantLastName>
<RegistrantOrganizationName>Reseller Documents Inc.</Re-
gistrantOrganizationName>
<RegistrantPhone>555-555-5555</RegistrantPhone>
<Regis-
</Registrant>
- 1366 -
<AuxBilling>None</AuxBilling>
<Tech>None</Tech>
<Admin>None</Admin>
<Billing>
<BillingPartyID>{BB4A2DE1-6485-45CB-A4FC-EE39BA0C1629}
</BillingPartyID>
<BillingAddress1>111 Main Street</BillingAddress1>
<BillingAddress2 />
<BillingE-
<BillingFax>555-555-5556</BillingFax>
ganizationName>
<BillingPhone>555-555-5555</BillingPhone>
<UseBelowAuxInfo>True</UseBelowAuxInfo>
<auxID />
<regID>{BB4A2DE1-6485-45CB-A4FC-EE39BA0C1629}</regID>
</Billing>
</contacts>
<Command>TP_UPDATEORDERDETAIL</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
- 1367 -
Related commands
l PushDomain
l TP_CancelOrder
l TP_CreateOrder
l TP_GetOrder
l TP_GetOrderDetail
l TP_GetOrderReview
l TP_GetTLDInfo
l TP_ResubmitLocked
l TP_SubmitOrder
l UpdatePushList
TS_AutoRenew
Description
Definition
Set the Auto Renew flag for a Trust Seal subscription.
Usage
Use this command to set the Auto Renew flag for a Trust Seal subscription.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/web-site-seals/manage.aspx
For any Trust Seal subscription with status Service Active, click the link in the Domain
column. The current Auto Renew setting displays, and the Save Changes button
launches the TS_AutoRenew command.
- 1368 -
Constraints
l The Trust Seal subscription must belong to this login ID.
Input parameters

Identification number of the Trust Seal

subscription for which you want to set
TSID Required the Auto Renew flag. To retrieve TSID 8
numbers, use the TS_GetAccounts com-
mand

for this Trust Seal subscription. Per-
Optional; default is mitted values are:
AutoRenew 5
True True Automatically renew this sub-
scription

Identification number for the Trust Seal subscription being set
TSID
with this query string
- 1369 -
New setting for the Auto Renew flag for this Trust Seal sub-
AutoRenew
scription
Success Success status of this query string

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query turns off the Auto Renew flag for a Trust Seal subscription, and
Query
command=TS_AutoRenew&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&TSID=167
&AutoRenew=False&responsetype=xml
Output
<TSID>167</TSID>
- 1370 -
<Command>TS_AUTORENEW</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>94cb5b25-986c-4737-8438-531b-
c29e6b58</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l TS_Configure
l TS_GetAccounts
TS_Configure
Description
Definition
Configure a VeriSign Trust Seal account.
Usage
Use this command to configure a Verisign Trust Seal subscription after initial purchase.
When the user submits this configuration, VeriSign performs two checks before issuing a
Trust Seal: an identity verification, then an initial malware scan.
Availability
- 1371 -

Click any Awaiting Configuration link. On the configuration page, the Submit for
Approval button calls the TS_Configure command.
Constraints
l The VeriSign Trust Seal account must belong to this login ID.
l VeriSign will only allow one Trust Seal to be associated with a domain.
l Trust Seal is available for any domain name; the domain does not need to be
registered or hosted with us.
Input parameters

Our product identification num-

ProdType Required ber. For Trust Seal, the permitted 3
value is 185
Identification number for the

Trust Seal subscription to be con-
TSID Required figured. To retrieve this value, 8
use the TS_GetAccounts com-
mand
- 1372 -

Domain name. Permitted input
format includes the range from
sld.tld to a complete URL. Ver-
Domain Required iSign reduces all inputs to sld.tld 128
and applies the Trust Seal to all
URLs that include this domain
name
Permitted values are Individual

UserType Required 12
and Organization
Is this configuration ready to sub-

mit to VeriSign for their veri-
SubmitApproval Optional 5
fication. Permitted values are
True or False
Required Organization name of the admin-

AdminOrgName UserType=Organization istrative contact for this Trust 60
Seal subscription
Job title of the administrative con-

AdminJobTitle Required tact for this Trust Seal sub- 60
scription
First (given) name of the admin-

AdminFName Required istrative contact for this Trust 60
Seal subscription
Last (family) name of the admin-

AdminLName Required istrative contact for this Trust 60
Seal subscription
Address of the administrative con-

AdminAddress1 Required tact for this Trust Seal sub- 60
scription
Second line (if needed) of the

AdminAddress2 Optional administrative contact for this 60
Trust Seal subscription
City of the administrative contact

AdminCity Required 60
for this Trust Seal subscription
Is this contact address in a state

or province. Permitted values
AdminStateProvinceChoice
Required are: 1
S State
P Province
State or province of the admin-

AdminStateProvince Required 20
istrative contact for this Trust
- 1373 -

Seal subscription
Postal code of the administrative

AdminPostalCode Required contact for this Trust Seal sub- 15
scription
Country of the administrative con-

tact for this Trust Seal sub-
scription. Two-letter country code
AdminCountry Required 15
is a permitted format. If User-
Type=Individual, AdminCountry
must be US
Phone number of the admin-

istrative contact for this Trust
Seal subscription. Required
format is +Coun-
AdminPhone Required tryCode.PhoneNumber, where 20
sign (%2B).
Phone extension of the admin-

AdminPhoneExt Optional istrative contact for this Trust 10
Seal subscription
Fax number of the administrative

contact for this Trust Seal sub-
scription. Required format is
AdminFax Optional 20
Email address of the admin-

AdminEmailAddress Required istrative contact for this Trust 128
Seal subscription
Organization name of the tech-

TechOrgName Required nical contact for this Trust Seal 60
subscription
Job title of the technical contact

TechJobTitle Required 60
First (given) name of the tech-

TechFName Required nical contact for this Trust Seal 60
subscription
- 1374 -

Last (family) name of the tech-
TechLName Required nical contact for this Trust Seal 60
subscription
Address of the technical contact

TechAddress1 Required 60
Second line of the address (if

TechAddress2 Optional needed) of the technical contact 60
City of the technical contact for

TechCity Required 60
this Trust Seal subscription
Does the technical contact for

this Trust Seal subscription live
in a state or a province. Permitted
TechStateProvinceChoice Required 1
values are:
S for state
P for province
Province of the technical contact

TechStateProvince Required 20
Postal code of the technical con-

TechPostalCode Required tact for this Trust Seal sub- 15
scription
Country of the technical contact

TechCountry Required 15
Phone number of the technical

contact for this Trust Seal sub-
TechPhone Required 20
Phone extension of the technical

TechPhoneExt Optional contact for this Trust Seal sub- 10
scription
Fax number of the technical con-

tact for this Trust Seal sub-
TechFax Optional 20
- 1375 -

Email address of the technical

TechEmailAddress Required contact for this Trust Seal sub- 128
scription

or XML.

TSID Identification number for this Trust Seal subscription
Domain Domain name associated with this Trust Seal subscription
UserType User type assigned to this Trust Seal subscription
Status of submitting this Trust Seal configuration to our data-

Status base without errors(whether or not this query string instructs us
to submit to VeriSign for their verification process)
If this configuration contains errors, this node describes the

Detail
errors

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 1376 -
Example
The following query configures a Trust Seal subscription and submits it to VeriSign for
verification, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
&command=TS_Con-
figure&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw&ProdType=185&
TSID=167&Domain=resellerdocs.com&UserType=Organization&
SubmitApproval=true&AdminOrgName=Acme&
AdminJobTitle=President&AdminFName=John&AdminLName=Doe&
AdminAddress1=100+Main&AdminCity=Townsville&
AdminStateProvinceChoice=S&AdminStateProvince=ME&
AdminPostalCode=10001&AdminCountry=US&
AdminPhone=%2B207.5555556&
AdminEmailAddress=john.doe@example.com&
TechOrgName=Acme&TechJobTitle=WebMaster&
TechFName=Jake&TechLName=Doe&
TechAddress1=100+Main&TechCity=Townsville&
TechStateProvinceChoice=S&TechStateProvince=ME&
TechPostalCode=10001&TechCountry=US&
TechPhone=%2B207.5555556&
TechEmailAddress=jake.doe@example.com&ResponseType=xml
In the response, a Status value true indicates that the query was successful:
Output
<TSID>167</TSID>
<UserType>organization</UserType>
<Status>True</Status>
<Detail>Missing or Invalid Field: PartnerOrderID</Detail>
<Command>TS_CONFIGURE</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
- 1377 -
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>008894e1-011c-4744-9c41-3ac6119f671b</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l TS_AutoRenew
l TS_GetAccounts
TS_GetAccountDetail
Description
Definition
Retrieve detailed information for one VeriSign Trust Seal account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve information for one Verisign Trust Seal subscription.
Availability
When you click a link in the Domains column, TS_GetAccountDetail populates the detail
page.
- 1378 -
Constraints
l The Trust Seal account must belong to this login ID.
Input parameters

Identification number for this VeriSign

Trust Seal subscription. To retrieve TSID
TSID Required 8
values, use the TS_GetAccounts com-
mand


Identification number for the Trust Seal subscription covered in
TSID
this response
Domain Domain name associated with this Trust Seal
UserType User type associated with this Trust Seal
ProdDesc Product description for this Trust Seal
Status Status of this Trust Seal
- 1379 -
Expiration Expiration date of this Trust Seal
AutoRenew Auto Renew setting of this Trust Seal
BillingCycle Billing cycle for this Trust Seal subscription
Price Price for this Trust Seal subscription
When Status=Service Active, this node returns the Trust Seal

TrustScript
script, which can be placed as-is in the Web pages of the site.
OrderState Message from VeriSign if verification fails
Our database identification number for this Administrative or

PartyID
Technical contact
Organization Organization name configured for this contact
JobTitle Job title configured for this contact
FirstName First name configured for this contact
LastName Last name configured for this contact
Address1 Address configured for this contact
Address2 Address second line configured for this contact
City City configured for this contact
StateProvinceChoice State or Province choice (S or P) configured for this contact
StateProvince State or province configured for this contact
PostalCode Postal code configured for this contact
Country Country configured for this contact
Phone Phone number configured for this contact
Fax Fax number configured for this contact
EmailAddress Email address configured for this contact

ErrCount

ErrX
- 1380 -
Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves details for a Trust Seal subscription and sends the
Query
command=TS_GetAccountDetail&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
TSID=167&responsetype=xml
In the response, a Success status True, and details for this Trust Seal subscription, indic-
ate that the query was successful:
Output
<TSID>167</TSID>
<UserType>Organization</UserType>
<ProdDesc>Symantec Safe Site</ProdDesc>
<Status>Pending Verification</Status>
<Expiration>7/8/2013 2:07:48 PM</Expiration>
<BillingCycle>Yearly</BillingCycle>
- 1381 -
<ParentTrustSealID>0</ParentTrustSealID>
<ChildTrustSealID>0</ChildTrustSealID>
<RenewalStatus>Not Available for Renewal</RenewalStatus>
<OriginalFulfillmentDate/>
<TrustScript/>
<Message/>
<OrderState>Order is ready to be vetted. Orders can be in
this state for
as much as several days.</OrderState>
<Contacts>
<Admin>
<PartyID>f1e76208-ba24-e111-a3f0-005056bc7747</PartyID>
<JobTitle>President</JobTitle>
<FirstName>John</FirstName>
<LastName>Doe</LastName>
<Address1>100 Main</Address1>
<City>Townsville</City>
<StateProvince>ME</StateProvince>
<Phone>+207.5555556</Phone>
<Fax></Fax>
<EmailAddress>john.doe@example.com</EmailAddress>
</Admin>
<Technical>
<PartyID>f2e76208-ba24-e111-a3f0-005056bc7747</PartyID>
<JobTitle>WebMaster</JobTitle>
<FirstName>Jake</FirstName>
<LastName>Doe</LastName>
<Address1>100 Main</Address1>
<City>Townsville</City>
<StateProvince>ME</StateProvince>
<Phone>+207.5555556</Phone>
- 1382 -
<Fax></Fax>
<EmailAddress>jake.doe@example.com</EmailAddress>
</Technical>
</Contacts>
<Command>TS_GETACCOUNTDETAIL</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>d8e20e2b-9303-471f-a492-294cde686c76</Track-
ingKey>
Related commands
l TS_AutoRenew
l TS_Configure
l TS_GetAccounts
TS_GetAccounts
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of Verisign Trust Seal subscriptions for this login ID.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of Verisign Trust Seal subscriptions for this login ID.
Availability
- 1383 -

The TS_GetAccounts command populates this list.
Constraints
Input parameters


ProdType Required 3
value is 185 for VeriSign Trust Seal
Filter to return VeriSign Trust Seal sub-

scriptions in this state. Permitted values
are:
All
Service Active
Awaiting Configuration
Status Pending Verification 42
All
Verification Failed - Malware Scan Fail-
ure
Verification Failed - Service Canceled
Service Canceled
Service Renewed
Service Expired
- 1384 -

StartPosition StartPosition=26&RecordsToReturn=25 8
1
ted list

RecordsToReturn response. Maximum permitted value is 3
25
250

Optional; default is Domain
SortBy 10
Domain Status
Expiration
Sort order. Permitted values are:

Ascending 1 Ascending 1
1
0 Descending

TSID Identification number for this VeriSign Trust Seal subscription
Domain name with which this Trust Seal subscription is asso-

Domain
ciated
In the response for an individual subscription, the product type

ProdType
identification number of this subscription
Identification number for the order in which this Trust Seal sub-
OrderID
scription was purchased
In the response for an individual subscription, the status of this

Status
subscription
AutoRenew Auto renew setting of this Trust Seal subscription
For new subscriptions, this is the deadline for activating this

subscription. For activated subscriptions, this is the expiration
Expiration
date for the subscription. Once purchased, the customer has a
year to activate
- 1385 -
ProdType In the summary for this list, the product type filter for the list
Status In the summary for this list, the status filter for the list
In the overall sorted list, the start position of the Trust Seal sub-
StartPosition
scriptions included in this response
RecordsToReturn Number of Trust Seal subscriptions listed in this response
SortBy Sorting parameter for this response
Sort order for this response. 1 indicates ascending order; 0

Ascending
indicates descending order
TotalAccounts Number of Trust Seal subscriptions belonging to this login ID

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the VeriSign Trust Seal subscriptions associated with a
login ID, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
- 1386 -
command=TS_GetAccounts&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
responsetype=xml
In the response, the presence of a Status node and an ErrCount value of 0 indicate that
Output
<TrustSealAccounts>
<Account>
<TSID>169</TSID>
<Domain></Domain>
<Status>Awaiting Configuration</Status>
<Expiration>7/8/2011 3:17 PM</Expiration>
<ChildTrustSealID></ChildTrustSealID>
<OriginalFulfillmentDate></OriginalFulfillmentDate>
<OriginalTrustSealID>169</OriginalTrustSealID>
</Account>
<Account>
<TSID>170</TSID>
<Domain></Domain>
</Account>
<Account>
<TSID>171</TSID>
<Domain></Domain>
- 1387 -
</Account>
<Account>
<TSID>172</TSID>
<Domain></Domain>
</Account>
<Account>
<TSID>141</TSID>
<Domain>09erfedrtik.com</Domain>
</Account>
<Account>
<TSID>165</TSID>
<Domain>rameshwar.com</Domain>
- 1388 -
<Status>Service Expired</Status>
<RenewalStatus>Available for Renewal</RenewalStatus>
<OriginalFulfillmentDate>7/9/2010 12:00 AM</Ori-
ginalFulfillmentDate>
</Account>
<Account>
<TSID>166</TSID>
<Domain>ranosys.com</Domain>
<Status>Service Expired</Status>
<RenewalStatus>Available for Renewal</RenewalStatus>
<OriginalFulfillmentDate>7/9/2010 12:00 AM</Ori-
ginalFulfillmentDate>
</Account>
<Account>
<TSID>149</TSID>
<Domain>ranosys.com</Domain>
<Status>Service Canceled</Status>
</Account>
<Account>
- 1389 -
<TSID>167</TSID>
</Account>
<Account>
<TSID>168</TSID>
</Account>
</TrustSealAccounts>
<Status>all</Status>
<RecordsToReturn>25</RecordsToReturn>
<Sortby>domain</Sortby>
<Ascending>1</Ascending>
<TotalAccounts>10</TotalAccounts>
<Command>TS_GETACCOUNTS</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
- 1390 -
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug/>
<TrackingKey>22354164-6d5c-41d8-9cb0-ec55d-
b0889eb</TrackingKey>
Related commands
l TS_AutoRenew
l TS_Configure
UpdateAccountInfo
Description
Definition
Update a variety of account information, for this account or a retail subaccount.
Usage
Use this command to update Billing contact information for this account.
Use this command to change the password or authorization question for a retail sub-
account.
Use this command to update credit card information for this account or a retail sub-
account.
HTTPS protocol.
To add funds to a reseller account, use the RefillAccount command.
Availability
- 1391 -
https://resellertest.enom.com/myaccount/EditContact.asp?
On the my info page, the save changes button calls the UpdateAccountInfo command.
Constraints
l The account identified in the UID parameter must be a reseller account.
Input parameters
Max
Size
Retail subaccount login ID. Per-

Required for changing
mitted format is alphanumeric char-
NewUID the password of a retail 20
acters. Must be unique in our
subaccount
system
Desired password for the retail sub-

Required for changing account for the future. Permitted
NewPW the password of a retail values are 6 to 20 alphanumeric 20
subaccount characters and symbols. Not per-
mitted: space, #, %, &
Required for changing

Confirm desired password for the
ConfirmNewPW the password of a retail 20
retail subaccount for the future
subaccount
AuthQuestionType Required Nature of the question used for 10
- 1392 -
Max
Size
identity verification. Permitted val-
ues are:
shigh high school
fpet favorite pet
fbook favorite book

AuthQuestionAnswer Required 50
birth, last 4 digits of social security
or high school)
Account ID of the account to be

Account Optional 11
updated
Required for us to
RegistrantOrganizationName apply the Web site Registrant organization 60
URL
Optional overall, but

Required if we bill your
URL of the domain registration
WebSiteURL customers for domain 150
Web site, for billing purposes
renewals and other ser-
vices
Required if Regis-
RegistrantJobTitle trantOrganization Registrant job title 60
Name is supplied
RegistrantAddress1 Required Registrant Address 60

RegistrantStateProvinceChoice choice:
Required 1
S state
P province
- 1393 -
Max
Size
RegistrantStateProvince Required Registrant state or province 60
RegistrantEmailAddress Required Email address for WhoIs 128
Email address for us to contact to

Contact
account

RegistrantPhone Required 17
encoded as a plus sign (%2B). .

format is +Coun-
Required if Regis- tryCode.PhoneNumber, where
RegistrantFax trantOrganization CountryCode and PhoneNumber 17
Name is supplied use only numeric characters and
sign (%2B) . .
Type of credit card

Required if updating
When you pass credit card inform-
CardType credit card information 20
ation with this command, you pro-
of a retail account
tocol.
CCName credit card information Cardholder's name 60
of a retail account
CreditCardNumber credit card information Customer's credit card number 128
of a retail account
CreditCardExpMonth credit card information Credit card expiration month 2
of a retail account
CreditCardExpYear credit card information Credit card expiration year 4
of a retail account
credit card information
- 1394 -
Max
Size
of a retail account
CCAddress credit card information Credit card billing address 60
of a retail account
Optional if updating
CCCity credit card information Credit card billing city 60
of a retail account
Optional if updating
CCStateProvince credit card information Credit card billing state or province 40
of a retail account
CCZip credit card information Credit card billing postal code 15
of a retail account
CCCountry credit card information Credit card billing country 60
of a retail account

XML.


ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 1395 -
Example
The following query updates account information: password, authorization question, or
contact information. The query requests the response in XML format:
Query
command=UpdateAccountInfo&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
NewUID=resellid2&NewPW=resellpw2&ConfirmNewPW=resellpw2&
AuthQuestionType=smaiden&AuthQuestionAnswer=Jones&
RegistrantAddress1=111+Main+St.&RegistrantCity=Hometown&
RegistrantCountry=United+States&
RegistrantEmailAddress=john.doe@resellerdocs.com&
RegistrantFax=+1.5555555556&RegistrantFirstName=John&
RegistrantLastName=Doe&RegistrantJobTitle=President&
RegistrantOrganizationName=Reseller+Documents+Inc.&
RegistrantPhone=+1.5555555555&RegistrantPostalCode=99999&
RegistrantStateProvince=WA&RegistrantStateProvinceChoice=S&
RegistrantNexus=United+States&
RegistrantPurpose=&responsetype=xml
The response confirms the Successful update of account information:

Output
<OrganizationName>Reseller Documents Inc.</Or-
ganizationName>
<Fname>John</Fname>
<Lname>Doe</Lname>
<JobTitle>President</JobTitle>
<Address2/>
- 1396 -
<Phone>+1.5555555555</Phone>
<PhoneExt/>
<Fax>+1.5555555556</Fax>
<EmailInfo/>
<CCType/>
<CCName/>
<CCNumber/>
<CCMonth/>
<CCYear/>
<CCAddress/>
<CCCity/>
<CCStateProvince/>
<CCZip/>
<CCCountry/>
<CCPhone/>
<GetAccountInfo>
<UserID>resellid2</UserID>
<Password>resellpw2</Password>
</GetAccountInfo>
<StatusEditContact>Fail</StatusEditContact>
<Command>UPDATEACCOUNTINFO</Command>
<errors>
<Err1>Only retail subaccounts can be modified by the parent
account.</Err1>
</errors>
<responses>
<response>
<ResponseNumber>313157</ResponseNumber>
<ResponseString>Validation error; unauthorized; sub account
(s)</ResponseString>
</response>
- 1397 -
</responses>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site/>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
Related commands
l CheckLogin
l CreateAccount
l CreateSubAccount
l GetAccountInfo
l GetAllAccountInfo
l GetOrderDetail
l GetOrderList
l GetReport
l GetSubAccounts
l GetTransHistory
UpdateAccountPricing
Description
Definition
Set wholesale prices for a subaccount.
Usage
- 1398 -
Use this command to set the wholesale prices that one subaccount pays you for each
product.
To set retail prices for consumers who buy directly from this account, use PE_SetPricing.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/resellers/subaccount-list.asp
Click any subaccounts LoginID to see the wholesale prices you charge them; the values
can be reset with UpdateAccountPricing.
Constraints
l The subaccount named with LoginID or Account parameters must be a subaccount
of the account named in the uid and pw parameters.
Input parameters

Subaccount login ID (use GetAc-

LoginID Optional 20
countInfo subaccount login ID)
Subaccount ID number (use GetAc-

Account Required 11
countInfo subaccount ID number; format
- 1399 -

is NNN-aa-NNNN)
Type of this subaccount. Permitted val-

AcctType Required ues are reseller and retail. To retrieve sub- 8
account types, use the
For example, comprice=44.95 sets the

Optional name, in
TLDprice price of registering a .com name to 5000.00
DD.cc format.
$US44.95.
Price for renewing a domain name, in

TLDrenew Optional 5000.00
DD.cc format
Price for transferring a domain name and

TLDtransfer Optional extending its expiration date by one year, 5000.00
in DD.cc format
Price for one year of DNS hosting, in

DNSHosting Optional 5000.00
DD.cc format
email service from the .name Registry, in

DotNameBundle Optional 5000.00
DD.cc format
Price for one year of Whois Privacy Pro-

WPPS Optional 5000.00
tection Service, in DD.cc format
Certificate-Comodo-
Optional Essential certificate, in DD.cc format 5000.00
Essential
Certificate-Comodo- Price for a one-year Comodo Instant cer-

Optional 5000.00
Instant tificate, in DD.cc format
Certificate-Comodo- Price for a one-year Comodo Essential

Optional 5000.00
Essential-Wildcard Wildcard certificate, in DD.cc format
Certificate-Comodo- Price for a one-year Comodo Premium

Optional 5000.00
Premium-Wildcard Wildcard certificate, in DD.cc format
Price for a one-year Comodo EV cer-

Certificate-Comodo-EV Optional 5000.00
tificate, in DD.cc format
Price for a one-year Comodo EV SGC

Certificate-Comodo-EV-
Optional (server-gated cryptography) certificate, 5000.00
SGC
in DD.cc format
Certificate-GeoTrust- Price for a one-year GeoTrust QuickSSL

Optional 5000.00
QuickSSL certificate, in DD.cc format
Price for a one-year GeoTrust QuickSSL

Certificate-GeoTrust-
Optional Premium SSL certificate, in DD.cc 5000.00
QuickSSL-Premium
format
- 1400 -

Certificate-GeoTrust- Price for a one-year GeoTrust True Busi-
Optional 5000.00
TrueBizID nessID SSL certificate, in DD.cc format
Price for a one-year GeoTrust True Busi-

Optional nessID Wildcard SSL certificate, in 5000.00
TrueBizID-Wildcard
DD.cc format
Price for a one-year GeoTrust True Busi-

Optional nessID with EV SSL certificate, in 5000.00
TrueBizID-EV
DD.cc format
Certificate-RapidSSL- Price for a one-year RapidSSL cer-

Optional 5000.00
RapidSSL tificate, in DD.cc format
Certificate-VeriSign- Price for a one-year VeriSign Secure Site

Optional 5000.00
Secure-Site SSL certificate, in DD.cc format

Optional 5000.00
Secure-Site-Pro Pro SSL certificate, in DD.cc format

Optional 5000.00
Secure-Site-EV EV SSL certificate, in DD.cc format

Optional 5000.00
Secure-Site-Pro-EV Pro EV SSL certificate, in DD.cc format
Price for a one-year subscription to

TRUSTe Privacy Policy, in DD.cc
format. Use this parameter if you want to
PrivacyPolicy Optional offer only a single price point for Privacy 5000.00
Policy. Use the -Yr1, -Yr2, and -Yr3 para-
meters below if you want to set different
rates for durations

PrivacyPolicy-Yr1 Optional TRUSTe Privacy Policy, in DD.cc 5000.00
format
Price per year when customer purchases

PrivacyPolicy-Yr2 Optional a two-year subscription to TRUSTe Pri- 5000.00
vacy Policy, in DD.cc format

PrivacyPolicy-Yr3 Optional a three-year subscription to TRUSTe Pri- 5000.00
Price per year for renewal of TRUSTe Pri-

PrivacyPolicy-Renewal Optional 5000.00

PrivacyPolicySeal Optional TRUSTe Privacy Policy with Seal, in 5000.00
- 1401 -

DD.cc format. Use this parameter if you
want to offer only a single price point for
Privacy Policy with Seal. Use the -Yr1, -
Yr2, and -Yr3 parameters below if you
want to set different rates for different
subscription durations

PrivacyPolicySeal-Yr1 Optional TRUSTe Privacy Policy with Seal, in 5000.00
DD.cc format

PrivacyPolicySeal-Yr2 Optional a two-year subscription to TRUSTe Pri- 5000.00
vacy Policy with Seal, in DD.cc format

PrivacyPolicySeal-Yr3 Optional a three-year subscription to TRUSTe Pri- 5000.00
vacy Policy with Seal, in DD.cc format
PrivacyPolicySeal- Price per year for renewal of TRUSTe Pri-

Optional 5000.00
Renewal vacy Policy with Seal, in DD.cc format
Seal-VeriSign-Trust- Price per month for VeriSign Trust Seal,

Optional 5000.00
Seal in DD.cc format
Price per year for Business Listing, in

WBL Optional 5000.00
DD.cc format
Price per month for RichContent, regard-

less of the billing cycle the customer
chooses. Use this single value if you
want a single price point for all billing
RichContent Optional 5000.00
cycles, or use all four other parameters if
you want to offer your subaccounts a
price reduction for longer billing cycles.
Permitted values are in DD.cc format
Price per month for RichContent, when

RichContent-Mo1 Optional the customer chooses a 1-month billing 5000.00
cycle, in DD.cc format

RichContent-Mo3 Optional the customer chooses a 3- month billing 5000.00

RichContent-Mo6 Optional the customer chooses a 6-month billing 5000.00

RichContent-Mo12 Optional 5000.00
the customer chooses a 12-month billing
- 1402 -

Price for a 10-pak of POP3 mailboxes, in

POP3 Optional 5000.00
DD.cc format
Price of email forwarding, in DD.cc

45_valueadd Optional 5000.00
format
Price of URL forwarding, in DD.cc

47_valueadd Optional 5000.00
format
Price for a 1-year subscription to Instant

Reseller. Use this single value if you
want a single price point for all pur-
chases, or use all three yearly para-
InstantReseller Optional 5000.00
meters, below, if you want to offer your
subaccounts a price reduction for longer
subscriptions. Permitted values are in
DD.cc format
Price for a 1-year subscription to Instant

InstantReseller-Yr1 Optional 5000.00
Reseller, in DD.cc format
Price per year for a 2-year subscription to

Instant Reseller, in DD.cc format
Price per year for a 3-year subscription to

Instant Reseller, in DD.cc format
Price for WebSite Creator Basic pack-

WSCBasic Optional 5000.00
age, in DD.cc format
Price for WebSite Creator Full package,

WSCFull Optional 5000.00
in DD.cc format
Price for WebSite Creator eCommerce

WSCEcommerce Optional 5000.00
package, in DD.cc format
Price per month for goMobi, when cus-

goMobi-Mo1 Optional tomer chooses a 1- month billing cycle, 5000.00
in DD.cc format
Price per month for goMobi, when cus-

goMobi-Mo12 Optional tomer chooses a 12- month billing cycle, 5000.00
in DD.cc format

- 1403 -

Account Subaccount ID
AccountType Subaccount type
Count Number of prices modified
Status Success status for this query

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query sets prices for several products. It requests the response in XML
format:
Query
uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&Account=154-dz-5567&
AcctType=reseller&command=UPDATEACCOUNTPRICING&
comprice=14&comrenew=15&comtransfer=16&pop3=29.95
&dotnamebundle=20.95&responsetype=xml
- 1404 -

Output

<Set>
<Account>154-dz-5567</Account>
<AcctType>reseller</AcctType>
<Count>5</Count>
</Set>
<Command>UPDATEACCOUNTPRICING</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l PE_GetRetailPrice
l PE_GetRocketPrice
l PE_SetPricing
l WSC_GetPricing
- 1405 -
UpdateCart
Description
Definition
Update items in the shopping cart.
Usage
Use this command to activate or deactivate a shopping cart item or to change its quant-
ity.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/Cart.asp
On the cart page, changing an item from OldItemStatus=A (active) to ItemStatus=I (inact-
ive) clears the check box in the select column.
Constraints
l The item must be in the customers shopping cart.
Input parameters

- 1406 -

Input value is the six-digit cart item ID.

ItemIDX(X=1 to Num-
Required Retrieve this number using the 10
berOfItems)
GetCartContent command.
New status of the item. Permitted values

are on to make the status active, off to
ItemStatusX Optional make it inactive. Items set to status on 3
are subject to the next operation you per-
form on the cart.
ItemQtyX Required New quantity for the item 4
Renewal setting for the item. Permitted

values are on to auto-renew, none for an
RenewX Optional item that is not renewable. If RenewX is 4
not supplied, item is set to not auto-
renew.
Toggle all items in cart to status I (Inact-

ClearItems Optional 3
ive). Permitted value is Yes.
Toggle all items in cart to status A (Act-

ActivateItems Optional 3
ive). Permitted value is Yes.



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 1407 -
Notes
Example
The following query requests that item 365690 be moved from active (A) to inactive (I)
status, and requests the response in XML format:
Query
command=updatecart&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&ItemID1=365690&
ItemStatus1=on&ItemQty1=1&Renew1=1&ResponseType=xml
Output

<Command>UPDATECART</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddBulkDomains
l AddToCart
l DeleteFromCart
- 1408 -
l GetCartContent
l InsertNewOrder
l PurchasePreview
Description
Definition
Update the customer preference settings for an account.
Usage
Use this command to update account-level settings that are applied to all domain names
you register.
For most settings, if no value is supplied for an individual setting, this command reverts
that setting to its default value, with two exceptions:
For host records, the UseParentDefault parameter allows you to choose between per-
sisting current host records, and setting new host records.
Name servers are always persisted by default, unless new name servers are specified in
the query string.
You can use the GetCusPreferences command to retrieve the current settings for an
account, and to supply the current values for the UpdateCusPreferences query string.
Availability
On the my enom > settings page, the UpdateCusPreferences command sets any
changes that a user enters in the Default Domain Options section.
Constraints
- 1409 -
Input parameters
Query

Default period for auto-renew and regis-

Optional; default is trar lock settings, in years. A domains
DefPeriod 2
1 registration period cannot extend more
than 10 years beyond today.
RegLock=on prevents a domain from

Optional; default is being transferred to a new registrar.
RegLock 3
off RegLock=off allows unrestricted transfer
of a domain from one registrar to another.
AutoRenew=on renews domain names

Optional; default is automatically.
AutoRenew 3
off AutoRenew=off does not renew domain
names automatically.
IDProtect=on automatically purchases

IDProtect ID Protect for all eligible domains. Per- 3
off
mitted values are on and off
DefIDProtectRenew=on automatically
DefIDProtectRenew renews ID Protect before it expires. Per- 3
off
mitted values are on and off
DefWBLRenew=on automatically
DefWBLRenew renews Business Listing before it 3
off
expires. Permitted values are on and off
AutoPakRenew=on renews POP email

Optional; default is paks automatically.
AutoPakRenew AutoPakRenew=off does not renew POP 3
off
paks automatically.
- 1410 -

Note: This parameter displays in the UI
only if auto-renewal of POP paks is
enabled as a for-pay feature for this
account.
EMailForwardRenew=on renews email

forwarding automatically.
EMailForwardRenew=off does not renew
EMailForwardRenew email forwarding automatically. 3
off
Note: This parameter displays in the UI
only if email forwarding is enabled as a
for-pay feature for this account.
URLForwardingRenew=on renews URL

Optional; default is forwarding automatically.
URLForwardingRenew 3
off URLForwardingRenew=off does not
renew URL forwarding automatically.
Allow domain name servers. Options are

AllowDNS 0 and 1. Appears to be an inactive para- 1
0
meter.
Which name servers a domain is using.

If UseDNS=1, use our name servers.
If UseDNS=0, use the name servers spe-
Optional; default is cified in this query string.
UseDNS 1
1 Note: If UseDNS or DNSY are present in
the UpdateCusPreferences other set-
tings (DefPeriod through AllowDNS) will
be updated.
Use name of domain name server. For

example, DNS1=ns1.name-ser-
vices.com.
DNSY
Optional Note: If UseDNS or DNSY are present in 16
Y=1, 2, 3, . . .
the UpdateCusPreferences other DNS
settings (DefPeriod through AllowDNS)
will be updated.
Which host records should be used for

Optional; default is this accounts defaults. Permitted values
UseParentDefault 1
1 are: 0 Use the host records in this query
string 1 Persist the existing host records
Name of host record, for example,

HostName Optional HostName1=www Permitted format is a 60
comma-delimited list.
Record type of host record. Permitted

RecordType Optional 5
- 1411 -

format is comma-delimited list of record
types for each of the host records spe-
cified with the HostName parameter. List
record types in the same order as the
host name they correspond to. Permitted
values are:
A IP address
AAAA IPv6 address
CNAME Alias record type, to associate a
host name with another host
URL URL redirect
MX Mail. Can be a host name under this
domain name or the name of a mail
server
Address to redirect to. Permitted format

is a comma-delimited list of the record
types for each host record. List
addresses in the same order as the host
name they correspond to. Permitted val-
ues are:
If RecordType=A, Address must be an
IP address
If RecordType=AAAA, Address must be
an IPv6 address
If RecordType=CNAME, Address must
be a fully qualified domain name (see
Note) or a host name defined in this
domain
If RecordType=URL, Address must be
Address Optional 260
the exact URL of the page you redirect
to, or an IP address, or a fully qualified
domain name (see Note)
If RecordType=FRAME, Address is the
actual URL, or the IP address, or the fully
qualified domain name (see Note) of the
page you want to display when someone
types Your_Domain.com
If RecordType=MX, Address must be a
fully qualified domain name (see Note) or
a host name defined in this domain
If RecordType=MXE, Address must be
an IP address
If RecordType=TXT, Address is a text
(SPF) record.
- 1412 -

For help writing an SPF record, go to
Show menus.
Optional; default is ShowPopUps=0 hides menus.
ShowPopUps 1
0 ShowPopUps=1 shows menus.
Appears to be an inactive parameter.


A return value of Successful indicates that customer pref-
Update
erences were successfully updated.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the updating of several customer preference settings, and
Query
- 1413 -
command=UPDATECUSPREFERENCES&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
DefPeriod=4&AutoRenew=on&AutoPakRenew=on&
RegLock=on&URLForwardingRenew=on&EmailForwardRenew=on&
useparentdefault=0&RecordType=A,A,A&
address=85.92.87.177,85.92.87.179,85.92.87.180&
hostname=@,*,www&ResponseType=XML
In the response, the ErrCount value 0 indicates that the update was successful:
Output

<Command>UPDATECUSPREFERENCES</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Server>RESELLER-STAGING</Server>
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![ CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CheckLogin
l CreateAccount
l CreateSubAccount
l GetAccountInfo
l GetAllAccountInfo
l GetCusPreferences
- 1414 -
l GetOrderDetail
l GetOrderList
l GetReport
l GetSubAccounts
l GetTransHistory
l SetPakRenew
l UpdateAccountInfo
UpdateDomainFolder
Description
Definition
Change the name of a folder, configure or change the settings of a Magic Folder, and/or
change a folder from Standard to Magic or from Magic to Standard.
Usage
Use this command to change a folder from Standard to Magic or from Magic to Standard,
configure or change the settings of a Magic Folder, and/or change the folder name or
description of any folder.
This command lets a user choose which settings are Magic, and what those settings
should be (on, off, and so on). Settings that can be Magic include the following:
l Auto-renew
l Registrar lock
l Name servers
l Host records
l Domain password
l Contact information
When a domain is put into a Magic Folder, the domains settings synchronize to those
that are specified as Magic for the folder.
For example, if a folder is only Magic with respect to auto-renew, and auto-renew is on,
all domains put into that folder have their auto-renew setting turned on. Since that is the
only Magic setting for the folder, none of the domains other settings change.
Availability
- 1415 -

https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/folder-control-pan-
el/default.asp?FolderName=ResellFolder
Click any of the links in the left-hand column. On the resulting pages, the save button
calls the UpdateDomainFolder command.
Constraints
l The folder must belong to this account.
Input parameters
command=nameofcommand& uid=yourloginid&pw=yourpassword&

FolderName Required Current name of folder 125
Should this folder be Standard or

Magic. Permitted values are:
FolderType Optional 1
0 Standard
1 Magic
New name for this existing folder.

Permitted characters are letters,
NewFolderName Optional numbers, hyphens, underscores, 125
and spaces; name must begin with
a letter or number.
Description Optional Description for this folder. 250
Do you want DNS settings to be a

DNSSync Optional 1
Magic setting of this folder. Per-
- 1416 -

mitted values are:
0 No
1 Yes
Do you want name servers syn-

chronized to our name servers. Per-
mitted values are:
UseNameServer Optional 78
0 No, I will specify custom name
servers
1 Yes, use eNoms name servers
Custom name servers for this

folder. Up to 12 may be specified.
DNSX X=1 to maximum 12 Optional 1
Required format is DNS1-
1=ns1.sld.tld or dns1.sld.tld
Do you want auto-renew to be a

AutoRenewSync Optional mitted values are: 1
0 No
1 Yes
Auto-renew setting for this folder.

AutoRenew Optional 1
0 Auto-renew off
1 Auto-renew on
Do you want Registrar Lock to be a

RegLockSync Optional mitted values are: 1
0 No
1 Yes
Registrar Lock setting for this

folder. Registrar Lock protects you
from unapproved transfers of your
RegLock Optional 1
domains. Permitted values are:
0 Registrar Lock off
1 Registrar Lock on
Do you want domain passwords to

be a Magic setting of this folder. Per-
Optional;
DomainPWSync mitted values are: 1
default is 0
0 No
1 Yes
Password for all domains in this

folder.
HostSync Optional Do you want domain passwords to 1
- 1417 -

be a Magic setting of this folder. Per-
mitted values are:
0 No
1 Yes
HostNameX Host record name. Permitted values

Optional 60
X=1 to maximum 3 are www, @, and *
Record type of this host record. Per-

mitted values are:
A Authoritative address.
If RecordTypeX=A, AddressX must
be an IP address.
AAAA IPv6 address.
If RecordTypeX=AAAA, AddressX
must be an IPv6 address.
CName Canonical name (alias).
If RecordTypeX=CName,
AddressX must be a fully qualified
domain name or a host name
RecordTypeX
Optional defined in this domain. 5
X=1 to maximum 3
URL URL redirect.
If RecordTypeX=URL, AddressX
must be the exact URL of the page
you want to redirect to, or an IP
address, or a fully qualified domain
name.
Frame Frame redirect.
If RecordTypeX=Frame, AddressX
must be the exact URL of the page
you want to redirect to, or an IP
address, or a fully qualified domain
name.
AddressX
Optional Address to send this host record to. 260
X=1 to maximum 3
Do you want contacts to be a Magic

setting of this folder. Permitted val-
ContactSync Optional ues are: 1
0 No
1 Yes
Do you want this contact type to be

a Magic setting of this folder. Per-
mitted ContactTypes are Regis-
ContactTypeContactSync Optional trant, AuxBilling, Tech, or Admin. 1
0 Do not synchronize this contact
- 1418 -

1 Synchronize this contact For
example, to make Registrant a
Magic contact, use Regis-
trantContactSync=1
Use the Billing contact information

for this contact. Permitted values
are:
ContactTypeUseBilling Optional 0 Do not use the Billing contact 60
information for this contact
1 Use the Billing contact information
for this contact
ContactTypeOrganizationName Optional Name of this contacts organization 60
ContactTypeJobTitle Optional Job title of this contact 60
ContactTypeFirstName Optional First (given) name of this contact 60
ContactTypeLastName Optional Last (family) name of this contact 60
ContactTypeAddress1 Optional Address, line 1, of this contact 60
Address, line 2, of this contact

ContactTypeAddress2 Optional 60
Optional
ContactTypeCity Optional City of this contact 60
ContactTypeProvince Optional State or province of this contact 60
Is the value for

ContactTypeProvince a state or a
ContactTypeStateProvinceChoice Optional province? Permitted values are: 1
S State
P Province
ContactTypePostalCode Optional Postal code of this contact 16
Country of this contact. Two-letter

ContactTypeCountry Optional 60
country code is a permitted value.
Phone number of this contact.

ContactTypePhone Optional CountryCode and PhoneNumber 17
(%2B).
ContactTypePhoneExt Optional Phone extension of this contact. 8
- 1419 -

Fax number of this contact.
ContactTypeFax Optional CountryCode and PhoneNumber 17
(%2B).
Email address of this contact. Per-

ContactTypeEmailAddress Optional mitted format is EmailAd- 128
dress@sld.tld

XML.

Result of this operation. Return values are:
0 Failure
1 Success
2 New folder name already exists
3 Folder name does not exist in this account
4 Cannot convert this folder to Magic because at least one
domain is already in another Magic folder
5 Cannot convert this folder to Magic because at least one
domain has a registration status other than registered
6 Cannot convert this folder to Standard because at least one
domain in this folder is pending processing
7 Unable to update folder
8 Invalid name server status value
Result 9 Invalid auto-renew status value
10 Invalid registrar lock status value
11 Invalid domain password value
12 Cannot update DNS because at least one domain is
pending processing
13 Cannot update auto-renew because at least one domain is
pending processing
14 Cannot update registrar lock because at least one domain is
pending processing
15 Cannot update domain password because at least one
domain is pending processing
16 Cannot update contact information because at least one
domain is pending processing
17 Cannot update host records because at least one domain is
- 1420 -
pending processing
18 Invalid host value
UpdateText Encloses your input parameters in XML tags
FolderID Identification number of this folder
FolderName Your name for this folder
FolderDescription Your description of this folder
Standard or Magic folder.

FolderType 0 Standard
1 Magic
Status of this folder as a whole. Return values are:

1 Not a Magic folder
2 Folder is currently in sync (all Magic settings have been
FolderStatus
updated to the values specified for the folder)
3 Folder is locked pending a global edit
4 Something in the folder is out of sync
FolderDomainCount Number of domains in this folder
Should this folder synchronize name servers. Return values

are:
SyncDNS
0 No, DNS is not Magic for this folder
1 Yes, DNS is Magic for this folder
Status of DNS synchronization for this folder. Return values

are:
1 This is not a Magic folder
2 This is a Magic folder but DNS is not set to Magic, or DNS is
SyncDNSStatus
set to Magic and is in sync
3 DNS is set to Magic and this folder is pending syn-
chronization
4 DNS is set to Magic and is out of sync
Name servers for this folder. Return values are:

NSStatus NA This folder uses custom name servers
Yes This folder uses our name servers
NameServer Name server you specified
Should this folder synchronize auto-renew settings. Return val-

ues are:
SyncRenew
0 No
1 Yes
Status of auto-renew synchronization for this folder. Return val-

SyncRenewStatus ues are:
- 1421 -
2 This is a Magic folder but auto-renew is not set to magic, or
auto-renew is set to Magic and is in sync
3 Auto-renew is set to Magic and this folder is pending syn-
chronization
4 Auto-renew is set to Magic and is out of sync
Auto-renew setting of this folder. Return values are:

RenewStatus No Auto-renew is off for all domains in this folder
Yes Auto-renew is on for all domains in this folder
Should this folder synchronize registrar lock settings. Return

values are:
SyncRegLock
0 No, registrar lock is not Magic for this folder
1 Yes, registrar lock is Magic for this folder
Status of registrar lock synchronization for this folder. Return

values are:
2 This is a Magic folder but registrar lock is not set to Magic, or
SyncRegLockStatus
registrar lock is set to Magic and is in sync
3 Registrar lock is set to Magic and this folder is pending syn-
chronization
4 Registrar lock is set to Magic and is out of sync
Registrar lock setting of this folder. Return values are:

RegLockStatus Locked Registrar lock is on for this folder
Not Locked Registrar lock is off for this folder
Should this folder synchronize domain passwords. Return val-

ues are:
SyncDomainPwd
0 No, domain password is not Magic for this folder
1 Yes, domain password is Magic for this folder
Status of password synchronization for this folder. Return val-

ues are:
2 This is a Magic folder but password is not set to Magic, or
SyncDomainPwdStatus
password is set to Magic and is in sync
3 Password is set to Magic and this folder is pending syn-
chronization
4 Password is set to Magic and is out of sync
DomainPwdValue Domain password for this folder
Should host records be Magic for this folder. Return values are:
SyncHosts 0 No, do not synchronize host records in this folder
1 Yes, synchronize host records in this folder
SyncHostsStatus Status of host record synchronization for this folder. Return val-
- 1422 -
ues are:
2 This is a Magic folder but host records are not set to Magic,
or host records are set to Magic and are in sync
3 Host records are set to Magic and this folder is pending syn-
chronization
4 Host records are set to Magic and are out of sync
Are contacts Magic in this folder. Return values are:

SyncContact 0 No, contacts are not synchronized in this folder
1 Yes, contacts are synchronized in this folder
Status of synchronization of this contact type. Return values

are:
2 This is a Magic folder but this contact type is not set to
SyncContactStatus
Magic, or this contact type is set to Magic and is in sync
3 This contact type is set to Magic and this folder is pending
synchronization
4 This contact type is set to Magic and is out of sync
PartyID PartyID of this contact
OrganizationName Organization name of this contact
JobTitle Job title of this contact
FName First (given) name of this contact
LName Last (family) name of this contact
Address1 Address, first line, of this contact
Address2 Address, second line, of this contact
City City of this contact
StateProvince State or province of this contact
Is the StateProvince value a state or a province. Return values

are:
StateProvinceChoice
S State
P Province
PostalCode Postal code of this contact
Country Country of this contact
FullCountry Full country name of this contact
Phone Phone number of this contact
- 1423 -
Fax Fax number of this contact
EmailAddress Email address of this contact
PhoneExt Phone extension of this contact
SameAs Model for this contact
Is Registrant contact information Magic in this folder. Return

values are:
SyncContactRegistrant
0 No, Registrant is not synchronized in this folder
1 Yes, Registrant is synchronized in this folder
Is Admin contact information Magic in this folder. Return val-

ues are:
SyncContactAdmin
0 No, Admin contact is not synchronized in this folder
1 Yes, Admin contact is synchronized in this folder
Is Tech contact information Magic in this folder. Return values

are:
SyncContactTech
0 No, Tech contact is not synchronized in this folder
1 Yes, Tech contact is synchronized in this folder
Is Auxiliary Billing contact information Magic in this folder.

Return values are:
SyncContactAuxBilling
0 No, Auxiliary Billing contact is not synchronized in this folder
1 Yes, Auxiliary Billing contact is synchronized in this folder
FolderNameEnc Name of this folder
Is this a Traffic Only account. Return values are:

TrafficOnly True This is a Traffic Only account
False This is not a Traffic Only account
Is this a Name Only account. Return values are:

NameOnly True This is a Name Only account
False This is not a Name Only account
Is parking enabled for this account. Return values are:

ParkingEnabled True Parking is enabled for this account
False Parking is not enabled for this account

ErrCount
the Err(1 toErrCount) values.

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 1424 -
Notes
Example
The following query makes a folder Magic, adds a folder description, makes auto-renew
Magic and turns autorenew on for the folder, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=UpdateDomainFolder& uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
FolderName=ResellFolder2&FolderType=1&Description=hello&
AutoRenewSync=1&AutoRenew=1&ResponseType=xml
In the response, a Result code 1 and an ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was suc-
cessful:
Output

<UpdateResult>
<FolderName>ResellFolder2</FolderName>
<Result>1</Result>
<UpdateTex-
t><Folder><FolderDescription>test</FolderDescription>
<FolderType>1</FolderType><Renew><SyncRenew>1</SyncRenew>
<RenewStatus>Yes</Re-
newStatus></Renew></Folder></UpdateText>
</UpdateResult>
<Folder>
<FolderID>9080</FolderID>
<FolderName>ResellFolder2</FolderName>
<FolderDescription>
<![CDATA[ hello]]>
- 1425 -
</FolderDescription>
<FolderType>1</FolderType>
<FolderDomainCount>0</FolderDomainCount>
<DNS>
<SyncDNS>0</SyncDNS>
</DNS>
<Renew>
<SyncRenew>1</SyncRenew>
<SyncRenewStatus>2</SyncRenewStatus>
<RenewStatus>Yes</RenewStatus>
</Renew>
<RegLock>
<SyncRegLock>0</SyncRegLock>
</RegLock>
<DomainPwd>
<SyncDomainPwd>0</SyncDomainPwd>
</DomainPwd>
<Hosts>
<SyncHosts>0</SyncHosts>
</Hosts>
<Contacts>
<SyncContacts>0</SyncContacts>
</Contacts>
</Folder>
<FolderNameEnc>ResellFolder2</FolderNameEnc>
<TrafficOnly>False</TrafficOnly>
<NameOnly>False</NameOnly>
<Command>UPDATEDOMAINFOLDER</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
- 1426 -
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainFolder
UpdateExpiredDomains
Description
Definition
Reactivate an expired domain in real time.
Usage
Use this command to reactivate a domain after it has expired, while it is in Expired
status.
This command reactivates a domain in real time. Before a domain expires, use the
Extend command to renew it. We recommend renewing at least a week before a domain
expires.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/DomainManager.asp?tab=expireddomains
- 1427 -
On the my domains page, my domains tab, expired subtab, clicking on the name of an
expired domain calls the UpdateExpiredDomains command.
Constraints
l The domain must be in Expired status. The registrar sets the duration of the grace
period between expiration and deletion from the registrars database. To retrieve a
list of expired domains, use the GetDomains command with parameter Tab-
b=ExpiredDomains.
l Customer must have sufficient funds. The charge for reactivation is the same as a
one-year renewal.
Input parameters


Domain name (for example, example.-

com)
Number of years to add to the domain

NumYears Required registration. Limit is ten years from 10
today.

- 1428 -

Success status of this query. True indicates that the update
Status
was successful.
OrderID Order identification number

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests the reactivation of expired domain resellerdocs.com, and
Query
command=UpdateExpiredDomains&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
DomainName=resellerdocs.com&responsetype=xml
In the response, the Status value True, and an OrderID number, indicate that the query
was successful:
Output
- 1429 -

<ReactivateDomainName>
<Status>True</Status>
</ReactivateDomainName>
<Command>UPDATEEXPIREDDOMAINS</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l Extend
l Extend_RGP
l GetDomainExp
l GetExtendInfo
l GetRenew
l InsertNewOrder
l SetRenew
UpdateHostPackagePricing
Description
Definition
- 1430 -
Use this command to change the selling price of Web hosting components, at different
quantity levels.
Usage
Use this command to set your selling prices for Web hosting components, and to set the
price breaks at increasing quantity levels.
This command allows you to set prices either for retail customers or for one subaccount.
Availability
Below the Set Component Unit Pricing table, the save changes button calls the
UpdateHostPackagePricing command.
Constraints
l The price breaks for this accounts customers must come into effect at the same
quantity levels as this accounts wholesale price breaks. For example, if you
receive a wholesale price break at 20 units, any retail price break you offer to your
customers must be at 20 units; it cannot be at 15 or 25.
Input parameters

- 1431 -

Login ID of subaccount for which you

SubID Optional want to set wholesale prices. If omitted, 20
this command sets retail prices.
Number of price brackets in this

PriceBreakCount Optional 2
response
In the pricing structure for this account,

the lower end of quantity range X for this
QtyX component. For example, if Qty1=1 and
X=1 to PriceBreakCount Recommended Qty2=5, the prices in the Qty1=1 node 2
apply to quantities of 1 to 4 of each Web
hosting component listed in this query
string.
Price of each Web storage unit in this

StoragePriceX Optional quantity bracket, in DD.cc format. Each 1000.00
Web storage unit contains 1GB.
Price of each bandwidth unit in this quant-

BandwidthPriceX Optional ity bracket, in DD.cc format. Each band- 1000.00
width unit contains 20GB.
Price of each POP email unit in this

POPPriceX Optional quantity bracket, in DD.cc format. Each 1000.00
POP mail unit contains 10 email boxes.
Price of each SQL database unit in this

DatabasePriceX Optional quantity bracket, in DD.cc format. Each 1000.00
database unit contains 250MB.


In the wholesale pricing structure for this account, the lower
ResellerQtyX
(In HTML output, the output parameters
one ResellerQty=1 and the next largest is ResellerQty=5, the
for each package are numbered; X=1 to
prices in the ResellerQty=1 node apply to quantities of 1 to 4 of
PackageCount)
each Web hosting component listed in this query string
In the retail (selling price) structure for this account, the lower
RetailQtyX
- 1432 -
one RetailQty=1 and the next largest is RetailQty=5, the prices
in the RetailQty=1 node apply to quantities of 1 to 4 of each
Web hosting component listed in this query string.
Cost to this account (wholesale price) of bandwidth units in

ResellerBandwidthPriceX
this quantity range. Each bandwidth unit contains 20GB.
Selling (retail) price of bandwidth units in this quantity range.

RetailBandwidthPriceX
Each bandwidth unit contains 20GB.
Cost to this account (wholesale price) of Web storage units in

ResellerWebStoragePriceX
this quantity range. Each Web hosting unit contains 1GB.
Selling (retail) price of Web storage units in this quantity range.

RetailWebStoragePriceX
Each Web hosting unit contains 1GB.
Cost to this account (wholesale price) of SQL database stor-

ResellerDBStoragePriceX age units in this quantity range. Each SQL database unit con-
tains 250MB.
Selling (retail) price of SQL database storage units in this quant-

RetailDBStoragePriceX
ity range. Each SQL database unit contains 250MB.
Cost to this account (wholesale price) of POP email units to

ResellerPOPMailPriceX include in this quantity range. Each POP mail unit contains 10
email boxes.
Selling (retail) price of POP email units to include in this quant-

RetailPOPMailPriceX
ity range. Each POP mail unit contains 10 email boxes
PackageCount Number of quantity brackets listed in this response

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 1433 -
Example
The following query changes selling prices of Web hosting components at different
quantity levels, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=UPDATEHOSTPACKAGEPRICING&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
PriceBreakCount=4&QTY1=1&StoragePrice1=1.00&
BandwidthPrice1=1.75&POPPrice1=1.75&
DatabasePrice1=3.75&QTY2=5&StoragePrice2=.39&
BandwidthPrice2=.65&POPPrice2=.45&
DatabasePrice2=4.50&QTY3=10&BandwidthPrice3=.40&
POPPrice3=.24&QTY4=20&BandwidthPrice4=.70&ResponseType=XML
In the response, a list of component costs and prices confirms that the query was suc-
cessful:
Output

<components>
<ResellerBandwidthPrice>1.00</ResellerBandwidthPrice>
<RetailBandwidthPrice>1.75</RetailBandwidthPrice>
<RetailWebStoragePrice>1.00</RetailWebStoragePrice>
<RetailPOPMailPrice>1.75</RetailPOPMailPrice>
</components>
<components>
- 1434 -
</components>
<components>
</components>
<components>
<ResellerWebStoragePrice />
<RetailWebStoragePrice />
<ResellerPOPMailPrice />
<RetailPOPMailPrice />
</components>
<Command>UPDATEHOSTPACKAGEPRICING</Command>
- 1435 -
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
l GetHostAccount
l GetStorageUsage
l HostPackageDefine
l HostPackageDelete
l HostPackageModify
l HostPackageView
l HostParkingPage
UpdateMetaTag
Description
Definition
Add or update the HTML metatags for one of a domains host records.
- 1436 -
Usage
Use this command to raise the probability that a search engine will find this domain.
Availability
Log on to resellertest.enom.com with login ID resellid, password resellpw.
https://re-
sellertest.enom.-
com/domains/metatags.asp?HostID=11415002&DomainNameID=152533676
On the meta tags page, the save changes button calls the UpdateMetaTag command.
Constraints
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Metatag host ID, our internal tracking

MetaTagHostID Required 8
number. You can retrieve host IDs using
- 1437 -

the GetRegHosts command.
Recommended to
Content to display in the browser title
TitleBar optimize search 100
bar. Replace spaces with +.
ranking
Recommended to
Content to display in search engine res-
SiteDescription optimize search 250
ults. Replace spaces with +.
ranking
Recommended to
List of keywords for search engines.
Keywords optimize search 250
Separate keywords with +.
ranking


TitleBar New title to display in browser title bar
SiteDescription New description to display in search engine results
Keywords New search-engine keywords for this host ID
DomainNameID 9-digit domain name ID, our internal tracking number

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 1438 -
Example
The following query sets values for the metatags, and sends the response in XML
format:
Query
command=UpdateMetaTag&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&MetaTagHostID=11415002&
TitleBar=MY+COOL+TITLE&SiteDescription=MY+SITE+DESCRIPTION&
Keywords=MY+SITE+KEYWORDS&ResponseType=XML
In the response, metatag values that match your desired content, and an ErrCount value
0, confirm that the query was successful:
Output

<metatags>
<titlebar>MY COOL TITLE</titlebar>
<sitedescription>MY SITE DESCRIPTION</sitedescription>
<keywords>MY SITE KEYWORDS</keywords>
</metatags>
<Command>UPDATEMETATAG</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
- 1439 -
Related commands
l GetHosts
l GetMetaTag
l GetRegHosts
l SetHosts
UpdateNameServer
Description
Definition
Change the IP address of a name server in the Registrys records.
Usage
Use this command when the IP address of a name server changes.
Availability
http://www.enom.com/domains/RegNameServer.asp
In the Update a Name Server IP section, clicking the submit button calls the
UpdateNameServer command.
Constraints
l The domain name of the name server must belong to this account.
l eNom must be the authoritative registrar (in the Registrys records) for the root
domain.
l The registrar lock for the name server domain must be set to off while you update
name servers. Oncethe name server IP has been updated, you can (and we recom-
mend that you do) switch the registrar lockback on.
- 1440 -
Input parameters

Old IP address of the name server in the

OldIP Required 15
Registrys records
New IP address of the name server in

NewIP Required 15
the Registrys records
Use name of the name server, in the

NS Required 84
Registrys records


NSSuccess 1 indicates that the name server IP update is successful
RRPCode Registry processing status code
RRPText Text explanation of registry code

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 1441 -
Notes
Example
The following query changes the IP of name server dns1.resellerdocs.com and sends
Query
command=updatenameserver&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
OldIP=127.0.0.1&NewIP=127.0.0.2&
NS=dns1.resellerdocs.com&responsetype=xml
In the response, the NsSuccess value 1 and RRPText value Command completed suc-
cessfully confirm that the query was successful:
Output

<Command>UPDATENAMESERVER</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
- 1442 -
</debug>
Related commands
l CheckNSStatus
l DeleteNameServer
l GetDNS
l GetDNSStatus
l ModifyNS
l ModifyNSHosting
UpdateNotificationAmount
Description
Definition
Update the account balance amount at which you want to be notified.
Usage
Use this command to specify the account balance at which you want a reminder to refill
your account.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/myaccount/Settings.asp?tab=balance
The save changes button calls the UpdateNotificationAmount command.
Constraints
- 1443 -
Input parameters

Points/$US amount at which you want

us to send you a reminder email that this
NotifyAmount Required 9999.99
account needs refilling. Use DD.cc
format



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 1444 -
Example
The following query changes the notification amount to 505 points/$US and sends the
Query
command=UpdateNotificationAmount&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
NotifyAmount=505&responsetype=xml
Output
<Update>Successful</Update>
<Command>UPDATENOTIFICATIONAMOUNT</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
[CDATA]
</debug>
- 1445 -
Related commands
l GetBalance
l RefillAccount
UpdatePushList
Description
Definition
Update a list of domains to push into another account.
Usage
Use this command to push names from one eNom account to another.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/Push.asp?DomainNameID=152533882
UpdatePushList is not implemented on enom.com. However, the submit button on the
push a name page calls PushDomain, a similar command.
Constraints
l Both the origin and destination accounts must be in our system.
Input parameters
- 1446 -

LoginID of the account to push the

PushToLoginID Required 16
names into
CRLF-delimited list of domain names

DomainList Required (URLEncode value for CRLF is 4000
%0D%0A).


SuccessfulPush True if successful or False otherwise

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query requests that resellerdocs2.net and resellerdocs3.info be pushed to
account ichiro, and requests the response in XML format:
- 1447 -
Query
command=UpdatePushList&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
PushToLoginID=ichiro&domainlist=resellerdocs2.net
%0D%0Aresellerdocs3.info&responsetype=xml
In the response, the SuccessfulPush values of Yes indicate that each domain was
pushed successfully:
Output

<UPDATEPUSHLIST>
<PUSH-DOMAIN>
<DomainName>resellerdocs2.net</DomainName>
<DomainListWrongFormat>Valid</DomainListWrongFormat>
<DomainNameNotInYourAc-
count>Yes</DomainNameNotInYourAccount>
<SuccessfulPush>Yes</SuccessfulPush>
</PUSH-DOMAIN>
<PUSH-DOMAIN>
<DomainName>resellerdocs3.info</DomainName>
<DomainListWrongFormat>Valid</DomainListWrongFormat>
<DomainNameNotInYourAc-
count>Yes</DomainNameNotInYourAccount>
<SuccessfulPush>Yes</SuccessfulPush>
</PUSH-DOMAIN>
</UPDATEPUSHLIST>
<Command>UPDATEPUSHLIST</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
- 1448 -
Related commands
l PushDomain
l TP_CancelOrder
l TP_CreateOrder
l TP_GetOrder
l TP_GetOrderDetail
l TP_ResubmitLocked
l TP_SubmitOrder
UpdateRenewalSettings
Description
Definition
Update the settings regarding our notifying your customers about domain renewals.
Usage
Use this command to set or change the way in which we notify your customers about
upcoming domain renewals.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/myaccount/RenewalSettings.asp?RenewalSetting=0
The save changes button calls the UpdateRenewalSettings command.
Constraints
- 1449 -
Input parameters

Renewal setting. Permitted values are:

0 Do not contact my customers for
renewal
1 Email my customers 25 and 10 days
RenewalSetting Optional 1
before expiration; send them to my Web
site to renew
2 Contact and charge my customers for
renewals
BCC me on all email correspondence

sent to my customers. Permitted values
RenewalBCC Optional are: 1
0 Do not BCC me
1 BCC me
Do I accept eNoms credit card pro-

Optional; must be cessing agreement? Permitted values
accepted before are:
AcceptTerms you can use our 0 I do not accept eNoms credit card pro- 1
credit card processing agreement
cessing services 1 I accept eNoms credit card processing
agreement
Recommended URL where customers can renew their

URL when Rene- domains; use format www.Do- 63
walSetting =1 mainName.com

- 1450 -

AcceptTermsStatus Success status of updating credit card terms setting
RenewalSetting Success status of updating renewal settings

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query sets preferences for notifying customers about domain renewals,
Query
command=UPDATERENEWALSETTINGS&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
RenewalSetting=2&RenewalBCC=1&AcceptTerms=1&
URL=www.resellerdocs.com&ResponseType=XML
In the response, the return values Successful and the ErrCount value 0 confirm that the
Output
- 1451 -

<UpdateRenewalSettings>
<AcceptTermsStatus>Successful</AcceptTermsStatus>
<RenewalSetting>Successful</RenewalSetting>
</UpdateRenewalSettings>
<Command>UPDATERENEWALSETTINGS</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Server>LOCALHOST</Server>
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l GetCusPreferences
ValidatePassword
Description
Definition
Validate a password for a domain name.
Usage
Use this command to determine whether the password for a domain name is valid.
Availability
- 1452 -

http://access.enom.com/
On access.enom.com, the LOG-IN button calls the ValidatePassword command.
Constraints
l The domain name must exist.
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Password to access and manage the

DomainPassword Required 60
domain name.


- 1453 -
ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query asks whether resellerdocs2pw is the domain password for reseller-
docs2.net, and requests the response in XML format:
Query
command=validatepassword&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw
&sld=resellerdocs2&tld=net&domainpassword=resellerdocs2pw&
responsetype=xml
In the response, the error count of 0 confirms that resellerdocs2pw is the domain pass-
word for resellerdocs2.net:
Output

<Command>VALIDATEPASSWORD</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
- 1454 -
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ] ]>
</debug>
Related commands
l GetAllDomains
l GetDomainCount
l GetDomainExp
l GetDomainInfo
l GetDomains
l GetExtendInfo
l GetPasswordBit
l GetRegLock
l GetRenew
l SetPassword
l SetRegLock
l SetRenew
l StatusDomain
WBLConfigure
Description
Definition
Configure a Business Listing for the WhoisBusinessListings.com directory.
Usage
Use this command to create or edit the Business Listing for a domain name.
Availability
- 1455 -
https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/control-panel/panels/wbl_main.as-
px?domainnameid=152533676
The Submit button calls the WBLConfigure command.
Constraints
l The domain must be registered here but may use name servers other than ours.
Input parameters

Comma-separated list of domains to con-

DomainList Required 80,000
figure. Limit of 200 domains
If this is a bulk edit (involving more than

RequestName Optional one domain name) you may assign a job 255
name for tracking purposes
Should our database keep any existing

configuration information that is not sup-
plied in this query string?
Optional; default is Use PersistExisting=1 to keep existing
PersistExisting 1
1 information.
Use PersistExisting=0 to empty any
fields that are not supplied in this query
string.
Optional; default is Set automatic renewal for Business List-

Renew no the first time ing before it expires? Permitted values 3
Business Listing is are yes and no.
- 1456 -

configured or when
PersistExisting=0.
If Per-
sistExisting=1, the
current setting
remains unchanged
when the con-
figuration is
updated.
0 the first time Busi-
ness Listing is con-
figured or when
PersistExisting=0.
If Per- Enable setting for Business Listing. Per-
Enable 1
sistExisting=1, the mitted values are 0 and 1.
current setting
remains unchanged
when the con-
figuration is
updated.
Categories in which this Business List-

ing should be displayed in the
WhoisBusinessListings.com directory.
1 Arts & Entertainment
CategoryID1 is 2 Business
Optional; default is 3 Automotive
10 the first time 4 Consumer Electronics
Business Listing is 5 Culture & Society
configured or when 6 Domain For Sale
PersistExisting=0. 7 Education & Instruction
CategoryID1 If Per- 8 Fashion, Style & Personal Care
... sistExisting=1, the 9 Food & Drink 2
CategoryID5 current setting 10 Other
remains unchanged 11 Health & Medicine
when the con- 12 Hobbies, Games & Toys
figuration is Cat- 13 Home & Garden
egoryID2 through 14 Computers & Internet
CategoryID5 are 15 Legal
optional. 16 Personal Finance
17 Professional Services
18 Real Estate
19 Relationships & Family
20 Sports & Fitness
21 Travel & Transportation
- 1457 -

Company name for this Business List-
ing. Permitted values are alphanumeric
CompanyName Required characters and some special characters 500
(code-sensitive characters such as & %
/ \ # @ will cause the query to fail)
Description of the company and/or its

business. Permitted values are alpha-
numeric characters and some special
CompanyDescription Optional 500
characters (code-sensitive characters
such as & % / \ # @ will cause the query
to fail)
StreetAddress Optional Street address for the business 160
StreetAddress2 Optional Street address, second line 160
City Optional City 60
StateProvince Optional State or province of the business 60
PostalCode Optional Postal code for the business 60
Country. The two-letter country code is a

Country Optional 2
permitted format.
Required if you sup-

ply any Number of descriptive fields supplied in
FieldCount 2
FieldNameX and this query string.
FieldTextX
Type of information being supplied in

FieldTextX. Permitted values are:
Web Site(s)
Company Slogan
Phone Number
Email Address
Fax Number
Company Description
Hours of Operation
FieldNameX Optional Other 25
Contact Info
Associations
About This Domain
For Sale Price
For Sale Listing Agent(s)
For Sale Status
Promotions
Personal Description
Blogs
- 1458 -

Tags
Text supplied by customer for the field

FieldTextX Optional designate above. All characters are per- 500
mitted.


Report number for this edit request. Run this report to retrieve
ReportRequestID
results for all the domains listed in the query string
DomainName The first domain name in the query string
Results for the first domain in the query string. This code
reflects only the immediate results for the first domain in the
string. To report results to your customers and allow for queue
delays, we recommend using RPT_GetReport rather than this
ResultCode output.
No code Successful configuration
2 Domain not found
3 Domain not owned by specified account
4 Service not purchased for this domain
Verbal result for the first domain listed in the query string. This
description reflects only the immediate results for the first
ResultDesc domain in the string. To report results to your customers and
allow for queue delays, we recommend using RPT_GetReport
rather than this output.

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
- 1459 -
Notes
Example
The following query submits a configuration request for four domain names and sends
Query
command=WBLConfigure&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
DomainList=resellerdocs.com,qsdsqdqsd.com,
quebecrod.com,quebecrod111.com&RequestName=ThisJob&
PersistExisting=1&Renew=no&Enable=1&CategoryID1=10&
CompanyName=Company%20name&
CompanyDescription=Company%20description&
Logo=&StreetAddress=123%20Main&StreetAddress2=&
City=Townsville&StateProvince=Maine&PostalCode=10000&
Country=US&FieldCount=2&FieldName1=Company%20Slogan&
FieldText1=We%20have%20a%20slogan&FieldName2=Promotions&
FieldText2=We%20promote%20peace!&ResponseType=xml
In the response, a ReportRequestID value indicates that the query ran successfully and
at least one domain was configured successfully:
Output

<ReportRequestID>828</ReportRequestID>
<ResultCode />
<ResultDesc>
Auto Renew Setting Updated.Company Information Updated.Cat-
egories Updated.
- 1460 -
Address Updated.Detailed Setting(s) Updated.Visbility Set-

ting Updated.
</ResultDesc>
<Command>WBLCONFIGURE</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddToCart
l GetAllDomains
l GetDomainInfo
l InsertNewOrder
l PurchaseServices
l RPT_GetReport
l WBLGetCategories
l WBLGetFields
l WBLGetStatus
WBLGetCategories
Description
Definition
- 1461 -
Retrieve a list of Business Listing categories.

Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of Business Listing categories.
Availability
The Categories section is populated using the WBLGetCategories command.
Constraints
Input parameters


- 1462 -

CategoryID Identification number for a Business Listing category
CategoryName Business Listing category name
CategoryDesc Category description

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of categories and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=WBLGetCategories&uid=resellid&
Output
- 1463 -
<Categories>
<Category>
<CategoryID>1</CategoryID>
<CategoryName>Arts & Entertainment</CategoryName>
<CategoryDesc/>
</Category>
<Category>
<CategoryName>Business</CategoryName>
<CategoryDesc/>
</Category>
<Category>
<CategoryName>Automotive</CategoryName>
<CategoryDesc/>
</Category>
<Category>
<CategoryName>Consumer Electronics</CategoryName>
<CategoryDesc/>
</Category>
<Category>
<CategoryName>Culture & Society</CategoryName>
<CategoryDesc/>
</Category>
<Category>
<CategoryName>Domain For Sale</CategoryName>
<CategoryDesc/>
</Category>
<Category>
<CategoryName>Education & Instruction</CategoryName>
<CategoryDesc/>
</Category>
<Category>
<CategoryName>Fashion, Style & Personal Care</CategoryName>
<CategoryDesc/>
</Category>
- 1464 -
<Category>
<CategoryName>Food & Drink</CategoryName>
<CategoryDesc/>
</Category>
<Category>
<CategoryName>Other</CategoryName>
<CategoryDesc/>
</Category>
<Category>
<CategoryName>Health & Medicine</CategoryName>
<CategoryDesc/>
</Category>
<Category>
<CategoryName>Hobbies, Games & Toys</CategoryName>
<CategoryDesc/>
</Category>
<Category>
<CategoryName>Home & Garden</CategoryName>
<CategoryDesc/>
</Category>
<Category>
<CategoryName>Computers & Internet</CategoryName>
<CategoryDesc/>
</Category>
<Category>
<CategoryName>Legal</CategoryName>
<CategoryDesc/>
</Category>
<Category>
<CategoryName>Personal Finance</CategoryName>
<CategoryDesc/>
</Category>
<Category>
- 1465 -
<CategoryName>Professional Services</CategoryName>
<CategoryDesc/>
</Category>
<Category>
<CategoryName>Real Estate</CategoryName>
<CategoryDesc/>
</Category>
<Category>
<CategoryName>Relationships & Family</CategoryName>
<CategoryDesc/>
</Category>
<Category>
<CategoryName>Sports & Fitness</CategoryName>
<CategoryDesc/>
</Category>
<Category>
<CategoryName>Travel & Transportation</CategoryName>
<CategoryDesc/>
</Category>
</Categories>
<Command>WBLGETCATEGORIES</Command>
<MinPeriod/>
<Site>eNom</Site>
<IsLockable/>
<IsRealTimeTLD/>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug></debug>
- 1466 -
Related commands
l AddToCart
l GetAllDomains
l GetDomainInfo
l InsertNewOrder
l PurchaseServices
l RPT_GetReport
l WBLConfigure
l WBLGetFields
l WBLGetStatus
WBLGetFields
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of the descriptive fields available for configuring a Business Listing.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of descriptive fields available for Business Listing.
Availability
In the Business Listing Details section, WBLGetFields is used to populate the Title drop-
down menu.
Constraints
- 1467 -
Input parameters



FieldID Identification number of the field
FieldName Descriptive name of the field

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 1468 -
Example
The following query retrieves a list of descriptive fields for Business Listing, and sends
Query
com-
mand=WBLGetFields&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&responsetype=xml
In the response, an ErrCount value of 0 confirms that the query ran successfully:
Output

<Fields>
<Field>
<FieldID>1</FieldID>
<FieldName>Web Site(s)</FieldName>
<MaxLength>500</MaxLength>
</Field>
<Field>
<FieldName>Company Slogan</FieldName>
</Field>
<Field>
<FieldName>Phone Number</FieldName>
</Field>
.
.
.
</Fields>
<Command>WBLGETFIELDS</Command>
<MinPeriod />
- 1469 -
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddToCart
l GetAllDomains
l GetDomainInfo
l InsertNewOrder
l PurchaseServices
l RPT_GetReport
l WBLConfigure
l WBLGetCategories
l WBLGetStatus
WBLGetStatus
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of the possible statuses for Business Listing.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve a list of the possible statuses for Business Listing.
Availability
- 1470 -

https://resellertest.enom.com/domains/Domain-Manager.aspx
Business Listing statuses are reflected in the icons that display in the Business Listing
column.
Constraints
l The report ID must match the login ID.
Input parameters



StatusID Identification number for a Business Listing status
Description Verbal description of the status

ErrCount
- 1471 -
ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of statuses of Business Listing, and sends the
Query
command=WBLGetStatus&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
ResponseType=xml

Output

<Templates>
<StatusIDs>
<StatusID>-1</StatusID>
<Description>N/A</Description>
</StatusIDs>
<StatusIDs>
- 1472 -
<Description>Available</Description>
</StatusIDs>
<StatusIDs>
<Description>Purchased, Not Configured</Description>
</StatusIDs>
<StatusIDs>
<Description>Configured</Description>
</StatusIDs>
<StatusIDs>
<Description>Expired</Description>
</StatusIDs>
<StatusIDs>
<Description>Configured, Visible</Description>
</StatusIDs>
<StatusIDs>
<Description>Configured, Not Visible</Description>
</StatusIDs>
</Templates>
<Command>WBLGETSTATUS</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
- 1473 -
Related commands
l AddToCart
l GetAllDomains
l GetDomainInfo
l InsertNewOrder
l PurchaseServices
l RPT_GetReport
l WBLConfigure
l WBLGetCategories
l WBLGetFields
WebHostCreateDirectory
Description
Definition
Create a directory, or a directory structure, in your Web hosting account.
Usage
You can create new directories in two ways: using this command, or via FTP.
You must create new directories if you want host records other than www and @ to point
to a different location than www and @.
You must create new directories if you want to publish more than one Web site using this
Web hosting account (if the account does not have directories, all domain names asso-
ciated with the account will resolve to the same home page).
You may create new directories to organize your account and files.
Directories created with this command have read and write, but not execute, per-
missions. If you want files in a directory to be executable, make the directory executable
using the EnableFolderApp command.
Availability
resellwebpw.
- 1474 -
http://webhostingtest.ehost-ser-
vices.com/websites/hostheader.asp?hn=@&d=resellerdocs.com
To the right of the Create a New Directory text box, clicking the CREATE button and
then the SAVE HOST HEADER SETTINGS button calls the WebHostCreateDirectory
command.
Constraints
Input parameters

Name of the directory to be created. For a sub-

directory, use format Dir-
(must be full path from root).


- 1475 -
ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query creates a directory named support in Web hosting account resell-
Query
command=WebHostCreateDirectory&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
hostaccount=resellwebid&Directory=support&ResponseType=XML
In the response, the ErrCount value 0 confirms that the directory was created suc-
cessfully:
Output

<Command>WEBHOSTCREATEDIRECTORY</Command>
- 1476 -
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainHeader
l ListDomainHeaders
WebHostCreatePOPBox
Description
Definition
Create a POP mail box (a single email address) for a Web hosting account.
Usage
Use this command to create a POP mail box for a Web hosting account.
Availability
resellwebpw.
http://webhostingtest.ehost-services.com/email/accounts.asp
The SAVE ALL CHANGES button calls the WebHostCreatePOPBox command.
- 1477 -
Constraints
l The Web hosting account must belong to this domain account.
l The domain name must be associated with this Web hosting account.
Input parameters

UserName Required Email alias for this POP mailbox 30
Should UserName have administrative

with this domain name in this Web host-
ing account? Administrative privileges
allow this user to reset the password for
mailboxes, and delete mailboxes. Per-
mitted values are:
0 Regular user (can change the pass-
IsAdmin Optional word for their own mailbox but no one 1
elses)
1 Administrator (when this user logs on to
Webmail and goes to the admin page, he
or she can see all mailboxes for this
domain name in this Web hosting
account, can reset passwords for any or
all mailboxes, and can delete any or all
mailboxes)
Password Required Access password for this POP mailbox 50
Name to display in the From box of

DisplayName Optional 60
emails
- 1478 -

SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)


MXSet Success status of creating the MX host record for POP mail.

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query creates POP mailbox poptest3 for domain resellerdocs.com and
Query
command=WEBHOSTCREATEPOPBOX&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
- 1479 -
hostac-
count=resellwebid&Username=poptest3&Password=poptest3&
DisplayName=poptest3&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&
responsetype=xml
Output

<MXSet>True</MXSet>
<Command>WEBHOSTCREATEPOPBOX</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainHeader
l CreateHostAccount
l GetDomainHeader
l ListDomainHeaders
- 1480 -
WebHostDeletePOPBox
Description
Definition
Delete a POP mailbox from a Web hosting account.
Usage
Use this command to delete POP mailboxes from a Web hosting account. To delete a
POP mailbox that is in a domain account, use the commands in the API catalog for
domain accounts.
Availability
resellwebpw.
In the Delete User column, any Delete link calls the WebHostDeletePOPBox command.
Constraints
l The domain name must belong to this domain account, and to this Web hosting
account.
Input parameters
- 1481 -

Name of the Web hosting account from

which the POP mailbox is to be deleted
Email alias of the POP box that is to be

deleted

SLD Required enom in enom.com) of the domain asso- 63
ciated with this user name
Top-level domain name (extension) of the

TLD Required 15
domain associated with this user name

(default),HTML, or XML.


ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully
Notes
- 1482 -
Example
The following query deletes POP mailbox jimmy.doe and sends the response in XML
format:
Query
command=WEBHOSTDELETEPOPBOX&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
hostaccount=resellwebid&Username=jimmy.doe&
sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&responsetype=xml
Output

<Command>WEBHOSTDELETEPOPBOX</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainHeader
l CreateHostAccount
l GetDomainHeader
l ListDomainHeaders
- 1483 -
WebHostGetCartItem
Description
Definition
Retrieve details on a single Web hosting account in a shopping cart.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve information on a Web hosting item in the shopping cart.
Use the GetCartContent command from the API Commands catalog to retrieve the
CartItemID value.
Availability
http://enomson/cart.asp
For a Web hosting account, the Product Description column displays the results of the
WebHostGetCartItem command.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 1484 -

ID of a shopping cart item. To retrieve

cart item IDs, use the GetCartContent
CartItemID Required 10
command from the domain account API
catalog.


ItemID Shopping cart item ID
UserID Web hosting account name
Password Web hosting account password
Domain Domain association for this Web hosting account
HostPackageID Host package ID number
OverageOptionID Overage option ID number

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully
Notes
- 1485 -
Example
The following query retrieves details on cart item 389123, a Web hosting account, and
Query
command=WebHostGetCartItem&&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
CartItemID=389123&responsetype=xml
In the response, the correct item ID and an ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was
successful:
Output

<Item>
<Domain />
<HostPackageID>1</HostPackageID>
<OverageOptionID>3</OverageOptionID>
</Item>
<Command>WEBHOSTGETCARTITEM</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
- 1486 -
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
l GetHostAccount
l GetHostAccounts
l HostPackageDefine
l HostPackageView
WebHostGetOverageOptions
Description
Definition
Retrieve the permitted options for handling bandwidth overages.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the permitted valuesID numbers and brief descriptions
for handling bandwidth overages. Overage handling is set by the end user on each indi-
vidual Web hosting account.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/wsg/hostingconfig.asp?
Step 2 displays the options for the WebHostGetOverageOptions command.
- 1487 -
Constraints
Input parameters



OptionIDX
(Responses in HTML and text format are ID number of bandwidth-overage option X
numbered, X=1 to 3
DescriptionX Text description of bandwidth-overage option X

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully
- 1488 -
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves bandwidth-overage-handling options, and sends the
Query
command=webhostgetoverageoptions&
uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&responsetype=xml
In the response, a list of options for handling bandwidth overages indicates that the
Output

<OverageOptions>
<Description>
Automatically upgrade my bandwidth if I go over (Recom-
mended)</
Description>
</OverageOptions>
<OverageOptions>
<Description>Overage Protection</Description>
</OverageOptions>
<OverageOptions>
<Description>Temporarily disable until next month</De-
scription>
- 1489 -
</OverageOptions>
<Command>WEBHOSTGETOVERAGEOPTIONS</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
l GetHostAccount
l GetHostAccounts
l GetStorageUsage
l HostPackageDefine
l HostPackageDelete
l HostPackageModify
l HostPackageView
l HostParkingPage
- 1490 -
WebHostGetOverages
Description
Definition
List Web hosting accounts that have logged bandwidth overages, the nature and amount
of the overages, and the amount we have charged you for each overage.
Usage
Use this command if you are a reseller who does your own billing. This command lists
fees we have charged you, for overages accrued by you or your Web hosting customers.
We return information identified by Web hosting account name. You as a reseller must
use your own database to link that Web hosting account name to payment information.
Availability
http://enomson/wsg/hostingdetail.asp?HostAccount=resellwebid
The Current usage bars indicate overages for the current billing cycle.
Constraints
Input parameters

- 1491 -

Date for start of overage scan. Required

SinceDate Required 10
format is MM/DD/YYYY


WebHostIDX
Responses in HTML or text format are Web hosting account ID number, from our internal records
numbered, X=1 to OverageCount
Web hosting account name, and nature of the overage. For

DescriptionX accounts that have opted for a per-GB overage protection fee,
the description also states the amount of the overage.
BillDateX Date on which we originally billed you for this overage
AmountX Amount we billed you for this overage
Product number for this type of overage:

56 This account opted for overage protection, which pays a
per-GB fee for bandwidth overages
ProdTypeX 57 This account upgraded to a higher bandwidth limit during
this billing cycle. We calculate the per-GB fee and the extra
cost of the upgrade, compare the two, and charge you the
lower amount.
UnitsX Amount of the overage. Each unit is 1GB.
OverageCount Number of overages listed in this response
Language Language of this API response

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully
- 1492 -
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves overages for Web hosting accounts in domain name
account resellid, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=WEBHOSTGETOVERAGES&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
SinceDate=11/1/08&responsetype=xml
The response indicates that two Web hosting accounts had overages.
In Web hosting account FirstWebAccount (the Web hosting account name is parsed from
the Description return parameter), the account pays a per-GB fee (ProductType 56) for
overages, logged 50000MB (50 units) of bandwidth overages, and we billed resellid
$9.77 for this extra bandwidth.
Web hosting account SecondWebAccount also had a bandwidth overage. However, the
ProductType 57 indicates that this account was either set to upgrade when it reached its
bandwidth limit, or the owner manually upgraded during the billing cycle. Our billing sys-
tem compared the per-GB fee to the additional cost of the upgraded bandwidth package,
found the lower of the two amounts, and billed resellid the upgrade amount of $2.93.
Output

<OverageCharges>
<Overage>
<Description>FirstWebAccount - 50000MB Prior BWidth Over-
age</Description>
<BillDate>12/2/2003</BillDate>
- 1493 -
<Amount>$9.77</Amount>
<Units>50</Units>
</Overage>
<Overage>
<Description>SecondWebAccount - Prior BWidth Overage
Fee</Description>
<BillDate>12/2/2003</BillDate>
<Amount>$2.93</Amount>
<Units>15</Units>
</Overage>
</OverageCharges>
<OverageCount>2</OverageCount>
<Command>WEBHOSTGETOVERAGES</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
l GetHostAccount
- 1494 -
l WebHostGetStats
WebHostGetPackageComponentList
Description
Definition
For Web hosting package components, retrieve a list of unit sizes and quantities of units
permitted.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the permitted quantities and unit sizes of the components
of Web hosting packages.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/myaccount/HostingPricing.asp
In the Set Packages table, the menu boxes show the permitted quantities, and the lower
row of the column headers shows the sizes of units.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 1495 -


(default), HTML,or XML.

Status of this Web hosting account:
1 Host account is active
AccountStatusID 2 Account disabled for exceeding allowed monthly bandwidth
3 Account disabled for exceeding the 3000GB bandwidth limit
4, 5, 6, 7 Account disabled; contact customer service
ItemX
One permitted quantity of this component. Usually, each com-
Responses in HTML or text format are
ponent has several permitted quantities.
numbered, X=1 to YUnitCount
YUnitCount
In HTML or text responses, Y is the type Total number of permitted quantities of this component
of component
YUnitType Unit of measurement of this component
Number of UnitType in one unit of this component. For

YUnitSize example, if the UnitType for WebStorageUnit is GB and UnitS-
ize is 1, then each unit of Web storage is 1GB.

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully
- 1496 -
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the permitted quantities and unit sizes for Web hosting
package components, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=webhostgetpackageComponentList&uid=resellid&
pw=resellpw&hostaccount=resellwebid&responsetype=xml
In the response, a list of components and an ErrCount value of 0 confirm that the query
was successful:
Output

<ComponentList>
<WebStorageUnit>
<Item>2</Item>
<Item>3</Item>
<Item>4</Item>
<Item>5</Item>
.
.
.
<Count>22</Count>
<UnitType>GB</UnitType>
<UnitSize>1</UnitSize>
</WebStorageUnit>
<BandwidthUnit>
- 1497 -
<Item>2</Item>
<Item>3</Item>
<Item>4</Item>
<Item>5</Item>
.
.
.
<Count>33</Count>
<UnitType>GB</UnitType>
</BandwidthUnit>
<DatabaseUnit>
<Item>0</Item>
<Item>1</Item>
<Item>2</Item>
<Item>3</Item>
.
.
.
<Count>15</Count>
<UnitType>MB</UnitType>
</DatabaseUnit>
<POPUnit>
<Item>1</Item>
<Item>2</Item>
<Item>3</Item>
<Item>4</Item>
.
.
.
<Count>18</Count>
<UnitType />
</POPUnit>
</ComponentList>
<Command>WEBHOSTGETPACKAGECOMPONENTLIST</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
- 1498 -
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
l GetHostAccount
l GetHostAccounts
l GetStorageUsage
l HostPackageDefine
l HostPackageDelete
l HostPackageModify
l HostPackageView
l HostParkingPage
WebHostGetPackageMinimums
Description
Definition
Retrieve the minimum quantities of components permitted in Web hosting packages.
Usage
- 1499 -
Use this command to retrieve the minimum quantities of components you can include in
your Web hosting packages.
Availability
The Step 2 - Set Packages table reflects the constraints displayed with the
WebHostGetPackageMinimums command.
Constraints
Input parameters


- 1500 -

Minimum gigabytes of bandwidth, per month, allowed for Web

BandwidthGB
hosting packages
Minimum megabytes of Web content storage allowed for Web

WebStorageMB
hosting packages
Minimum megabytes of database storage allowed for Web

DBStorageMB
hosting packages
Minimum number of POP email boxes allowed for Web hosting

POPMailBoxes
packages

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves minimum quantities of the components of Web hosting
packages, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
- 1501 -
command=WebHostGetPackageMinimums&uid=resellid&
pw=resellpw&hostaccount=resellwebid&responsetype=xml
In the response, a list of package minimums indicates that the query was successful:
Output

<PackageMinimums>
</PackageMinimums>
<Command>WEBHOSTGETPACKAGEMINIMUMS</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
l GetHostAccount
l GetStorageUsage
l HostPackageDefine
- 1502 -
l HostPackageDelete
l HostPackageModify
l HostPackageView
l HostParkingPage
WebHostGetPackages
Description
Definition
View the configurations of Web hosting packages available to your retail customers.
Usage
Use this command to display the contents of the Web hosting packages available to your
retail customers.
Availability
The Set Packages table displays the results of the WebHostGetPackages command.
Constraints
- 1503 -
Input parameters

Show the wholesale price you pay for

ShowPrice Required each package. Permitted values are 0 1
and 1.


Responses in HTML or text format are numbered, X=1 to Pack-
PackageIDX
ageCount ID number for this Web hosting package
PackageNameX Name of this Web hosting package
Gigabytes of bandwidth per calendar month allocated to this

BandwidthGBX
Web hosting account
Megabytes of storage for Web site content available to this

WebStorageMBX
Web hosting account
ID number of the database configured for this Web hosting

DatabaseTypeIDX
account
DatabaseTypeX Type of database configured for this Web hosting account
ID number of operating system of the Web server for this Web

OSTypeIDX
hosting account
Operating system of the Web server for this Web hosting

OSTypeX
account
Megabytes of database storage allocated for this Web hosting

DBStorageMBX
account
POPMailBoxesX Number of POP email boxes allocated to this Web hosting
- 1504 -
account
Total number of Web hosting packages defined for this

PackageCount
account

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the Web hosting packages defined for account resellid and
Query
command=WebHostGetPackages&uid=resellid&
In the response, a list of packages and an ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was
successful:
Output
- 1505 -
<HostPackage>
<DatabaseTypeID>2</DatabaseTypeID>
</HostPackage>
<HostPackage>
<BandwidthMB>40</BandwidthMB>
</HostPackage>
.
.
.
<Command>WEBHOSTGETPACKAGES</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
- 1506 -
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
l GetHostAccount
l GetStorageUsage
l HostPackageDefine
l HostPackageDelete
l HostPackageModify
l HostPackageView
l HostParkingPage
WebHostGetPOPBoxes
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of the POP mailboxes in a Web hosting account.
Usage
Use this command to generate a list of POP mailboxes in a Web hosting account.
Availability
Log on to webhostingtest.ehostservices.com with Login ID resellid, password
resellpw.
http://webhostingtest.ehost-services.com/Default.asp?
In the Email Accounts section, the Edit link calls the WebHostGetPOPBoxes command.
- 1507 -
Constraints
l The domain name must belong to this domain account, and to this Web hosting
account.
Input parameters

Web hosting account to retrieve POP

mailbox list for

SLD Optional enom in enom.com) for which you want a 63
list of POP mailboxes
Top-level domain name (extension) for

TLD Optional 15
which you want a list of POP mailboxes
Return the storage allocation for this

GetQuota Web hosting account? Permitted values 15
1
are 0 and 1

- 1508 -

UserNameX
Responses in HTML or text format are Email alias for this POP mailbox
numbered, X=1 to POPCount
DomainNameX Domain this POP mailbox is associated with
Disk space in MB for this Web hosting account; can be

QuotaX
upgraded
POPCount Total number of POP mailboxes in this Web hosting account

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves a list of POP mailboxes for Web hosting account resell-
Query
command=WEBHOSTGETPOPBOXES&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
hostaccount=resellwebid&sld=resellerdocs&tld=com&
responsetype=xml
- 1509 -

Output

<PopRecords>
<PopRecord>
<UserName>123456789a</UserName>
<Quota>20</Quota>
</PopRecord>
<PopRecord>
<UserName>123456789012</UserName>
<Quota>20</Quota>
</PopRecord>
<PopRecord>
<UserName>12345678901234567890</UserName>
<Quota>20</Quota>
</PopRecord>
.
.
.
<PopRecord>
<UserName>poptest3</UserName>
<Quota>20</Quota>
</PopRecord>
<PopCount>10</PopCount>
</PopRecords>
<Command>WEBHOSTGETPOPBOXES</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
- 1510 -
</debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainHeader
l CreateHostAccount
l GetDomainHeader
l ListDomainHeaders
WebHostGetResellerPackages
Description
Definition
Retrieves the current configuration of Web hosting packages offered by a reseller
account.
Usage
Use this command to display the current configuration of Web hosting packages for an
account.
Availability
The Set Packages table displays the results of the WebHostGetResellerPackages com-
mand.
- 1511 -
Constraints
Input parameters



PackageID ID number of this package
PackageName Name of this package
BandwidthGB Bandwidth available to this package, in G
WebStorageMB Web storage available for this package, in MB
DatabaseTypeID ID number of the type of database provided with this package
DatabaseType Type of database provided with this package
ID number of the operating system of the Web server for this

OSTypeID
package
OSType The operating system of the Web server for this package
DBStorageMB Database storage available for this package, in MB
- 1512 -
POPMailboxes Number of POP mailboxes permitted in this package
DomainHeaders Number of domain headers permitted in this package
Enabled Enabled status of this package

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves the reseller Web hosting packages for domain account
resellid and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=WebHostGetResellerPackages&uid=resellid&
In the response, data on Web hosting packages, and an error count 0, indicate that the
Output
- 1513 -

<HostPackages>
<HostPackage>
<PackageID />
<DatabaseType>Access</DatabaseType>
</HostPackage>
<HostPackage>
<PackageID />
<PackageName>Gold</PackageName>
</HostPackage>
<HostPackage>
<PackageID />
<PackageName>Platinum</PackageName>
- 1514 -
</HostPackage>
</HostPackages>
<Command>WEBHOSTGETRESELLERPACKAGES</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l HostPackageDefine
l HostPackageDelete
l HostPackageModify
l HostPackageView
l WebHostGetCartItem
- 1515 -
WebHostGetStats
Description
Definition
Retrieve the usage statistics for a Web hosting account, for a month you specify in the
query string.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve day-by-day usage statistics for a Web hosting account.
This command allows monitoring of usage patterns, which is most likely to be useful
when a customer inquires about bandwidth overage charges.
To retrieve usage-to-date for the current month, use the GetHostAccount command.
To retrieve bandwidth overages for end-of-month account reconciliation, use the
GetHostOverages command.
Availability
Log on to webhostingtest.ehostservices.com with Login ID resellid, password
resellpw.
http://webhostingtest.ehost-services.com/Default.asp?
The Hosting Package Overview shows the results of the WebHostGetStats command.
Constraints
Input parameters
- 1516 -

Month for which you want usage stat-

istics. Permitted value is a number in M
Month Required or MM format. If you specify the current 2
month, the return gives information for
each day to date this month.
Year for which you want usage statistics.

Year Required Permitted value is a number in YYYY 4
format.


ReportDate Month
UsedBandWidthMB Web server bandwidth used this month
Hits Number of hits on this domain name
HTMLHits Number of hits on this HTML page
ImageHits Number of hits on images
UniqueIPs Number of unique IPs that hit this Web hosting account
HTMLBandwidthMB Amount of HTML bandwidth used this month
ImageBandwidthMB Amount of bandwidth used to display images this month

ErrCount

Err(x)
- 1517 -
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves usage information for Web hosting account resellwebid, for
November 2008, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=WEBHOSTGETSTATS&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
hostaccount=resellwebid&month=11&year=2008&responsetype=xml

Output

<HostStatistics>
<ReportDate>12/25/2008</ReportDate>
<UsedBandwidthMB>2</UsedBandwidthMB>
<Hits>2376</Hits>
<HtmlHits>1298</HtmlHits>
<ImageHits>937</ImageHits>
<UniqueIPs>34</UniqueIPs>
<HTMLBandwidthMB>1</HTMLBandwidthMB>
<ImageBandwidthMB>1</ImageBandwidthMB>
<Errors>53</Errors>
</HostStatistics>
- 1518 -
<Command>WEBHOSTGETSTATS</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l GetStorageUsage
WebHostHelpInfo
Description
Definition
Retrieve host records for email and name and IP of the Web hosting server for a Web
hosting account.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve host records used in email applications.
Use this command to retrieve the name and IP address of the Web hosting server for a
Web hosting account.
Availability
- 1519 -
Constraints
Input parameters



Name of the first domain that was associated with this Web
DomainName
hosting account
POPCName Host record for setting POP mail destination
SMTPCName Host record for setting SMTP destination
WebMailCName Host record for setting Web mail destination
MXCName Host record for setting MX (EasyMail) destination
- 1520 -
Number of host records for DomainName, including www but
HostRecordCount
not @
HostName Name of the Web hosting server for HostAccount
URI to Web hosting account. Format is HostName.ehostser-

HostURI
vicesNNN.com
ServerIP IP address of the Web hosting server for HostAccount
IISSiteID IIS site ID number
BaseURL Base URL
Version Version
AvailableServer IP address to this Web hosting server
ServerType Operating system of this Web hosting server
WebHostID Identification number of this Web hosting server account
LanguageCountryID Identification number of this language/country
LanguageDesc Name of this language-country pair
CountryDesc Name of this country
LanguageCode Code for this language
CountryCode Code for this country
HasWSC Does this Web hosting account include WSC?
WSCVersion What version of WSC does this Web hosting account include?
Launch URL for the WSC account attached to this Web host-
WSCLaunchURL
ing account
AccountName Account name of this Web hosting account
Password Password for this Web hosting account
FTPRoot Root FTP folder for this Web hosting account
FTPHost Address of the FTP server for this Web hosting account
VersionID Version identification number
WebSiteID Web site identification number
UILanguageCountryCode Languagecountry code for UI text
- 1521 -
UILanguage Language for UI
ProductID Product identification number
HasFTPConfig
WhiteLableName
ProductName Product name
ProdType Product identification number
Price Wholesale price you pay for this product
CurrentVersion Is this the current version?

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves host records for email, and addresses for uploading Web
site content, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
- 1522 -
command=webhosthelpinfo&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
hostaccount=resellwebid&responsetype=xml
The response lists host records for setting up email, and addresses for uploading Web
site content. The ErrCount value 0 confirms that the query was successful:
Output

<HelpInfo>
<hostrecords>
<domainhostrecord>
<popCname>pop.name-services.com</popCname>
<smtpCname>smtp.name-services.com</smtpCname>
<webmailCname>webmail.name-services.com</webmailCname>
<mxCname>smtp.name-services.com</mxCname>
</domainhostrecord>
</hostrecords>
<hostrecordcount>1</hostrecordcount>
<HostName>web1test</HostName>
</HelpInfo>
<Command>WEBHOSTHELPINFO</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
- 1523 -
Related commands
WebHostSetCustomPackage
Description
Definition
Upgrade an existing Web hosting account by increasing the bandwidth, Web storage,
database storage, and/or POP mail boxes allotted to it.
Usage
Use this command to upgrade an existing Web hosting account.
Note: If you do your own billing, you should scan all Web hosting accounts on a monthly
basis to confirm that your billing reflects any upgrades customers have chosen.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/wsg/hostingdetail.asp?HostAccount=resellwebid
In the HOSTING ACCOUNT UPGRADES section, the menu boxes show the upgrades
that are available. Once you get a quote for an upgrade, the upgrade me now button
appears, which calls the WebHostSetCustomPackage command.
Constraints
- 1524 -
Input parameters


enom in enom.com)

tains 20GB; permitted values are 1 to
150 units (for a maximum of 3000GB).

WebStorageUnits Required 2
contains 1GB; permitted values are 1 to
400 units (for a maximum of 400GB).
Type of database storage to offer with

this Web hosting package. Permitted val-
DBType Required ues are Access or MSSQL if the hosting 6
account is Windows; Access if the host-
ing account is Linux.

to include in this Web hosting package.
Required if
DBStorageUnits Each unit contains 250MB; permitted val- 2
DBType= MSSQL
ues are 1 to 30 units (for a maximum of
7500MB).

POPUnits Required tains 10 email boxes; permitted values 2
are 1 to 10 units (for a maximum of 100
mailboxes).
Extra POP storage, in MB, to be shared

among all POP mailboxes in this
POPStorageUnits Optional 2
account. Permitted values are 20, 40, 60,
80, 100, 200, 300, 400, and 500.
- 1525 -

Which WebSiteCreator (WSC) package
to select. Permitted values are:
WSCOption Optional 90 WSC Basic 2
91 WSC Full
92 WSC ECommerce
Billing cycle, in months, for this Web

BillingPeriod Optional hosting account. Permitted values are 1, 2
3, 6, and 12


IISSiteID Identification number of our IIS server
Version IIS version
Number of bandwidth units to include in this Web hosting pack-

BandwidthUnits age. Each unit contains 1GB; maximum permitted is 30 units
(30GB).
Number of Web storage units to include in this Web hosting

WebStorageUnits package. Each unit contains 50MB; maximum permitted is 10
units (500MB).
Number of SQL database storage units to include in this Web

DBStorageUnits hosting package. Each unit contains 50MB; maximum per-
mitted is 10 units (500MB).
Number of POP email units to include in this Web hosting pack-

POPUnits age. Each unit contains 10 email boxes; maximum permitted is
10 units (a total of 100 mailboxes).
Number of POP email storage units shared among all mail-

POPStorageUnits
boxes attached to this Web hosting account
Price New monthly fee for this reconfigured package
- 1526 -
Success Success status for this change
True indicates that bandwidth, Web storage, POP units, POP

storage, database type, or database storage for this Web host-
PackageUpdated
ing account was updated successfully. A return value False
includes error messages stating the nature of any errors
True indicates that the billing period for this Web hosting
UpdateBillingPeriod
account was updated successfully
True indicates that the database for this Web hosting account
UpdateDatabase
was upgraded successfully.
True indicates that the WSC subscription attached to this Web

UpdateWSC
hosting account was updated successfully.
WSCOption New WSC package, if changed
WSCAccountID New WSC identification number, if changed

Terminate

TerminateDate
has been set
Language Language of this API response

ErrCount

Err(x)
ResponseCount Number of errors in this response
MinPeriod For domain names, shortest period this TLD may be registered
MaxPeriod For domain names, longest period this TLD may be registered
Server API server that processed this query
Site Web site through which this query was submitted
For domain names, is this a TLD that permits a Registrar

IsLockable
Lock?
For domain names, is this a TLD that offers automated, near-

IsRealTimeTLD
instant registration?
TimeDifference Time difference between the source IP for this query and the
- 1527 -
API server that processed it
ExecTime Time required to execute this query

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query adds bandwidth and POP mailboxes to an existing Web hosting
account, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=WEBHOSTSETCUSTOMPACKAGE&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
hostaccount=resellwebid&WebStorageUnits=5&
BandWidthUnits=3&DBType=mssql&DBStorageUnits=1&
PopUnits=7&responsetype=xml
The response lists the new configuration of this Web hosting account. The Pack-
ageUpdated value True and the ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was successful:
Output

<SetCustomPackage>
<BandWidthUnits>3</BandWidthUnits>
- 1528 -
<Price>9.70</Price>
<PackageUpdated>True</PackageUpdated>
</SetCustomPackage>
<Command>WEBHOSTSETCUSTOMPACKAGE</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
l HostPackageDefine
l HostPackageModify
l HostPackageView
WebHostSetOverageOptions
Description
Definition
For a Web hosting account, choose how bandwidth overages are to be handled.
- 1529 -
Usage
Use this command to set the bandwidth-overage option for a Web hosting account.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/wsg/hostingconfig.asp?
In Step 2, the option buttons set the value for the WebHostSetOverageOptions com-
mand.
Constraints
Input parameters

ID number of the Web hosting package

to set bandwidth overage options for. To
WebHostID Required 8
retrieve the WebHostID value, use the
GetHostAccount command.
Bandwidth overage handling option to

assign to this Web hosting account. To
OptionID Required retrieve permitted values and their 2
descriptions, use the WebHostGetOver-
ageOptions command.
- 1530 -


WebHostID ID number of this Web hosting package
OptionID ID number of bandwidthoverage option
OptionUpdated Success status of this update

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query requests bandwidth-overage-handling options, and sends the
Query
command=webhostsetoverageoptions&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
- 1531 -
WebHostID=715&OptionID=1&responsetype=xml
In the response, a list of options for handling bandwidth overages indicates that the
Output

<SetOverageOptions>
<OptionUpdated>True</OptionUpdated>
</SetOverageOptions>
<Command>WEBHOSTSETOVERAGEOPTIONS</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CreateHostAccount
l GetHostAccount
l GetStorageUsage
l HostPackageDefine
l HostPackageDelete
l HostPackageModify
- 1532 -
l HostPackageView
l HostParkingPage
WebHostUpdatePassword
Description
Definition
Change the password to a Web hosting account.
Usage
Use this command to change the password used to log on to the Web hosting control
panel. The password to the domain name account does not change.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/wsg/hostingdetail.asp?HostAccount=resellwebid
In the HOSTING ACCOUNT NAME section, the save changes button calls the
WebHostUpdatePassword command.
Constraints
- 1533 -
Input parameters

New password for the Web hosting

NewHostPW Required 14
account
New password for the Web hosting

ConfirmNewHostPW Required 14
account


PasswordUpdated Success status of this update
Language Language of response

ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully
- 1534 -
Notes
Example
The following query changes the Web hosting password (used to login on to the Web
hosting control panel; the password to the domain name account does not change) and
Query
command=WebHostUpdatePassword&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
hostaccount=resellwebid&NewHostPW=resellwebnewpw&
ConfirmNewHostPW=resellwebnewpw&responsetype=xml
In the response, the PasswordUpdated value True confirms that the query was suc-
cessful:
Output

<UpdateHostPassword>
<PasswordUpdated>True</PasswordUpdated>
</UpdateHostPassword>
<Command>WEBHOSTUPDATEPASSWORD</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
- 1535 -
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l CancelHostAccount
l GetHostAccount
WebHostUpdatePOPPassword
Description
Definition
Change the password for a POP mailbox in a Web hosting package.
Usage
Use this command to change the password for a POP mailbox in a Web hosting pack-
age. To change the password for a POP mailbox associated with a domain account, use
one of the POP commands in our domain account API catalog.
Availability
resellwebpw.
The SAVE ALL CHANGES button calls the WebHostUpdatePOPPassword command.
- 1536 -
Constraints
l The domain name must be associated with this Web hosting account.
Input parameters

Name of the Web hosting account that

HostAccount Required contains the POP mailbox for which you 14
want to change the password
Email alias of the POP mailbox for which

you want to change the password. For
UserName Required example, if the email address is john.- 50
doe@resellerdocs.com, supply User-
Name=john.doe
Should UserName have administrative

with this domain name in this Web host-
ing account? Administrative privileges
allow this user to reset the password for
Either IsAdmin or mailboxes, and delete mailboxes. Per-
NewPassword is mitted values are: 0 Regular user (can
IsAdmin Required. They change the password for their own mail- 1
may be used box but no one elses) 1 Administrator
together. (when this user logs on to Webmail and
goes to the admin page, he or she can
see all mailboxes for this domain name in
this Web hosting account, can reset
passwords for any or all mailboxes, and
can delete any or all mailboxes)
- 1537 -

Either IsAdmin or
NewPassword is
NewPassword Required. They New password for UserName mailbox 50
may be used
together.

SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)



ErrCount

Err(x)

Done
cessfully
Notes
Example
The following query changes the password of POP mailbox poptest3 to poptest3a and
Query
- 1538 -
command=WEBHOSTUPDATEPOPPASSWORD&uid=resellid&
pw=resellpw&hostaccount=resellwebid&Username=poptest3&
NewPassword=POPTEST3a&sld=resellerdocs&
tld=com&responsetype=xml
Output

<Command>WEBHOSTUPDATEPOPPASSWORD</Command>
<Site>enom</Site>
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddDomainHeader
l CreateHostAccount
l GetDomainHeader
l ListHostHeaders
- 1539 -
WSC_GetAccountInfo
Description
Definition
Retrieve the information for a Web Site Creator (WSC) account, including the URL for
this account to link to the WSC wizard.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve information about a Web hosting account that includes
WSC, or a stand-alone WSC account.
This command retrieves the URL to the Web site creation wizard for this WSC account.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/websitecreator/websitecreator_manage.asp?
In the pane for each account, the account-specific information is provided by the WSC_
GetAccountInfo command.
Constraints
l The query must meet the following requirements:
l The Web hosting or WSC stand-alone account must belong to this domain name
account.
Input parameters
- 1540 -

Name of Web hosting or WSC stand-

alone accounts. Use the WSC_
Account Required GetAllPackages command to retrieve a 14
list of Web hosting accounts with WSC,
and WSC stand-alone accounts.
Language in which to launch the WSC

Optional; default is wizard. Permitted values are: Eng Eng-
Language 1
Eng lish Spa Spanish Ger German Por Por-
tuguese Fre French Ita Italian


Individual identification number for this Web hosting or WSC
WebHostID
stand-alone account
The individual account name of this Web hosting or WSC

HostAccount
stand-alone account
WebStorage Storage space available to this account
BandWidth Monthly bandwidth available to this account
SQLSize Database space available to this account
DatabaseType Type of database configured for this account
POPMailboxes POP mailboxes for this account
Overage Overage option for this account
BillingDate Billing date of this account
Status Active status of this account
Operating system of our server on which your WSC account

OSType
resides
Terminate Is this account flagged for termination?
- 1541 -
TerminateDate If flagged for termination, on what date?
HasWSC Does this account have WSC?
WSCEnabled Is WSC enabled for this account?
WSCLaunchURL The URL for the WSC wizard for this account
WSCCountry The country for the WSC wizard for this account
WSCLanguage The language for the WSC wizard for this account
CurrentPlanPrice Monthly price for WSC
CanUpgrade Is this account eligible for upgrade?
WSCFullPrice Price for WSC Full
WSCECommercePrice Price for WSC eCommerce
WSCVersion WSC version
HostHeaderDomains Host header domains
HasHostHeaders Do these domains have host headers?
Return value WSC indicates that this is a Web hosting

WSCPath
account that subscribes to WSC
SiteURL URL of the WSC-built Web Site for this account
IsLWSC Is this a WSC Lite free account?
WSCSiteID Our identification number for this WSC site
PointedTo Is the WSC-built Web site pointing to SiteURL?
EmailAddress Email address of WSC account subscriber
HTTPURL Domain name tied to WSC
NextBillPeriod Next billing period
For multi-month discounts, the number of months customer

Month
pays for to receive this discount
PromoID For multi-month discounts, the promo code for this discount
DiscountPercent For multi-month discounts, the discount percentage
DiscountPlanCnt Number of discount plans listed here
- 1542 -
CanUpdate Can this billing period be changed?
DeleteDate Scheduled delete date for this WSC Web site
AvailableHeaderDomains Scheduled delete date for this WSC Web site
AvailableDomainList Scheduled delete date for this WSC Web site
AvailableDomainCount Scheduled delete date for this WSC Web site
Language Language of the WebSite Creator wizard

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves information about one Web hosting account that includes
WSC, or one WSC standalone account, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=WSC_GETACCOUNTINFO&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
account=LWSC123x4567&responsetype=xml

Output
- 1543 -

<WSCHostAccounts>
<HostPackage>
<HostAccount>LWSC123x4567</HostAccount>
<WebStorage />
<BandWidth />
<SQLSize />
<DatabaseType />
<POPMailBoxes />
<Overage />
<OSType />
<TerminateDate />
<HasWSC>True</HasWSC>
<WSCEnabled>True</WSCEnabled>
<WSCLaunchURL>
http://wsc.ehost-services.com/servlet/
CMWizardLN?flush=F7480EBA6798052499D1BA835B436021
</WSCLaunchURL>
<currentplanprice>15.05</currentplanprice>
<canupgrade>False</canupgrade>
<wscfullprice />
<wscecommerceprice />
<wscversion>Ecommerce</wscversion>
<HostHeaderDomains>
<Domains>
<WSCOnlyHeaders>True</WSCOnlyHeaders>
<HasPOP>True</HasPOP>
</Domains>
<Domains>
<Domain>resellerdocs2.net</Domain>
<HasPOP>False</HasPOP>
</Domains>
<Domains>
- 1544 -
<Domain>resellerdocs3.info</Domain>
</Domains>
</HostHeaderDomains>
<hashostheaders>True</hashostheaders>
<wscpath>WSC</wscpath>
<siteurl>http://www.resellerdocs.com</siteurl>
<IsLWSC>False</IsLWSC>
<wscsiteid>100</wscsiteid>
<PointedTo>True</PointedTo>
<lwscperiodicbilling>
<currentbillperiod />
<nextbillperiod />
<DiscountPlans>
<Plan>
<Month>3</Month>
<PromoID>53</PromoID>
<DiscountPercent>10</DiscountPercent>
</Plan>
<Plan>
<Month>6</Month>
</Plan>
<Plan>
<Month>12</Month>
</Plan>
</DiscountPlans>
<DiscountPlanCnt>3</DiscountPlanCnt>
<CanUpdate>True</CanUpdate>
<deletedate />
</lwscperiodicbilling>
</HostPackage>
<AvailableHeaderDomains />
<availabledomainlist>False</availabledomainlist>
<availabledomaincount>836</availabledomaincount>
</WSCHostAccounts>
<Command>WSC_GETACCOUNTINFO</Command>
- 1545 -
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddToCart
l GetAllDomains
l PurchaseServices
l WSC_GetPricing
l WSC_Update_Ops
WSC_GetAllPackages
Description
Definition
Retrieve a list of all Web hosting packages that include WSC, and all WSC stand-alone
accounts.
Usage
Use this command to list all Web hosting packages that include WSC, and all WSC
stand-alone accounts, in a domain name account. The response includes a variety of
information about each WSC account, including the URL to launch the WSC site-build-
ing wizard for this account.
- 1546 -
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/websitecreator/websitecreator_manage.asp?
The account information on this page is provided by the WSC_GetAllPackages com-
mand.
Constraints
Input parameters

Include URL to launch WSC wizard in

GetLaunchURL response? Permitted values are 1 to 1
pan>
include URL, 0 to omit.


WebHostID Individual identification number for this Web hosting or WSC
- 1547 -
stand-alone account
The individual account name of this Web hosting or WSC

HostAccount
stand-alone account
WebStorage Storage space available to this account
BandWidth Monthly bandwidth available to this account
SQLSize Database space available to this account
DatabaseType Type of database configured for this account
POPMailboxes POP mailboxes for this account
Overage Overage option for this account
BillingDate Billing date of this account
Status Active status of this account
Operating system of our server on which your Web hosting

OSType
account resides
Terminate Is this account flagged for termination?
TerminateDate If flagged for termination, on what date?
HasWSC Does this account have WSC?
WSCEnabled Is WSC enabled for this account?
WSCLaunchURL The URL for the WSC wizard for this account
CurrentPlanPrice Monthly price for WSC
CanUpgrade Is this account eligible for upgrade?
WSCFullPrice Price for WSC Full
WSCECommercePrice Price for WSC eCommerce
WSCVersion WSC version
Domain Name of domain associated with this account
DomainNameID Our identification number for this domain name
WSCOnlyHeaders Is this domain associated with the WSC Web site?
HasPOP Does this domain have POP email associated with it?
HasHostHeaders Do these domains have host headers?
- 1548 -
Return value WSC indicates that this is a Web hosting
WSCPath
account that subscribes to WSC
SiteURL URL of the WSC-built Web site for this account
IsLWSC Is this a WSC Lite free account?
PointedTo Is the WSC-built Web site pointing to SiteURL?
EmailAddress Email address of WSC subscriber
HTTPURL Domain name associated with this WSC account
CurrentBillPeriod Current billing period
NextBillPeriod Next billing period
For multi-month discounts, the number of months customer

Month
pays for to receive this discount
PromoID For multi-month discounts, the promo code for this discount
DiscountPercent For multi-month discounts, the discount percentage
DiscountPlanCnt Number of discount plans listed here
CanUpdate Can this billing period be changed?
DeleteDate Scheduled delete date for this WSC Web site

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
- 1549 -
Example
The following query retrieves a list of Web hosting accounts that include WSC, and
WSC stand-alone accounts, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=WSC_GETALLPACKAGES&
uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&responsetype=xml
The response includes a wide variety of information on each Web hosting account that
include WSC, and WSC stand-alone account:
Output

<WSCHostAccounts>
<HostPackage>
<HostAccount>test121406</HostAccount>
<WebStorage />
<BandWidth />
<SQLSize />
<DatabaseType />
<POPMailBoxes />
<Overage />
<OSType />
<TerminateDate />
<HasWSC>True</HasWSC>
<WSCEnabled>True</WSCEnabled>
<WSCLaunchURL>
http://wsc.ehost-services.com/servlet/
CMWizardLN?flush=7D2643832113A75809908A9F1913DC72
</WSCLaunchURL>
<currentplanprice>15.05</currentplanprice>
<canupgrade>False</canupgrade>
- 1550 -
<wscfullprice />
<wscecommerceprice />
<wscversion>Ecommerce</wscversion>
<HostHeaderDomains>
<Domains>
</Domains>
<Domains>
<Domain>resellerdocs2.net</Domain>
<HasPOP>False</HasPOP>
</Domains>
<Domains>
<Domain>resellerdocs3.info</Domain>
</Domains>
</HostHeaderDomains>
<hashostheaders>True</hashostheaders>
<wscpath>WSC</wscpath>
<siteurl>http://www.resellerdocs.com</siteurl>
<IsLWSC>False</IsLWSC>
<wscsiteid>100</wscsiteid>
<PointedTo>True</PointedTo>
<lwscperiodicbilling>
<currentbillperiod />
<nextbillperiod />
<DiscountPlans>
<Plan>
<Month>3</Month>
</Plan>
<Plan>
<Month>6</Month>
- 1551 -
</Plan>
<Plan>
<Month>12</Month>
</Plan>
</DiscountPlans>
<DiscountPlanCnt>3</DiscountPlanCnt>
<CanUpdate>True</CanUpdate>
<deletedate />
</lwscperiodicbilling>
</HostPackage>
.
.
.
Related commands
l AddToCart
l GetAllDomains
l PurchaseServices
l WSC_GetPricing
l WSC_Update_Ops
WSC_GetPricing
Description
Definition
Retrieve this accounts wholesale costs or retail prices for Web Site Creator (WSC), and
the URL for our WSC demo.
Usage
Use this command to retrieve the prices this account pays for WSC, or the prices this
account charges retail customers.
Use this command to retrieve the URL to our WSC demo.
- 1552 -
Package names that begin with WSC offer WSC as part of a Web hosting package
your customer can build one Web site using the Web Site Creator wizard and in addition
have up to 49 other Web sites hosted through the same package. Package names that
begin with LWSC offera single Web site: the one built in the WSC wizard.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/myaccount/hostingpricing.asp?tab=webhosting
In the Web Site Creator Pricing table, the My Total Cost (WSC + Hosting) column shows
the same return values as the WSC_GetPricing command used in the wholesale price
mode. The Total Price (WSC + Hosting) column shows the return values when GetRe-
tail=true.
https://resellertest.enom.com/myaccount/ProductPricing.asp?tab=domainaddons
In the web tools table, the Your Cost column shows the same return values as the WSC_
GetPricing command used in the wholesale price mode. The Price column shows the
return values when GetRetail=true.
Constraints
Input parameters

- 1553 -

Get prices this account charges to retail
customers? Permitted value is true. Any
GetRetai Optional other value, or not using this parameter, 4
returns prices this account pays for
WSC.
In what language should the WSC wizard

launch? Permitted values are: Eng Eng-
lish
Optional; default is Fre French
Language 4
Eng Ger German
Ita Italian
Por Portuguese
Spa Spanish


This accounts wholesale cost or retail price for the WSC
WSCBasicPrice
Basic package, as an add-on to a Web hosting package
This accounts wholesale cost or retail price for the WSC Full
WSCFullPrice
package, as an add-on to a Web hosting package

WSCECommercePrice
eCommerce package, as a stand-alone product

LWSCBasicPrice
Basic stand-alone package (supports only the WSC Web site)
This accounts wholesale cost or retail price for the WSC Full
LWSCFullPrice
stand-alone package

LWSCECommercePrice
eCommerce standalone package
WSCDemoURL URL of our Web Site Creator demo

ErrCount

ErrX
- 1554 -
Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query retrieves this accounts wholesale costs for Web Site Creator pack-
ages, and sends the response in XML format:
Query
command=WSC_GETPRICING&uid=resellid&
In the response, WSC prices and an ErrCount value 0 confirm that the query was suc-
cessful:
Output

<wscpricing>
<wscbasicprice>2.85</wscbasicprice>
<wscfullprice>5.75</wscfullprice>
<wscecommerceprice>9.25</wscecommerceprice>
<lwscbasicprice>2.85</lwscbasicprice>
<lwscfullprice>5.75</lwscfullprice>
<lwscecommerceprice>11.75</lwscecommerceprice>
</wscpricing>
<wscdemo>
<wscdemourl>
- 1555 -
http://wsc.ehost-services.com/create_demo_accoun-
t.jsp?productId=
WSCENOSSSLYTC215&cli-
entId=RRENOS999JZT4SYQ&language=en&country=US&
wl_name=wl_enom&demoCallbackUrl=
</wscdemourl>
</wscdemo>
<Command>WSC_GETPRICING</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
<debug>
<![CDATA[ ]]>
</debug>
Related commands
l AddToCart
l GetAllDomains
l PurchaseServices
l WSC_Update_Ops
WSC_Update_Ops
Description
Definition
Upgrade Web Site Creator.
- 1556 -
Usage
Use this command to upgrade Web Site Creator stand-alone accounts (Web hosting
accounts with account names using format LWSCNNNxNNNN), that are at least Lite
Basic. The following table lays out the upgrade path for WSC stand-alone products (Lite,
Lite Basic, Lite Full, and Lite eCommerce):
AND PURCHASE USE THIS

IF YOU HAVE: AND WANT:
IN THIS WAY: COMMAND:
No purchase necessary for
No WSC WSC Lite ServiceSelect
WSC Lite
Lite Basic
No WSC Lite Full Real time PurchaseServices
Lite eCommerce
Lite Basic ServiceSelect to create Lite,

No WSC Lite Full Shopping cart then AddToCart to upgrade to
Lite eCommerce higher plan
WSC_Update_Ops in the last

Lite Basic Upgrade to a Billing amount is deducted
month of the current billing
Lite Full higher plan from your account balance
cycle
Lite Basic WSC_Update_Ops in the last

Change to a dif- Billing amount is deducted
Lite Full month of the current billing
ferent billing cycle from your account balance
Lite eCommerce cycle
To upgrade Web Site Creator within a Web hosting account (Web hosting accounts with
names that do not begin with LWSC), use the WebHostSetCustomPackage command.
You cannot downgrade Web Site Creator from a higher to a lower version.
Availability
https://resellertest.enom.com/websitecreator/websitecreator_manage.asp
The upgrade now button calls the WSC_Update_Ops command.
Constraints
- 1557 -

l The Web Site Creator account must belong to this domain name account.
l You can only use this command in the last 30 days of the current billing cycle.
l You can only upgrade Lite Basic and Lite Full plans with this command. See
Usage section above.
l You can change the billing cycle with this command, with or without upgrading the
plan.
Input parameters

Name of LWSC account. Must be an

Account Required account name with format 14
LWSCNNNxNNNN
Level of service you want. Your current

plan must be at least Lite Basic (you
must use PurchaseServices or
AddToCart to upgrade from Lite to a
Optional; default is higher plan). Permitted values are:
NewLWSCPlan 2
current plan LWSCBasic
LWSCFull
LWSCECommerce
You can upgrade the plan when you are
within 30 days of the next billing date.
Billing period, in months. Permitted val-

ues are 1, 3, 6, or 12. You can change
LWSCBillCycle current billing cycle 2
the billing period when you are within 30
days of the next billing date.

- 1558 -

Enter Returned parameter and values here.
AccountStatusID 1 indicates a valid, active account.
Successful True indicates that the query executed successfully
PlanUpdated True indicates that the LWSC plan was successfully upgraded
True indicates that the LWSC billing cycle was successfully

BillingCycleUpdated
changed

ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
Notes
Example
The following query upgrades Web Site Creator to eCommerce and sends the response
in XML format:
Query
- 1559 -
command=WSC_Update_Ops&uid=resellid&pw=resellpw&
Account=LWSC337x8128&NewLWSCPlan=LWSCEcommerce&
LWSCBillCycle=6&ResponseType=XML
Output
<?xml version="1.0" ?><interface-response>

<PlanUpdated>True</PlanUpdated>
<BillingCycleUpdated>True</BillingCycleUpdated>
<Command>WSC_UPDATE_OPS</Command>
<MinPeriod />
<Site>enom</Site>
<IsLockable />
<IsRealTimeTLD />
<Done>true</Done>
Related commands
l AddToCart
l Purchase
l PurchaseServices ServiceSelect
l WSC_GetPricing
- 1560 -
XXX_GetMemberId
Description
Definition
Get the Member Authorization Token for a XXX domain name.
Usage
Availability
Go to the General Settings.
Constraints
Input parameters

- 1561 -


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
DomainNameID Domain Name ID.
MemberID Member Authorization Token
Notes
Example
The following query get the member authorization token for a domain name from the
Registry, and requests the response in XML format:
Query
- 1562 -
Command=XXX_GETMEMBERID&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw
&ResponseType=XML&sld=resellertest&tld=xxx
Output

<DomainNameID>
<![CDATA[ 152932175 ]]>
</DomainNameID>
<MemberID>
<![CDATA[ IXS1YFK0R185PZVA ]]>
</MemberID>
<Success>
<![CDATA[ True ]]>
</Success>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ XXX_GETMEMBERID ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 1 ]]>
</MinPeriod>
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
<![CDATA[ RESELLERTEST ]]>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ eNom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable>
- 1563 -
<![CDATA[ True ]]>

</IsLockable>
<IsRealTimeTLD>
<![CDATA[ True ]]>
</IsRealTimeTLD>
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +3.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 0.688 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
<![CDATA[ 85a5e50d-0425-4c9d-a795-25acc26d8c0a ]]>
</TrackingKey>
<RequestDateTime>
<![CDATA[ 12/5/2011 12:42:45 PM ]]>
</RequestDateTime>
Related commands
l XXX_RemoveMemberId
l XXX_SetMemberId
XXX_RemoveMemberId
Description
Definition
Removes the Member Authorization Token for a XXX domain name.
Usage
Availability
- 1564 -

XXX_RemoveMemberId is executed before user updating/removing Member Author-
ization Token value.
Constraints
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Member Authorization Token for domain

MEMBERID Required 16
name.

Text (default),HTML, or XML.
- 1565 -


ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
DomainName Domain Name.
Member Authorization Token (If this empty then the remove

MemberID
failed)
Notes
l If response MemberId is empty then the remove failed.
Example
Query
Command=XXX_REMOVEMEMBERID&UID=resellid&PW=resellpw
&ResponseType=XML&sld=resellertest&tld=xxx
&memberid=IXS1YFK0R185PZVA
Output
- 1566 -

<DomainNameID>
<![CDATA[ 152932175 ]]>
</DomainNameID>
<DomainName>
<![CDATA[ resellertest.xxx ]]>
</DomainNameID>
<MemberID>
</MemberID>
<Success>
<![CDATA[ True ]]>
</Success>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ XXX_GETMEMBERID ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 1 ]]>
</MinPeriod>
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ eNom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable>
<![CDATA[ True ]]>
</IsLockable>
<IsRealTimeTLD>
- 1567 -
<![CDATA[ True ]]>

</IsRealTimeTLD>
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +3.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 0.688 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
</TrackingKey>
<RequestDateTime>
<![CDATA[ 12/5/2011 12:42:45 PM ]]>
</RequestDateTime>
Related commands
l XXX_GetMemberId
l XXX_SetMemberId
XXX_SetMemberId
Description
Definition
Sets the Member Authorization Token for a XXX domain name.
Usage
Availability
- 1568 -

Implemenatation on eNom.com
Give the usage of the API command here

Constraints
l The member authorization token must belong to domain name.
Input parameters


SLD Required 63
enom in enom.com)
Member Authorization Token for domain

MEMBERID Required 16
name.
- 1569 -



ErrCount

ErrX

Done
cessfully.
MemberID Member Authorization Token
Notes
Example
Query
Command=XXX_SETMEMBERID&UID=resellid
&sld=resellertest&tld=xxx&memberid=IXS1YFK0R185PZVA
- 1570 -
Output

<DomainNameID>
<![CDATA[ 152932175 ]]>
</DomainNameID>
<MemberID>
</MemberID>
<Success>
<![CDATA[ True ]]>
</Success>
<Command>
<![CDATA[ XXX_SETMEMBERID ]]>
</Command>
<Language>
<![CDATA[ eng ]]>
</Language>
<ErrCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ErrCount>
<ResponseCount>
<![CDATA[ 0 ]]>
</ResponseCount>
<MinPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 1 ]]>
</MinPeriod>
<MaxPeriod>
<![CDATA[ 10 ]]>
</MaxPeriod>
<Server>
</Server>
<Site>
<![CDATA[ eNom ]]>
</Site>
<IsLockable>
<![CDATA[ True ]]>
</IsLockable>
<IsRealTimeTLD>
<![CDATA[ True ]]>
</IsRealTimeTLD>
- 1571 -
<TimeDifference>
<![CDATA[ +3.00 ]]>
</TimeDifference>
<ExecTime>
<![CDATA[ 0.688 ]]>
</ExecTime>
<Done>
<![CDATA[ true ]]>
</Done>
<debug />
<TrackingKey>
</TrackingKey>
<RequestDateTime>
<![CDATA[ 12/5/2011 12:42:45 PM ]]>
</RequestDateTime>
Related commands
l XXX_GetMemberId
l XXX_RemoveMemberId
- 1572 -

ENom API Reference

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationENom API Reference

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

ENom API Reference

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ENom API Reference

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

eNom API Reference

Using the eNom API

This document contains the reference for all of the

eNom API Reference - version 1.0

Selling and Managing Domains 2

Selling and Managing Domains

Why sell domain names?

Audience for this guide

If you use the AddToCart command

Help with implementation

Domain registration and management

7. Show details for one domain.

Task 1Decide which TLDs to offer

API Command Usage

Sample query strings:

Task 2Set pricing

Task 3Choose universal settings

Task 4Check domain names

API Command Usage

Retrieve a list of available domain names that are similar to the

Sample query strings:

Task 5Bill and register domain names

API command Usage

Check the processing status of TLDs that do not register in real

Sample query strings:

Purchase (with extended attributes and contact information)

Task 6List domain names and their statuses

API command Usage

Retrieve a list of this accounts domain names that are in

Sample query strings:

Task 7Retrieve status information

API command Usage

Sample query strings:

Task 8Manage Whois and other contacts

API command Usage

Contacts Set contact information for a domain name.

Retrieve all contact information for a domain name. This

Retrieve Whois contact information for a domain name. This

Sample query strings:

Contacts (for a domain name that requires extended attributes)

Task 9Set name servers

API command Usage

GetCusPreferences Retrieve the current universal settings for this account.

GetDNS Retrieve a list of the name servers associated with a domain

API command Usage

Sample query strings:

Task 10Set host records

API command Usage

GetCusPreferences Retrieve the current universal settings for this account.

SetHosts Set host records.

Retrieve a list of the current host record settings for a domain

Sample query strings:

Task 11Protect domain names from hijacking

API command Usage

GetCusPreferences Retrieve the current universal settings for this account.

SetRegLock Toggle Registrar-Lock on or off for a domain name.

GetRegLock Retrieve the current Registrar-Lock setting for a domain name.

Sample query strings: